Hyundai Accent GL Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1495cc 1.5L SOHC MFI (1997) )

Factory Workshop Manual
Make
Hyundai
Model
Accent Gl Sedan
Engine and year
L4-1495cc 1.5L SOHC MFI (1997)
Please navigate through the PDF using the options

provided by OnlyManuals.com on the sidebar.
This manual was submitted by

Anonymous
Date
1st January 2018
Hyundai Accent Gl Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1495cc 1.5L SOHC MFI (1997))
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Control
Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection
Power Mirror Control Module: Testing and Inspection
MIRROR ACTUATOR
INSPECTION
Apply battery voltage to each terminal as shown in the table, and confirm that the mirror operates
properly.
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > ABS Main Relay
> Component Information > Diagrams
ABS Main Relay: Diagrams
ABS relay box connector (M79, harness side)

> Component Information > Description and Operation > Fail Safe Relay, ABS / Traction Control
ABS Main Relay: Description and Operation Fail Safe Relay, ABS / Traction Control
Fail safe relay supplies battery voltage to the modulator. After the ignition switch is turned ON, the
relay goes on, if the initial check is good. If a problem occurs in the ABS system, the ABS Control
Module (ABSCM) disables the relay and the ABS is disabled.
> Component Information > Description and Operation > Fail Safe Relay, ABS / Traction Control > Page 13
ABS Main Relay: Description and Operation Motor Pump Relay
The motor pump relay supplies battery voltage to the motor pump. The ABS Control Module
(ABSCM) switches the motor relay ON and operates the ABS motor pump. If a problem occurs in
the ABS system, the ABSCM disables the motor pump relay.
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > ABS Control
Module <--> [Electronic Brake Control Module] > Component Information > Specifications > Electrical Specifications
ABS Control Module: Electrical Specifications
Operating voltage range ......................................................................................................................

.......................................................... 9.0 - 16.2 Volts Power consumption .........................................
........................................................................................................................................... 150 mA or
below Control fuse ...............................................................................................................................
........................................................................................ 3A
Module <--> [Electronic Brake Control Module] > Component Information > Specifications > Electrical Specifications > Page
18
ABS Control Module: Pressure, Vacuum and Temperature Specifications
Operating temperature range ..............................................................................................................
................................................................ -4° to +80°C
Module <--> [Electronic Brake Control Module] > Component Information > Specifications > Page 19
M71 ABS Control Module

ABS Control Module: Diagrams
ABS control module connector (M71, harness side) I: Input O: Output F/SF: Fail Safe MIL:
Malfunction Indicator Light SRI: Service Reminder Indicator DLC: Data Link Connector
ABS Control Module: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Remove the right luggage side trim.
2. Remove the ABS Control Module (ABSCM) mounting bolts and ABSCM.
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor
Relay > Component Information > Locations
Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay: Locations
E26 - Radiator fan relay E27 - Headlamp relay E28 - A/C relay E29 - Horn relay E30 - Tail lamp
relay E31 - Condenser fan relay
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component
Information > Locations
Blower Motor Relay: Locations
M17 - Starter relay M18 - Fuel pump relay M22 - Power window relay M23 - Blower relay
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component
Information > Locations > Page 30
Blower Motor Relay: Testing and Inspection
BLOWER FAN RELAY
1. Remove the battery ground cable. 2. Remove the rheostat switch with coin box from the crash
pad.
3. Remove the relay and check for continuity between the terminals.
If continuity is not as specified, replace the relay.

Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Compressor Clutch Relay >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection
Compressor Clutch Relay: Testing and Inspection
RELAYS AIR CONDITIONING RELAY AND CONDENSER FAN RELAY
1. Remove the battery ground cable. 2. Remove the cover of relay box located in engine
compartment.
3. Remove the relays from relay box. 4. Check for continuity or voltage between the terminals.
AIR CONDITIONING RELAY-check for continuity
If continuity is not as specified, replace the relay

Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Condenser Fan Motor Relay, HVAC >
Component Information > Locations
Condenser Fan Motor Relay: Locations
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Condenser Fan Motor Relay, HVAC >
Component Information > Locations > Page 37
Condenser Fan Motor Relay: Testing and Inspection
RELAYS AIR CONDITIONING RELAY AND CONDENSER FAN RELAY
1. Remove the battery ground cable. 2. Remove the cover of relay box located in engine
compartment.
3. Remove the relays from relay box. 4. Check for continuity or voltage between the terminals.
CONDENSER FAN RELAY-check for voltage
If continuity is not as specified, replace the relay

Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > System Relay, HVAC > Component
System Relay: Locations
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp Relay
> Component Information > Locations
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Relay >
Headlamp Relay: Locations
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Relay >
Component Information > Locations > Page 48
Headlamp Relay: Testing and Inspection
HEADLAMP RELAY
INSPECTION
1. Remove the head lamp and tail lamp relays from the engine compartment relay.
2. Check for continuity between the terminals.

Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Horn Relay > Component
Horn Relay: Locations
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp Relay >
Tail Lamp Relay: Locations
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box >
Component Information > Locations > Engine Compartment Relay/Fuse Box
Engine Compartment Relay/fuse Box

Component Information > Locations > Engine Compartment Relay/Fuse Box > Page 60
Component Information > Application and ID > Engine Compartment Relay/Fuse Box
Relay Box: Application and ID Engine Compartment Relay/Fuse Box
Engine Compartment Relay And Fuse Box - Layout
Engine Compartment Relay And Fuse Box - Circuit

Component Information > Application and ID > Engine Compartment Relay/Fuse Box > Page 63
Component Information > Application and ID > Page 64
Relay Box: Testing and Inspection
RELAY BOX (ENGINE COMPARTMENT)
INSPECTION
1. Check for a burnt fusible link with an ohmmeter (fusible link must be removed from holder prior
to testing). 2. If a fusible link burns out, there is a short or some other problem in the circuit.
Carefully determine the cause and correct it before replacing the
fusible link.
NOTE: The fusible link will burnout within 15 seconds if a higher current than specified flows
through the circuit.
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules
- Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins >
Customer Interest: > 00-40-009 > Aug > 00 > A/T - Shift Solenoid Incorrect Operation/MIL ON
Engine Control Module: Customer Interest A/T - Shift Solenoid Incorrect Operation/MIL ON
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 00-40-009
Date: AUGUST, 2000
Model: ALL
Subject: AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE SOLENOID DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES
DESCRIPTION: Incorrect operation of the transaxle solenoids may result in the following
symptoms:
^ Erratic shift
^ Transaxle held in 3rd gear Fail-Safe
^ Diagnostic Trouble Codes (see list in "DTC Information")
^ MIL illuminated
NOTE:
Do NOT replace the transaxle for solenoid codes listed as "Electrical Condition" in the "DTC
Information" section of this bulletin. Instead, follow the repair procedure shown below.
REPAIR PROCEDURE:
1. Using a Hi-Scan Pro, select: "Hyundai Vehicle Diagnosis" menu, "Automatic Transaxle" menu
and "Diagnostic Trouble Codes". Repeat the procedure and select "Engine" menu and "Diagnostic
Trouble Codes". Record the DTC and description.
NOTE:
Steps 2-5 are only for Elantra/Tiburon prior to 2001 MY and all Accents. For other models, go to
Step 6:
2. Clean the connection between the battery cables and the battery posts.
3. Clean the connection between the negative battery cable and the transaxle case. Reinstall the
cable.
NOTE:
This procedure is necessary because the solenoids ground through the transaxle case and
negative battery cable.
Customer Interest: > 00-40-009 > Aug > 00 > A/T - Shift Solenoid Incorrect Operation/MIL ON > Page 75
4. Clean the connection between the negative battery cable and the body ground bolt located next
to the battery. Apply conductive grease to the connection before reinstalling the bolt.
NOTE:
This procedure is necessary because the TCM grounds through this body ground.
5. Measure voltage drop:
^ Start the engine and turn on the headlights.
^ Use a digital voltmeter to measure the voltage drop between the negative battery terminal and
the ground locations in Steps 3 and 4 (use VDC setting). If the voltage drop is:
More than 0.1 volts: Replace the negative battery cable
Less than 0.1 volts: Go to Step 6
All models:
6. Disconnect the connectors between the solenoid and TCM. Check for bent pins or pins not fully
inserted in the connector. Repair as necessary.
NOTE:
Clean connector pins with a contact cleaner listed below, or equivalent:
^ NAPA Electronic Cleaner, P/N 765-1843
^ MOPAR MP-50 Electrical Contact Cleaner, P/N 04549626
^ Permatex Electrical Contact Cleaner, P/N 24379 or equivalent.

7. Check the wiring harness in the engine compartment and inside the transmission oil pan for a
damaged wire or a short circuit to ground.
8. Measure the resistance of the harness wires between the solenoid connector and TCM
connector. Refer to the appropriate ETM to find the correct pin terminals. If the resistance is:
^ More than 1 ohm: Repair the harness
^ Less than 1 ohm: Go to Step 9.
9. Refer to the DTC recorded in Step 1. If the DTC was:
^ Solenoid DTC, except P0740 or 49: Replace the related solenoid or solenoid assembly
^ DTC P0740 or 49: Replace the transaxle.

NOTE:
For 1999-2001 Sonata or 2001 Elantra, XG or Santa Fe, refer to the Automatic Transaxle Overhaul
Manual, Page 45D-51, to locate the related solenoid.
10. Clear the codes and test drive the vehicle for two driving cycles (two key-on to key-off driving
cycles, including 1-2-3-4 upshifts and 4-3-2-1 downshifts). If the DTC return, replace the TCM.
DTC INFORMATION: For your reference, the logic the TCM uses to set solenoid codes are listed.
DO NOT replace the transaxle for those codes listed as "Electrical Condition". Refer to the tables
for additional information.
TCM DTC - 1999-01 SONATA, 2001 ELANTRA, XG & SANTA FE
2000-01 ACCENT, 1999-00 ELANTRA (produced after 6/1/99):
TCM DTC - 1996-99 ELANTRA/TIBURON (PRIOR TO 6/1/99), & 1996-99 ACCENT:

TCM DTC - PRE-OBDII: ELANTRA, TIBURON AND ACCENT PRIOR TO 1996, 1995-98
SONATA:
ECM DTC - (1995-98) SONATA):
NOTE:
Only the 1996-98 Sonata has an ECM DTC that indicates a transaxle condition. If you find P0750
in the ECM, check the "Automatic Transaxle" menu for additional DTC information.
WARRANTY INFORMATION
Customer Interest: > 00-36-006 > Mar > 00 > TPS - Driveability Concerns
Engine Control Module: Customer Interest TPS - Driveability Concerns
Number 00-36-006
Group ENGINE ELECTRICAL
Date MARCH, 2000
Subject THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR (TPS) DRIVEABILITY SYMPTOMS
Model 1996-1999 ACCENT 1996-2000 ELANTRA 1997-2000 TIBURON
DESCRIPTION:
The Throttle Position Sensor (TPS) output signal is an important input for both the Engine and
Transaxle Control Modules. A malfunctioning TPS may result in the following symptoms:
^ Unstable idle
^ Uneven throttle response
^ Slip & shock during the 1-2 & 2-3 shift on Automatic Transaxle (ATM) equipped vehicles.
^ Erratic ATM shifts with possible shift flare (engine RPM increase during shifts)
^ Check engine light is ON (light may go off, but the code will remain stored)
^ TPS related code stored in the ECM and/or TCM
REPAIR INFORMATION:
1. If the following three conditions are met:
^ The Throttle Position Sensor (TPS) is suspected
^ The ECM / TCM has no codes stored

^ The Throttle Position Sensor (TPS) has the words "DAE SUNG" molded on the part
Then conduct the following diagnostic procedure:
^ The vehicle must be idling (with all accessories turned off)

Customer Interest: > 00-36-006 > Mar > 00 > TPS - Driveability Concerns > Page 82
^ Push on the side of the TPS connector, towards the dash panel. The force used should be firm
enough to slightly deflect the TPS housing, but not enough to damage or break anything.
^ If the TPS is not operating properly, the engine will surge in response to your push.
^ If the Hi-Scan Pro or HDS is used to record the TPS output, the above procedure will show that
the TPS output increases toward 5V when the connector is pushed.
2. If the ECM has a TPS related code stored (with or without the MIL on), replace the TPS.
PARTS INFORMATION
WARRANTY INFORMATION:
Normal warranty operation codes and times apply.

- Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All
Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > tnt1660906-03 > Sep > 06 > A/T, Engine Controls - ECM/TCM
Reset/Relearn Procedure
Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T, Engine Controls - ECM/TCM
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE CONTROL MODULE - RESET AND RELEARN ADAPTIVE VALUES
MODEL: All
DESCRIPTION:
The PCM or TCM contains logic to adjust solenoid duty and line pressure as needed to
compensate for normal clutch wear over the life of the transaxle. This article provides the
procedures necessary to reset (erase) and "relearn" the adaptive values in the PCM/TCM. After the
following repairs have been completed, the PCM/TCM adaptive values must be reset in order to
provide optimum shift quality:
^ Replace automatic transaxle
^ Reprogram or swap PCM/TCM from another vehicle
Adaptive values must be reset using procedure # 1 or # 2 according to model and model year (MY)
as shown below.
VEHICLES AFFECTED:
^ All
I. RESET PCM/TCM ADAPTIVE VALUES

HI-SCAN PROCEDURE:
1. Turn the Ignition key to the "ON" position (do not start engine) and move the shift lever to "P."
2. Attach the Hi-Scan Pro to the data link connector (DLC):
^ Select vehicle
^ Select "AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE" menu.
^ Select "RESETTING ADAPTIVE VALUES,
press "ENTER"
^ Press "ENTFR", then "REST" (F1)
^ Turn Ignition key "OFF" for 10 seconds.
II. RELEARN ADAPTIVE VALUES:

Reset/Relearn Procedure > Page 88
NOTE:
After the adaptive values have been reset (erased), an "adaptive learning" procedure must be
completed as shown below.
3. Attach a Hi-Scan Pro or GDS and select "Engine" menu, "Current Data" menu and throttle
position sensor in volts ("THROTTLE POS. SENSOR",
"ACCEL. P0S. S", or "ACCEL PEDAL 1 VOLT", depending on model).
4. Drive the vehicle until the ATF temperature is within the temperature range shown.
5. Request an assistant to monitor the Hi-Scan while accelerating the vehicle at small throttle
openings (approximately 25-30% throttle). Hold the
accelerator pedal steady at a throttle position sensor value of 1.45~1.75v during several 1-2-3-4
upshifts.
Repeat until normal gear transitions occur.
6. Repeat this procedure for 4-3, 3-2 and 2-1 downshifts.

NOTE:
Adaptive learning does not occur below the ATF temperature range shown.
Applicable warranty coverage applies.

Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > tnt1640706-01 > Jul > 06 > Engine Controls - ECU
Reprogramming Procedure
Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - ECU Reprogramming
Procedure
Reprogramming
This issue of TechNet Times focuses on reprogramming. In the current Hyundai service
environment, reprogramming can be accomplished with the Hi-Scan Pro or Hyundai's new Global
Diagnostic System (GDS). We begin here with an overview of the process of reprogramming the
ECU as performed using the GDS on a 2006 Azera that experiences a 1-2 shift hesitation under
wide open throttle operation when cold. As with most GDS features, you must select the model,
year and system in order to get started. You can manually enter the information by selecting
drop-down box options or, if the vehicle is a 2005 or newer model, you can enter the VIN and the
GDS will determine that information for you. Once the vehicle has been identified, select "ECU
Upgrade" located under the "Vehicle SW Management" tab. (See Figure 1.) Note: The Vehicle
Communication Interface (VCI) connects to the vehicle via the Data Link Connector (DLC); and the
VCI must be connected to the GDS PC using the USB connection. (Some other GDS functions
allow for wireless communication between the VCI and GDS PC.)
Reprogramming Procedure > Page 94
The FCU Upgrade screen will appear. Select "Auto Mode." (See Figure 2.) The GDS will prompt
you to make sure that you have connected the VCI to the DLC and turned on the VCI power. (See
Figure 3.) After making sure, click "OK."
A window will appear to alert you that the GDS is "ROM ID Reading." During this time, the GDS will
check for available reprograms for the vehicle's FCU. If any reprograms are found, the ROM ID will
be listed in the "Current ROM ID" window. The "Current ROM ID" window shows the existing status
of programming in the FCU. Note: If the ROM IDs match, the ECU already has the latest
reprogramming or your GDS unit needs to have the latest updates installed. Refer to the chart on
page 5. The TCM ID column lists the latest ID for each condition. Go to the right edge of the
"Upgrade Event" window and click on the down arrow. Available upgrade events will be displayed
in a drop down box. When you select one, the "Upgrade" button will appear in the center of your
screen. (See Figure 4.)
After you have selected the event, click "Upgrade," you will be asked to confirm that you want to
upgrade. Then, you will be prompted to wait while everything is verified. If there is a corresponding
TSB for the upgrade, another pop-up will give you the option to recall it and familiarize yourself with
it.
Once programming begins, the screen will display a status bar which monitors the reprogramming
process. (See Figure 5)
When the reprogramming has finished and the status bar reads "100%," another pop-up will direct
you to turn the ignition off for 10 seconds and turn it back on. When you click "OK" a second
pop-up will prompt you to reset the automatic transaxle adaptive learning values. Note: Do not do
any other activity with your GDS until the reprogramming is completed. (See Figure 6.) To reset the
Automatic Transaxle Adaptive Learning Values, click the "System" button toward the top of the
screen. The "GDS System Search" screen will appear and from it select "A/T." Then, choose the
"Resetting A/T Values" option. When the "Resetting A/T Values" screen (See Figure 7) appears,
click on "reset." A confirming pop-up will ask, "Are you sure?" Click "OK" and the values will be
reset and reprogramming will be complete.
Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > tnt1630506-01 > May > 06 > A/T Controls - PCM/TCM
Reset/Relearn Adaptive Values
Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T Controls - PCM/TCM Reset/Relearn
Adaptive Values
Automatic Transaxle Control Module - Reset And Relearn Adaptive Values
compensate for normal clutch wear over the life of the transaxle. Here are the procedures
necessary to reset (erase) and "relearn" the adaptive values in the PCM/TCM. Afier the following
repairs have been completed, the PCM/TCM adaptive values must be reset in order to provide
optimum shift quality:

^ Reprogram or swap PCM/TCM from another vehicle Adaptive values must be reset using
procedure # 1 or # 2 according to model and model year (MY) as shown below.
HI-SCAN PROCEDURE:
1. Turn the Ignition key to the "ON" position (do not start engine) and move the shift lever to "P".
^ Select vehicle
^ Select "RESETTING ADAPTIVE VALUES", press "ENTER"
^ Press "ENTER", then "REST" (F1)

Reset/Relearn Adaptive Values > Page 101
NOTE:
"ACCEL. P0S. S," or "ACCEL PEDAL 1 VOLT", depending on model).
upshifts.

NOTE:
Adaptive learning does not occur below the ATF temperature range shown in next column:
Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 06-40-005 > Mar > 06 > A/T Controls - Reset and Relearn
Adaptive Values
Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T Controls - Reset and Relearn Adaptive
Values
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 06-40-005
Date: MARCH, 2006
Model: ALL
Subject: AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE CONTROL MODULE - RESET AND RE LEARN ADAPTIVE

VALUES
This bulletin supersedes TSB 05-40-004 to include additional models.
DESCRIPTION:
compensate for normal clutch wear over the life of the transaxle. This bulletin provides the
procedures necessary to reset (erase) and "relearn" the adaptive values in the PCM/TCM.
After the following repairs have been completed, the PCM/TCM adaptive values must be reset in
order to provide optimum shift quality:

as shown below.
Adaptive Values > Page 107
HI-SCAN PROCEDURE:
^ Select vehicle
NOTE:
completed as shown.
position sensor in volts ("THROTTLE POS. SENSOR" "ACCEL. POS. S". or "ACCEL PEDAL 1
VOLT", depending on model).
5. Request an assistant to monitor the Hi- Scan while accelerating the vehicle at small throttle
openings (approximately 25-30% throttle). Hold the accelerator pedal steady at a throttle position
sensor value of 1.45-1.75v during several 1-2-3-4 upshifts. Repeat until normal gear transitions
occur.
NOTE:
Adaptive learning does not occur below the ATF temperature range previously shown.
Applicable warranty coverage applies

Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 00-40-012 > Sep > 00 > A/T - Diagnostic Trouble Codes &
Scanned Data
Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Diagnostic Trouble Codes & Scanned
Data
Group TRANSAXLE
Number 00-40-012
Date SEPTEMBER, 2000
Model ALL
Subject AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES

DESCRIPTION:
If you are servicing a vehicle with a driveability condition, please select the "Hyundai Vehicle
Diagnosis" menu, then check for Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTC) in both the "Engine" and
"Automatic Transaxle" menus. Record the DTC and the descriptions.
NOTE:
Ensure the latest (4/28/00) software has been downloaded into your Hi-Scan Pro, so it is no longer
necessary to check the "CARB OBDII" menu for DTC (see TSB 00-00-001).
Automatic transaxle DTC are found in the following menus:
If transaxle DTC are set and the MIL is illuminated, codes P1624 and P1529 will be displayed in
the "Engine" menu. The purpose of the DTC is to advise that the TCM requested the ECM to turn
on the MIL (the TCM does not have the authority to turn on the MIL).
Scanned Data > Page 113
SENSOR INPUTS TO TCM:
The sensor inputs to the TCM can be checked by selecting:
^ "Hyundai Vehicle Diagnosis" menu
^ "Automatic Transaxle" menu "Current Data" menu
If you wish to show the sensor data as a graph:
^ From the "Automatic Transaxle" menu, select "Current Data" menu
^ Highlight the desired sensor and select "FIX" (F1). Repeat for an additional sensor, if desired.
^ Select "GRPH" (F5).
If you wish to record the graphed data:
^ From the "Automatic Transaxle" menu, select "Flight Record" menu
^ Select "RCRD" (F6)
^ Select "TRIG" (F5) to begin recording
^ Select "END" (F6) to stop recording
^ Select "GRPH" (F1)

Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 00-40-009 > Aug > 00 > A/T - Shift Solenoid Incorrect
Operation/MIL ON
Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Shift Solenoid Incorrect Operation/MIL
ON
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 00-40-009
Date: AUGUST, 2000
Model: ALL
symptoms:
^ Erratic shift
^ MIL illuminated
NOTE:
REPAIR PROCEDURE:
NOTE:
Step 6:
cable.
NOTE:
Operation/MIL ON > Page 118
NOTE:
All models:
NOTE:


NOTE:

SONATA:
NOTE:
Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 00-00-001 > Jul > 00 > Scan Tool - Software Update Procedure
Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Scan Tool - Software Update Procedure
Group: GENERAL
Number: 00-00-001
Date: JULY, 2000
Model: ALL
Subject HI-SCAN PRO SOFTWARE UPDATE PROCEDURE
DESCRIPTION
This bulletin details the procedure for updating the Hi-Scan Pro Software Cards. New software for
the Hi-Scan and for reprogramming vehicle Engine Control Modules (ECM) and Transaxle Control
Modules (TCM) will be provided periodically via the Hyundai Service Web Site
(www.hmaservice.com) and HDS CDROM updates.
PROCEDURE:
Three software cards are included in the Hi-Scan kit:
^ The "SOL" card contains the main program that operates the Hi-Scan; reading codes and data.
^ The "Reprogramming" card is used for reprogramming ECMs and TCMs for campaigns and field
fixes.
^ The "INFO" card contains additional diagnostic tips and information that are not on the standard
SOL card.
An RS232 communication cable is included in the Hi-Scan kit. This cable is used to connect the
Hi-Scan to the HDS for data transfer.
Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 00-00-001 > Jul > 00 > Scan Tool - Software Update Procedure >
Page 125
1. Connect the RS232 cable to the 9-pin COM port on the back of HDS.
2. Connect the other end of the RS232 cable to the COM port on the left side of the Hi-Scan.
3. Provide power to the Hi-Scan using the cigarette lighter power adapter.
4. Insert only the software card you (wish to update into the Hi-Scan.
Page 126
5. Make sure the "Write Protect Tab" is set to the right. Setting the tab to the right enables new
software to be written to the card.
If the tab is to the left, an error will occur during the update process.
Note:
It is OK to leave the INFO card in the Hi-Scan while updating either the SOL or Reprogramming
cards.
6. Turn the Hi-Scan ON and select "Data Down Load" from the main menu.
7. From the HDS Info-Tech home screen, click the "Scan-Tool Update" button to launch the update
utility.
Page 127
8. Note the brief instructions on the left of the screen and click the "51W Download" button.
9. Select the new software from the "File List".
To avoid confusion, the three different types of software start with an identification letter:
S - = Software for the SOL card R - = Software for the Reprogramming card I - = Software for the
INFO card
Example: "S-System 04-28-00.dat" is software for the SOL card.
10. Select the proper "Port" setting
COM1 is the default setting and should work for most systems.
If the program does not transfer the software to the Hi-Scan, try changing the "Port" setting to
COM2.
Page 128
11. Select the proper "Data Type"
"Standard Pack" is the default setting and is used when updating the SOL and Reprogramming
software cards.
"Trouble Shooting Pack" is used only for updating the INFO software card.
COM2.
12. Click the "Write" button to start the download process.
13. The progress meter at the bottom indicates the percent complete.
It will take approximately 5 minutes for the file to download to the Hi-Scan.
Page 129
14. The Hi-Scan screen also displays the download progress.
15. After the file has finished downloading, turn the Hi-Scan OFF and then back ON to use the new
software.
NOTE:
If for any reason the download process is interrupted before completion, the software on the
software card may become corrupted. Indications of a corrupted card or blank card are a flashing
screen and beeping when the Hi-Scan is turned ON.
Page 130
To restore the corrupted software card, hold down the "Shift" and "F1" keys on the Hi-Scan while
pushing the ON button. This puts the Hi-Scan into Software Download mode immediately. Try the
download process again as shown starting at step 1.
16. To check the software version, select "System Setup".
17. Then select "System Configuration"
18. The "S/W Card Ver." shows the current software version.
Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 00-36-006 > Mar > 00 > TPS - Driveability Concerns
Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins TPS - Driveability Concerns
Number 00-36-006
Date MARCH, 2000
DESCRIPTION:
^ Unstable idle
REPAIR INFORMATION:


Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 00-36-006 > Mar > 00 > TPS - Driveability Concerns > Page 135
PARTS INFORMATION

Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 98-36-006 > Aug > 98 > Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor -
Diagnosis
Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor -
Diagnosis
Group: ENGINE ELECTRICAL
Number: 98-36-006
Date: AUGUST, 1998
Model: ALL
Subject ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR DIAGNOSIS
DESCRIPTION:
The engine coolant temperature sensor is located in the coolant passage of the cylinder head. It
detects engine coolant temperature and sends signals to the powertrain control module (PCM).
The engine coolant temperature sensor uses a thermistor which is sensitive to changes in
temperature. The electric resistance of a thermistor decreases in response to a rise in temperature.
Thus, when the temperature increases, the output voltage decreases The PCM determines engine
coolant temperature by the sensor output voltage and provides optimum fuel enrichment when the
engine is cold.
This bulletin provides diagnosis and repair procedures for engine coolant temperature sensors.
Diagnosis > Page 140
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURES:
DTC: Diagnostic Trouble Code
PCM: Powertrain Control Module
ECT: Engine Coolant Temperature
DIAGNOSTIC HINTS:
1. If the fast idle speed is not high enough or if the engine produces dark smoke during engine
warm-up operation, a malfunctioning engine coolant temperature sensor might be the cause.
2. If the thermostat opening state is abnormal and causes overcooling, the Diagnostic Code (DTC)
for the engine coolant temperature sensor can be set.
3. The Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) is on or the DTC is set under the following conditions:
a. When the engine coolant temperature is detected by the sensor as below -40°C or above 120°C.
b. If the engine coolant temperature does not increase at least 5°C, even though 130 seconds or
more have elapsed after starting the engine.
USING A VOLTMETER:
USING A SCAN TOOL:
HARNESS INSPECTION PROCEDURES:
SENSOR INSPECTION:
1. Remove the ECT sensor from the intake manifold.
2. With the temperature sensing portion of the ECT sensor immersed in hot water, check
resistance.
3. If the resistance deviates from the standard value (as shown on the chart), replace the sensor.
INSTALLATION:
1. Apply sealant (LOCTITE962T or equivalent) to the threaded portion of the sensor.
2. Install ECT sensor and torque to 11-15 lb.ft.
3. Reconnect the harness connector securely.

Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 98-36-001 > Apr > 98 > Air/Fuel Mixture - Trim Code Diagnosis
Technical Service Bulletin # 98-36-001 Date: 980401
Air/Fuel Mixture - Trim Code Diagnosis
Number: 98-36-001
Date: APRIL, 1998
Model: ALL 1996-98 MODELS
Subject FUEL TRIM CODE DIAGNOSIS
DESCRIPTION
The Powertrain Control Module (PCM) on Hyundai OBD II vehicles (all 1996 and later models) can
adjust the engine Air to Fuel (A/F) ratio to compensate for variations in operating conditions. This
adjustment only takes place during "Closed Loop" operation.
The PCM uses input from the following components to determine the amount of fuel to deliver:
^ Oxygen sensors
^ Air flow sensor
^ Coolant temperature sensor
^ Intake air temperature sensor
^ Throttle position sensor
^ Engine speed sensor
The ability to adjust the A/F ratio enables the PCM to compensate for engine, fuel and sensor
variations as well as temperature, altitude and humidity. This enables the vehicle to maintain a
stoichiometric (14.7 to 1) A/F ratio that will ensure optimal engine performance and minimal
emissions.
Since the PCM can change the A/F ratio to compensate for a wide range of conditions, an indicator
is needed to identify that a compensation has been made. Fuel Trim values shown on the HDS
scan tool are the primary indicator that an adjustment in fuel delivery has taken place.
The scan tool displays the PCM's A/F ratio compensation as "Short Term" Fuel Trim (ST TRIM),
Long Term Fuel Trim (LT TRIM), and "Oxygen Sensor" Trim (TRIM B1 S1 and B1 S2). The most
beneficial diagnostic information comes from Short Term" Fuel Trim and "Long Term" Fuel Trim.
Short/Long Term Fuel Trim (ST/LT Trim)
^ "Short Term" Fuel Trim is the value that represents the quick small changes the PCM makes to
the A/F ratio.
^ On a Sonata, the PCM continuously responds to the signals from the oxygen sensors to maintain
the 14.7 to 1 A/F ratio by increasing or decreasing fuel delivery.
^ On Accent, Elantra and Tiburon, the "Short Term" Fuel Trim indicates the amount of correction at
idle and low rpm/load.
^ "Short Term" Fuel Trim values range from -25% to +25%.
^ "Short Term" Fuel Trim values are positive when the PCM is increasing fuel delivery, negative
when the PCM is decreasing fuel delivery. "Short Term" Fuel Trim may read "0.0" for brief periods
during transition from positive to negative (or negative to positive) operation. If the "Short Term"
Fuel Trim reads "0.0" for longer periods, it may indicate that the vehicle is in open loop.
^ On a Sonata, the "Short Term" Fuel Trim values are not retained in the PCM memory when the
ignition is turned off.
^ On a Sonata, "Long Term" Fuel Trim values change to compensate when the "Short Term" Fuel
Trim has reached its limit in one direction and is unable to maintain the 14.7 to 1 A/F ratio.
^ On Accent, Elantra and Tiburon vehicles, the "Long Term" Fuel Trim indicates the amount of
correction at high rpm/load.
^ The "Long Term" Fuel Trim correction range is -25% to +25%. Exceeding the -20% to +20%
range will set a code on an Accent, Elantra and Tiburon. Sonata vehicles will set a code when the
-12.5% to +12.5% range is exceeded.
Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 98-36-001 > Apr > 98 > Air/Fuel Mixture - Trim Code Diagnosis >
Page 147
^ On a Sonata, a one digit change of the "Long Term" Fuel Trim value is roughly the equivalent of
one entire "Short Term" Fuel Trim range. For example: when the "Short Term" Fuel Trim reaches
its limit, the "Long Term" Fuel Trim moves one digit. This process repeats until the A/F ratio returns
to 14.7 to 1 or the "Long Term" Fuel Trim correction range limit has been exceeded.
^ There is a preprogrammed "Long Term" Fuel Trim correction range that is acceptable for normal
operation. When the "Long Term" Fuel Trim exceeds this range in two driving cycles, the vehicle
will set a diagnostic code (DTC), which will illuminate the check engine light.
^ "Long Term" Fuel Trim values are retained in the PCM's memory when the ignition is turned off.
This allows the vehicle to "learn" a new fuel delivery schedule, which is "fine tuned" for optimal
performance.
Oxygen Sensor Trim (Trim B1 S1 & Trim B1 S2
^ Oxygen Sensor Trim is the PCM's response value to each individual oxygen sensor input. This
value should change similar to the "Short Term" Fuel Trim values and is not used for diagnostic
purposes on Hyundai vehicles
Fuel Trim Diagnostic Codes
A Fuel Trim diagnostic code will set when Fuel Trim values exceed programmed limits due to either
"Rich" or "Lean" operating conditions. The "Long Term" or "Short Term" Fuel Trim numbers stored
in the "Freeze Frame" data will indicate if the PCM was increasing or decreasing fuel delivery when
the code was set.
A PCM that is increasing fuel delivery (to compensate for a "Lean" condition) will have a positive
(+) "Long Term" Fuel Trim number. A PCM that is decreasing fuel delivery (to compensate for a
"Rich" condition) will have a negative (-) "Long Term" Fuel Trim number.
Accent, Elantra & Tiburon Fuel Trim Codes
^ The "Long Term" Fuel Trim correction range is -25% to +25% on Accent, Elantra and Tiburon. If
the "Long Term" Fuel Trim value exceeds -20% to +20% in two consecutive trips a code will be
stored in the PCM.
^ P1123 and P1124 are set at idle, low load and low engine speed operation. Codes set in these
operating conditions are sometimes referred to as additive Fuel Trim correction codes.
Note:
These codes are set when engine speed is less than approximately 1,000 rpm and the air flow
sensor reading is less than 5 grams/sec.
^ P1127 and P1128 are set at moderate to high engine load and engine speed operation. These
codes are sometimes called multiplicative Fuel Trim correction codes.
Sonata Fuel Trim Code

Page 148
^ The Sonata engine management system will only set one Fuel Trim code. Code P0170 will set
when the "Long Term" Fuel Trim values are "Rich" or "Lean" beyond the programmed limits.
^ The "Long Term" Fuel Trim correction range is -12.5% to +12.5% on Sonata vehicles. If the "Long
Term" Fuel Trim value exceeds this range in two consecutive trips, a code will be stored in the
PCM.
^ The Fuel Trim values will indicate if the PCM is compensating rich or lean. A PCM that is
increasing fuel delivery (to compensate for a "Lean" condition) will have a positive (+) "Long Term"
Fuel Trim number. A PCM that is decreasing fuel delivery (to compensate for a "Rich" condition)
will have a negative (-) "Long Term" Fuel Trim number.
Fuel Trim Code Troubleshooting Tips
1. Using the HDS scan tool, access and write down the Freeze Frame Data (which is the data
stored at the time the diagnostic code was set). This information can give valuable clues about the
operating conditions at the time the code occurred and may reduce the amount of diagnosis and
testing required to repair the vehicle.
A. Connect the scan tool and identify the vehicle.
B. Select 1, ENGINE" under the "Select System " menu.
C. Select CODES & DATA MENU from the engine "Main Menu".
D. Select FREEZE FRAME to retrieve the engine operating conditions that were present at the
moment the DTC was set.
2. Check the vehicle to identify if codes other than Fuel Trim codes or driveability symptoms are
present. A malfunction of any of the following components may affect the Fuel Trim values:
^ Oxygen Sensors ^ Air Flow Sensor
^ Evaporative Emission System ^ Coolant Temperature Sensor
^ Intake Air Temperature Sensor ^ Fuel Injector
^ Throttle Position Sensor

If codes other than Fuel Trim codes are present, diagnose/repair these conditions before
continuing with Fuel Trim diagnosis.
DTC P1124,1128, or P0170 (Positive Fuel Trim Numbers
(The PCM is increasing fuel delivery to compensate for a "Lean" condition)
^ Check for vacuum or unmetered air leaks, concentrating on areas between the air flow sensor
and the engine block. Are all the gaskets and hoses properly installed? A vehicle with a vacuum
leak will have an air flow sensor reading that is lower than normal at idle (see Air Flow Sensor
Table in this TSB). Accent, Elantra and Tiburon vehicles with a vacuum leak may also have a low
load value.
^ Check the evaporative emission system. An intermittently sticking or stuck open purge solenoid
valve may not set an evaporative code in a 1996 or 1997 SOHC Accent or Sonata, but may set a
Fuel Trim code.
Check the air flow sensor calibration. If no vacuum leaks are present and the purge system is
functioning properly, compare the air flow sensor reading at idle and at 2500 rpm to the Air Flow
Sensor Table. If readings are out of specification, swap the air flow sensor with a known good unit
and re-test.
^ Check the fuel pressure (for low pressure), fuel volume flow (replace fuel filter if necessary),
injector part number, PCM part number and perform the oxygen sensor scan tool test as noted in
this TSB.
DTC P1123,1127 or P0170 (With Negative Fuel Trim Number

Page 149
(The PCM is decreasing fuel delivery to compensate for a "Rich" condition)
may not set an evaporative code in a 1996 or 1997 SOHO Accent or Sonata, but may set a Fuel
Trim code.
^ Check the air flow sensor calibration. If no vacuum leaks are present and the purge system is
and re-test.
^ Check the fuel pressure (for high pressure), the fuel flow (for a return line restriction), the injector
part number, the PCM part number and perform the oxygen sensor scan tool test as noted in this
TSB.
Note:
For 1996 Accent SOHC with diagnostic code P1123 only, refer to TSB # 96-36-004 (Powertrain
Control Module EPROM Replacement Procedure).
Note:
The table is supplied as general reference information. If the Fuel Trim conditions occur at different
RPM, compare the air flow sensor reading to a known good vehicle. A "new" vehicle or sensor may
read a slightly higher value than normal.
Oxygen Sensor Scan Tool Testing Procedure
1. A. Connect the scan tool
B. Warm up the vehicle to operating temperature (for at least 3 minutes)
C. Select vehicle, year, VIN code, etc.
D. Select "Engine"
E. Select "Data"
F. After OBD II data appears, press "N"
G. Select "Custom Data List"
H. Select "02-B1-S1" and "O2-B1-S2" (front and rear oxygen sensors) and ENG RPM if no
tachometer is available.
I. Press "N" and the selected data will appear
2. While holding the engine speed at 2500 rpm in "Neutral" or "Park" (with no load) observe the
front and rear oxygen sensors for approximately one minute. The front oxygen sensor should
fluctuate rapidly between 0.095 and 0.995 V. The voltage should read higher than 0.600 V several
times and lower than 0.350 V several times. The voltage should never exceed 1.00 V when using
the scan tool.
If an Accent, Elantra or Tiburon front or rear oxygen sensor reads a fixed value of 0.425 V to 0.500
V, or a Sonata reads a fixed value of 0.010 to 0.080 V, check for an open/shorted oxygen sensor
circuit or no output from the sensor.
The scan tool can also be used to check the sensors while the vehicle is being driven. An assistant
is needed to perform this procedure. Use the scan tool as set up in the previous test procedure.
1. While driving in first gear, accelerate so the engine speed is near 4000 rpm. Quickly release the
accelerator and observe the readings from both sensors. The sensors, should read lean (in the
range of 0.20 V down to 0 V) on the scan tool due to the fuel cut-off during deceleration.
2. While driving in first gear, accelerate hard and observe both sensors. The sensors should read
rich (in the range of 0.60 V to 1.0 V) on the scan tool.
Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 97-40-001-1 > Jul > 97 > A/T - Mutual Control Introduction
Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Mutual Control Introduction
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 97-40-001-1
Date: JULY, 1997
Model: ALL
Subject: AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE MUTUAL CONTROL
This TSB supersedes TSB # 97-40-001 to correct the TCM part numbers and effective vehicle
production dates.
DESCRIPTION:
Mutual control has been introduced on 1997 model automatic transaxles to improve shift quality.
Mutual control allows communication between the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) and
Transaxle Control Module (TCM) to retard engine timing during shifting. As a result, engine torque
is temporarily reduced during shifting, which results in improved shift feeling and clutch durability.
As the timing is restored after an upshift is completed, a feeling of slightly increased power may
occasionally be noticed. Experienced service personnel may be more likely to notice the difference
in shift feeling compared to 1996 and earlier vehicles. Some customers may incorrectly perceive
this surge as a slipping shift; however, this is normal operation of the mutual control.
ANALYSIS:
Mutual control is possible only when the following four (4) conditions are simultaneously met:
1. Battery voltage above 10 V
2. TPS above 1.2 V

3. ATF temperature above 45°C (113°F) or transaxle output speed (pulse generator B) above 1487
rpm for 10 minutes
4. Engine speed above 1500 rpm
Engine timing for Bosch controllers is retarded according to engine speed as shown. 1997 Sonata
vehicles use Melco controllers, which have slightly different retard specifications.
For additional information regarding the torque reduction signal from the TCM to the PCM, refer to
the 1997 Sonata Shop Manual, Volume 2, page SD-83 and the 1997 Tiburon Shop Manual,
Volume 2, page SD-58.
EFFECTIVE VEHICLE PRODUCTION DATE:
Model Production Date
1997 Accent September 1, 1996
1997 Elantra Sedan & Wagon July 7, 1996
1997 Sonata 2.0L & 3.0L July 1, 1996

Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 97-40-001-1 > Jul > 97 > A/T - Mutual Control Introduction > Page
154
1997 Tiburon 1.8L & 2.0L July 1, 1996
PARTS INFORMATION:
Other Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > tnt1660906-03 > Sep > 06 > A/T, Engine Controls - ECM/TCM
MODEL: All
DESCRIPTION:
as shown below.
VEHICLES AFFECTED:
^ All

HI-SCAN PROCEDURE:
^ Select vehicle
press "ENTER"

NOTE:
upshifts.

NOTE:

Other Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > tnt1640706-01 > Jul > 06 > Engine Controls - ECU Reprogramming
Procedure
Procedure
Reprogramming
Procedure > Page 166
it.
Other Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > tnt1630506-01 > May > 06 > A/T Controls - PCM/TCM Reset/Relearn
Adaptive Values
Adaptive Values

HI-SCAN PROCEDURE:
^ Select vehicle

NOTE:
upshifts.

NOTE:
Other Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 06-40-005 > Mar > 06 > A/T Controls - Reset and Relearn Adaptive
Values
Values
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 06-40-005
Date: MARCH, 2006
Model: ALL

VALUES
DESCRIPTION:

as shown below.
Values > Page 179
HI-SCAN PROCEDURE:
^ Select vehicle
NOTE:
Values > Page 180
completed as shown.
occur.
NOTE:

Other Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 00-40-012 > Sep > 00 > A/T - Diagnostic Trouble Codes & Scanned
Data
Data
Group TRANSAXLE
Number 00-40-012
Model ALL

DESCRIPTION:
NOTE:
Data > Page 185

Other Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 00-00-001 > Jul > 00 > Scan Tool - Software Update Procedure
Group: GENERAL
Number: 00-00-001
Date: JULY, 2000
Model: ALL
DESCRIPTION
PROCEDURE:
fixes.
SOL card.
Other Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 00-00-001 > Jul > 00 > Scan Tool - Software Update Procedure >
Page 190
Page 191
Note:
cards.
utility.
Page 192
INFO card
COM2.
Page 193
software cards.
COM2.
Page 194
software.
NOTE:
Page 195
Other Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 98-36-006 > Aug > 98 > Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor -
Diagnosis
Diagnosis
Number: 98-36-006
Date: AUGUST, 1998
Model: ALL
DESCRIPTION:
engine is cold.
DIAGNOSTIC HINTS:
USING A VOLTMETER:
USING A SCAN TOOL:
SENSOR INSPECTION:
resistance.
INSTALLATION:

Other Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 98-36-001 > Apr > 98 > Air/Fuel Mixture - Trim Code Diagnosis
Number: 98-36-001
Date: APRIL, 1998
DESCRIPTION
^ Oxygen sensors
^ Air flow sensor
emissions.
the A/F ratio.
Other Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 98-36-001 > Apr > 98 > Air/Fuel Mixture - Trim Code Diagnosis > Page
207
performance.
the code was set.
stored in the PCM.
Note:

208
PCM.

load value.
Fuel Trim code.
and re-test.
this TSB.

209
Trim code.
and re-test.
TSB.
Note:
Note:
D. Select "Engine"
E. Select "Data"
the scan tool.
Other Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 97-40-001-1 > Jul > 97 > A/T - Mutual Control Introduction
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 97-40-001-1
Date: JULY, 1997
Model: ALL
production dates.
DESCRIPTION:
ANALYSIS:
2. TPS above 1.2 V

rpm for 10 minutes
1997 Sonata 2.0L & 3.0L July 1, 1996

Other Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 97-40-001-1 > Jul > 97 > A/T - Mutual Control Introduction > Page 214
1997 Tiburon 1.8L & 2.0L July 1, 1996
PARTS INFORMATION:
- Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page
215
- Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions
Engine Control Module: Diagram Information and Instructions
Connector Configurations
Connector Configuration
This shows the cavity or terminal locations in all the multi-pin connectors shown in the electrical
diagrams. It is helpful for you to locate check points, together with the wire colors and terminal
numbers in the electrical diagrams. The configuration drawings shows the connector views as seen
from a component after the harness connector has been disconnected. When more than one
connector is connected to a component, the connectors are all shown together. Both halves of in
line connectors are shown together.
Connector Identification
A connector identification symbol consists of a wiring harness location classification symbol

corresponding to each other wiring harness location and number peculiar to the connector. These
connector locations can be found in the WIRING HARNESS LAYOUT.
NOTE: Connectors which connect each wiring harness are represented by symbols.
Connector View and Numbering Order

and Instructions > Page 218
Connector View
CONNECTOR VIEW
Numbering Order
NUMBERING ORDER
Electrical Diagram (Example Only)

Electrical Diagram
The starting point of each system section is the electrical diagram, these diagrams show how all
the components work together, such as electrical current paths from power source to ground (via
electrical load), switch connections at each positions, and other related circuit functions. It is
important to fully understand how a circuit work prior to troubleshooting and diagnosis.
Harness Classification
Harness Layouts
Harness Layout
Harness layouts show the routing of the major wiring harnesses and the in-line connectors between
the major harnesses. These layouts will make electrical troubleshooting easier.
Key to Wiring Diagrams and Symbol I.D.

Symbols (Part 1 Of 3)
Wire Color Abbreviations
The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics.
B ..........................................................................................................................................................
......................................................................... Black L .......................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
Blue Br .................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................... Brown G ...............................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
...... Green Gr .......................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................ Gray Lg ...................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
....... Light Green O ..............................................................................................................................
................................................................................................... Orange P .........................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
............................... Pink R ..................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................... Red W .............................
..............................................................................................................................................................
....................................... White Y ........................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................... Yellow Li ....................
..............................................................................................................................................................
......................................... Light Blue
Engine Control Module: Diagnostic Aids
Continuity and Voltage Test
1. Disconnect the battery negative terminal. 2. Connect one lead of a self powered test lamp or
ohmmeter to one end of the part of the circuit you wish to test. If you are using an ohmmeter, hold
the leads together and adjust the ohmmeter to read zero Ohms.
3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test lamp glows, there is
continuity. If you are using an ohmmeter, low or zero resistance means good continuity.
Jumper Wire With Fuse
Use a jumper wire with fuse to by pass an open circuit. A jumper wire is made up of an in-line fuse
holder connected to a set of test leads. This tool is available with small clamp connectors providing
adaption to most of the connectors without damage.
CAUTION
Do not use a fuse with a higher rating then the specified fuse that protests the circuit being tested.
Do not use this tool in any situation to substitute for input or output at the solid-state control
module, such as electronic control module, transmission control module, etc.
Self-Powered Test Lamp and Ohmmeter
Use a self powered test lamp or a ohmmeter to check for continuity. Self powered test lamp is
made of a bulb, battery and two leads and is used only on an unpowered circuit. If the leads are
touched together, the lamp will go ON. Prior to checking the points, first disconnect the battery
ground cable or remove the fuse which feeds the circuit you are working on.
CAUTION
Never use a self powered test lamp on circuits that contain solid state units. Damage to these units
may result.
An ohmmeter can be used in place of a self powered test lamp. The ohmmeter shows how much
resistance there is between two points along a circuit.
Low resistance means good continuity.Circuits which include any solid-state devices should be
tested only with at 10 Mega Ohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. When measuring
resistance with a digital multimeter, battery negative terminal should be disconnected. Otherwise,
there may be incorrect readings. Diodes and solid-state devices in a circuit can make an ohmmeter
give a false reading. To find out if a component is affecting a measurement, take one reading,
reverse the leads and take a second reading. If the readings differ, the solid-state device is
affecting the measurement.
Testing For Short to Ground
1. Disconnect the battery negative terminal. 2. Connect one lead of a self powered test lamp or an
ohmmeter to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a ground. 4. Beginning
near the fuse block move the harness from side to side. Continue this point (about six inches apart)
while watching the self powered test
lamp or ohmmeter.
5. When the self powered test lamp glows, or ohmmeter registers, there is a short to a ground in
the wiring near that point.
Testing For Short to Power

1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. 2. Connect the short finder across the
fuse terminals. 3. Close all switches in series in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn ON the short
circuit locator. It sends pulses of current to the short. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around
the wiring between the fuse
box and the short.
5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will
show current pulses through sheet metal and body
trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current
pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check
around this area to locate the cause of the short circuit.
Testing For Voltage
Testing For Voltage
This test measures voltage in a circuit. When testing for voltage at a connector, you do not have to
separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always
check both sides of the connector because dirt and corrosion between its contact surfaces can
cause electrical problems.
1. Connect one lead of a test lamp or voltmeter to a ground. If you are using a voltmeter, be sure it
is the voltmeter's negative lead test you have
connected to ground.
2. Connect the other lead of the test lamp or voltmeter to a selected test point (connector or
terminal). 3. If the test lamp glows, there is voltage present. If you are using a voltmeter, note the
voltage reading. A loss of more than 1 volt from
specifications indicates a problem.
Troubleshooting Equipment
Short finder is available to locate short to a ground. The short finder creates a pulsing magnetic
field in the shorted circuit and shows you the location of the short through body trim or sheet metal.
Voltmeter and Test Lamp
Use a test lamp or a voltmeter on circuits without solid-state units and use a test lamp to check for
voltage. A test lamp is made up of 12 volt bulb with a pair of leads attached. After grounding one
lead, touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present.
When the bulb goes ON, there is voltage at the point being tested.
CAUTION
A number of circuits include solid-state modules such as engine control module used with
computer command control injection. Voltage in these circuits should be tested only with a 10
Mega Ohm or higher impedance digital voltmeter. Never use a test lamp on circuits that contain
solid-state units. Damage to the units may result.
A voltmeter can be used in place of a test lamp. While a test lamp shows whether the voltage is
present or not, a voltmeter indicates how much voltage is present.
Engine Control Module: Connector Views
- Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 229
Engine Control Module: Description and Operation
SELF-DIAGNOSIS
The Engine Control Module (ECM) monitors the input/output signals (some signals at all times and
the others under specified conditions). When the ECM detects that an irregularity, it memorizes the
diagnostic trouble code, and outputs the signal to the self-diagnosis output terminal. The diagnosis
results can be read out Scan Tool. Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) will remain in the ECM as long
as battery power is maintained. The diagnostic trouble code will, however, be erased when the
battery terminal or the ECM connector is disconnected or erased by Generic Scan Tool.
Engine Control Module: Testing and Inspection
ENGINE CONTROL MODULE (ECM)
Check the internal control module ROM/RAM error.
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
HARNESS INSPECTION PROCEDURE

TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURES
TROUBLESHOOTING HINTS
- If the ground wire of the ECM is not connected securely to ground, the ECM will not operate
correctly.
- If we replace ECM ROM without further diagnosis, the problem may reoccur.
- Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions
Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Diagram Information and Instructions


Information and Instructions > Page 236
Connector View
CONNECTOR VIEW
Numbering Order
NUMBERING ORDER

Electrical Diagram
Harness Layouts
Harness Layout

B ..........................................................................................................................................................
......................................................................... Black L .......................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
Blue Br .................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................... Brown G ...............................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
...... Green Gr .......................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................ Gray Lg ...................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
....... Light Green O ..............................................................................................................................
................................................................................................... Orange P .........................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
............................... Pink R ..................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................... Red W .............................
..............................................................................................................................................................
....................................... White Y ........................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................... Yellow Li ....................
..............................................................................................................................................................
......................................... Light Blue
Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Diagnostic Aids
CAUTION
CAUTION
may result.
lamp or ohmmeter.

box and the short.
Testing For Voltage
Testing For Voltage
CAUTION
MFI Control Relay Circuit

- Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 247
Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Testing and Inspection
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
HARNESS INSPECTION PROCESSOR
MFI CONTROL RELAY INSPECTION:

- Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 248
Between Terminals 1 and 5
1. Check continuity of relay contacts. 2. If faulty, replace the MFI control relay.
Tightening torque MFI control relay: 7 - 11 Nm (7 - 110 kg.cm, 5.2 - 8.1 lb.ft)
- Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Locations
Fuel Pump Relay: Locations
- Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 253
Fuel Pump Relay: Description and Operation
MFI CONTROL RELAY
When the ignition switch is on, battery power is supplied to the ECM, the injector, the mass air flow
sensor, etc. While the ignition switch is turned on, current flows from the ignition switch through the
current relay coil to ground.
Fuel Pump Relay: Testing and Inspection
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM

- Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram


Connector View
CONNECTOR VIEW
Numbering Order
NUMBERING ORDER

Electrical Diagram
Harness Layouts
Harness Layout

B ..........................................................................................................................................................
......................................................................... Black L .......................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
Blue Br .................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................... Brown G ...............................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
...... Green Gr .......................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................ Gray Lg ...................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
....... Light Green O ..............................................................................................................................
................................................................................................... Orange P .........................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
............................... Pink R ..................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................... Red W .............................
..............................................................................................................................................................
....................................... White Y ........................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................... Yellow Li ....................
..............................................................................................................................................................
......................................... Light Blue
CAUTION
CAUTION
may result.
lamp or ohmmeter.

box and the short.
Testing For Voltage
Testing For Voltage
CAUTION

- Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 271
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM

- Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 272
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Airbags - Replacement After A Collision
Air Bag Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins Airbags - Replacement After A Collision
Group 90 - ELECTRICAL
Number 04-90-002
Date 01-2004
Model ACCENT 1995-2002, ELANTRA 1992-2003, EXCEL 1986-1994, SANTA FE 2001-2004,

SCOUPE 1991-1995, SONATA 1989-2004, TIBURON 1997-2004, XG 300 2001 AND XG 350
2002-2004
Subject SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) REPAIR AFTER COLLISION
This bulletin supersedes TSB # 03-90-023 to include additional Airbag Wire Harness information.
DESCRIPTION:
This TSB describes the components that must be replaced after the deployment of an SRS
component.
COMPONENT REPLACEMENT TABLE
WARNING
Failure to replace all of the parts listed may affect operation of the supplemental restraint system
(SRS) operation in the event of a subsequent accident.
Collision repair is not covered under warranty.

Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Airbags - Replacement After A Collision > Page 278
Air Bag Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins Restraint System - Component Replacement
After Collision
Number 01-90-013
Date 11-2001
Model All Models
DESCRIPTION:
component.
WARNING
^ Collision repair is not covered under warranty.

Air Bag Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins Airbag Repair Kit - Part Number Update
Group: BODY ELECTRICAL
Number: 98-90-005
Date: MARCH, 1998
Model: ALL ACCENT & TIBURON
1994-98 ELANTRA & 1995-98 SONATA
Subject AIRBAG REPAIR KIT PART NUMBERS
This TSB revises TSB # 97-90-003, and contains updated part number information.
DESCRIPTION:
When repairing a Hyundai vehicle that has been involved in an accident where the airbags have
deployed, the following components must be replaced:
1) Deployed airbags
2) Airbag control module assembly (computer)
3) Airbag control module assembly machine screws
4) Clock spring contact assembly 5) Airbag wiring harness
Hyundai has developed airbag repair kits to assist dealers when replacing all of these components.
The airbag repair kits include items 2-5 as listed. Failure to replace all of the parts listed may
adversely affect the supplemental restraint system (SRS) in the event of a subsequent accident.
In addition to ordering the airbags (which are color specific), an airbag repair kit should also be
ordered. The part numbers for these kits are listed:
- Warranty coverage does not apply to complete repair kit.
- Please note that all airbags replaced under warranty will be requested for return to Hyundai's
Warranty Technical Center (WTC).
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 281
SRSCM Connector
Air Bag Control Module: Service Precautions
Be careful not to bump or impact the Supplemental Restraint System Control Module (SRSCM)
whenever the ignition switch is "ON".
During installation or replacement, be careful not to bump (by impact wrench, hammer, etc.) the
area around the SRSCM. The airbags could accidentally deploy and cause damage or injury.
After a collision in which the airbags were deployed, replace the SRS unit. After a collision in which
the airbags were not deployed, inspect for any damage or any deformation on the SRSCM. If there
is any damage, replace the SRSCM.
Do not disassemble the SRSCM.
Turn the ignition switch "OFF", disconnect the battery negative cable and wait at least 30 seconds
before beginning installation or replacement of the SRSCM.
Air Bag Control Module: Description and Operation
The SRS airbag system has sophisticate electrical and electronic components, therefore the airbag
operating components should be handled very carefully.
SRSCM (Supplemental Restraint System Control Module)
SRSCM determines to deploy the airbag module by sensing the frontal and side impact sensed by
the sensor built in SRSCM.
Back-Up Power
The SRSCM reserves the energy supply to provide deployment energy for a short second when
the vehicle voltage is low or if lost in a vehicle frontal crash.
Malfunction Detection
The SRSCM continuously monitors the current SRS operation status while the ignition key is
turned on and detects the malfunction of the system. The malfunction can be displayed in the form
of diagnostic trouble code using Scan tool.
Malfunction Recording
Once a fault occurred in the system SRSCM records the fault in the memory in the form of DTC
and the DTC is erased only by Scan tool.
After firing the airbags once, the SRSCM cannot be used again and must be replaced.
Air Bag Control Module: Service and Repair
SRS Control Module (SRSCM)
1. Disconnect battery ground cable.
2. Remove center console side covers. 3. Disconnect air bag control module harness first before
removing mounting bolts. 4. Remove mounting bolts and control module.
5. Reverse procedure to install. Install control module with arrow facing front of vehicle.
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Starting and Charging > Starter Relay >
Starter Relay: Locations
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and
Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: >
05-40-016 > Oct > 05 > A/T - No Movement in 'DRIVE' or 'REVERSE'
Control Module: Customer Interest A/T - No Movement in 'DRIVE' or 'REVERSE'
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 05-40-016
Date: OCTOBER, 2005
Model: ALL
Subject: AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE - NO MOVEMENT IN DRIVE OR REVERSE GEAR
DESCRIPTION:
If you are servicing a vehicle with no movement in drive or reverse gear, follow the procedure
shown below:
REPAIR PROCEDURE:
1. Check for DIG in both the "Engine" and "Automatic Transaxle" menus:
^ If DIG are found, refer to TSB 05-40-008 or 04-40-020 for repair guidance.
^ If no DIG are found, go to Step 2.
2. Remove the dipstick and check the ATF for a strong burnt smell. If the smell does not provide
conclusive results, remove the oil pan and check for metal particles in the pan:
^ If a strong burnt smell or metal particles are found, replace the transaxle
^ If not, go to Step 3
NOTE:
ATF that is a dark brown or black color does not indicate an internal transaxle concern; do not
replace the transaxle. SPIII may change color to a dark brown after 10,000 to 25,000 miles in
service. This change is normal for this type of ATF.
VERIFY THE RANGE SWITCH ADJUSTMENT:
3. Move the shift lever to "N".

05-40-016 > Oct > 05 > A/T - No Movement in 'DRIVE' or 'REVERSE' > Page 301
4. Insert a 5 mm drill or MS (5 mm) bolt in the adjustment hole of the range switch. Check that the
drill or bolt fits into the adjustment holes.
^ If so, go to step 9
5. Loosen the two 10 mm mounting bolts.
6. Disconnect the shift cable at the lever.
7. Insert a 5 mm drill or M5 (5 mm) bolt in the adjustment hole of the range switch. Tighten the two
10 mm mounting bolts to specification.
Specification: 7-8 ft.lb (10-12 Nm, 100-120 kg.cm)

8. Move the shift lever to the N position. Attach the shift cable to the lever and install the nut.
Tighten the nut to specification.
Remove the 5 mm drill or M5 bolt.
VERIFY THE SIGNAL FROM THE RANGE SWITCH:
9. Attach a Hi-Scan Pro and select:
^ "Hyundai Vehicle Diagnosis"
^ Vehicle
^ "Automatic Transaxle" menu
^ "Current Data" menu
^ "Select Lever Switch" and "Shift Position":
10. Move the shift lever to Reverse.
^ Monitor "Select Lever Switch".
^ If "R" is displayed, the TCM is receiving the correct signal from the range switch. Go to Step 11.
^ If not, check the connector at the TCM and the range switch for a bent pin or pin not fully
inserted. Check the wiring harness for an open or short circuit. If ok, replace the range switch.
11. Move the shift lever to Drive.
Monitor "Shift Position" and "Select Lever Switch".
^ If "D" and "GEAR 1" are displayed, the TCM is receiving the correct signal from the range switch.
Go to Step 12.
12. Install the A/T Tester, P/N 09450-AT000, to the vehicle:
Shift the transaxle to "D". Move the gear selector switch of the A/T Tester and shift manually in 1,
2, 3, 4, and 5 gears (if equipped).
NOTE:
Use the "EF, XG" switch for side-pan transaxles and the "LC" switch for bottom-pan transaxles.
^ Disconnect the A/T Tester from the solenoid. Do not reconnect the harness connector to the
solenoid. Shift the transaxle to "R".
^ If no movement, replace the transaxle.
^ If the vehicle moves, check the harness connector at the TCM and the solenoid for a bent pin or
pin not fully inserted. Check the wiring harness for an open or short circuit.
^ If no problem is found, swap a TCM from a similar vehicle and test for movement in Drive and
Reverse. If the vehicle moves in Drive and Reverse, replace the TCM.
Applicable Warranty Applies.

03-40-022 > Dec > 03 > A/T - Fail Safe Mode/Erratic/Hard Shifting/DTC's Set
Control Module: Customer Interest A/T - Fail Safe Mode/Erratic/Hard Shifting/DTC's Set
Group 40 - TRANSAXLE
Number 03-40-022
Date 12-2003
Model ACCENT 1996-2004, ELANTRA 1996-2000 AND TIBURON 1997-2001
Subject AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE PULSE GENERATOR DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES

P0717 & P0722
This TSB supersedes TSB 01-40-006-1 to update the repair procedure.
DESCRIPTION:
An improperly functioning pulse generator on a 1996-2000 Elantra, 1997-2001 Tiburon or

1996-2004 Accent may result in the following conditions:
NOTE
These conditions may be intermittent and difficult to duplicate: ^
Diagnostic Trouble Codes:
^ P0717 - No pulse generator-A signal
^ P0722 - No pulse generator-B signal
^ P1624 - MIL-On request from TCM
^ Third-gear "Fail-Safe" condition and/or "Check Engine" light on
^ Harsh, delayed or erratic 1-2 upshift
^ Harsh or erratic 2-1 downshift during light acceleration Vehicle "bucking" and/or hesitation
REPAIR PROCEDURE:
1. Follow the procedure shown below according to vehicle and production dates shown.
03-40-022 > Dec > 03 > A/T - Fail Safe Mode/Erratic/Hard Shifting/DTC's Set > Page 309
2. Check for DTC in both the "Engine" and "Automatic Transaxle" menus. If you have the DTC,
perform the repair procedure.
3. Clean both ends of the pulse generator connectors and the connectors to the TCM with aerosol
electrical contact cleaner such as:
^ NAPA Electronic Cleaner, P/N 765-1843 or
MOPAR MP-50 Electrical Contact Cleaner, P/N 04549626 or equivalent
4. Reconnect the pulse generator connector. For 1996-2000 MY Elantra vehicles only, remove the
connector from the transaxle bracket. Leave the connector loose on the transaxle case to prevent
any tension on the harness.
5. Test drive the vehicle for at least two key-on to key-off driving cycles (including 1-2-3-4 upshifts
and 4-3-2-1 downshifts):
^ If P0722 recurs, go to Step 6.
6. For 1996-2000 MY Elantra vehicles or 1996-2000 MY Accent vehicles, replace the reed switch
on the speedometer. For 1997-2001 MY Tiburon vehicles, replace the vehicle speed sensor on the
transaxle. Test drive the vehicle for at least two key-on to key-off driving cycles (including 1-2-3-4
upshifts and 4-3-2-1 downshifts):
^ If P0717 or P0722 recur, go to Step 7.

7. Replace the TCM. Test drive the vehicle for at least two key-on to key-off driving cycles
(including 1-2-3-4 upshifts and 4-3-2-1 downshifts):
8. Replace the wiring harness between the TCM and pulse generators.
PARTS INFORMATION
02-40-010 > Mar > 02 > A/T - Harsh/Delayed Gear Engagement
Control Module: Customer Interest A/T - Harsh/Delayed Gear Engagement
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 02-40-010
Date: 03-2002
Model: Accent 1996-2002 Elantra 1996-2000 Tiburon 1997-2001
Subject: AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE HARSH OR DELAYED PARK-REVERSE OR PARK-DRIVE

ENGAGEMENT
DESCRIPTION:
If you are servicing a transaxle for harsh or delayed engagement during the Park to Reverse or
Park to Drive shift, compare the vehicle with another vehicle of the same year and model. If the
engagement shock or delay is more noticeable than other vehicles, follow the repair procedure
shown below:
REPAIR PROCEDURE:
1. Check the ATF level when the engine is idling in "N" according to TSB 01-40-013. Adjust the
ATF level as needed.
2. Check that idle speed is within specification. If not, inspect the Idle Speed Actuator according to
the appropriate shop manual, Fuel System Section.
3. Check the engine and transaxle mounting brackets and roll support brackets for broken or
deteriorated mounts. If necessary, replace the mounts.
4. Attach the Hi-Scan Pro and check for Diagnostic Trouble Codes in both the "ENGINE" and
"AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE" menu. If DTCs are found, repair according to the appropriate TSB or
shop manual.
5. Attach the Hi-Scan Pro and select "HYUNDAI VEHICLE DIAGNOSIS" menu, "AUTOMATIC
TRANSAXLE" menu, "CURRENT DATA" menu and "FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR". Confirm
the oil temperature sensor operates correctly as shown. If not, replace the oil temperature sensor.
^ Select: "HYUNDAI VEHICLE DIAGNOSIS" menu.
^ Select: "AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE" menu.
^ Select: "FLIGHT RECORD".
^ Select: "PCSV-A DUTY" and "PCSV-B DUTY" as shown, then F1 "FIX".
^ Select: F6 "RCD", ENTER and F5 "TRIG".

^ Move the shift selector to "R" or "D", then select F6 "END".
^ Select F1 "GRPH".
A. HARSH OR DELAYED PARK-REVERSE ENGAGEMENT:
Select "PCSV-A" and "PCSV-B".
NOTE
02-40-010 > Mar > 02 > A/T - Harsh/Delayed Gear Engagement > Page 315
Prior to 6/1/99 production, select "PCSV".
Confirm the TCM adjusts the duty during the P-R shift for the PCSV-A and PCSV-B as shown. If
not, replace the TCM.
Toggle the left and right keys to measure the start and end of the shift, then subtract the two
numbers. If the PR shift requires:
^ More than 2.0 seconds: Swap a TCM from a properly operating vehicle.
^ If the condition is improved, replace the TCM.
^ If the condition is not improved, replace the transaxle.
^ 2.0 seconds or less: Go to Step 7.
B. HARSH OR DELAYED PARK-DRIVE ENGAGEMENT:
NOTE
Confirm the TCM adjusts the duty during the P-D shift for the PCSV-A and PCSV-B as shown. If
numbers. If the PD or N-D shift requires:
7. If Steps 1-6 indicate all components are within specification and no DTCs are found, compare
the vehicle with another vehicle of the same year and model. If the engagement shock or delay is:
^ Similar to other vehicles: Advise the customer the engagement is normal for that model/year
^ More noticeable than other vehicles: Replace the transaxle.

WARRANTY INFORMATION - (TCM DIAGNOSIS)

00-40-009 > Aug > 00 > A/T - Shift Solenoid Incorrect Operation/MIL ON
Control Module: Customer Interest A/T - Shift Solenoid Incorrect Operation/MIL ON
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 00-40-009
Date: AUGUST, 2000
Model: ALL
symptoms:
^ Erratic shift
^ MIL illuminated
NOTE:
REPAIR PROCEDURE:
NOTE:
Step 6:
cable.
NOTE:
00-40-009 > Aug > 00 > A/T - Shift Solenoid Incorrect Operation/MIL ON > Page 321
NOTE:
All models:
NOTE:


NOTE:

SONATA:
NOTE:
00-40-010 > Aug > 00 > A/T - MIL ON DTCs P0712/P0713 Set
Control Module: Customer Interest A/T - MIL ON DTCs P0712/P0713 Set
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 00-40-010
Date: AUGUST, 2000
Model: ALL
Subject: AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE OIL TEMPERATURE SENSOR DIAGNOSIS
DESCRIPTION: An automatic transaxle oil temperature sensor with an OPEN circuit may result in
the following symptoms:
^ Harsh P-R or P-D engagement
^ No 4th gear engagement (1996-2000 Elantra & Tiburon1 1995-2001 Accent)
^ 2nd Gear Hold (1999-2001 Sonata)
^ Damper clutch not engaged
^ MIL illuminated
^ Diagnostic Trouble Code: P0713 - Fluid temperature sensor - open circuit
An automatic transaxle oil temperature sensor with a SHORT circuit may result in the following
symptoms:
^ 2-3 shift flare (Accent, Elantra, Tiburon)
^ MIL illuminated
^ Diagnostic Trouble Code: P0712 - Fluid temperature sensor - short circuit
If you are servicing a vehicle with these symptoms, please apply the following Repair
Procedure.
REPAIR PROCEDURE:
1. Disconnect the connectors between the oil temperature sensor and TCM. Check for bent pins or
pins not fully inserted in the connector. Repair as necessary
2. Measure the resistance of the harness between the sensor connector and TCM connector. Refer
to the appropriate ETM to find the correct pin terminals. If the resistance is:
3. Attach a Hi-Scan Pro to the Data Link Connector (DLC) and select: "Hyundai Vehicle Diagnosis"
menu, "Automatic Transaxle" menu and "Diagnostic Trouble Codes". It the readout indicates:
^ DTC P0712 or P0713 - Replace the oil temperature sensor
^ No DTC-gotostep4
00-40-010 > Aug > 00 > A/T - MIL ON DTCs P0712/P0713 Set > Page 328
4. With the Hi-Scan Pro attached to the Data Link Connector, select: "Hyundai Vehicle Diagnosis"
menu, "Automatic Transaxle" menu, "Current Data" menu and "Temperature Sensor". Check
"Temperature Sensor" when the ATF is cold and hot. The oil temperature sensor is operating
correctly if the readout is:
5. If the temperature sensor does not read as in Step 4, replace the oil temperature sensor.
PARTS INFORMATION:
00-40-011 > Aug > 00 > A/T - Harsh Shifts, DTCs P0717/P0722 Set
Control Module: Customer Interest A/T - Harsh Shifts, DTCs P0717/P0722 Set
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 00-40-011
Date: AUGUST, 2000
Model: ALL EXCEPT SONATA
Subject: PULSE GENERATOR ANALYSIS
DESCRIPTION: The following conditions may be caused by an improperly functioning pulse

generator. The conditions may be intermittent and difficult to duplicate.
^ Delayed or erratic 1-2 shift, with engine hot or cold
^ Harsh 1-2 shift
^ Harsh 2-1 downshift, at a higher speed than the normally scheduled downshift
^ Erratic downshift during light acceleration
^ Vehicle "Bucking" and/or Hesitation

The following diagnostic codes (DTC) may be stored in memory in the transaxle control module
TCM):
Note 1:
Always check the "Engine" and "Automatic Transaxle" menus in the HDS ScanTool or Hi-Scan Pro
for additional codes.
Note 2:
The illustrated DTCs may be induced by an incorrect output of the PG-B and do NOT necessarily
indicate a mechanical condition exists in the transaxle
SERVICE PROCEDURE:
1. Check for DTCs using the Scantool or HI-Scan Pro. If you find:
^ DTCs P0717 or P0722: Replace the pulse generators. Go to Step 4.
^ No DTCs: Go to Step 2
00-40-011 > Aug > 00 > A/T - Harsh Shifts, DTCs P0717/P0722 Set > Page 333
2. Disconnect the pulse generator connector.
3. Use a DVOM to measure the resistance between male pins 1-2 and 3-4 of the pulse generators.
If the resistance is:
^ Below 215 ohms or above 275 ohms, replace the pulse generators
^ Within 215-275 ohms, go to Step 4
4. Using small needle nose pliers, gently twist the male pins in the pulse generator main connector
approximately ten (10) degrees clockwise to ensure electrical contact.
Clean both ends of the pulse generator connector with aerosol electrical contact cleaner such as
NAPA Electronic Cleaner, P/N 765-1843 or MOPAR MP-50 Electrical Contact Cleaner, P/N
04549626 or equivalent.
5. Reconnect the pulse generator connector.
6. Remove the connector from the transaxle mounting bracket. Leave the connector loose on the
transaxle case to prevent any tension on the harness.
7. Verify the correct operation of the pulse generator according to the procedure shown below:
A. Connect the Scan Tool or Hi-Scan Pro to the DLC.
B. From the Menu, select "Vehicle Diagnosis", "Automatic Transaxle" and "Current Data".
C. Drive the vehicle at a steady speed in third gear with the overdrive switch off while an assistant
monitors PG-A and PG-B. Check that both PG-A and PG-B are approximately equal to the engine
rpm in third gear. If so, the pulse generators are functioning properly.
D. Select "Hyundai Vehicle Diagnosis", "Automatic Transaxle" and "Diagnostic Trouble Code".
Confirm the DTCs have not returned.
00-36-006 > Mar > 00 > TPS - Driveability Concerns
Control Module: Customer Interest TPS - Driveability Concerns
Number 00-36-006
Date MARCH, 2000
DESCRIPTION:
^ Unstable idle
REPAIR INFORMATION:


00-36-006 > Mar > 00 > TPS - Driveability Concerns > Page 339
PARTS INFORMATION

99-40-017 > Dec > 99 > A/T - Shift Lever Will Not Shift Out Of Park
Control Module: Customer Interest A/T - Shift Lever Will Not Shift Out Of Park
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 99-40-017
Date: DECEMBER, 1999
Model: 1996-99 ACCENT, ELANTRA & TIBURON
Subject: 1996-99 ACCENT, ELANTRA & TIBURON AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION SHIFT LEVER
WILL NOT SHIFT OUT OF PARK
DESCRIPTION:
Some 1996-99 Accent, Elantra and Tiburon vehicles equipped with automatic transmissions may
not shift out of Park when the ignition key is in the "ON" position and the brake pedal is depressed.
If you are servicing a vehicle with this condition, please confirm that the customer follows the
procedure shown below:
1. Start the engine.
2. Press the brake pedal.
3. Press the shift release button to move the shift lever.
NOTE:
If the customer applies pressure on the shift lever before depressing the brake pedal, the shift lever
may bind and not release from Park.
If the condition is confirmed, please follow the service procedure shown below.
SERVICE PROCEDURE:
1. Check the following fuses in the dash fuse box (located on the left kick panel under the steering
column).
^ Accent - # 4 Stop Lamp, # 10 Cluster, # 14 ATM interlock.
^ Elantra / Tiburon - # 3 Stop Lamp, # 9 Backup Lamp, # 14 ATM Interlock.
Replace the fuse if it is blown.

99-40-017 > Dec > 99 > A/T - Shift Lever Will Not Shift Out Of Park > Page 344
2. Locate the A/T shift lock module under the dash:
3. Test the stop lamp switch:
Probe the green (G) wire on the backside of the connector to the A/T shift and key lock control
module with a voltmeter positive lead. (It may be necessary to use a pin or paper clip to probe the
wire.) Connect the negative lead to ground. Test the stop lamp switch as shown in image.
If the voltage is correct, go to step 4.
If the voltage is incorrect, replace the stop lamp switch or repair the wiring. Go to step 4.
4. Test the A/T shift lock solenoid:
Probe the red/green (R/G) wire on the backside of the connector to the A/T shift and key lock
control module with a voltmeter positive lead. Connect the negative lead to ground.Test the A/T
shift lock solenoid as shown in image.
If the voltage is incorrect, replace the A/T shift lock solenoid or repair the wiring. Go to step 5.
5. Test the park position switch:
Probe the red (R) wire on the backside of the connector to the A/T shift and key lock control
module with a voltmeter positive lead. Connect the negative lead to ground.
If the voltage is correct, go to step 6
If the voltage is incorrect, replace the park position switch or repair the wiring. Go to step 6.
6. If the above components test within specification, replace the A/T shift and key lock control
module.
PARTS INFORMATION:
99-40-002 > Mar > 99 > A/T - 2 to 3 Gear Upshift Flare
Control Module: Customer Interest A/T - 2 to 3 Gear Upshift Flare
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 99-40-002
Date MARCH, 1999
Model: 1996-98 ACCENT SOHC ELANTRA & TIBURON

Subject AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE 2-3 SHIFT FLARE
DESCRIPTION: Some Accent, Elantra and Tiburon vehicles may exhibit a slight shift flare during
the upshift from 2nd to 3rd gear (engine speed increases slightly during the 2-3 shift). This
condition occurs at small throttle angles (15-20% TPS) when the automatic transaxle fluid is cold
(below 60°C, 140°F).
If you encounter a vehicle with the above conditions, test drive the vehicle to confirm the
conditions. If the vehicle was produced:
- Prior to the Effective Date: Replace the Transaxle Control Module TCM)
- After the Effective Date: Go To Repair Procedure
REPAIR PROCEDURE:
Kickdown Servo Adjustment:
1. Completely remove all dirt and other contaminating materials adhered around the kickdown
adjust screw.
2. Loosen the lock nut.
3. Loosen and tighten the adjustment screw two times and torque to 5 N.m (3.6 lb.ft.)
4. Tighten adjust screw and torque to 5 N.m (3.6 lb.ft.) and then loosen the adjust screw 3 turns.
5. While holding the adjusting screw in place, tighten the lock nut to the specified torque.
Lock nut; 15-22 N.m (150-220 kg.cm, 11-16 lb.ft)
PARTS INFORMATION:
INTERCHANGEABILITY: A
99-40-002 > Mar > 99 > A/T - 2 to 3 Gear Upshift Flare > Page 351
98-40-013 > Oct > 98 > A/T - Poor 2nd to 1st Gear Low Speed Downshift
Control Module: Customer Interest A/T - Poor 2nd to 1st Gear Low Speed Downshift
Number 98-40-013
Date 10-1998
Model Accent 1997-1998, Elantra 1997-1998 and Tiburon 1997
Subject IMPROVED 2-1 DOWNSHIFT AT LOW SPEEDS
DESCRIPTION
Transaxle control modules (TCMS) for the 1998 Accent and Elantra have been modified to improve
the acceleration following a "rolling stop" at 5-8 mph. These TCMs require a smaller throttle angle
(approximately 50% TPS) to command a 2-1 downshift at low speeds.
For vehicles produced prior to this modification, after a deceleration to 5-8 mph, a larger throttle
angle (above 80% TPS) is needed to command a 2-1 downshift. At throttle angles less than 80%
TPS, the transaxle will not shift into 1st gear, but will remain in 2nd gear. As a result, the vehicle
may feel sluggish or slow to accelerate.
If a customer advises you of this driveability condition for a 1997-98 Accent or Elantra, or Tiburon
1.8L, test drive the vehicle to confirm the condition. If no Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) or other
driveability symptoms are found and the vehicle was produced prior to the effective production
date, install the modified TCM.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Locate the TCM under the driver's side of the lower crash pad, to the left of the brake pedal.
2. Using a 10 mm socket, remove the three bolts that mount the TCM to the body.
3. Install the modified TCM in the reverse order of removal.

98-40-013 > Oct > 98 > A/T - Poor 2nd to 1st Gear Low Speed Downshift > Page 356
PARTS INFORMATION
97-40-027-1 > Dec > 97 > A/T - Poor Downshifts/Shift Flare
Control Module: Customer Interest A/T - Poor Downshifts/Shift Flare
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 97-40-027-1
Model: 1997 TIBURON
1996-97 ACCENT (SOHC) & ELANTRA
Subject AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE 2-3 SHIFT FLARE REDUCTION AND DOWNSHIFT QUALITY
IMPROVEMENT
This TSB supersedes TSB # 97-40-027 to include additional models
DESCRIPTION:
Modified transaxle control modules (TCM) are available for the following shift quality improvements:
^ Reduction of shift flare during the upshift from 2nd to 3rd gear (engine speed increases slightly
during the 2-3 shift). This condition occurs at light throttle angles (15-20% TPS) when the automatic
transaxle fluid is cold (below 60°, 140°F).
^ Improvement of shift quality when a 4-2 downshift is commanded at 75-100% TPS when driving
at a steady speed of 35-60 mph.
The modified TCMs were installed in production beginning with the dates shown below. If you
encounter a vehicle with the above conditions which was produced prior to the effective vehicle
production date shown below, test drive the vehicle to confirm the conditions. If no diagnostic
codes or other driveability symptoms are found, replace the TCM.
PARTS INFORMATION:
97-40-028 > Sep > 97 > A/T - Harsh Engagement Shock
A/T - Harsh Engagement Shock
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 97-40-028
Date: SEPTEMBER, 1997
Model: ALL
Subject PARK-REVERSE OR PARK-DRIVE GEAR ENGAGEMENT SHOCK DIAGNOSIS
DESCRIPTION:
Some vehicles may have a harsh engagement shock when shifting from Park to Reverse or Park to
Drive. This condition may be more pronounced when the automatic transaxle fluid (ATF) is cold. If
you encounter a vehicle with this condition, please follow the diagnostic procedure shown below.
PARTS INFORMATION:
Diagnostic Procedure
1. Inspect the ATF level in "NEUTRAL" with the ATF at normal operating temperature (70-90°C,
158-194°F).
A. If the oil level is low, add ATF to bring the level to the top of the "Full" mark.
B. Inspect the ATF color and smell. If the ATF is black and smells burned, remove the transaxle oil
pan. If metal particles and clutch material are found in the oil pan, replace the transaxle.
2. Check that idle speed is within specification. Adjust, if applicable. (Refer to appropriate Shop
Manual, Fuel System section, "Service Adjustment Procedures").
3. Attach the scan tool to the data link connector (DLC) and select the "Transaxle" menu.
A. Select "Codes" and check for diagnostic codes (DTC). If DTCs are found, repair the condition.
B. Select "Data" and "Trans Temp." Check that the transaxle ATF temperature reads as shown
below. If not, replace the oil temperature sensor.
^ ATF cold - scan tool reads the same temperature as outside air
^ ATF at normal operating temperature- scan tool reads 70-90°C (158-194°F)
C. Select "Data" and "Idle Switch". Check that the idle switch reads as shown below. If not, adjust
or replace the idle switch. (For adjustment
97-40-028 > Sep > 97 > A/T - Harsh Engagement Shock > Page 365
procedures, see TSB # 96-30-004 for 1995-97 Sonata 3.0L or TSB # 97-30-001 for 1995-97
Sonata 2.0L).
^ Engine idling - Idle switch reads "On" or "Closed"
^ Engine rpm increased 100-200 rpm above idle - Idle switch reads "Off" or "Open"
4. Check that the transaxle control module (TCM) commands the pressure control solenoid valve
(PCSV) correctly when Drive or Reverse is selected by either of the following methods. If not,
replace the TCM.
A. Connect the scan tool to the DLC and select "Transaxle" menu, then select "Data". Check that
PCSV duty reads 50-95% momentarily when Drive or Reverse is engaged.
B. Install the J39853 automatic transaxle tester. Observe the PCSV indicator light when Drive or
Reverse is engaged. The light should illuminate briefly during gear engagement.
5. Check the range switch for an internal short circuit using the procedure described in TSB #
97-40-002. If a short circuit in the range switch is found, replace the switch.
6. Check the engine mounts and roll support brackets for broken or deteriorated mounts. If
necessary, replace the mounts.
7. If Steps 1 - 6 indicate that all components are within specification and no DTCs are found,
compare the customer's vehicle with another vehicle of the same year and model. If the customer's
vehicle engagement shock is:
^ Similar to other vehicles - advise the customer that the engagement is normal for that model/year.
^ More noticeable than other vehicles - replace the TCM for vehicles produced PRIOR to the
effective date shown in the PARTS INFORMATION table. For all other vehicles, replace the
transaxle.
97-40-022 > Aug > 97 > A/T - Reverse To Drive Engagement Shock
Control Module: Customer Interest A/T - Reverse To Drive Engagement Shock
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 97-40-022
Date: AUGUST, 1997
Model: ALL
Subject: AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE REVERSE TO DRIVE ENGAGEMENT SHOCK
DESCRIPTION:
If a customer shifts from Reverse to Drive while the vehicle is rolling backwards, a gear
engagement shock may be felt as the forward gear is engaged. The transaxle control modules
(TOM) shown were introduced to reduce this condition. All TCMs produced since the dates shown
have this feature.
The logic of the updated TOM allows the transaxle's rear clutch to slip as the forward gear is
engaged, which prevents the engagement shock. Excessive slipping of the rear clutch may cause
premature wear of the clutch friction material. For this reason, the logic of the TOM is designed as
follows:
^ Below approximately 5 mph in Reverse: The TCM allows slipping of the rear clutch to prevent
engagement shock.
^ Above approximately 5 mph in Reverse: The TCM engages the rear clutch normally, resulting in
an engagement shock.
SERVICE PROCEDURE:
For vehicles produced BEFORE the effective vehicle production date:
If you encounter a customer complaint of reverse to drive engagement shock while rolling
backwards, replace the TOM (refer to the following TSBs: Accent: 96A0-002-2, Elantra: 96A0-010,
Sonata: 96-40-003-1).
For vehicles produced AFTER the effective vehicle production date:
If a customer complains about a reverse to drive shift shock while rolling backwards, please
recommend that the customer shift into Drive at reverse speeds below 5 mph.
PARTS INFORMATION
Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service
Bulletins for Control Module: > tnt1660906-03 > Sep > 06 > A/T, Engine Controls - ECM/TCM Reset/Relearn Procedure
Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T, Engine Controls - ECM/TCM Reset/Relearn
Procedure
MODEL: All
DESCRIPTION:
as shown below.
VEHICLES AFFECTED:
^ All

HI-SCAN PROCEDURE:
^ Select vehicle
press "ENTER"

Bulletins for Control Module: > tnt1660906-03 > Sep > 06 > A/T, Engine Controls - ECM/TCM Reset/Relearn Procedure >
Page 375
NOTE:
upshifts.

Page 376
NOTE:

Bulletins for Control Module: > tnt1630506-01 > May > 06 > A/T Controls - PCM/TCM Reset/Relearn Adaptive Values
Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T Controls - PCM/TCM Reset/Relearn Adaptive
Values

HI-SCAN PROCEDURE:
^ Select vehicle

Bulletins for Control Module: > tnt1630506-01 > May > 06 > A/T Controls - PCM/TCM Reset/Relearn Adaptive Values >
Page 381
NOTE:
upshifts.
Page 382

NOTE:
Bulletins for Control Module: > 06-40-005 > Mar > 06 > A/T Controls - Reset and Relearn Adaptive Values
Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T Controls - Reset and Relearn Adaptive Values
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 06-40-005
Date: MARCH, 2006
Model: ALL

VALUES
DESCRIPTION:

as shown below.
Bulletins for Control Module: > 06-40-005 > Mar > 06 > A/T Controls - Reset and Relearn Adaptive Values > Page 387
HI-SCAN PROCEDURE:
^ Select vehicle
NOTE:
completed as shown.
occur.
NOTE:

Bulletins for Control Module: > 05-40-016 > Oct > 05 > A/T - No Movement in 'DRIVE' or 'REVERSE'
Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T - No Movement in 'DRIVE' or 'REVERSE'
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 05-40-016
Date: OCTOBER, 2005
Model: ALL
DESCRIPTION:
shown below:
REPAIR PROCEDURE:
NOTE:

Bulletins for Control Module: > 05-40-016 > Oct > 05 > A/T - No Movement in 'DRIVE' or 'REVERSE' > Page 393

^ Vehicle
Go to Step 12.
NOTE:

Bulletins for Control Module: > 03-40-022 > Dec > 03 > A/T - Fail Safe Mode/Erratic/Hard Shifting/DTC's Set
Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Fail Safe Mode/Erratic/Hard Shifting/DTC's
Set
Number 03-40-022
Date 12-2003

P0717 & P0722
DESCRIPTION:

NOTE
REPAIR PROCEDURE:
Bulletins for Control Module: > 03-40-022 > Dec > 03 > A/T - Fail Safe Mode/Erratic/Hard Shifting/DTC's Set > Page 401

PARTS INFORMATION
Bulletins for Control Module: > 03-40-005 > Apr > 03 > A/T - DTC's P0731/P0732/P0733/P0734/P0735/P0736
Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T - DTC's

P0731/P0732/P0733/P0734/P0735/P0736
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 03-40-005
Date: APRIL, 2003
Model: ALL
Subject AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES P0731, P0732, P0733,

P0734, P0735, P0736
DESCRIPTION:
The following diagnostic trouble codes (DTC) indicate the transaxle control module (TCM) detected
clutch slippage of more than 200 rpm. If you are servicing a vehicle with one or more of the
following DTCs, go to "Repair Procedure".
REPAIR PROCEDURE:
1. Check for either of the following DTCs in the "Automatic Transaxle" menu:
^ If so, repair according to the procedure in the TSB listed.
^ If not, go to Step 2.
2. Record the exact customer comment. Delete the DTC. Perform the following tests, then follow
the "Repair Procedure" shown below:
^ Attach the A/T Tester and place the transaxle shift lever in "D".
Bulletins for Control Module: > 03-40-005 > Apr > 03 > A/T - DTC's P0731/P0732/P0733/P0734/P0735/P0736 > Page 407
^ Move the gear selector switch of the A/T Tester to 1, 2, 3, 4 and 5 (if equipped) and perform a
stall test in each gear.
^ Use EF.XG knob for 1999~ Sonata, 2001~ Elantra, Santa Fe & XG, 2003~ Tiburon
^ Use LC knob for 1999~ Accent, 1999-2000 Elantra & 1999-2002 Tiburon
^ Refer to the appropriate shop manual for stall test specifications.

^ Disconnect the A/T Tester. Delete any solenoid DTC induced by the A/T Tester.
^ Test drive the vehicle for two key-on to key-off driving cycles when the ATF is hot (above 158°F
or 70° C). Drive the vehicle under similar conditions as reported by the customer. Perform several
1-2-3-4 upshifts and 4-3-2-1 downshifts. Repair as shown.
Bulletins for Control Module: > 03-40-003 > Feb > 03 > A/T - TCM Adaptive Learning Procedure
Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T - TCM Adaptive Learning Procedure
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 03-40-003
Date: FEBRUARY, 2003
Model: ALL
Subject AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE CONTROL MODULE ADAPTIVE LEARNING
This TSB supersedes TSB # 01-40-002 to include additional information.
DESCRIPTION:
The transaxle control module (TCM) internal logic allows the TCM to compensate for mechanical
tolerance changes which may occur during the life of the transaxle due to normal wear. If battery
power is disconnected from the TCM, adaptive learning is cancelled.
Whenever battery power is disconnected from the TCM or a new transaxle is installed, follow the
procedure in this bulletin to restore adaptive learning.
NOTE:
Transaxle shift quality should not be evaluated until adaptive learning has been completed.
TCM logic was revised to allow adaptive learning to occur at a lower temperature on the dates
shown below.
NOTE:
Adaptive learning does not begin until the ATF is above the temperature shown.
ADAPTIVE LEARNING PROCEDURE:
1. Attach a Hi-Scan Pro and select "Automatic Transaxle" menu, "Current Data" menu and "Trans
Temp. Sensor".
2. Drive the vehicle until the ATF temperature is above the temperature shown.
3. Accelerate the vehicle through several 1-2-3-4 upshifts at small throttle openings (approximately
25-30% TPS) until shift flare and shift shock no longer occur.
NOTE:
Adaptive learning for the 2-3 shift takes longer than for the 1-2, or 3-4 shifts.
Bulletins for Control Module: > 02-40-010 > Mar > 02 > A/T - Harsh/Delayed Gear Engagement
Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Harsh/Delayed Gear Engagement
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 02-40-010
Date: 03-2002

ENGAGEMENT
DESCRIPTION:
shown below:
REPAIR PROCEDURE:
shop manual.

^ Select F1 "GRPH".
NOTE
Bulletins for Control Module: > 02-40-010 > Mar > 02 > A/T - Harsh/Delayed Gear Engagement > Page 416
NOTE


Bulletins for Control Module: > 00-40-012 > Sep > 00 > A/T - Diagnostic Trouble Codes & Scanned Data
Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Diagnostic Trouble Codes & Scanned Data
Group TRANSAXLE
Number 00-40-012
Model ALL
DESCRIPTION:
NOTE:
Bulletins for Control Module: > 00-40-012 > Sep > 00 > A/T - Diagnostic Trouble Codes & Scanned Data > Page 422

Bulletins for Control Module: > 00-40-009 > Aug > 00 > A/T - Shift Solenoid Incorrect Operation/MIL ON
Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Shift Solenoid Incorrect Operation/MIL ON
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 00-40-009
Date: AUGUST, 2000
Model: ALL
symptoms:
^ Erratic shift
^ MIL illuminated
NOTE:
REPAIR PROCEDURE:
NOTE:
Step 6:
cable.
NOTE:
Bulletins for Control Module: > 00-40-009 > Aug > 00 > A/T - Shift Solenoid Incorrect Operation/MIL ON > Page 427
NOTE:
All models:
NOTE:


NOTE:

SONATA:
NOTE:
Bulletins for Control Module: > 00-40-010 > Aug > 00 > A/T - MIL ON DTCs P0712/P0713 Set
Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T - MIL ON DTCs P0712/P0713 Set
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 00-40-010
Date: AUGUST, 2000
Model: ALL
^ MIL illuminated
symptoms:
^ MIL illuminated
Procedure.
REPAIR PROCEDURE:
^ No DTC-gotostep4
Bulletins for Control Module: > 00-40-010 > Aug > 00 > A/T - MIL ON DTCs P0712/P0713 Set > Page 434
PARTS INFORMATION:
Bulletins for Control Module: > 00-40-011 > Aug > 00 > A/T - Harsh Shifts, DTCs P0717/P0722 Set
Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Harsh Shifts, DTCs P0717/P0722 Set
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 00-40-011
Date: AUGUST, 2000

^ Harsh 1-2 shift

TCM):
Note 1:
Note 2:
SERVICE PROCEDURE:
Bulletins for Control Module: > 00-40-011 > Aug > 00 > A/T - Harsh Shifts, DTCs P0717/P0722 Set > Page 439
Bulletins for Control Module: > 00-00-001 > Jul > 00 > Scan Tool - Software Update Procedure
Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Scan Tool - Software Update Procedure
Group: GENERAL
Number: 00-00-001
Date: JULY, 2000
Model: ALL
DESCRIPTION
PROCEDURE:
fixes.
SOL card.
Bulletins for Control Module: > 00-00-001 > Jul > 00 > Scan Tool - Software Update Procedure > Page 445
Note:
cards.
utility.
INFO card
COM2.
software cards.
COM2.
software.
NOTE:
Bulletins for Control Module: > 00-36-006 > Mar > 00 > TPS - Driveability Concerns
Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins TPS - Driveability Concerns
Number 00-36-006
Date MARCH, 2000
DESCRIPTION:
^ Unstable idle
REPAIR INFORMATION:


Bulletins for Control Module: > 00-36-006 > Mar > 00 > TPS - Driveability Concerns > Page 455
PARTS INFORMATION

Bulletins for Control Module: > 99-40-017 > Dec > 99 > A/T - Shift Lever Will Not Shift Out Of Park
Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Shift Lever Will Not Shift Out Of Park
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 99-40-017
DESCRIPTION:
NOTE:
SERVICE PROCEDURE:
column).

Bulletins for Control Module: > 99-40-017 > Dec > 99 > A/T - Shift Lever Will Not Shift Out Of Park > Page 460
module.
PARTS INFORMATION:
Bulletins for Control Module: > 99-40-004 > Apr > 99 > A/T - Servicing DTCs P1613/P1614
Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Servicing DTCs P1613/P1614
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 99-40-004
Date: APRIL, 1999
Model: 1996-98 ACCENT SOHC
1996-99 ELANTRA 1997-99 TIBURON
Subject AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE P1613/1614
DESCRIPTION:
If you are servicing a vehicle with P1613 or P1614 stored in memory in the TCM, check the
production date of the vehicle. If the production date is prior to the effective production date listed
below, install the modified TCM.
SERVICE PROCEDURE:
1. Record the customer's preset radio stations.
2. Disconnect the negative battery cable.
3. Locate the TCM underthe dash on the left side of the brake pedal.
4. Remove the three bolts that secure the TCM to the body.
5. Disconnect the two connectors to the TCM.
7. Reconnect the negative battery cable.
8. Reset the customer's preset radio stations and clock.

Bulletins for Control Module: > 99-40-004 > Apr > 99 > A/T - Servicing DTCs P1613/P1614 > Page 467
PARTS INFORMATION
WARRANTY
Bulletins for Control Module: > 99-40-002 > Mar > 99 > A/T - 2 to 3 Gear Upshift Flare
Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T - 2 to 3 Gear Upshift Flare
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 99-40-002
Date MARCH, 1999

(below 60°C, 140°F).
REPAIR PROCEDURE:
adjust screw.
PARTS INFORMATION:
Bulletins for Control Module: > 99-40-002 > Mar > 99 > A/T - 2 to 3 Gear Upshift Flare > Page 472
Bulletins for Control Module: > 98-40-013 > Oct > 98 > A/T - Poor 2nd to 1st Gear Low Speed Downshift
Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Poor 2nd to 1st Gear Low Speed Downshift
Number 98-40-013
Date 10-1998
DESCRIPTION
SERVICE PROCEDURE

Bulletins for Control Module: > 98-40-013 > Oct > 98 > A/T - Poor 2nd to 1st Gear Low Speed Downshift > Page 477
PARTS INFORMATION
Bulletins for Control Module: > 97-40-027-1 > Dec > 97 > A/T - Poor Downshifts/Shift Flare
Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Poor Downshifts/Shift Flare
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 97-40-027-1
Model: 1997 TIBURON
IMPROVEMENT
DESCRIPTION:
PARTS INFORMATION:
Bulletins for Control Module: > 97-40-028 > Sep > 97 > A/T - Harsh Engagement Shock
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 97-40-028
Model: ALL
DESCRIPTION:
PARTS INFORMATION:
158-194°F).
Bulletins for Control Module: > 97-40-028 > Sep > 97 > A/T - Harsh Engagement Shock > Page 486
Sonata 2.0L).
replace the TCM.
transaxle.
Bulletins for Control Module: > 97-40-030 > Sep > 97 > TCM - Adaptive Control
Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins TCM - Adaptive Control
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 97-40-030
Date: SEPTEMBER 1997
Model: ALL
Subject TRANSAXLE CONTROL MODULE ADAPTIVE CONTROL
DESCRIPTION:
Adaptive control is a software feature built into Hyundai transaxle control modules (TCM) to
compensate for:
1. Component parameter drift over time, and
2. Mechanical tolerance changes which may occur during the life of a transaxle due to normal wear
Adaptive control was applied to all TCMs beginning with the 1991 model year. With adaptive
control, the TCM compensates for transaxle clutch clearances that are at the high or low end of the
specification. The TCM measures the time required to complete the shift from N-R and N-D and
compares to a target time of approximately 0.5 - 0.6 seconds. If the shift time is more or less than
the target time, the TCM adjusts the pressure control solenoid valve (PCSV) duty cycle during the
shift to meet the target time. In a similar manner, the TCM adjusts PCSV duty cycle for the upshifts
and downshifts between 1-2, 2-3 and 3-4 gears.
SERVICE PROCEDURE:
Whenever a TCM is installed in a vehicle, the TCM must begin adaptive "learning".
^ If a TCM is disconnected from battery power, the TCM must restore adaptive "learning" after
reconnection to battery power. (DO NOT return the vehicle to the customer until adaptive "learning"
is completed.)
^ If a transaxle was replaced, the TCM must "relearn" adaptive control parameters to accommodate
the new transaxle. Do not conclude that the transaxle has an internal concern until adaptive
"learning" is completed.
The TCM will complete adaptive "learning" during normal driving. Depending on the production
variations within the transaxle, up to ten upshifts and downshifts between 1-2, 2-3 and 3-4 at
varying throttle inputs may be required. Up to ten gear engagements from Neutral to Reverse and
Neutral to Drive may also be required.
Bulletins for Control Module: > 97-40-022 > Aug > 97 > A/T - Reverse To Drive Engagement Shock
Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Reverse To Drive Engagement Shock
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 97-40-022
Date: AUGUST, 1997
Model: ALL
DESCRIPTION:
have this feature.
follows:
engagement shock.
SERVICE PROCEDURE:
Sonata: 96-40-003-1).
PARTS INFORMATION
Bulletins for Control Module: > 97-40-001-1 > Jul > 97 > A/T - Mutual Control Introduction
Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Mutual Control Introduction
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 97-40-001-1
Date: JULY, 1997
Model: ALL
production dates.
DESCRIPTION:
ANALYSIS:
2. TPS above 1.2 V

rpm for 10 minutes
1997 Sonata 2.0L & 3.0L July 1, 1996

Bulletins for Control Module: > 97-40-001-1 > Jul > 97 > A/T - Mutual Control Introduction > Page 499
1997 Tiburon 1.8L & 2.0L July 1, 1996
PARTS INFORMATION:
Bulletins for Control Module: > 97-40-021 > Jul > 97 > A/T - Cold Acceleration in 2ND Gear
Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Cold Acceleration in 2ND Gear
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 97-40-021
Date: JULY, 1997
Model: ALL
Subject: VEHICLE ACCELERATION WHEN COLD (2ND GEAR AUTOMATIC SELECTION)
DESCRIPTION:
Following an initial "cold" start, when the transaxle is shifted from "Park" to "Drive", up to 1.5
seconds may pass before the transaxle shifts into gear. The transaxle initially shifts into 2nd gear to
reduce vehicle "creep" at idle when the transaxle is in "Drive". When the accelerator is pressed, the
transaxle will shift into 1st gear. If the accelerator is pressed before the initial shift into 2nd gear
(creep) is completed, the driver may feel the transaxle shift into 2nd gear and then into 1st gear.
This shift engagement into 2nd and then 1st feels more noticeable when the automatic transaxle
fluid (ATF) is cold. For this reason, the logic of the transaxle control module (TCM) is designed to
improve the shift engagement feeling when the ATF is below the temperatures shown below.
Below these temperatures, the transaxle will accelerate from a stop in 2nd gear without
downshifting into 1st gear. Originally, this temperature specification was 0°C (32°F), but was
changed to 11°C (52°F) (36°C (97°F) for the Sonata 3.0L) on the production dates shown below.
If a customer comments that the vehicle has poor acceleration or seems to accelerate in 2nd gear
during the first acceleration in the morning, please explain the above information to the customer.
(SEE TABLE BELOW FOR EFFECTIVE VEHICLE PRODUCTION DATE AND VIN)
EFFECTIVE PRODUCTION DATE AND VIN:

Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins
for Control Module: > 98-40-001 > Jan > 98 > A/T - Harsh 4-3 Downshift When Decelerating
Procedure
MODEL: All
DESCRIPTION:
as shown below.
VEHICLES AFFECTED:
^ All

HI-SCAN PROCEDURE:
^ Select vehicle
press "ENTER"

for Control Module: > 98-40-001 > Jan > 98 > A/T - Harsh 4-3 Downshift When Decelerating > Page 509
NOTE:
upshifts.

for Control Module: > 98-40-001 > Jan > 98 > A/T - Harsh 4-3 Downshift When Decelerating > Page 510
NOTE:

for Control Module: > 97-40-031 > Sep > 97 > A/T - Driveability Concerns
Values

HI-SCAN PROCEDURE:
^ Select vehicle

for Control Module: > 97-40-031 > Sep > 97 > A/T - Driveability Concerns > Page 515
NOTE:
upshifts.
for Control Module: > 97-40-031 > Sep > 97 > A/T - Driveability Concerns > Page 516

NOTE:
Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 517
Control Module: Specifications Control Module Specifications
Control Module Specifications
Rated Voltage 12 V
Operating Voltage Range 10 - 16 V
Rated Load min. 1A
At Solenoid Load.
Operating Temperature Range -22 / 176 Deg. F

Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Control
Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection
Heated Glass Control Module: Testing and Inspection
REAR WINDOW HEATED TIMER
1. After removing the shroud under cover, remove the rear window heated timer.
2. Time specification
T1: MIN. 0.5 sec. T2: 15 ± 3 min.
REAR DEFOGGER TIMER INSPECTION
If the heated switch is depressed while the ignition switch is ON, the heated timer operates for 15 ±
3 minutes. Even while the heated timer is in operation, depressing the heated switch again or
turning the ignition switch OFF, the heated timer operation will stop. After tracing the proper
operation. If the system operates properly, the original heated timer is faulty.
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Control
Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 522
Heated Glass Control Module: Service and Repair
REAR WINDOW HEATED TIMER
1. After removing the shroud under cover, remove the rear window heated timer.
2. Time specification
T1: MIN. 0.5 sec. T2: 15 ± 3 min.
REAR DEFOGGER TIMER INSPECTION
If the heated switch is depressed while the ignition switch is ON, the heated timer operates for 15 ±
3 minutes. Even while the heated timer is in operation, depressing the heated switch again or
turning the ignition switch OFF, the heated timer operation will stop. After tracing the proper
operation. If the system operates properly, the original heated timer is faulty.
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Windows and Glass > Power Window Relay >
Power Window Relay: Locations
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Relay >
Component Information > Specifications
Wiper Relay: Specifications Intermittent Wiper Relay Specifications
Intermittent Wiper Relay Specifications
Voltage 12 V
Load Capacity Range max. 6A

Component Information > Specifications > Page 530
Wiper Relay: Testing and Inspection
INSPECTION
The intermittent relay operating time is controlled by variable resistance. If the problem has been
traced to the intermittent relay, replace it with a new one.
Check for proper operation. It the system operates properly, the original intermittent relay was
faulty.
1. Wiper
1. Operating characteristic 2. T1 : 0.5 secs or below
T2 : Time required for the wiper to rotate 1 cycle. T3 : 1.5 ± 10.7 (VR = 0 K Ohms) - 10K.5 ± 3 secs
(VR=50 K Ohms)
3. Variable resistor (VR) : 50 ± 10 K Ohms 4. Relay operation noise: Below 50 dB/20 cm
2. Washer
1. Operating characteristic 2. T1 : 0.4 - 1.2 sec
T2 : 2.0 - 4.7 sec
3. This function has then priority to the intermittent wiper operation.

Wiper Relay: Service and Repair
INTERMITTENT WIPER RELAY
REMOVAL
1. After removing the shroud under cover, remove the intermittent wiper relay from the cowl cross
member (Left bottom side of the driver's seat)
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment >
Lock Cylinder Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection
Lock Cylinder Switch: Testing and Inspection
KEY LOCK SOLENOID
1. Remove the solenoid connector.
2. Using an ohmmeter, measure the resistance between terminals.
Resistance between terminals : 12.5-16.5 Ohms
3. Attach the positive (+) lead from the battery to terminal #2 and the negative (-) lead to terminal 1.
4. Check that an operating noise can be heard from the solenoid.
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch >
Power Mirror Switch: Testing and Inspection
POWER DOOR MIRROR SWITCH
INSPECTION
1. Remove the mirror switch from the cluster facia panel.

2. Operate the switch and check for continuity between the terminals. If continuity is not as
specified, replace the mirror switch.
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Fluid
Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations
E23 - E24
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Parking
Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations
M25 - M28
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel
Speed Sensor > Component Information > Specifications > Electrical Specifications
Wheel Speed Sensor: Electrical Specifications
Standard resistance .............................................................................................................................

....................................................... 1000 - 1200 ohms
Speed Sensor > Component Information > Specifications > Electrical Specifications > Page 552
Wheel Speed Sensor: Mechanical Specifications
TIGHTENING SPECIFICATIONS
Front ....................................................................................................................................................
.................................................... 9 Nm (6 ft. lbs.) Rear ......................................................................
................................................................................................................................ 16 Nm (12 ft. lbs.)
Speed Sensor > Component Information > Specifications > Page 553
Wheel Speed Sensor: Locations
M38 Left Rear Wheel Sensor
M77 Right Front Wheel Speed Sensor
M73 Right Rear Wheel Sensor

E36 (Left Front Wheel Sensor)

Wheel Speed Sensor: Description and Operation
PURPOSE
At each wheel hub there is a tone wheel and an inductive sensor, which supplies wheel speed
information to the ABS Control Module (ABSCM).
OPERATION
The sensor is comprised of a magnet and a pole piece surrounded by a coil. When the tone wheel
rotates adjacent to the sensor pole piece, an alternating current signal is generated in the coil with
a frequency proportional to wheel speed. A special integrated circuit in the ABSCM translates the
generated AC signal to a square wave. This square wave is used by the microprocessor to operate
the ABS.
Wheel Speed Sensor: Testing and Inspection
1. Connect an ohmmeter between the wheel speed sensor terminals and measure the resistance.
Service standard: 1000 - 1200 ohms
2. Connect a voltmeter between the wheel speed sensor terminals, and measure the voltage by
turning the wheel.
NOTE: Set the voltmeter to measure AC voltage.
Service standard: AC voltage detected.

Speed Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Wheel Speed Sensor
Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Front Wheel Speed Sensor
1. Remove the front wheel speed sensor mounting bolt.
2. Remove the front wheel speed sensor after letting the wheel guard down by removing some of
the wheel guard mounting screws and disconnecting
the wheel speed sensor connector.
3. Install in reverse order, noting the following:
- Tighten sensor hardware to 9 Nm (6 ft. lbs.)

Speed Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Wheel Speed Sensor > Page 559
Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Rear Wheel Speed Sensor
1. Remove the rear seat cushion. 2. Remove the rear pillar trim assembly. 3. Remove the tire
assembly. 4. Remove the rear wheel speed sensor after disconnection the wheel speed sensor
connector. 5. Install in reverse order, noting the following:
- Tighten sensor hardware to 16 Nm (12 ft. lbs.)

Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant
Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor - Diagnosis
Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Technical Service Bulletins Engine Coolant
Temperature Sensor - Diagnosis
Number: 98-36-006
Date: AUGUST, 1998
Model: ALL
DESCRIPTION:
engine is cold.
Service Bulletins > Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor - Diagnosis > Page 566
DIAGNOSTIC HINTS:
USING A VOLTMETER:
USING A SCAN TOOL:
SENSOR INSPECTION:
resistance.
INSTALLATION:

Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Technical Service Bulletins Engine Fault
Code - Diagnostic Manual Update
Number: 98-36-003
Date: APRIL, 1998
Model: ALL
Subject 1997 FAULT CODE DIAGNOSTIC MANUAL UPDATE (CODE P0125)
DESCRIPTION:
This TSB provides updated information for diagnostic code P0125 (Delayed closed loop operation).
A P0125 code may be set by inaccurate readings from the Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT)
sensor or may also be set by an oxygen sensor reading.
Please discard pages P0125-1 and P0125-2 in the 1997 Engine Fault Code Diagnostic Manual
(OBD-II), part no. NP150-07001, and insert this page for future reference.
Number: 98-36-001
Date: APRIL, 1998
DESCRIPTION
^ Oxygen sensors
^ Air flow sensor
emissions.
the A/F ratio.
performance.
the code was set.
stored in the PCM.
Note:

PCM.

load value.
Fuel Trim code.
and re-test.
this TSB.

Trim code.
and re-test.
TSB.
Note:
Note:
D. Select "Engine"
E. Select "Data"
the scan tool.
Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information >
Specifications > Electrical Specifications
Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Electrical Specifications
Resistance 22.22 to 31.78 K ohms at -30 deg C
8.16 to 10.74 K ohms at -10 deg C
5.18 to 6.60 K ohms at 0 deg C

1.059 to 1.281 K ohms at 40 deg C
0.538 to 0.650 K ohms at 60 deg C
0.298 to 0.322 K ohms at 80 deg C
0.219 to 0.243 K ohms at 90 deg C
Tightening torque 11 to 15 ft.lb
Voltage 4.05 V at 0 deg C
Note: ECT Sensor side connector No. 2 or ECM harness side
connector No. 78
3.44 V at 20 deg C
2.72 V at 40 deg C
1.25 V at 80 deg C
Specifications > Electrical Specifications > Page 578
Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Mechanical Specifications
8.16 to 10.74 K ohms at -10 deg C

1.059 to 1.281 K ohms at 40 deg C
0.538 to 0.650 K ohms at 60 deg C
0.298 to 0.322 K ohms at 80 deg C
0.219 to 0.243 K ohms at 90 deg C
connector No. 78
3.44 V at 20 deg C
2.72 V at 40 deg C
1.25 V at 80 deg C
Specifications > Page 579
Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions
Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Diagram Information and Instructions


Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 582
Connector View
CONNECTOR VIEW
Numbering Order
NUMBERING ORDER

Electrical Diagram
Harness Layouts
Harness Layout

B ..........................................................................................................................................................
......................................................................... Black L .......................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
Blue Br .................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................... Brown G ...............................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
...... Green Gr .......................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................ Gray Lg ...................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
....... Light Green O ..............................................................................................................................
................................................................................................... Orange P .........................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
............................... Pink R ..................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................... Red W .............................
..............................................................................................................................................................
....................................... White Y ........................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................... Yellow Li ....................
..............................................................................................................................................................
......................................... Light Blue
Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Diagnostic Aids
CAUTION
CAUTION
may result.
lamp or ohmmeter.

box and the short.
Testing For Voltage
Testing For Voltage
CAUTION
Page 595
Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Description and Operation
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE (ECT) SENSOR
The engine coolant temperature sensor is installed in the engine coolant passage of the cylinder
head, detects engine coolant temperature and emits signals to the ECM. This part employs a
thermistor which is sensitive to changes in temperature. The electric resistance of a thermistor
decreases in response to temperature rise. The ECM judges engine coolant temperature by the
sensor output voltage and provides optimum fuel enrichment when the engine is cold.
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
Page 596
Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Testing and Inspection
HARNESS INSPECTION PROCEDURES

SENSOR INSPECTION
1. Remove the engine coolant temperature sensor from the intake manifold. 2. With temperature
sensing portion of engine coolant temperature sensor immersed in hot water, check resistance. 3.
If the resistance deviates from the standard value greatly, replace the sensor.
Page 597
DTC P0116, P0117, P0118 - Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor
If the fast idle speed is not high enough or the engine gives off dark smoke during the engine
warm-up operation, it might be caused by the engine coolant temperature sensor.
USING VOLTMETER
Page 598
Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Service and Repair

REMOVAL
1. Drain the coolant down to sensor unit level or below. 2. Disconnect the battery ground cable and
disconnect the engine harness. 3. Remove the engine coolant temperature gauge unit and sensor.
4. To test sensor, refer to Testing and Inspection.
INSTALLATION
1. Apply Loctite 962T or equivalent sealant to the threaded portion of the sensor. 2. Tighten to
15-20 Nm (150-200 kg. cm, 7-9 ft. lbs.). 3. Connect the harness to the coolant temperature sender,
sensor. 4. Connect the battery ground cable. 5. Refill with coolant.
Temperature Sensor/Switch > Temperature Sensor (Gauge) > Component Information > Diagrams
Temperature Sensor/Switch > Temperature Sensor (Gauge) > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 602
Temperature Sensor (Gauge): Testing and Inspection
1. Heat the Engine coolant temperature gauge by submerging it in hot engine coolant. 2. Check
that the resistance is within the specified range.
Resistance At 70°C (158°F): 90.5-117.5 ohms. Resistance At 115°C (239°F): 21.3-26.3 ohms.
Temperature Sensor/Switch > Temperature Sensor (Gauge) > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 603
Temperature Sensor (Gauge): Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Drain the coolant down to sensor level or below. 2. Disconnect the battery ground cable and
disconnect the engine harness connector from the sensor. 3. Remove the sensor.
INSTALLATION
1. Apply suitable sealant to the threaded portion and tighten to 15-20 Nm (150-200 kg.cm, 11-14 ft.
lbs.) 2. Connect the harness connector to the coolant temperature sensor. 3. Connect the battery to
ground cable. 4. Refill the system with clean coolant.
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sender >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Operation Check
Oil Pressure Sender: Testing and Inspection Operation Check
1. If "OIL PRESSURE" indicating lamp lights when ignition switch is set to "ON" and goes out when
engine is started and runs at idle, then
everything is in order. If "OIL PRESSURE'' lamp does not light when ignition switch is set to "ON,"
check switch, lamp and wiring.
2. If there is current flow when ignition switch is set to "ON" and if there is no current flow when
engine is running at idle, switch is good. 3. If switch is good, check lamp and wiring.
Pressure of oil switch operation: 14.71-29.42 kPa (0.15-0.3 kg/sq cm, 2.1-4.3 psi)
4. Using the socket wrench tool No. 09260-32000), or equivalent, tighten the switch to 8-12 Nm
(80-120 kg. cm, 5.8-8.7 ft. lbs.).
CAUTION: Do not over torque the oil pressure switch.

Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Operation Check > Page 609
Oil Pressure Sender: Testing and Inspection Inspection
1. Using a suitable ohmmeter, check the continuity between the terminal and the body. If there is
no continuity, replace the oil pressure switch. 2. Insert a fine wire shown in the illustration, then
check the continuity between the terminal and the body when the wire is pushed. If there is
continuity even when the wire is pushed, replace the switch.
3. Connect a suitable vacuum pump with gauge to the switch oil hole, then apply a 50 kPa (7 psi)
vacuum. 4. If there is no continuity when the vacuum is applied through the oil hole, the switch is
operating properly. 5. Check to see that air doesn't leak. If air leaks, the diaphragm is broken.
Replace the switch.
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 610
Oil Pressure Sender: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
Use socket tool No. 09260-3200, or equivalent to remove the oil pressure switch.
INSTALLATION
Installation is the reverse of removal, tighten switch to 13-15 Nm (130-150 kg. cm., 9-11 ft. lbs.).
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Air Conditioning Switch >
Air Conditioning Switch: Testing and Inspection
AIR CONDITIONING SWITCH
1. Check for continuity between terminals as shown.
If continuity is not as specified, replace the switch.

Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Blower Motor Switch > Component
I11, I12, I13, I14

Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Blower Motor Switch > Component
Information > Locations > Page 618
Blower Motor Switch: Testing and Inspection
BLOWER SWITCH
1. Check for continuity between terminals as shown.
If continuity is not as specified, replace the switch.

Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Evaporator Temperature Sensor /
Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection
Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: Testing and Inspection
THERMOSTATIC SWITCH (THERMISTOR)
ON-VEHICLE INSPECTION
1. Remove the glove box assembly. 2. Turn the blower and A/C switches ON. 3. Start the engine.
4. With the thermostatic switch connector in coupled state, install a voltmeter between 2 and 3 (-)
terminal and check whether there is change in
voltage between terminals according to the temperature of the evaporator surface.
NOTE: This check should be carried out on the back probes of the thermostatic switch when it is in
coupled slate.
5. If above condition is not satisfied, remove the evaporator unit and replace the thermostatic
switch.
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor /
Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Description and Operation
Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Description and Operation
DUAL PRESSURE SWITCH
The dual pressure switch is a combination of the low pressure switch (for checking the quantity of
refrigerant) and the high pressure switch (for prevention of overheating). It is installed in the
receiver, and, when the pressure becomes approximately 200 kPa (29 psi) or lower, the
compressor stops, thus preventing the compressor from being damaged by heat.
When the pressure reaches 3,241 kPa (470 psi) or higher, the compressor stops, thus preventing
overheating. There is generally no necessity for inspection; if, however, an unusual condition, such
as non-operation of the compressor is encountered, check by following the procedures below.
Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 625
Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Testing and Inspection
ON-VEHICLE INSPECTION
1. Disconnect connector of the dual pressure switch. 2. Install the manifold gauge set. 3. Observe
the gauge reading. 4. Check the continuity between the two terminals of the dual pressure switch
shown in the image. If defective, replace the dual pressure switch.
Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 626
Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Discharge the air conditioning system. 2. Disconnect connector from the dual pressure switch. 3.
Remove the dual pressure switch using the wrench.
NOTE: -
Cap the open fining immediately to keep moisture out of the system.
- Be careful not to twist tubes.
INSTALLATION
1. Installation is reverse of removal. 2. Evacuate, charge and test refrigeration system.

Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dimmer Switch >
Dimmer Switch: Testing and Inspection
INSPECTION
1. Disconnect the battery negative terminal. 2. Remove the coin box assembly. 3. Disconnect the
rheostat from crash pad harness.
4. Remove the rheostat from the coin box.
5. Check for intensity of lamp load. It the light intensity of the lamps changes smoothly without any
flickering when the rheostat is turned, the
rheostat is normal.
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dimmer Switch >
Dimmer Switch: Service and Repair
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable.
2. Remove the steering wheel. 3. Remove the steering column shroud.
4. Disconnect the harness connectors. 5. Remove the 3 straps. 6. Remove the multifunction switch
assembly by loosening the 4 screws shown in the illustration. 7. Installation is the reverse order of
the removal procedure.
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Fuel Gauge Sender >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Fuel Sender - Resistance Specification
Fuel Gauge Sender: Technical Service Bulletins Fuel Sender - Resistance Specification
Number: 97-90-011
Date: JULY, 1997
Model: 1996-97 ACCENT
1996-97 ELANTRA
Subject: FUEL SENDER RESISTANCE SPECIFICATION (SHOP MANUAL CORRECTION)
DESCRIPTION:
The resistance levels for the fuel sending unit listed in 1996-97 Accent and Elantra Shop Manuals
Volume 2 are incorrect.
The correct fuel sender resistance specifications are listed below.
Please make the correction as indicated, and write the TSB number at the bottom of the page in
the appropriate Shop Manuals for future reference.
Model Year Affected Pages
Accent 1996 BE-35
Accent 1997 BE-35
Elantra 1996 BE-64
Elantra 1997 BE-64
Correct values for Accent fuel sender resistance specification:
Correct values for Elantra fuel sender resistance specification:

Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Fuel Gauge Sender >
Fuel Gauge Sender: Testing and Inspection
FUEL SENDER INSPECTION
1. Remove the rear seat cushion. 2. Remove the fuel tank cover retaining screws. 3. Remove the
fuel sender assembly.
4. Using an ohmmeter, measure the resistance between terminals 3 and 4 at each float level. 5.
Check that resistance changes smoothly when the float moves from "E" to "F".
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Parking Brake Warning
Switch > Component Information > Locations
M25 - M28
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp Switch
> Component Information > Testing and Inspection
Backup Lamp Switch: Testing and Inspection
BACK UP LAMP
BACK UP LAMP SWITCH (M/T)
1. Remove the back up lamp switch connector.
2. Check for continuity between terminals.

Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Brake Light Switch: > 99-40-017 > Dec > 99 >
A/T - Shift Lever Will Not Shift Out Of Park
Brake Light Switch: Customer Interest A/T - Shift Lever Will Not Shift Out Of Park
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 99-40-017
DESCRIPTION:
NOTE:
SERVICE PROCEDURE:
column).

A/T - Shift Lever Will Not Shift Out Of Park > Page 652
module.
PARTS INFORMATION:
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Brake Light Switch: > 99-40-017 >
Dec > 99 > A/T - Shift Lever Will Not Shift Out Of Park
Brake Light Switch: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Shift Lever Will Not Shift Out Of Park
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 99-40-017
DESCRIPTION:
NOTE:
SERVICE PROCEDURE:
column).

Dec > 99 > A/T - Shift Lever Will Not Shift Out Of Park > Page 660
module.
PARTS INFORMATION:
M14, M16 Stop Lamp Switch

Brake Light Switch: Testing and Inspection
STOP LAMP SWITCH
INSPECTION
1. Remove the stop lamp switch connector located at brake pedal bracket. 2. Make sure that there
is continuity between terminals 1 and 2 when the brake pedal is depressed. 3. Ensure that no
continuity exists between the terminals when the pedal is released.
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Combination Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > With Airbag
Combination Switch: Diagrams With Airbag
COMPONENTS (WITH AIRBAG)

Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Combination Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > With Airbag > Page 669
Combination Switch: Diagrams Without Airbag
COMPONENTS (WITHOUT AIRBAG)

Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning
Hazard Warning Switch: Testing and Inspection
INSPECTION
1. Disconnect the negative battery terminal.
2. Remove the hazard switch from the cluster facia panel. 3. Disconnect the connector from the
harness. 4. Remove the hazard switch locked at digital clock.

Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Dimmer
Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > With Airbag
Headlamp Dimmer Switch: Diagrams With Airbag

Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > With Airbag > Page 677
Headlamp Dimmer Switch: Diagrams Without Airbag

Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 678
Headlamp Dimmer Switch: Testing and Inspection
INSPECTION
With the multifunction switch in each position, make sure that continuity exists between terminals
as shown below.
DIMMER AND PASSING SWITCH (CONNECTOR NO.: M10-1)

Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 679
Headlamp Dimmer Switch: Service and Repair
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Switch >
Headlamp Switch: Testing and Inspection
INSPECTION
as shown below.
LIGHTING SWITCH (CONNECTOR NO.: M10-1)

Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Switch >
Headlamp Switch: Service and Repair
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: > 97-40-031 > Sep > 97 > A/T - Driveability
Concerns
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Customer Interest A/T - Driveability Concerns
Number: 97-40-031
Group: TRANSAXLE
Subject: TRANSAXLE DRIVEABILITY (REFERENCE TO ACCELERATOR SWITCH, TPS AND

IDLE SWITCH ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURE)
Model: ALL
DESCRIPTION: Correct adjustment of the accelerator switch, throttle position sensor (TPS) and
idle switch is essential for proper driveability. An accelerator sWitch, TPS or idle switch out of
adjustment may cause one or more of the following driveability conditions:
^ Park to Reverse or Park to Drive engagement shock
^ Engine speed fluctuation between 1000-1700 rpm during slow cruise at light throttle opening or
during deceleration
^ Harsh 4-3 downshift shock when decelerating to a stop
^ Harsh 1-2 and 2-3 upshift
^ Rough idle
It a vehicle has a driveability condition, verify the adjustment of the accelerator switch (if equipped),
TPS and idle switch according to the procedures in the appropriate Shop Manual. These
components may be checked using the scan tool (select "4-Speed Trans" menu). Adjust these
components if necessary.
For your convenience, the reference pages in each Shop Manual are listed in this TSB.
Note:
TPS is not adjustable on the OBD-II vehicles listed below. For these vehicles, check the operation
of TPS and idle switch at idle and open throttle using the scan tool (select "4-Speed Trans", "Codes
and Data" and "Data" menus).
Concerns > Page 694
ACCENT, ELANTRA, TIBURON
Concerns > Page 695
SONATA
Concerns > Page 696
EXCEL, SCOUPE
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: > 97-40-031 > Sep > 97 > A/T -
Driveability Concerns
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Driveability Concerns
Number: 97-40-031
Group: TRANSAXLE

Model: ALL
during deceleration
^ Rough idle
Note:
Driveability Concerns > Page 702
SONATA
EXCEL, SCOUPE
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Air/Fuel Mixture - Trim Code Diagnosis
Number: 98-36-001
Date: APRIL, 1998
DESCRIPTION
^ Oxygen sensors
^ Air flow sensor
emissions.
the A/F ratio.
Bulletins > Air/Fuel Mixture - Trim Code Diagnosis > Page 709
performance.
the code was set.
stored in the PCM.
Note:

PCM.

load value.
Fuel Trim code.
and re-test.
this TSB.

Trim code.
and re-test.
TSB.
Note:
Note:
D. Select "Engine"
E. Select "Data"
the scan tool.
Bulletins > Page 712
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Specifications MAF meter
MAF meter
Type Hot film type
Output voltage at idle (800 rpm) 0.7 to 1.1 V
Note: MAF sensor side connector No. 1 or ECM harness side
connector No. 41
at 3,000 rpm 1.3 to 2.0 V

Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions


Connector View
CONNECTOR VIEW
Numbering Order
NUMBERING ORDER

Electrical Diagram
Harness Layouts
Harness Layout

B ..........................................................................................................................................................
......................................................................... Black L .......................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
Blue Br .................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................... Brown G ...............................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
...... Green Gr .......................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................ Gray Lg ...................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
....... Light Green O ..............................................................................................................................
................................................................................................... Orange P .........................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
............................... Pink R ..................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................... Red W .............................
..............................................................................................................................................................
....................................... White Y ........................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................... Yellow Li ....................
..............................................................................................................................................................
......................................... Light Blue
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Diagnostic Aids
CAUTION
CAUTION
may result.
lamp or ohmmeter.

box and the short.
Testing For Voltage
Testing For Voltage
CAUTION
Mass Air Flow Sensor Circuit

Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 727
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Description and Operation
MASS AIR FLOW (MAF) SENSOR
This hot film type air flow sensor is composed of a hot film sensor, housing, metering duct (hybrid,
sensor element). Mass air flow rate is measured by detection of heat transfer from a hot film probe
because the change of the mass air flow rate causes change in the amount of heat being
transferred from the hot film probe surface to the air flow. The air flow sensor generates a pulse so
it repeatedly opens and closes between the 5V voltage supplied from the engine control module.
This results in the change of the temperature of the hat film probe and in the change of resistance.
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Testing and Inspection
MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
DTC P0102, P0103 - Mass Air Flow Sensor
1. If the engine stalls occasionally, start the engine and shake the MAF sensor harness. If the
engine stalls, check for poor contact at the MAF sensor
connector.
2. If the MAF sensor output voltage is other than 0 when the ignition switch is turned on (do not
start the engine). Check for the faulty MAF sensor
or ECM.
3. If the engine can be idle even if the MAF sensor output voltage is out of specification, check for
the following conditions;
- Disturbed air flow in the MAF sensor, disconnected air duct, and clogged air cleaner filter.
- Poor combustion in the cylinder, faulty ignition plug, ignition coil, injector, and incorrect
comparison.
4. Though no MAF sensor malfunction occurs, check the mounting direction of MAF sensor.
USING VOLTMETER
NOTE: (1) When the vehicle is new [within initial operation of about 500 km (300 miles)], the mass
air flow sensor air quantity will be about 10% higher. (2) Use an accurate digital voltmeter. (3)
Before checking, warm-up the engine until the engine coolant temperature reaches 80 to 90°C (176
to 198°F).
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Specifications
Camshaft Position Sensor: Specifications Crankshaft position sensor
Crankshaft position sensor
Output voltage 0.0 to 5.0 V

Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Specifications > Page
734
735
Camshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation
CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR
Camshaft position sensor (CMP Sensor) senses the TDC point of No.1 cylinder in its compression
stroke, whose signals are fed to ECM to be used to determine the sequence of fuel injection.
736
Camshaft Position Sensor: Testing and Inspection
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
737
DTC P0342, P0343 - Camshaft Position Sensor
If the camshaft position sensor does not operate correctly, correct sequential injection does not
occur so the engine may stall or run irregularly at idle or fail to accelerate normally.
USING VOLTMETER
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor - Diagnosis
Number: 98-36-006
Date: AUGUST, 1998
Model: ALL
DESCRIPTION:
engine is cold.
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor - Diagnosis > Page 742
DIAGNOSTIC HINTS:
USING A VOLTMETER:
USING A SCAN TOOL:
SENSOR INSPECTION:
resistance.
INSTALLATION:

Number: 98-36-003
Date: APRIL, 1998
Model: ALL
DESCRIPTION:
Number: 98-36-001
Date: APRIL, 1998
DESCRIPTION
^ Oxygen sensors
^ Air flow sensor
emissions.
the A/F ratio.
performance.
the code was set.
stored in the PCM.
Note:

PCM.

load value.
Fuel Trim code.
and re-test.
this TSB.

Trim code.
and re-test.
TSB.
Note:
Note:
D. Select "Engine"
E. Select "Data"
the scan tool.
Information > Specifications > Electrical Specifications
8.16 to 10.74 K ohms at -10 deg C

1.059 to 1.281 K ohms at 40 deg C
0.538 to 0.650 K ohms at 60 deg C
0.298 to 0.322 K ohms at 80 deg C
0.219 to 0.243 K ohms at 90 deg C
connector No. 78
3.44 V at 20 deg C
2.72 V at 40 deg C
1.25 V at 80 deg C
Information > Specifications > Electrical Specifications > Page 754
8.16 to 10.74 K ohms at -10 deg C

1.059 to 1.281 K ohms at 40 deg C
0.538 to 0.650 K ohms at 60 deg C
0.298 to 0.322 K ohms at 80 deg C
0.219 to 0.243 K ohms at 90 deg C
connector No. 78
3.44 V at 20 deg C
2.72 V at 40 deg C
1.25 V at 80 deg C
Information > Specifications > Page 755
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions


Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 758
Connector View
CONNECTOR VIEW
Numbering Order
NUMBERING ORDER

Electrical Diagram
Harness Layouts
Harness Layout

B ..........................................................................................................................................................
......................................................................... Black L .......................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
Blue Br .................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................... Brown G ...............................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
...... Green Gr .......................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................ Gray Lg ...................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
....... Light Green O ..............................................................................................................................
................................................................................................... Orange P .........................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
............................... Pink R ..................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................... Red W .............................
..............................................................................................................................................................
....................................... White Y ........................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................... Yellow Li ....................
..............................................................................................................................................................
......................................... Light Blue
CAUTION
CAUTION
may result.
lamp or ohmmeter.

box and the short.
Testing For Voltage
Testing For Voltage
CAUTION
Information > Diagrams > Page 771
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM

SENSOR INSPECTION
USING VOLTMETER

REMOVAL
INSTALLATION
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Crankshaft Position Sensor - Replacement Procedure
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins Crankshaft Position Sensor - Replacement
Procedure
Number: 99-36-010
Date: JULY, 1999
Model 1996-99 ACCENT
Subject CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE
DESCRIPTION:
When replacing the Crankshaft Position Sensor on a 1996 to 1999 Accent, Elantra or Tiburon, it is
important to note differences in the construction of the original sensor and the replacement sensor.
COMPARISON OF CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR HOUSING (39180-22050)
The sensor construction was modified in 1997. The sensor's housing material was changed from a
metallic design to a plastic design (as can be seen in the picture).
NOTE:
It is very important, when replacing an old style sensor with a new style sensor, that the O-Ring
and the plastic washer be removed from the sensor mounting hole before the new sensor is
installed.
Bulletins > Crankshaft Position Sensor - Replacement Procedure > Page 779
If the O-Ring and/or the plastic washer is not removed from the sensor mounting hole, the new
sensor will not fit properly
Normal warranty labor times and operation codes apply.

Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Specifications >
Electrical Specifications
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Electrical Specifications Crankshaft position sensor
Output frequency at idle 700 to 900 Hz
at 3,000 rpm 2,800 to 3,200 Hz
Tightening torque 9 to 11 Nm
Resistance between terminals 2 and 3 0.486 to 0.594 K ohms at 68 deg F
Air gap 0.5 to 1.5 mm

Electrical Specifications > Page 782
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Mechanical Specifications Crankshaft position sensor
at 3,000 rpm 2,800 to 3,200 Hz

Page 783
Page 784
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation
CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR
The crankshaft position sensor which consists of a magnet and coil is installed by the flywheel. The
voltage signal from this crankshaft position sensor is provided to the ECM for detecting engine
RPM and the position of crankshaft.
Page 785
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Testing and Inspection
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
Page 786
SENSOR INSPECTION
1. Disconnect the crankshaft position sensor connector 2. Measure the resistance between
terminal 2 and 3.
Standard value: 0.486 - 0.594 k Ohms at 20°C (68°F)
3. If the resistance deviates far from the standard value, replace the sensor.
Standard value: Clearance between the crankshaft position sensor and crankshaft position sensor
wheel: 0.5 - 1.5 mm (0.020 - 0.059 in.)
Tightening torque Crankshaft position sensor: 9 - 11 Nm (90 - 110 kg.cm, 6.6 - 8.1 lb.ft)
Page 787
DTC P0335, P0336 - Crankshaft Position Sensor
1. If unexpected misses are felt during driving or the engine stalls suddenly, shake the crankshaft
position sensor harness. If this causes the engine to
stall, check for poor contact at the sensor connector.
2. If the tachometer reads 0 rpm when the engine is cranked, check for faulty crankshaft position
sensor or ignition system problems. 3. If the tachometer reads 0 rpm when the engine is cranked
and it does not start, ignition coil, power TR, or an ECM defect can be considered. 4. Engine can
be stalled when the crankshaft position sensor cable is close to the high voltage cable due to the
electronic noise caused by the high
voltage induced.
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Speed Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins
> Air/Fuel Mixture - Trim Code Diagnosis
Number: 98-36-001
Date: APRIL, 1998
DESCRIPTION
^ Oxygen sensors
^ Air flow sensor
emissions.
the A/F ratio.
> Air/Fuel Mixture - Trim Code Diagnosis > Page 792
performance.
the code was set.
stored in the PCM.
Note:

PCM.

load value.
Fuel Trim code.
and re-test.
this TSB.

Trim code.
and re-test.
TSB.
Note:
Note:
D. Select "Engine"
E. Select "Data"
the scan tool.
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor <--> [Intake Air Temperature Sensor] >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Air/Fuel Mixture - Trim Code Diagnosis
Number: 98-36-001
Date: APRIL, 1998
DESCRIPTION
^ Oxygen sensors
^ Air flow sensor
emissions.
the A/F ratio.
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Air/Fuel Mixture - Trim Code Diagnosis > Page 799
performance.
the code was set.
stored in the PCM.
Note:

PCM.

load value.
Fuel Trim code.
and re-test.
this TSB.

Trim code.
and re-test.
TSB.
Note:
Note:
D. Select "Engine"
E. Select "Data"
the scan tool.
Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Specifications IAT sensor
IAT sensor
Resistance 2.0 to 3.0 K ohms at 68 deg F
Output Voltage 3.3 to 3.7 V at 0 deg C
Note: measured between terminals 1 and 2
2.4 to 2.8 V at 20 deg C
1.6 to 2.0 V at 40 deg C
0.5 to 0.9 V at 80 deg C

Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Specifications > Electrical
Specifications
Knock Sensor: Electrical Specifications
Capacitance 800 to 1,600 pF

Knock Sensor: Mechanical Specifications

Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Specifications > Page 809
Knock Sensor: Description and Operation
KNOCK SENSOR (KS)
The knock sensor is attached to the cylinder block and senses engine knocking conditions. A
knocking vibration from the cylinder block is applied as pressure to the piezoelectric element. This
vibrational pressure is then converted into a voltage signal which is delivered as output. If engine
knocking occurs, ignition timing is retarded to suppress it.
Knock Sensor: Testing and Inspection
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
SENSOR INSPECTION
1. Disconnect the knock sensor connector.

2. Measure resistance between the terminal 2 and 3.
Standard value: about 5M Ohms [at 20°C (68°F)]
3. If the resistance is continual, replace the knock sensor.
Tightening torque Knock sensor: 16 - 28 Nm (160 - 250 kg.cm, 11.8 - 18.4 lb.ft)
4. Measure the capacitance between the terminal 2 & 3.
Standard value: 800 - 1600 pF
DTC P0326 - Knock Sensor
TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURES:
HINT: When knock sensor signal is abnormally low.

Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Engine Controls - Oxygen Sensor Function/Diagnosis
Heated Oxygen Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - Oxygen Sensor
Function/Diagnosis
SOURCE: Hyundai Tech Net Times Volume 13 Issue 5 2003
TITLE: Oxygen Sensors
APPLIES TO: 96 - 04 All
SERVICE TIP:
An oxygen sensor measures the amount of oxygen present in the exhaust gas. The oxygen sensor
('element') is coated with a catalyst metal that produces a small voltage from 0 to 1.00 volt at
temperatures in the range of 600°F (315°C) when exposed to oxygen. The "stoichiometric" air-fuel
mixture for optimum fuel economy and emissions occurs at approximately 0.50 V. When the
oxygen sensor output signal is above 0.50 V, the air-fuel mixture is considered rich and when the
signal is under 0.50 V it is considered lean.
Hyundai OBD II engine management systems (1996 and later models) include two heated oxygen
sensors (heated oxygen sensors allow the vehicle to go into closed loop in 20 to 30 seconds or
less to reduce emissions):
^ The "upstream" (front) oxygen sensor is located in the exhaust stream before the catalytic
converter. The front sensor provides feedback to the PCM that is used to identify if the air-fuel
mixture supplied to the cylinders is rich or lean. Under normal operating conditions, the front
oxygen sensor signal will fluctuate from 0 to 1.00 V. The front sensor signal should fluctuate,
crossing the 0.50 V center about seven times in 5 seconds with the engine held at a steady 2500
rpm, when the vehicle is at operating temperature.
^ The "downstream" (rear) oxygen sensor is located after the catalytic converter in the exhaust
stream. The rear sensor provides feedback to the PCM to 'fine tune' the air-fuel ratio and to monitor
catalytic converter efficiency. The rear sensor signal will also fluctuate in the 0 to 1.00V range but
the pattern is less predictable than for the front oxygen sensor because of its position in the
exhaust system. Once the catalyst has reached operating temperature, the rear sensor signal
should change very little, if at all. If the rear sensor signal fluctuates at approximately the frequency
of the front sensor, it is an indication that the catalytic converter is not at operating temperature or
is malfunctioning.
Oxygen Sensor Diagnosis
A properly operating oxygen sensor may have unusual signal characteristics that are the result of
other components. A malfunction of any of the following components may affect sensor signal
characteristics:
^ Fuel injector(s)
^ Air flow sensor
^ Evaporative emission system

Technical Service Bulletins > Engine Controls - Oxygen Sensor Function/Diagnosis > Page 817
^ Barometric pressure sensor
^ Engine coolant temperature sensor
^ Intake system (vacuum) leaks
^ Low battery charge
^ Spark plugs
The PCM does not monitor either oxygen sensor signal when the engine management system is in
open loop or when the purge solenoid is operating.
If codes other than oxygen sensor codes are present, diagnose/repair these conditions BEFORE
continuing with oxygen sensor diagnosis.
NOTE: A malfunctioning front oxygen sensor may cause fuel trim codes to set.
^ Several Diagnostic Trouble Codes use specific terminology to refer to sensor location. The
illustration and key below explain the following terms:
^ Engine BANK Bank 1 is closer to the dash panel, (also referred to as RH or right hand). Bank 2 is
closer to the radiator, (also referred to as LH or left hand).
^ UP Refers to Sensor 1 or "front sensor". It is located closer to the exhaust manifold and before
the catalytic converter.
^ DOWN Refers to Sensor 2 or "rear sensor." It is located after the catalytic converter.
The following examples show how to interpret oxygen sensor terminology:

B1/S1 = Bank 1/Sensor 1 = Dash panel side, BEFORE the catalyst or "upstream"
B2/S2 = Bank 2/Sensor 2 = Radiator side, AFTER the catalyst or "downstream"
^ The Hi-Scan Pro testing procedure is provided in the following section. The Hi-Scan Pro test is a
quick procedure that provides basic sensor information.
Hi-Scan Pro Testing Procedure
Connect the Hi-Scan Pro and retrieve all diagnostic codes. Record the codes and freeze frame
data (if available) for later reference.
1. A. Warm up the vehicle to operating temperature (for at least 3 minutes)
B. Select vehicle, year, etc.
C. Select "Engine"
D. Select "Data"
E. After OBD II data appears press "N"

F. Select "Custom Data"
G. Select "02-B1 S1" and "02-B1 S2" (front and rear oxygen sensors) and ENG RPM if no
H. Press "N" and the selected data will appear.
2. While holding the engine speed at 2500 rpm in Neutral or Park (with no load) observe the front
and rear oxygen sensors for approximately one
minute. The front oxygen sensor should fluctuate rapidly between 0.095 and 0.995 V. The voltage
should read higher than 0.600 V several times and lower than 0.350 V several times. The voltage
should never exceed 1.00 V when using the Hi-Scan Pro.
V, or a rear oxygen sensor reads a fixed value of 0.425 V to 0.500 V, or a Sonata reads a fixed
value of 0.010 -0.080 V, check for an open/shorted oxygen sensor circuit or no output from the
sensor.
The Hi-Scan Pro can also be used to check the sensors while the vehicle is being driven. An
assistant is needed to perform this procedure. Use the Hi-Scan Pro as set up in the previous test
procedure.
accelerator and observe the readings from both
sensors. The sensors should read lean (in the range of 0.20 V down to 0 V) on the Hi-Scan Pro
due to the fuel cutoff during deceleration.
rich (in the range of 0.60 V to 1.0 V) on the Hi-Scan
Pro.
Oxygen sensors can be monitored using HDS. The sensors can be observed using either "Custom
Meters" or "Signal Wave Forms" on the HDS unit. It is preferable to use "signal Wave Forms" since
the signal resolution is better with the engine operating at 2500 rpm, which is required for proper
testing.
The HDS testing procedure requires a more involved set up but provides more detailed information
about the sensors' performance. Refer to Technical Service Bulletin #97-36-004 for the testing
procedure.
When the HDS is used to monitor oxygen sensor signals on 1996 and 1997 Accent & Elantra and
1997 Tiburon vehicles, a 0.70 V (0.71 V for Tiburon) signal offset is observed. This shifts the sensor
readings 0.70 V (0.71 V for Tiburon) higher so the new signal range is 0.70 V to 1.70 V (0.71 V to
1.71 V for Tiburon). This shift is seen only when using the HDS machine because the sensor signal
is read before it is processed (filtered) by the engine control module (ECM). (This offset is not
present when using the Scan Tool.) The offset has no affect on the sensor signal appearance or
frequency.
The oxygen sensor voltage offset (or bias voltage) observed when using the Hyundai Diagnostic
System (HDS) was changed on 1998 Accent, Elantra & Tiburon from the value of previous model
years. The oxygen sensor voltage offset is 0.27 volts for 1998 Elantra and Tiburon, and 0.30 volts
for 1998 Accent.
Oxygen Sensor Diagnostic Trouble Codes

The list below contains specific codes for Hyundai oxygen sensors and their explanations as
needed.
In addition to further information found in shop manuals, several Technical Service Bulletins have
been released regarding oxygen sensors. These can be found in the TSB bound manual or at the
Hyundai Service website "Webtech Pro" section, (login required.)
Keeping up to date on Hyundai oxygen sensor technology will make oxygen sensor diagnosis
easier for you.
Technical Service Bulletins > Technical Service Bulletins for Heated Oxygen Sensor: > 04-00-001 > May > 04 > Engine
Controls - O2 Sensor Connector Guidelines
Heated Oxygen Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - O2 Sensor Connector
Guidelines
Group: GENERAL
Number: 04-00-001
Date: MAY, 2004
Model: ALL
Subject GENERAL GUIDELINE FOR 02 SENSOR CONNECTORS
DESCRIPTION:
Most 02 sensors use the wiring/connector for the "reference air" used in determining the 02 signal.
WARNING:
Do not use connector grease on 02 sensor connectors. The grease may cause electrical
connection problems.
Technical Service Bulletins > Technical Service Bulletins for Heated Oxygen Sensor: > tnt1350903-001 > Sep > 03 > Engine
Controls - Oxygen Sensor Function/Diagnosis
Function/Diagnosis
SERVICE TIP:
is malfunctioning.
characteristics:
^ Fuel injector(s)
^ Air flow sensor

Controls - Oxygen Sensor Function/Diagnosis > Page 829
^ Spark plugs

C. Select "Engine"
D. Select "Data"

sensor.
procedure.
Pro.
testing.
procedure.
frequency.
for 1998 Accent.

needed.
easier for you.
Technical Service Bulletins > Technical Service Bulletins for Heated Oxygen Sensor: > 99-30-001 > Jan > 99 > Oxygen
Sensor Locations
Heated Oxygen Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins Oxygen Sensor Locations
Group: FUEL SYSTEM
Number: 99-30-001
Date: JANUARY, 1999
Model: 1996-99 ACCENT, 1996-99 ELANTRA & ALL TIBURON
Subject: OXYGEN SENSOR LOCATIONS
DESCRIPTION:
This bulletin provides oxygen sensor locations for 1996-99 Accent, 1996-99 Elantra and all Tiburon
models.
1996-99 ACCENT OXYGEN SENSOR LOCATIONS:
All 1996-99 Accents are fitted with two oxygen sensors. For 1996 and 1997 Accents, the location of
the oxygen sensors are different between Federal specification vehicles and California specification
vehicles.
On the 1996-97 Federal specification Accent, the upstream (front) oxygen sensor is located in the
front exhaust pipe before the catalytic converter. The downstream (rear) sensor is located in the
center exhaust pipe after the catalytic converter.
NOTE: All 1996 Accent GT DOHC (California and Federal specifications) oxygen sensor locations
are similar to the Federal SOHC vehicles.
On the 1996-99 California specification Accent, the upstream (front) sensor is located in the
exhaust manifold before the manifold catalytic converter (MCC). The downstream (rear) sensor is
located in the front exhaust pipe after the MCC and before the catalytic converter.
NOTE: On the 1998-99 Federal specification Accent, the oxygen sensor locations match those
found on the 1996-99 California specification vehicles.
1996-97 ELANTRA. 1997 TIBURON 1.8L OXYGEN SENSOR LOCATIONS:

Sensor Locations > Page 836
The location of the oxygen sensors are identical for Federal and California specification vehicles.
The upstream (front) oxygen sensor is located in the front exhaust pipe before the catalytic
converter. The downstream (rear) oxygen sensor is located in the center exhaust pipe after the
catalytic converter.
1998-99 ELANTRA. 1997-99 TIBURON 2.OL OXYGEN SENSOR LOCATIONS:
The location of the oxygen sensors are different from previous models.
PHOTO 1
The upstream (front) oxygen sensor is located just below the exhaust manifold flange (see Photo
1), before the catalytic converter.
PHOTO 2
The downstream (rear) oxygen sensor is located in the intermediate pipe just before the flexible
pipe section (Photo 2).
Technical Service Bulletins > Technical Service Bulletins for Heated Oxygen Sensor: > 98-09-006 > Jun > 98 > Oxygen
Sensor - Offset Voltage Change
Heated Oxygen Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins Oxygen Sensor - Offset Voltage Change
Group: SPECIAL SERVICE TOOLS
Number: 98-09-006
Date: JUNE, 1998
Model
1997-98 TIBURON 1996-98 ACCENT & ELANTRA
Subject
1998 OXYGEN SENSOR OFFSET VOLTAGE CHANGE
DESCRIPTION:
System (HDS) has changed on 1998 Accent, Elantra & Tiburon from the value of previous model
for 1998 Accent.
Sensor - Offset Voltage Change > Page 842
1997 Tiburon vehicles, a 0.70 V (0.71 V for Tiburon) signal offset is observed, This shifts the sensor
is read before it is processed (filtered) by the powertrain control module (PCM) (this offset is not
present when using the Scan Tool). The offset has no affect on the sensor signal appearance or
frequency.
Technical Service Bulletins > Technical Service Bulletins for Heated Oxygen Sensor: > 98-36-001 > Apr > 98 > Air/Fuel
Mixture - Trim Code Diagnosis
Number: 98-36-001
Date: APRIL, 1998
DESCRIPTION
^ Oxygen sensors
^ Air flow sensor
emissions.
the A/F ratio.
Mixture - Trim Code Diagnosis > Page 847
performance.
the code was set.
stored in the PCM.
Note:

PCM.

load value.
Fuel Trim code.
and re-test.
this TSB.

Trim code.
and re-test.
TSB.
Note:
Note:
D. Select "Engine"
E. Select "Data"
the scan tool.
Technical Service Bulletins > Technical Service Bulletins for Heated Oxygen Sensor: > 98-36-002 > Apr > 98 > Engine Fault
Code - Diagnostic Manual Correction
Heated Oxygen Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins Engine Fault Code - Diagnostic Manual
Correction
Number: 98-36-002
Date: APRIL, 1998
Model: ALL
Subject
1997 ENGINE FAULT CODE DIAGNOSTIC MANUAL (OBD II) CORRECTION
This TSB supersedes TSB # 98-00-001 to include a new category number
DESCRIPTION:
The second step of the Oxygen Sensor Testing Procedure flow chart in the 1997 Engine Fault
Code Diagnostic Manual (OBD-II), part no. NP150-07001, is incorrect. The correct engine RPM is
2500.
Please make the correction to the affected pages noted for future reference.
Affected Pages:
P0130m-3, P0132-3, P0131-3, P0133-4, P0134-3, P0136b-3, P0136m-3, P0137-3, and P0138-3.
Update
Number: 98-36-003
Date: APRIL, 1998
Model: ALL
DESCRIPTION:
Code - Diagnostic Manual Update > Page 858
Technical Service Bulletins > Technical Service Bulletins for Heated Oxygen Sensor: > 98-00-001 > Feb > 98 > Engine -
Fault Code, Diagnostic Manual Correction
Heated Oxygen Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Fault Code, Diagnostic Manual
Correction
Group: GENERAL
Number: 98-00-001
Model: ALL
Subject 1997 ENGINE FAULT CODE DIAGNOSTIC MANUAL (OBD II) CORRECTION
DESCRIPTION: The second step of the Oxygen Sensor Testing Procedure flow chart in the 1997
Engine Fault Code Diagnostic Manual (OBD-II), part no. NP150-07001, is incorrect. The correct
engine RPM is 2500.
Please make the correction noted for future reference.
Affected Pages: P0130m-3, P0132-3, P0131-3, P0133-4, P0134-3, P0136b-3, P0136m-3,

P0137-3, and P0138-3.
Technical Service Bulletins > Technical Service Bulletins for Heated Oxygen Sensor: > 97-36-004 > Dec > 97 > Oxygen
Sensor- Operation/Diagnosis
Oxygen Sensor- Operation/Diagnosis
Number: 97-36-004
Model: ALL OBD-II VEHICLES
Subject OXYGEN SENSOR DIAGNOSIS
Description
"element is coated with a catalyst metal that produces a small voltage from 0 to 1.00 volt at
temperatures in the range of 600°F (315°F) when exposed to oxygen. The "stoichiometric" air4uel
sensors (heated oxygen sensors allow the vehicle to go into closed loop in 20 to 30 seconds to
reduce emissions):
- The "upstream" (front) oxygen sensor is located in the exhaust stream before the catalytic
rpm, when the vehicle is at operating temperature (the signals cannot be seen when viewing with
the scan tool because the scan tool's refresh rate is not fast enough; Hyundai Diagnostic System
(HDS) can be used (see "HDS Testing Procedure" in this TSB)).
- The "downstream" (rear) oxygen sensor is located after the catalytic converter in the exhaust
stream. The rear sensor provides feedback to the PCM to "fine tune" the air-fuel ratio and to
monitor catalytic converter efficiency. The rear sensor signal will also fluctuate in the 0 to 1.00 V
range but the pattern is less predictable than for the front oxygen sensor because of its position in
the exhaust system. Once the catalyst has reached operating temperature, the rear sensor signal
is malfunctioning.
characteristics:
^ Fuel injector(s)
^ Air flow sensor

^ Spark plugs
continuing with oxygen sensor diagnosis.*
Note:
* A malfunctioning front oxygen sensor may cause fuel trim codes to set.
Sensor- Operation/Diagnosis > Page 868
The scan tool and HDS testing procedures are provided in the following section. The scan tool test
is a quick procedure that provides basic sensor information. The HDS testing procedure requires a
more involved set up but provides more detailed information about the sensors performance.
Scan Tool Testing Procedure
Connect the scan tool and retrieve all diagnostic codes. Record the codes and freeze frame data (if
available) for later reference.
B. Select vehicle, year, VIN code, etc.
C. Select "Engine
D. Select "Data"
F. Select "Custom Data List"
G. Select "O2-B1-S1" and "O2-B1-52" (front and rear oxygen sensors) and ENG RPM if no
H. Press "N" and the selected data will appear

and rear oxygen sensors for approximately one minute. The front oxygen sensor should fluctuate
rapidly between 0.095 and 0.995 V. The voltage should read higher than 0.600 V several times and
lower than 0.350 V several times. The voltage should never exceed 1.00 V when using the scan
tool.
V, or a Sonata reads a fixed value of 0.010 - 0.080 V, check for an open/shorted oxygen sensor
accelerator and observe the readings from both sensors. The sensors should read lean (in the
Hyundai Diagnostic (HDS) Testing Procedure
The front and rear oxygen sensor signals can be monitored using HDS. The sensor signals can be
observed using either "Custom Meters" or "Signal Wave Forms" on the HDS machine. The "Signal
Wave Forms" procedure should be used since the signal resolution is better with the engine at
2500
rpm, which is required for proper testing.
NOTE:
When HDS is used to monitor oxygen sensor signals on 1996 MY and later Accent, Elantra and
Tiburon vehicles, a 0.70 V signal offset is observed. This shifts the sensor readings 0.70 V higher
so the new signal range is 0.70 V to 1.70 V. This shift is seen only when using the HDS machine
because the sensor signal is read before it is processed (filtered) by the PCM. The offset has no
effect on the sensor signal appearance or frequency. (See graph.)
1. Connect the scan tool and retrieve all diagnostic codes (see Scan Tool Testing Procedure
section for details). If codes other than oxygen sensor codes are present, diagnose/repair these
conditions BEFORE continuing with oxygen sensor diagnosis.
2. Connect HDS to vehicle.
3. Warm up vehicle to operating temperature (until the engine cooling fan begins to cycle,
approximately 3 minutes).
4. Select "Signal Wave Forms" from HDS.
5. Select the front and rear oxygen sensor signals and the throttle position sensor (TPS) signal (the
TPS is used to establish an approximate relationship between the throttle position and engine rpm).
6. Select "Digital Record" from the "Options" menu.
7. Select CTRL and set ms/div to 30.00. Click "OK".
8. Select "Run". Run the vehicle at 2500 rpm for several minutes, watch the signal. Record the
signal after the engine has stabilized at 2500 rpm. The front oxygen sensor signal should fluctuate
quickly (Sonata from 0 to 1.0 V, Accent Elantra & Tiburon from 0.70 to 1.70 V).
9. To view recorded data select 'Options" and 'Data Play Back" and the screen will show the analog
form of the recorded data. To use the Digital Overlay Feature during playback select "CTRL",
"Playback", "Digital". Select "Zoom" and "-64" to change the scale to get the 1.92 Sec/Div
resolution.
10. The front sensor should cross the midpoint of signal travel at least 7 times in 5 seconds when
the vehicle is at 2500 rpm. The rear oxygen sensor should change slowly, if at all.
11. Record the sensors' reaction to a fuel cut by revving engine to 4000 rpm and let it stabilize.
Quickly close the throttle and observe the front and rear sensor signals (see plots 2 & 5).
Note:
A vacuum leak can also be intentionally created to check sensor response (see plots 3 & 4).
12. If an intermittent condition is reported, "wiggle check" all the connectors and wiring harnesses
related to the oxygen sensor while the vehicle and the HDS are running.
Samples of Oxygen Sensor HDS Plots For Accent, Elantra, Tiberon
^ This sample plot shows a typical front and rear oxygen sensor at 2500 rpm for Accent, Elantra or
Tiburon.
^ The front signal is a fluctuating signal that changes from 0.84 to 1.49 V, while the rear signal
remains constant. (Note the 0.70 V signal offset).
^ HDS Plot 2 shows a typical Accent, Elantra or Tiburon with the throttle released from 4000 rpm.
After a short delay both sensors react and indicate the mixture is "lean". (Note the 0.70 V signal
offset.)
^ HDS Plot 3 shows an Accent, Elantra or Tiburon at 2500 rpm when intentionally introducing a
vacuum leak. The front oxygen sensor reacts lean immediately while the rear reads lean afier a
short delay. (Note the 0.70 V signal offset.)
^ Both sensors should always react lean when introducing a vacuum leak unless the vehicle has
low mileage or a new catalytic converter.
Samples of Oxygen Sensor HDS Plots For Sonata

^ HDS Plot 4 shows a Sonata V6 at 2500 rpm when introducing a vacuum leak. The front sensor
reacts lean immediately while the rear sensor reads lean after a short delay.
very low mileage or a new catalytic converter.
^ HDS Plot 5 shows a Sonata V6 at 4000 rpm drop to idle and the front sensor reads lean.
Note 1:
At 4000 rpm the front sensor signal may be rich until the vacuum leak is introduced.
Note 2:
Due to a different engine management system, the rear sensor may not react (lean) as it did with
an Accent, Elantra or Tiburon with the same test (see HDS Plot 2).
^ HDS Plots 6 & 7 show "normal" front and rear oxygen sensor signals for a Sonata V6 at 2500
rpm.
^ During testing the signal may be constant for a period then intermittently have irregular signals
(Plot 7). This is normal behavior.
Oxygen Sensor Diagnostic Codes

Oxygen Sensor Diagnostic Codes:
Intermittent malfunctions may be responsible for setting diagnostic codes. A vehicle with an
intermittent malfunction may appear to be normal when the customer brings the vehicle into the
dealership. A malfunction must occur in two consecutive trips to illuminate the check engine light,
decreasing the possibility of false codes being set. A test drive, circuit diagnosis and "wiggle check"
test may help reveal the condition that is the cause of the code.
Refer to the 1997 Engine Fault Code Diagnostic Manual, The Shop Manual and Electrical Trouble
Shooting Manuals for the specific vehicle wiring and circuit information.
Oxygen Sensor Installation Tips
^ Be sure to install the oxygen sensors by applying 30 to 45 lb.ft (40.7 to 61.0 Nm) of torque as
specified in the Shop Manual for the specific model.
^ For simplified installation and removal of oxygen sensors, Kent-Moore Tool # J-71 89 and a 22
mm crowsfoot wrench are recommended.
Circuit Diagnosis
^ Oxygen sensor heater resistance should be greater than 30 ohms at 750°F (400°C).
^ Open Circuit:
Disconnect the harness at the PCM and the sensor. Check for continuity in the suspect circuit
(example: "A" to "B" from the "Basic O2 Sensor Circuit" diagram).
^ Short Circuit:
Disconnect the harness at the PCM and the sensor. Check to see if there is continuity to ground in
the suspect circuit (example: "A" to ground from the "Basic O2 Sensor Circuit" diagram).
Warranty Information

Technical Service Bulletins > Technical Service Bulletins for Heated Oxygen Sensor: > Page 880
Guidelines
Group: GENERAL
Number: 04-00-001
Date: MAY, 2004
Model: ALL
DESCRIPTION:
WARNING:
Update
Number: 98-36-003
Date: APRIL, 1998
Model: ALL
DESCRIPTION:
Correction
Number: 98-36-002
Date: APRIL, 1998
Model: ALL
Subject
DESCRIPTION:
2500.
Affected Pages:
Heated Oxygen Sensor: Electrical Specifications
Output voltage When decelerating suddenly from 4,000 rpm 200 mV
Note: Engine warmed up Note: or less
When engine is suddenly raced 600 to 1000 mV
Heater Resistance 2.1 +/- 0.4 ohms at 22 deg C
Note: Key OFF
Sensor resistance between terminals 3 and 4 30 ohms at 400 deg C
Heated Oxygen Sensor: Mechanical Specifications
Note: Key OFF
Heated Oxygen Sensor: Description and Operation
SOHC Engine Is Shown, DOHC Locations Are Similar
HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR (HO2S) -II
The heated oxygen senor senses the oxygen concentration in the exhaust gas and, converts it into
a voltage which is sent to the ECM. The heated oxygen sensor outputs about 800mV when the air
fuel ratio is richer than the theoretical ratio and outputs about 100mV when the ratio is leaner
(higher oxygen concentration in exhaust gas.) The ECM controls the fuel injection ratio based on
this signal so that the air fuel ratio is maintained at the theoretical ratio. The oxygen sensor has a
heater element which ensures the sensor performance during all driving condition.
Heated Oxygen Sensor: Testing and Inspection
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
SENSOR INSPECTION
NOTE: (1) Before checking, warm up the engine until the engine coolant temperature reaches 80 to
95°C (176 to 205°F). (2) Use an accurate digital voltmeter.
1. Replace the oxygen sensor if there is a malfunction.
Tightening torque Heated oxygen sensor: 50 - 60 Nm (500 - 600 kg.cm, 37 - 44 lb.ft)

DTC P0130, P0131, P0132, P0135, P0137, P0138, P0141 - Heated Oxygen Sensor
DTC P0133 - Heated Oxygen Sensor
DTC P0134, P0136 - Heated Oxygen Sensor
HINT: Use the above chart when the lean/rich period is above 2.6 seconds in the condition that
fully warm-up engine is 2,000-3,000 r.p.m and engine is above middle load.
1. If the heated oxygen sensor is defective abnormally, high emissions may occur. 2. If the heated
oxygen sensor check has been normal, but the sensor output voltage is out of specification, check
the following items related to the air
fuel ratio control system. -
Faulty injector.
- Air leaks in the intake manifold.
- Faulty mass air flow sensor, EVAP valve and engine coolant temperature sensor.
- Wiring connection problem.
3. When O2 sensor output voltage is maintained as following for above 50 sec.
- Upstream : 0.4V-0.6V
- Downstream: 0.4V-0.5V
USING VOLTMETER
NOTE:
If you release the accelerator pedal suddenly with the engine running about 4000 rpm, the fuel
supply will be stopped for a while. When you suddenly press the accelerator pedal, the voltage will
reach 'B' range. Then, when you let the engine idle again, the voltage fluctuates between 'A' and 'B'
range. In this case, the O2 sensor can be determined as good.
DTC P1123, P1124, P1127, P1128 - Air/Fuel Control
AIR-FUEL CONTROL TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURE
HINT: -
Air/Fuel ratio stays rich or lean longer than specified period because of system malfunction.
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Rough Road Sensor > Component Information > Specifications
Rough Road Sensor: Specifications Acceleration Sensor
Acceleration Sensor
Output voltage while idling 2.3 to 2.7 V
Note: Accleration sensor side connector No. 1 or ECM
connector No. 80
while driving 0.5 to 4.5 V

Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Rough Road Sensor > Component Information > Specifications > Page 898
Rough Road Sensor: Description and Operation
ACCELERATION SENSOR
The acceleration sensor is attached to the engine room of driver's side. While driving, the rough
road condition is sensed by the acceleration sensor and the ECM uses this input signal to avoid the
wrong misfire detection.
Rough Road Sensor: Testing and Inspection
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM

DTC P 1605, P1606 - Acceleration Sensor
When abnormal output voltage occurs at stop position of vehicle or acceleration sensor is operated
beyond normal operating zone.
USING VOLTMETER
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 00-36-006 > Mar > 00 > TPS - Driveability Concerns
Throttle Position Sensor: Customer Interest TPS - Driveability Concerns
Number 00-36-006
Date MARCH, 2000
DESCRIPTION:
^ Unstable idle
REPAIR INFORMATION:


Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 00-36-006 > Mar > 00 > TPS - Driveability Concerns > Page 910
PARTS INFORMATION

Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 97-40-031 > Sep > 97 > A/T - Driveability Concerns
Throttle Position Sensor: Customer Interest A/T - Driveability Concerns
Number: 97-40-031
Group: TRANSAXLE

Model: ALL
during deceleration
^ Rough idle
Note:
Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 97-40-031 > Sep > 97 > A/T - Driveability Concerns > Page 915
SONATA
EXCEL, SCOUPE
Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Throttle Position Sensor: > 00-36-006 > Mar > 00 > TPS - Driveability
Concerns
Throttle Position Sensor: All Technical Service Bulletins TPS - Driveability Concerns
Number 00-36-006
Date MARCH, 2000
DESCRIPTION:
^ Unstable idle
REPAIR INFORMATION:


Concerns > Page 923
PARTS INFORMATION

Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Throttle Position Sensor: > 98-36-001 > Apr > 98 > Air/Fuel Mixture - Trim
Code Diagnosis
Number: 98-36-001
Date: APRIL, 1998
DESCRIPTION
^ Oxygen sensors
^ Air flow sensor
emissions.
the A/F ratio.
Code Diagnosis > Page 928
performance.
the code was set.
stored in the PCM.
Note:

PCM.

load value.
Fuel Trim code.
and re-test.
this TSB.

Trim code.
and re-test.
TSB.
Note:
Note:
D. Select "Engine"
E. Select "Data"
the scan tool.
Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Throttle Position Sensor: > 97-40-031 > Sep > 97 > A/T - Driveability Concerns
Throttle Position Sensor: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Driveability Concerns
Number: 97-40-031
Group: TRANSAXLE

Model: ALL
during deceleration
^ Rough idle
Note:
> Page 935
> Page 936
SONATA
> Page 937
EXCEL, SCOUPE
Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Throttle Position Sensor: > 97-40-004 > Feb > 97 > Engine/Transmission
Controls - Service Manual Revisions
Throttle Position Sensor: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine/Transmission Controls - Service
Manual Revisions
Number 97-40-004
Date 02-1997
Model Accent 1997, Elantra 1997, Sonata 1997 and Tiburon 1997
Subject THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR & PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE

SPECIFICATIONS (SHOP MANUAL CORRECTION)
DESCRIPTION:
The 1997 Shop Manuals contain errors in the sections for "Trouble Shooting The Automatic
Transaxle: Checking The Control System (When A Scan Tool Is Used). The correct specifications
are shown.
Please make the corrections in the appropriate Shop Manuals and write the TSB number on the
bottom of the pages listed below for future reference.
Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Throttle Position Sensor: > 98-36-001 > Apr > 98 > Air/Fuel Mixture - Trim Code
Diagnosis
Number: 98-36-001
Date: APRIL, 1998
DESCRIPTION
^ Oxygen sensors
^ Air flow sensor
emissions.
the A/F ratio.
performance.
the code was set.
stored in the PCM.
Note:

PCM.

load value.
Fuel Trim code.
and re-test.
this TSB.

Trim code.
and re-test.
TSB.
Note:
Note:
D. Select "Engine"
E. Select "Data"
the scan tool.
Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Throttle Position Sensor: > 97-40-004 > Feb > 97 > Engine/Transmission Controls
- Service Manual Revisions
Manual Revisions
Number 97-40-004
Date 02-1997

DESCRIPTION:
are shown.
Throttle Position Sensor: Specifications
Resistance 0.7 to 3.0 K ohms
Note: between terminals 2 and 3 Note: standard value
2.3 to 3.4 K ohms
Note: when idling
Note: TP sensor connector No. 1 or ECM harness side Note: At curb idle
connector No. 73
4.25 to 4.8 V
Note: Wide open throttle
Tightening Torque 1.5 to 2.5

Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation
THROTTLE POSITION (TP) SENSOR
The TP Sensor is a rotating type variable resistor that rotates with the throttle shaft to sensor the
throttle valve angle. As the throttle shaft rotates, the throttle angle of the TP Sensor changes and
the ECM detects the throttle valve opening based on the change of the throttle angle.
Throttle Position Sensor: Testing and Inspection
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
SENSOR INSPECTION
1. Disconnect the throttle position sensor connector. 2. Measure resistance between terminal 2
(sensor ground) and terminal 3 (sensor power).
Standard value: 0.7 - 3.0 k Ohms When idling: 2.3 - 3.4 k Ohms
3. Connect an ohmmeter between terminal 3 (sensor ground) and terminal 1 (sensor output). 4.
Operate the throttle valve slowly from the idle position to the full open position and check that the
resistance changes smoothly in proportion to the
throttle valve opening angle.
5. If the resistance is out of specification, or fails to change smoothly, replace the throttle position
sensor.
Tightening torque Throttle position sensor: 1.5 - 2.5 Nm (15 - 25 kg.cm, 1.1 - 1.8 lb.ft)
DTC P0122, P0123 - Throttle Position Sensor

DTC P0121 - Throttle Position Sensor
1. The TPS signal is important in the control of the automatic transaxle. Shift shock and other
troubles will occur if the sensor is faulty. 2. If the idle condition or accelerating is abnormal, check
the TPS connector. (When the TPS connector is not connected properly, the current data
can show that the idle state remains off, though the accelerator pedal is released. And it results in
improper idle or accelerating.)
3. Input voltage from throttle position sensor is below 0.1V or above 4.7V when ignition switch is
turned on.
USING VOLTMETER
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-AT-013 > Jul > 09 > A/T - MIL ON/DTC's P0705/P0707/P0708/No
Start In P/N
Technical Service Bulletin # 09-AT-013 Date: 090701
A/T - MIL ON/DTC's P0705/P0707/P0708/No Start In P/N
Group TRANSAXLE
Number 09-AT-013
Date JULY, 2009
Model ALL EXCEPT VERACRUZ AND GENESIS
Subject AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE RANGE SWITCH DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES P0705,

P0707, P0708
This TSB supersedes TSB 03-40-013 to add repair information (Steps 2-3).
DESCRIPTION:
An improperly adjusted or improperly operating range switch may result in the following conditions:
^ Diagnostic trouble codes:
^ P0705 - Range switch signal problem
^ P0707 - Range switch - open circuit
^ P0708 - Range switch - short circuit or multiple inputs
^ Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) illuminated
^ Impossible engine start in "P" or "N"
This TSB provides information concerning the proper adjustment and diagnosis of the transaxle
range switch.
PARTS INFORMATION
Start In P/N > Page 968
Service Procedure
1. Attach a GDS and check for DTC in both the "Engine" and "Automatic Transaxle" menus. Go to
Step 2 for 2000-02 Accent or Step 3 for 2006-Sonata. For other vehicles, go to Step 4.
2. For 2000-2002 Accent: Check according to TSB 03-40-001. Go to Step 4.
3. For 2006-Sonata, follow steps a, b, c below, then go to Step 4.
a. Check the rear combination lamp ground bolts for tightness and good electrical contact (refer to
applicable ETM, "Tail, Parking & License Lamps" section). Go to Step b.
b. For 2006-Sonata: Remove the center console cover and check for contamination on the M40
connector to the sports mode switch. If so, clean and repair the connector as necessary. Go to step
c below.
c. For 2006-07 Sonata: Remove the front pillar cover and verify the harness is properly routed near
the clip. Repair the harness as necessary. Go to Step 4.
4. Attach a GDS and select vehicle, "A/T" menu, "Current Data" and "Shift Lever Switch".
5. Move the shift lever and confirm the GDS reads the gear shift position as shown above. If so, the
harness currently does not have an open or short circuit between. the PCM/TCM and range switch.
7. Insert a 5mm drill or M5 (5mm) bolt in the adjustment hole of the range switch. Check that the
^ If so, go to Step 8
8. Inspect the connector to the range switch for a bent pin or pin not fully inserted and related
wiring for an open or short circuit. If OK, follow the repair procedure below:
RANGE SWITCH REPLACEMENT:
9. Install the new range switch and loosely install two 10 mm bolts.
10. Attach the lever and nut. Tighten the nut to specification. Go to Step 11.
Specification: 11-13 lb ft. (15-18 Nm, 150-180 kg.cm)
RANGE SWITCH ADJUSTMENT:
13. Insert a 5mm drill or M5 (5mm) bolt in the adjustment hole of the range switch. Tighten the two
10 mm mounting bolts to specification. Remove the 5mm drill or M5 bolt.

14. Move the shift lever to the "N" position. Attach the shift cable to the lever and install the nut.
15. Attach the connector.
16. Drive the vehicle two key-on to key-off drive cycles, including shifting to gears D, 3, 2, L (if
equipped) and R. If the:
^ DTC does not reset, return the vehicle to the customer.
^ DTC resets, repair or replace the control harness. If the DTC sets again, replace the TCM.
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 05-40-016 > Oct > 05 > A/T - No Movement in 'DRIVE' or 'REVERSE'
Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Customer Interest A/T - No Movement in 'DRIVE' or

'REVERSE'
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 05-40-016
Date: OCTOBER, 2005
Model: ALL
DESCRIPTION:
shown below:
REPAIR PROCEDURE:
NOTE:

Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 05-40-016 > Oct > 05 > A/T - No Movement in 'DRIVE' or 'REVERSE' >
Page 976

Page 977
^ Vehicle
Page 978
Go to Step 12.
NOTE:
Page 979

Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 99-40-017 > Dec > 99 > A/T - Shift Lever Will Not Shift Out Of Park
Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Customer Interest A/T - Shift Lever Will Not Shift Out Of
Park
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 99-40-017
DESCRIPTION:
NOTE:
SERVICE PROCEDURE:
column).

Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 99-40-017 > Dec > 99 > A/T - Shift Lever Will Not Shift Out Of Park >
Page 984
Page 985
module.
PARTS INFORMATION:
Page 986
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch: > 04-40-016 >
Sep > 04 > A/T - MIL ON/Shift Flare/Harsh Engagement/DTC's Set
Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T - MIL ON/Shift
Flare/Harsh Engagement/DTC's Set
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 04-40-016
Model: 1999 SONATA, 2001 ELANTRA,
2001~SANTA FE, 2001 XG300/350, 2003 TIBURON, 2005 TUCSON, 1995 ACCENT, 1996
ELANTRA
Subject AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE P0711, P0712 AND P0713
This bulletin supercedes TSB 01-40-010 to add an additional DTC.
DESCRIPTION:
An improperly functioning oil temperature sensor may cause the following Diagnostic Trouble
Codes and symptoms. If these DIG are found, follow the "Repair Procedure".
REPAIR PROCEDURE.
1. Check the connectors at the oil temperature sensor and PCM/TCM for bent pins or pins not fully
inserted into the connector. Repair or replace as necessary.
2. Check the wiring harness visually for an open circuit or short to ground. Repair or replace as
necessary.
3. Attach a Hi-Scan Pro to the Data Link Connector (DLC) and select "Hyundai Vehicle Diagnosis"
menu and "Automatic Transaxle" menu. If the Hi-Scan shows:
4. Attach the Hi-Scan Pro and select "Hyundai Vehicle Diagnosis", "Automatic Transaxle" menu
and "Current Data". Check the "Oil (Fluid)
Sep > 04 > A/T - MIL ON/Shift Flare/Harsh Engagement/DTC's Set > Page 992
Temperature Sensor" when the ATF is cold and hot. The oil temperature sensor is operating
correctly if the reading is:
5. If the temperature sensor does not read correctly as shown in Step 4, replace the oil temperature
sensor.
Sep > 04 > A/T - MIL ON/Shift Flare/Harsh Engagement/DTC's Set > Page 993
PARTS INFORMATION:
Aug > 03 > A/T - 2nd - 3rd Gear Shift Flare/Shudder
Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T - 2nd - 3rd Gear
Shift Flare/Shudder
Group TRANSAXLE
Number 03-40-015
Date AUGUST, 2003
Model ALL
Subject AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE 2-3 SHIFT FLARE OR SHIFT SHUDDER
DESCRIPTION:
If you are servicing a vehicle with 2-3 shift flare (engine speed increases during the 2-3 shift) or
shift shudder, follow the procedure shown below:
1. CHECK ATF LEVEL:
^ Attach a Hi-Scan Pro and select "Automatic Transaxle" and "Current Data" menus and "Oil
Temperature Sensor".
^ Drive the vehicle until the ATF temperature is at normal operating temperature (158-212°F or
70-100°C).
^ Place the shift lever in "Neutral" and check the ATF level on the dipstick. Add SPIII ATF to bring
the level to the top of the "FULL" mark.
2. CHECK FOR APPLICABLE TCM REPROGRAMS AND MODIFIED ATM.
3. CHECK FOR MODIFIED TCMS.
4. CHECK TRANSAXLE OIL TEMPERATURE SENSOR:

Aug > 03 > A/T - 2nd - 3rd Gear Shift Flare/Shudder > Page 998
^ Attach the Hi-Scan Pro to the DLC and select "Hyundai Vehicle Diagnosis" and "Automatic
Transaxle" menus. Check "Temperature Sensor" when the ATF is cold and hot. If the oil
temperature sensor does not indicate as shown, replace the sensor:
5. DISCONNECT THE BATTERY AND PERFORM ADAPTIVE LEARNING:

^ Drive the vehicle until the ATF temperature is above the temperature shown.
^ Accelerate the vehicle through several 1-2-3-4 upshifts at small throttle openings (approximately
25-30% TPS) until shift flare or shift shudder no longer occurs.
6. TEST DRIVE THE VEHICLE.
^ If the above procedures have been completed and shift flare or shift shudder continues to occur,
replace the transaxle.
Feb > 02 > A/T - Torque Converter Clutch Malfunctions
Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Torque Converter
Clutch Malfunctions
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 02-40-007
Model: ALL
Subject: AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH DIAGNOSIS
DESCRIPTION:
The torque converter clutch (TCC) inside the torque converter, also referred to as the "damper
clutch" or "lockup clutch", functions to lock the input and output sections of the torque converter
together to provide improved fuel economy.
If you are servicing a transaxle with either of the following conditions, follow the repair procedure
shown below:
^ Torque converter clutch does not engage when driving at steady speed on the highway.
^ Engine stalls when coming to a stop or when shifting into Drive or Reverse
REPAIR PROCEDURE:
2. Attach the Hi-Scan Pro and check for Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTC) in both the "ENGINE"
and "AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE" menus. If the DTC shown are found, follow the repair procedure
shown. If no DTC are found, go to Step 3.
3. Using the Hi-Scan Pro, select "HYUNDAI VEHICLE DIAGNOSIS", "AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE"
and "CURRENT DATA" menus, then "OIL TEMPERATURE" or "FLUID TEMPERATURE". Confirm
the oil temperature readout is correct as shown. If not, replace the oil temperature sensor.
Feb > 02 > A/T - Torque Converter Clutch Malfunctions > Page 1003
4. Using the Hi-Scan Pro, select:
^ "HYUNDAI VEHICLE DIAGNOSIS" menu
^ "AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE" menu
^ "CURRENT DATA" menu
^ THROTTLE P. SENSOR, "TCC SOLENOID DUTY", "TCC SLIP" and "OIL TEMPERATURE"
^ F2 - "SCRN". This will isolate the top four data to allow a quicker refresh rate for the data.
^ Check the TCC data under the conditions shown in the table. If the TCC data indicate as shown,
the torque converter and damper clutch are operating correctly. If not, go to Step 5.
5. If the TCC data does not indicate as shown or the engine stalls, follow the repair procedure
shown.
Feb > 02 > A/T - Torque Converter Clutch Malfunctions > Page 1004
6. If the engine stalls when shifting into Reverse or Drive, the oil cooler may be restricted.
Disconnect the oil cooler hoses to the oil cooler in the radiator. Bypass the oil cooler as shown. It
the condition:
^ Does not recur, replace the radiator
^ Recurs, contact the technical assistance line 800-325-6604.
NOTE:
Normal Warranty Labor Operation Codes, and Claim Submission Procedures apply to the
applicable repair performed.
Aug > 00 > A/T - MIL ON DTCs P0712/P0713 Set
Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T - MIL ON DTCs
P0712/P0713 Set
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 00-40-010
Date: AUGUST, 2000
Model: ALL
^ MIL illuminated
symptoms:
^ MIL illuminated
Procedure.
REPAIR PROCEDURE:
^ No DTC-gotostep4
Aug > 00 > A/T - MIL ON DTCs P0712/P0713 Set > Page 1009
PARTS INFORMATION:
Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: > 04-40-016 > Sep > 04 >
A/T - MIL ON/Shift Flare/Harsh Engagement/DTC's Set
Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T Controls - Neutral
Position Switch Adaptive Relearn
Resetting Adaptive Learning and Range Switch Neutral Position Learning
If the transaxle or transaxle control unit is replaced, the TCU adaptive learning values must be
reset (erased) and the range switch neutral position must be relearned using either the GDS or
Hi-Scan Pro. If the following procedures are not completed, the following conditions may occur:
I. RESET ADAPTIVE LEARNING:
^ Stop the vehicle, move the shift lever to "P" and set the parking brake.
^ Turn the ignition switch "ON" (engine off).
^ Attach the GDS or Hi-Scan Pro.
Reset Transaxle Adaptive Values(GDS):
Follow the instructions on the screen and confirm the test indicates "Completed:"
Reset Transaxie Adaptive Values (Hi-Scan):

A/T - MIL ON/Shift Flare/Harsh Engagement/DTC's Set > Page 1015
^ Select "RESETTING AUTO T/A VALUES."
Press "ENTER."
^ Confirm the test indicates "Completed."
II. RANGE SWITCH "N" POSITION LEARNING:
^ Stop the vehicle, move the shift lever to "N" and set the parking brake.
^ Turn the ignition switch "ON (engine off)."
^ Loosen the nut on the shift cable. Align the dot (o) on the shift lever to the "N" mark on the TCU.
Tighten the nut on the shift cable.
Range Switch "N" Position Learning (GDS):

A/T - MIL ON/Shift Flare/Harsh Engagement/DTC's Set > Page 1016
^ Follow the instructions on the screen and confirm the test indicates "Completed."
Range Switch "N" Position Learning (Hi-Scan Pro):
^ Select "ADAPTIVE PROCEDURE OF N RANGE." Press "ENTER.":

^ Move the shift lever from "P" to "D" and confirm the shift position indicator on the dash reads
correctly. Confirm the correct gear indication using the Hi-Scan or GDS.
Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: > 03-40-015 > Aug > 03 >
A/T - 2nd - 3rd Gear Shift Flare/Shudder
Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T - No Movement In

Drive/Reverse
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE - NO MOVEMENT IN DRIVE OR REVERSE GEAR
MODEL: ALL
DESCRIPTION:
If you are servicing a vehicle with no movement in drive or reverse gear follow the procedure
shown below:
REPAIR PROCEDURE:
1. Check for DTC in both the "Engine" and "Automatic Transaxle" menus:
^ If DTC are found, refer to TSB 05-40-008 or 04-40-020 for repair guidance.
^ If no DTC are found, go to Step 2.
NOTE:
A/T - 2nd - 3rd Gear Shift Flare/Shudder > Page 1021

Specification: 7-8 ft.lb
(10-12 Nm, 100-120 kg.cm)
8. Move the shift lever to the "N" position. Attach the
shift cable to the lever and install the nut. Tighten the nut to specification.
(12-13 Nm, 120-130 kg.cm)

^ Vehicle
^ Automatic Transaxle" menu
^ "Select Lever Switch" and "Shift Position:
inserted.
Check the wiring harness for an open or short circuit. If ok, replace the range switch.
^ Monitor "Shift Position" and "Select Lever Switch".
Go to Step 12.
inserted.
^ Shift the transaxle to "D". Move the gear selector switch of the A/T Tester and shift manually in 1,
NOTE:
Use the "EF, XG" switch for side-pan transaxles and the "LC" switch for bottompan transaxles.
^ If no movement replace the transaxle.
^ If the vehicle moves check the harness connector at the TCM and the solenoid for a bent pin or
pin not fully inserted. Check the wiring harness for an
open or short circuit.
^ If no problem is found swap a TCM from a similar vehicle and test for movement in Drive and
Reverse. If the vehicle moves in Drive and Reverse
replace the TCM.

Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: > 02-40-007 > Feb > 02 >
Customer Interest: > 09-AT-013 > Jul > 09 > A/T - MIL ON/DTC's P0705/P0707/P0708/No Start In P/N
Group TRANSAXLE
Number 09-AT-013
Date JULY, 2009

P0707, P0708
DESCRIPTION:
range switch.
PARTS INFORMATION
Customer Interest: > 09-AT-013 > Jul > 09 > A/T - MIL ON/DTC's P0705/P0707/P0708/No Start In P/N > Page 1032
Service Procedure
c below.

Customer Interest: > 05-40-016 > Oct > 05 > A/T - No Movement in 'DRIVE' or 'REVERSE'

'REVERSE'
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 05-40-016
Date: OCTOBER, 2005
Model: ALL
DESCRIPTION:
shown below:
REPAIR PROCEDURE:
NOTE:

Customer Interest: > 05-40-016 > Oct > 05 > A/T - No Movement in 'DRIVE' or 'REVERSE' > Page 1040

^ Vehicle
Go to Step 12.
NOTE:

Customer Interest: > 99-40-017 > Dec > 99 > A/T - Shift Lever Will Not Shift Out Of Park
Park
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 99-40-017
DESCRIPTION:
NOTE:
SERVICE PROCEDURE:
column).

Customer Interest: > 99-40-017 > Dec > 99 > A/T - Shift Lever Will Not Shift Out Of Park > Page 1048
module.
PARTS INFORMATION:
All Other Service Bulletins for Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: > tnt1720307-02 > Mar > 07 > A/T Controls - Neutral

Position Switch Adaptive Relearn > Page 1056
Press "ENTER."


All Other Service Bulletins for Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: > tnt1581105-02 > Nov > 05 > A/T - No Movement In
Drive/Reverse

Drive/Reverse
MODEL: ALL
DESCRIPTION:
shown below:
REPAIR PROCEDURE:
NOTE:
Drive/Reverse > Page 1062
(10-12 Nm, 100-120 kg.cm)
(12-13 Nm, 120-130 kg.cm)

^ Vehicle
inserted.
Go to Step 12.
inserted.
NOTE:
replace the TCM.

Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-AT-013 > Jul > 09 > A/T - MIL ON/DTC's
P0705/P0707/P0708/No Start In P/N
Group TRANSAXLE
Number 09-AT-013
Date JULY, 2009

P0707, P0708
DESCRIPTION:
range switch.
PARTS INFORMATION
P0705/P0707/P0708/No Start In P/N > Page 1075
Service Procedure
c below.

Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 05-40-016 > Oct > 05 > A/T - No Movement in
'DRIVE' or 'REVERSE'

'REVERSE'
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 05-40-016
Date: OCTOBER, 2005
Model: ALL
DESCRIPTION:
shown below:
REPAIR PROCEDURE:
NOTE:

'DRIVE' or 'REVERSE' > Page 1083

^ Vehicle
Go to Step 12.
NOTE:

Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 99-40-017 > Dec > 99 > A/T - Shift Lever Will
Not Shift Out Of Park
Park
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 99-40-017
DESCRIPTION:
NOTE:
SERVICE PROCEDURE:
column).

Not Shift Out Of Park > Page 1091
module.
PARTS INFORMATION:
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Transmission Position
Switch/Sensor: > 09-AT-013 > Jul > 09 > A/T - MIL ON/DTC's P0705/P0707/P0708/No Start In P/N
Group TRANSAXLE
Number 09-AT-013
Date JULY, 2009

P0707, P0708
DESCRIPTION:
range switch.
PARTS INFORMATION
Switch/Sensor: > 09-AT-013 > Jul > 09 > A/T - MIL ON/DTC's P0705/P0707/P0708/No Start In P/N > Page 1099
Service Procedure
c below.

Switch/Sensor: > tnt1720307-02 > Mar > 07 > A/T Controls - Neutral Position Switch Adaptive Relearn

Switch/Sensor: > tnt1720307-02 > Mar > 07 > A/T Controls - Neutral Position Switch Adaptive Relearn > Page 1107
Press "ENTER."

Switch/Sensor: > tnt1720307-02 > Mar > 07 > A/T Controls - Neutral Position Switch Adaptive Relearn > Page 1108

Switch/Sensor: > tnt1581105-02 > Nov > 05 > A/T - No Movement In Drive/Reverse

Drive/Reverse
MODEL: ALL
DESCRIPTION:
shown below:
REPAIR PROCEDURE:
NOTE:
Switch/Sensor: > tnt1581105-02 > Nov > 05 > A/T - No Movement In Drive/Reverse > Page 1113
(10-12 Nm, 100-120 kg.cm)
(12-13 Nm, 120-130 kg.cm)

^ Vehicle
inserted.
Go to Step 12.
inserted.
NOTE:
replace the TCM.

Switch/Sensor: > 05-40-016 > Oct > 05 > A/T - No Movement in 'DRIVE' or 'REVERSE'
Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T - No Movement in

Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 05-40-016
Date: OCTOBER, 2005
Model: ALL
DESCRIPTION:
shown below:
REPAIR PROCEDURE:
NOTE:

Switch/Sensor: > 05-40-016 > Oct > 05 > A/T - No Movement in 'DRIVE' or 'REVERSE' > Page 1120

^ Vehicle
Go to Step 12.
NOTE:

Switch/Sensor: > 99-40-017 > Dec > 99 > A/T - Shift Lever Will Not Shift Out Of Park
Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Shift Lever Will Not Shift
Out Of Park
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 99-40-017
DESCRIPTION:
NOTE:
SERVICE PROCEDURE:
column).

Switch/Sensor: > 99-40-017 > Dec > 99 > A/T - Shift Lever Will Not Shift Out Of Park > Page 1128
module.
PARTS INFORMATION:
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Transmission Position Switch/Sensor:
> tnt1720307-02 > Mar > 07 > A/T Controls - Neutral Position Switch Adaptive Relearn

> tnt1720307-02 > Mar > 07 > A/T Controls - Neutral Position Switch Adaptive Relearn > Page 1136
Press "ENTER."

> tnt1720307-02 > Mar > 07 > A/T Controls - Neutral Position Switch Adaptive Relearn > Page 1137

> tnt1581105-02 > Nov > 05 > A/T - No Movement In Drive/Reverse

Drive/Reverse
MODEL: ALL
DESCRIPTION:
shown below:
REPAIR PROCEDURE:
NOTE:
> tnt1581105-02 > Nov > 05 > A/T - No Movement In Drive/Reverse > Page 1142
(10-12 Nm, 100-120 kg.cm)
(12-13 Nm, 120-130 kg.cm)

^ Vehicle
inserted.
Go to Step 12.
inserted.
NOTE:
replace the TCM.

Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Description and Operation
IGNITION SWITCH-ST AND TRANSAXLE RANGE SWITCH [A/T]
When the ignition switch is set ST position, the battery voltage is applied through the ignition switch
and inhibitor switch to the ECM. If the selector lever is not P or N position, the battery voltage will
not reach to the ECM. Based on this signal, the ECM determines the automatic transaxle load and
drives the idle speed control actuator to maintain optimum idle speed.
Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Adjustments
1. Place selector lever in "N" (Neutral) position.
2. Loosen the manual control lever lock nut to separate the cable and lever. 3. Place the manual
control lever in the "N" (Neutral) position.
4. Turn the transaxle range switch body until the 12 mm (0.47 inch) wide end of the manual control
lever aligns with the switch body flange [12 mm
(0.472 inch) wide portion].
5. Tighten the attaching bolts (2 pcs.) to the specified torque.
Transaxle range switch attaching bolt: 10-12 Nm (84-108 inch lbs.)
NOTE: When setting up the switch body, be careful the O-ring does not drop from the switch body.
Tighten the attaching bolts carefully.
6. Make sure that the selector lever is in the "N" (Neutral) position.
7. Adjust the flange nut so that there is no slack in the control cable and make sure that the
selector lever operates smoothly. 8. Run the vehicle and confirm that the transaxle is set in each
range when the selector lever is shifted to each position.
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch: >
04-40-016 > Sep > 04 > A/T - MIL ON/Shift Flare/Harsh Engagement/DTC's Set
Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch: Customer Interest A/T - MIL ON/Shift Flare/Harsh

Engagement/DTC's Set
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 04-40-016
ELANTRA
DESCRIPTION:
REPAIR PROCEDURE.
necessary.
04-40-016 > Sep > 04 > A/T - MIL ON/Shift Flare/Harsh Engagement/DTC's Set > Page 1155
sensor.
04-40-016 > Sep > 04 > A/T - MIL ON/Shift Flare/Harsh Engagement/DTC's Set > Page 1156
PARTS INFORMATION:
03-40-015 > Aug > 03 > A/T - 2nd - 3rd Gear Shift Flare/Shudder
Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch: Customer Interest A/T - 2nd - 3rd Gear Shift
Flare/Shudder
Group TRANSAXLE
Number 03-40-015
Date AUGUST, 2003
Model ALL
DESCRIPTION:
1. CHECK ATF LEVEL:
70-100°C).

03-40-015 > Aug > 03 > A/T - 2nd - 3rd Gear Shift Flare/Shudder > Page 1161

02-40-007 > Feb > 02 > A/T - Torque Converter Clutch Malfunctions
Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch: Customer Interest A/T - Torque Converter Clutch

Malfunctions
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 02-40-007
Model: ALL
DESCRIPTION:
shown below:
REPAIR PROCEDURE:
02-40-007 > Feb > 02 > A/T - Torque Converter Clutch Malfunctions > Page 1166
shown.
the condition:
NOTE:
Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch: Customer Interest A/T - MIL ON DTCs P0712/P0713
Set
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 00-40-010
Date: AUGUST, 2000
Model: ALL
^ MIL illuminated
symptoms:
^ MIL illuminated
Procedure.
REPAIR PROCEDURE:
^ No DTC-gotostep4
PARTS INFORMATION:
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Transmission Temperature
Sensor/Switch: > 04-40-016 > Sep > 04 > A/T - MIL ON/Shift Flare/Harsh Engagement/DTC's Set
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 04-40-016
ELANTRA
DESCRIPTION:
REPAIR PROCEDURE.
necessary.
Sensor/Switch: > 04-40-016 > Sep > 04 > A/T - MIL ON/Shift Flare/Harsh Engagement/DTC's Set > Page 1178
sensor.
Sensor/Switch: > 04-40-016 > Sep > 04 > A/T - MIL ON/Shift Flare/Harsh Engagement/DTC's Set > Page 1179
PARTS INFORMATION:
Sensor/Switch: > 03-40-015 > Aug > 03 > A/T - 2nd - 3rd Gear Shift Flare/Shudder
Shift Flare/Shudder
Group TRANSAXLE
Number 03-40-015
Date AUGUST, 2003
Model ALL
DESCRIPTION:
1. CHECK ATF LEVEL:
70-100°C).

Sensor/Switch: > 03-40-015 > Aug > 03 > A/T - 2nd - 3rd Gear Shift Flare/Shudder > Page 1184

Sensor/Switch: > 02-40-007 > Feb > 02 > A/T - Torque Converter Clutch Malfunctions
Clutch Malfunctions
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 02-40-007
Model: ALL
DESCRIPTION:
shown below:
REPAIR PROCEDURE:
Sensor/Switch: > 02-40-007 > Feb > 02 > A/T - Torque Converter Clutch Malfunctions > Page 1189
shown.
Sensor/Switch: > 02-40-007 > Feb > 02 > A/T - Torque Converter Clutch Malfunctions > Page 1190
the condition:
NOTE:
Sensor/Switch: > 00-40-010 > Aug > 00 > A/T - MIL ON DTCs P0712/P0713 Set
P0712/P0713 Set
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 00-40-010
Date: AUGUST, 2000
Model: ALL
^ MIL illuminated
symptoms:
^ MIL illuminated
Procedure.
REPAIR PROCEDURE:
^ No DTC-gotostep4
Sensor/Switch: > 00-40-010 > Aug > 00 > A/T - MIL ON DTCs P0712/P0713 Set > Page 1195
PARTS INFORMATION:
Backing Plate: Specifications
DIMENSIONS
Mounting Bolt .......................................................................................................................................

..................................... 50-60 Nm (37-44 ft. lbs.)
Tie Rod End: Testing and Inspection
CHECKING TIE ROD END BALL JOINT STARTING TORQUE
1. Mount two nuts on the ball joint, and then measure the starting torque. The tie rod end ball joint
starting torque [Standard value] should be 0.5-2.5
Nm (4.3-21.7 inch lbs.).
2. If the starting torque exceeds the standard value, replace the tie rod end.
NOTE: Even if the starting torque is below limit of the standard value, the ball joint may be reused
unless it has drag and excessive play.
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Customer Interest for Vehicle Speed Sensor: > 03-40-022 > Dec > 03 > A/T - Fail Safe Mode/Erratic/Hard
Shifting/DTC's Set
Vehicle Speed Sensor: Customer Interest A/T - Fail Safe Mode/Erratic/Hard Shifting/DTC's Set
Number 03-40-022
Date 12-2003

P0717 & P0722
DESCRIPTION:

NOTE
REPAIR PROCEDURE:
Shifting/DTC's Set > Page 1208

PARTS INFORMATION
Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Vehicle Speed Sensor: > 03-40-022 > Dec > 03 > A/T - Fail Safe
Mode/Erratic/Hard Shifting/DTC's Set
Vehicle Speed Sensor: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Fail Safe Mode/Erratic/Hard
Shifting/DTC's Set
Number 03-40-022
Date 12-2003

P0717 & P0722
DESCRIPTION:

NOTE
REPAIR PROCEDURE:
Mode/Erratic/Hard Shifting/DTC's Set > Page 1215

PARTS INFORMATION
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component
Locations
Locations > Page 1219
Vehicle Speed Sensor: Connector Locations
EC01, EC02, EM01, EM02, EM03
MI01 To MI05, MM02
C27
E38-1 - E38-2
I06
I07-1 To I07-3, I08-1 To I08-3
I07-1 To I07-3, I08-1 To I08-3

I07-1 To I07-3, I08-1 To I08-3
I07-1 To I07-3, I08-1 To I08-3
I07-1 To I07-3, I08-1 To I08-3

I07-1 To I07-3, I08-1 To I08-3
I15 - I16
Vehicle Speed Sensor: Ground Locations
G04
G05
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Vehicle Speed Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions


Connector View
CONNECTOR VIEW
Numbering Order
NUMBERING ORDER

Electrical Diagram
Harness Layouts
Harness Layout

B ..........................................................................................................................................................
......................................................................... Black L .......................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
Blue Br .................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................... Brown G ...............................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
...... Green Gr .......................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................ Gray Lg ...................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
....... Light Green O ..............................................................................................................................
................................................................................................... Orange P .........................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
............................... Pink R ..................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................... Red W .............................
..............................................................................................................................................................
....................................... White Y ........................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................... Yellow Li ....................
..............................................................................................................................................................
......................................... Light Blue
Vehicle Speed Sensor: Diagnostic Aids
CAUTION
CAUTION
may result.
lamp or ohmmeter.

box and the short.
Testing For Voltage
Testing For Voltage
CAUTION
Vehicle Speed Sensor: Connector Views
Control Harness (1) - C01 - C27

Engine Harness (3) - EM03, EM04

Engine Harness (1) - E01 - E29
Engine Harness (2) - E30 - E45, EC01, EM01, EM02
Instrument Harness (1) - I03 - I06, I07-1 - I07-3, I-8-1 - I08-3, I10 - I16
Instrument Harness (2) - I17 - I20

Main Harness (4) - MD01-1 - MD02-2, MI01 - MI05, MM02 - MM04, MR02 - MR04
Main Harness (1) - M03 - M09, M10-1/M10-2, M11 - M23, M24-1/M24-2/M24-3, M25 - M29
Main Harness (2) - M31 - M44, M44-1, M46 - M71
Main Harness (3) - M72 - M79, M79-1, M81 - M92, MC01 - MC03, MD01-1
Vehicle Speed System
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1247
Vehicle Speed Sensor: Description and Operation
VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR (VSS)
The vehicle speed senor is a reed switch. The vehicle speed sensor is built into the speedometer
and converts the transaxle gear revolutions into pulse signals, which are sent to ECM.
Vehicle Speed Sensor: Testing and Inspection
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
DTC P0501 - Vehicle Speed Sensor
If there is an open or short circuit in the vehicle speed sensor signal circuit, the engine may stall
when the vehicle is decelerated to a stop.
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Technical
Concerns
Number: 97-40-031
Group: TRANSAXLE

Model: ALL
during deceleration
^ Rough idle
Note:
Concerns > Page 1260
SONATA
EXCEL, SCOUPE
Number: 97-40-031
Group: TRANSAXLE

Model: ALL
during deceleration
^ Rough idle
Note:
SONATA
EXCEL, SCOUPE
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins
Number: 98-36-001
Date: APRIL, 1998
DESCRIPTION
^ Oxygen sensors
^ Air flow sensor
emissions.
the A/F ratio.
performance.
the code was set.
stored in the PCM.
Note:

PCM.

load value.
Fuel Trim code.
and re-test.
this TSB.

Trim code.
and re-test.
TSB.
Note:
Note:
D. Select "Engine"
E. Select "Data"
the scan tool.
> Page 1278
MAF meter
Type Hot film type
connector No. 41
at 3,000 rpm 1.3 to 2.0 V

> Page 1279
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram


Connector View
CONNECTOR VIEW
Numbering Order
NUMBERING ORDER

Electrical Diagram
Harness Layouts
Harness Layout

B ..........................................................................................................................................................
......................................................................... Black L .......................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
Blue Br .................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................... Brown G ...............................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
...... Green Gr .......................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................ Gray Lg ...................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
....... Light Green O ..............................................................................................................................
................................................................................................... Orange P .........................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
............................... Pink R ..................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................... Red W .............................
..............................................................................................................................................................
....................................... White Y ........................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................... Yellow Li ....................
..............................................................................................................................................................
......................................... Light Blue
CAUTION
CAUTION
may result.
lamp or ohmmeter.

box and the short.
Testing For Voltage
Testing For Voltage
CAUTION

Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1293
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
connector.
or ECM.
comparison.
USING VOLTMETER
to 198°F).
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service
Number 00-36-006
Date MARCH, 2000
DESCRIPTION:
^ Unstable idle
REPAIR INFORMATION:


PARTS INFORMATION

Number: 97-40-031
Group: TRANSAXLE

Model: ALL
during deceleration
^ Rough idle
Note:
SONATA
EXCEL, SCOUPE
Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 00-36-006 > Mar > 00 > TPS - Driveability Concerns
Number 00-36-006
Date MARCH, 2000
DESCRIPTION:
^ Unstable idle
REPAIR INFORMATION:


Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 00-36-006 > Mar > 00 > TPS - Driveability Concerns > Page 1318
PARTS INFORMATION

Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 98-36-001 > Apr > 98 > Air/Fuel Mixture - Trim Code Diagnosis
Number: 98-36-001
Date: APRIL, 1998
DESCRIPTION
^ Oxygen sensors
^ Air flow sensor
emissions.
the A/F ratio.
Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 98-36-001 > Apr > 98 > Air/Fuel Mixture - Trim Code Diagnosis > Page 1323
performance.
the code was set.
stored in the PCM.
Note:

PCM.

load value.
Fuel Trim code.
and re-test.
this TSB.

Trim code.
and re-test.
TSB.
Note:
Note:
D. Select "Engine"
E. Select "Data"
the scan tool.
Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 97-40-031 > Sep > 97 > A/T - Driveability Concerns
Number: 97-40-031
Group: TRANSAXLE

Model: ALL
during deceleration
^ Rough idle
Note:
Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 97-40-031 > Sep > 97 > A/T - Driveability Concerns > Page 1330
SONATA
EXCEL, SCOUPE
Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 97-40-004 > Feb > 97 > Engine/Transmission Controls - Service Manual
Revisions
Manual Revisions
Number 97-40-004
Date 02-1997

DESCRIPTION:
are shown.
Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Throttle Position Sensor: > 09-BD-011 > Sep > 09 > Body - Sunroof
Creaking/Ticking Noises
Sunroof / Moonroof Panel: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Sunroof Creaking/Ticking Noises
Group BODY
Number 09-BD-011
Model ALL
Subject SUNROOF CREAK / TICK NOISE REPAIR
DESCRIPTION:
Some vehicles may exhibit a creak and/or ticking type noise from the sunroof glass panel when the
vehicle is driven on uneven to rough roads and/or when opening the sunroof. The noise can be
duplicated statically by applying pressure to the rear center section of the sunroof glass panel with
the sunroof in the closed position.
APPLICABLE VEHICLES:
Model: All Models
PARTS INFORMATION
SERVICE PROCEDURE:
1. Tilt sunroof glass open to the fully tilt position to expose the rear section of weatherstrip.
Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Throttle Position Sensor: > 09-BD-011 > Sep > 09 > Body - Sunroof
Creaking/Ticking Noises > Page 1342
2. Spray dry silicon lubricant onto the sunroof glass panel weather-stripping.
3. Position the sunroof panel in the fully closed position and confirm that the noise is eliminated.
NOTE:
Use a clean towel to remove excess lubricant and ensure the vehicle is well ventilated prior to
returning vehicle back to the customer.
Normal warranty applies.

Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Throttle Position Sensor: > 09-BD-011 > Sep > 09 > All Technical Service Bulletins
for Throttle Position Sensor: > 00-36-006 > Mar > 00 > TPS - Driveability Concerns
Number 00-36-006
Date MARCH, 2000
DESCRIPTION:
^ Unstable idle
REPAIR INFORMATION:


for Throttle Position Sensor: > 00-36-006 > Mar > 00 > TPS - Driveability Concerns > Page 1352
PARTS INFORMATION

for Throttle Position Sensor: > 98-36-001 > Apr > 98 > Air/Fuel Mixture - Trim Code Diagnosis
Number: 98-36-001
Date: APRIL, 1998
DESCRIPTION
^ Oxygen sensors
^ Air flow sensor
emissions.
the A/F ratio.
for Throttle Position Sensor: > 98-36-001 > Apr > 98 > Air/Fuel Mixture - Trim Code Diagnosis > Page 1357
performance.
the code was set.
stored in the PCM.
Note:

PCM.

load value.
Fuel Trim code.
and re-test.
this TSB.

Trim code.
and re-test.
TSB.
Note:
Note:
D. Select "Engine"
E. Select "Data"
the scan tool.
for Throttle Position Sensor: > 97-40-031 > Sep > 97 > A/T - Driveability Concerns
Number: 97-40-031
Group: TRANSAXLE

Model: ALL
during deceleration
^ Rough idle
Note:
for Throttle Position Sensor: > 97-40-031 > Sep > 97 > A/T - Driveability Concerns > Page 1364
SONATA
EXCEL, SCOUPE
for Throttle Position Sensor: > 97-40-004 > Feb > 97 > Engine/Transmission Controls - Service Manual Revisions
Manual Revisions
Number 97-40-004
Date 02-1997

DESCRIPTION:
are shown.
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > System Information >
Specifications
Compression Check: Specifications
Cylinder Compression at 250-400 rpm: 16.5 kg/sq cm (1.62 Mpa, 234 psi)
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > System Information >
Compression Check: Testing and Inspection
1. Before checking compression, check the engine oil level, also check that the starter motor and
battery are all in normal operating condition. 2. Start the engine and wait until engine coolant
temperature reaches 80-95°C (176-205°F). 3. Stop the engine and disconnect the spark plug
cables. 4. Remove the spark plugs. 5. Crank the engine to remove any foreign objects in the
cylinders. 6. Attach the compression gauge to the spark plug hole. 7. Depress the accelerator
pedal to fully open the throttle. 8. Crank the engine and read the gauge.
Cylinder's compression at 250-400 rpm: 16.5 kg/sq cm (1.62 Mpa, 234 psi). Limit: 15.5 kg/sq cm
(1.52 Mpa, 220 psi).
9. Repeat steps 6 through 8 on all cylinders, ensuring the pressure differential for each of the
cylinders is within the specified limit.
Pressure differential between cylinders: 1.0 kg/sq cm (100 kPa, 14 psi).
10. If a cylinders compression or pressure differential is below the specification, add a small
amount of oil through the spark plug hole, and repeat
steps 6 through 9. a. If the addition of oil brings the compression up, there may be wear between
the piston ring and cylinder wall b. If compression remains the same, valve seizure, poor valve
seating or a compression leak from the cylinder head gasket are all possible causes.
11. Install spark plugs and tighten to 20-30 Nm (200-300 kg. cm, 15-21 ft. lbs.).
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Spark Plugs - Application/Service Interval
Spark Plug: Technical Service Bulletins Spark Plugs - Application/Service Interval
Group 36 - ENGINE ELECTRICAL
Number 02-36-017
Date 06-2002
Model All Models
Subject SPARK PLUG PARTS INFORMATION
This bulletin supersedes TSB # 01-36-001 to update the parts information.

DESCRIPTION:
This bulletin provides the applicable NGK, Denso and Champion Spark Plug part numbers for
Hyundai Vehicles.
Table 1: Spark Plug GAP
SPARK PLUG MAINTENANCE:
HOW TO IDENTIFY A PLATINUM PLUG:
NGK/Denso: The part number starts with the letter "P." Example: P FR5N-11.
CHAMPION: The 5th letter in the Champion part number is the letter "P." Example: RC10 P YP4.
SPARK PLUG TIGHTENING TORQUE

Technical Service Bulletins > Spark Plugs - Application/Service Interval > Page 1377
Recommended tightening torque
^ First, tighten the spark plug finger tight. Once the gasket reaches the cylinder head, use a plug
socket and torque wrench to tighten.
Alternate Angle Method:
^ On plugs with crush washers: If the plug is new, insert the plug until the washer makes contact.
Then, using a ratchet, rotate the plug a further 90 degrees.
^ If the plug is used, insert the plug until the washer makes contact. Then, using a ratchet, rotate
the plug a further 30 degrees.
USING THE CORRECT SPARK PLUG SOCKET
^ Care must be taken during installation that the spark plug socket is not slanted and does not slip
causing insulator breakage.
^ The following are qualities required in a wrench:
1. Fits the spark plug "hex" properly.
2. The inner space must be large enough to avoid contact with the insulator.
3. The plug socket must completely cover the "hex" portion of the metal shell.
4. A six-pint socket is preferable as it is less likely to slip than a twelve-point.

SPARK PLUG PART INFORMATION:
Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1380
Spark Plug: Specifications
Plug Gap 1.0 - 1.1 mm (0.039 - 0.043 in.)
Tightening Torque 20 - 30 Nm (15 - 21 lb-ft.)

Spark Plug: Application and ID
NGK .....................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................. BKR5ES-11 Champion .........................................................
..................................................................................................................................... RC9YC4,
RC10YC4
Spark Plug: Testing and Inspection
INSPECTION AND CLEANING CHECKING SPARK PLUG
1. Disconnect the spark plug cable from the spark plug.
NOTE: Pull on the spark plug cable boot when removing the spark plug cable, not the cable, as it
may be damaged.
2. Using a spark plug wrench, remove all of the spark plug from the cylinder head.
CAUTION: Take care not to allow contaminants to enter through the spark plug holes.
3. Check the spark plugs for the following
1. Broken insulator 2. Worn electrode 3. Carbon deposits 4. Damaged or broken gasket 5.

Condition of the porcelain insulator at the tip of the spark plug
4. Check the spark plug gap using a wire gap gauge, and adjust if necessary.
Standard value:
Unleaded : 1.0-1.1 mm (0.039-0.043 in.)

5. Re-insert the spark plug and tighten to the specified torque. If it is over torqued, damage to the
thread portion of cylinder head might result.
Tightening torque : 20-30 N.m (204-306 kg.cm, 15-21 lb.ft)
ANALYZING SPARK PLUG
Engine conditions can be analyzed by the tip deposits near the electrode.
SPARK PLUG TEST (WHEN ENGINE CAN BE CRANKED)
Connect the spark plug cable. Ground the outer electrode (main body), and crank the engine. In
the atmosphere, only short sparks are produced because of the small discharge gap. If the spark
plug is good, however, sparks will occur in the discharge gap (between the electrodes). In a
defective spark plug, no sparks will occur because of a leak through the insulation.
Specifications
Input Shaft: Specifications
T : Indicates Tightening of - (Minus) Direction of End Play L : Indicates Loosening of + (Plus)

Direction of End Play
Input Shaft Rear Bearing End Play M5BF1 Model Only 0 - 0.05 L mm
Front Bearing End Play M5AF3 Model Only 0.01 T - 0.12 L mm
Rear Bearing End Play M5AF3 Model Only 0.01 T - 0.09 L mm
Lock Nut 140 - 160 Nm

Input Shaft: Service and Repair
DISASSEMBLY
1. Remove the snap ring using special tool (09432-21201) or equivalent.

2. Remove the front bearing using special tool (09432-21300) or equivalent.
3. Remove the inner ring, spacer, fourth gear, needle bearing, bearing sleeve, synchronizer rings,
third and fourth gear synchronizer hub and sleeve
and third gear all together using special tool (09432-33200) or equivalent.
INSPECTION
Input Shaft
1. Check the outer surface of the input shaft where the needle bearing is mounted for damage or
abnormal wear portion (A). 2. Check the splines for damage or wear.
Needle Bearing
1. Install the needle bearing on the shaft with the bearing sleeve and gear. Check that it rotates
smoothly without abnormal noise or play. 2. Check the needle bearing cage for distortion.
Synchronizer Ring
1. Check the clutch gear teeth for damage. 2. Check the internal surface for damage, wear or
broken grooves.
3. Push the synchronizer ring toward the clutch gear and check clearance "A". Replace if it is not
within specifications.
Limit: 0.5 mm (0.02 inch).
Synchronizer Sleeve and Hub
1. Install the synchronizer sleeve on the hub and check that it slides smoothly. 2. Check that the
sleeve is free from damage. 3. Check for wear of the hub end surfaces (in contact with each gear).
CAUTION: Replace the synchronizer hub and sleeve as a set.
Synchronizer Key and Spring
1. Check for wear of the synchronizer key center protrusion. 2. Check the spring for weakness,
distortion or damage.
Gears
1. Check the bevel gear and clutch gear teeth for damage or wear. 2. Check the gear cone for
rough surfaces, damage or wear. 3. Check the gear bore for damage or wear.
ASSEMBLY
1. Install the synchronizer hub and sleeve so that they are positioned as shown in the figure.
2. The synchronizer sleeve has teeth missing at six places. Assemble the hub to the sleeve so that
the center tooth between the two missing teeth will
touch synchronizer key.
3. Install the synchronizer spring so that the stepped portions will rest on the synchronizer keys.
CAUTION: When installing the synchronizer springs, make sure they are not facing the same
direction.
4. Install the 3rd-4th gear synchronizer assembly on the input shaft using special tool
(09432-33300) or equivalent.
CAUTION: a. When installing the synchronizer assembly, make sure that the three synchronizer
keys are seated correctly in their respective grooves of the
synchronizer ring.
b. After installing the synchronizer assembly, check that 3rd gear rotates smoothly.
5. Install the bearing sleeve using special tool (09432-33300) or equivalent.
6. Install the needle bearing and the 4th gear on the input shaft. 7. Install the spacer and sleeve on
the input shaft, performing these steps.
a. Install the ball bearing using special tool (09432-33300) or equivalent. b. Install the snap ring.
Locations > Engine Compartment Relay/Fuse Box

Locations > Engine Compartment Relay/Fuse Box > Page 1395
Application and ID > Engine Compartment Relay/Fuse Box

Application and ID > Engine Compartment Relay/Fuse Box > Page 1398
Application and ID > Page 1399
INSPECTION
fusible link.
Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Specifications

Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1404
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
USING VOLTMETER
Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins >
Crankshaft Position Sensor - Replacement Procedure
Procedure
Number: 99-36-010
Date: JULY, 1999
DESCRIPTION:
NOTE:
installed.
Crankshaft Position Sensor - Replacement Procedure > Page 1412

Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Specifications > Electrical
Specifications
at 3,000 rpm 2,800 to 3,200 Hz

at 3,000 rpm 2,800 to 3,200 Hz

Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1416
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
SENSOR INSPECTION
terminal 2 and 3.
wheel: 0.5 - 1.5 mm (0.020 - 0.059 in.)

voltage induced.
Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Component Information > Locations
Ignition Switch: Locations
IGNITION LOCK
Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Specifications > Electrical Specifications

Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Specifications > Electrical Specifications > Page
1428

Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1429
KNOCK SENSOR (KS)
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
SENSOR INSPECTION


Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Airbags - Replacement After A Collision
Impact Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins Airbags - Replacement After A Collision
Number 04-90-002
Date 01-2004
Model ACCENT 1995-2002, ELANTRA 1992-2003, EXCEL 1986-1994, SANTA FE 2001-2004,

SCOUPE 1991-1995, SONATA 1989-2004, TIBURON 1997-2004, XG 300 2001 AND XG 350
2002-2004
This bulletin supersedes TSB # 03-90-023 to include additional Airbag Wire Harness information.
DESCRIPTION:
component.
WARNING
Collision repair is not covered under warranty.

Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor >
Impact Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins Restraint System - Component Replacement After
Collision
Number 01-90-013
Date 11-2001
Model All Models
DESCRIPTION:
component.
WARNING
^ Collision repair is not covered under warranty.

Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Safing Sensor, Air Bag
> Component Information > Description and Operation
Safing Sensor: Description and Operation
Arming Sensor/Safing Sensor
The arming/safing sensor built in the airbag firing circuit has the function of arming the airbag circuit
under all required deployment condition and maintaining the airbag firing circuits unarmed under
normal driving conditions. The safing sensor is a dual-contact electromechanical switch which
closes if it experiences a deceleration exceeding a specified threshold.
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Buckle
Seat Belt Buckle Switch: Testing and Inspection
SEAT BELT SWITCH INSPECTION
1. Disconnect the connector from the switch. Check for continuity between terminals
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Ignition Switch >
IGNITION LOCK
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and
Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins >
Engine/Transmission Controls - Service Manual Revisions
Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Technical Service Bulletins Engine/Transmission Controls - Service

Manual Revisions
Number 97-40-004
Date 02-1997

DESCRIPTION:
are shown.
Switches - A/T > Throttle Position Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection
Throttle Position Sensor/Switch: Testing and Inspection
INSPECTION
1. After warming up the engine, make sure that the closed throttle position switch is on with the
accelerator pedal in the free state.
NOTE: Check to see that the closed throttle position switch is on or off by checking the voltage
between the wire at the closed throttle position switch connector and the ground wire.
- When the closed throttle position switch is ON: 0V
- When the closed throttle position switch is OFF: 12V

Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins >
Customer Interest: > 09-AT-013 > Jul > 09 > A/T - MIL ON/DTC's P0705/P0707/P0708/No Start In P/N
Group TRANSAXLE
Number 09-AT-013
Date JULY, 2009

P0707, P0708
DESCRIPTION:
range switch.
PARTS INFORMATION
Service Procedure
c below.


'REVERSE'
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 05-40-016
Date: OCTOBER, 2005
Model: ALL
DESCRIPTION:
shown below:
REPAIR PROCEDURE:
NOTE:


^ Vehicle
Go to Step 12.
NOTE:

Customer Interest: > 99-40-017 > Dec > 99 > A/T - Shift Lever Will Not Shift Out Of Park
Park
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 99-40-017
DESCRIPTION:
NOTE:
SERVICE PROCEDURE:
column).

module.
PARTS INFORMATION:
Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All
Technical Service Bulletins for Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: > 09-AT-013 > Jul > 09 > A/T - MIL ON/DTC's
Group TRANSAXLE
Number 09-AT-013
Date JULY, 2009

P0707, P0708
DESCRIPTION:
range switch.
PARTS INFORMATION
Service Procedure
c below.

Technical Service Bulletins for Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: > tnt1720307-02 > Mar > 07 > A/T Controls - Neutral

Press "ENTER."


Technical Service Bulletins for Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: > tnt1581105-02 > Nov > 05 > A/T - No Movement In
Drive/Reverse

Drive/Reverse
MODEL: ALL
DESCRIPTION:
shown below:
REPAIR PROCEDURE:
NOTE:

(10-12 Nm, 100-120 kg.cm)
(12-13 Nm, 120-130 kg.cm)

^ Vehicle
inserted.
Go to Step 12.
inserted.
NOTE:
replace the TCM.

Technical Service Bulletins for Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: > 05-40-016 > Oct > 05 > A/T - No Movement in

Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 05-40-016
Date: OCTOBER, 2005
Model: ALL
DESCRIPTION:
shown below:
REPAIR PROCEDURE:
NOTE:


^ Vehicle
Go to Step 12.
NOTE:

Technical Service Bulletins for Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: > 99-40-017 > Dec > 99 > A/T - Shift Lever Will Not
Shift Out Of Park
Out Of Park
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 99-40-017
DESCRIPTION:
NOTE:
SERVICE PROCEDURE:
column).

Shift Out Of Park > Page 1519
module.
PARTS INFORMATION:
Other Service Bulletins for Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: > tnt1720307-02 > Mar > 07 > A/T Controls - Neutral

Press "ENTER."


Other Service Bulletins for Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: > tnt1581105-02 > Nov > 05 > A/T - No Movement In
Drive/Reverse

Drive/Reverse
MODEL: ALL
DESCRIPTION:
shown below:
REPAIR PROCEDURE:
NOTE:

(10-12 Nm, 100-120 kg.cm)
(12-13 Nm, 120-130 kg.cm)

^ Vehicle
inserted.
Go to Step 12.
inserted.
NOTE:
replace the TCM.

Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page
1536
1537
1538
Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer
Interest: > 03-40-022 > Dec > 03 > A/T - Fail Safe Mode/Erratic/Hard Shifting/DTC's Set
Transmission Speed Sensor: Customer Interest A/T - Fail Safe Mode/Erratic/Hard Shifting/DTC's
Set
Number 03-40-022
Date 12-2003

P0717 & P0722
DESCRIPTION:

NOTE
REPAIR PROCEDURE:
Interest: > 03-40-022 > Dec > 03 > A/T - Fail Safe Mode/Erratic/Hard Shifting/DTC's Set > Page 1547

Interest: > 03-40-022 > Dec > 03 > A/T - Fail Safe Mode/Erratic/Hard Shifting/DTC's Set > Page 1548
PARTS INFORMATION
Interest: > 00-40-011 > Aug > 00 > A/T - Harsh Shifts, DTCs P0717/P0722 Set
Transmission Speed Sensor: Customer Interest A/T - Harsh Shifts, DTCs P0717/P0722 Set
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 00-40-011
Date: AUGUST, 2000

^ Harsh 1-2 shift

TCM):
Note 1:
Note 2:
SERVICE PROCEDURE:
Interest: > 00-40-011 > Aug > 00 > A/T - Harsh Shifts, DTCs P0717/P0722 Set > Page 1553
Interest: > 00-40-011 > Aug > 00 > A/T - Harsh Shifts, DTCs P0717/P0722 Set > Page 1554
Interest: > 98-40-002 > Apr > 98 > A/T - Intermittent Delayed, Erratic, Harsh Shifting
Transmission Speed Sensor: Customer Interest A/T - Intermittent Delayed, Erratic, Harsh Shifting
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 98-40-002
Date: APRIL, 1998
Model: ALL
Subject PULSE GENERATOR DIAGNOSIS
This TSB revises TSB # 97-40-025-1 to provide additional diagnosis procedures
DESCRIPTION:
The following conditions may be caused by an improperly functioning pulse generator. The
conditions may be intermittent and difficult to duplicate.
^ Harsh 1-2 shift
^ Third-gear "fail-safe condition and/or "Check Engine" light on
^ Bucking and/or hesitation
(TCM):
OBD II NON-OBD II DESCRIPTION
P0717 31 and/or 81 No pulse generator-A signal
P0722 32 and/or 82 No pulse generator-B signal
Note 1:
For Non-OBD II vehicles, always check the "Transaxle" menu in the HDS Scan Tool for additional
codes.
Note 2:
The following DTCs may be induced by an incorrect output of the PG-B and do not necessarily
indicate a mechanical condition in the transaxle.
P0732 A/T 2nd gear ratio problem
P0733 A/T 3rd gear ratio problem
P0734 A/T 4th gear ratio problem
P1624 MIL- On request from TCM
After repairs are made to the pulse generator, clear the codes and test drive the vehicle for two
driving cycles*. If the DTCs do not return, the codes were induced by the incorrect output of the
PG-B.
* A driving cycle is defined as:

^ The engine is started cold (coolant at ambient temperature)
^ The coolant temperature rises to 160°F
^ The fuel system goes into closed loop. (To determine closed loop, attach the HDS Scan Tool to
the data link connector (DLC), select "Engine", "Codes and Data" and "Data" menus and monitor
"Fuel Sys1" until the readout is "CL")
SERVICE PROCEDURE:

Interest: > 98-40-002 > Apr > 98 > A/T - Intermittent Delayed, Erratic, Harsh Shifting > Page 1559
5. Verify the correct operation of the pulse generator according to the procedure shown.
A. Connect the HDS Scan Tool to the DLC.
B. From the Menu, select "4-Speed Trans", "Codes and Data" and "Data".
Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical
Service Bulletins: > 03-40-022 > Dec > 03 > A/T - Fail Safe Mode/Erratic/Hard Shifting/DTC's Set
Transmission Speed Sensor: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Fail Safe Mode/Erratic/Hard
Shifting/DTC's Set
Number 03-40-022
Date 12-2003

P0717 & P0722
DESCRIPTION:

NOTE
REPAIR PROCEDURE:
Service Bulletins: > 03-40-022 > Dec > 03 > A/T - Fail Safe Mode/Erratic/Hard Shifting/DTC's Set > Page 1565

Service Bulletins: > 03-40-022 > Dec > 03 > A/T - Fail Safe Mode/Erratic/Hard Shifting/DTC's Set > Page 1566
PARTS INFORMATION
Service Bulletins: > 00-40-011 > Aug > 00 > A/T - Harsh Shifts, DTCs P0717/P0722 Set
Transmission Speed Sensor: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Harsh Shifts, DTCs
P0717/P0722 Set
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 00-40-011
Date: AUGUST, 2000

^ Harsh 1-2 shift

TCM):
Note 1:
Note 2:
SERVICE PROCEDURE:
Service Bulletins: > 00-40-011 > Aug > 00 > A/T - Harsh Shifts, DTCs P0717/P0722 Set > Page 1571
Service Bulletins: > 00-40-011 > Aug > 00 > A/T - Harsh Shifts, DTCs P0717/P0722 Set > Page 1572
Service Bulletins: > 98-40-002 > Apr > 98 > A/T - Intermittent Delayed, Erratic, Harsh Shifting
Transmission Speed Sensor: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Intermittent Delayed, Erratic,
Harsh Shifting
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 98-40-002
Date: APRIL, 1998
Model: ALL
DESCRIPTION:
^ Harsh 1-2 shift
(TCM):
Note 1:
codes.
Note 2:
PG-B.

SERVICE PROCEDURE:

Service Bulletins: > 98-40-002 > Apr > 98 > A/T - Intermittent Delayed, Erratic, Harsh Shifting > Page 1577
Service Bulletins: > 97-40-025-1 > Aug > 97 > A/T - Driveability Concerns/DTC's Set/MIL ON
Transmission Speed Sensor: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Driveability Concerns/DTC's
Set/MIL ON
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 97-40-025-1
Date: August, 1997
Model: ALL
Subject: PULSE GENERATOR DIAGNOSIS
This TSB revises TSB # 97-40-025 to provide additional diagnosis procedures.
DESCRIPTION:
^ Harsh 1-2 shift
^ Third-gear "fail-safe" condition and/or "Check Engine" light on
The following DTC may be stored in memory in the transaxle control module (TCM):
P0717 31 and/or 81* No pulse generator-A signal
P0722 32 and/or 82* No pulse generator-B signal
Note 1:
*Fail-safe code
Note 2:
Always check the "Transaxle" menu in the HDS scanner for additional codes. DTC P0732
(non-synchronous 2nd Gear), P0733 (nonsynchronous 3rd Gear), P0734 (non-synchronous 4th
Gear) and P1624 (transaxle system concern) may also be found in memory in the TCM. These
DTCs may be induced by the incorrect output of the PG-B and do not necessarily indicate a
mechanical condition in the transaxle. After repairs are made to the pulse generator, clear the
codes and test drive the vehicle for two driving cycles. If the DTCs do not return, the codes were
induced by the incorrect output of the PG-B.
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE:
As part of the diagnostic procedure, inspect and test the pulse generator according to the
1. Turn the ignition switch to "ON" and connect the HDS Scanner to the Data Link Connector
(DLC).
2. From the Menu, select "Transaxle", "Codes and Data", and "Codes". If DTC for pulse generators
shown on the previous page are stored in memory, replace the pulse generators and go to the
"Main Connector Repair" section of this TSB. If no codes are stored, continue to step 3.
3. From the Menu, select "Data". While driving the vehicle at approximately 30 mph in third gear,
with the overdrive switch off, have an assistant monitor PG-A and PG-B. Check that both PG-A and
PG-B are approximately equal to the engine rpm in third gear.
^ If so, continue to "Main Connector Repair".
^ If not or if the PG-A or PG-B outputs fluctuate rapidly when the improper shift condition occurs,
the pulse generators are not functioning properly or the wiring harness is damaged. Continue to
"Main Connector Repair".
Service Bulletins: > 97-40-025-1 > Aug > 97 > A/T - Driveability Concerns/DTC's Set/MIL ON > Page 1582
SERVICE PROCEDURE:
A) Main Connector Repair:
1. Disconnect the pulse generator main connector from the engine harness.
3. Clean both ends of the pulse generator connector with aerosol electrical contact cleaner.
4. Reconnect the main connector.
B) Test Procedure:
2. Use an ohmmeter to check the resistance between the male terminals 1-2 and 3-4 as shown. If
the resistance is not within the specification of 215-275 ohms, replace the pulse generator.
3. If the resistance is within specification, reconnect the pulse generator main connector and use
an ohmmeter or HDS sweep test to check the continuity of the engine harness between the TCM
and the pulse generator. The resistance should be 215-275 ohms.
4. If the resistance is not 215-275 ohms, carefully check the harness near the engine mounts for
damage to the wiring that may cause open or short
Service Bulletins: > 97-40-025-1 > Aug > 97 > A/T - Driveability Concerns/DTC's Set/MIL ON > Page 1583
circuits. Reposition any wires that put tension on the PG connector; there must be slack in the PG
wiring assembly (check that there is no tension in the wires when the engine is under load in
Drive). Refer to the electrical section of the appropriate Shop Manual and check the ground for the
shielded wiring.
5. Repair or replace the harness if necessary.

Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other
Service Bulletins for Transmission Speed Sensor: > 97-60-007 > Nov > 97 > Deck Lid/Hatch - Will Not Stay Open
Trunk / Liftgate Shock / Support: All Technical Service Bulletins Deck Lid/Hatch - Will Not Stay
Open
Group: BODY
Number: 97-60-007
Date: NOVEMBER, 1997
Model: ALL 1997 VEHICLES
Subject: SPOILER EQUIPPED VEHICLE: TORSION BARS, GAS STRUTS AND CHMSL
INFORMATION
DESCRIPTION:
1. If a vehicle has a Genuine Hyundai Rear Spoiler and the deck lid does not stay open:
A. The trunk lid torsion bar springs may be installed backwards. Remove the torsion bars and
reverse their location.
B. If the above does not resolve the condition, order the appropriate spoiler type torsion bars as
noted and install.
2. If a Tiburon has a Genuine Hyundai Rear Spoiler and the hatch does not stay open, then order
two of the spoiler type gas struts from the chart and install.
3. If a vehicle has a Genuine Hyundai Rear Spoiler with an integral brake light AND if the original
Center High Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL) unit has not been removed (that is, if there are two
functioning CHMSL units on the vehicle), then:
A. Remove and discard the original CHMSL.
B. Order the appropriate CHMSL cover kit from the chart and install the cover.
PARTS INFORMATION:
WARRANTY INFORMATION: Normal warranty operation codes and times apply.

Switches - A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins >
Customer Interest for Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch: > 04-40-016 > Sep > 04 > A/T - MIL ON/Shift Flare/Harsh

Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 04-40-016
ELANTRA
DESCRIPTION:
REPAIR PROCEDURE.
necessary.
Engagement/DTC's Set > Page 1602
sensor.
PARTS INFORMATION:
Customer Interest for Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch: > 03-40-015 > Aug > 03 > A/T - 2nd - 3rd Gear Shift
Flare/Shudder
Flare/Shudder
Group TRANSAXLE
Number 03-40-015
Date AUGUST, 2003
Model ALL
DESCRIPTION:
1. CHECK ATF LEVEL:
70-100°C).

Customer Interest for Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch: > 03-40-015 > Aug > 03 > A/T - 2nd - 3rd Gear Shift
Flare/Shudder > Page 1608

Customer Interest for Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch: > 02-40-007 > Feb > 02 > A/T - Torque Converter Clutch
Malfunctions

Malfunctions
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 02-40-007
Model: ALL
DESCRIPTION:
shown below:
REPAIR PROCEDURE:
Malfunctions > Page 1613
shown.
the condition:
NOTE:
Customer Interest for Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch: > 00-40-010 > Aug > 00 > A/T - MIL ON DTCs
P0712/P0713 Set
Set
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 00-40-010
Date: AUGUST, 2000
Model: ALL
^ MIL illuminated
symptoms:
^ MIL illuminated
Procedure.
REPAIR PROCEDURE:
^ No DTC-gotostep4
Customer Interest for Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch: > 00-40-010 > Aug > 00 > A/T - MIL ON DTCs
P0712/P0713 Set > Page 1619
PARTS INFORMATION:
All Technical Service Bulletins for Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch: > 04-40-016 > Sep > 04 > A/T - MIL ON/Shift
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 04-40-016
ELANTRA
DESCRIPTION:
REPAIR PROCEDURE.
necessary.
Flare/Harsh Engagement/DTC's Set > Page 1625
sensor.
PARTS INFORMATION:
All Technical Service Bulletins for Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch: > 03-40-015 > Aug > 03 > A/T - 2nd - 3rd
Gear Shift Flare/Shudder
Shift Flare/Shudder
Group TRANSAXLE
Number 03-40-015
Date AUGUST, 2003
Model ALL
DESCRIPTION:
1. CHECK ATF LEVEL:
70-100°C).

All Technical Service Bulletins for Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch: > 03-40-015 > Aug > 03 > A/T - 2nd - 3rd
Gear Shift Flare/Shudder > Page 1631

All Technical Service Bulletins for Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch: > 02-40-007 > Feb > 02 > A/T - Torque
Converter Clutch Malfunctions
Clutch Malfunctions
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 02-40-007
Model: ALL
DESCRIPTION:
shown below:
REPAIR PROCEDURE:
Converter Clutch Malfunctions > Page 1636
shown.
the condition:
NOTE:
All Technical Service Bulletins for Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch: > 00-40-010 > Aug > 00 > A/T - MIL ON DTCs
P0712/P0713 Set
P0712/P0713 Set
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 00-40-010
Date: AUGUST, 2000
Model: ALL
^ MIL illuminated
symptoms:
^ MIL illuminated
Procedure.
REPAIR PROCEDURE:
^ No DTC-gotostep4
All Technical Service Bulletins for Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch: > 00-40-010 > Aug > 00 > A/T - MIL ON DTCs
P0712/P0713 Set > Page 1642
PARTS INFORMATION:
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window
Switch > Component Information > Specifications
Power Window Switch: Specifications Power Window Motor Switch Specifications
Power Window Motor Switch Specifications
Rated Current 12 V 10A
Motor Load State 12 V 10A

Switch > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1647
Power Window Switch: Locations
COMPONENTS
Switch > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1648
Power Window Switch: Testing and Inspection
INSPECTION OF POWER WINDOW SWITCH
1. Remove the switch from the door grip handle.
2. Check for continuity between the terminals.

Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield
Washer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > With Airbag
Windshield Washer Switch: Diagrams With Airbag

Washer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > With Airbag > Page 1654
Windshield Washer Switch: Diagrams Without Airbag

Washer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1655
Windshield Washer Switch: Testing and Inspection
INSPECTION
as shown below.
WASHER SWITCH (CONNECTOR NO.: M10-2)

Washer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1656
Windshield Washer Switch: Service and Repair
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Switch
> Component Information > Diagrams > With Airbag
Wiper Switch: Diagrams With Airbag

> Component Information > Diagrams > With Airbag > Page 1661
Wiper Switch: Diagrams Without Airbag

> Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Front Wiper and Washer Switch
Wiper Switch: Testing and Inspection Front Wiper and Washer Switch
INSPECTION
as shown below.
WIPER SWITCH (CONNECTOR NO.: M10-2)

> Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Front Wiper and Washer Switch > Page 1664
Wiper Switch: Testing and Inspection Rear Wiper and Washer Switch
REAR WASHER SWITCH
INSPECTION
1. Remove the center facia Panel. 2. Remove the rear wiper and washer switch from the facia
panel.

> Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 1665
Wiper Switch: Service and Repair
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins >
Steering/Suspension - Drift/Pull Diagnosis/Repair
Alignment: Technical Service Bulletins Steering/Suspension - Drift/Pull Diagnosis/Repair
Group: SUSPENSION SYSTEM
Number: 08-SS-004
Date: JULY, 2008
Model: ALL
Subject: DIAGNOSIS AND CORRECTION OF VEHICLE PULL
This bulletin supersedes TSB 05-50-012 to include 2009 models
DESCRIPTION:
Several factors may cause vehicle pull, both vehicle related and external conditions. The purpose
of this bulletin is to assist in identifying the vehicle related conditions that cause pull and how to
correct those conditions.
CAUSES OF VEHICLE PULL:
Vehicle pull is the tendency of the vehicle to drift right or left while driving in a straight ahead
direction on a straight road at a constant speed with no pressure on the steering wheel. This pull or
drift may be gradual and can always be compensated for by inputs through the steering wheel. One
or more of the following conditions may cause the vehicle to pull:
Non-vehicle conditions that may cause the vehicle to pull: ^
Cambered road surfaces - Most highways are built with cambered or "crowned" surfaces to drain
rain water. Sometimes the road camber is visually noticeable. Other times, it is not. The vehicle
may tend to pull to the left or right, depending on the camber of the road surface.
Cross-winds - A sometimes overlooked, yet possible cause of steering drift is cross-winds. Side
winds at higher vehicle speeds may cause vehicle pull. Please do not rule out cross-winds when
diagnosing a vehicle pull.
Vehicle pull caused by these two conditions is not related to vehicle adjustments and no repair
should be made.
Vehicle conditions that may cause the vehicle to pull: ^
Tire inflation pressure - As small as a 2 pounds/square inch tire inflation pressure difference
between the right and left tires may cause a vehicle to pull. Be sure to check the tire pressure
before the tires are warmed up prior to attempting more extensive diagnosis.
Wheel alignment - Slightly out of specification wheel alignment causes very few vehicles to pull.
Therefore, if the vehicle wheel alignment has been adjusted as close as possible to specification,
DO NOT attempt to correct the vehicle pull by changing the wheel alignment angles by bending
suspension components or other non-approved methods.
Uneven brake adjustment - If one of the four brakes is dragging, the vehicle may pull to the side of
the dragging brake. Verify that none of the brakes are dragging and that they are adjusted correctly
prior to attempting more extensive diagnosis.
^
Incorrect vehicle trim height - If the trim height of the vehicle is not equal on all sides, the vehicle
may pull to the side of the lower trim height. Check and adjust the trim height of the vehicle as
necessary. Please note that a slight variation in the vehicle trim height seldom causes a noticeable
vehicle pull.
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins >
Steering/Suspension - Drift/Pull Diagnosis/Repair > Page 1671
^ Tire construction - The way in which the tire is built can produce vehicle pull. An example of this
is the placement of the under tread belt. An off-center radial tire belt can cause the tire to develop a
side force while rolling straight down the road and the tire will tend to roll like a cone. To correct this
condition, please use the flow chart. This chart provides the sequence of procedures designed to
be performed for all conditions of vehicle pull.
^ Tire size - Different size tires or different make of tires, on either axles, may cause a vehicle pull.
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1672
Alignment: Specifications
DIMENSIONS
Camber
Front:
Nominal ...............................................................................................................................................
............................................................... 0° Range .............................................................................
................................................................................................................... -0.5° to +0.5°
Rear:
Nominal ...............................................................................................................................................
......................................................... -0.68° Range .............................................................................
................................................................................................................ -1.18° to -0.18°
Caster
Nominal ...............................................................................................................................................
..................................................................... 2° Range .......................................................................
.......................................................................................................................... +1.50° to +2.50°
King Pin
Inclination Angle:
Nominal ...............................................................................................................................................
.......................................................... 12.13 Range .............................................................................
................................................................................................................ 11.63 to 16.63°
Offset ...................................................................................................................................................
...................................... 5.94 mm (0.234 inch)
Toe-In
Front
.............................................................................................................................................................
+3 mm to -3 mm (+0.118 to -0.118 inch) Rear
.............................................................................................................................................................
+8 mm to +4 mm (+0.315 to -0.157 inch)
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Front Wheel
Alignment
Alignment: Service and Repair Front Wheel Alignment
NOTE: When using a wheel alignment tester to inspect the front wheel alignment, always position
the car on a level surface and the front wheels in the straight ahead position. Prior to inspection,
make sure that the front suspension and steering system are in normal operating condition and that
wheels and tires are free of deflection and tires are inflated to specification.
FRONT WHEEL ALIGNMENT
Toe-In Toe-in (B-A or angle) is adjusted by turning the tie rod turnbuckles. Toe-in on the left front
wheel can be reduced by turning the tie rod toward the rear of the car. Toe change is achieved by
turning the tie for the right and left wheels simultaneously the same amount as follows: -
Number of turns of the tie rod [1]: 1/2
- Change in toe: Approximately 5.5 mm (0.217 inch) 0.58°.
- Number of turns of the tie rod [1]: 1
- Change in toe: Approximately 11 mm (0.433 inch) 1.08°.
NOTE: -
To get toe-in adjustment, turn the right and left tie rods the same amount.
- When adjusting toe-in, loosen the outer bellows clip to prevent twisting the bellows.
- After the adjustment, firmly tighten the tie rod end lock nuts and reinstall the bellows clip. -
Toe (B-A) has a [Standard value] of: 3 mm in-3 out mm (0.12 inch-0.12 inch out).
- Tighten the tie rod end lock nuts to 50-55 Nm (336-400 ft. lbs.).
Camber The steering knuckle, which is integral with the strut assembly, is pre-adjusted to the
specified camber at the factory and requires no adjustment. The camber has a standard value of
(0° ± 0.5°) -0.5° to +0.5°.
Caster Caster is pre-set at the factory and can not be adjusted. If caster is not within standard
value, replace the bent or damaged parts. The caster has a standard value of 2° ± 0.5°.
Alignment > Page 1675
NOTE: -
The front suspension assembly must be free of worn, loose or damaged parts prior to measuring
front wheel.
- Measure the wheels alignment by using the special tool.
- Camber and caster are pre-set at the factory and cannot be adjusted.
- If camber and caster are not within specifications, replace the bent or damaged parts.
REAR WHEEL ALIGNMENT
Toe-In The toe-in has a range of 8 mm to 4 mm (0.31 inch to 0.16 inch). The rear suspension (B)
mounting bolt should be turned an equal amount on both sides when adjusting. To get toe-in, turn
the bolt in a clockwise direction at the left wheel. The scale has gradations of approximately 2.4
mm (0.09 inch) (single side toe angle equivalent to 0.23°).
CAUTION: The eccentric bolt should be adjusted within a 90° range left and right from the center
position.
[1] Same amount for right and left sides.

Alignment > Page 1676
Alignment: Service and Repair Steering Angle
1. Place the front wheel on a turning radius gauge and measure the steering angle. The steering
angle standard value for the inner wheel should be
38.86° and for the outer wheel it should be 33.11°.
2. If the measured value is not within the standard value, adjust the linkage.
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > Diagnostic
Connector - Fuel Pump > Component Information > Description and Operation
Diagnostic Connector - Fuel Pump: Description and Operation
FUEL PUMP INSPECTION CONNECTOR
The fuel pump inspection terminal located in engine compartment is used to check the fuel pump
operation by connecting battery voltage directly to the terminal.
Connector - Fuel Pump > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 1682
Diagnostic Connector - Fuel Pump: Testing and Inspection
Fuel Pump Check Connector Circuit
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
FUEL PUMP OPERATING CHECK
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF
2. Apply battery voltage to the fuel pump drive connector to check that the pump operates
NOTE: The fuel pump is in-tank type and its operating sound is hard to hear without removing the
fuel tank cap.
3. Pinch the hose to check that fuel pressure is felt.

Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air/Fuel Mixture > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Air/Fuel Mixture - Trim Code Diagnosis
Number: 98-36-001
Date: APRIL, 1998
DESCRIPTION
^ Oxygen sensors
^ Air flow sensor
emissions.
the A/F ratio.

Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Air/Fuel Mixture - Trim Code Diagnosis > Page 1689
performance.
the code was set.
stored in the PCM.
Note:

PCM.

load value.
Fuel Trim code.
and re-test.
this TSB.

Trim code.
and re-test.
TSB.
Note:
Note:
D. Select "Engine"
E. Select "Data"
the scan tool.
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1692
Air/Fuel Mixture: Description and Operation
Multiport Fuel Injection (MFI) System
The MFI system is a system which employs the signals from the heated oxygen sensor to activate
and control the injector installed in the manifold for each cylinder, thus precisely regulating the
air/fuel mixture ratio and reducing emissions. This in turn allows the engine to produce exhaust
gases of the proper composition to permit the use of a three way catalyst. The three way catalyst is
designed to convert the three pollutants (1) hydrocarbons (HO), (2) carbon monoxide (CO), and (3)
oxides of nitrogen (NOx) into harmless substances. There are two operating modes in the MFI
system.
1. Open loop air/fuel ratio is controlled by information programmed into the ECM. 2. Closed loop
air/fuel ratio is varied by the ECM based on information supplied by the oxygen sensor.
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Idle Speed > System Information
> Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Idle Speed: > 00-36-006 > Mar > 00 > TPS - Driveability Concerns
Idle Speed: Customer Interest TPS - Driveability Concerns
Number 00-36-006
Date MARCH, 2000
DESCRIPTION:
^ Unstable idle
REPAIR INFORMATION:

> Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Idle Speed: > 00-36-006 > Mar > 00 > TPS - Driveability Concerns >
Page 1701
PARTS INFORMATION

> Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Idle Speed: > 98-40-001 > Jan > 98 > A/T - Harsh 4-3 Downshift
When Decelerating
Idle Speed: Customer Interest A/T - Harsh 4-3 Downshift When Decelerating
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 98-40-001
Date: JANUARY, 1998
Model: ALL
Subject HARSH 4-3 DOWNSHIFT WHEN DECELERATING TO A STOP
DESCRIPTION:
Some vehicles may have a harsh 4-3 downshift when decelerating to a stop. The condition occurs
when decelerating at speeds below 5-10 mph and is likely to be more pronounced when the
automatic transaxle fluid (ATF) temperature is cold. If a vehicle experiences this condition, please
follow the diagnostic procedures shown.
158-194°F).
A. If the fluid level is low, add ATF to bring the level to the top of the "Full" mark.
2. Check that the idle speed is within specification. Adjust, if necessary. (Refer to appropriate Shop
Manual, under "Fuel System Section", "Service Adjustment Procedures".)
A. Select "Codes" and check for diagnostic codes (DTC). If DTCs are present, repair the condition.
B. Select "Data" and "Idle Switch". Check that the idle switch reads as shown. If not, adjust or
replace the idle switch. (For adjustment procedures, see TSB # 97-40-029 for 1995-97 Sonata or
TSB # 97-40-031 for all other vehicles)
- Engine idling-Idle switch reads "On" or "Closed"
- Engine rpm increased 100-200 rpm above idle-Idle switch reads "Off" or "Open"
C. Select Accelerator Switch" (refer to TSB # 97-40-031 for applicable vehicles). Check that the
accelerator switch reads as shown. If not, adjust or replace the accelerator switch according to TSB
# 97-40-031.
- Engine idling Accelerator switch reads "Off" or "Open"
- Engine rpm increased 100-200 rpm above idle-Accelerator switch reads "On" or "Closed"
4. Adjust the kickdown servo to the specification shown in the appropriate Shop Manual, under
"Automatic Transaxle" section. Refer to TSB # 96-40-016 for 1990-94 Excels and Sonatas,
1992-95 Elantras or 1991-92 for Scoupes.
5. Note:
Proceed with step 5 for vehicles listed in the table. For all other vehicles, replace the transaxle.
If Steps 1-4 indicate that all components are within specification and no DTCs are found, proceed
as follows:
- For the vehicles produced PRIOR to the effective date shown, replace the TCM with the part
number shown.
- For vehicles produced AFTER the effective date, replace the transaxle.
> Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Idle Speed: > 98-40-001 > Jan > 98 > A/T - Harsh 4-3 Downshift
When Decelerating > Page 1706
PARTS INFORMATION:

> Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Idle Speed: > 00-36-006 > Mar > 00 > TPS - Driveability
Concerns
Idle Speed: All Technical Service Bulletins TPS - Driveability Concerns
Number 00-36-006
Date MARCH, 2000
DESCRIPTION:
^ Unstable idle
REPAIR INFORMATION:


> Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Idle Speed: > 00-36-006 > Mar > 00 > TPS - Driveability
PARTS INFORMATION

> Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Idle Speed: > 98-40-001 > Jan > 98 > A/T - Harsh 4-3
Downshift When Decelerating
Idle Speed: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Harsh 4-3 Downshift When Decelerating
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 98-40-001
Date: JANUARY, 1998
Model: ALL
DESCRIPTION:
158-194°F).
# 97-40-031.
5. Note:
as follows:
number shown.
> Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Idle Speed: > 98-40-001 > Jan > 98 > A/T - Harsh 4-3
Downshift When Decelerating > Page 1717
PARTS INFORMATION:

> Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Idle Speed: > Page 1718
Idle Speed: By Symptom
A/T - Harsh 4-3 Downshift When Decelerating
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 98-40-001
Date: JANUARY, 1998
Model: ALL
DESCRIPTION:
158-194°F).
# 97-40-031.
5. Note:
as follows:
number shown.
PARTS INFORMATION:
TPS - Driveability Concerns
Number 00-36-006
Date MARCH, 2000
DESCRIPTION:
^ Unstable idle
REPAIR INFORMATION:
PARTS INFORMATION
Number 00-36-006
Date MARCH, 2000
Subject
THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR (TPS) DRIVEABILITY SYMPTOMS
DESCRIPTION:
^ Unstable idle
REPAIR INFORMATION:
PARTS INFORMATION
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 98-40-001
Date: JANUARY, 1998
Model: ALL
DESCRIPTION:
158-194°F).
# 97-40-031.
"Automatic Transaxle" section. Refer to TSB #
96-40-016 for 1990-94 Excels and Sonatas, 1992-95 Elantras or 1991-92 for Scoupes.
5. Note:
as follows:
number shown.
PARTS INFORMATION:

> Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1724
Idle Speed: Specifications Base idle speed
Base idle speed
Base idle 800 +/- 100 rpm
Idle with A/C on 820 +/- 100 rpm

> Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1725
Idle Speed: Testing and Inspection
NOTE:
Before adjusting, check that the spark plugs, injectors, idle speed control actuator (ISC actuator),
compression etc. are normal.
Checking conditions:
- Engine coolant temperature is 80 to 95°C (176 to 205°F).
- Lights, electric cooling fan and all accessories are off.
- Transaxle is in neutral ["P" or N" range for A/T vehicles].
- Steering wheel is in straight forward position (Vehicles with power steering).
1. Connect the GST (Generic Scan Tool) to the data link connector at lower crash pad. 2. Start and
run the engine at curb idle speed. 3. Run the engine for more than 5 seconds at an engine speed
of 2,000 to 3,000 rpm. 4. Run the engine at idle for 2 minutes. 5. Read the idling rpm.
Idle speed: 800 ± 100 rpm

Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air Cleaner Housing >
Air Cleaner Housing: Specifications Air cleaner body
Air cleaner body
Mounting bolts 8 to 10 Nm
Air Cleaner Housing: Testing and Inspection
1. Check the air cleaner body, cover, or filter for distortion, corrosion or damage. 2. Check the air
duct for damage. 3. Check the resonator for distortion or damage. 4. Check the air cleaner filter for
restriction, contamination or damage.
- If the filter is slightly restricted, remove dust and other contaminants by blowing air from the upper
side through the filter.
5. Check the air cleaner housing for restrictions, contamination or damage.

Air Cleaner Housing: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Remove the air duct connected to the air cleaner. 2. Disconnect the intake air temperature
sensor harness. 3. Remove the air intake hose from the air cleaner side. 4. Remove the air cleaner
cover and filter. 5. Remove the air cleaner mounting bolts and remove the air cleaner.
INSTALLATION
Installation is the reverse of removal.

Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Filter > Fuel Pressure
Release > System Information > Service Precautions
Fuel Pressure Release: Service Precautions
WARNING: Adhere to the following procedures any time the fuel system is being worked on in
order to reduce the risk of fire and personal injury:
- Keep a dry chemical (Class B) fire extinguisher near the work area.
- Place a "CAUTION FLAMMABLE" sign in the work area.
- Work in a well-ventilated area. Do not smoke, and keep sparks and open flames away.
- Wear eye protection.
- Use caution when working near the catalytic converter to prevent the possibility of burns or fire.
(The temperatures within the converter can exceed 537 degrees C (1000 degrees F).)
- Relieve the fuel system pressure prior to disconnecting fuel system components.
- Disconnect the negative battery cable except for tests where battery voltage is required.
- Use a suitable container to store or catch fuel.
- Do not replace fuel pipe with fuel hose.
- Plug all disconnected fuel line fittings and hoses.
- After making any fuel system repairs ALWAYS inspect for fuel leaks.
NOTE: If available, use system bleed--schrader valve--to relieve fuel system pressure.
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Filter > Fuel Pressure
Release > System Information > Service Precautions > Page 1736
Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair
Reduce the internal pressure of the fuel pipes and hoses by the following procedures.
- Disconnect the fuel pump harness connector after removing the rear seat cushion.
- Start the engine and, after it stops by itself, turn the ignition switch to the OFF position.
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Firing Order > Component
Information > Specifications
Firing Order: Specifications
Coil Pak
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Ignition Timing > Number One
Cylinder > Component Information > Locations
Firing Order 1-3-4-2

Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Ignition Cable > Component
Ignition Cable: Specifications Cable resistance
Cable resistance Resistance should not be higher than 10,000 ohms per foot of cable. If resistance
is higher, replace the cable
NO . 1 4.8 K ohms
NO. 2 10 K ohms
NO. 3 7.3 K ohms
NO. 4 12 K ohms
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Ignition Cable > Component
Ignition Cable: Testing and Inspection
CHECKING SPARK PLUG CABLES
1. Check the cap and outer shell for cracks.
2. Measure the resistance
NOTE: Resistance should not be higher than 10,000 Ohms per foot of cable. If resistance is higher,
replace the cable.
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Spark Plugs - Application/Service Interval
Number 02-36-017
Date 06-2002
Model All Models
DESCRIPTION:
Hyundai Vehicles.

Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Spark Plugs - Application/Service Interval > Page 1752

Plug Gap 1.0 - 1.1 mm (0.039 - 0.043 in.)

NGK .....................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................. BKR5ES-11 Champion .........................................................
..................................................................................................................................... RC9YC4,
RC10YC4
may be damaged.

Standard value:
Unleaded : 1.0-1.1 mm (0.039-0.043 in.)

Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Compression Check > System
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Compression Check > System
(1.52 Mpa, 220 psi).
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Valve Clearance > System
Valve Clearance: Specifications
Intake Valves Hydraulic - Not Adjustable
Exhaust Valves Hydraulic - Not Adjustable

Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Valve Clearance > System
Valve Clearance: Adjustments
This vehicle is equipped with Hydraulic Lash Adjusters (HLAs): there are no provisions for valve
adjustments.
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Timing Belt > Component Information > Specifications
Timing Belt: Specifications Timing Belt
Timing Belt
Timing Belt Replacement Interval 60,000 mi (96,000 km)

Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Timing Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Condition
Timing Belt: Testing and Inspection Condition
Timing Belt Inspection (Part 1 Of 2)

Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Timing Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Condition >
Page 1772
1. Check the belt for oil or dust deposits.
- Replace, if necessary.
- Small deposits should be wiped away with a dry cloth or paper.
- Do not clean with solvent.
2. When the engine is overhauled or belt tension adjusted, carefully check the belt. 3. If any of the
following flaws are evident, replace the belt.
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Timing Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Condition >
Page 1773
Timing Belt: Testing and Inspection Less Tension Gauge
1. Loosen the tensioner mounting bolts 1 and 2 in that order as shown. This will apply spring
tension to the timing belt only. Check the belt to ensure
that it is not out of position.
2. Tighten the tensioner tightening bolts 1 and 2 in that order. If the bolt 1 is tightened first, the
tensioner will move with the belt in the direction that
the belt is tightened.
3. Give the crankshaft one turn in operating direction (clockwise) and realign crankshaft sprocket
timing mark with the top dead center position.
NOTE: Do not turn the crankshaft in a counterclockwise direction. The crankshaft should turn
smoothly.
4. Loosen the tensioner attaching bolt 1 and 2 in that order. 5. Tighten the tensioner attaching bolts
2 and 1 in that order to 20-27 Nm (200-270 kg.cm, 14-20 ft. lbs.).
6. Verify that when the tensioner and the tension side of the timing belt are pushed in horizontally
with a moderate force [approximately 49 N (11
lb)], the timing belt cog end is approx. 1/2 of the tensioner mounting bolt head radius (across flats)
away from the bolt head center.
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Timing Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 1774
Timing Belt: Adjustments
NOTE:
- The timing belt has an automatic tension adjusting mechanism.
- Adjustment can be made by the following procedure:
1. Turn the steering wheel fully counter-clockwise.
2. Apply a wood block under the engine oil pan and carefully raise the engine.
NOTE: Jack up the vehicle only slightly to prevent engine damage.
3. Remove the engine left mount bracket.

4. Remove the coolant pump pulley. 5. Remove the crankshaft pulley.
6. Remove the timing belt upper cover. 7. Check the belt for cracking, peeling or other damage.
- Be sure to carefully check the entire length of the belt.
8. Rotate the crankshaft so that the No.1 piston is at top dead center of the compression stroke.
NOTE: -
In other words, align the timing mark on the camshaft sprocket with that on the cylinder head.
- The crankshaft should be turned clockwise, not counterclockwise.
- Turning the crankshaft counterclockwise will cause the tension to become improperly adjusted.
9. Remove the timing belt lower cover.
10. Loosen the tensioner mounting bolts 1 and 2 in that order as shown to give the timing belt
spring tension.
11. Check the belt to ensure that it is not out of position. 12. Tighten the tensioner attaching bolts 2
and 1 in that order as shown.If the bolt 1 is tightened first, the tensioner will move with the bolt and
cause
the belt to become overtightened.
NOTE: Do not turn the crankshaft in a counterclockwise direction.
14. Loosen the tensioner attaching bolts 1 and 2 in that order as shown. 15. Retighten the
tensioner attaching bolts 2 and 1 in that order as shown to 20-27 Nm (200-270 kg. cm., 14-20 ft.
lbs.). 16. Recheck the belt tension as follows:
MANUAL METHOD:
Verify that when the tensioner and the tension side of the timing belt are pushed in horizontally with
a moderate force [approx.49 N (11 lb)], the timing belt cog end is approx.1/2 of the tensioner
mounting bolt head radius (across flats) away from the bolt head center.
GAUGE METHOD:
1. Rotate the crankshaft in a counterclockwise direction to position of 90 degrees before top dead
center as shown in the illustration.
NOTE: Make sure the valves are adjusted properly
2. Measure the belt tension in the middle of the tension side span using the tension gauge,
BORROUGHS BT-33-73F, or equivalent.
Timing belt tension (In cool condition): 9.5-16.5 Kg (20.9-36.4 lb).
NOTE:
- Put arm on bottom of belt teeth, then put spindle on the middle of belt back surface.
- Keep hand off from indicating part.
17. Install timing belt covers. 18. install the crankshaft pulley. 19. Install the coolant pump pulley.
20. Install the left mount bracket. 21. remove jack and wood block.
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Timing Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal
Timing Belt: Service and Repair Removal
1. Loosen the coolant pump pulley bolt. 2. Loosen the generator bolt. 3. Remove the coolant pump
pulley and belt. 4. Remove the crankshaft pulley. 5. Remove the timing belt cover.
6. Move the timing belt tensioner pulley toward the coolant pump and temporarily secure it. 7.
Remove the bolt from the camshaft sprocket. 8. Remove the camshaft sprocket. 9. Remove the
timing belt.
NOTE: If the timing belt is reused, make an arrow mark indicating the turning direction (or the front
of the engine) to make sure that the belt is reinstalled in the same direction as before.
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Timing Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal >
Page 1779
Timing Belt: Service and Repair Installation
1. Install the flange and crankshaft sprocket as shown.
- Pay close attention to their mounting directions.
- Tighten crankshaft pulley bolt to 140-150 Nm (1400-1500 kg. cm., 103-111 ft. lbs.).
2. Install the camshaft sprocket then tighten the bolt to 80-100 Nm (800-1000 kg. cm., 59-74 ft.
lbs.).
Page 1780
3. Align the timing marks of the camshaft sprocket and crank shaft sprocket, with the No.1 piston
placed at top dead center on its compression stroke.
4. To install the timing belt tensioner, proceed as follows:
- mount the tensioner, spring, and spacer.
- Temporarily tighten the bolts.
- Temporarily tighten the tensioner long hole side washer and bolts.
- Install the bottom end of the spring against the front case as shown in the illustration.
5. Secure the tensioner, positioned towards the water pump. 6. Install the timing belt on the
crankshaft sprocket. 7. Install the timing belt on the camshaft sprocket.
NOTE: -
When the timing belt is installed on the camshaft sprocket, make sure that the tension side is tight.
- Check to ensure that when the tension side is tightened by turning the camshaft sprocket in a
reverse direction, all timing marks are in line.
8. Loosen the tensioner mounting bolts 1 and 2 in that order as shown.This will apply spring
tension to the timing belt only.
- Check the belt to ensure that it is not out of position.
9. Tighten the tensioner tightening bolts 1 and 2 in that order.
- If the bolt 1 is tightened first, the tensioner will move with the belt in the direction that the belt is
tightened.
10. Give the crankshaft one turn in operating direction (clock-wise) and realign crankshaft sprocket
smoothly.
11. Loosen the tensioner attaching bolts 1 and 2 in that order. 12. Tighten the tensioner attaching
bolts 2 and 1 in that order to 20-27 Nm (200-270 kg. cm., 15-20 ft. lbs.).
Page 1781
with a moderate force [approx.49 N (11 lb)], the
timing belt cog end is approx.1/2 of the tensioner mounting bolt head radius (across flats) away
from the bolt head center.
14. 1nstall the timing belt cover tightening cover bolt to 10-12 Nm (100-120 kg. cm., 7-9 ft. lbs.). 15.
Install the crankshaft pulley.
NOTE: Make sure that the crankshaft sprocket pin fits the small hole in the pulley.
16. Install the fan belt and adjust the belt tension. 17. Install the water pump pulley 18. Install V-belt
and adjust the belt tension.
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Specifications > A/C Belt Deflection
Drive Belt: Specifications A/C Belt Deflection
TENSION SPECIFICATIONS
Standard value:
New Belt: .............................................................................................................................................

................................................... 60-70 kgf Used Belt: ........................................................................
....................................................................................................................... 32-40 kgf Inspection ....
..............................................................................................................................................................
............................. 25-50 kgf
NOTE: Check the belt using a suitable tension gauge when the engine is cold or at least 30
minutes after the engine has stopped if the belt is used belt.
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Specifications > A/C Belt Deflection >
Page 1786
Drive Belt: Specifications Power Steering
Standard value:
New Belt ..............................................................................................................................................

....................................... 55-70 kgf Used Belt .....................................................................................
............................................................................................... 38-48 kgf
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Specifications > A/C Belt Deflection >
Page 1787
Drive Belt: Specifications Alternator
Tension Gauge Method:
New Belt ..............................................................................................................................................

................................................... 65-75 kgf Used Belt .........................................................................
............................................................................................................................ 40 kgf Inspection ....
..............................................................................................................................................................
............................. 35-50 kgf
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1788
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Condition
Drive Belt: Testing and Inspection Condition
1. Check the belt surface for damage, peeling or cracks. 2. Check the belt surface for oil or grease.
3. Check the belt for worn or hardened areas. 4. Check the surface of the pulley for cracks or
damage. 5. Check that the belts are not damaged and fit properly into the pulley grooves.
CAUTION: -
When installing the V-ribbed belt, check that the V-ribs are properly aligned.
- If noise or slippage is detected, check the belt for wear, damage, or breakage on the pulley
contact surface, and check the pulley for scoring.
- Check for the proper belt deflection measurement.

Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Condition >
Page 1791
Drive Belt: Testing and Inspection Tension
TENSION INSPECTION
1. Check the drive belt using a suitable tension gauge when the engine is cold or at least 30
minutes after the engine has stopped if the belt is used
belt.
Drive belt standard value:
New Belt: 65-75 kgf Used Belt: 40 kgf Inspection: 35-50 kgf
A/C belt standard value:
New Belt: 60-70 kgf Used Belt: 32-40 kgf Inspection: 25-50 kgf
Power steering belt standard value:
New Belt: 55-70 kgf Used Belt: 38-48 kgf
2. If the measured specification is not correct, adjust the belt.
NOTE: -
Do not depend on your hand or finger feelings as these are not accurate and result in belt slip
and/or slip noise. Always use the tension gauge.
- Be sure to adjust belt tension to the specification.
- If the belt tension is checked after tightening the adjustment screw (or bolt) only, tension can be
varied while tightening the mounting bolt (or nut).
- hecking be of the belt tension should be done after tightening both the adjustment screw (or bolt)
and the mounting bolt (or nut) completely.
Type A Tension Gauge
Do not let the dial section of the tension gauge contact other objects during measurement.
Type B Tension Gauge
1. When measuring, be sure to turn reset button in the arrow direction to set the gauge needle to
the RESET position. 2. If the tension gauge is removed from the belt, the needle will still indicate
the tension, Read the tension after removing the gauge.
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Adjustments > Alternator
Drive Belt: Adjustments Alternator
ADJUSTMENT
1. Loosen the generator support nut. 2. Looses the generator lock bolt. 3. Adjust the belt tension. 4.
Tighten bolts as follows:
Generator support nut A: 20-25 Nm (200-250 kg. cm., 14-18 ft. lbs.). Generator lock bolt B: 15-22
Nm (150-220 kg. cm., 11-16 ft. lbs.).
TENSION INSPECTION
belt.
NOTE: -
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Adjustments > Alternator > Page 1794
Drive Belt: Adjustments Power Steering
TENSION INSPECTION
belt.
NOTE: -
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Adjustments > Alternator > Page 1795
Drive Belt: Adjustments A/C
TENSION INSPECTION
belt.
NOTE: -
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Steering
Drive Belt: Service and Repair Power Steering
Refer to the illustration when replacing the belt. Refer to Adjustments for tensioning information.
> Page 1798
Drive Belt: Service and Repair A/C
> Page 1799
Drive Belt: Service and Repair Alternator
REMOVAL
1. Remove A/C and power steering belts as equipped. 2. Loosen the coolant pump pulley bolts.
3. Loosen the generator support nut. 4. Looses the generator lock bolt, and remove the belt. 5.
Remove the coolant pump pulley bolts.
INSTALLATION
1. Install the coolant pump pulley to the coolant pump pulley bracket and tighten the bolts firmly. 2.
After installing the belt, adjust the belt tension.
Tightening torque:
Nm (150-220 kg. cm., 11-16 ft. lbs.). Generator brace mounting bolt: 20-28 Nm (200-280 kg. cm.,
14-20 ft. lbs.). Coolant pulley bolts: 8-10 Nm (80-100 kg. cm., 6-7 ft. lbs.).
3. Install A/C and power steering belts as equipped.

Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Air Cleaner Housing > Component Information > Specifications
Air cleaner body
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Air Cleaner Housing > Component Information > Specifications >
Page 1804
Page 1805

Page 1806
REMOVAL
INSTALLATION

Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Cabin Air Filter > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > A/C - Cabin Air Filter Application Chart
Cabin Air Filter: Technical Service Bulletins A/C - Cabin Air Filter Application Chart
Group 97 - CLIMATE CONTROL
Number 03-97-003
Date 11-2003
Model Accent 1995-2004, Elantra 1992-2004, Excel 1986-1994, Santa Fe 2001-2004, Scoupe
1991-1995, Sonata 1989-2004, Tiburon 1997-2004, XG 300 2001 AND XG 350 2002-2004
Subject CABIN AIR FILTER APPLICATION CHART
DESCRIPTION:
The following tables provide factory installed cabin air filter applications, and also note which
vehicles may be equipped with cabin air filters if they were not installed during production.
A cabin air filter is a replaceable paper element filter that removes particulates such as dust from
the air.
The filter locations for these vehicles vary; however, all are accessed by removing or lowering the
glove box and/or glove box housing.
The typical service interval is 12,000 miles or 1 year, whichever occurs first. More frequent
maintenance may be required in very dusty environments which may clog the filter. Particulate
debris becomes trapped in the replaceable filter and is removed from the system during routine
maintenance. Odor from debris in the filter may also be remedied by replacing the air filter.
NOTE
Replacement of the cabin air filter is considered a maintenance item and not covered under
warranty.
Bulletins > A/C - Cabin Air Filter Application Chart > Page 1811
The table shows which vehicles were equipped with a cabin air filter during production and which
vehicles may be equipped with filters after production if desired.
NOTE
Corrections to TSB 03-97-002:
1. TSB does NOT indicate that the Santa Fe also changed to the two (2) piece cabin air filter on
March 29, 2003 (with the XG and Sonata).
2. TSB incorrectly indicates two (2) pieces of part number 97619-3D000. The correct quantity is
one (1) piece for XG, Sonata, and Santa Fe built
after March 29, 2003.
NOTE 1. The replacement procedures outlined in TSB 03-97-002 are still applicable for the XG,
Sonata and Santa Fe.
2. The installation procedures for the Accent, Elantra, Tiburon and XG 350 can be found in the
2004 Owners Manuals in the "Do It Yourself
Maintenance" section. Separate TSBs will be published for earlier models. Access to the air filter in
all cases is behind the glove box and glove box housing.
Bulletins > A/C - Cabin Air Filter Application Chart > Page 1812
3. The arrow on the cabin air filter must always point in the direction of air flow.
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Fuel Filter > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Service
Precautions
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Fuel Filter > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Service
Precautions > Page 1817
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Oil Filter, Engine > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Engine - Knocking Noise When Using Non-OE Oil Filter
Oil Filter: Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Knocking Noise When Using Non-OE Oil Filter
Group: ENGINE MECHANICAL
Number: 05-20-002
Date: JULY, 2005
Model: ALL MODELS
Subject: USE OF AFTERMARKET ENGINE OIL FILTERS CAUSING ENGINE KNOCKING NOISE
DESCRIPTION:
Some vehicles may experience an engine knock noise with the use of an aftermarket oil filter.
Aftermarket oil filters may use different materials, construction and specifications than genuine
Hyundai oil filters, which may lead to pressure variations within the engine, thus contributing to an
engine knocking noise.
VEHICLES AFFECTED:
All Models
REPAIR PROCEDURE:
Perform an oil change on the vehicle and replace the aftermarket oil filter with a genuine Hyundai
oil filter.
Normal warranty procedures apply.
This is not a warranty repair.

Bulletins > Engine - Knocking Noise When Using Non-OE Oil Filter > Page 1822
Oil Filter: Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Oil Filter Information/Applications
Group 20 - ENGINE MECHANICAL
Number 04-20-001
Date 01-2004
Model ACCENT 1995-2004, ELANTRA 1992-2004 EXCEL 1986-1994 SANTA FE 2001-2004,

SCOUPE 1991-1995 SONATA 1989-2004 TIBURON 1997-2004 XG, 300 2001 AND XG 350
2002-2004
Subject ENGINE OIL FILTER INFORMATION
DESCRIPTION:
The engine oil filter has been superseded from part number 26300-35500 to part number
26300-35501. This oil filter is currently used on all Hyundai models.
The change is cosmetic, to include the words Kia Motors, the Kia logo and the new part number.
Form, fit and function have not been affected.
To insure proper filtration of the lubrication system, only Hyundai Genuine Parts should be installed
by a Hyundai approved facility. Damage resulting from parts other than Hyundai Genuine Parts
may not be covered under warranty.
Oil Filter: Specifications
Oil Filter
......................................................................................................................................................
12-16 Nm (120-160 kg. cm, 9-12 ft. lbs.)
Oil Filter: Service and Repair
NOTE: All Hyundai engines are equipped with a high quality, throw-away oil filter. This filter is
recommended as a replacement filter on all vehicles. The quality of replacement filters varies
considerably. Only high quality filters should be used to assure the most efficient service. Make
sure that the rubber gasket from the old oil filter is completely removed from the mating surface on
the engine block, before installing the new filter.
WARNING: Be careful not to burn yourself, as the engine and engine oil are hot.
PROCEDURE
1. Use a filter wrench to remove the oil filter. 2. Before installing the new oil filter on the engine,
apply clean engine oil to the surface of the rubber gasket. 3. Tighten enough the oil filter by hand.
4. Run the engine to check for engine oil leaks. 5. After stopping the engine, check the oil level and
add oil as necessary.
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Coolant Line/Hose > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Engine/Cooling/Fuel System - New Parts
Coolant Line/Hose: Technical Service Bulletins Engine/Cooling/Fuel System - New Parts
Number: 02-20-003
Date: APRIL, 2002
Model: 1.5L SOHC ACCENT
Subject 1.5L SOHC ACCENT CYLINDER HEAD, HEATED THROTTLE BODY AND NEW
COOLING SYSTEM PARTS
DESCRIPTION:
This bulletin describes new parts available for the 1.5L SOHC Accent. The new parts provide
coolant flow to the throttle body; however, the connection method is different than described in
Campaign 047. This bulletin provides instructions for parts interchangeability before and after the
effective dates.
EFFECTIVE DATE:
All 1.5 liter 2001 model year Accents produced on or after February 1, 2001 were built with the new
coolant flow system.
NEW PARTS INFORMATION:
Cylinder Head: P/N 22100-22601 (Original P/N: 22100-22600)
The new cylinder head has a coolant hose nipple (circled) between cylinders 3 and 4 on the intake
side.
Bulletins > Engine/Cooling/Fuel System - New Parts > Page 1830
NOTE:
This cylinder head can be installed in place of P/N 22100-22600 if the hose nipple is removed and
pipe plug P/N 21133-32000 is installed.
Throttle Body Assembly
New P/N 35100-22610-D (Original P/N: 35100-22610)
The new throttle body has 2 coolant nipples (inlet/outlet) installed into the casting.
NOTE:
The throttle body can be installed on vehicles produced through January 31, 2001. If Campaign
047 has not been performed, do not connect any hoses to the 2 coolant nipples.
Coolant Inlet Pipe: P/N 25461-22601 (Original P/N 25461-22600)
The new coolant inlet pipe has one coolant nipple added to the pipe. The new and original coolant
pipes are not interchangeable.
Coolant Hose: P/N 25469-22600
This hose connects from the cylinder head to the front nipple of the throttle body. Not required for
vehicles produced through January 31, 2001.

Bulletins > Engine/Cooling/Fuel System - New Parts > Page 1831
This hose connects from the coolant inlet pipe to the rear nipple of the throttle body. Not required
for vehicles produced through January 31, 2001.
Pipe Plug: P/N 21133-32000
Use this pipe plug (in place of the hose nipple) when installing the parts listed below into a vehicle
produced through January 31, 2001:
1. Cylinder head (P/N 22100-22601)
2. Long block (P/N 21101-22X00)
Do not use threadsealer on this precoated pipe plug.

Coolant Line/Hose: Testing and Inspection
1. Check the coolant pipes and hoses for cracks, damage, or restrictions. 2. Replace if necessary.
Coolant Line/Hose: Service and Repair
HOSE AND PIPE REPLACEMENT
Refer to the illustration when servicing the coolant system hoses and pipes.
COOLANT PIPE REPLACEMENT
Fit the O-ring in the groove provided at the coolant inlet pipe end, wet the O-ring with coolant and
insert the coolant inlet pipe.
NOTE: -
Do not apply oil or grease to the coolant pipe O-ring.
- Keep the coolant pipe connections free of sand, dust, etc.
- Insert the coolant pipe fully into the coolant pump.
- Do not reuse O-ring and replace it with a new part.

Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Locations
Hose/Line HVAC: Locations
COMPONENTS
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service Precautions >
Environmental Impact Information
Hose/Line HVAC: Environmental Impact Information
HANDLING TUBING AND FITTINGS
The internal parts of the refrigeration system will remain in a state of chemical stability as long as
pure-moisture tree refrigerant and refrigerant oil are used. Abnormal amounts of dirt, moisture or air
can upset the chemical stability and cause troubles or even serious damage.
The following precautions must be observed
1. When it is necessary to open the refrigeration system, have everything you will need to service
the system, ready so the system will not be left
open any longer than necessary.
2. Cap or plug all lines and fittings as soon as possible to prevent the entrance of dirt and moisture.
3. All lines and components in parts stock should be capped or sealed until they are ready to be
used. 4. Never attempt to rebind formed lines to fit. Use the correct line for the installation. 5. All
tools, including the manifold gage, the gage set manifold and test hoses should be kept clean and
dry.
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service Precautions >
Environmental Impact Information > Page 1839
Hose/Line HVAC: Vehicle Damage Warnings
HANDLING TUBING AND FITTINGS
The internal parts of the refrigeration system will remain in a state of chemical stability as long as
pure-moisture tree refrigerant and refrigerant oil are used. Abnormal amounts of dirt, moisture or air
can upset the chemical stability and cause troubles or even serious damage.
The following precautions must be observed
1. When it is necessary to open the refrigeration system, have everything you will need to service
the system, ready so the system will not be left
open any longer than necessary.
2. Cap or plug all lines and fittings as soon as possible to prevent the entrance of dirt and moisture.
3. All lines and components in parts stock should be capped or sealed until they are ready to be
used. 4. Never attempt to rebind formed lines to fit. Use the correct line for the installation. 5. All
tools, including the manifold gage, the gage set manifold and test hoses should be kept clean and
dry.
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information >
Specifications
Power Steering Line/Hose: Specifications
Cooler Tube Brackets ..........................................................................................................................

................................................... 8-12 (6-9 ft. lbs.) Pressure And Return Tube Mounting Clip
........................................................................................................................................ 8-12 Nm
(6-9 ft. lbs.) Pressure And Return Tube To Gear Box
...................................................................................................................................... 12-18 Nm
(9-13 ft. lbs.) Return Tube To Pump ....................................................................................................
................................................................... 55-60 (41-44 ft. lbs.) Suction Hose Mounting Clamp
..................................................................................................................................................... 3-5
Nm (2.2-3.6 ft. lbs.) Valve Body Housing To Rack Housing
...................................................................................................................................... 20-30 Nm
(15-22 ft. lbs.)
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information >
Power Steering Line/Hose: Service and Repair
NOTE: Install all the parts to the torque specifications shown in the illustration.
RETURN TUBE REPLACEMENT

1. Drain the fluid. 2. Disconnect the return hose from the oil reservoir. 3. Remove the clip which
secures the return tube to the vehicle body. 4. Disconnect the return tube from the gear box. 5.
Inspect the hoses for damage or deterioration. 6. Confirm that there is no interference between the
hose and any other parts. 7. Assemble in reverse order.
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Brake Fluid > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins
> Brakes - Brake Fluid Adding/Changing Precautions
Brake Fluid: Technical Service Bulletins Brakes - Brake Fluid Adding/Changing Precautions
Group BRAKES
Number 10-SS-003
Date FEBRUARY, 2010
Model ALL
Subject BRAKE FLUID PRECAUTIONS - ADDING OR CHANGING FLUID
DESCRIPTION:
This bulletin provides guidelines that should be followed before removing the brake fluid reservoir
cap when adding or changing brake fluid.
IMPORTANT:
Make sure to completely remove foreign substances from around brake fluid reservoir and cap
before opening the reservoir cap. Not following this may cause contamination of brake fluid.
VEHICLES AFFECTED: All models
1. SERVICE PROCEDURE:
^ Location of brake reservoir cap
There are two potential locations for the brake fluid reservoir shown above.
HOW TO REMOVE FOREIGN SUBSTANCES FROM AROUND THE BRAKE FLUID RESERVOIR
CAP:
1. If the brake fluid reservoir cap is located in front of cowl top cover, first wipe foreign substances
off the brake fluid reservoir and its cap and then open the cap to add or change brake fluid.
> Brakes - Brake Fluid Adding/Changing Precautions > Page 1849
2. If the brake fluid reservoir cap is located under cowl top cover, first wipe foreign substances off
the lower surface of the cowl top cover, the brake fluid reservoir and its cap and then open the cap.
3. If brake fluid reservoir is equipped with oil filter, add or change brake fluid with the oil filter
inserted. DO NOT remove the oil filter while filling brake fluid.
> Brakes - Brake Fluid Adding/Changing Precautions > Page 1850
Brake Fluid: Technical Service Bulletins Brake Fluid - Specifications
Group CHASSIS
Number 00-50-003
Model ALL
Subject BRAKE FLUID SPECIFICATIONS
DESCRIPTION:
The table shows brake fluid specifications by model application.
Effective with "New Models" (*) production, the material of the rubber parts used in the brake
system has been changed to provide compatibility with "DOT 4" fluid. Therefore, both DOT 3 and
DOT 4 specifications brake fluid can be used in "New Models"; however, only DOT 3 specification
brake fluid is may be used in "Previous Models" (**)
NOTE:
This information is contained in the applicable shop manuals.
Remark: Any models not shown as "New Models"----->use DOT 3 brake fluid
> Page 1851
Brake Fluid: Specifications
Recomended Brake Fluid DOT 3

Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Clutch Fluid > Component Information > Specifications
Clutch Fluid: Specifications
Specified Fluid SAE J1703 DOT 3 Brake Fluid

Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Clutch Fluid > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1855
Clutch Fluid: Service and Repair
NOTE: Whenever the clutch tube, the clutch hose and/or the clutch master cylinder have been
removed, or if the clutch pedal is spongy, bleed the system.
CAUTION: Use the specified fluid, SAE J1703 (DOT 3). Avoid mixing different brands of fluids.
1. Loosen the bleeder screw at the clutch release cylinder. 2. Push the clutch pedal down slowly
until all air is expelled. 3. Hold the clutch pedal down until the bleeder is retightened. 4. Refill the
clutch master cylinder with the specified fluid.
CAUTION: The rapidly-repeated operation of the clutch pedal in B-C range may cause the release
cylinders position to be forced out from the release cylinder body during the air bleeding, repress
the clutch pedal after it returns to the "A" point completely.
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Coolant > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity
Specifications
Coolant: Capacity Specifications Coolant Capacity
Coolant Capacity
Cooling System Capacity 6.0 lit (6.3 U.S. qts., 5.3 Imp. qts.)
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Coolant > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity
Coolant: Fluid Type Specifications
Coolant Type High quality ethylene glycol base anti-freeze/coolant
Mitsubishi Part No. 0103044 (DIA-QUEEN LONG-LIFE COOLANT)
Coolant Conentration 40 - 50 %
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins >
Fluid - A/T: Customer Interest A/T - No Movement in 'DRIVE' or 'REVERSE'
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 05-40-016
Date: OCTOBER, 2005
Model: ALL
DESCRIPTION:
shown below:
REPAIR PROCEDURE:
NOTE:


^ Vehicle
Go to Step 12.
NOTE:

Customer Interest: > 03-40-015 > Aug > 03 > A/T - 2nd - 3rd Gear Shift Flare/Shudder
Fluid - A/T: Customer Interest A/T - 2nd - 3rd Gear Shift Flare/Shudder
Group TRANSAXLE
Number 03-40-015
Date AUGUST, 2003

Model ALL
DESCRIPTION:
1. CHECK ATF LEVEL:
70-100°C).

Customer Interest: > 03-40-015 > Aug > 03 > A/T - 2nd - 3rd Gear Shift Flare/Shudder > Page 1877
Customer Interest: > 02-40-010 > Mar > 02 > A/T - Harsh/Delayed Gear Engagement
Fluid - A/T: Customer Interest A/T - Harsh/Delayed Gear Engagement
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 02-40-010
Date: 03-2002

ENGAGEMENT
DESCRIPTION:
shown below:
REPAIR PROCEDURE:
shop manual.

^ Select F1 "GRPH".
NOTE
Customer Interest: > 02-40-010 > Mar > 02 > A/T - Harsh/Delayed Gear Engagement > Page 1882
NOTE

Customer Interest: > 02-40-010 > Mar > 02 > A/T - Harsh/Delayed Gear Engagement > Page 1883

All Technical Service Bulletins: > 10-AT-002 > Feb > 10 > A/T - Specified ATF And Additive Usage
Fluid - A/T: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Specified ATF And Additive Usage
Group AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE
Number 10-AT-002
Date FEBRUARY, 2010
Model ALL
SUBJECT HYUNDAI SPECIFIED ATF AND ADDITIVE USAGE
DESCRIPTION:
Hyundai approves the use of only the ATF specified in the vehicle's owner's manual. Use of other
ATF may result in improper shift quality or other driveability conditions.
Hyundai does not approve of the use of any aftermarket ATF additives.
The approved ATF and the ATF level checking procedure are summarized below:
HYUNDAI SPECIFIED ATF

NOTE:
SPH-IV and SP-III are not interchangeable.

All Technical Service Bulletins: > 09-AT-006 > Mar > 09 > A/T - Specified ATF and Additive Usage Information
Fluid - A/T: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Specified ATF and Additive Usage Information
Number 09-AT-006
Date: MARCH, 2009
Model ALL
Subject HYUNDAI SPECIFIED ATF AND ADDITIVE USAGE
DESCRIPTION:
Hyundai Motor Company approves of the use of only the ATF specified in the vehicle's owner's
manual. Use of other ATF may result in improper shift quality or other driveability issues.
Hyundai Motor Company does not approve of the use of any aftermarket ATF additives.
Hyundai Owner's Manuals state:
"Use only Hyundai Genuine ATF or other brands meeting the specification approved by Hyundai
Motor Company."
The approved ATF and the ATF level checking procedure are shown above.
All Technical Service Bulletins: > 06-40-016 > Nov > 06 > A/T - Automatic Transaxle Fluid Level
Fluid - A/T: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Automatic Transaxle Fluid Level
Group: TRANSMISSION
Number: 06-40-016
Model: ALL
Subject: AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE FLUID LEVEL
This TSB supersedes TSB # 03-40-019 to add new model information
DESCRIPTION:
The automatic transaxle fluid (ATF) level must be checked during Pre-Delivery Inspection (PDI).
Low ATF level may cause the following driveability conditions:
^ Engine "flare" during the 2-3 shift (engine speed increases during the shift) at light throttle when
the ATF is cold
^ Harsh or delayed shift during acceleration from a stop following a rapid deceleration
PROCEDURE:
1. Attach a Hi-Scan Pro or GDS and select "Automatic Transaxle" menu, "Current Data" menu and
"Fluid Temperature".
2. Drive the vehicle until the ATF is at normal operating temperature above 75°C (167°F).
3. Park the vehicle on a level surface and set the parking brake. Start the engine and move the
shift lever through each gear, then to "Neutral".
4. Check the ATF level on the dipstick. Add Hyundai SPIII until the level is within the "HOT" or
"75C" range.
NOTE:
The 2008 Veracruz requires JWS 3309, Type T-IV ATF. Do not use SPIII.
All Technical Service Bulletins: > 06-40-016 > Nov > 06 > A/T - Automatic Transaxle Fluid Level > Page 1897
NOTE:
The "COLD" range is only used for estimating ATF level. The ATF level can be accurately checked
only if the ATF temperature is at normal operating temperature above 75°C (167°F).
NOTE:
Use only Hyundai SPIII ATF, Diamond SPIII ATF or other brands meeting the SPIII specification
approved by Hyundai Motor Company.
NOTE:
SPIII has a red color when new; however, the ATF may change color to a dark red or brown after
10,000 to 25,000 miles in service. This change is normal for this type of ATF and does not indicate
an internal transaxle condition.
MAINTENANCE INTERVAL:
Refer to the maintenance schedule in the owner's manuals for maintenance requirements.
All Technical Service Bulletins: > 05-40-016 > Oct > 05 > A/T - No Movement in 'DRIVE' or 'REVERSE'
Fluid - A/T: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T - No Movement in 'DRIVE' or 'REVERSE'
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 05-40-016
Date: OCTOBER, 2005
Model: ALL
DESCRIPTION:
shown below:
REPAIR PROCEDURE:
NOTE:

All Technical Service Bulletins: > 05-40-016 > Oct > 05 > A/T - No Movement in 'DRIVE' or 'REVERSE' > Page 1902

^ Vehicle
Go to Step 12.
NOTE:

All Technical Service Bulletins: > tnt1361003-002 > Oct > 03 > A/T - 2-3 Shift Flare or Shift Shudder
Fluid - A/T: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T - 2-3 Shift Flare or Shift Shudder
TITLE: AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE 2-3 SHIFT FLARE OR SHIFT SHUDDER
APPLIES TO: ALL
SERVICE TIP:
1. CHECK ATF LEVEL:
70-100° C).
^ Place the shift lever in "Neutral" and check the ATF level on the dipstick.
Add SPIII ATF to bring the level to the top of the "FULL" mark.
2. CHECK FOR APPLICABLE TCM REPROGRAMS AND MODIFIED ATM:
3. CHECK FOR MODIFIED TCMS:
temperature sensor does not indicate as shown below, replace the sensor:
25-30% TPS) until shift flare or shift shudder no
All Technical Service Bulletins: > tnt1361003-002 > Oct > 03 > A/T - 2-3 Shift Flare or Shift Shudder > Page 1910
longer occurs.
All Technical Service Bulletins: > 03-40-015 > Aug > 03 > A/T - 2nd - 3rd Gear Shift Flare/Shudder
Fluid - A/T: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T - 2nd - 3rd Gear Shift Flare/Shudder
Group TRANSAXLE
Number 03-40-015
Date AUGUST, 2003

Model ALL
DESCRIPTION:
1. CHECK ATF LEVEL:
70-100°C).

All Technical Service Bulletins: > 03-40-015 > Aug > 03 > A/T - 2nd - 3rd Gear Shift Flare/Shudder > Page 1915
All Technical Service Bulletins: > 02-40-010 > Mar > 02 > A/T - Harsh/Delayed Gear Engagement
Fluid - A/T: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Harsh/Delayed Gear Engagement
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 02-40-010
Date: 03-2002

ENGAGEMENT
DESCRIPTION:
shown below:
REPAIR PROCEDURE:
shop manual.

^ Select F1 "GRPH".
NOTE
All Technical Service Bulletins: > 02-40-010 > Mar > 02 > A/T - Harsh/Delayed Gear Engagement > Page 1920
NOTE

All Technical Service Bulletins: > 02-40-010 > Mar > 02 > A/T - Harsh/Delayed Gear Engagement > Page 1921

All Technical Service Bulletins: > 9740018 > May > 97 > A/T - Fluid Precautions/Recommendations
Fluid - A/T: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Fluid Precautions/Recommendations
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 97-40-018
Date: MAY, 1997
Model: ALL
Subject: AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE FLUID (ATF)

DESCRIPTION:
Hyundai automatic transaxles are designed to use Type 7176 ATF. Always use Hyundai ATF+
7176 (P/N 00212-11100) or Mopar ATF+ Type 7176. DO NOT use any other type of ATF such as
Dexron or Mercon.
Type 7176 ATF is a completely different formulation than Dexron III/Mercon, which is the most
commonly used ATF. Dexron III/Mercon has different frictional characteristics than Type 7176 ATF,
which determines the quality of the shift. If less than one quart of Dexron is used to top-off a
Hyundai transaxle, no adverse effects should occur. However, if the ATF is changed to Dexron
during a service, the different frictional characteristics of Dexron may cause harsh shifts or clutch
shudder during engagement of clutches, especially for the damper clutch.
Type 7176 ATF cannot be distinguished from Dexron by color, feel or smell; consequently, it is not
possible to determine if a shifting concern is caused by the use of the incorrect type of ATF.
Type 7176 ATF may not be available at most quick-lube stores. For this reason, many Hyundai
customers who have taken their vehicle to a quick-lube store may have Dexron installed in their
transaxle.
SERVICE RECOMMENDATION:
If a customer complains of harsh shifting or clutch chatter, ask the customer if a transaxle fluid
service was done at a shop other than a Hyundai dealer. If so, please check the customer's receipt
to determine if the correct ATF was installed. If the incorrect ATF was installed or no service receipt
is available, recommend that the ATF be drained and filled with Type 7176 ATF before continuing
diagnosis.
All Technical Service Bulletins: > 9740018 > May > 97 > A/T - Fluid Precautions/Recommendations > Page 1926
Note:
Check the ATF level with the engine idling in NEUTRAL and the ATF at normal operating
temperature (70-90°C, 158-194°F). See TSB # 95-40-003 for further details.
TYPE 7176 ATF AVAILABILITY
ATF+ Type 7176 is available to dealers in quart bottles by P/N 00212-11100. Some distributors,
such as Valvoline, may supply Type 7176 ATF in 55 gallon drums.
Type 7176 is available to the customer at the following outlets:
ATF+ Type 7176 Hyundai dealers
Mopar ATF+ Type 7176 Chrysler dealers
Quaker State Type 7176 Pep Boys
Citgo Type 7176 Chief Auto Parts

All Other Service Bulletins for Fluid - A/T: > 99-40-017 > Dec > 99 > A/T - Shift Lever Will Not Shift Out Of Park
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 99-40-017
DESCRIPTION:
NOTE:
SERVICE PROCEDURE:
column).

All Other Service Bulletins for Fluid - A/T: > 99-40-017 > Dec > 99 > A/T - Shift Lever Will Not Shift Out Of Park > Page
1932
1933
module.
PARTS INFORMATION:
1934
1940
1941
module.
PARTS INFORMATION:
1942
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity
Specifications
Fluid - A/T: Capacity Specifications
Transmission Fluid
2.0L DOHC ..........................................................................................................................................

........................................................................ 6.4 Qt 3.0L V6 ............................................................
............................................................................................................................................................
7.9 Qt
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity
Fluid - A/T: Fluid Type Specifications
Transmission Fluid
.............................................................................................................................................................
Genuine Diamond ATF SP-II M
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1946
Fluid - A/T: Testing and Inspection
FLUID LEVEL INSPECTION
1. Drive the vehicle until the fluid temperature reaches normal operating the usual temperature
[80-90°C (176-194°F)]. 2. Place the vehicle on a level floor. 3. Move the selector lever sequentially
to every position. This will fill the torque converter and hydraulic system with fluid, then place lever
in the
"N" (Neutral) position.
4. Before removing the dipstick, wipe all contaminant from area around the dipstick. Then take out
the dipstick and check the condition of the fluid.
The transaxle should be overhauled under the following conditions. -
If there is a "burning" odor.
- If the fluid color has become noticeably blacker.
- If there is a noticeably excessive amount of metal particles in the fluid.
5. Check to see if the fluid level is in the "HOT" range on dipstick. If fluid level is low, add automatic
transaxle fluid until the level reaches the
"HOT" range. Transaxle fluid: GENUINE HYUNDAI ATF SP-II, DIAMOND ATF SP-II OR AUTRAN
MMSP-II.
NOTE: Low fluid level can cause a variety of abnormal conditions because it allows the pump to
take in air along with fluid. Air trapped in the hydraulic system forms bubbles which are
compressable. Therefore, pressures will be erratic, causing delayed shifting, slipping clutch and
brakes, etc. Improper filling can also raise fluid level too high. When the transaxle has too much
fluid, gears churn up foam and cause the same conditions which occur with low fluid level, resulting
in accelerated deterioration of automatic transaxle fluid. In either case, air bubbles can cause
overheating, and fluid oxidation, which can interfere with normal valve, clutch, and servo operation.
Foaming can also result in fluid escaping from the transaxle vent where it may be mistaken for a
leak.
6. Be sure to examine the fluid on the dipstick closely.

Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - M/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins >
M/T - Gear Lubricant Applications/Interchangeability
Fluid - M/T: Technical Service Bulletins M/T - Gear Lubricant Applications/Interchangeability
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 05-40-007-1
Date: JULY, 2005
Model: ALL
Subject MANUAL TRANSAXLE GEAR LUBRICANT
This TSB supersedes TSB # 05-40-007 to update part number information.
DESCRIPTION:
A new 75W/85 manual transaxle gear lubricant has been adopted in production. The purpose of
this bulletin is to provide the following information: ^
Vehicle model, transaxle type and production release date information
^ Previous and new gear lubricant part number information
^ Gear lubricant interchangeability information
The TABLE provides the application information for the new 75W/85, gear lubricant.
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - M/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins >
M/T - Gear Lubricant Applications/Interchangeability > Page 1951
PARTS INFORMATION:
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - M/T > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity
Specifications
Fluid - M/T: Capacity Specifications
Transmission Fluid ..............................................................................................................................

......................................................................... 2.3 Qt
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - M/T > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity
Fluid - M/T: Fluid Type Specifications
API classification .................................................................................................................................

.......................................................................... GL-4 Viscosity ..........................................................
................................................................................................................................................. SAE
75W-85
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - M/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1955
Fluid - M/T: Testing and Inspection
GEAR OIL LEVEL INSPECTION
NOTE: Inspect each component for evidence of leakage. Check the gear oil and the level by
removing the filler plug. If the oil is contaminated, it is necessary to replace it with new oil.
1. Remove oil filler plug and check oil level with finger. 2. Oil level must be up to fill hole. If it is
below hole, add oil until it runs out, then reinstall plug. 3. Replace the oil when the transaxle gear
oil is noticeably dirty, or if it is not of a suitable viscosity.
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - M/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1956
Fluid - M/T: Service and Repair
NOTE: Use HP Gear Oil SAE 75W/85W (API-GL 4)
1. With the vehicle parked on a level surface, remove the drain plug and drain the transaxle oil. 2.
Replace the gasket with a new one and install the drain plug.
Drain plug tightening torque: 30-35 Nm (22-25 ft. lbs.).
3. Add new oil through the filler plug, filling to a level 5-9mm (0.2-0.4 inch) below the plug opening.
Transaxle oil total capacity: 2.15 liters (2.27 US qts.). Filler plug tightening torque: 30-35 Nm (22-25
ft. lbs.).
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Engine Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity
Specifications
Engine Oil: Capacity Specifications
Total .....................................................................................................................................................
............................................................... 3.47 U.S. qt Refill without filter ............................................
....................................................................................................................................... 3.0 liters
(3.17 qts)
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Engine Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity
Engine Oil: Fluid Type Specifications
Engine Oil
Grade ...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................. SG or SG/CD Above 0° C (32° F) .........................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
20W-40 Above -23° C (-10° F) ............................................................................................................
..................................................... 10W-30, 10W-40, 10W-50 Below 38° C (100° F) ..........................
..........................................................................................................................................................
5W-40, 5W-30
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Power Steering Fluid > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Power Steering - PSF-4 Fluid Compatibility/Part Number
Power Steering Fluid: Technical Service Bulletins Power Steering - PSF-4 Fluid Compatibility/Part
Number
Group: CHASSIS
Number: 07-50-002
Model: ALL
Subject: PSF-4, HYUNDAI GENUINE POWER STEERING FLUID
DESCRIPTION
This bulletin provides the PSF-4, Hyundai Genuine power Steering Fluid, part number and
interchangeability information.
DESCRIPTION PART NUMBER
PSF-4 Hyundai Genuine 00232-06010
Power Steering Fluid
INTERCHANGEABILITY
^ PSF-4 to PSF-3----> Topping off or adding up to 50% PSF-4 to a PSF-. system is acceptable.
NOTE:
Do not add more then 50% of the total system volume of PSF-4 to PSF-3. The PSF-3 fluid should
be drained and replaced with PSF-4 power steering fluid.
^ PSF-3 to PSF-4----> Not OK (Do not add PSF-3 to a PSF-4 system)

Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Power Steering Fluid > Component Information > Specifications >
Capacity Specifications
Power Steering Fluid: Capacity Specifications Power Steering Fluid
Power Steering Fluid
Power Steering Fluid Capacity 0.9 liter (0.95 qts.)

Capacity Specifications > Page 1968
Power Steering Fluid: Fluid Type Specifications
Fluid Type PSF-3 or DEXRON II ATF

Page 1969
Power Steering Fluid: Testing and Inspection
1. Position the vehicle on a level surface. 2. Start the engine. With the vehicle kept stationary, turn
the steering wheel several times continuously to raise the fluid temperature from 50-60°C
(122-140°F).
3. With the engine at idle, turn the steering wheel fully clockwise and counterclockwise several
times. 4. Make sure there is no foaming or cloudiness in the reservoir fluid.
5. Stop the engine to check for a difference in fluid level between a stationary and a running
engine.
NOTE:
a. If the fluid level varies 5 mm (0.2 inch) or more, bleed the system again. b. If the fluid level
suddenly rises after stopping the engine, insufficient bleeding is indicated. c. Incomplete bleeding
will produce a chattering sound in the pump and a noise in the flow control valve, decreasing
durability of pump.
Page 1970
Power Steering Fluid: Service and Repair
1. Jack up the front wheels and support with rigid racks. 2. Disconnect the return hose from the oil
reservoir and plug the oil reservoir. 3. Connect a vinyl hose to the disconnected return hose, and
drain the oil into a container. 4. Disconnect the high-tension cable at the ignition coil side. While
operating the starter motor intermittently, turn the steering wheel all the way to
the left and then to the right several times to drain the fluid.
5. Securely connect the return hoses, and fill the oil reservoir with the specified fluid. 6. Bleed the
system then add a total quantity of approx. 0.9 liter (0.95 qts.) of automatic transmission fluid
DEXRON II.
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins >
A/C System - R-134A Refrigerant Discharging
Refrigerant: Technical Service Bulletins A/C System - R-134A Refrigerant Discharging
Group: CLIMATE CONTROL
Number: 96-97-002-1
Date: OCTOBER 1996
Model: ALL 1994-1997 VEHICLES

Subject: R-134A REFRIGERATION SYSTEM DISCHARGING (SHOP MANUAL CORRECTION)
This TSB has been revised to include the Shop Manual corrections for 1997 vehicles.
DESCRIPTION:
The Accent, Excel, Scoupe, Elantra, Sonata and Tiburon Shop Manuals for vehicles equipped with
R-134a Refrigerant systems contain an error in the "Heating, Ventilation, Air Conditioning" section;
subsection "Discharging The Refrigeration System". Refer to the Shop Manuals listed:
DISCHARGING THE REFRIGERATION SYSTEM:
Federal regulations require that the discharging of R-134a refrigerant be performed by a licensed
technician using only an approved Recovery and/or Recycling system. Do not discharge R-134a
Refrigerant into the atmosphere. When discharging the refrigerant system, always follow the
Recovery or Recycling system equipment manufacturer's instructions.
Please make the above correction in your Shop Manuals and write this TSB number on the
appropriate pages.
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity
Specifications
Refrigerant: Capacity Specifications
R-134a Capacity 1.48 - 1.50 lbs Max.

Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity
Refrigerant: Fluid Type Specifications
Refrigerant R-134a
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity
Specifications
Refrigerant Oil: Capacity Specifications
Oil listed for component parts is ounces added for replacement
Total System 170 - 190 cc (5.8 - 6.4 oz)
Evaporator Core 40 cc (1.3)
Condenser 25 cc (0.8)
Reciever-drier 40 cc (1.3)
Compressor 30 cc (1.0)
Tube/Hose 15 cc (0.5)
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity
Refrigerant Oil: Fluid Type Specifications
(PAG) Poly Alkylene Glycol Oil FD46XG or Equivalent

Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Without ABS
Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair Without ABS
BLEEDING OF BRAKE SYSTEM
1. Remove the reservoir cap and fill the brake fluid to reservoir.
CAUTION: Do not allow fluid to remain on a painted surface. Wash it off immediately.
NOTE: When bleeding by pressurized fluid, do not depress the brake pedal.
2. Bleed each wheel in the sequence shown in the illustration.
3. Connect a vinyl tube to the wheel cylinder bleeder screw and insert the other end of tube in a
half full container of brake fluid. 4. Slowly pump the brake pedal several times. 5. While depressing
the brake pedal fully, loosen the bleeder screw until fluid starts to run out. Then close the bleeder
screw. 6. Repeat the 4 and 5 step until there are no more bubbles in the fluid. 7. Tighten the
bleeder plug screw.
Bleeder screw tightening torque:
Front: 7 - 13 Nm (5 - 10 ft. lbs.) Rear: 7 - 9 Nm (5.1 - 6.5 ft. lbs.)

Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Without ABS >
Page 1987
Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair With ABS
BLEEDING OF BRAKE SYSTEM
1. Remove the reservoir cap and fill the brake fluid to reservoir.
CAUTION: Do not allow fluid to remain on a painted surface. Wash it off immediately.
NOTE: When bleeding by pressurized fluid, do not depress the brake pedal.
2. Bleed each wheel in the sequence shown in the illustration.
3. Connect a vinyl tube to the wheel cylinder bleeder screw and insert the other end of tube in a
half full container of brake fluid. 4. Slowly pump the brake pedal several times. 5. While depressing
the brake pedal fully, loosen the bleeder screw until fluid starts to run out. Then close the bleeder
screw. 6. Repeat the 4 and 5 step until there are no more bubbles in the fluid. 7. Tighten the
bleeder plug screw.
Bleeder screw tightening torque:
Front: 7 - 13 Nm (5 - 10 ft. lbs.) Rear: 7 - 9 Nm (5.1 - 6.5 ft. lbs.)

Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service Precautions
> General Precautions
Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service Precautions General Precautions
WARNING: Failure to carry out service operations in the correct sequence could cause the airbag
system to unexpectedly deploy during servicing, possibly leading to a serious injury.
Further, if a mistake is made in servicing the airbag system, it is possible that the airbag may fail to
operate when required.
Before performing servicing (including removal or installation of parts, inspection or replacement),

be sure to read the following items carefully.
1. Be sure to proceed airbag related service after approx. 30 seconds or longer from the time the
ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position and
the negative (-) terminal cable is disconnected from the battery. The airbag system is equipped with
a back-up power source to assure the deployment of airbag when the battery cable is disconnected
by an accident. The back-up power is available for approx. 150 ms.
2. When the negative(-) terminal cable is disconnected from the battery, memory of the clock and
audio systems will be canceled. So before starting
work, make a record of the contents memorized by the audio memory system. When the work is
finished, reset the audio system and adjust the clock.
3. Malfunction symptoms of the airbag system are difficult to confirm, so the diagnostic codes
become the most important source of information
when troubleshooting.
4. When troubleshooting the airbag system, always inspect the diagnostic codes before
disconnecting the battery. 5. Never use airbag parts from another vehicle. When replacing parts,
replace them with new parts. 6. Never attempt to disassemble and repair the airbag modules
(DAB,PAB), clock spring and wiring in order to reuse them. 7. If any component of SRS has been
dropped, or if there are cracks, dents or other defects in the case, bracket or connector, replace
them with new
ones.
8. After work on the airbag system is completed, perform the SRS SRI check.
The airbag indicator lamp can be interrupted by other circuit fault in some cases. Therefore if the
airbag indicator lamp goes on, be sure to erase the DTC codes using Scan tool just after repairing
or replacing the troubled parts including fuse.
9. Especially in case of welding the body, never fail to disconnect the battery negative (-) terminal.
> General Precautions > Page 1992
Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service Precautions Airbag Handling and Storage
CAUTION:
When removing the air-bag module or handling a new airbag module, it should be placed with the
pad top surface facing up. In this case, the twin-lock type connector lock lever should be in the lock
state and care should be taken to place it so the connector will not be damaged. Do not store a
steering wheel pad on top of another one. (Storing the pad with its metallic surface up may lead to
a serious accident if the airbag should inflate for some reason.)
Never measure the resistance of the airbag squib. (This may cause the airbag to deploy, which is
very dangerous.)
Store the air-bag module where the ambient temperature remains below 93° C (290° F), without
high humidity and away from electrical noise.
When using electric welding, disconnect the airbag connectors under the steering column near the
MULTIFUNCTION SWITCH connector before starting work.
> Page 1993
Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair
WARNING: Failure to carry out service operations in the correct sequence could cause the airbag
system to unexpectedly deploy during servicing, possibly leading to a serious injury.
Further, if a mistake is made in servicing the airbag system, it is possible that the airbag may fail to
operate when required.
Before performing servicing (including removal or installation of parts, inspection or replacement),

be sure to read the following items carefully.
1. Be sure to proceed airbag related service after approx. 30 seconds or longer from the time the
ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position and
the negative (-) terminal cable is disconnected from the battery. The airbag system is equipped with
a back-up power source to assure the deployment of airbag when the battery cable is disconnected
by an accident. The back-up power is available for approx. 150 ms.
2. When the negative(-) terminal cable is disconnected from the battery, memory of the clock and
audio systems will be canceled. So before starting
work, make a record of the contents memorized by the audio memory system. When the work is
finished, reset the audio system and adjust the clock.
3. Malfunction symptoms of the airbag system are difficult to confirm, so the diagnostic codes
become the most important source of information
when troubleshooting.
4. When troubleshooting the airbag system, always inspect the diagnostic codes before
disconnecting the battery. 5. Never use airbag parts from another vehicle. When replacing parts,
replace them with new parts. 6. Never attempt to disassemble and repair the airbag modules
(DAB,PAB), clock spring and wiring in order to reuse them. 7. If any component of SRS has been
dropped, or if there are cracks, dents or other defects in the case, bracket or connector, replace
them with new
ones.
8. After work on the airbag system is completed, perform the SRS SRI check.
The airbag indicator lamp can be interrupted by other circuit fault in some cases. Therefore if the
airbag indicator lamp goes on, be sure to erase the DTC codes using Scan tool just after repairing
or replacing the troubled parts including fuse.
9. Especially in case of welding the body, never fail to disconnect the battery negative (-) terminal.
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Locations >
Engine Compartment Relay/Fuse Box

Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Locations >
Engine Compartment Relay/Fuse Box > Page 1999
M07-Chime bell, M08-Seat Belt Timer

Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Application
and ID > Dash Fuse Box
Fuse: Application and ID Dash Fuse Box
Dash Fuse Box - Layout

and ID > Dash Fuse Box > Page 2002
Dash Fuse Box - Circuit

and ID > Dash Fuse Box > Page 2003
Fuse: Application and ID Engine Compartment Relay/Fuse Box

Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information >
Locations > Component Locations
Fuse Block: Component Locations
M07-Chime bell, M08-Seat Belt Timer

Locations > Component Locations > Page 2008
Fuse Block: Connector Locations
EC01, EC02, EM01, EM02, EM03
EC01, EC02, EM01, EM02, EM03
MI01 To MI05, MM02
MI01 To MI05, MM02

MI01 To MI05, MM02
MI01 To MI05, MM02
MM03
MM04
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions
Fuse Block: Diagram Information and Instructions


Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2013
Connector View
CONNECTOR VIEW
Numbering Order
NUMBERING ORDER

Electrical Diagram
Harness Layouts
Harness Layout

B ..........................................................................................................................................................
......................................................................... Black L .......................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
Blue Br .................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................... Brown G ...............................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
...... Green Gr .......................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................ Gray Lg ...................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
....... Light Green O ..............................................................................................................................
................................................................................................... Orange P .........................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
............................... Pink R ..................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................... Red W .............................
..............................................................................................................................................................
....................................... White Y ........................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................... Yellow Li ....................
..............................................................................................................................................................
......................................... Light Blue
Fuse Block: Diagnostic Aids
CAUTION
CAUTION
may result.
lamp or ohmmeter.

box and the short.
Testing For Voltage
Testing For Voltage
CAUTION
Fuse Block: Connector Views







Rear Harness (1) - R11 - R33

Fuse Block: Electrical Diagrams
Dash Fuse Box Details (Part 1 Of 5)

Application and ID > Dash Fuse Box
Fuse Block: Application and ID Dash Fuse Box
Dash Fuse Box - Layout

Application and ID > Dash Fuse Box > Page 2041
Dash Fuse Box - Circuit

Application and ID > Dash Fuse Box > Page 2042
Fuse Block: Application and ID Engine Compartment Relay/Fuse Box

Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fusible Link > Component Information >
Specifications
Fusible Link: Specifications Fusible Link Specifications
Fusible Link Specifications
Color Code Amperage Rating
Generator Dark Blue 100 A
Battery Red 50 A
Power Window Blue 20 A
Radiator Fan Blue 20 A
ABS Controls Blue 20 A
Ignition Switch Pink 30 A

Lamps Pink 30 A
ECM Pink 20 A
ABS Controls Pink 30 A

Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information >
Locations > Engine Compartment Relay/Fuse Box

Locations > Engine Compartment Relay/Fuse Box > Page 2050
Application and ID > Engine Compartment Relay/Fuse Box

Application and ID > Engine Compartment Relay/Fuse Box > Page 2053
Application and ID > Page 2054
INSPECTION
fusible link.
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Service Reminder Indicators > Malfunction Indicator Lamp > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 00-36-006 > Mar > 00 > TPS - Driveability Concerns
Malfunction Indicator Lamp: Customer Interest TPS - Driveability Concerns
Number 00-36-006
Date MARCH, 2000
DESCRIPTION:
^ Unstable idle
REPAIR INFORMATION:

Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 00-36-006 > Mar > 00 > TPS - Driveability Concerns >
Page 2064
PARTS INFORMATION

Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 00-40-012 > Sep > 00 > A/T - Diagnostic
Trouble Codes & Scanned Data
Malfunction Indicator Lamp: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Diagnostic Trouble Codes &
Scanned Data
Group TRANSAXLE
Number 00-40-012
Model ALL

DESCRIPTION:
NOTE:
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 00-40-012 > Sep > 00 > A/T - Diagnostic
Trouble Codes & Scanned Data > Page 2070

Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 00-36-006 > Mar > 00 > TPS - Driveability
Concerns
Malfunction Indicator Lamp: All Technical Service Bulletins TPS - Driveability Concerns
Number 00-36-006
Date MARCH, 2000
DESCRIPTION:
^ Unstable idle
REPAIR INFORMATION:


Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 00-36-006 > Mar > 00 > TPS - Driveability
PARTS INFORMATION

Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Malfunction Indicator Lamp: > NHTSA98V245000
> Sep > 98 > Recall 98V245000: Coil Spring Can Break and Damage Tire
Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ): All Technical Service Bulletins Recall 98V245000: Coil Spring
Can Break and Damage Tire
Vehicle Description: Passenger vehicles registered in and operating in the following "salt belt"
states: Connecticut, Delaware, Illinois, Indiana, Iowa, Maine, Maryland, Massachusetts, Michigan,
Minnesota, Missouri, New Hampshire, New Jersey, New York, Ohio, Pennsylvania, Rhode Island,
Vermont, West Virginia, and Wisconsin. During winter months, the road salt used to de-ice roads
can result in corrosion that causes pits to form on the lower coil of the front springs allowing cracks
to develop. This can result in breakage of the lower spring coil.
If the front coil spring breaks, it can become displaced from its seated position, and can contact a
tire. Tire damage can result.
Dealers will install a spring guide to prevent a broken coil spring from contacting and damaging a
tire.
Owner notification began November 25, 1998. Owners who take their vehicles to an authorized
dealer on an agreed upon service date and do not receive the free remedy within a reasonable
time should contact Hyundai at 1-800-829-9956.
Also contact the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Auto Safety Hotline at
1-888-DASH-2-DOT (1-888-327-4236).
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > System Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Vehicle - Perchlorate Material Handling/Disposal
Tire Monitoring System: Technical Service Bulletins Vehicle - Perchlorate Material
Handling/Disposal
Group: GENERAL
Number: 07-00-001
Model: ALL
Subject: DISPOSAL/HANDLING OF PERCHLORATE CONTAINING MATERIALS - CALIFORNIA

LEGAL REQUIREMENTS
DESCRIPTION:
For California Dealers Only
This bulletin clarifies dealer responsibilities under California law regarding the disposal
requirements for perchlorate-containing materials of Title 22 of the California Code of Regulations
Section 67384.10.
Perchlorate is a chemical that has been found to contaminate drinking water, ground water, surface
water, and soil. In an effort to decrease the amount of perchlorate released into the environment,
California is regulating the disposal of materials containing per-chlorate such as airbags, seat belt
pre-tensioner initiators, TPMS valve sensors, and batteries for keyless entry systems.
Once an airbag or a seat belt pretensioner is deployed, the perchlorate is consumed in the burn
process and is no longer regulated. The Department of Toxic Substance Control has advised
manufacturers that pursuant to section 67384.2(b)(6) deployed airbags and pretensioners are
exempt from the Perchlorate BMP (Best Management Practices) regulations. Thus, you can handle
those items as you have handled them in the past.
In the event that you replace an undeployed airbag or pretensioner, you may use such parts during
the training of dealer personnel on the deployment procedure of those items. HMA recommends
that dealers periodically demonstrate airbag and seat belt pretensioner deployment as part of a
dealer training program on how to properly deploy these components.
If airbags and seat belt pretensioners are not deployed prior to disposal, they are considered
hazardous waste and you should follow the normal procedures for the disposal of such materials in
accordance with California hazardous waste regulations.
Hyundai also reminds you of a recent change in California law that waste batteries from keyless
entry remote systems and TPMS valve sensors may not be discarded in the trash. See California
Universal Waste Rule, 22 CCR section 66273.13. Waste batteries must be taken to a local recycle
collection center. A center near you can be found at http://www.earth911.org. If you have any
questions regarding your implementation obligations under California law, please consult with the
legal counsel you regularly consult with on waste issues.
Additional information is available from the California Department of Toxic Substances Control at
http ://www.dtsc.ca.gov/Hazardouswaste/Perchlorate/index.cfm.
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Spare Tire > Component Information >
Specifications > Mechanical Specifications
Spare Tire: Mechanical Specifications
DIMENSIONS
Tire Size ..............................................................................................................................................

.......................................................... T105/70 D14
Wheel Size ..........................................................................................................................................

.................................................................... 4T x 15
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Spare Tire > Component Information >
Specifications > Mechanical Specifications > Page 2096
Spare Tire: Pressure, Vacuum and Temperature Specifications
Tire Inflation Pressure .........................................................................................................................

..................................................... 414 kPa (60 psi)
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Wheels - Aluminum Wheel Cleaning And Maintenance
Wheels: Technical Service Bulletins Wheels - Aluminum Wheel Cleaning And Maintenance
Group: BODY
Number: 09-BD-003
Date: JANUARY, 2009
Model: ALL MODELS
Subject: ALUMINUM WHEEL CLEANING AND MAINTENANCE
DESCRIPTION:
This TSB describes how to clean and maintain the aluminum wheels on Hyundai vehicles. The
following information on wheel care may be given to customers as needed. Hyundai has found that
some vehicles equipped with wheels that have been coated with a vapor chrome finish have
exhibited surface damage from the use of harsh chemicals and improper cleaning procedures.
Though these wheels have the appearance of chrome plating, they have a painted surface similar
to the exterior of the vehicle, therefore, the same care should be used when cleaning and
maintaining.
RECOMMENDED CLEANING PROCEDURE:
1. Wash wheels when they are cool, in a shaded area away from direct sunlight.
2. Wash wheels with a neutral detergent or an alkaline wash soap (car soap) using a soft cleaning
sponge.
3. Rinse the soap off the wheel with water spray, then dry wheels using a 100% cotton terry cloth
towel, chamois or a synthetic fabric designed for automotive detailing.
TO AVOID WHEEL DAMAGE, DO NOT USE THE FOLLOWING:
1. Abrasive soaps, cleaners, household detergents and wheel/tire dressings.
2. Abrasive polishes, chrome polishes, chemicals and acid-based cleaners.
3. Abrasive cleaning brushes and steel wool.
4. Some automatic car washes may also cause damage to the vapor chrome finish.
5. Car wash chemical strength cleaners along, with brush agitation could damage the finish.
NOTE: Wheels that are found to be damaged by incorrect cleaning may be considered to have
been damaged by abuse and will not be covered by the vehicle's warranty.
MODELS: All vehicles equipped with aluminum wheels

Wheels: Specifications
WHEEL RUNOUT
Aluminum Wheel
Axial .....................................................................................................................................................
........................................ 0.3 mm (0.012 inch) Radial ........................................................................
.................................................................................................................... 0.3 mm (0.012 inch)
Steel Wheel
Axial .....................................................................................................................................................
........................................ 1.0 mm (0.039 inch) Radial [1] ...................................................................
................................................................................................................... 0.6 mm (0.023 inch)
[1] Average of Left and right hand sides.

Wheels: Service Precautions
1. Aluminum wheels need special attention. If salt or chemicals have adhered to the wheels, they
need to be rinsed off as soon as possible. After
cleaning the wheels, a coating of wax should be applied to prevent corrosion.
2. When cleaning the vehicle with steam, do not direct steam onto the aluminum type wheels and
use the following directions when working on the
wheels.
- Clean the hub surface of aluminum type wheels.
- After tightening wheel nut by finger, tighten them to specifications.
- Do not use an impact wrench or push the wrench by foot to tighten the wheel nuts.
- Do not apply oil to the threaded portions.

Wheels: Testing and Inspection
WHEEL RUNOUT
1. Jack up the vehicle and support it with floor stands.
2. Measure the wheel runout with a dial indicator as illustrated. 3. Replace the wheel if wheel
runout exceeds the limit. The wheel runout limits are as follows.
Steel Wheel
Radial (Average of LH & RH): 0.6 mm (0.023 inch). Axial: 1.0 mm (0.039 inch).
Aluminum Type Wheel
Radial: 0.3 mm (0.012 inch). Axial: 0.3 mm (0.012 inch).

Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Specifications
Wheel Bearing: Specifications Wheel Bearing Lubricant
Wheel Bearing Lubricant
SAE J310a Multi-purpose grease NLGI-2 or equivalent

Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Testing and
Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview
Wheel Bearing: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview
WHEEL BEARING END PLAY INSPECTION
1. Inspect the play of the bearings while the vehicle is jacked up and resting on floor jack. 2. If there
is any play, remove the hub cap and then release the parking brake. 3. Remove the caliper
assembly and the brake disc.
4. Check the bearing's end play by doing the following. Place a dial gauge against the hub surface,
then move the hub in the axial direction and check
whether or not there is end play. The service limit is 0 to 0.022 mm (0 to 0.00086 inch) or less.
5. If the end play exceeds the limit, the rear wheel bearing nut should be tightened to the specified
torque and then check the end play again. 6. Replace the rear hub bearing unit if an adjustment
cannot be made within the limit.
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Testing and
Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2109
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Front
Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Front
BEARING REPLACEMENT
1. Install the special tools as illustrated. 2. Remove the hub from the knuckle by turning the special
tool.
CAUTION:
a. Be sure to use the special tool. b. If the hub and knuckle are disassembled by striking with a
hammer, the bearing will be damaged.
3. Secure the knuckle in a vise. 4. Remove the brake disc from the hub.
5. Remove the outer bearing inner race from the hub using special tools (09532-11000,
09532-11301, 09517-21100) or equivalents. 6. Remove the oil seal and inner bearing inner race
from the knuckle.
7. Drive out the bearing outer races from the knuckle using the special tools.
CAUTION: If either the outer or inner race needs replacement, they must be replaced as a set.
8. Apply the specified multipurpose grease to the outside surface of the bearing outer race.
Recommended Grease: SAE J310a, multipurpose grease NLGI No. 2 or equivalent.

Repair > Front > Page 2112
9. Install the bearing outer race into the knuckle with Special Tools (09500-21000, 09517-21000,
09517-21200) or equivalents.
10. Install the disc to the hub, and torque to specification.
Disc to hub: 50-60 Nm (37-44 ft. lbs.).
11. Apply the specified multipurpose grease to the bearings and inside surface of the hub.
12. Place the outside bearing inner race into the knuckle.
13. Drive the oil seal (hub side) into the knuckle with the special tools. 14. Apply the specified
multipurpose grease to the lip of the oil seal and to the surfaces of the oil seal which contact the
hub.
15. Place the inner bearing into the knuckle.
16. Tighten the hub to the knuckle to 230 Nm (167 ft. lbs.) with the Special Tool (09517-21500) or
equivalent. 17. Rotate the hub to seat the bearing.
18. Measure the hub bearing starting torque.
Hub bearing starting torque [limit]: 1.3 Nm (11 inch lbs.) or less.
19. If the starting torque is O Nm (O inch lbs.), measure the hub bearing axial play.
20. If the hub axial play exceeds the limit of 0.11 mm (0.0043 inch) or less while the nut is tightened
to 235 Nm (167 ft. lbs.), the bearing, hub and
knuckle have not been installed correctly. Repeat the disassembly and assembly procedure.
21. Remove the special tool. 22. Apply the specified multipurpose grease to the bearing and to the
inside of the knuckle.
Recommended Grease: SAE J310a, multipurpose grease, NLGI No. 2 or equivalent.
23. Drive the oil seal (drive shaft side) into the knuckle until it contacts the bearing outer race using
special tools. 24. Apply the specified multipurpose grease to the lip of the oil seal. 25. Install the
parts to the torque specifications. 26. Lower the vehicle to the ground and tighten the knuckle to the
lower arm ball joint connecting bolt.
Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Rear
DISASSEMBLY
1. Jack up the rear of the vehicle and support it on jack stands. 2. Remove the wheel and tire. 3.
Remove the brake drum.
4. Remove the rear hub assembly.
NOTE: The rear hub unit bearing should not be dismantled.
5. After removing the hub assembly,check the oil seal for crack or damage, then also check the
hub bearing unit to see if there is any wear or damage,
and check the rotor for chipped teeth.
ASSEMBLY
1. After tightening the wheel bearing nut, crimp the nut to meet the concave portion of the spindle.
2. Install the hub cap.
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Hub > Axle Nut > Component Information >
Specifications
Axle Nut: Specifications
Front Axle Nut Torque 200 - 260 Nm
Rear Wheel Bearing Nut Torque 180 - 220 Nm

Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Nut <--> [Wheel Fastener] > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Wheels - Lug Nut Torqueing Service Tips
Wheel Nut: Technical Service Bulletins Wheels - Lug Nut Torqueing Service Tips
Group: CHASSIS
Number: 04-50-005
Date: MAY, 2004
Model: ALL
Subject WHEEL LUG NUT TORQUE - SERVICE TIP
This bulletin supersedes TSB # 03-50-003.
DESCRIPTION:
This bulletin provides the proper procedure for torquing the wheel lug nuts.
CAUTION:
Do not use an air impact tool for wheel lug nut installation without the applicable torque limiting
socket.
Air impact tools can generate up to 300 lb-ft (400 Nm) of torque. This amount of torque exceeds
the Hyundai wheel lug nut torque specification. Overly torqued and/or unevenly torqued wheel lug
nuts may cause the following:
^ Distortion of the wheel hub
^ Distortion of the brake disc
^ Increased brake disc runout
^ Brake vibration and pulsation
^ Damage to the wheel rim
^ Damage to the wheel lug nuts and lugs Steering wheel vibration and shimmy
PROCEDURE:
All wheel lug nuts should be tightened to specification using a torque wrench or using an applicable
torque stick (torque limiting impact socket) supplied by ACCUTORQ(TM) (or equivalent) on a 1/2
inch drive impact tool. The "ACCUTORQ(TM) "lug nut socket limits the torque of the air impact tool,
preventing over tightening or uneven tightening of the wheel lug nuts.
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Wheels - Lug Nut Torqueing Service Tips > Page 2123
For the correct wheel lug nut torque specification, refer to the appropriate Shop Manual. The chart
summarizes the factory recommended wheel lug nut torque specification:
1. Follow the wheel lug nut torquing pattern as shown.
2. Always use the correct specification ACCUTORQ(TM) lug nut torque stick for the application
(color of the tool indicates the torque specification).
3. Do not use a torque stick to remove wheel lug nuts.
4. Do not use air impact tools on locking wheel lug nuts. They are to be hand-torqued only.
Wheel Nut: Technical Service Bulletins Wheel Lug Nut - Service Tips for Properly Torquing
Group: CHASSIS
Number: 99-50-010
Model: ALL
Subject: WHEEL LUG NUT TORQUE - SERVICE TIP
DESCRIPTION:
This bulletin provides the proper procedure for torquing the wheel lug nuts.
NOTE: Use of an air impact tool for wheel lug nut installation without the applicable torque limiting
socket is not recommended.
Air impact tools typically used for wheel lug nuts can generate up to 300 lb-ft (400 Nm) of torque.
Overly torqued and/or unevenly torqued wheel lug nuts may cause:
- Distortion of the wheel hub
- Distortion of the brake disc
- Brake disc runout
- Brake vibration and pulsation
- Damage to wheel rim
- Damage to the wheel nuts and lugs Steering wheel vibration and shimmy
PROCEDURE:
All wheel lug nuts should be tightened to specification using a torque wrench or using an applicable
torque stick (torque limiting impact socket) supplied by ACCUTORQ (TM) (or equivalent) on a 1/2
inch drive impact tool. The "ACCUTORQ (TM)" lug nut socket limits the torque of the air impact
tool,
preventing over tightening or uneven tightening of the wheel lug nuts.
For the correct wheel lug nut torque specification, refer to the appropriate Shop Manual. The chart
below summarizes the factory recommended wheel lug nut specification:
NOTES:
1. Follow the torque pattern as shown below
2. Always use the correct specification ACCUTORQ (TM) lug nut torque socket for the application
(color of the tool indicates the torque specification).
3. Do not use a torque stick to remove wheel lug nuts.
4. Do not use air impact tools on locking wheel lug nuts. They are to be hand-torqued only.
Wheel Nut: Specifications
TIGHTENING SEQUENCE
Go around the wheel tightening every other nut until they are all tight, then double-check each nut
for tightness.
Wheel Nuts ..........................................................................................................................................

...................................... 90-110 Nm (65-80 ft. lbs.)
Wheel Nut: Service and Repair
WHEEL NUT TIGHTENING
1. The tightening torque for the steel and aluminum alloy wheels are 90-110 Nm (65-80 ft. lbs.).
CAUTION: When using an impact-wrench, tightening torque should be checked using a hand
torque wrench.
2. To use the correct tightening order, go around the wheel tightening every other nut until they are
all tight, then double-check each nut for tightness.
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Towing Information > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins >
Drivetrain - Recreational Towing Requirements
Towing Information: Technical Service Bulletins Drivetrain - Recreational Towing Requirements
Group: GENERAL
Number: 08-GI-003
Date: JULY, 2008
Model: ALL
Subject: RECREATIONAL TOWING REQUIREMENTS
DESCRIPTION:
This bulletin provides requirements for towing 2WD Hyundai vehicles equipped with manual
transaxles with all four wheels on the ground, such as may be done to tow behind a recreational
vehicle.
CAUTION:
The combinations listed in the TABLE MUST NOT be towed behind a recreational vehicle with all
four wheels on the ground.
MANUAL TRANSAXLE EQUIPPED 2WD HYUNDAI VEHICLE TOWING REQUIREMENTS:
NOTE:
Confirm that the "recreational" tow vehicle has the capacity to tow a Hyundai vehicle.
Any Hyundai 2WD vehicle equipped with a manual transaxle may be towed with all four wheels on
the ground behind another vehicle, such as a Recreational Vehicle (RV), as long as the following
conditions are met:
1. Transaxle oil is at the recommended level
2. Transaxle is in correct working order
3. Parking brake is released
4. Gearshift is in NEUTRAL
5. Steering wheel is UNLOCKED with the key in the ignition and in the "ACC" position
6. Front tires are of the same size
7. Front tire pressures are equal and inflated to the recommended pressure
NOTE:
When you leave the key in the "ACC" position, make sure all accessories are turned off to prevent
battery drain.
8. Vehicle is towed from the front with all four wheels on the ground
WARNING:
When towing has been completed, be sure to turn the key off, remove it from the ignition and set
the parking brake. Do not leave the key in the ignition with the vehicle unattended.
Drivetrain - Recreational Towing Requirements > Page 2132
NOTE:
Emergency and disabled vehicle towing procedures are given in detail in the respective model's
owner's manual; however, the following information quickly summarizes the various recommended
towing procedures to be used by Hyundai dealers or by commercial truck towing companies.
Towing Information: Technical Service Bulletins Vehicle - RV Towing Guidelines/Precautions
Group: GENERAL
Number: 05-00-001
Model: ALL
Subject RECREATIONAL TOWING REQUIREMENTS
DESCRIPTION:
This bulletin provides requirements for towing 2WD Hyundai vehicles equipped with manual
transaxles with all four wheels on the ground, such as may be done to tow behind a recreational
vehicle.
CAUTION:
The combinations listed in the TABLE MUST NOT be towed behind a recreational vehicle with all
four wheels on the ground.
MANUAL TRANSAXLE EQUIPPED 2WD HYUNDAI VEHICLE TOWING
REQUIREMENTS:
NOTE:
Any Hyundai 2WD vehicle equipped with a manual transaxle may be towed with all four wheels on
the ground behind another vehicle, such as a Recreational Vehicle (RV), as long as the following
conditions are met:
6. Front tires are of the same size

7. Front tire pressures are equal and inflated to the recommended pressure
NOTE:
battery drain.
WARNING:
NOTE:
towing procedures to be used by Hyundai dealers or by commercial truck towing companies.
Towing Information: Technical Service Bulletins Vehicle - Towing Requirements & Precautions
Group: GENERAL
Number: 04-00-002
Date: JUNE, 2004
Model: ALL
Subject RECREATIONAL TOWING REQUIREMENTS
DESCRIPTION:
This bulletin provides requirements for towing Hyundai vehicles equipped with manual transaxles
with all four wheels on the ground, such as may be done to tow behind a recreational vehicle.
CAUTION:
Any Hyundai vehicle equipped with an automatic transaxle, 2WD or 4WD, MUST NOT be towed
with all four wheels on the ground behind another vehicle. This may seriously damage the vehicle's
transaxle.
MANUAL TRANSAXLE EQUIPPED 2WD HYUNDAI VEHICLE TOWING REQUIREMENTS:
NOTE:
Any Hyundai vehicle equipped with a manual transaxle may be towed with all four wheels on the
ground behind another vehicle, such as a Recreational Vehicle (RV), as long as the following
conditions are met:
NOTE:
battery drain.
WARNING:
NOTE:
towing procedures to be used by Hyundai dealers or by commercial towing companies.
Towing Information: Technical Service Bulletins Towing - M/T Requirements
Group: GENERAL
Number: 00-00-002
Date: AUGUST, 2000
Model: ALL FRONT WHEEL DRIVE
Subject: TOWING REQUIREMENTS
DESCRIPTION: This bulletin provides requirements for towing Hyundai vehicles equipped with
manual transaxles with all four wheels on the ground, such as may be done to tow behind a
recreational vehicle.
CAUTION:
Any Hyundai vehicle equipped with an automatic transaxle must NOT be towed with all four wheels
on the ground behind another vehicle. This may seriously damage the vehicle's transaxle.
MANUAL TRANSAXLE EQUIPPED VEHICLE REQUIREMENTS:
Any Hyundai vehicle equipped with a manual transaxle may be towed with all four wheels on the
ground behind another vehicle, such as a Recreational Vehicle (RV), as long as the following six
conditions are met:
NOTE:
battery drain.
WARNING:
NOTE:
Emergency and disabled vehicle towing procedures are given in the respective model's owner's
manual.
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Compression Check > System Information >
Specifications
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Compression Check > System Information >
(1.52 Mpa, 220 psi).
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft
Bearing > Component Information > Specifications
Camshaft Bearing: Specifications
Using sequence shown, tighten the bearing caps to 12-14 Nm (120-140 kg.cm, 9-10 ft. lbs.).
Gear/Sprocket > Component Information > Specifications
Camshaft Gear/Sprocket: Specifications
Camshaft Sprocket Bolt: 80-100 Nm (800-1000 kg. cm., 59-74 ft. lbs.)
Gear/Sprocket > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2151
Camshaft Gear/Sprocket: Testing and Inspection
Check the camshaft sprocket for abnormal wear, cracks, or damage. Replace as necessary.
Gear/Sprocket > Component Information > Service and Repair > Installation
Camshaft Gear/Sprocket: Service and Repair Installation
1. Install the cam sprocket and bolt, then tighten to 80-100 Nm (800-1000 kg. cm., 59-74 ft. lbs.). 2.
Install the timing belt on the camshaft sprocket.
NOTE: -
- Ensure when the tension side is tightened by turning the camshaft sprocket in a reverse direction,
all timing marks are in line.
3. Loosen the tensioner mounting bolts 1 and 2 in that order as shown.
NOTE: -
This will apply spring tension to the timing belt only.
NOTE: -
If the bolt 1 is tightened first, the tensioner will move with the belt in the direction that the belt is
tightened.
NOTE: -
Do not turn the crankshaft in a counterclockwise direction.The crankshaft should turn smoothly.
bolts 2 and 1 in that order to 20-27 Nm (200-270 kg. cm., 15-20 ft. lbs.). 8. Then recheck the belt
tension as follows:
MANUAL METHOD:
Gear/Sprocket > Component Information > Service and Repair > Installation > Page 2154
GAUGE METHOD:
(a) Rotate the crankshaft in a counterclockwise direction to position of 90 degrees before top dead
(b) Measure the belt tension in the middle of the tension side span using the tension gauge,
NOTE:
- Put arm on bottom of belt teeth.And put spindle on the middle of belt back surface.
9. Install the timing belt cover, tighten timing belt cover bolts to 10-12 Nm (100-120 kg. cm., 7-9 ft.
lbs.).
10. Install the crankshaft pulley, ensure the crankshaft sprocket pin fits the small hole in the pulley.
Gear/Sprocket > Component Information > Service and Repair > Installation > Page 2155
Camshaft Gear/Sprocket: Service and Repair Removal

Remove the bolt from the camshaft sprocket. 8. Remove the camshaft sprocket.
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft,
Engine > Component Information > Specifications
Camshaft: Specifications
CAMSHAFT TIMING
Intake:
Opens ..................................................................................................................................................
.................................................. 12° BTDC Closes .............................................................................
...................................................................................................................... 52° ABDC
Exhaust:
Opens ..................................................................................................................................................
.................................................. 52° BBDC Closes .............................................................................
....................................................................................................................... 12° ATDC
DIMENSIONS
Camshaft Journal O.D .........................................................................................................................

.......................................... 30 mm (1.181 inch) Cam Height:
Standard Value:
Intake ...................................................................................................................................................
.................. 42.8575 mm (1.6873 inch) Exhaust ..................................................................................
................................................................................ 42.7353 mm (1.6825 inch)
Cam Height Limit:
Intake ...................................................................................................................................................
.................. 42.3575 mm (1.6676 inch) Exhaust ..................................................................................
................................................................................ 42.2353 mm (1.6628 inch)
Camshaft End Play

..............................................................................................................................................
0.07-0.28 mm (0.0003-0.0011 inch) Camshaft Bearing Oil Clearance
......................................................................................................................... 0.07-0.28 mm
(0.0003-0.0011 inch)
Camshaft Sprocket Bolt

........................................................................................................................... 20-27 Nm (200-270
kg. cm., 14-20 ft. lbs.)
Engine > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2159
Camshaft: Testing and Inspection
1. Using a suitable micrometer, check the camshaft journals for wear.
- If the journals are badly worn, replace the camshaft.
Journal O.D: 30 mm (1.181 inch)
2. Using a suitable micrometer, check the cam lobes for wear.
- If the lobe is damaged or worn excessively, replace the camshaft.
Cam height standard value:
Intake: 42.8575 mm (1.6873 inch). Exhaust: 42.7353 mm (1.6825 inch).
Limit:
3. Check the cam surface for abnormal wear or damage, and replace if necessary. 4. Check each
bearing for damage.
- If the bearing surface is excessively damaged, replace the cylinder head assembly or camshaft
bearing cap, as necessary.
Camshaft end play: 0.07-0.28 mm (0.0003-0.0011 inch). Camshaft bearing oil clearance: 0.07-0.28
mm (0.0003-0.0011 inch).
Camshaft: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect the breather hose and the PCV hose. 2. Remove the coolant pump pulley and
crankshaft pulley. 3. Remove the timing belt cover.
Remove the timing belt from the camshaft sprocket and the timing belt. 6. Remove the camshaft
sprocket. 7. Remove the ignition coil assembly 8. Remove the rocker cover.
9. Loosen the flange bolts and remove the rocker arm shaft, rocker arms and rocker arm shaft
springs as an assembly.
10. Remove the bolts, the rocker arms and arm shaft springs from the rocker arm shaft. 11.
Remove the camshaft bearing caps. 12. Remove the camshaft.
INSTALLATION
1. Install the camshaft after lubricating the journal of camshaft with engine oil. 2. Install the
camshaft bearing caps.
3. Install the ignition coil. 4. Install the rocker arm and rocker arm shaft as follows:
(a) Install the rocker arms and rocker arm shaft springs to the rocker arm shafts.
(b) Install the rocker arm shaft to the cylinder head, then tighten the rocker arm shaft mounting
bolts to 20-27 Nm (200-270 kg. cm., 14-20 ft.
lbs.).
NOTE: When installing the rocker arms, shafts, and springs, note the difference between the A and
B type rocker arms, and exhaust side needs only A type rocker arms.
5. Using Camshaft Oil Seal Installer tool No. 09221-21000, or equivalent, press and fit the
camshaft oil seal.
- Be sure to apply engine oil to the external surface of the oil seal.
- Insert the oil seal along the camshaft front end and install by driving the installer with a hammer
until the oil seal is fully seated.
6. Install the camshaft sprocket and tighten the bolts to 80-100 Nm (800-1000 kg. cm., 58-72 ft.
lbs.).
7. Align the camshaft sprocket and crankshaft sprocket timing marks.
- The piston in the No.1 cylinder will then be at the top dead center on the compression stroke.
- Install and tension the timing belt.
8. Install a gasket in the rocker cover groove. 9. Temporarily install the rocker cover.
10. Start the engine and run at idle. 11. Install the rocker cover and tighten the bolts to 8-10 Nm
(80-100 kg. cm., 5.8-7.2 ft. lbs.). 12. Install the timing belt cover. 13. Install the coolant pump pulley
and crankshaft pulley.
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Lifter / Lash
Adjuster, Valve > Component Information > Specifications
Lifter / Lash Adjuster: Specifications
LEAK DOWN SPECIFICATION
Fall-Down Rate ....................................................................................................................................

................................ 20 to 50 seconds/2.5 mm
NOTE: -
Fill and bleed HLA using diesel No.2 oil, or equivalent, with temperature 27°C (81°F).
- Specification given is for a leak down tester tool No. 09246-32300, or equivalent.
Adjuster, Valve > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2167
Lifter / Lash Adjuster: Testing and Inspection
Checking Auto-Lash Adjuster
VISUAL INSPECTION
Check Hydraulic Lash Adjuster (HLA) face that contact the valve stem. If badly worn or damaged,
replace the HLA.
LEAK DOWN TEST
1. Set HLA in a leak down tester tool No. 09246-32300, or equivalent (see image).
NOTE: Fill and bleed HLA using diesel No.2 oil, or equivalent, with temperature 27°C (81°F).
2. After the plunger has fallen slightly [0.2-0.5 mm (0.008-0.020 inch)], measure the subsequent
fall-down rate.
Standard value: fall-down rate 20 to 50 seconds/2.5 mm.
3. If a leak-down tester is not available, check the HLA as follows.
- Check if there is any abnormal noise with idling at normal operating temperature.
- If there is abnormal noise, air bleeding from the HLA may be needed.
Adjuster, Valve > Component Information > Service and Repair > Replacement
Lifter / Lash Adjuster: Service and Repair Replacement
REMOVAL
1. Remove the rocker arm assembly. 2. Remove the Hydraulic Lash Adjuster (HLA) from the rocker
arm
INSTALLATION

Adjuster, Valve > Component Information > Service and Repair > Replacement > Page 2170
Lifter / Lash Adjuster: Service and Repair Bleeding Procedure
1. Insert an air bleed wire into the hole of the Hydraulic Lash Adjuster (HLA), then move the
plunger up and down 4 or 5 times. 2. Remove the air bleed wire and push the plunger strongly by
finger.
- If it moves even slightly, repeat step 1 and 2.
- If the plunger moves even after repeating the steps several times, replace the HLA.
NOTE: -
Fill and bleed HLA using diesel No.2 oil, or equivalent, with temperature 27°C (81°F).
- Since the HLA is a precision part, take care that foreign objects such as dirt do not enter when
servicing.
- Do not attempt to disassemble the HLA.
- Use clean Diesel oil for cleaning the HLA.
- The fully bled HLA should be held in upright position to make sure the diesel oil in the adjuster is
not split.
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Rocker Arm
Assembly > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 98-20-002 > Feb > 98 > Valve
Lash Adjuster - Ticking/Collapsed
Rocker Arm Assembly: Customer Interest Valve Lash Adjuster - Ticking/Collapsed
Group ENGINE MECHANICAL
Number
98-20-002
Date
February, 1998
Model
1995-98 ACCENT SOHC
Subject LASH ADJUSTER TICKING (FIELD FIX CLEANING PROCEDURE)
DESCRIPTION: It may be necessary to clean the rocker arms of 1995-98 Accent SOHC engines
which experience a ticking/collapsed lash adjuster condition, Vehicles that have received less than
specified oil changes are likely candidates to require this procedure. A small particle (the size of a
grain of salt) in the oil system may plug the rocker arm oil feed passage to the lash adjuster. Follow
the procedures to properly clean the rocker arm(s).
CLEANING PROCEDURE:
CAUTION: Wear safety goggles while performing this cleaning procedure.
1. Remove the rocker arms from the rocker shaft, making sure to keep them in order. (See
appropriate Shop Manual for removal procedures).
2. Spray or dip the rocker arm in solvent.
3. Blow compressed air through the rocker arm as shown:
A. Place the rubber tip of a safety type blow gun into the lash adjuster bore.
B. Place your finger tip over the vent port on the top side of the rocker arm (this will force the air
through the oil passage back to the rocker
shaft). Use a small piece of rubber or other soft material between your finger and the vent hole to
prevent injury.
C. Blow the compressed air into the lash adjuster bore to dislodge any particles in the oil passage
(the particle will shoot into the bore for the
rockershaft).
4. Spray the rocker arm oil passage with spray solvent using an applicator tube. If the passage is
clear, the solvent will squirt into the lash adjuster bore.
5. Reassemble rocker arms per instructions from the appropriate Shop Manual.
Assembly > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 98-20-002 > Feb > 98 > Valve
Lash Adjuster - Ticking/Collapsed > Page 2179
WARRANTY INFORMATION: Warranty does not apply.
Assembly > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rocker Arm
Assembly: > 98-20-002 > Feb > 98 > Valve Lash Adjuster - Ticking/Collapsed
Rocker Arm Assembly: All Technical Service Bulletins Valve Lash Adjuster - Ticking/Collapsed
Number
98-20-002
Date
February, 1998
Model
1995-98 ACCENT SOHC
CLEANING PROCEDURE:
prevent injury.
rockershaft).
Assembly: > 98-20-002 > Feb > 98 > Valve Lash Adjuster - Ticking/Collapsed > Page 2185
Assembly: > 97-20-003 > Jan > 97 > Engine - Rocker Shaft Torquing Sequence Revision
Rocker Arm Assembly: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Rocker Shaft Torquing Sequence
Revision
Number 97-20-003
Date 01-1997
Model Accent 1995-1997 and Sonata 1992-1997
Subject TORQUING SEQUENCE OF ROCKER SHAFT ASSEMBLIES (SHOP MANUAL

ADDITION)
DESCRIPTION:
This bulletin provides a torque sequence for rocker shaft assemblies.
ANALYSIS:
The rocker shaft assembly should be "pulled" down in small even increments, starting from the
center bolt and working alternately outward until the rocker shaft is mated to the cylinder head (see
diagram). Only after the rocker shaft assembly is mated to the cylinder head can the rocker shaft
mounting bolts be properly torqued to the appropriate Shop Manual's specifications. Torque the
bolts in the sequence shown in the diagram shown.
NOTE
If the rocker shaft is not "pulled" down evenly, it is possible to bend or bind the shaft because the
rocker arms are in various stages of opening valves and a number of valves exert at least 50 lbs.
force against the tightening directions.
NOTE
If the engine requires jet, intake, and/or exhaust valve adjustments, the rocker shaft assemblies
and cylinder head bolts must be properly torqued (or re-torqued if they are already assembled and
the valves are only being adjusted) before any adjustments can be made. Use the torque
specifications as outlined in the appropriate Shop Manual.
Assembly > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Rocker Arm Assembly: >
97-20-003 > Jan > 97 > Engine - Rocker Shaft Torquing Sequence Revision
Revision
Number 97-20-003
Date 01-1997

ADDITION)
DESCRIPTION:
ANALYSIS:
NOTE
NOTE
Assembly > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2195
Rocker Arm Assembly: Specifications
Rocker Arm Shaft Bolt

............................................................................................................................. 20-27 Nm (200-270
kg. cm., 14-20 ft. lbs.)
Rocker Arm Assembly: Testing and Inspection
ROCKER ARM
1. Check the rotation of roller, replace if rough or worn. 2. Check the rocker face, replace if
damaged or pressed.
ROCKER ARM SHAFT
1. Check the rocker arm shafts for damage, replace as necessary. 2. Check the oil hole whether
clogged or not.
Rocker Arm Assembly: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Remove the breather hose and PCV valve. 2. Remove the timing belt cover. 3. Remove the
rocker cover.
DISASSEMBLY
1. Remove the bolts, the rocker arms and arm shaft springs from the rocker arm shaft.
2. Remove the Hydraulic Lash Adjuster (HLA) from the rocker arm.
ASSEMBLY
1. Install the HLA to the rocker arm. 2. Install the rocker arms and rocker arm shaft springs to the
rocker arm shafts,
INSTALLATION
1. Install the rocker arm shaft to the cylinder head, then tighten the rocker arm shaft mounting bolts
to 20-27 Nm (200-270 kg. cm., 14-20 ft. lbs.). 2. When installing the rocker arms, shafts, and
springs, note the difference between the A and B type rocker arms, and exhaust side needs only A
type
rocker arms.
3. Install the rocker cover and tighten the bolts to 8-10 Nm (80-100 kg. cm., 5.9-7.4 ft. lbs.).
NOTE:
- Sealant must be applied to top surface of cylinder head and cam cap and area of application is
shown in figure.
- The proper amount of sealant must be used to prevent the sealant from pushing excessive
amounts.
- Use sealant Three bond No.1212D aluminum color or equivalent.
4. Install the timing belt cover, tighten the cover bolts to 10-12 Nm (100-120 kg. cm., 7.2-8.7 ft.
lbs.). 5. Install the air cleaner. 6. Install the breather hose and PCV hose.
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Connecting Rod
Connecting Rod Bearing: Specifications
CONNECTING ROD BEARINGS
Oil Clearance
.........................................................................................................................................................
0.024-0.042 mm (0.0009-0.0016 inch) Available Undersize Bearings:
1st U/S .................................................................................................................................................

.................................... 0.25 mm (0.0100 inch) 2nd U/S ......................................................................
.............................................................................................................. 0.50 mm (0.0200 inch) 3rd
U/S .......................................................................................................................................................
............................. 0.75 mm (0.0300 inch)
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Connecting Rod,
Engine > Component Information > Specifications > Connecting Rod Service Specifications
Connecting Rod: Specifications Connecting Rod Service Specifications
DIMENSIONS
Bend ....................................................................................................................................................
....................... 0.05 mm (0.0019 inch) Or Less Twist ..........................................................................
................................................................................................. 0.10 mm (0.0394 inch) Or Less Side
Clearance:
Standard Value
..............................................................................................................................................
0.10-0.25 mm (0.0039-0.0098 inch) Limit ............................................................................................
...................................................................................... 0.40 mm (0.0157 inch)
Oil Clearance
...................................................................................................................................................
0.024-0.042 mm (0.0009-0.0016 inch) Available Undersize Bearings:
1st U/S .................................................................................................................................................

.............................. 0.25 mm (0.0100 inch) 2nd U/S ............................................................................
.................................................................................................. 0.50 mm (0.0200 inch) 3rd U/S ........
..............................................................................................................................................................
........ 0.75 mm (0.0300 inch)
Connecting Rod Cap Nuts

........................................................................................................................ 35-38 Nm (350-380 kg.
cm., 25-28 ft. lbs.)
Engine > Component Information > Specifications > Connecting Rod Service Specifications > Page 2208
Connecting Rod: Specifications Connecting Rod Nut
CONNECTING ROD CAP NUTS
Torque
............................................................................................................................................................
35-38 Nm (350-380 kg. cm., 25-28 ft. lbs.)
Connecting Rod: Testing and Inspection
Check connecting rod side clearance. Connecting rod side clearance:
Standard value: 0.10-0.25 mm (0.004-0.0098 inch). Limit: 0.4 mm (0.0157 inch).

Connecting Rod: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
NOTE: Keep the bearings in order with their corresponding connecting rods (according to cylinder
numbers) for proper reassembly.
1. Remove the connecting rod cap nuts, then remove the caps and the big end lower bearing. 2.
Push each piston connecting rod assembly toward the top of the cylinder and out of the block.
3. Use the piston pin fixture tool No. 09234-33001, or equivalent, to disassemble and reassemble
the piston and connecting rod. 4. Place the proper insert in the fork of the tool.
- Insert the position between the connecting rod and the piston.
5. Insert the proper removal tool through the hole in the arch of the tool.
NOTE: Center the piston, rod and pin assembly with the removal arbor.
INSTALLATION
1. Install proper pin guide through piston and into connecting rod.
- Hand tap pin guide into piston for proper retention.
- Drop piston pin into the other side of the piston.
NOTE: -
The pin guide centers the connecting rod in the piston.
- When the piston, connecting rod, piston pin and pin guide assembly are positioned on the fork of
the tool, the pin guide will also center this assembly in the tool.
- If too small a pin guide is used, the piston assembly will not be located centrally in the tool, and
damage may occur to the fork and/or insert of the tool.
2. Install piston assembly onto fork assembly of tool.
- Tool will support connecting rod at the piston pin, be sure to slide the piston assembly onto the
fork until the pin guide contacts the fork insert.
3. Adjust the installing arbor to the proper length by turning the numbered sleeve on the lettered
shaft until the specified alpha-numeric setting from
the application chart is obtained. -
Turn knurled nut to lock numbered sleeve on shaft.
4. Insert the installing arbor through the hole in the arch of the tool.
- Press piston pin into the connecting rod until the sleeve on the installing arbor contacts the top of
the tool arch.
- The pin guide will fall out of the connecting rod as the piston pin is pressed inch
NOTE: Do not exceed 5000 pounds of force when stopping the installing arbor sleeve against the
arch.
5. Install piston rings, apply engine oil around piston and piston rings.
6. Position each piston ring end gap as far apart from neighboring gaps as possible.
- Make sure that gaps are not positioned in side rail thrust and pin directions.
7. Hold piston rings firmly in a piston ring compressor as you insert them into cylinder. 8. Make sure
that the front mark of piston and the front mark (identification mark) of connecting rod are directed
toward front of engine.
9. When connecting rod cap is installed, make sure that cylinder numbers put on rod and cap at
disassembly match.
10. When new connecting rod is installed, make sure that notches for holding bearing in place are
on same side. 11. Tighten the connecting rod cap nuts to 35-38 Nm (350-380 kg. cm., 25-28 ft.
lbs.).
12. Check connecting rod side clearance.
Connecting rod side clearance:

Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Crankshaft
Gear/Sprocket > Component Information > Specifications
Crankshaft Gear/Sprocket: Specifications
Crankshaft Bolt
............................................................................................................................................................
140-150 Nm (103-111 ft. lbs.)
Gear/Sprocket > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2217
Crankshaft Gear/Sprocket: Testing and Inspection
Check the crankshaft sprocket for abnormal wear, cracks, or damage. Replace as necessary.
Gear/Sprocket > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal
Crankshaft Gear/Sprocket: Service and Repair Removal
Remove the camshaft from the camshaft sprocket. 8. Remove the camshaft sprocket. 9. Remove
the timing belt.
10. Remove the crankshaft sprocket bolts, then the crankshaft sprocket and flange.
Gear/Sprocket > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 2220
Crankshaft Gear/Sprocket: Service and Repair Installation
1. Install the flange and crankshaft sprocket as shown, then tighten to 140-150 Nm (1400-1500 kg.
cm., 103-111 ft. lbs.).
NOTE: Pay close attention to their mounting directions.
2. Install the camshaft sprocket and tighten the bolt to 80-100 Nm (800-1000 kg. cm., 59-74 ft. lbs.).
placed at top dead center on its compression stroke. 4. Install the timing belt tensioner as follows:
(a) Mount the tensioner, spring, and spacer. (b) Temporarily tighten the bolts. (c) Temporarily
tighten the tensioner long hole side washer and bolts.
(d) Install the bottom end of the spring against the front case as shown in the illustration.
NOTE: -
NOTE: -
NOTE: -
tightened.
NOTE: -
tension as follows:
MANUAL METHOD:
a moderate force [approximately 49 N (11 lb)], the timing belt cog end is approximately 1/2 of the
tensioner mounting bolt head radius (across flats) away from the bolt head center.
GAUGE METHOD:
NOTE: -
Put arm on bottom of belt teeth, then put spindle on the middle of belt back surface.
lbs.). 15. Install the crankshaft pulley, ensure the crankshaft sprocket pin fits the small hole in the
pulley. 16. Install the fan belt and adjust the belt tension. 17. Install the water pump pulley 18.
Install V-belt and adjust the belt tension.
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Crankshaft Main
Crankshaft Main Bearing: Specifications Crankshaft Main Bearing
Crankshaft Main Bearing
Main Bearing Cap Torque 55 - 60 Nm (550 - 600 kg.cm, 40 - 44 ft.lbf)
Main Journal Oil Clearance Bearings No. 1, 2, 4 and 5 0.028 - 0.046 mm (0.0011 - 0.0018 inch)
No. 3 (Center) 0.034 - 0.52 mm (0.0013 - 0.002 inch)
Pin Oil Clearance 0.024 - 0.042 mm (0.0009 - 0.0017 inch)

Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Crankshaft, Engine >
Crankshaft: Specifications
DIMENSIONS
Journal Diameter:
Main .....................................................................................................................................................
.......................... 50.000 mm (1.9685 inch) Rod ..................................................................................
.............................................................................................. 45.000 mm (1.7717 inch)
Bend ....................................................................................................................................................
....................... 0.030 mm (0.0012 inch) or less Out Of Round:
Main Journal
.........................................................................................................................................................
0.010 mm (0.0004 inch) or less Rod Journal
..........................................................................................................................................................
0.010 mm (0.0004 inch) or less
Taper:
Main Journal
.........................................................................................................................................................
0.010 mm (0.0004 inch) or less Rod Journal
..........................................................................................................................................................
0.010 mm (0.0004 inch) or less
End Play
..........................................................................................................................................................
0.050-0.175 mm (0.0020-0.0069 inch) Refinish Dimension Of Journals:
Main:
1st U/S .............................................................................................................................................

49.727-49.742 mm (1.9578-1.9583 inch) 2nd U/S
...........................................................................................................................................
49.477-49.492 mm (1.9479-1.9485 inch) 3rd U/S
............................................................................................................................................
49.227-49.242 mm (1.9380-1.9386 inch)
Rod:
1st U/S .............................................................................................................................................

44.725-44.740 mm (1.7608-1.7614 inch) 2nd U/S
...........................................................................................................................................
44.475-44.490 mm (1.7509-1.7516 inch) 3rd U/S
............................................................................................................................................
44.225-44.240 mm (1.7411-1.7417 inch)
Crankshaft: Testing and Inspection
VISUAL INSPECTION
Check the crankshaft journals and pins for damage, uneven wear and cracks.Also check oil holes
for clogging.Correct or replace any defective part. Visually inspect each Main Bearings and
Connecting Rod bearing for peeling, melt, seizure and improper contact.Replace the defective
bearings.
DIAMETER AND TAPER INSPECTION
Using a suitable micrometer, inspect out-of-roundness and taper of crankshaft main bearing journal
and connecting rod pin.
Standard value:
Crankshaft journal O.D 50 mm (1.9685 inch). Crankshaft pin O.D 45 mm (1.7717 inch). Crankshaft
journal, pin out-of-roundness and taper 0.01 mm (0.0004 inch) or less.
JOURNAL OIL CLEARANCE MEASUREMENT
Micrometer Method Using suitable external and internal micrometers, measure outside diameter of
the crankshaft journal and the crank pin and inside diameter of the bearing. -
The clearance measurement is the different between the measured outside and inside diameters.
Plastigauge Method 1. Remove oil, grease and any other dirt from bearings and journals.
2. Cut plastigauge to the same length as the width of the bearing and place it in parallel with the
journal, off oil holes. 3. Install the crankshaft, bearings, and caps.
4. Tighten them to 55-60 Nm (550-600 kg. cm., 40-44 ft. lbs.).
- During this operation, do not turn the crankshaft.
5. Remove the caps.
6. Measure the width of the plastigauge at the widest point using the scale printed on the gauge
package.
- If the clearance exceeds the repair limit, replace the bearing.
- Should the standard clearance not be obtained even after bearing replacement, the journal should
be ground to a recommended undersize, and a bearing of the same size should be installed.
Standard Values
Main journal oil clearance, Bearings No. 1, 2, 4 and 5: 0.028-0.046 mm (0.0011-0.0018 inch). Main
journal oil clearance No.3 (center): 0.034-0.52 mm (0.0013-0.002 inch). Rod journal oil clearance:
0.024-0.042 mm (0.0009-0.0017 inch).
Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal
Crankshaft: Service and Repair Removal
1. Remove the timing belt. 2. Remove the front case. 3. Remove the flywheel. 4. Remove the
cylinder head assembly. 5. Remove the oil pan. 6. Remove the rear engine plate and the rear oil
seal. 7. Remove the connecting rod caps. 8. Remove the main bearing caps and remove the
crankshaft.
- Keep the bearings in order by cap number.
9. Remove the crankshaft position sensor wheel.
NOTE: Mark the main bearing caps to permit reassembly in the original position and direction.
Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 2234
Crankshaft: Service and Repair Installation
1. Install the upper main bearing inserts in the cylinder block.
- When reusing the main bearings, remember to install them by referring to the location marks
made at the time of disassembly.
2. Install the crankshaft.

- Apply engine oil to the journals.
3. Install bearing caps, then using the sequence of the center, No.2, No.4, front and rear caps,
tighten cap bolts to 55-60 Nm (550-600 kg. cm., 40-44
ft. lbs.). -
Cap bolts should be tightened evenly in 2 to 3 stages before they are tightened to the specified
torque.
- The caps should be installed with the arrow mark directed toward the crank pulley side of engine.
- Cap numbers must be corrected.
4. Make certain that the crankshaft turns freely and has the proper clearance between the center
main bearing thrust flange.
Crankshaft end play standard value: 0.05-0.175 mm (0.002-0.005 inch).
5. Install the crankshaft main bearing seal in the crankshaft rear seal case as follows:
(a) Using crankshaft rear oil seal installer tool No. 09231-21000, or equivalent, as shown. (b) Press
and fit the oil seal in all the way, being careful not to misalign it.
6. Install the rear oil seal case and new gasket.
- Tighten the five bolts.
- Apply engine oil to the oil seal lips and crankshaft at the time of installation.
7. Install the rear engine plate and tighten the bolts
8. Install the connecting rod caps, tighten to 35-38 Nm (350-380 kg. cm., 25-28 ft. lbs.).
- Check connecting rod end play. Standard value: 0.05-0.175 mm (0.002-0.005 inch).
9. Install the flywheel.
10. Install the front case. 11. Install the oil pan. 12. Install the timing belt.
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Engine Block Heater >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Block Heater - Installation Instructions
Block Heater - Installation Instructions
Number: 98-20-003

Model: ALL 1.5L (SOHC) ACCENT
Subject ACCENT 1.5L (SOHC) BLOCK HEATER
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
DESCRIPTION: This bulletin provides a procedure for the installation of a Hyundai block heater
(part no.00208-16100) for any 1.5L SOHC engine Accent.
Installation Procedures
Note: For reference purposes, pictures are of a 1998 Accent. Earlier California, Federal and
Canadian vehicles may vary in components but the basic procedure is the same.
1. Remove the radiator cap and raise the vehicle on a hoist.
CAUTION: Make sure that the engine is cool before removing the radiator cap.
2. Remove the passenger side engine compartment lower plastic splashguard by removing the five
(5) bolts (M6) and one plastic push screw.
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Block Heater - Installation Instructions > Page 2239
3. Drain the coolant from the radiator into a large container by opening the drain valve, located on
the right side of the lower radiator tank.
4. Remove the two (M11) nuts from from the bottom of the catalytic converter.
Note: During installation (M11: torque to 36 lb.ft, 48.8 Nm)
TIP: Squirt some Hyundai Rust Penetrant (P/N 00232-12150) or equivalent on the nuts to ease the
removal process and lessen the possibility of damaging the fastener.
5. Lower the vehicle. Remove the plastic air intake plenum by removing two bolts (M6).
6. Disconnect the upper radiator hose at the radiator end and move the hose out of the way.
7. Disconnect the wiring for the passenger side radiator fan unit. Remove the passenger side fan
unit by removing the two upper bolts (M6) and loosening (do not remove all the way) the two lower
bolts (M6).
8. Remove the three (M8) bolts holding the exhaust manifold heat shield in place.
Note: During installation (M8: torque to 13 lb.ft 17.6 Nm)
CAUTION: Do not attempt to remove the heat shield. The bolts are removed to gain access to the
exhaust manifold nuts.
TIP: Squirt some Hyundai Rust Penetrant (P/N 00232-12150) or equivalent on the bolts to ease the
9. Disconnect the upper oxygen sensor wiring connector.

10. Remove the nine (M6) nuts holding the exhaust manifold to the cylinder head.
Note: During installation (M6: torque to 13 lb.ft, 17.6 Nm)
TIP: Squirt some Hyundai Rust Penetrant (PIN 00232-12150) or equivalent on the nuts to ease the
11. Remove the exhaust manifold, catalytic converter and the heat shield as a single unit. Then
remove the spark plug wire shield.
12. Place a coolant drain pan under the vehicle to prepare to catch the coolant from the engine
block. Firmly place a clean rag into the exhaust pipe to keep coolant from entering the exhaust
system.
13. Remove the second from the left core plug from the engine block by using a hammer and a flat
tipped punch at the "3 o'clock" position of the outer ring of the core plug. By hammering the punch
at the outer flange only, the the core plug can be made to rotate in the hole, thus facilitating the
removal process. Once the core plug has rotated as far as possible, use a pair of pliers to remove
it.
14. Clean the surface of the core hole with a Scotchbrite (TM) (or equivalent) pad to make sure that
there is no debris or metal burrs. An irregularity of the surface may damage the O-ring on the block
heater during the installation process.
15. Install the block heater so that the wire connector is at the "9 o'clock" position and tighten the
brass bolt with a torque wrench to 2.1 lb.ft (equal to 25 lb.in, 2.8 Nm).
CAUTION: The bolt is made of brass and will shear easily.
16. Plug in the wire and route the wire so that it will not come into contact with the exhaust manifold
heat shield.
17. Use the supplied tie wraps to secure the block heater wire along the alternator wire harness
and out to the front bumper's lower opening. Wrap the plug end of the block heater wiring around
the bumper's lower opening horizontal bar and double tie wrap in place. Make sure that the plug
will be easily accessible yet not so loose as to cause damage to the front bumper when the vehicle
is driven.
18. Reassemble all removed components in reverse order. Torque all nuts & bolts as specified in
these instructions. Be sure to reconnect all disconnected wire connectors.
19. Refill the radiator/reservoir with the proper mix of coolant & water. Make sure that the system is
fully filled. Start the engine and check for any coolant leaks.
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Front Engine Plate >
Front Engine Plate: Specifications
Oil Pump Cover Screw:
8-12 Nm (80-120 kg. cm., 6.8-8.0 ft. lbs.).
Refer to the illustration for additional tightening specifications.
DIMENSIONS
Outer Gear Clearance Between Outer Circumference And Front Case:

0.12-0.18mm (0.005-0.007 inch).
Tip Clearance On The Pump Rotor:
Standard value: 0.025-0.069 mm (0.001-0.003 inch).
Axial Clearance On The Outer Pump Rotor:
Pressure Relief Valve Spring:
Free Height: 46.6 mm (1.835 inch). Load: 6.1 kg/40.1 mm (13.4 lb/1.579 inch)
Front Engine Plate: Testing and Inspection
FRONT CASE
1. Check the front case for cracks or damage.Replace as necessary. 2. Check the front oil seal for
worn or damaged lips.
- Replace if defective.
FRONT CASE AND OIL PUMP COVER
Worn (especially stepped) or damaged surfaces contacting gears.

RELIEF VALVE AND SPRING
1. Check sliding condition of the relief valve inserted in the front case. 2. Inspect for distorted or
broken relief valve spring.
Standard value:
Free height: 46.6 mm (1.835 inch). Load: 6.1 kg/40.1 mm (13.4 lb/1.579 inch).
OIL PUMP GEARS

1. Worn or damaged gear teeth surfaces.
2. Clearance between outer gear and front case.
Outer gear clearance between outer circumference and front case 0.12-0.18mm (0.005-0.007
inch).
3. Check the tip clearance on the pump rotor.
4. Check the axial clearance on the outer pump rotor.

Front Engine Plate: Service and Repair Removal
1. Remove the timing belt. 2. Remove all the oil pan bolts. 3. Remove the oil pan. 4. Remove the oil
screen. 5. Remove the front case assembly.
Front Engine Plate: Service and Repair Disassembly and Assembly

DISASSEMBLY
1. Remove the oil pump cover. 2. Remove the inner and outer gears from the front case.
NOTE: -
The mating marks on the inner and outer gears indicate the direction of installation.
- Make sure that the inner and outer gears are installed as shown.
3. Remove the plug and remove the relief spring and relief plunger.
ASSEMBLY
1. Install the outer and inner gears into the front case.
- Make sure that the inner and outer gears are installed in the same direction as shown.
2. Install the oil pump cover and tighten the bolts to 6-9 Nm (60-90 kg. cm., 4.5-6.6 ft. lbs.).
- After the bolts have been tightened, check to ensure that the gear turns smoothly.
3. Install the relief valve and spring, tighten to 40-50 Nm (400-500 kg. cm., 29-36 ft. lbs.).
NOTE: Apply engine oil to the relief valve.

Front Engine Plate: Service and Repair Installation
1. Using the bolt pattern shown in the illustration, install the front case assembly with a new gasket,
and tighten the bolts to 12-15 Nm (120-150 kg.
cm., 9-11 ft. lbs.).
Bolt Pattern:
(A) 25 mm (0.98 inch) (B) 30 mm (1.18 inch) (C) 45 mm (1.77 inch) (D) 60 mm (2.36 inch)
2. Install the crankshaft sprocket. 3. Install the timing belt. 4. Install the crankshaft pulley. 5. Install
the oil screen.
6. Clean both gasket surfaces of the oil pan and the cylinder block.
7. Apply sealant into the groove of the oil pan flange as shown.
NOTE: -
Apply sealant approx.4 mm (0.16 inch) in thickness.
- After application of sealant, do not exceed 15 minutes before installing the oil pan.
8. Install the oil pan and tighten the bolts to 6-8 Nm (60-80 kg. cm., 4-6 ft. lbs.).
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Harmonic Balancer -
Crankshaft Pulley > Component Information > Specifications
Harmonic Balancer - Crankshaft Pulley: Specifications Crankshaft Pulley Bolt
Crankshaft Pulley Bolt
Torque 10 - 12 Nm (100 - 120 kg.cm., 7.2 - 8.7 ft. lbs.)

Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Piston, Engine >
Piston: Specifications
DIMENSIONS
Diameter
..........................................................................................................................................................
75.47-75.50 mm (2.9713-2.9724 inch) Available Oversize Pistons:
1st O/S .................................................................................................................................................

.............................. 0.25 mm (0.0100 inch) 2nd O/S ...........................................................................
................................................................................................... 0.50 mm (0.0200 inch) 3rd O/S .......
..............................................................................................................................................................
......... 0.75 mm (0.0300 inch) 4th O/S .................................................................................................
....................................................................... 1.00 mm (0.0390 inch)
Piston: Testing and Inspection
1. Check each piston for scuffing, scoring wear, and other defects.
- Replace any piston that is defective.
2. Check each piston ring for breakage, damage and abnormal wear.
- Replace the defective rings.
- When the piston requires replacement, also replace the rings
3. Check the piston pin fit in the piston pin hole.
- Replace any defective piston and pin assembly that is defective.
- The piston pin must be smoothly pressed by hand into the pin hole (at room temperature).
Bowl Depth (see image):
Standard Value: 0.30-0.50 mm (0.0120-0.0200 inch)

Piston: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
NOTE: Keep the bearings in order with their corresponding connecting rods (according to cylinder
numbers) for proper reassembly.
1. Remove the connecting rod cap nuts, then remove the caps and the big end lower bearing. 2.
Push each piston connecting rod assembly toward the top of the cylinder and out of the block.
3. Use the piston pin fixture tool No. 09234-33001, or equivalent, to disassemble and reassemble
the piston and connecting rod. 4. Place the proper insert in the fork of the tool.
- Insert the position between the connecting rod and the piston.
5. Insert the proper removal tool through the hole in the arch of the tool.
NOTE: Center the piston, rod and pin assembly with the removal arbor.
INSTALLATION
1. Install proper pin guide through piston and into connecting rod.
- Hand tap pin guide into piston for proper retention.
- Drop piston pin into the other side of the piston.
NOTE: -
The pin guide centers the connecting rod in the piston.
- When the piston, connecting rod, piston pin and pin guide assembly are positioned on the fork of
the tool, the pin guide will also center this assembly in the tool.
- If too small a pin guide is used, the piston assembly will not be located centrally in the tool, and
damage may occur to the fork and/or insert of the tool.
2. Install piston assembly onto fork assembly of tool.
- Tool will support connecting rod at the piston pin, be sure to slide the piston assembly onto the
fork until the pin guide contacts the fork insert.
3. Adjust the installing arbor to the proper length by turning the numbered sleeve on the lettered
shaft until the specified alpha-numeric setting from
the application chart is obtained. -
Turn knurled nut to lock numbered sleeve on shaft.
4. Insert the installing arbor through the hole in the arch of the tool.
- Press piston pin into the connecting rod until the sleeve on the installing arbor contacts the top of
the tool arch.
- The pin guide will fall out of the connecting rod as the piston pin is pressed inch
NOTE: Do not exceed 5000 pounds of force when stopping the installing arbor sleeve against the
arch.
5. Install piston rings, apply engine oil around piston and piston rings.
7. Hold piston rings firmly in a piston ring compressor as you insert them into cylinder. 8. Make sure
that the front mark of piston and the front mark (identification mark) of connecting rod are directed
toward front of engine.
9. When connecting rod cap is installed, make sure that cylinder numbers put on rod and cap at
disassembly match.
10. When new connecting rod is installed, make sure that notches for holding bearing in place are
on same side. 11. Tighten the connecting rod cap nuts to 35-38 Nm (350-380 kg. cm., 25-28 ft.
lbs.).
12. Check connecting rod side clearance.
Connecting rod side clearance:

Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Piston Ring, Engine >
Piston Ring: Specifications
DIMENSIONS
Piston Ring Side Clearance:
Standard Value:
No.1
.......................................................................................................................................................
0.04-0.085 mm (0.0016-0.0031 inch) No.2
.......................................................................................................................................................
0.04-0.085 mm (0.0016-0.0031 inch)
Limit:
No.1 .....................................................................................................................................................
............................ 0.1 mm (0.004 inch) No.2 .......................................................................................
.......................................................................................... 0.1 mm (0.004 inch)
Piston Ring End Gap:
Standard Value:
Ring Number 1
...................................................................................................................................... 0.15-0.30 mm
(0.0059-0.0118 inch). Ring Number 2
....................................................................................................................................... 0.25-0.40
mm (0.0080-0.0140 inch). Oil Ring Side Rail:
................................................................................................................................. 0.20-0.70 mm
(0.0078-0.0275 inch).
Limit:
Ring Number 1
...........................................................................................................................................................
1.00 mm (0.0390 inch). Ring Number 2
...........................................................................................................................................................
1.00 mm (0.0390 inch). Oil Ring Side Rail:
...................................................................................................................................................... 1.00
mm (0.0390 inch).
Piston Ring: Testing and Inspection
1. Measure the piston ring side clearance.
- If the measured value exceeds the service limit, insert a new ring in a ring groove to measure the
side clearance.
- If the clearance still exceeds the service limit, replace the piston and rings together.
- If it is less than the service limit, replace only the piston rings.
- Piston ring side clearance:
Standard value:
No.1 0.04-0.085 mm (0.0016-0.0031 inch). No.2 0.04-0.085 mm (0.0016-0.0031 inch).
Limit:
No.1 0.1 mm (0.004 inch). No.2 0.1 mm (0.004 inch).
2. To measure the piston ring end gap, insert a piston ring into the cylinder bore.
- Position the ring at right angles to the cylinder wall by gently pressing it down with a piston.
- Measure the gap with a feeler gauge.
Standard Value:
Ring Number 1: 0.15-0.30 mm (0.0059-0.0118 inch). Ring Number 2: 0.25-0.40 mm

(0.0080-0.0140 inch). Oil Ring Side Rail: 0.20-0.70 mm (0.0078-0.0275 inch).
Limit:
Ring Number 1: 1.00 mm (0.0390 inch). Ring Number 2: 1.00 mm (0.0390 inch). Oil Ring Side Rail:
1.00 mm (0.0390 inch).
- If the gap exceeds the service limit, replace the piston ring.
- When replacing the ring without correcting the cylinder bore, check the gap with the ring
positioned at the bottom of the ring travel.
- When replacing a ring, use a ring of the same size.
- Piston ring service size and mark:
STD: None. 0.25 mm (0.010 inch) O.S: 25. 0.50 mm (0.020 inch) O.S: 50. 0.75 mm (0.030 inch)
O.S: 75. 1.00 mm (0.039 inch) O.S: 100.
NOTE: The mark can be found on the upper side of the ring next to the end.
Piston Ring: Service and Repair
1. Install the oil control ring spacer.
2. Install oil control ring upper side rail.
- To install side rail, first put one end of side rail between piston ring groove and spacer, hold it
down firmly, then press down the portion to be insert with your finger into groove as illustrated.
NOTE: Do not use piston ring expander when installing side rail.
3. Install oil control ring lower side rail by same procedure as above.
4. Using a suitable piston ring expander, install No.2 piston ring. 5. Using a suitable piston ring
expander, install No.1 piston ring.
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Clearance >
System Information > Specifications

Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Clearance >
System Information > Specifications > Page 2276
adjustments.
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Fuel Pressure Release
> System Information > Service Precautions
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Fuel Pressure Release
> System Information > Service Precautions > Page 2280
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Cylinder Head Bolts >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine - Cylinder Head Torquing Sequence Revision
Cylinder Head Bolts: Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Cylinder Head Torquing Sequence
Revision
Number 97-20-002
Date 01-1997
Model Accent 1995-1997, Elantra 1996-1997, Sonata 1996-1997 and Tiburon 1997
Subject CYLINDER HEAD TORQUING SEQUENCE (SHOP MANUAL CORRECTION)
DESCRIPTION:
The cylinder head torque sequence for in-line 4 cylinder engines noted in the listed Shop Manuals
is incorrect. The correct torque sequence is shown in the diagram.
Please make the corrections and write the TSB number at the bottom of the page in the
appropriate Shop Manual for future reference.
PLEASE CHANGE THE FOLLOWING SHOP MANUAL PAGES:
^ 1995 Accent Shop Manual: pages 20-39, 20-40
^ 1996 Accent Shop Manual: pages EM-90, EM-91, EMa-88
^ 1997 Accent Shop Manual: pages EM-90, EM-91, EMa-90, EMa-92

^ 1996 Elantra Shop Manual: pages EM-92, EM-93
^ 1997 Elantra Shop Manual: pages EM-87, EM-88
^ 1996 Sonata Shop Manual: pages EM-93, EM-98
^ 1997 Sonata Shop Manual: page EM-93
^ 1997 Tiburon Shop Manual: pages EM-87, EM-88

Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Rocker Arm Assembly >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 98-20-002 > Feb > 98 > Valve Lash Adjuster -
Ticking/Collapsed
Rocker Arm Assembly: Customer Interest Valve Lash Adjuster - Ticking/Collapsed
Number
98-20-002
Date
February, 1998
Model
1995-98 ACCENT SOHC
CLEANING PROCEDURE:
prevent injury.
rockershaft).
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 98-20-002 > Feb > 98 > Valve Lash Adjuster -
Ticking/Collapsed > Page 2293
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rocker Arm Assembly: >
98-20-002 > Feb > 98 > Valve Lash Adjuster - Ticking/Collapsed
Rocker Arm Assembly: All Technical Service Bulletins Valve Lash Adjuster - Ticking/Collapsed
Number
98-20-002
Date
February, 1998
Model
1995-98 ACCENT SOHC
CLEANING PROCEDURE:
prevent injury.
rockershaft).
98-20-002 > Feb > 98 > Valve Lash Adjuster - Ticking/Collapsed > Page 2299
97-20-003 > Jan > 97 > Engine - Rocker Shaft Torquing Sequence Revision
Revision
Number 97-20-003
Date 01-1997

ADDITION)
DESCRIPTION:
ANALYSIS:
NOTE
NOTE
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Rocker Arm Assembly: > 97-20-003 >
Jan > 97 > Engine - Rocker Shaft Torquing Sequence Revision
Revision
Number 97-20-003
Date 01-1997

ADDITION)
DESCRIPTION:
ANALYSIS:
NOTE
NOTE
Rocker Arm Assembly: Specifications
Rocker Arm Shaft Bolt

............................................................................................................................. 20-27 Nm (200-270
kg. cm., 14-20 ft. lbs.)
Rocker Arm Assembly: Testing and Inspection
ROCKER ARM
1. Check the rotation of roller, replace if rough or worn. 2. Check the rocker face, replace if
damaged or pressed.
ROCKER ARM SHAFT
1. Check the rocker arm shafts for damage, replace as necessary. 2. Check the oil hole whether
clogged or not.
Rocker Arm Assembly: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Remove the breather hose and PCV valve. 2. Remove the timing belt cover. 3. Remove the
rocker cover.
DISASSEMBLY
1. Remove the bolts, the rocker arms and arm shaft springs from the rocker arm shaft.
2. Remove the Hydraulic Lash Adjuster (HLA) from the rocker arm.
ASSEMBLY
1. Install the HLA to the rocker arm. 2. Install the rocker arms and rocker arm shaft springs to the
rocker arm shafts,
INSTALLATION
1. Install the rocker arm shaft to the cylinder head, then tighten the rocker arm shaft mounting bolts
to 20-27 Nm (200-270 kg. cm., 14-20 ft. lbs.). 2. When installing the rocker arms, shafts, and
springs, note the difference between the A and B type rocker arms, and exhaust side needs only A
type
rocker arms.
NOTE:
shown in figure.
amounts.
- Use sealant Three bond No.1212D aluminum color or equivalent.
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Cover >
Valve Cover: Specifications
Valve Cover
............................................................................................................................................... 8-10 Nm
(80-100 kg. cm., 5.9-7.4 ft. lbs.)
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Cover >
Valve Cover: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Remove the breather hose and the PCV valve. 2. Remove the air cleaner. 3. Remove the timing
belt cover. 4. Remove the rocker cover.
INSTALLATION
NOTE:
shown in figure.
amounts.
- Use sealant Three Bond No.1212D aluminum color or equivalent.
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Guide >
Valve Guide: Specifications
DIMENSIONS
Valve Stem-To-Guide Clearance:
Standard value:
Intake
.............................................................................................................................................................
0.03-0.06 mm (0.0012-0.0024 inch) Exhaust
......................................................................................................................................................
0.035-0.065 mm (0.0014-0.0026 inch)
Limit:
Intake ...................................................................................................................................................
................................ 0.10 mm (0.004 inch) Exhaust ............................................................................
.................................................................................................... 0.15 mm (0.006 inch)
Valve Guide Oversizes:
1st O.S. 0.05 mm (0.0020 inch) mark 5

................................................................................................................. 11.05-11.058
(0.435-0.4354 inch) 2nd O.S. 0.25 mm (0.0100 inch) mark 25
.............................................................................................................. 11.25-11.258 (0.429-0.4432
inch) 3rd O.S. 0.50 mm (0.0200 inch) mark 50
............................................................................................................. 11.50-11.508 (0.4528-0.4531
inch)
Valve Guides Length:
Intake ...................................................................................................................................................
.................................. 42.70 mm (1.6800 inch) Exhaust
..............................................................................................................................................................
39.10 mm (1.5400 inch) for exhaust)
Valve Guide: Testing and Inspection
Using suitable micrometer tools, check the valve stem-to-guide clearance. If the clearance exceeds
the service limit, replace the valve guide with the next oversize part.
Valve stem-to-guide clearance:
Standard value:
Intake: 0.03-0.06 mm (0.0012-0.0024 inch) Exhaust: 0.035-0.065 mm (0.0014-0.0026 inch)
Limit:
Intake: 0.10 mm (0.004 inch) Exhaust: 0.15 mm (0.006 inch)

Valve Guide: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
NOTE: The valve guide is installed using a press fit.
. Using the valve guide installer push rod tool No. 09221-22000, push the valve guide out toward
the cylinder block with a press.
INSTALLATION
1. Machine the valve guide insert hole in the cylinder head to the specified oversize of the new
valve guide.
2. Using the valve guide installer, press fit the valve guide.
- Using the valve guide installer makes it possible to press fit the valve guide to a predetermined
height.
- Install the valve guide from the top of the cylinder head.
NOTE: Intake and exhaust valve guides differ in length:
Intake: 42.70 mm (1.6800 inch). Exhaust: 39.10 mm (1.5400 inch) for exhaust).
3. After installing the valve guides, insert new valves and check the clearance. 4. Whenever valve
guides are replaced, check for valve-to-seat contact, and recondition the valve seats as necessary.
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Seat >
Valve Seat: Specifications
DIMENSIONS
Seat Replacement:
Intake Valve:
1st O.S. (marked 30)

.................................................................................................................................................... 0.30
mm (0.0120 inch)
Insert height ...................................................................................................................................

5.100-5.300 mm (0.2010-0.2090 inch) Insert diameter
........................................................................................................................... 28.800-28.821 mm
(1.1340-1.1350 inch)
2nd O.S. (marked 60)

.................................................................................................................................................. 0.60
mm (0.0240 inch)
Insert height ...................................................................................................................................

........................................................................................................................... 29.100-29.121 mm
(1.1460-1.1470 inch)
Exhaust Valve:
1st O.S. (marked 30)

.................................................................................................................................................... 0.30
mm (0.0120 inch)
Insert height ...................................................................................................................................

........................................................................................................................... 34.300-34.325 mm
(1.3500-1.3510 inch)
2nd O.S. (marked 60)

.................................................................................................................................................. 0.60
mm (0.0240 inch)
Insert height ...................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................. 34.60-34.625 mm
(1.3620-1.3630 inch)
Seat Angles:
Upper Narrowing Angle .......................................................................................................................

.................................................................. 29° Lower Narrowing Angle ..............................................
........................................................................................................................................ 73.5° Seat
Angle ...................................................................................................................................................
........................................................... 45°
Seat Width:
Intake ...................................................................................................................................................
................ 0.80-1.20 mm (0.0310-0.0470 inch) Exhaust .....................................................................
........................................................................................... 1.50-1.90 mm (0.0590-0.0750 inch)
Valve Seat: Testing and Inspection
- Check the valve seat for evidence of overheating and improper contact with the valve face.
- Recondition or replace the seat, if necessary.
- Before reconditioning the seat, check the valve guide for wear.
- If the valve guide is worn, replace it, then recondition the seat.
Component Information > Service and Repair > Replacement
Valve Seat: Service and Repair Replacement

REMOVAL
1. Any valve seat insert that has been worn over the service limit should be removed at normal
temperature after cutting away most of the insert wall,
using valve seat cutters, as shown in illustration.
2. After removing the seat insert, machine the seat insert bore using a reamer or a cutter. 3. Cut to
the size shown below.
INTAKE VALVE:
1st O.S. (marked 30): 0.30 mm (0.0120 inch)
Insert height: 5.100-5.300 mm (0.2010-0.2090 inch) Insert diameter: 28.800-28.821 mm

(1.1340-1.1350 inch)
2nd O.S. (marked 60): 0.60 mm (0.0240 inch)

(1.1460-1.1470 inch)
EXHAUST VALVE:
1st O.S. (marked 30): 0.30 mm (0.0120 inch)

(1.3500-1.3510 inch)
2nd O.S. (marked 60): 0.60 mm (0.0240 inch)

(1.3620-1.3630 inch)
Component Information > Service and Repair > Replacement > Page 2331
INSTALLATION
Heat the cylinder head to about 250°C (480°F) and press in the oversize seat insert. -
The oversize seat insert should be at normal room temperature for installation.
- After installing a new valve seat insert, resurface the valve seat.
Component Information > Service and Repair > Replacement > Page 2332
Valve Seat: Service and Repair Refinish
NOTE:
- Before reconditioning the seat, check the valve guide for wear.
- If the valve guide is worn, replace it, then recondition the seat.
1. Recondition the valve seat with a valve seat grinder or cutter. 2. The valve seat contact width
should be within specifications shown in the illustration and centered on the valve face.
Contact width:
Intake: 0.80-1.20 mm (0.0310-0.0470 inch). Exhaust: 1.50-1.90 mm (0.0590-0.0750 inch).

Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Spring >
Valve Spring: Specifications
DIMENSIONS
Free Height ..........................................................................................................................................

.................................. 42.03 mm (1.6550 inch) Height/Load:
At 34.5 mm ..........................................................................................................................................
............................................. 23.5-25.9 kg. At 25.9 mm ......................................................................
................................................................................................................. 51.9-58.3 kg.
Out Of Square .....................................................................................................................................

........................................................ 1.5° or less Installed Height ........................................................
....................................................................................................................... 34.5 mm (1.3580)
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Spring >
Valve Spring: Testing and Inspection
1. Check the valve spring free length and tension.
- If they exceed the service limit, replace the spring.
2. Using a square, test the squareness of each spring.
- If a spring is excessively out of square, replace it.
Standard Values:
Free height: 42.03 mm (1.6550 inch) Load: 23.5-25.9 kg. at 34.5 mm
51.9-58.3 kg. at 25.9 mm
Out of square: 1.5° or less Installed Height: 34.5 mm (1.3580 inch)

Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve, Intake/Exhaust >
Valve: Specifications
Valve Margin:
Standard value:
Intake ...................................................................................................................................................
...................... 1.100 mm (0.0430 inch) Exhaust ..................................................................................
................................................................................... 1.400 mm ( 0.0550 inch)
Limit:
Intake ...................................................................................................................................................
...................... 0.800 mm (0.0310 inch) Exhaust ..................................................................................
.................................................................................... 1.100 mm (0.0430 inch)
Face Angle ..........................................................................................................................................

........................................................... 45-45.3° Valve Stem-To-Guide Clearance:
Standard value:
Intake ...................................................................................................................................................
0.030-0.060 mm (0.0012-0.0024 inch) Exhaust
................................................................................................................................................
0.035-0.065 mm (0.0014-0.0026 inch)
Limit:
Intake ...................................................................................................................................................
...................... 0.100 mm (0.0040 inch) Exhaust ..................................................................................
.................................................................................... 0.150 mm (0.0060 inch)
Valve: Testing and Inspection
1. Check each valve for wear, damage and distortion of head and stem at B in illustration. Repair or
correct, if necessary.
Valve stem oil clearance standard value:
Intake: 0.030-0.060 mm (0.0012-0.0024 inch). Exhaust: 0.035-0.065 mm (0.0014-0.0026 inch).
Limit:
2. If stem end, A in illustration, is pitted or worn, resurface as necessary.
- This correction must be limited to a minimum.
- Also resurface the valve face.
3. Replace the valve if the margin has decreased to less than the service limit.
Standard value:
Intake: 1.10 mm (0.0430 inch). Exhaust: 1.40 mm ( 0.0550 inch).
Limit:

Valve: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Using valve spring remover and installer tool No. 09222-28100 with 09222-28000, or equivalent,
compress the spring 2. Remove the retainer locks, then releasing the tool, remove spring retainer,
spring and valve. 3. Using suitable pliers, remove the valve seal, then the spring seat.
INSTALLATION
NOTE:
- Clean each part before assembly.
- Apply engine oil to sliding and rotating parts.
1. Ensure spring seat and valve guide seals are correctly installed. 2. Apply engine oil to each
valve, then insert the valves into the valve guides.
- Avoid using force when inserting the valve into the seal.
- After insertion, check to see if the valve moves smoothly.

3. Install springs with the enamel coated side toward the valve spring retainer, then the spring
retainers. 4. Using the valve spring remover and installer, compress the spring, using caution so
that the valve stem seal is not distorted by the bottom of the
retainer, then install the retainer locks.
NOTE: After installation of the valves, make certain that the retainer locks are properly installed.
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories >
Drive Belt > Component Information > Specifications > A/C Belt Deflection
Drive Belt: Specifications A/C Belt Deflection
Standard value:
New Belt: .............................................................................................................................................

................................................... 60-70 kgf Used Belt: ........................................................................
....................................................................................................................... 32-40 kgf Inspection ....
..............................................................................................................................................................
............................. 25-50 kgf
Drive Belt > Component Information > Specifications > A/C Belt Deflection > Page 2349
Drive Belt: Specifications Power Steering
Standard value:
New Belt ..............................................................................................................................................

....................................... 55-70 kgf Used Belt .....................................................................................
............................................................................................... 38-48 kgf
Drive Belt > Component Information > Specifications > A/C Belt Deflection > Page 2350
Drive Belt: Specifications Alternator
Tension Gauge Method:
New Belt ..............................................................................................................................................

................................................... 65-75 kgf Used Belt .........................................................................
............................................................................................................................ 40 kgf Inspection ....
..............................................................................................................................................................
............................. 35-50 kgf
Drive Belt > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2351
Drive Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Condition
Drive Belt: Testing and Inspection Condition
1. Check the belt surface for damage, peeling or cracks. 2. Check the belt surface for oil or grease.
3. Check the belt for worn or hardened areas. 4. Check the surface of the pulley for cracks or
damage. 5. Check that the belts are not damaged and fit properly into the pulley grooves.
CAUTION: -
When installing the V-ribbed belt, check that the V-ribs are properly aligned.
- If noise or slippage is detected, check the belt for wear, damage, or breakage on the pulley
contact surface, and check the pulley for scoring.
- Check for the proper belt deflection measurement.

Drive Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Condition > Page 2354
Drive Belt: Testing and Inspection Tension
TENSION INSPECTION
belt.
NOTE: -
Drive Belt > Component Information > Adjustments > Alternator
Drive Belt: Adjustments Alternator
ADJUSTMENT
1. Loosen the generator support nut. 2. Looses the generator lock bolt. 3. Adjust the belt tension. 4.
Tighten bolts as follows:
Nm (150-220 kg. cm., 11-16 ft. lbs.).
TENSION INSPECTION
belt.
NOTE: -
Drive Belt > Component Information > Adjustments > Alternator > Page 2357
Drive Belt: Adjustments Power Steering
TENSION INSPECTION
belt.
NOTE: -
Drive Belt > Component Information > Adjustments > Alternator > Page 2358
Drive Belt: Adjustments A/C
TENSION INSPECTION
belt.
NOTE: -
Drive Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Steering
Drive Belt: Service and Repair Power Steering
Drive Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Steering > Page 2361
Drive Belt: Service and Repair A/C
Drive Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Steering > Page 2362
Drive Belt: Service and Repair Alternator
REMOVAL
1. Remove A/C and power steering belts as equipped. 2. Loosen the coolant pump pulley bolts.
3. Loosen the generator support nut. 4. Looses the generator lock bolt, and remove the belt. 5.
Remove the coolant pump pulley bolts.
INSTALLATION
1. Install the coolant pump pulley to the coolant pump pulley bracket and tighten the bolts firmly. 2.
After installing the belt, adjust the belt tension.
Tightening torque:
Nm (150-220 kg. cm., 11-16 ft. lbs.). Generator brace mounting bolt: 20-28 Nm (200-280 kg. cm.,
14-20 ft. lbs.). Coolant pulley bolts: 8-10 Nm (80-100 kg. cm., 6-7 ft. lbs.).
3. Install A/C and power steering belts as equipped.

Engine Accessory Bracket > Component Information > Locations
Engine Mount > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 02-40-010 > Mar > 02 > A/T -
Harsh/Delayed Gear Engagement
Engine Mount: Customer Interest A/T - Harsh/Delayed Gear Engagement
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 02-40-010
Date: 03-2002

ENGAGEMENT
DESCRIPTION:
shown below:
REPAIR PROCEDURE:
shop manual.

^ Select F1 "GRPH".
NOTE
Harsh/Delayed Gear Engagement > Page 2374
NOTE


Engine Mount > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Mount: >
Engine Mount: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Harsh/Delayed Gear Engagement
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 02-40-010
Date: 03-2002

ENGAGEMENT
DESCRIPTION:
shown below:
REPAIR PROCEDURE:
shop manual.

^ Select F1 "GRPH".
NOTE
NOTE


97-20-001 > Jan > 97 > Engine - Engine Mount Bracket Torque Revision
Engine Mount: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Engine Mount Bracket Torque Revision
Number 97-20-001
Date 01-1997
Model Accent 1995-1997
Subject ENGINE MOUNT BRACKET TORQUE SPECIFICATION (SHOP MANUAL

CORRECTION)
DESCRIPTION:
The torque specification for the engine mount bracket in the 1995-97 Accent Shop Manuals is
incorrect. The correct torque specification is 90-107 Nm 900-1070 kg.cm (66-79 lb.ft)
Please make the correction as indicated, and write the TSB number at the bottom of the
appropriate pages in the 1995-97 Accent Shop Manuals for future reference.
^ 1995 Accent Shop Manual: page 20-19
^ 1996 Accent Shop Manual: page EM-21

Engine Mount > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Engine Mount: >
97-20-001 > Jan > 97 > Engine - Engine Mount Bracket Torque Revision
Engine Mount: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Engine Mount Bracket Torque Revision
Number 97-20-001
Date 01-1997
Subject ENGINE MOUNT BRACKET TORQUE SPECIFICATION (SHOP MANUAL

CORRECTION)
DESCRIPTION:
The torque specification for the engine mount bracket in the 1995-97 Accent Shop Manuals is
incorrect. The correct torque specification is 90-107 Nm 900-1070 kg.cm (66-79 lb.ft)
Please make the correction as indicated, and write the TSB number at the bottom of the
appropriate pages in the 1995-97 Accent Shop Manuals for future reference.
^ 1995 Accent Shop Manual: page 20-19

Engine Mount > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2392
Engine Mount: Testing and Inspection
Refer to the illustration during inspection procedures.

Engine Mount > Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine Mount
Engine Mount: Service and Repair Engine Mount

REMOVAL
Engine Mount > Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine Mount > Page 2397
1. Attach an engine hoist to the engine hooks, and raise the engine just enough so that there is no
pressure on the insulators.
2. Remove the engine mount insulator bolts. 3. Remove the engine mount bracket from the engine.
INSTALLATION

Engine Mount: Service and Repair Rear Roll Stopper

REMOVAL
2. Remove the rear roll stopper from the center member.
INSTALLATION

Engine Mount: Service and Repair Front Roll Stopper

REMOVAL
2. Remove the front roll stopper bracket from the center member.
INSTALLATION

Engine Mount: Service and Repair Transaxle Mount

REMOVAL
2. For vehicles with a 5-speed manual transaxle, remove the select control valve. 3. Remove the
transaxle mount bolt. 4. Detach the cap from inside the right fender shield.Remove the transaxle
mounting bolts. 5. Remove the transaxle mounting bracket.
INSTALLATION

Engine Mount: Service and Repair Center Member

REMOVAL
pressure on the insulators. 2. Remove the under cover (R.H.). 3. Remove the front roll stopper
mounting bolts. 4. Remove the rear roll stopper mounting bolts. 5. Remove the center member
from the body.
INSTALLATION

Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil Pressure >
Engine Oil Pressure: Specifications Engine Oil Pressure
Engine Oil Pressure
Engine Oil Pressure At Idle Speed 147 KPa (1.5 kg/cm2, 21.33 psi)
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil Drain Plug >
Engine Oil Drain Plug: Specifications
Oil Pan Drain Plug

.................................................................................................................................... 35-45 Nm
(350-450 kg. cm, 25-33 ft. lbs.)
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil > Component
Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications
Engine Oil: Capacity Specifications
Total .....................................................................................................................................................
............................................................... 3.47 U.S. qt Refill without filter ............................................
....................................................................................................................................... 3.0 liters
(3.17 qts)
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil > Component
Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 2417
Engine Oil: Fluid Type Specifications
Engine Oil
Grade ...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................. SG or SG/CD Above 0° C (32° F) .........................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
20W-40 Above -23° C (-10° F) ............................................................................................................
..................................................... 10W-30, 10W-40, 10W-50 Below 38° C (100° F) ..........................
..........................................................................................................................................................
5W-40, 5W-30
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Filter, Engine >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine - Knocking Noise When Using Non-OE Oil Filter
Oil Filter: Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Knocking Noise When Using Non-OE Oil Filter
Number: 05-20-002
Date: JULY, 2005
Model: ALL MODELS
Subject: USE OF AFTERMARKET ENGINE OIL FILTERS CAUSING ENGINE KNOCKING NOISE
DESCRIPTION:
Some vehicles may experience an engine knock noise with the use of an aftermarket oil filter.
Aftermarket oil filters may use different materials, construction and specifications than genuine
Hyundai oil filters, which may lead to pressure variations within the engine, thus contributing to an
engine knocking noise.
VEHICLES AFFECTED:
All Models
REPAIR PROCEDURE:
Perform an oil change on the vehicle and replace the aftermarket oil filter with a genuine Hyundai
oil filter.
Normal warranty procedures apply.
This is not a warranty repair.

Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine - Knocking Noise When Using Non-OE Oil Filter > Page
2422
Oil Filter: Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Oil Filter Information/Applications
Number 04-20-001
Date 01-2004
Model ACCENT 1995-2004, ELANTRA 1992-2004 EXCEL 1986-1994 SANTA FE 2001-2004,

SCOUPE 1991-1995 SONATA 1989-2004 TIBURON 1997-2004 XG, 300 2001 AND XG 350
2002-2004
Subject ENGINE OIL FILTER INFORMATION
DESCRIPTION:
The engine oil filter has been superseded from part number 26300-35500 to part number
26300-35501. This oil filter is currently used on all Hyundai models.
The change is cosmetic, to include the words Kia Motors, the Kia logo and the new part number.
Form, fit and function have not been affected.
To insure proper filtration of the lubrication system, only Hyundai Genuine Parts should be installed
by a Hyundai approved facility. Damage resulting from parts other than Hyundai Genuine Parts
may not be covered under warranty.
Oil Filter: Specifications
Oil Filter
......................................................................................................................................................
12-16 Nm (120-160 kg. cm, 9-12 ft. lbs.)
Oil Filter: Service and Repair
NOTE: All Hyundai engines are equipped with a high quality, throw-away oil filter. This filter is
recommended as a replacement filter on all vehicles. The quality of replacement filters varies
considerably. Only high quality filters should be used to assure the most efficient service. Make
sure that the rubber gasket from the old oil filter is completely removed from the mating surface on
the engine block, before installing the new filter.
WARNING: Be careful not to burn yourself, as the engine and engine oil are hot.
PROCEDURE
1. Use a filter wrench to remove the oil filter. 2. Before installing the new oil filter on the engine,
apply clean engine oil to the surface of the rubber gasket. 3. Tighten enough the oil filter by hand.
4. Run the engine to check for engine oil leaks. 5. After stopping the engine, check the oil level and
add oil as necessary.
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pan, Engine > Component
Oil Pan: Specifications
Oil Pan Bolts

........................................................................................................................................................
6-8 Nm (60-80 kg. cm., 4-6 ft. lbs.)
Oil Pan: Service and Repair

REMOVAL
1. Remove all the oil pan bolts. 2. Remove the oil pan.
INSTALLATION
1. Clean both gasket surfaces of the oil pan and the cylinder block. 2. Apply sealant into the groove
of the oil pan flange as shown.
NOTE: -
Apply sealant approx 0.4 mm (0.16 inch) in thickness.
- After application of sealant, do not exceed 15 minutes before installing the oil pan.
3. Install the oil pan and tighten the bolts to 6-8 Nm (60-80 kg. cm., 4-6 ft. lbs.).
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pressure Sender >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Operation Check
(80-120 kg. cm, 5.8-8.7 ft. lbs.).

Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Operation Check > Page 2434
Replace the switch.
REMOVAL
INSTALLATION
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pump, Engine > Engine Oil
Pressure > Component Information > Specifications
Engine Oil Pressure: Specifications Engine Oil Pressure
Engine Oil Pressure
Engine Oil Pressure At Idle Speed 147 KPa (1.5 kg/cm2, 21.33 psi)
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Intake Manifold > Component Information >
Specifications
Intake Manifold: Specifications
Manifold To Cylinder Head

....................................................................................................................... 10-15 Nm (100-150 kg.
cm., 7-11 ft. lbs.) Throttle Body
........................................................................................................................................... 15-20 Nm
(150-200 kg. cm., 11-15 ft. lbs.) Surge Tank To Manifold
............................................................................................................................ 10-15 Nm (100-150
kg. cm., 7-11 ft. lbs.) Stay To Surge Tank
.................................................................................................................................... 10-15 Nm
(100-150 kg. cm., 7-11 ft. lbs.)
Intake Manifold: Testing and Inspection
SURGE TANK
Check the surge tank for defects or cracks. -
Replace if necessary.
INTAKE MANIFOLD
Check for damage or cracking of any part.
AIR HOSE
Check for damage or cracking or any part.

Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Intake Manifold > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Surge Tank
Intake Manifold: Service and Repair Surge Tank
REMOVAL
1. Remove the idle speed actuator.

and Repair > Surge Tank > Page 2447
2. Remove the Intake air hose connected to the throttle body. 3. Remove the accelerator cable. 4.
Remove the P.C.V.hose and brake booster vacuum hoses. 5. Disconnect the vacuum hose
connections.
6. Disconnect the high pressure fuel hose connection after relieving pressure in the fuel pipe line to
prevent fuel overflow. 7. Remove the surge tank stay. 8. Remove the surge tank assembly and
gasket.
INSTALLATION
Installation is the reverse of removal, noting the following information. -
Tighten nuts and bolts as follows:
Throttle Body to surge tank 15-20 Nm (150-200 kg. cm., 11-15 ft. lbs.). Surge tank to manifold:
10-15 Nm (100-150 kg. cm., 7-11 ft. lbs.). Stay to block: 18-25 Nm (180-250 kg. cm., 13-18 ft. lbs.).
Stay to surge tank: 10-15 Nm (100-150 kg. cm., 7-11 ft. lbs.).
Intake Manifold: Service and Repair Intake Manifold
REMOVAL
1. Remove the idle speed actuator.

2. Remove the Intake air hose connected to the throttle body. 3. Remove the accelerator cable. 4.
Remove the P.C.V.hose and brake booster vacuum hoses. 5. Disconnect the vacuum hose
connections.
6. Disconnect the high pressure fuel hose connection after relieving pressure in the fuel pipe line to
prevent fuel overflow. 7. Remove the surge tank stay. 8. Remove the surge tank assembly and
gasket. 9. Disconnect the fuel injector harness connector.
10. Remove the delivery pipe with the fuel injectors and pressure regulator attached.
NOTE: Be careful not to drop the injectors when removing the delivery pipe.
11. Remove the insulator from the intake manifold and disconnect the heater hose. 12. Remove the
intake manifold.
INSTALLATION
Installation is the reverse of removal, noting the following information. -
Install the delivery pipe with the fuel injectors and pressure regulator attached.
NOTE: Be careful not to drop the injectors when removing the delivery pipe.
- Ensure that insulators are correctly inserted into the delivery pipe hole.
- Tighten nuts and bolts as follows:
Throttle Body to surge tank: 15-20 Nm (150-200 kg. cm., 11-15 ft. lbs.). Delivery pipe to manifold:
10-15 Nm (100-150 kg. cm., 7-11 ft. lbs.). Surge tank to manifold: 10-15 Nm (100-150 kg. cm., 7-11
ft. lbs.). Manifold to cylinder head: 10-15 Nm (100-150 kg. cm., 7-11 ft. lbs.).
Stay to block: 18-25 Nm (180-250 kg. cm., 13-18 ft. lbs.). Stay to surge tank: 10-15 Nm (100-150
kg. cm., 7-11 ft. lbs.).
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Crankshaft Main
Bearing Seal > Component Information > Service and Repair
Crankshaft Main Bearing Seal: Service and Repair
1. Using crankshaft rear oil seal installer tool No. 09231-21000, or equivalent, as shown. 2. Press
and fit the oil seal in all the way, being careful not to misalign it. 3. Install the rear oil seal case and
new gasket.
- Apply engine oil to the oil seal lips and crankshaft at the time of installation.
4. Tighten the five bolts.

Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Front Crankshaft Seal
> Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2458
Front Crankshaft Seal: Service and Repair
INSTALLATION
1. Install front oil seal guide tool No. 09231-22100, or equivalent, to the front end of the crankshaft.
2. Apply engine oil to the outer surface of the oil seal guide, and install the new oil seal along the
guide by hand, until it touches front case.
- Always use a new oil seal when reassembling.

3. Use crankshaft front oil seal installer tool No. 09231-22000, or equivalent, and a suitable
hammer to install the oil seal.
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Valve Guide Seal >
Component Information > Service and Repair
Valve Guide Seal: Service and Repair
1. After installing the spring seat, fit the stem seal on to the valve guide. 2. To install, fit the seal in
by lightly tapping the valve stem oil seal installer tool No. 09222-22000, or equivalent.
NOTE: -
The seal is installed in the specified position by means of the special tool.
- Incorrect installation of the seal will adversely effect the lip I.D.and eccentricity, resulting in oil
leaking down the valve guides.
- Therefore, when installing, be careful not to twist the seal.
- Do not reuse old stem seals.

Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure
Sender > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Operation Check
(80-120 kg. cm, 5.8-8.7 ft. lbs.).

Sender > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Operation Check > Page 2468
Replace the switch.
Sender > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 2469
REMOVAL
INSTALLATION
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Camshaft Gear/Sprocket >
Camshaft Gear/Sprocket: Specifications
Camshaft Sprocket Bolt: 80-100 Nm (800-1000 kg. cm., 59-74 ft. lbs.)
Camshaft Gear/Sprocket: Testing and Inspection
Check the camshaft sprocket for abnormal wear, cracks, or damage. Replace as necessary.
Component Information > Service and Repair > Installation
Camshaft Gear/Sprocket: Service and Repair Installation
1. Install the cam sprocket and bolt, then tighten to 80-100 Nm (800-1000 kg. cm., 59-74 ft. lbs.). 2.
Install the timing belt on the camshaft sprocket.
NOTE: -
NOTE: -
NOTE: -
tightened.
NOTE: -
tension as follows:
MANUAL METHOD:
Component Information > Service and Repair > Installation > Page 2477
GAUGE METHOD:
(a) Rotate the crankshaft in a counterclockwise direction to position of 90 degrees before top dead
(b) Measure the belt tension in the middle of the tension side span using the tension gauge,
NOTE:
- Put arm on bottom of belt teeth.And put spindle on the middle of belt back surface.
lbs.).
10. Install the crankshaft pulley, ensure the crankshaft sprocket pin fits the small hole in the pulley.
Component Information > Service and Repair > Installation > Page 2478
Camshaft Gear/Sprocket: Service and Repair Removal

Remove the bolt from the camshaft sprocket. 8. Remove the camshaft sprocket.
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Crankshaft Gear/Sprocket >
Crankshaft Gear/Sprocket: Specifications
Crankshaft Bolt
............................................................................................................................................................
140-150 Nm (103-111 ft. lbs.)
Crankshaft Gear/Sprocket: Testing and Inspection
Check the crankshaft sprocket for abnormal wear, cracks, or damage. Replace as necessary.
Crankshaft Gear/Sprocket: Service and Repair Removal
Remove the camshaft from the camshaft sprocket. 8. Remove the camshaft sprocket. 9. Remove
the timing belt.
10. Remove the crankshaft sprocket bolts, then the crankshaft sprocket and flange.
Crankshaft Gear/Sprocket: Service and Repair Installation
cm., 103-111 ft. lbs.).
NOTE: -
NOTE: -
NOTE: -
tightened.
NOTE: -
tension as follows:
MANUAL METHOD:
GAUGE METHOD:
NOTE: -
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Belt > Component
Timing Belt: Specifications Timing Belt
Timing Belt
Timing Belt Replacement Interval 60,000 mi (96,000 km)

Information > Testing and Inspection > Condition
Timing Belt: Testing and Inspection Condition

Information > Testing and Inspection > Condition > Page 2493
1. Check the belt for oil or dust deposits.
- Replace, if necessary.
- Small deposits should be wiped away with a dry cloth or paper.
- Do not clean with solvent.
2. When the engine is overhauled or belt tension adjusted, carefully check the belt. 3. If any of the
following flaws are evident, replace the belt.
Information > Testing and Inspection > Condition > Page 2494
Timing Belt: Testing and Inspection Less Tension Gauge
1. Loosen the tensioner mounting bolts 1 and 2 in that order as shown. This will apply spring
tension to the timing belt only. Check the belt to ensure
that it is not out of position.
2. Tighten the tensioner tightening bolts 1 and 2 in that order. If the bolt 1 is tightened first, the
tensioner will move with the belt in the direction that
the belt is tightened.
smoothly.
4. Loosen the tensioner attaching bolt 1 and 2 in that order. 5. Tighten the tensioner attaching bolts
2 and 1 in that order to 20-27 Nm (200-270 kg.cm, 14-20 ft. lbs.).
with a moderate force [approximately 49 N (11
lb)], the timing belt cog end is approx. 1/2 of the tensioner mounting bolt head radius (across flats)
away from the bolt head center.
Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 2495
Timing Belt: Adjustments
NOTE:
- The timing belt has an automatic tension adjusting mechanism.
- Adjustment can be made by the following procedure:
1. Turn the steering wheel fully counter-clockwise.
2. Apply a wood block under the engine oil pan and carefully raise the engine.
NOTE: Jack up the vehicle only slightly to prevent engine damage.
3. Remove the engine left mount bracket.

4. Remove the coolant pump pulley. 5. Remove the crankshaft pulley.
6. Remove the timing belt upper cover. 7. Check the belt for cracking, peeling or other damage.
- Be sure to carefully check the entire length of the belt.
8. Rotate the crankshaft so that the No.1 piston is at top dead center of the compression stroke.
NOTE: -
In other words, align the timing mark on the camshaft sprocket with that on the cylinder head.
- The crankshaft should be turned clockwise, not counterclockwise.
- Turning the crankshaft counterclockwise will cause the tension to become improperly adjusted.
9. Remove the timing belt lower cover.
10. Loosen the tensioner mounting bolts 1 and 2 in that order as shown to give the timing belt
spring tension.
11. Check the belt to ensure that it is not out of position. 12. Tighten the tensioner attaching bolts 2
and 1 in that order as shown.If the bolt 1 is tightened first, the tensioner will move with the bolt and
cause
the belt to become overtightened.
NOTE: Do not turn the crankshaft in a counterclockwise direction.
14. Loosen the tensioner attaching bolts 1 and 2 in that order as shown. 15. Retighten the
tensioner attaching bolts 2 and 1 in that order as shown to 20-27 Nm (200-270 kg. cm., 14-20 ft.
lbs.). 16. Recheck the belt tension as follows:
MANUAL METHOD:
GAUGE METHOD:
NOTE:
- Put arm on bottom of belt teeth, then put spindle on the middle of belt back surface.
17. Install timing belt covers. 18. install the crankshaft pulley. 19. Install the coolant pump pulley.
20. Install the left mount bracket. 21. remove jack and wood block.
Information > Service and Repair > Removal
Timing Belt: Service and Repair Removal
timing belt.
Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 2500
Timing Belt: Service and Repair Installation
1. Install the flange and crankshaft sprocket as shown.
- Pay close attention to their mounting directions.
- Tighten crankshaft pulley bolt to 140-150 Nm (1400-1500 kg. cm., 103-111 ft. lbs.).
2. Install the camshaft sprocket then tighten the bolt to 80-100 Nm (800-1000 kg. cm., 59-74 ft.
lbs.).
placed at top dead center on its compression stroke.
4. To install the timing belt tensioner, proceed as follows:
- mount the tensioner, spring, and spacer.
- Temporarily tighten the bolts.
- Temporarily tighten the tensioner long hole side washer and bolts.
- Install the bottom end of the spring against the front case as shown in the illustration.
NOTE: -
- Check to ensure that when the tension side is tightened by turning the camshaft sprocket in a
reverse direction, all timing marks are in line.
8. Loosen the tensioner mounting bolts 1 and 2 in that order as shown.This will apply spring
tension to the timing belt only.
- If the bolt 1 is tightened first, the tensioner will move with the belt in the direction that the belt is
tightened.
smoothly.
bolts 2 and 1 in that order to 20-27 Nm (200-270 kg. cm., 15-20 ft. lbs.).
with a moderate force [approx.49 N (11 lb)], the
timing belt cog end is approx.1/2 of the tensioner mounting bolt head radius (across flats) away
from the bolt head center.
14. 1nstall the timing belt cover tightening cover bolt to 10-12 Nm (100-120 kg. cm., 7-9 ft. lbs.). 15.
Install the crankshaft pulley.
NOTE: Make sure that the crankshaft sprocket pin fits the small hole in the pulley.
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Belt Tensioner >
Timing Belt Tensioner: Specifications Tensioner Bolt
Tensioner Bolt
Tensioner Attaching Bolt Torque 20 - 27 Nm (200 - 270 kg.cm., 15 - 20 ft.lbf.)

Timing Belt Tensioner: Testing and Inspection
1. Check the tensioner pulley for abnormal wear, cracks, or damage, replace as necessary. 2.
Inspect the tensioner pulley for easy and smooth pulley rotation and check for play or noise,
replace as necessary.
Timing Belt Tensioner: Service and Repair Removal
timing belt.
10. Remove the crankshaft sprocket bolts, then the crankshaft sprocket and flange. 11. Remove
the timing belt tensioner.
Timing Belt Tensioner: Service and Repair Installation
cm., 103-111 ft. lbs.).
NOTE: -
NOTE: -
NOTE: -
tightened.
NOTE: -
tension as follows:
MANUAL METHOD:
GAUGE METHOD:
NOTE: -
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel
Pressure > Diagnostic Connector - Fuel Pump > Component Information > Description and Operation
Pressure > Diagnostic Connector - Fuel Pump > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 2517
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
fuel tank cap.

Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks >
Air/Fuel Mixture > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Air/Fuel Mixture - Trim Code Diagnosis
Number: 98-36-001
Date: APRIL, 1998
DESCRIPTION
^ Oxygen sensors
^ Air flow sensor
emissions.
the A/F ratio.

Air/Fuel Mixture > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Air/Fuel Mixture - Trim Code Diagnosis > Page 2524
performance.
the code was set.
stored in the PCM.
Note:

PCM.

load value.
Fuel Trim code.
and re-test.
this TSB.

Trim code.
and re-test.
TSB.
Note:
Note:
D. Select "Engine"
E. Select "Data"
the scan tool.
Air/Fuel Mixture > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2527
system.
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Idle
Speed > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Idle Speed: > 00-36-006 > Mar > 00 >
Number 00-36-006
Date MARCH, 2000
DESCRIPTION:
^ Unstable idle
REPAIR INFORMATION:


Speed > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Idle Speed: > 00-36-006 > Mar > 00 >
TPS - Driveability Concerns > Page 2536
PARTS INFORMATION

Speed > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Idle Speed: > 98-40-001 > Jan > 98 >
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 98-40-001
Date: JANUARY, 1998
Model: ALL
DESCRIPTION:
158-194°F).
# 97-40-031.
5. Note:
as follows:
number shown.
Speed > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Idle Speed: > 98-40-001 > Jan > 98 >
A/T - Harsh 4-3 Downshift When Decelerating > Page 2541
PARTS INFORMATION:

Speed > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Idle Speed: > 00-36-006 >
Mar > 00 > TPS - Driveability Concerns
Number 00-36-006
Date MARCH, 2000
DESCRIPTION:
^ Unstable idle
REPAIR INFORMATION:


Mar > 00 > TPS - Driveability Concerns > Page 2547
PARTS INFORMATION

Jan > 98 > A/T - Harsh 4-3 Downshift When Decelerating
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 98-40-001
Date: JANUARY, 1998
Model: ALL
DESCRIPTION:
158-194°F).
# 97-40-031.
5. Note:
as follows:
number shown.
Jan > 98 > A/T - Harsh 4-3 Downshift When Decelerating > Page 2552
PARTS INFORMATION:

Speed > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Idle Speed: > Page 2553
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 98-40-001
Date: JANUARY, 1998
Model: ALL
DESCRIPTION:
158-194°F).
# 97-40-031.
5. Note:
as follows:
number shown.
PARTS INFORMATION:
Number 00-36-006
Date MARCH, 2000
DESCRIPTION:
^ Unstable idle
REPAIR INFORMATION:
PARTS INFORMATION
Number 00-36-006
Date MARCH, 2000
Subject
DESCRIPTION:
^ Unstable idle
REPAIR INFORMATION:
PARTS INFORMATION
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 98-40-001
Date: JANUARY, 1998
Model: ALL
DESCRIPTION:
158-194°F).
# 97-40-031.
5. Note:
as follows:
number shown.
PARTS INFORMATION:

Speed > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2559
Base idle speed

Speed > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2560
NOTE:

Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air
Cleaner Housing > Component Information > Specifications
Air cleaner body
Cleaner Housing > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2564

REMOVAL
INSTALLATION

Filter > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Service Precautions
Filter > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Service Precautions > Page 2571
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Firing
Order > Component Information > Specifications
Coil Pak
Ignition Timing > Number One Cylinder > Component Information > Locations

Ignition Cable > Component Information > Specifications
NO . 1 4.8 K ohms
NO. 2 10 K ohms
NO. 3 7.3 K ohms
NO. 4 12 K ohms
Ignition Cable > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2582
replace the cable.
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark
Plug > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Spark Plugs - Application/Service Interval
Number 02-36-017
Date 06-2002
Model All Models
DESCRIPTION:
Hyundai Vehicles.

Plug > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Spark Plugs - Application/Service Interval > Page 2587

Plug > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2590
Plug Gap 1.0 - 1.1 mm (0.039 - 0.043 in.)

NGK .....................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................. BKR5ES-11 Champion .........................................................
..................................................................................................................................... RC9YC4,
RC10YC4
may be damaged.

Standard value:
Unleaded : 1.0-1.1 mm (0.039-0.043 in.)

Compression Check > System Information > Specifications
Compression Check > System Information > Specifications > Page 2597
(1.52 Mpa, 220 psi).
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Valve
Clearance > System Information > Specifications

Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Valve
Clearance > System Information > Specifications > Page 2601
adjustments.
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Water Pump > Component Information >
Specifications
Water Pump: Specifications
Water Pump Bolts

...................................................................................................................................... 12-15 Nm
(120-150 kg. cm., 9-11 ft. lbs.)
Water Pump: Testing and Inspection
1. Check each part for cracks, damage or wear, and replace the coolant pump assembly if
necessary. 2. Check the bearing for damage, abnormal noise and sluggish rotation, and replace
the coolant pump assembly if necessary. 3. Check for coolant leakage. If coolant leaks from hole
"A," the seal is defective. Replace the coolant pump assembly
Water Pump: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Drain the coolant and disconnect the coolant outlet pipe connection hose from the coolant pump.
2. Remove the drive belt and engine coolant pump pulley. 3. Remove the timing belt covers and
the timing belt idler. 4. Remove the coolant pump mounting bolts, then remove the generator brace.
5. Remove the coolant pump assembly from the cylinder block.
INSTALLATION
1. Clean the gasket surfaces of the coolant pump body and the cylinder block.
2. Install a new coolant pump gasket and O-ring to the coolant pump, then using the illustration to
determine bolt location by length, install and
tighten the bolts to 12-15 Nm (120-150 kg. cm., 9-11 ft. lbs.).
3. Install the timing belt idler and timing belt.
- Adjust the timing belt tension.
- Refer to the timing system section for procedures.

4. Install the timing belt covers. 5. Install the coolant pump pulley and drive belt, and then adjust the
belt tension. 6. Refill the system with clean coolant. 7. Run the engine and check for leaks.
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant > Component Information >
Specifications > Capacity Specifications
Coolant: Capacity Specifications Coolant Capacity
Coolant Capacity
Cooling System Capacity 6.0 lit (6.3 U.S. qts., 5.3 Imp. qts.)
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant > Component Information >
Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 2614
Coolant: Fluid Type Specifications
Coolant Type High quality ethylene glycol base anti-freeze/coolant
Mitsubishi Part No. 0103044 (DIA-QUEEN LONG-LIFE COOLANT)
Coolant Conentration 40 - 50 %
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant Line/Hose > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine/Cooling/Fuel System - New Parts
Coolant Line/Hose: Technical Service Bulletins Engine/Cooling/Fuel System - New Parts
Number: 02-20-003
Date: APRIL, 2002
DESCRIPTION:
effective dates.
EFFECTIVE DATE:
side.
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine/Cooling/Fuel System - New Parts > Page 2619
NOTE:
NOTE:

Pipe Plug: P/N 21133-32000
2. Long block (P/N 21101-22X00)

Coolant Line/Hose: Testing and Inspection
1. Check the coolant pipes and hoses for cracks, damage, or restrictions. 2. Replace if necessary.
Coolant Line/Hose: Service and Repair
HOSE AND PIPE REPLACEMENT
Refer to the illustration when servicing the coolant system hoses and pipes.
COOLANT PIPE REPLACEMENT
Fit the O-ring in the groove provided at the coolant inlet pipe end, wet the O-ring with coolant and
insert the coolant inlet pipe.
NOTE: -
Do not apply oil or grease to the coolant pipe O-ring.
- Keep the coolant pipe connections free of sand, dust, etc.
- Insert the coolant pipe fully into the coolant pump.
- Do not reuse O-ring and replace it with a new part.

Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling
Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams
Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2627
Radiator Cooling Fan Motor: Testing and Inspection
1. Check that the radiator fan rotates when battery voltage is applied to the terminals (as shown in
illustration). 2. Check that abnormal noises are not produced while the motor is turning.
Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2628
Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature
Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor - Diagnosis
Number: 98-36-006
Date: AUGUST, 1998
Model: ALL
DESCRIPTION:
engine is cold.
Bulletins > Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor - Diagnosis > Page 2637
DIAGNOSTIC HINTS:
USING A VOLTMETER:
USING A SCAN TOOL:
SENSOR INSPECTION:
resistance.
INSTALLATION:

Number: 98-36-003
Date: APRIL, 1998
Model: ALL
DESCRIPTION:
Number: 98-36-001
Date: APRIL, 1998
DESCRIPTION
^ Oxygen sensors
^ Air flow sensor
emissions.
the A/F ratio.
performance.
the code was set.
stored in the PCM.
Note:

PCM.

load value.
Fuel Trim code.
and re-test.
this TSB.

Trim code.
and re-test.
TSB.
Note:
Note:
D. Select "Engine"
E. Select "Data"
the scan tool.
Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Specifications > Electrical
Specifications
8.16 to 10.74 K ohms at -10 deg C

1.059 to 1.281 K ohms at 40 deg C
0.538 to 0.650 K ohms at 60 deg C
0.298 to 0.322 K ohms at 80 deg C
0.219 to 0.243 K ohms at 90 deg C
connector No. 78
3.44 V at 20 deg C
2.72 V at 40 deg C
1.25 V at 80 deg C
Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Specifications > Electrical
8.16 to 10.74 K ohms at -10 deg C

1.059 to 1.281 K ohms at 40 deg C
0.538 to 0.650 K ohms at 60 deg C
0.298 to 0.322 K ohms at 80 deg C
0.219 to 0.243 K ohms at 90 deg C
connector No. 78
3.44 V at 20 deg C
2.72 V at 40 deg C
1.25 V at 80 deg C
Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Specifications > Page
2650
Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram


Connector View
CONNECTOR VIEW
Numbering Order
NUMBERING ORDER

Electrical Diagram
Harness Layouts
Harness Layout

B ..........................................................................................................................................................
......................................................................... Black L .......................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
Blue Br .................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................... Brown G ...............................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
...... Green Gr .......................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................ Gray Lg ...................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
....... Light Green O ..............................................................................................................................
................................................................................................... Orange P .........................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
............................... Pink R ..................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................... Red W .............................
..............................................................................................................................................................
....................................... White Y ........................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................... Yellow Li ....................
..............................................................................................................................................................
......................................... Light Blue
CAUTION
CAUTION
may result.
lamp or ohmmeter.

box and the short.
Testing For Voltage
Testing For Voltage
CAUTION
Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2666
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM

SENSOR INSPECTION
USING VOLTMETER
REMOVAL
INSTALLATION
Sensor/Switch > Temperature Sensor (Gauge) > Component Information > Diagrams
Sensor/Switch > Temperature Sensor (Gauge) > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2673
Sensor/Switch > Temperature Sensor (Gauge) > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2674
REMOVAL
INSTALLATION
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Heater Core > Component Information >
Diagrams
Heater Core: Diagrams
COMPONENTS
Diagrams > Page 2678
Heater Core: Testing and Inspection
INSPECTION
HEATER CORE
1. Using a special tool, install to the heater core one side and check that the other side is clogged.
2. Place the heater core in water, then apply 200 kPa (29 psi) pressure. 3. Holding for two minutes,
while checking for leakage from the heater core.
If there is leakage, repair or replace the heater core.

Service and Repair > Removal and Installation
Heater Core: Service and Repair Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect the negative terminal from the battery. 2. Drain coolant from the radiator.
3. Remove the coolant inlet and outlet hoses with the vacuum hose from the heater unit. 4.
Discharge refrigerant from the refrigeration system. 5. Remove the suction and liquid lines from the
evaporator.
6. Remove the steering wheel and the multifunction switch assembly. 7. Remove the front and the
rear console assembly. 8. Remove the lower crash pad (LH).
9. Remove the center facia panel and disconnect connectors and vacuum connector from the
heater control assembly.
10. Remove the heater control assembly and the audio.
11. Remove the glove box. 12. Remove 4 mounting bolts from the passenger airbag mounting
bracket (If equipped).
Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 2681
13. Remove the main crash pad assembly. 14. Disconnect cables from the heater unit and the
thermostatic switch connector from the evaporator unit. 15. Disconnect other remnant connectors
(If exist). 16. Remove the main crash pad assembly.
17. Remove 3 evaporator mounting bolts (or nuts). 18. Remove the evaporator unit. 19. Remove 3
mounting bolts from the heater unit. 20. Remove the heater unit.
INSTALLATION
1. Installation is the reverse of removal procedures. 2. After installation of the heater unit, check
that the air mix lever slides smoothly, the full stroke right to left. If not okay, readjust the air mix
cable.
Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 2682
Heater Core: Service and Repair Disassembly and Assembly
DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY

1. Disconnect the vacuum hose from the vacuum nipple. 2. Remove 2 mounting bolts from each of
the vacuum motor. 3. Remove the vacuum hose mounting bracket and bolt. 4. Remove the vacuum
motor and vacuum hose assembly.
5. Disconnect the connection at both sides of the heater core cover and remove the cover and the
vacuum nipple. 6. Pull out the heater core.
7. Remove eight (8) clips which is holding both cases around the heater unit. 8. Disassemble the
heater unit. 9. Unlatch the control door latches with a sharp-tip driver from the outside of the case
and remove control doors from the case.
10. Assembly is the reverse order of disassembly.

Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Lamps and Indicators - Cooling System >
Temperature Gauge > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Inspection
Temperature Gauge: Testing and Inspection Inspection
INSPECTION
Using an ohmmeter, measure the resistance between terminal and ground.
If the resistance is out of specification, replace the sender.

Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Lamps and Indicators - Cooling System >
Temperature Gauge > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Inspection > Page 2688
Temperature Gauge: Testing and Inspection Operation Check (In-Vehicle)
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE GAUGE
OPERATION CHECK (IN-VEHICLE)
1. Remove the harness connector from water temperature sender located in engine compartment.
2. Ground the harness side connector via 12 V, 1.4 W bulb. 3. Turn the ignition switch to ON
position. 4. Check to be sure that the test bulb flashes and that the indicator moves.
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator > Component Information >
Specifications
Radiator: Specifications
DIMENSIONS
Type .....................................................................................................................................................
....................... Pressurized corrugated fin type Performance .............................................................
............................................................................................................................... 38000 Kcal/h
Radiator: Testing and Inspection
1. Wait until radiator is cool (less than 38°C, 100°F). Loosen radiator cap. 2. Confirm that the
coolant level is up to the filler neck. 3. Install a suitable pressure tester to the radiator filler neck and
apply 139.3 kPa (19.9 psi) pressure. Maintain pressure for two minutes, while
checking for leakage from the radiator hoses or connections.
WARNING: Radiator coolant may be extremely hot. Do not open the system while it is hot, or
scalding water could spray out causing personal injury. Allow vehicle to be cooled down before
servicing this system.
CAUTION: Be sure to completely clean away any moisture from the places checked. When the
tester is removed, be careful not to spill any coolant from it. Be careful, when installing and
removing the tester and when testing, not to deform the filler neck of the radiator.
4. If there is leakage, repair or replace the appropriate part.

Radiator: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect the radiator fan motor connector. 2. Set the temperature of the heater control to the
hot position. 3. Loosen the radiator drain plug to drain coolant. 4. Disconnect the upper and lower
hose and overflow tube. 5. For vehicles with automatic transaxles, disconnect the oil cooler hoses
from the automatic transaxle.
NOTE: Plug the ends of the oil cooler hoses and the automatic transaxle fittings to prevent
transaxle fluid from spilling out and foreign material from entering.
6. Remove the radiator mounting bolts. 7. Remove the radiator together with the fan motor. 8.
Remove the fan motor from the radiator.
INSTALLATION
1. Fill the radiator and reservoir tank with clean coolant mixture. 2. Run the engine until the
thermostat opens, and then stop the engine. 3. Remove the radiator cap; and add coolant up to the
filler neck of the radiator, and then fill the reservoir tank to the upper level. 4. Check that there is no
leakage from the radiator, hoses or connections.
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cap > Component Information >
Specifications
Radiator Cap: Specifications
PRESSURE SPECIFICATIONS
Main valve opening pressure:
Standard Value .............................................................................................................................

81.4-108 kpa (0.83-1.1 kg/cm2, 11.8-15.6 psi) Limit ...........................................................................
............................................................................................. 65 kpa (0.65 kg/cm2, 9.2 psi)
Radiator Cap: Testing and Inspection

1. Use an adapter to attach the cap to the tester.
2. Increase the pressure until the gauge stops moving.
Main valve opening pressure:
Standard Value: 81.4-108 kpa (0.83-1.1 kg/cm2, 11.8-15.6 psi). Limit: 65 kpa (0.65 kg/cm2, 9.2
psi).
3. Check that the pressure level is maintained at or below the limit. 4. Replace the radiator cap if
the reading does not remain at or below the limit.
NOTE: Be sure that the cap is clean before testing, since rust or other foreign material on the cap
seal will cause an incorrect indication.
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System >
Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System >
Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component
Number: 98-36-006
Date: AUGUST, 1998
Model: ALL
DESCRIPTION:
engine is cold.
DIAGNOSTIC HINTS:
USING A VOLTMETER:
USING A SCAN TOOL:
SENSOR INSPECTION:
resistance.
INSTALLATION:

Number: 98-36-003
Date: APRIL, 1998
Model: ALL
DESCRIPTION:
Number: 98-36-001
Date: APRIL, 1998
DESCRIPTION
^ Oxygen sensors
^ Air flow sensor
emissions.
the A/F ratio.
performance.
the code was set.
stored in the PCM.
Note:

PCM.

load value.
Fuel Trim code.
and re-test.
this TSB.

Trim code.
and re-test.
TSB.
Note:
Note:
D. Select "Engine"
E. Select "Data"
the scan tool.
8.16 to 10.74 K ohms at -10 deg C

1.059 to 1.281 K ohms at 40 deg C
0.538 to 0.650 K ohms at 60 deg C
0.298 to 0.322 K ohms at 80 deg C
0.219 to 0.243 K ohms at 90 deg C
connector No. 78
3.44 V at 20 deg C
2.72 V at 40 deg C
1.25 V at 80 deg C
8.16 to 10.74 K ohms at -10 deg C

1.059 to 1.281 K ohms at 40 deg C
0.538 to 0.650 K ohms at 60 deg C
0.298 to 0.322 K ohms at 80 deg C
0.219 to 0.243 K ohms at 90 deg C
connector No. 78
3.44 V at 20 deg C
2.72 V at 40 deg C
1.25 V at 80 deg C


Connector View
CONNECTOR VIEW
Numbering Order
NUMBERING ORDER

Electrical Diagram
Harness Layouts
Harness Layout

B ..........................................................................................................................................................
......................................................................... Black L .......................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
Blue Br .................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................... Brown G ...............................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
...... Green Gr .......................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................ Gray Lg ...................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
....... Light Green O ..............................................................................................................................
................................................................................................... Orange P .........................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
............................... Pink R ..................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................... Red W .............................
..............................................................................................................................................................
....................................... White Y ........................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................... Yellow Li ....................
..............................................................................................................................................................
......................................... Light Blue
CAUTION
CAUTION
may result.
lamp or ohmmeter.

box and the short.
Testing For Voltage
Testing For Voltage
CAUTION
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM

SENSOR INSPECTION
USING VOLTMETER

REMOVAL
INSTALLATION
Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Temperature Sensor (Gauge) > Component Information > Diagrams
Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Temperature Sensor (Gauge) > Component Information > Diagrams > Page
2746
Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Temperature Sensor (Gauge) > Component Information > Diagrams > Page
2747
REMOVAL
INSTALLATION
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Temperature Gauge > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Inspection
Temperature Gauge: Testing and Inspection Inspection
INSPECTION
Using an ohmmeter, measure the resistance between terminal and ground.
If the resistance is out of specification, replace the sender.

Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Temperature Gauge > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Inspection > Page 2752
Temperature Gauge: Testing and Inspection Operation Check (In-Vehicle)
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE GAUGE
OPERATION CHECK (IN-VEHICLE)
1. Remove the harness connector from water temperature sender located in engine compartment.
2. Ground the harness side connector via 12 V, 1.4 W bulb. 3. Turn the ignition switch to ON
position. 4. Check to be sure that the test bulb flashes and that the indicator moves.
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Thermostat, Engine Cooling > Component
Information > Specifications > Thermostat Opening Temperature Range
Thermostat: Specifications Thermostat
Thermostat
Valve Opening Temperature 82 deg. C (177 deg. F)
Full Opening Temperature 95 deg. C (205 deg. F)
Valve Lift (at full open) 8.5 mm, (0.33 in.) or more
Information > Specifications > Thermostat Opening Temperature Range > Page 2757
Thermostat: Specifications Fastener Tightening Specifications
DIMENSIONS
Valve Lift (At Full Open)

.............................................................................................................................................. 8.5 mm
(0.33 inch) Or More.
Coolant Outlet Bolt

.................................................................................................................................. 15-20 Nm
(150-200 kg. cm., 11-14 ft. lbs.)
Thermostat: Testing and Inspection
Immerse thermostat in hot coolant to check proper valve opening temperature Replace if
necessary.
Valve opening temperature 82°C (177°F). Full opening temperature 95°C (205°F). Valve lift (at full
open) 8.5 mm (0.33 inch) or more.
Thermostat: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Drain the coolant down to thermostat level or below. 2. Remove the coolant outlet fitting and
gasket. 3. Remove the thermostat.
INSTALLATION
1. Check that the flange of the thermostat is correctly seated in the socket of the thermostat
housing.
NOTE: If the thermostat is installed in the wrong direction, the bottom of the thermostat will touch
the rib inside the intake manifold, making it impossible for the thermostat to operate properly.
2. Install a new gasket and the coolant outlet fitting. 3. Refill the system with clean coolant.
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Water Pump > Component Information >
Specifications
Water Pump: Specifications
Water Pump Bolts

...................................................................................................................................... 12-15 Nm
(120-150 kg. cm., 9-11 ft. lbs.)
Water Pump: Testing and Inspection
1. Check each part for cracks, damage or wear, and replace the coolant pump assembly if
necessary. 2. Check the bearing for damage, abnormal noise and sluggish rotation, and replace
the coolant pump assembly if necessary. 3. Check for coolant leakage. If coolant leaks from hole
"A," the seal is defective. Replace the coolant pump assembly
Water Pump: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Drain the coolant and disconnect the coolant outlet pipe connection hose from the coolant pump.
2. Remove the drive belt and engine coolant pump pulley. 3. Remove the timing belt covers and
the timing belt idler. 4. Remove the coolant pump mounting bolts, then remove the generator brace.
5. Remove the coolant pump assembly from the cylinder block.
INSTALLATION
1. Clean the gasket surfaces of the coolant pump body and the cylinder block.
2. Install a new coolant pump gasket and O-ring to the coolant pump, then using the illustration to
determine bolt location by length, install and
tighten the bolts to 12-15 Nm (120-150 kg. cm., 9-11 ft. lbs.).
3. Install the timing belt idler and timing belt.
- Adjust the timing belt tension.
- Refer to the timing system section for procedures.

4. Install the timing belt covers. 5. Install the coolant pump pulley and drive belt, and then adjust the
belt tension. 6. Refill the system with clean coolant. 7. Run the engine and check for leaks.
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Catalytic Converter > Component
Catalytic Converter: Specifications
Tightening Torque
Front exhaust pipe to catalytic converter 40 to 60 Nm
Catalytic converter to main muffler assembly 30 to 40 Nm

Catalytic Converter: Service Precautions
CAUTION: If large amounts of unburned gasoline flow into the converter, it may overheat and
create a fire hazard. To prevent this, observe the following precautions and be sure to explain them
to your customer.
1. Use only unleaded gasoline. 2. Avoid prolonged idling. Avoid running the engine at fast idle
speed for more than 10 minutes and at idle speed for more than 20 minutes. 3. Avoid spark jump
test. Spark jump only when absolutely necessary. Perform this test as rapidly as possible and,
while testing, never race the
engine.
4. Avoid prolonged engine compression measurement. Engine compression tests must be made as
rapidly as possible. 5. Do not run engine when fuel tank is nearly empty. This may cause the
engine to misfire and create an extra load on the converter. 6. Avoid coasting with ignition turned
off and prolonged braking. 7. Do not dispose of used catalyst along with parts contaminated with
gasoline or oil.
Catalytic Converter: Description and Operation
THREE-WAY CATALYTIC CONVERTER (TWC)
CATALYTIC CONVERTER INSPECTION
Inspect for damage, cracking or deterioration. Replace if faulty.
CAUTION: The catalytic converters require the use of unleaded gasoline only. Leaded gasoline will
destroy the effectiveness of the catalysts as an emission control device.
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic converters will not require maintenance. However,
it is important to keep the engine properly tuned. Engine misfiring may cause overheating of the
catalysts. This may cause heat damage to the converters or vehicle components. This situation can
also occur during diagnostic testing if any spark plug cables are removed and the engine is allowed
to idle for a prolonged period of time.
Catalytic Converter: Testing and Inspection
PROCEDURE
The catalytic converter may be installed at or near the exhaust manifold or in the exhaust system
along the vehicle under body. The body of the catalytic converter should be inspected for distortion
and other types of damage. Excessive heat can bulge or distort the converter. Since excessive
heat build up is not the fault of the converter, the fuel or ignition system should be checked
whenever a converter is damaged by overheating. Also inspect for missing or improperly installed
catalytic converter heat shields.
Catalytic Converter: Service and Repair
WARNING: Before removing or inspecting the exhaust system, ensure that the exhaust system has
cooled sufficiently.
REMOVAL
1. Remove the catalytic converter from the center muffler and the front exhaust pipe. 2. Remove
the rubber hanger and catalytic converter.
INSTALLATION
1. Install exhaust system components with fasteners hand tight, ensuring system is properly
aligned. 2. Tighten the parts securely. Make sure there is no interference with any body
components.
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Manifold > Component
Exhaust Manifold: Specifications
Manifold Bolts
......................................................................................................................................... 15-20 Nm
(150-200 kg. cm., 11-15 ft. lbs.)
Exhaust Manifold: Testing and Inspection
Exhaust Manifold
Check for damage or cracking.
Exhaust Manifold Gasket
Check for flaking or damage of the gasket.

Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Pipe > Component Information >
Specifications
Exhaust Pipe: Specifications
Front Pipe To:
Manifold
....................................................................................................................................................
30-40 Nm (300-400 kg. cm, 22-29 ft. lbs.) Support Bracket
........................................................................................................................................ 30-40 Nm
(300-400 kg. cm, 22-29 ft. lbs.) Catalytic Converter
.................................................................................................................................... 40-60 Nm
(400-600 kg. cm, 29-43 ft. lbs)
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Pipe > Component Information >
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Muffler > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Center Muffler
Muffler: Service and Repair Center Muffler
REMOVAL
1. Remove the center muffler assembly from the catalytic converter.
2. Remove the rubber hanger, then remove the center muffler.
INSTALLATION
components.
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Muffler > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Center Muffler > Page 2791
Muffler: Service and Repair Main Muffler
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect the main muffler from the center muffler.
2. Remove the rubber hangers and take out the main muffler.
INSTALLATION
components.
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 00-40-009 > Aug > 00 > A/T - Shift Solenoid Incorrect Operation/MIL ON
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 00-40-009
Date: AUGUST, 2000
Model: ALL
symptoms:
^ Erratic shift
^ MIL illuminated
NOTE:
REPAIR PROCEDURE:
NOTE:
Step 6:
cable.
NOTE:
Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 00-40-009 > Aug > 00 > A/T - Shift Solenoid Incorrect Operation/MIL ON > Page 2803
NOTE:
All models:
NOTE:


NOTE:

SONATA:
NOTE:
Number 00-36-006
Date MARCH, 2000
DESCRIPTION:
^ Unstable idle
REPAIR INFORMATION:


PARTS INFORMATION

Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > tnt1660906-03 > Sep > 06 > A/T, Engine Controls -
ECM/TCM Reset/Relearn Procedure
MODEL: All
DESCRIPTION:
as shown below.
VEHICLES AFFECTED:
^ All

HI-SCAN PROCEDURE:
^ Select vehicle
press "ENTER"

ECM/TCM Reset/Relearn Procedure > Page 2816
NOTE:
upshifts.

NOTE:

Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > tnt1640706-01 > Jul > 06 > Engine Controls - ECU
Procedure
Reprogramming
it.
Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > tnt1630506-01 > May > 06 > A/T Controls -
PCM/TCM Reset/Relearn Adaptive Values
Adaptive Values

HI-SCAN PROCEDURE:
^ Select vehicle

PCM/TCM Reset/Relearn Adaptive Values > Page 2829
NOTE:
upshifts.

NOTE:
Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 06-40-005 > Mar > 06 > A/T Controls - Reset and
Relearn Adaptive Values
Values
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 06-40-005
Date: MARCH, 2006
Model: ALL

VALUES
DESCRIPTION:

as shown below.
Relearn Adaptive Values > Page 2835
HI-SCAN PROCEDURE:
^ Select vehicle
NOTE:
completed as shown.
occur.
NOTE:

Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins
> All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 00-40-012 > Sep > 00 > A/T - Diagnostic Trouble Codes &
Scanned Data
Data
Group TRANSAXLE
Number 00-40-012
Model ALL

DESCRIPTION:
NOTE:
> All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 00-40-012 > Sep > 00 > A/T - Diagnostic Trouble Codes &

Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 00-40-009 > Aug > 00 > A/T - Shift Solenoid
Incorrect Operation/MIL ON
ON
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 00-40-009
Date: AUGUST, 2000
Model: ALL
symptoms:
^ Erratic shift
^ MIL illuminated
NOTE:
REPAIR PROCEDURE:
NOTE:
Step 6:
cable.
NOTE:
Incorrect Operation/MIL ON > Page 2846
NOTE:
All models:
NOTE:


NOTE:

SONATA:
NOTE:
Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 00-00-001 > Jul > 00 > Scan Tool - Software Update
Procedure
Group: GENERAL
Number: 00-00-001
Date: JULY, 2000
Model: ALL
DESCRIPTION
PROCEDURE:
fixes.
SOL card.
Note:
cards.
utility.
INFO card
COM2.
software cards.
COM2.
software.
NOTE:
Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 00-36-006 > Mar > 00 > TPS - Driveability Concerns
Number 00-36-006
Date MARCH, 2000
DESCRIPTION:
^ Unstable idle
REPAIR INFORMATION:


Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 00-36-006 > Mar > 00 > TPS - Driveability Concerns
> Page 2863
PARTS INFORMATION

Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 98-36-006 > Aug > 98 > Engine Coolant
Diagnosis
Number: 98-36-006
Date: AUGUST, 1998
Model: ALL
DESCRIPTION:
engine is cold.
Temperature Sensor - Diagnosis > Page 2868
DIAGNOSTIC HINTS:
USING A VOLTMETER:
USING A SCAN TOOL:
SENSOR INSPECTION:
resistance.
INSTALLATION:

Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 98-36-001 > Apr > 98 > Air/Fuel Mixture - Trim Code
Diagnosis
Number: 98-36-001
Date: APRIL, 1998
DESCRIPTION
^ Oxygen sensors
^ Air flow sensor
emissions.
the A/F ratio.
performance.
the code was set.
stored in the PCM.
Note:

PCM.

load value.
Fuel Trim code.
and re-test.
this TSB.

Trim code.
and re-test.
TSB.
Note:
Note:
D. Select "Engine"
E. Select "Data"
the scan tool.
Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 97-40-001-1 > Jul > 97 > A/T - Mutual Control
Introduction
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 97-40-001-1
Date: JULY, 1997
Model: ALL
production dates.
DESCRIPTION:
ANALYSIS:
2. TPS above 1.2 V

rpm for 10 minutes
1997 Sonata 2.0L & 3.0L July 1, 1996

Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 97-40-001-1 > Jul > 97 > A/T - Mutual Control
Introduction > Page 2882
1997 Tiburon 1.8L & 2.0L July 1, 1996
PARTS INFORMATION:
Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > tnt1660906-03 > Sep > 06 > A/T, Engine Controls -
MODEL: All
DESCRIPTION:
as shown below.
VEHICLES AFFECTED:
^ All

HI-SCAN PROCEDURE:
^ Select vehicle
press "ENTER"

NOTE:
upshifts.

NOTE:

Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > tnt1640706-01 > Jul > 06 > Engine Controls - ECU
Procedure
Reprogramming
it.
Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > tnt1630506-01 > May > 06 > A/T Controls - PCM/TCM
Adaptive Values

HI-SCAN PROCEDURE:
^ Select vehicle

NOTE:
upshifts.

NOTE:
Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 06-40-005 > Mar > 06 > A/T Controls - Reset and
Values
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 06-40-005
Date: MARCH, 2006
Model: ALL

VALUES
DESCRIPTION:

as shown below.
HI-SCAN PROCEDURE:
^ Select vehicle
NOTE:
completed as shown.
occur.
NOTE:

> All Other Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 00-40-012 > Sep > 00 > A/T - Diagnostic Trouble Codes &
Scanned Data
Data
Group TRANSAXLE
Number 00-40-012
Model ALL

DESCRIPTION:
NOTE:
> All Other Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 00-40-012 > Sep > 00 > A/T - Diagnostic Trouble Codes &

Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 00-00-001 > Jul > 00 > Scan Tool - Software Update
Procedure
Group: GENERAL
Number: 00-00-001
Date: JULY, 2000
Model: ALL
DESCRIPTION
PROCEDURE:
fixes.
SOL card.
Note:
cards.
utility.
INFO card
COM2.
software cards.
COM2.
software.
NOTE:
Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 98-36-006 > Aug > 98 > Engine Coolant Temperature
Sensor - Diagnosis
Diagnosis
Number: 98-36-006
Date: AUGUST, 1998
Model: ALL
DESCRIPTION:
engine is cold.
Sensor - Diagnosis > Page 2928
DIAGNOSTIC HINTS:
USING A VOLTMETER:
USING A SCAN TOOL:
SENSOR INSPECTION:
resistance.
INSTALLATION:

Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 98-36-001 > Apr > 98 > Air/Fuel Mixture - Trim Code
Diagnosis
Number: 98-36-001
Date: APRIL, 1998
DESCRIPTION
^ Oxygen sensors
^ Air flow sensor
emissions.
the A/F ratio.
performance.
the code was set.
stored in the PCM.
Note:

PCM.

load value.
Fuel Trim code.
and re-test.
this TSB.

Trim code.
and re-test.
TSB.
Note:
Note:
D. Select "Engine"
E. Select "Data"
the scan tool.
Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 97-40-001-1 > Jul > 97 > A/T - Mutual Control
Introduction
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 97-40-001-1
Date: JULY, 1997
Model: ALL
production dates.
DESCRIPTION:
ANALYSIS:
2. TPS above 1.2 V

rpm for 10 minutes
1997 Sonata 2.0L & 3.0L July 1, 1996

Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 97-40-001-1 > Jul > 97 > A/T - Mutual Control
1997 Tiburon 1.8L & 2.0L July 1, 1996
PARTS INFORMATION:
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram


Connector View
CONNECTOR VIEW
Numbering Order
NUMBERING ORDER

Electrical Diagram
Harness Layouts
Harness Layout

B ..........................................................................................................................................................
......................................................................... Black L .......................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
Blue Br .................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................... Brown G ...............................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
...... Green Gr .......................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................ Gray Lg ...................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
....... Light Green O ..............................................................................................................................
................................................................................................... Orange P .........................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
............................... Pink R ..................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................... Red W .............................
..............................................................................................................................................................
....................................... White Y ........................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................... Yellow Li ....................
..............................................................................................................................................................
......................................... Light Blue
CAUTION
CAUTION
may result.
lamp or ohmmeter.

box and the short.
Testing For Voltage
Testing For Voltage
CAUTION
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2957
SELF-DIAGNOSIS
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM

correctly.
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Diagrams >


Connector View
CONNECTOR VIEW
Numbering Order
NUMBERING ORDER

Electrical Diagram
Harness Layouts
Harness Layout

B ..........................................................................................................................................................
......................................................................... Black L .......................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
Blue Br .................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................... Brown G ...............................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
...... Green Gr .......................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................ Gray Lg ...................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
....... Light Green O ..............................................................................................................................
................................................................................................... Orange P .........................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
............................... Pink R ..................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................... Red W .............................
..............................................................................................................................................................
....................................... White Y ........................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................... Yellow Li ....................
..............................................................................................................................................................
......................................... Light Blue
CAUTION
CAUTION
may result.
lamp or ohmmeter.

box and the short.
Testing For Voltage
Testing For Voltage
CAUTION

Page 2975
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM

Page 2976
Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Locations
Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 2981
MFI CONTROL RELAY
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM

Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Diagrams >


Connector View
CONNECTOR VIEW
Numbering Order
NUMBERING ORDER

Electrical Diagram
Harness Layouts
Harness Layout

B ..........................................................................................................................................................
......................................................................... Black L .......................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
Blue Br .................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................... Brown G ...............................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
...... Green Gr .......................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................ Gray Lg ...................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
....... Light Green O ..............................................................................................................................
................................................................................................... Orange P .........................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
............................... Pink R ..................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................... Red W .............................
..............................................................................................................................................................
....................................... White Y ........................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................... Yellow Li ....................
..............................................................................................................................................................
......................................... Light Blue
CAUTION
CAUTION
may result.
lamp or ohmmeter.

box and the short.
Testing For Voltage
Testing For Voltage
CAUTION

Page 2999
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM

Page 3000
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Concerns
Number: 97-40-031
Group: TRANSAXLE

Model: ALL
during deceleration
^ Rough idle
Note:
SONATA
EXCEL, SCOUPE
Number: 97-40-031
Group: TRANSAXLE

Model: ALL
during deceleration
^ Rough idle
Note:
SONATA
EXCEL, SCOUPE
Bulletins > Air/Fuel Mixture - Trim Code Diagnosis
Number: 98-36-001
Date: APRIL, 1998
DESCRIPTION
^ Oxygen sensors
^ Air flow sensor
emissions.
the A/F ratio.
performance.
the code was set.
stored in the PCM.
Note:

PCM.

load value.
Fuel Trim code.
and re-test.
this TSB.

Trim code.
and re-test.
TSB.
Note:
Note:
D. Select "Engine"
E. Select "Data"
the scan tool.
MAF meter
Type Hot film type
connector No. 41
at 3,000 rpm 1.3 to 2.0 V



Connector View
CONNECTOR VIEW
Numbering Order
NUMBERING ORDER

Electrical Diagram
Harness Layouts
Harness Layout

B ..........................................................................................................................................................
......................................................................... Black L .......................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
Blue Br .................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................... Brown G ...............................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
...... Green Gr .......................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................ Gray Lg ...................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
....... Light Green O ..............................................................................................................................
................................................................................................... Orange P .........................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
............................... Pink R ..................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................... Red W .............................
..............................................................................................................................................................
....................................... White Y ........................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................... Yellow Li ....................
..............................................................................................................................................................
......................................... Light Blue
CAUTION
CAUTION
may result.
lamp or ohmmeter.

box and the short.
Testing For Voltage
Testing For Voltage
CAUTION

CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
connector.
or ECM.
comparison.
USING VOLTMETER
to 198°F).
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Specifications

3051
3052
3053
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
3054
USING VOLTMETER
Number: 98-36-006
Date: AUGUST, 1998
Model: ALL
DESCRIPTION:
engine is cold.
DIAGNOSTIC HINTS:
USING A VOLTMETER:
USING A SCAN TOOL:
SENSOR INSPECTION:
resistance.
INSTALLATION:

Number: 98-36-003
Date: APRIL, 1998
Model: ALL
DESCRIPTION:
Number: 98-36-001
Date: APRIL, 1998
DESCRIPTION
^ Oxygen sensors
^ Air flow sensor
emissions.
the A/F ratio.
performance.
the code was set.
stored in the PCM.
Note:

PCM.

load value.
Fuel Trim code.
and re-test.
this TSB.

Trim code.
and re-test.
TSB.
Note:
Note:
D. Select "Engine"
E. Select "Data"
the scan tool.
8.16 to 10.74 K ohms at -10 deg C

1.059 to 1.281 K ohms at 40 deg C
0.538 to 0.650 K ohms at 60 deg C
0.298 to 0.322 K ohms at 80 deg C
0.219 to 0.243 K ohms at 90 deg C
connector No. 78
3.44 V at 20 deg C
2.72 V at 40 deg C
1.25 V at 80 deg C
8.16 to 10.74 K ohms at -10 deg C

1.059 to 1.281 K ohms at 40 deg C
0.538 to 0.650 K ohms at 60 deg C
0.298 to 0.322 K ohms at 80 deg C
0.219 to 0.243 K ohms at 90 deg C
connector No. 78
3.44 V at 20 deg C
2.72 V at 40 deg C
1.25 V at 80 deg C


Connector View
CONNECTOR VIEW
Numbering Order
NUMBERING ORDER

Electrical Diagram
Harness Layouts
Harness Layout

B ..........................................................................................................................................................
......................................................................... Black L .......................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
Blue Br .................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................... Brown G ...............................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
...... Green Gr .......................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................ Gray Lg ...................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
....... Light Green O ..............................................................................................................................
................................................................................................... Orange P .........................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
............................... Pink R ..................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................... Red W .............................
..............................................................................................................................................................
....................................... White Y ........................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................... Yellow Li ....................
..............................................................................................................................................................
......................................... Light Blue
CAUTION
CAUTION
may result.
lamp or ohmmeter.

box and the short.
Testing For Voltage
Testing For Voltage
CAUTION
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM

SENSOR INSPECTION
USING VOLTMETER

REMOVAL
INSTALLATION
Bulletins > Crankshaft Position Sensor - Replacement Procedure
Procedure
Number: 99-36-010
Date: JULY, 1999
DESCRIPTION:
NOTE:
installed.
Bulletins > Crankshaft Position Sensor - Replacement Procedure > Page 3096

Electrical Specifications
at 3,000 rpm 2,800 to 3,200 Hz

Electrical Specifications > Page 3099
at 3,000 rpm 2,800 to 3,200 Hz

Page 3100
Page 3101
Page 3102
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
Page 3103
SENSOR INSPECTION
terminal 2 and 3.
wheel: 0.5 - 1.5 mm (0.020 - 0.059 in.)
Page 3104
voltage induced.
Number: 98-36-001
Date: APRIL, 1998
DESCRIPTION
^ Oxygen sensors
^ Air flow sensor
emissions.
the A/F ratio.
performance.
the code was set.
stored in the PCM.
Note:

PCM.

load value.
Fuel Trim code.
and re-test.
this TSB.

Trim code.
and re-test.
TSB.
Note:
Note:
D. Select "Engine"
E. Select "Data"
the scan tool.
Number: 98-36-001
Date: APRIL, 1998
DESCRIPTION
^ Oxygen sensors
^ Air flow sensor
emissions.
the A/F ratio.
performance.
the code was set.
stored in the PCM.
Note:

PCM.

load value.
Fuel Trim code.
and re-test.
this TSB.

Trim code.
and re-test.
TSB.
Note:
Note:
D. Select "Engine"
E. Select "Data"
the scan tool.
IAT sensor
2.4 to 2.8 V at 20 deg C
1.6 to 2.0 V at 40 deg C
0.5 to 0.9 V at 80 deg C

Specifications


KNOCK SENSOR (KS)
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
SENSOR INSPECTION


Technical Service Bulletins > Engine Controls - Oxygen Sensor Function/Diagnosis
Function/Diagnosis
SERVICE TIP:
is malfunctioning.
characteristics:
^ Fuel injector(s)
^ Air flow sensor

^ Spark plugs

C. Select "Engine"
D. Select "Data"

sensor.
procedure.
Pro.
testing.
procedure.
frequency.
for 1998 Accent.

needed.
easier for you.
Technical Service Bulletins > Technical Service Bulletins for Heated Oxygen Sensor: > 04-00-001 > May > 04 > Engine
Guidelines
Group: GENERAL
Number: 04-00-001
Date: MAY, 2004
Model: ALL
DESCRIPTION:
WARNING:
Controls - Oxygen Sensor Function/Diagnosis
Function/Diagnosis
SERVICE TIP:
is malfunctioning.
characteristics:
^ Fuel injector(s)
^ Air flow sensor

^ Spark plugs

C. Select "Engine"
D. Select "Data"

sensor.
procedure.
Pro.
testing.
procedure.
frequency.
for 1998 Accent.

needed.
easier for you.
Sensor Locations
Group: FUEL SYSTEM
Number: 99-30-001
Date: JANUARY, 1999
DESCRIPTION:
models.
vehicles.

PHOTO 1
PHOTO 2
Number: 98-09-006
Date: JUNE, 1998
Model
Subject
DESCRIPTION:
for 1998 Accent.
frequency.
Number: 98-36-001
Date: APRIL, 1998
DESCRIPTION
^ Oxygen sensors
^ Air flow sensor
emissions.
the A/F ratio.
performance.
the code was set.
stored in the PCM.
Note:

PCM.

load value.
Fuel Trim code.
and re-test.
this TSB.

Trim code.
and re-test.
TSB.
Note:
Note:
D. Select "Engine"
E. Select "Data"
the scan tool.
Code - Diagnostic Manual Correction
Correction
Number: 98-36-002
Date: APRIL, 1998
Model: ALL
Subject
DESCRIPTION:
2500.
Affected Pages:
Update
Number: 98-36-003
Date: APRIL, 1998
Model: ALL
DESCRIPTION:
Technical Service Bulletins > Technical Service Bulletins for Heated Oxygen Sensor: > 98-00-001 > Feb > 98 > Engine -
Fault Code, Diagnostic Manual Correction
Correction
Group: GENERAL
Number: 98-00-001
Model: ALL
engine RPM is 2500.

P0137-3, and P0138-3.
Sensor- Operation/Diagnosis
Number: 97-36-004
Description
reduce emissions):
is malfunctioning.
characteristics:
^ Fuel injector(s)
^ Air flow sensor

^ Spark plugs
Note:
C. Select "Engine
D. Select "Data"

tool.
2500
NOTE:
resolution.
Note:
Tiburon.
offset.)

Note 1:
Note 2:
rpm.

Circuit Diagnosis
^ Open Circuit:
^ Short Circuit:

Guidelines
Group: GENERAL
Number: 04-00-001
Date: MAY, 2004
Model: ALL
DESCRIPTION:
WARNING:
Update
Number: 98-36-003
Date: APRIL, 1998
Model: ALL
DESCRIPTION:
Correction
Number: 98-36-002
Date: APRIL, 1998
Model: ALL
Subject
DESCRIPTION:
2500.
Affected Pages:
Note: Key OFF
Note: Key OFF
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
SENSOR INSPECTION

Faulty injector.
USING VOLTMETER
NOTE:
HINT: -
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Rough Road Sensor > Component Information > Specifications
Acceleration Sensor
connector No. 80

ACCELERATION SENSOR
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM

USING VOLTMETER
Number 00-36-006
Date MARCH, 2000
DESCRIPTION:
^ Unstable idle
REPAIR INFORMATION:


PARTS INFORMATION

Number: 97-40-031
Group: TRANSAXLE

Model: ALL
during deceleration
^ Rough idle
Note:
SONATA
EXCEL, SCOUPE
Concerns
Number 00-36-006
Date MARCH, 2000
DESCRIPTION:
^ Unstable idle
REPAIR INFORMATION:


PARTS INFORMATION

Code Diagnosis
Number: 98-36-001
Date: APRIL, 1998
DESCRIPTION
^ Oxygen sensors
^ Air flow sensor
emissions.
the A/F ratio.
performance.
the code was set.
stored in the PCM.
Note:

PCM.

load value.
Fuel Trim code.
and re-test.
this TSB.

Trim code.
and re-test.
TSB.
Note:
Note:
D. Select "Engine"
E. Select "Data"
the scan tool.
Number: 97-40-031
Group: TRANSAXLE

Model: ALL
during deceleration
^ Rough idle
Note:
> Page 3252
> Page 3253
SONATA
> Page 3254
EXCEL, SCOUPE
Manual Revisions
Number 97-40-004
Date 02-1997

DESCRIPTION:
are shown.
Diagnosis
Number: 98-36-001
Date: APRIL, 1998
DESCRIPTION
^ Oxygen sensors
^ Air flow sensor
emissions.
the A/F ratio.
performance.
the code was set.
stored in the PCM.
Note:

PCM.

load value.
Fuel Trim code.
and re-test.
this TSB.

Trim code.
and re-test.
TSB.
Note:
Note:
D. Select "Engine"
E. Select "Data"
the scan tool.
Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Throttle Position Sensor: > 97-40-004 > Feb > 97 > Engine/Transmission Controls
- Service Manual Revisions
Manual Revisions
Number 97-40-004
Date 02-1997

DESCRIPTION:
are shown.
2.3 to 3.4 K ohms
Note: when idling
connector No. 73
4.25 to 4.8 V

CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
SENSOR INSPECTION
sensor.

turned on.
USING VOLTMETER
Start In P/N
Group TRANSAXLE
Number 09-AT-013
Date JULY, 2009

P0707, P0708
DESCRIPTION:
range switch.
PARTS INFORMATION
Service Procedure
c below.

Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 05-40-016 > Oct > 05 > A/T - No Movement in 'DRIVE' or 'REVERSE'

'REVERSE'
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 05-40-016
Date: OCTOBER, 2005
Model: ALL
DESCRIPTION:
shown below:
REPAIR PROCEDURE:
NOTE:

Page 3293

Page 3294
^ Vehicle
Page 3295
Go to Step 12.
NOTE:
Page 3296

Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 99-40-017 > Dec > 99 > A/T - Shift Lever Will Not Shift Out Of Park
Park
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 99-40-017
DESCRIPTION:
NOTE:
SERVICE PROCEDURE:
column).

Page 3301
Page 3302
module.
PARTS INFORMATION:
Page 3303
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: > 09-AT-013 > Jul >
09 > A/T - MIL ON/DTC's P0705/P0707/P0708/No Start In P/N
Group TRANSAXLE
Number 09-AT-013
Date JULY, 2009

P0707, P0708
DESCRIPTION:
range switch.
PARTS INFORMATION
09 > A/T - MIL ON/DTC's P0705/P0707/P0708/No Start In P/N > Page 3309
Service Procedure
c below.

Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: > tnt1720307-02 >
Mar > 07 > A/T Controls - Neutral Position Switch Adaptive Relearn

Mar > 07 > A/T Controls - Neutral Position Switch Adaptive Relearn > Page 3317
Press "ENTER."

Mar > 07 > A/T Controls - Neutral Position Switch Adaptive Relearn > Page 3318

Nov > 05 > A/T - No Movement In Drive/Reverse

Drive/Reverse
MODEL: ALL
DESCRIPTION:
shown below:
REPAIR PROCEDURE:
NOTE:
Nov > 05 > A/T - No Movement In Drive/Reverse > Page 3323

(10-12 Nm, 100-120 kg.cm)
(12-13 Nm, 120-130 kg.cm)

^ Vehicle
inserted.
Go to Step 12.
inserted.
NOTE:
replace the TCM.

Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: > 05-40-016 > Oct >
05 > A/T - No Movement in 'DRIVE' or 'REVERSE'

Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 05-40-016
Date: OCTOBER, 2005
Model: ALL
DESCRIPTION:
shown below:
REPAIR PROCEDURE:
NOTE:

05 > A/T - No Movement in 'DRIVE' or 'REVERSE' > Page 3330

^ Vehicle
Go to Step 12.
NOTE:

Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: > 99-40-017 > Dec >
99 > A/T - Shift Lever Will Not Shift Out Of Park
Out Of Park
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 99-40-017
DESCRIPTION:
NOTE:
SERVICE PROCEDURE:
column).

99 > A/T - Shift Lever Will Not Shift Out Of Park > Page 3338
module.
PARTS INFORMATION:
Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: > tnt1720307-02 > Mar >
07 > A/T Controls - Neutral Position Switch Adaptive Relearn

07 > A/T Controls - Neutral Position Switch Adaptive Relearn > Page 3346
Press "ENTER."

07 > A/T Controls - Neutral Position Switch Adaptive Relearn > Page 3347

Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: > tnt1581105-02 > Nov >
05 > A/T - No Movement In Drive/Reverse

Drive/Reverse
MODEL: ALL
DESCRIPTION:
shown below:
REPAIR PROCEDURE:
NOTE:
05 > A/T - No Movement In Drive/Reverse > Page 3352

(10-12 Nm, 100-120 kg.cm)
(12-13 Nm, 120-130 kg.cm)

^ Vehicle
inserted.
Go to Step 12.
inserted.
NOTE:
replace the TCM.

Shifting/DTC's Set
Number 03-40-022
Date 12-2003

P0717 & P0722
DESCRIPTION:

NOTE
REPAIR PROCEDURE:

PARTS INFORMATION
Shifting/DTC's Set
Number 03-40-022
Date 12-2003

P0717 & P0722
DESCRIPTION:

NOTE
REPAIR PROCEDURE:

PARTS INFORMATION
Locations
EC01, EC02, EM01, EM02, EM03
MI01 To MI05, MM02
C27
E38-1 - E38-2
I06
I07-1 To I07-3, I08-1 To I08-3
I07-1 To I07-3, I08-1 To I08-3

I07-1 To I07-3, I08-1 To I08-3
I07-1 To I07-3, I08-1 To I08-3
I07-1 To I07-3, I08-1 To I08-3

I07-1 To I07-3, I08-1 To I08-3
I15 - I16
G04
G05


Connector View
CONNECTOR VIEW
Numbering Order
NUMBERING ORDER

Electrical Diagram
Harness Layouts
Harness Layout

B ..........................................................................................................................................................
......................................................................... Black L .......................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
Blue Br .................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................... Brown G ...............................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
...... Green Gr .......................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................ Gray Lg ...................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
....... Light Green O ..............................................................................................................................
................................................................................................... Orange P .........................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
............................... Pink R ..................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................... Red W .............................
..............................................................................................................................................................
....................................... White Y ........................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................... Yellow Li ....................
..............................................................................................................................................................
......................................... Light Blue
CAUTION
CAUTION
may result.
lamp or ohmmeter.

box and the short.
Testing For Voltage
Testing For Voltage
CAUTION



CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
Concerns
Number: 97-40-031
Group: TRANSAXLE

Model: ALL
during deceleration
^ Rough idle
Note:
SONATA
EXCEL, SCOUPE
Number: 97-40-031
Group: TRANSAXLE

Model: ALL
during deceleration
^ Rough idle
Note:
SONATA
EXCEL, SCOUPE
Number: 98-36-001
Date: APRIL, 1998
DESCRIPTION
^ Oxygen sensors
^ Air flow sensor
emissions.
the A/F ratio.
performance.
the code was set.
stored in the PCM.
Note:

PCM.

load value.
Fuel Trim code.
and re-test.
this TSB.

Trim code.
and re-test.
TSB.
Note:
Note:
D. Select "Engine"
E. Select "Data"
the scan tool.
> Page 3436
MAF meter
Type Hot film type
connector No. 41
at 3,000 rpm 1.3 to 2.0 V

> Page 3437


Connector View
CONNECTOR VIEW
Numbering Order
NUMBERING ORDER

Electrical Diagram
Harness Layouts
Harness Layout

B ..........................................................................................................................................................
......................................................................... Black L .......................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
Blue Br .................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................... Brown G ...............................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
...... Green Gr .......................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................ Gray Lg ...................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
....... Light Green O ..............................................................................................................................
................................................................................................... Orange P .........................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
............................... Pink R ..................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................... Red W .............................
..............................................................................................................................................................
....................................... White Y ........................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................... Yellow Li ....................
..............................................................................................................................................................
......................................... Light Blue
CAUTION
CAUTION
may result.
lamp or ohmmeter.

box and the short.
Testing For Voltage
Testing For Voltage
CAUTION

CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
connector.
or ECM.
comparison.
USING VOLTMETER
to 198°F).
Bulletins > Customer Interest for Throttle Position Sensor: > 00-36-006 > Mar > 00 > TPS - Driveability Concerns
Number 00-36-006
Date MARCH, 2000
DESCRIPTION:
^ Unstable idle
REPAIR INFORMATION:


Bulletins > Customer Interest for Throttle Position Sensor: > 00-36-006 > Mar > 00 > TPS - Driveability Concerns > Page
3463
PARTS INFORMATION

Bulletins > Customer Interest for Throttle Position Sensor: > 97-40-031 > Sep > 97 > A/T - Driveability Concerns
Number: 97-40-031
Group: TRANSAXLE

Model: ALL
during deceleration
^ Rough idle
Note:
Bulletins > Customer Interest for Throttle Position Sensor: > 97-40-031 > Sep > 97 > A/T - Driveability Concerns > Page
3468
3469
SONATA
3470
EXCEL, SCOUPE
Concerns
Number 00-36-006
Date MARCH, 2000
DESCRIPTION:
^ Unstable idle
REPAIR INFORMATION:


PARTS INFORMATION

Code Diagnosis
Number: 98-36-001
Date: APRIL, 1998
DESCRIPTION
^ Oxygen sensors
^ Air flow sensor
emissions.
the A/F ratio.
performance.
the code was set.
stored in the PCM.
Note:

PCM.

load value.
Fuel Trim code.
and re-test.
this TSB.

Trim code.
and re-test.
TSB.
Note:
Note:
D. Select "Engine"
E. Select "Data"
the scan tool.
Number: 97-40-031
Group: TRANSAXLE

Model: ALL
during deceleration
^ Rough idle
Note:
> Page 3488
> Page 3489
SONATA
> Page 3490
EXCEL, SCOUPE
Manual Revisions
Number 97-40-004
Date 02-1997

DESCRIPTION:
are shown.
2.3 to 3.4 K ohms
Note: when idling
connector No. 73
4.25 to 4.8 V

CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
SENSOR INSPECTION
sensor.

turned on.
USING VOLTMETER
Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Specifications

CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
USING VOLTMETER
Procedure
Number: 99-36-010
Date: JULY, 1999
DESCRIPTION:
NOTE:
installed.

Specifications
at 3,000 rpm 2,800 to 3,200 Hz

at 3,000 rpm 2,800 to 3,200 Hz

CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
SENSOR INSPECTION
terminal 2 and 3.
wheel: 0.5 - 1.5 mm (0.020 - 0.059 in.)

voltage induced.
Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Component Information > Locations
IGNITION LOCK
Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Specifications > Electrical Specifications

Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Specifications > Electrical Specifications > Page
3529

KNOCK SENSOR (KS)
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
SENSOR INSPECTION


Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure >
Diagnostic Connector - Fuel Pump > Component Information > Description and Operation
Diagnostic Connector - Fuel Pump > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 3539
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
fuel tank cap.

Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air/Fuel Mixture >
System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Air/Fuel Mixture - Trim Code Diagnosis
Number: 98-36-001
Date: APRIL, 1998
DESCRIPTION
^ Oxygen sensors
^ Air flow sensor
emissions.
the A/F ratio.

System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Air/Fuel Mixture - Trim Code Diagnosis > Page 3546
performance.
the code was set.
stored in the PCM.
Note:

PCM.

load value.
Fuel Trim code.
and re-test.
this TSB.

Trim code.
and re-test.
TSB.
Note:
Note:
D. Select "Engine"
E. Select "Data"
the scan tool.
System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3549
system.
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Idle Speed > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Idle Speed: > 00-36-006 > Mar > 00 > TPS - Driveability
Concerns
Number 00-36-006
Date MARCH, 2000
DESCRIPTION:
^ Unstable idle
REPAIR INFORMATION:


PARTS INFORMATION

Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Idle Speed: > 98-40-001 > Jan > 98 > A/T - Harsh 4-3
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 98-40-001
Date: JANUARY, 1998
Model: ALL
DESCRIPTION:
158-194°F).
# 97-40-031.
5. Note:
as follows:
number shown.
PARTS INFORMATION:

Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Idle Speed: > 00-36-006 > Mar > 00 > TPS -
Number 00-36-006
Date MARCH, 2000
DESCRIPTION:
^ Unstable idle
REPAIR INFORMATION:


PARTS INFORMATION

Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Idle Speed: > 98-40-001 > Jan > 98 > A/T -
Harsh 4-3 Downshift When Decelerating
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 98-40-001
Date: JANUARY, 1998
Model: ALL
DESCRIPTION:
158-194°F).
# 97-40-031.
5. Note:
as follows:
number shown.
Harsh 4-3 Downshift When Decelerating > Page 3574
PARTS INFORMATION:

Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Idle Speed: > Page 3575
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 98-40-001
Date: JANUARY, 1998
Model: ALL
DESCRIPTION:
158-194°F).
# 97-40-031.
5. Note:
as follows:
number shown.
PARTS INFORMATION:
Number 00-36-006
Date MARCH, 2000
DESCRIPTION:
^ Unstable idle
REPAIR INFORMATION:
PARTS INFORMATION
Number 00-36-006
Date MARCH, 2000
Subject
DESCRIPTION:
^ Unstable idle
REPAIR INFORMATION:
PARTS INFORMATION
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 98-40-001
Date: JANUARY, 1998
Model: ALL
DESCRIPTION:
158-194°F).
# 97-40-031.
5. Note:
as follows:
number shown.
PARTS INFORMATION:

Base idle speed

NOTE:

Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air Cleaner Housing
> Component Information > Specifications
Air cleaner body
> Component Information > Specifications > Page 3586

REMOVAL
INSTALLATION

Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Filter > Fuel
Pressure Release > System Information > Service Precautions
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Filter > Fuel
Pressure Release > System Information > Service Precautions > Page 3593
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Firing Order >
Coil Pak
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Ignition Timing >
Number One Cylinder > Component Information > Locations

Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Ignition Cable >
NO . 1 4.8 K ohms
NO. 2 10 K ohms
NO. 3 7.3 K ohms
NO. 4 12 K ohms
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Ignition Cable >
replace the cable.
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Spark Plugs - Application/Service Interval
Number 02-36-017
Date 06-2002
Model All Models
DESCRIPTION:
Hyundai Vehicles.

Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Spark Plugs - Application/Service Interval > Page 3609

Plug Gap 1.0 - 1.1 mm (0.039 - 0.043 in.)

NGK .....................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................. BKR5ES-11 Champion .........................................................
..................................................................................................................................... RC9YC4,
RC10YC4
may be damaged.

Standard value:
Unleaded : 1.0-1.1 mm (0.039-0.043 in.)

Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Compression Check
> System Information > Specifications
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Compression Check
> System Information > Specifications > Page 3619
(1.52 Mpa, 220 psi).
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Valve Clearance >
System Information > Specifications

Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Valve Clearance >
System Information > Specifications > Page 3623
adjustments.
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position
Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 97-40-031 > Sep > 97 > A/T -
Number: 97-40-031
Group: TRANSAXLE

Model: ALL
during deceleration
^ Rough idle
Note:
SONATA
EXCEL, SCOUPE
Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 97-40-031 > Sep > 97 >
A/T - Driveability Concerns
Number: 97-40-031
Group: TRANSAXLE

Model: ALL
during deceleration
^ Rough idle
Note:
A/T - Driveability Concerns > Page 3641
SONATA
EXCEL, SCOUPE
Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Accelerator Pedal Position
Sensor: > 99-40-017 > Dec > 99 > A/T - Shift Lever Will Not Shift Out Of Park
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 99-40-017
DESCRIPTION:
NOTE:
SERVICE PROCEDURE:
column).

Sensor: > 99-40-017 > Dec > 99 > A/T - Shift Lever Will Not Shift Out Of Park > Page 3649
module.
PARTS INFORMATION:
module.
PARTS INFORMATION:
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor >
Number: 98-36-001
Date: APRIL, 1998
DESCRIPTION
^ Oxygen sensors
^ Air flow sensor
emissions.
the A/F ratio.

performance.
the code was set.
stored in the PCM.
Note:

PCM.

load value.
Fuel Trim code.
and re-test.
this TSB.

Trim code.
and re-test.
TSB.
Note:
Note:
D. Select "Engine"
E. Select "Data"
the scan tool.
MAF meter
Type Hot film type
connector No. 41
at 3,000 rpm 1.3 to 2.0 V

Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions


Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3671
Connector View
CONNECTOR VIEW
Numbering Order
NUMBERING ORDER

Electrical Diagram
Harness Layouts
Harness Layout

B ..........................................................................................................................................................
......................................................................... Black L .......................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
Blue Br .................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................... Brown G ...............................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
...... Green Gr .......................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................ Gray Lg ...................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
....... Light Green O ..............................................................................................................................
................................................................................................... Orange P .........................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
............................... Pink R ..................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................... Red W .............................
..............................................................................................................................................................
....................................... White Y ........................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................... Yellow Li ....................
..............................................................................................................................................................
......................................... Light Blue
CAUTION
CAUTION
may result.
lamp or ohmmeter.

box and the short.
Testing For Voltage
Testing For Voltage
CAUTION

Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3682
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
connector.
or ECM.
comparison.
USING VOLTMETER
to 198°F).
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor
<--> [Intake Air Temperature Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Air/Fuel Mixture - Trim Code
Diagnosis
Number: 98-36-001
Date: APRIL, 1998
DESCRIPTION
^ Oxygen sensors
^ Air flow sensor
emissions.
the A/F ratio.
performance.
the code was set.
stored in the PCM.
Note:

PCM.

load value.
Fuel Trim code.
and re-test.
this TSB.

Trim code.
and re-test.
TSB.
Note:
Note:
D. Select "Engine"
E. Select "Data"
the scan tool.
<--> [Intake Air Temperature Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3693
IAT sensor
2.4 to 2.8 V at 20 deg C
1.6 to 2.0 V at 40 deg C
0.5 to 0.9 V at 80 deg C

<--> [Intake Air Temperature Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3694
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor >

CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
USING VOLTMETER
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature
Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine Coolant Temperature
Sensor - Diagnosis
Number: 98-36-006
Date: AUGUST, 1998
Model: ALL
DESCRIPTION:
engine is cold.
DIAGNOSTIC HINTS:
USING A VOLTMETER:
USING A SCAN TOOL:
SENSOR INSPECTION:
resistance.
INSTALLATION:

Number: 98-36-003
Date: APRIL, 1998
Model: ALL
DESCRIPTION:
Number: 98-36-001
Date: APRIL, 1998
DESCRIPTION
^ Oxygen sensors
^ Air flow sensor
emissions.
the A/F ratio.
performance.
the code was set.
stored in the PCM.
Note:

PCM.

load value.
Fuel Trim code.
and re-test.
this TSB.

Trim code.
and re-test.
TSB.
Note:
Note:
D. Select "Engine"
E. Select "Data"
the scan tool.
Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Specifications > Electrical Specifications
8.16 to 10.74 K ohms at -10 deg C

1.059 to 1.281 K ohms at 40 deg C
0.538 to 0.650 K ohms at 60 deg C
0.298 to 0.322 K ohms at 80 deg C
0.219 to 0.243 K ohms at 90 deg C
connector No. 78
3.44 V at 20 deg C
2.72 V at 40 deg C
1.25 V at 80 deg C
Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Specifications > Electrical Specifications > Page 3718
8.16 to 10.74 K ohms at -10 deg C

1.059 to 1.281 K ohms at 40 deg C
0.538 to 0.650 K ohms at 60 deg C
0.298 to 0.322 K ohms at 80 deg C
0.219 to 0.243 K ohms at 90 deg C
connector No. 78
3.44 V at 20 deg C
2.72 V at 40 deg C
1.25 V at 80 deg C
Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3719
Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions


Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3722
Connector View
CONNECTOR VIEW
Numbering Order
NUMBERING ORDER

Electrical Diagram
Harness Layouts
Harness Layout

B ..........................................................................................................................................................
......................................................................... Black L .......................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
Blue Br .................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................... Brown G ...............................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
...... Green Gr .......................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................ Gray Lg ...................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
....... Light Green O ..............................................................................................................................
................................................................................................... Orange P .........................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
............................... Pink R ..................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................... Red W .............................
..............................................................................................................................................................
....................................... White Y ........................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................... Yellow Li ....................
..............................................................................................................................................................
......................................... Light Blue
CAUTION
CAUTION
may result.
lamp or ohmmeter.

box and the short.
Testing For Voltage
Testing For Voltage
CAUTION
Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3735
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM

SENSOR INSPECTION
USING VOLTMETER
REMOVAL
INSTALLATION
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Crankshaft Position Sensor - Replacement Procedure
Procedure
Number: 99-36-010
Date: JULY, 1999
DESCRIPTION:
NOTE:
installed.
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Crankshaft Position Sensor - Replacement Procedure > Page 3743

Component Information > Specifications > Electrical Specifications
at 3,000 rpm 2,800 to 3,200 Hz

Component Information > Specifications > Electrical Specifications > Page 3746
at 3,000 rpm 2,800 to 3,200 Hz

CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
SENSOR INSPECTION
terminal 2 and 3.
wheel: 0.5 - 1.5 mm (0.020 - 0.059 in.)

voltage induced.
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Timing
Ring > Component Information > Diagrams
Ring > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3755
Crankshaft Position Timing Ring: Testing and Inspection
1. Remove the crankshaft sensor wheel. 2. Check the crankshaft sensor wheel for damage, cracks
and wear. Replace if necessary. 3. Check the clearance between crankshaft sensor wheel and
crank position sensor with depth gage.
Standard Value:
Clearance between crankshaft sensor wheel and crank position sensor:
0.5-1.5 mm (0.020-0.059 inch)
NOTE: -
Measure the depth of the top of sensor wheel tooth and the outside of transaxle housing.
- Measure the difference between sensor length and depth.
- Sensor length is the distance between the end of sensor and inner point of contacting face.
Ring > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3756
Crankshaft Position Timing Ring: Service and Repair
Refer to the illustration when removing and installing the crankshaft position sensor wheel.
Tighten mounting screws to 5-6 Nm (50-60 kg. cm, 3.7-4.4 ft. lbs.).
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector >
Component Information > Locations > Component Locations
Data Link Connector: Component Locations
I06
Component Location
DLC Pin Locations

Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 3761
Data Link Connector: Connector Locations
I06
Component Location
DLC Pin Locations

Data Link Connector: Diagram Information and Instructions


Connector View
CONNECTOR VIEW
Numbering Order
NUMBERING ORDER

Electrical Diagram
Harness Layouts
Harness Layout

B ..........................................................................................................................................................
......................................................................... Black L .......................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
Blue Br .................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................... Brown G ...............................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
...... Green Gr .......................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................ Gray Lg ...................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
....... Light Green O ..............................................................................................................................
................................................................................................... Orange P .........................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
............................... Pink R ..................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................... Red W .............................
..............................................................................................................................................................
....................................... White Y ........................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................... Yellow Li ....................
..............................................................................................................................................................
......................................... Light Blue
Data Link Connector: Diagnostic Aids
CAUTION
CAUTION
may result.
lamp or ohmmeter.

box and the short.
Testing For Voltage
Testing For Voltage
CAUTION
Data Link Details
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 00-40-009 > Aug > 00 > A/T - Shift Solenoid
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 00-40-009
Date: AUGUST, 2000
Model: ALL
symptoms:
^ Erratic shift
^ MIL illuminated
NOTE:
REPAIR PROCEDURE:
NOTE:
Step 6:
cable.
NOTE:
NOTE:
All models:
NOTE:


NOTE:

SONATA:
NOTE:
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 00-36-006 > Mar > 00 > TPS - Driveability
Concerns
Number 00-36-006
Date MARCH, 2000
DESCRIPTION:
^ Unstable idle
REPAIR INFORMATION:


PARTS INFORMATION

Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: >
tnt1660906-03 > Sep > 06 > A/T, Engine Controls - ECM/TCM Reset/Relearn Procedure
MODEL: All
DESCRIPTION:
as shown below.
VEHICLES AFFECTED:
^ All

HI-SCAN PROCEDURE:
^ Select vehicle
press "ENTER"

tnt1660906-03 > Sep > 06 > A/T, Engine Controls - ECM/TCM Reset/Relearn Procedure > Page 3797
NOTE:
upshifts.

NOTE:

tnt1640706-01 > Jul > 06 > Engine Controls - ECU Reprogramming Procedure
Procedure
Reprogramming
tnt1640706-01 > Jul > 06 > Engine Controls - ECU Reprogramming Procedure > Page 3803
it.
tnt1630506-01 > May > 06 > A/T Controls - PCM/TCM Reset/Relearn Adaptive Values
Adaptive Values

HI-SCAN PROCEDURE:
^ Select vehicle

tnt1630506-01 > May > 06 > A/T Controls - PCM/TCM Reset/Relearn Adaptive Values > Page 3810
NOTE:
upshifts.

NOTE:
06-40-005 > Mar > 06 > A/T Controls - Reset and Relearn Adaptive Values
Values
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 06-40-005
Date: MARCH, 2006
Model: ALL

VALUES
DESCRIPTION:

as shown below.
06-40-005 > Mar > 06 > A/T Controls - Reset and Relearn Adaptive Values > Page 3816
HI-SCAN PROCEDURE:
^ Select vehicle
NOTE:
06-40-005 > Mar > 06 > A/T Controls - Reset and Relearn Adaptive Values > Page 3817
completed as shown.
occur.
NOTE:

00-40-012 > Sep > 00 > A/T - Diagnostic Trouble Codes & Scanned Data
Data
Group TRANSAXLE
Number 00-40-012
Model ALL

DESCRIPTION:
NOTE:
00-40-012 > Sep > 00 > A/T - Diagnostic Trouble Codes & Scanned Data > Page 3822

ON
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 00-40-009
Date: AUGUST, 2000
Model: ALL
symptoms:
^ Erratic shift
^ MIL illuminated
NOTE:
REPAIR PROCEDURE:
NOTE:
Step 6:
cable.
NOTE:
NOTE:
All models:
NOTE:


NOTE:

SONATA:
NOTE:
00-00-001 > Jul > 00 > Scan Tool - Software Update Procedure
Group: GENERAL
Number: 00-00-001
Date: JULY, 2000
Model: ALL
DESCRIPTION
PROCEDURE:
fixes.
SOL card.
00-00-001 > Jul > 00 > Scan Tool - Software Update Procedure > Page 3834
Note:
cards.
utility.
INFO card
COM2.
software cards.
COM2.
software.
NOTE:
Number 00-36-006
Date MARCH, 2000
DESCRIPTION:
^ Unstable idle
REPAIR INFORMATION:


PARTS INFORMATION

98-36-006 > Aug > 98 > Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor - Diagnosis
Diagnosis
Number: 98-36-006
Date: AUGUST, 1998
Model: ALL
DESCRIPTION:
engine is cold.
98-36-006 > Aug > 98 > Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor - Diagnosis > Page 3849
DIAGNOSTIC HINTS:
USING A VOLTMETER:
USING A SCAN TOOL:
SENSOR INSPECTION:
resistance.
INSTALLATION:

98-36-001 > Apr > 98 > Air/Fuel Mixture - Trim Code Diagnosis
Number: 98-36-001
Date: APRIL, 1998
DESCRIPTION
^ Oxygen sensors
^ Air flow sensor
emissions.
the A/F ratio.
98-36-001 > Apr > 98 > Air/Fuel Mixture - Trim Code Diagnosis > Page 3856
performance.
the code was set.
stored in the PCM.
Note:

PCM.

load value.
Fuel Trim code.
and re-test.
this TSB.

Trim code.
and re-test.
TSB.
Note:
Note:
D. Select "Engine"
E. Select "Data"
the scan tool.
97-40-001-1 > Jul > 97 > A/T - Mutual Control Introduction
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 97-40-001-1
Date: JULY, 1997
Model: ALL
production dates.
DESCRIPTION:
ANALYSIS:
2. TPS above 1.2 V

rpm for 10 minutes
1997 Sonata 2.0L & 3.0L July 1, 1996

97-40-001-1 > Jul > 97 > A/T - Mutual Control Introduction > Page 3863
1997 Tiburon 1.8L & 2.0L July 1, 1996
PARTS INFORMATION:
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: >
tnt1660906-03 > Sep > 06 > A/T, Engine Controls - ECM/TCM Reset/Relearn Procedure
MODEL: All
DESCRIPTION:
as shown below.
VEHICLES AFFECTED:
^ All

HI-SCAN PROCEDURE:
^ Select vehicle
press "ENTER"

NOTE:
upshifts.

NOTE:

tnt1640706-01 > Jul > 06 > Engine Controls - ECU Reprogramming Procedure
Procedure
Reprogramming
it.
tnt1630506-01 > May > 06 > A/T Controls - PCM/TCM Reset/Relearn Adaptive Values
Adaptive Values

HI-SCAN PROCEDURE:
^ Select vehicle

NOTE:
upshifts.

NOTE:
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 06-40-005
> Mar > 06 > A/T Controls - Reset and Relearn Adaptive Values
Values
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 06-40-005
Date: MARCH, 2006
Model: ALL

VALUES
DESCRIPTION:

as shown below.
> Mar > 06 > A/T Controls - Reset and Relearn Adaptive Values > Page 3888
HI-SCAN PROCEDURE:
^ Select vehicle
NOTE:
> Mar > 06 > A/T Controls - Reset and Relearn Adaptive Values > Page 3889
completed as shown.
occur.
NOTE:

Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 00-40-012 >
Sep > 00 > A/T - Diagnostic Trouble Codes & Scanned Data
Data
Group TRANSAXLE
Number 00-40-012
Model ALL

DESCRIPTION:
NOTE:
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 00-40-012 >
Sep > 00 > A/T - Diagnostic Trouble Codes & Scanned Data > Page 3894

> Jul > 00 > Scan Tool - Software Update Procedure
Group: GENERAL
Number: 00-00-001
Date: JULY, 2000
Model: ALL
DESCRIPTION
PROCEDURE:
fixes.
SOL card.
> Jul > 00 > Scan Tool - Software Update Procedure > Page 3899
Note:
cards.
utility.
INFO card
COM2.
software cards.
COM2.
software.
NOTE:
> Aug > 98 > Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor - Diagnosis
Diagnosis
Number: 98-36-006
Date: AUGUST, 1998
Model: ALL
DESCRIPTION:
engine is cold.
> Aug > 98 > Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor - Diagnosis > Page 3909
DIAGNOSTIC HINTS:
USING A VOLTMETER:
USING A SCAN TOOL:
SENSOR INSPECTION:
resistance.
INSTALLATION:

> Apr > 98 > Air/Fuel Mixture - Trim Code Diagnosis
Number: 98-36-001
Date: APRIL, 1998
DESCRIPTION
^ Oxygen sensors
^ Air flow sensor
emissions.
the A/F ratio.
> Apr > 98 > Air/Fuel Mixture - Trim Code Diagnosis > Page 3916
performance.
the code was set.
stored in the PCM.
Note:

PCM.

load value.
Fuel Trim code.
and re-test.
this TSB.

Trim code.
and re-test.
TSB.
Note:
Note:
D. Select "Engine"
E. Select "Data"
the scan tool.
97-40-001-1 > Jul > 97 > A/T - Mutual Control Introduction
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 97-40-001-1
Date: JULY, 1997
Model: ALL
production dates.
DESCRIPTION:
ANALYSIS:
2. TPS above 1.2 V

rpm for 10 minutes
1997 Sonata 2.0L & 3.0L July 1, 1996

97-40-001-1 > Jul > 97 > A/T - Mutual Control Introduction > Page 3923
1997 Tiburon 1.8L & 2.0L July 1, 1996
PARTS INFORMATION:


Connector View
CONNECTOR VIEW
Numbering Order
NUMBERING ORDER

Electrical Diagram
Harness Layouts
Harness Layout

B ..........................................................................................................................................................
......................................................................... Black L .......................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
Blue Br .................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................... Brown G ...............................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
...... Green Gr .......................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................ Gray Lg ...................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
....... Light Green O ..............................................................................................................................
................................................................................................... Orange P .........................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
............................... Pink R ..................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................... Red W .............................
..............................................................................................................................................................
....................................... White Y ........................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................... Yellow Li ....................
..............................................................................................................................................................
......................................... Light Blue
CAUTION
CAUTION
may result.
lamp or ohmmeter.

box and the short.
Testing For Voltage
Testing For Voltage
CAUTION
SELF-DIAGNOSIS
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM

correctly.
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Speed Sensor >
Number: 98-36-001
Date: APRIL, 1998
DESCRIPTION
^ Oxygen sensors
^ Air flow sensor
emissions.
the A/F ratio.

performance.
the code was set.
stored in the PCM.
Note:

PCM.

load value.
Fuel Trim code.
and re-test.
this TSB.

Trim code.
and re-test.
TSB.
Note:
Note:
D. Select "Engine"
E. Select "Data"
the scan tool.
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator -
Electronic > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator -
Electronic: > 98-40-001 > Jan > 98 > A/T - Harsh 4-3 Downshift When Decelerating
Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator - Electronic: Customer Interest A/T - Harsh 4-3 Downshift When
Decelerating
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 98-40-001
Date: JANUARY, 1998
Model: ALL
DESCRIPTION:
158-194°F).
# 97-40-031.
5. Note:
as follows:
number shown.
Electronic: > 98-40-001 > Jan > 98 > A/T - Harsh 4-3 Downshift When Decelerating > Page 3956
PARTS INFORMATION:

Electronic: > 97-40-031 > Sep > 97 > A/T - Driveability Concerns
Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator - Electronic: Customer Interest A/T - Driveability Concerns
Number: 97-40-031
Group: TRANSAXLE

Model: ALL
during deceleration
^ Rough idle
Note:
Electronic: > 97-40-031 > Sep > 97 > A/T - Driveability Concerns > Page 3961
SONATA
EXCEL, SCOUPE
Electronic > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Idle Speed/Throttle
Actuator - Electronic: > 98-40-001 > Jan > 98 > A/T - Harsh 4-3 Downshift When Decelerating
Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator - Electronic: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Harsh 4-3 Downshift
When Decelerating
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 98-40-001
Date: JANUARY, 1998
Model: ALL
DESCRIPTION:
158-194°F).
# 97-40-031.
5. Note:
as follows:
number shown.
Actuator - Electronic: > 98-40-001 > Jan > 98 > A/T - Harsh 4-3 Downshift When Decelerating > Page 3969
PARTS INFORMATION:

Actuator - Electronic: > 97-40-031 > Sep > 97 > A/T - Driveability Concerns
Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator - Electronic: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Driveability Concerns
Number: 97-40-031
Group: TRANSAXLE

Model: ALL
during deceleration
^ Rough idle
Note:
Actuator - Electronic: > 97-40-031 > Sep > 97 > A/T - Driveability Concerns > Page 3974
SONATA
EXCEL, SCOUPE
Electronic > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3977
Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator - Electronic: Specifications IAC Motor
IAC Motor
Resistance between terminals 1 and 2 10.5 to 14 ohms at 68 deg F
between terminals 2 and 3 10.0 to 12.5 ohms at 68 deg F
Frequency 100 Hz
Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator - Electronic: Description and Operation
IDLE SPEED CONTROL (ISC) ACTUATOR
The idle speed control actuator is the double coils type and has two coils. The two coils are driven
by separate driver stages in the ECM. Depending on the pulse duty factor the equilibrium of the
magnetic forces of the two coils will result in different angles of the motor. In parallel to the throttle
valve, a bypass hose line is arranged where the idle speed actuator is inserted in.
Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator - Electronic: Testing and Inspection
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM

ACTUATOR INSPECTION
1. Disconnect the connector at the idle speed control actuator. 2. Measure the resistance between
terminals.
Standard value : Terminal 1 and 2 .... 10.5 - 14 Ohms Terminal 2 and 3 .... 10 - 12.5 Ohms [at 20°C
(68°F)]
3. Connect the connector at the idle speed control actuator.
DTC P1510, P1513, P1552, P1553 - Idle Speed Control (ISC) Actuator
HINT: Open or short circuit is observed in idle air control system when ignition switch is turned on.
DTC P0506, P0507 - Idle Speed Control System
HINT: Mechanical problems are observed in the idle air control system.
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component


KNOCK SENSOR (KS)
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
SENSOR INSPECTION


Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel
System) > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions


System) > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3996
Connector View
CONNECTOR VIEW
Numbering Order
NUMBERING ORDER

Electrical Diagram
Harness Layouts
Harness Layout

B ..........................................................................................................................................................
......................................................................... Black L .......................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
Blue Br .................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................... Brown G ...............................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
...... Green Gr .......................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................ Gray Lg ...................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
....... Light Green O ..............................................................................................................................
................................................................................................... Orange P .........................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
............................... Pink R ..................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................... Red W .............................
..............................................................................................................................................................
....................................... White Y ........................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................... Yellow Li ....................
..............................................................................................................................................................
......................................... Light Blue
CAUTION
CAUTION
may result.
lamp or ohmmeter.

box and the short.
Testing For Voltage
Testing For Voltage
CAUTION

System) > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4007
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM

Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Malfunction Indicator Lamp >
Concerns
Malfunction Indicator Lamp: Customer Interest TPS - Driveability Concerns
Number 00-36-006
Date MARCH, 2000
DESCRIPTION:
^ Unstable idle
REPAIR INFORMATION:


PARTS INFORMATION

Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 00-40-012 > Sep > 00 > A/T -
Diagnostic Trouble Codes & Scanned Data
Malfunction Indicator Lamp: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Diagnostic Trouble Codes &
Scanned Data
Group TRANSAXLE
Number 00-40-012
Model ALL

DESCRIPTION:
NOTE:
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 00-40-012 > Sep > 00 > A/T -
Diagnostic Trouble Codes & Scanned Data > Page 4023

Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 00-36-006 > Mar > 00 > TPS -
Malfunction Indicator Lamp: All Technical Service Bulletins TPS - Driveability Concerns
Number 00-36-006
Date MARCH, 2000
DESCRIPTION:
^ Unstable idle
REPAIR INFORMATION:


Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 00-36-006 > Mar > 00 > TPS -
PARTS INFORMATION

Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Malfunction Indicator Lamp: >
Shifting/DTC's Set
Number 03-40-022
Date 12-2003

P0717 & P0722
DESCRIPTION:

NOTE
REPAIR PROCEDURE:

PARTS INFORMATION
P0717/P0722 Set
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 00-40-011
Date: AUGUST, 2000

^ Harsh 1-2 shift

TCM):
Note 1:
Note 2:
SERVICE PROCEDURE:
98-40-002 > Apr > 98 > A/T - Intermittent Delayed, Erratic, Harsh Shifting
Harsh Shifting
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 98-40-002
Date: APRIL, 1998
Model: ALL
DESCRIPTION:
^ Harsh 1-2 shift
(TCM):
Note 1:
codes.
Note 2:
PG-B.

SERVICE PROCEDURE:

98-40-002 > Apr > 98 > A/T - Intermittent Delayed, Erratic, Harsh Shifting > Page 4046
97-40-025-1 > Aug > 97 > A/T - Driveability Concerns/DTC's Set/MIL ON
Set/MIL ON
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 97-40-025-1
Date: August, 1997
Model: ALL
DESCRIPTION:
^ Harsh 1-2 shift
Note 1:
*Fail-safe code
Note 2:
(DLC).
97-40-025-1 > Aug > 97 > A/T - Driveability Concerns/DTC's Set/MIL ON > Page 4051
SERVICE PROCEDURE:
B) Test Procedure:
shielded wiring.


PARTS INFORMATION
SERVICE PROCEDURE:
B) Test Procedure:
shielded wiring.

Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <-->
[Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine Controls - Oxygen Sensor
Function/Diagnosis
Function/Diagnosis
SERVICE TIP:
is malfunctioning.
characteristics:
^ Fuel injector(s)
^ Air flow sensor

Function/Diagnosis > Page 4081
^ Spark plugs

C. Select "Engine"
D. Select "Data"

sensor.
procedure.
Pro.
testing.
procedure.
frequency.
for 1998 Accent.

needed.
easier for you.
[Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Technical Service Bulletins: > 04-00-001 > May >
04 > Engine Controls - O2 Sensor Connector Guidelines
Guidelines
Group: GENERAL
Number: 04-00-001
Date: MAY, 2004
Model: ALL
DESCRIPTION:
WARNING:
[Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Technical Service Bulletins: > tnt1350903-001 >
Sep > 03 > Engine Controls - Oxygen Sensor Function/Diagnosis
Function/Diagnosis
SERVICE TIP:
is malfunctioning.
characteristics:
^ Fuel injector(s)
^ Air flow sensor

Sep > 03 > Engine Controls - Oxygen Sensor Function/Diagnosis > Page 4093
^ Spark plugs

C. Select "Engine"
D. Select "Data"

sensor.
procedure.
Pro.
testing.
procedure.
frequency.
for 1998 Accent.

needed.
easier for you.
[Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Technical Service Bulletins: > 99-30-001 > Jan >
99 > Oxygen Sensor Locations
Group: FUEL SYSTEM
Number: 99-30-001
Date: JANUARY, 1999
DESCRIPTION:
models.
vehicles.

99 > Oxygen Sensor Locations > Page 4100
PHOTO 1
99 > Oxygen Sensor Locations > Page 4101
PHOTO 2
[Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Technical Service Bulletins: > 98-09-006 > Jun >
98 > Oxygen Sensor - Offset Voltage Change
Number: 98-09-006
Date: JUNE, 1998
Model
Subject
DESCRIPTION:
for 1998 Accent.
[Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Technical Service Bulletins: > 98-09-006 > Jun >
98 > Oxygen Sensor - Offset Voltage Change > Page 4106
frequency.
[Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Technical Service Bulletins: > 98-36-001 > Apr >
98 > Air/Fuel Mixture - Trim Code Diagnosis
Number: 98-36-001
Date: APRIL, 1998
DESCRIPTION
^ Oxygen sensors
^ Air flow sensor
emissions.
the A/F ratio.
98 > Air/Fuel Mixture - Trim Code Diagnosis > Page 4111
performance.
the code was set.
stored in the PCM.
Note:

PCM.

load value.
Fuel Trim code.
and re-test.
this TSB.

Trim code.
and re-test.
TSB.
Note:
Note:
D. Select "Engine"
E. Select "Data"
the scan tool.
98 > Engine Fault Code - Diagnostic Manual Correction
Correction
Number: 98-36-002
Date: APRIL, 1998
Model: ALL
Subject
DESCRIPTION:
2500.
Affected Pages:
98 > Engine Fault Code - Diagnostic Manual Update
Update
Number: 98-36-003
Date: APRIL, 1998
Model: ALL
DESCRIPTION:
98 > Engine Fault Code - Diagnostic Manual Update > Page 4122
98 > Engine Fault Code - Diagnostic Manual Update > Page 4123
[Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Technical Service Bulletins: > 98-00-001 > Feb >
98 > Engine - Fault Code, Diagnostic Manual Correction
Correction
Group: GENERAL
Number: 98-00-001
Model: ALL
engine RPM is 2500.

P0137-3, and P0138-3.
[Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Technical Service Bulletins: > 97-36-004 > Dec >
97 > Oxygen Sensor- Operation/Diagnosis
Number: 97-36-004
Description
reduce emissions):
is malfunctioning.
characteristics:
^ Fuel injector(s)
^ Air flow sensor

^ Spark plugs
Note:
97 > Oxygen Sensor- Operation/Diagnosis > Page 4132
C. Select "Engine
D. Select "Data"

tool.
2500
NOTE:
resolution.
Note:
Tiburon.
offset.)

Note 1:
Note 2:
rpm.

Circuit Diagnosis
^ Open Circuit:
^ Short Circuit:

[Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Technical Service Bulletins: > Page 4144
Guidelines
Group: GENERAL
Number: 04-00-001
Date: MAY, 2004
Model: ALL
DESCRIPTION:
WARNING:
[Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Heated Oxygen
Sensor: > 97-40-031 > Sep > 97 > Technical Service Bulletins for Heated Oxygen Sensor: > 04-00-001 > May > 04 > Engine
Guidelines
Group: GENERAL
Number: 04-00-001
Date: MAY, 2004
Model: ALL
DESCRIPTION:
WARNING:
Sensor: > 97-40-031 > Sep > 97 > Technical Service Bulletins for Heated Oxygen Sensor: > tnt1350903-001 > Sep > 03 >
Engine Controls - Oxygen Sensor Function/Diagnosis
Function/Diagnosis
SERVICE TIP:
is malfunctioning.
characteristics:
^ Fuel injector(s)
^ Air flow sensor

Engine Controls - Oxygen Sensor Function/Diagnosis > Page 4158
^ Spark plugs

C. Select "Engine"
D. Select "Data"

sensor.
procedure.
Pro.
testing.
procedure.
frequency.
for 1998 Accent.

needed.
easier for you.
Sensor: > 97-40-031 > Sep > 97 > Technical Service Bulletins for Heated Oxygen Sensor: > 99-30-001 > Jan > 99 > Oxygen
Sensor Locations
Group: FUEL SYSTEM
Number: 99-30-001
Date: JANUARY, 1999
DESCRIPTION:
models.
vehicles.

PHOTO 1
PHOTO 2
Sensor: > 97-40-031 > Sep > 97 > Technical Service Bulletins for Heated Oxygen Sensor: > 98-09-006 > Jun > 98 > Oxygen
Number: 98-09-006
Date: JUNE, 1998
Model
Subject
DESCRIPTION:
for 1998 Accent.
Sensor: > 97-40-031 > Sep > 97 > Technical Service Bulletins for Heated Oxygen Sensor: > 98-09-006 > Jun > 98 > Oxygen
frequency.
Sensor: > 97-40-031 > Sep > 97 > Technical Service Bulletins for Heated Oxygen Sensor: > 98-36-001 > Apr > 98 > Air/Fuel
Number: 98-36-001
Date: APRIL, 1998
DESCRIPTION
^ Oxygen sensors
^ Air flow sensor
emissions.
the A/F ratio.
performance.
the code was set.
stored in the PCM.
Note:

PCM.

load value.
Fuel Trim code.
and re-test.
this TSB.

Trim code.
and re-test.
TSB.
Note:
Note:
D. Select "Engine"
E. Select "Data"
the scan tool.
Sensor: > 97-40-031 > Sep > 97 > Technical Service Bulletins for Heated Oxygen Sensor: > 98-36-002 > Apr > 98 > Engine
Fault Code - Diagnostic Manual Correction
Correction
Number: 98-36-002
Date: APRIL, 1998
Model: ALL
Subject
DESCRIPTION:
2500.
Affected Pages:
Fault Code - Diagnostic Manual Update
Update
Number: 98-36-003
Date: APRIL, 1998
Model: ALL
DESCRIPTION:
Fault Code - Diagnostic Manual Update > Page 4187
Fault Code - Diagnostic Manual Update > Page 4188
Sensor: > 97-40-031 > Sep > 97 > Technical Service Bulletins for Heated Oxygen Sensor: > 98-00-001 > Feb > 98 > Engine
- Fault Code, Diagnostic Manual Correction
Correction
Group: GENERAL
Number: 98-00-001
Model: ALL
engine RPM is 2500.

P0137-3, and P0138-3.
Sensor: > 97-40-031 > Sep > 97 > Technical Service Bulletins for Heated Oxygen Sensor: > 97-36-004 > Dec > 97 >
Number: 97-36-004
Description
reduce emissions):
is malfunctioning.
characteristics:
^ Fuel injector(s)
^ Air flow sensor

^ Spark plugs
Note:
Oxygen Sensor- Operation/Diagnosis > Page 4197
C. Select "Engine
D. Select "Data"

tool.
2500
NOTE:
resolution.
Note:
Tiburon.
offset.)

Note 1:
Note 2:
rpm.

Circuit Diagnosis
^ Open Circuit:
^ Short Circuit:

Sensor: > Page 4209
Update
Number: 98-36-003
Date: APRIL, 1998
Model: ALL
DESCRIPTION:
Sensor: > Page 4210
Sensor: > Page 4211
Sensor: > Page 4212
Correction
Number: 98-36-002
Date: APRIL, 1998
Model: ALL
Subject
DESCRIPTION:
2500.
Affected Pages:
[Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Component Information > Locations
IGNITION LOCK
[Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Component Information > Specifications
Air cleaner body
[Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4217

REMOVAL
INSTALLATION

[Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Specifications > Component Information > Description and Operation
[Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Specifications > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page
4223
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
4224
fuel tank cap.
4225

[Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Specifications > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins >
Customer Interest for Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: > 97-40-031 > Sep > 97 > A/T - Driveability Concerns
Number: 97-40-031
Group: TRANSAXLE

Model: ALL
during deceleration
^ Rough idle
Note:
Customer Interest for Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: > 97-40-031 > Sep > 97 > A/T - Driveability Concerns > Page 4233
SONATA
EXCEL, SCOUPE
[Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Specifications > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All
Technical Service Bulletins for Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: > 97-40-031 > Sep > 97 > A/T - Driveability Concerns
Number: 97-40-031
Group: TRANSAXLE

Model: ALL
during deceleration
^ Rough idle
Note:
Technical Service Bulletins for Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: > 97-40-031 > Sep > 97 > A/T - Driveability Concerns >
Page 4241
Page 4242
SONATA
Page 4243
EXCEL, SCOUPE
[Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4244
Blower Motor: Service and Repair Removal and Installation
1. Remove the main crash pad assembly.
2. Disconnect the resistor and blower motor connector. 3. Remove 3 nuts (or bolts) from the blower
unit mounting bracket. 4. Pull out the blower unit and then disconnect the fresh/recirculation
vacuum connector from the vacuum motor. 5. Installation is the reverse order of removal.
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules -
Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins >
Customer Interest: > 00-40-009 > Aug > 00 > A/T - Shift Solenoid Incorrect Operation/MIL ON
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 00-40-009
Date: AUGUST, 2000
Model: ALL
symptoms:
^ Erratic shift
^ MIL illuminated
NOTE:
REPAIR PROCEDURE:
NOTE:
Step 6:
cable.
NOTE:
NOTE:
All models:
NOTE:


NOTE:

SONATA:
NOTE:
Number 00-36-006
Date MARCH, 2000
DESCRIPTION:
^ Unstable idle
REPAIR INFORMATION:


PARTS INFORMATION

Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All
MODEL: All
DESCRIPTION:
as shown below.
VEHICLES AFFECTED:
^ All

HI-SCAN PROCEDURE:
^ Select vehicle
press "ENTER"

NOTE:
upshifts.

NOTE:

Procedure
Reprogramming
it.
Adaptive Values

HI-SCAN PROCEDURE:
^ Select vehicle

NOTE:
upshifts.

NOTE:
Adaptive Values
Values
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 06-40-005
Date: MARCH, 2006
Model: ALL

VALUES
DESCRIPTION:

as shown below.
HI-SCAN PROCEDURE:
^ Select vehicle
NOTE:
completed as shown.
occur.
NOTE:

Scanned Data
Data
Group TRANSAXLE
Number 00-40-012
Model ALL

DESCRIPTION:
NOTE:

Operation/MIL ON
ON
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 00-40-009
Date: AUGUST, 2000
Model: ALL
symptoms:
^ Erratic shift
^ MIL illuminated
NOTE:
REPAIR PROCEDURE:
NOTE:
Step 6:
cable.
NOTE:
NOTE:
All models:
NOTE:


NOTE:

SONATA:
NOTE:
Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 00-00-001 > Jul > 00 > Scan Tool - Software Update Procedure
Group: GENERAL
Number: 00-00-001
Date: JULY, 2000
Model: ALL
DESCRIPTION
PROCEDURE:
fixes.
SOL card.
Page 4304
Page 4305
Note:
cards.
utility.
Page 4306
INFO card
COM2.
Page 4307
software cards.
COM2.
Page 4308
software.
NOTE:
Page 4309
Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 00-36-006 > Mar > 00 > TPS - Driveability Concerns
Number 00-36-006
Date MARCH, 2000
DESCRIPTION:
^ Unstable idle
REPAIR INFORMATION:


Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 00-36-006 > Mar > 00 > TPS - Driveability Concerns > Page 4314
PARTS INFORMATION

Diagnosis
Diagnosis
Number: 98-36-006
Date: AUGUST, 1998
Model: ALL
DESCRIPTION:
engine is cold.
DIAGNOSTIC HINTS:
USING A VOLTMETER:
USING A SCAN TOOL:
SENSOR INSPECTION:
resistance.
INSTALLATION:

Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 98-36-001 > Apr > 98 > Air/Fuel Mixture - Trim Code Diagnosis
Number: 98-36-001
Date: APRIL, 1998
DESCRIPTION
^ Oxygen sensors
^ Air flow sensor
emissions.
the A/F ratio.
Page 4326
performance.
the code was set.
stored in the PCM.
Note:

Page 4327
PCM.

load value.
Fuel Trim code.
and re-test.
this TSB.

Page 4328
Trim code.
and re-test.
TSB.
Note:
Note:
D. Select "Engine"
E. Select "Data"
the scan tool.
Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 97-40-001-1 > Jul > 97 > A/T - Mutual Control Introduction
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 97-40-001-1
Date: JULY, 1997
Model: ALL
production dates.
DESCRIPTION:
ANALYSIS:
2. TPS above 1.2 V

rpm for 10 minutes
1997 Sonata 2.0L & 3.0L July 1, 1996

Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 97-40-001-1 > Jul > 97 > A/T - Mutual Control Introduction > Page
4333
1997 Tiburon 1.8L & 2.0L July 1, 1996
PARTS INFORMATION:
MODEL: All
DESCRIPTION:
as shown below.
VEHICLES AFFECTED:
^ All

HI-SCAN PROCEDURE:
^ Select vehicle
press "ENTER"

NOTE:
upshifts.

NOTE:

Procedure
Procedure
Reprogramming
it.
Adaptive Values
Adaptive Values

HI-SCAN PROCEDURE:
^ Select vehicle

NOTE:
upshifts.

NOTE:
Values
Values
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 06-40-005
Date: MARCH, 2006
Model: ALL

VALUES
DESCRIPTION:

as shown below.
Values > Page 4358
HI-SCAN PROCEDURE:
^ Select vehicle
NOTE:
Values > Page 4359
completed as shown.
occur.
NOTE:

Data
Data
Group TRANSAXLE
Number 00-40-012
Model ALL

DESCRIPTION:
NOTE:
Data > Page 4364

Other Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 00-00-001 > Jul > 00 > Scan Tool - Software Update Procedure
Group: GENERAL
Number: 00-00-001
Date: JULY, 2000
Model: ALL
DESCRIPTION
PROCEDURE:
fixes.
SOL card.
Page 4369
Page 4370
Note:
cards.
utility.
Page 4371
INFO card
COM2.
Page 4372
software cards.
COM2.
Page 4373
software.
NOTE:
Page 4374
Diagnosis
Diagnosis
Number: 98-36-006
Date: AUGUST, 1998
Model: ALL
DESCRIPTION:
engine is cold.
DIAGNOSTIC HINTS:
USING A VOLTMETER:
USING A SCAN TOOL:
SENSOR INSPECTION:
resistance.
INSTALLATION:

Other Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 98-36-001 > Apr > 98 > Air/Fuel Mixture - Trim Code Diagnosis
Number: 98-36-001
Date: APRIL, 1998
DESCRIPTION
^ Oxygen sensors
^ Air flow sensor
emissions.
the A/F ratio.
4386
performance.
the code was set.
stored in the PCM.
Note:

4387
PCM.

load value.
Fuel Trim code.
and re-test.
this TSB.

4388
Trim code.
and re-test.
TSB.
Note:
Note:
D. Select "Engine"
E. Select "Data"
the scan tool.
Other Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 97-40-001-1 > Jul > 97 > A/T - Mutual Control Introduction
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 97-40-001-1
Date: JULY, 1997
Model: ALL
production dates.
DESCRIPTION:
ANALYSIS:
2. TPS above 1.2 V

rpm for 10 minutes
1997 Sonata 2.0L & 3.0L July 1, 1996

Other Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 97-40-001-1 > Jul > 97 > A/T - Mutual Control Introduction > Page
4393
1997 Tiburon 1.8L & 2.0L July 1, 1996
PARTS INFORMATION:
Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page
4394
Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions


Connector View
CONNECTOR VIEW
Numbering Order
NUMBERING ORDER

Electrical Diagram
Harness Layouts
Harness Layout

B ..........................................................................................................................................................
......................................................................... Black L .......................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
Blue Br .................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................... Brown G ...............................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
...... Green Gr .......................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................ Gray Lg ...................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
....... Light Green O ..............................................................................................................................
................................................................................................... Orange P .........................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
............................... Pink R ..................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................... Red W .............................
..............................................................................................................................................................
....................................... White Y ........................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................... Yellow Li ....................
..............................................................................................................................................................
......................................... Light Blue
CAUTION
CAUTION
may result.
lamp or ohmmeter.

box and the short.
Testing For Voltage
Testing For Voltage
CAUTION
Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4408
SELF-DIAGNOSIS
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM

correctly.
Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram


Connector View
CONNECTOR VIEW
Numbering Order
NUMBERING ORDER

Electrical Diagram
Harness Layouts
Harness Layout

B ..........................................................................................................................................................
......................................................................... Black L .......................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
Blue Br .................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................... Brown G ...............................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
...... Green Gr .......................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................ Gray Lg ...................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
....... Light Green O ..............................................................................................................................
................................................................................................... Orange P .........................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
............................... Pink R ..................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................... Red W .............................
..............................................................................................................................................................
....................................... White Y ........................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................... Yellow Li ....................
..............................................................................................................................................................
......................................... Light Blue
CAUTION
CAUTION
may result.
lamp or ohmmeter.

box and the short.
Testing For Voltage
Testing For Voltage
CAUTION

Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4426
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM

Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4427
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Rough Road Sensor >
Acceleration Sensor
connector No. 80

ACCELERATION SENSOR
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM

USING VOLTMETER
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches -
Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Customer Interest for Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: > 97-40-031 > Sep > 97 > A/T - Driveability Concerns
Number: 97-40-031
Group: TRANSAXLE

Model: ALL
during deceleration
^ Rough idle
Note:
Bulletins > Customer Interest for Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: > 97-40-031 > Sep > 97 > A/T - Driveability Concerns >
Page 4444
Page 4445
SONATA
Page 4446
EXCEL, SCOUPE
Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: > 97-40-031 > Sep > 97 > A/T - Driveability
Concerns
Number: 97-40-031
Group: TRANSAXLE

Model: ALL
during deceleration
^ Rough idle
Note:
SONATA
EXCEL, SCOUPE
Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Air/Fuel
Number: 98-36-001
Date: APRIL, 1998
DESCRIPTION
^ Oxygen sensors
^ Air flow sensor
emissions.
the A/F ratio.
performance.
the code was set.
stored in the PCM.
Note:

PCM.

load value.
Fuel Trim code.
and re-test.
this TSB.

Trim code.
and re-test.
TSB.
Note:
Note:
D. Select "Engine"
E. Select "Data"
the scan tool.
Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page
4462
MAF meter
Type Hot film type
connector No. 41
at 3,000 rpm 1.3 to 2.0 V

Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page
4463
Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions


Instructions > Page 4466
Connector View
CONNECTOR VIEW
Numbering Order
NUMBERING ORDER

Electrical Diagram
Harness Layouts
Harness Layout

B ..........................................................................................................................................................
......................................................................... Black L .......................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
Blue Br .................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................... Brown G ...............................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
...... Green Gr .......................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................ Gray Lg ...................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
....... Light Green O ..............................................................................................................................
................................................................................................... Orange P .........................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
............................... Pink R ..................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................... Red W .............................
..............................................................................................................................................................
....................................... White Y ........................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................... Yellow Li ....................
..............................................................................................................................................................
......................................... Light Blue
CAUTION
CAUTION
may result.
lamp or ohmmeter.

box and the short.
Testing For Voltage
Testing For Voltage
CAUTION

Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4477
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
connector.
or ECM.
comparison.
USING VOLTMETER
to 198°F).
Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Specifications

Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4484
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
USING VOLTMETER
Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor - Diagnosis
Number: 98-36-006
Date: AUGUST, 1998
Model: ALL
DESCRIPTION:
engine is cold.
Technical Service Bulletins > Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor - Diagnosis > Page 4492
DIAGNOSTIC HINTS:
USING A VOLTMETER:
USING A SCAN TOOL:
SENSOR INSPECTION:
resistance.
INSTALLATION:

Number: 98-36-003
Date: APRIL, 1998
Model: ALL
DESCRIPTION:
Number: 98-36-001
Date: APRIL, 1998
DESCRIPTION
^ Oxygen sensors
^ Air flow sensor
emissions.
the A/F ratio.
performance.
the code was set.
stored in the PCM.
Note:

PCM.

load value.
Fuel Trim code.
and re-test.
this TSB.

Trim code.
and re-test.
TSB.
Note:
Note:
D. Select "Engine"
E. Select "Data"
the scan tool.
8.16 to 10.74 K ohms at -10 deg C

1.059 to 1.281 K ohms at 40 deg C
0.538 to 0.650 K ohms at 60 deg C
0.298 to 0.322 K ohms at 80 deg C
0.219 to 0.243 K ohms at 90 deg C
connector No. 78
3.44 V at 20 deg C
2.72 V at 40 deg C
1.25 V at 80 deg C
8.16 to 10.74 K ohms at -10 deg C

1.059 to 1.281 K ohms at 40 deg C
0.538 to 0.650 K ohms at 60 deg C
0.298 to 0.322 K ohms at 80 deg C
0.219 to 0.243 K ohms at 90 deg C
connector No. 78
3.44 V at 20 deg C
2.72 V at 40 deg C
1.25 V at 80 deg C


Connector View
CONNECTOR VIEW
Numbering Order
NUMBERING ORDER

Electrical Diagram
Harness Layouts
Harness Layout

B ..........................................................................................................................................................
......................................................................... Black L .......................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
Blue Br .................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................... Brown G ...............................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
...... Green Gr .......................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................ Gray Lg ...................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
....... Light Green O ..............................................................................................................................
................................................................................................... Orange P .........................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
............................... Pink R ..................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................... Red W .............................
..............................................................................................................................................................
....................................... White Y ........................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................... Yellow Li ....................
..............................................................................................................................................................
......................................... Light Blue
CAUTION
CAUTION
may result.
lamp or ohmmeter.

box and the short.
Testing For Voltage
Testing For Voltage
CAUTION
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM

SENSOR INSPECTION
USING VOLTMETER

REMOVAL
INSTALLATION
Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins >
Procedure
Number: 99-36-010
Date: JULY, 1999
DESCRIPTION:
NOTE:
installed.
Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins >

Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Specifications > Electrical
Specifications
at 3,000 rpm 2,800 to 3,200 Hz

Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Specifications > Electrical
at 3,000 rpm 2,800 to 3,200 Hz

Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4533
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
SENSOR INSPECTION
terminal 2 and 3.
wheel: 0.5 - 1.5 mm (0.020 - 0.059 in.)

voltage induced.
Computers and Control Systems > Engine Speed Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Air/Fuel
Number: 98-36-001
Date: APRIL, 1998
DESCRIPTION
^ Oxygen sensors
^ Air flow sensor
emissions.
the A/F ratio.
performance.
the code was set.
stored in the PCM.
Note:

PCM.

load value.
Fuel Trim code.
and re-test.
this TSB.

Trim code.
and re-test.
TSB.
Note:
Note:
D. Select "Engine"
E. Select "Data"
the scan tool.
Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor <--> [Intake Air Temperature Sensor] > Component
Number: 98-36-001
Date: APRIL, 1998
DESCRIPTION
^ Oxygen sensors
^ Air flow sensor
emissions.
the A/F ratio.
performance.
the code was set.
stored in the PCM.
Note:

PCM.

load value.
Fuel Trim code.
and re-test.
this TSB.

Trim code.
and re-test.
TSB.
Note:
Note:
D. Select "Engine"
E. Select "Data"
the scan tool.
IAT sensor
2.4 to 2.8 V at 20 deg C
1.6 to 2.0 V at 40 deg C
0.5 to 0.9 V at 80 deg C

Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Specifications > Electrical Specifications

Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Specifications > Electrical Specifications >
Page 4558

Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4559
KNOCK SENSOR (KS)
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
SENSOR INSPECTION


Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Engine Controls - Oxygen Sensor Function/Diagnosis
Function/Diagnosis
SERVICE TIP:
is malfunctioning.
characteristics:
^ Fuel injector(s)
^ Air flow sensor

Service Bulletins > Engine Controls - Oxygen Sensor Function/Diagnosis > Page 4567
^ Spark plugs

C. Select "Engine"
D. Select "Data"

sensor.
procedure.
Pro.
testing.
procedure.
frequency.
for 1998 Accent.

needed.
easier for you.
Service Bulletins > Technical Service Bulletins for Heated Oxygen Sensor: > 04-00-001 > May > 04 > Engine Controls - O2
Sensor Connector Guidelines
Guidelines
Group: GENERAL
Number: 04-00-001
Date: MAY, 2004
Model: ALL
DESCRIPTION:
WARNING:
Service Bulletins > Technical Service Bulletins for Heated Oxygen Sensor: > tnt1350903-001 > Sep > 03 > Engine Controls -
Oxygen Sensor Function/Diagnosis
Function/Diagnosis
SERVICE TIP:
is malfunctioning.
characteristics:
^ Fuel injector(s)
^ Air flow sensor

Oxygen Sensor Function/Diagnosis > Page 4579
^ Spark plugs

C. Select "Engine"
D. Select "Data"

sensor.
procedure.
Pro.
testing.
procedure.
frequency.
for 1998 Accent.

needed.
easier for you.
Service Bulletins > Technical Service Bulletins for Heated Oxygen Sensor: > 99-30-001 > Jan > 99 > Oxygen Sensor
Locations
Group: FUEL SYSTEM
Number: 99-30-001
Date: JANUARY, 1999
DESCRIPTION:
models.
vehicles.

PHOTO 1
PHOTO 2
Service Bulletins > Technical Service Bulletins for Heated Oxygen Sensor: > 98-09-006 > Jun > 98 > Oxygen Sensor - Offset
Voltage Change
Number: 98-09-006
Date: JUNE, 1998
Model
Subject
DESCRIPTION:
for 1998 Accent.
Service Bulletins > Technical Service Bulletins for Heated Oxygen Sensor: > 98-09-006 > Jun > 98 > Oxygen Sensor - Offset
Voltage Change > Page 4592
frequency.
Service Bulletins > Technical Service Bulletins for Heated Oxygen Sensor: > 98-36-001 > Apr > 98 > Air/Fuel Mixture - Trim
Code Diagnosis
Number: 98-36-001
Date: APRIL, 1998
DESCRIPTION
^ Oxygen sensors
^ Air flow sensor
emissions.
the A/F ratio.
performance.
the code was set.
stored in the PCM.
Note:

PCM.

load value.
Fuel Trim code.
and re-test.
this TSB.

Trim code.
and re-test.
TSB.
Note:
Note:
D. Select "Engine"
E. Select "Data"
the scan tool.
Service Bulletins > Technical Service Bulletins for Heated Oxygen Sensor: > 98-36-002 > Apr > 98 > Engine Fault Code -
Diagnostic Manual Correction
Correction
Number: 98-36-002
Date: APRIL, 1998
Model: ALL
Subject
DESCRIPTION:
2500.
Affected Pages:
Diagnostic Manual Update
Update
Number: 98-36-003
Date: APRIL, 1998
Model: ALL
DESCRIPTION:
Diagnostic Manual Update > Page 4608
Diagnostic Manual Update > Page 4609
Service Bulletins > Technical Service Bulletins for Heated Oxygen Sensor: > 98-00-001 > Feb > 98 > Engine - Fault Code,
Diagnostic Manual Correction
Correction
Group: GENERAL
Number: 98-00-001
Model: ALL
engine RPM is 2500.

P0137-3, and P0138-3.
Service Bulletins > Technical Service Bulletins for Heated Oxygen Sensor: > 97-36-004 > Dec > 97 > Oxygen Sensor-
Operation/Diagnosis
Number: 97-36-004
Description
reduce emissions):
is malfunctioning.
characteristics:
^ Fuel injector(s)
^ Air flow sensor

^ Spark plugs
Note:
Operation/Diagnosis > Page 4618
C. Select "Engine
D. Select "Data"

tool.
2500
NOTE:
resolution.
Note:
Tiburon.
offset.)

Note 1:
Note 2:
rpm.

Circuit Diagnosis
^ Open Circuit:
^ Short Circuit:

Service Bulletins > Technical Service Bulletins for Heated Oxygen Sensor: > Page 4630
Guidelines
Group: GENERAL
Number: 04-00-001
Date: MAY, 2004
Model: ALL
DESCRIPTION:
WARNING:
Update
Number: 98-36-003
Date: APRIL, 1998
Model: ALL
DESCRIPTION:
Correction
Number: 98-36-002
Date: APRIL, 1998
Model: ALL
Subject
DESCRIPTION:
2500.
Affected Pages:
Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Specifications
> Electrical Specifications
Note: Key OFF
> Electrical Specifications > Page 4637
Note: Key OFF
> Page 4638
> Page 4639
> Page 4640
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
> Page 4641
SENSOR INSPECTION

> Page 4642
> Page 4643
Faulty injector.
USING VOLTMETER
NOTE:
> Page 4644
HINT: -
Computers and Control Systems > Rough Road Sensor > Component Information > Specifications
Acceleration Sensor
connector No. 80

Computers and Control Systems > Rough Road Sensor > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4648
ACCELERATION SENSOR
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM

USING VOLTMETER
Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins >
Number 00-36-006
Date MARCH, 2000
DESCRIPTION:
^ Unstable idle
REPAIR INFORMATION:


PARTS INFORMATION

Customer Interest: > 97-40-031 > Sep > 97 > A/T - Driveability Concerns
Number: 97-40-031
Group: TRANSAXLE

Model: ALL
during deceleration
^ Rough idle
Note:
Customer Interest: > 97-40-031 > Sep > 97 > A/T - Driveability Concerns > Page 4665
SONATA
EXCEL, SCOUPE
Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All
Technical Service Bulletins for Throttle Position Sensor: > 00-36-006 > Mar > 00 > TPS - Driveability Concerns
Number 00-36-006
Date MARCH, 2000
DESCRIPTION:
^ Unstable idle
REPAIR INFORMATION:


Technical Service Bulletins for Throttle Position Sensor: > 00-36-006 > Mar > 00 > TPS - Driveability Concerns > Page 4673
PARTS INFORMATION

Technical Service Bulletins for Throttle Position Sensor: > 98-36-001 > Apr > 98 > Air/Fuel Mixture - Trim Code Diagnosis
Number: 98-36-001
Date: APRIL, 1998
DESCRIPTION
^ Oxygen sensors
^ Air flow sensor
emissions.
the A/F ratio.
Technical Service Bulletins for Throttle Position Sensor: > 98-36-001 > Apr > 98 > Air/Fuel Mixture - Trim Code Diagnosis >
Page 4678
performance.
the code was set.
stored in the PCM.
Note:

Page 4679
PCM.

load value.
Fuel Trim code.
and re-test.
this TSB.

Page 4680
Trim code.
and re-test.
TSB.
Note:
Note:
D. Select "Engine"
E. Select "Data"
the scan tool.
Technical Service Bulletins for Throttle Position Sensor: > 97-40-031 > Sep > 97 > A/T - Driveability Concerns
Number: 97-40-031
Group: TRANSAXLE

Model: ALL
during deceleration
^ Rough idle
Note:
Technical Service Bulletins for Throttle Position Sensor: > 97-40-031 > Sep > 97 > A/T - Driveability Concerns > Page 4685
SONATA
EXCEL, SCOUPE
Technical Service Bulletins for Throttle Position Sensor: > 97-40-004 > Feb > 97 > Engine/Transmission Controls - Service
Manual Revisions
Manual Revisions
Number 97-40-004
Date 02-1997

DESCRIPTION:
are shown.
Other Service Bulletins for Throttle Position Sensor: > 98-36-001 > Apr > 98 > Air/Fuel Mixture - Trim Code Diagnosis
Number: 98-36-001
Date: APRIL, 1998
DESCRIPTION
^ Oxygen sensors
^ Air flow sensor
emissions.
the A/F ratio.
Other Service Bulletins for Throttle Position Sensor: > 98-36-001 > Apr > 98 > Air/Fuel Mixture - Trim Code Diagnosis >
Page 4697
performance.
the code was set.
stored in the PCM.
Note:

Page 4698
PCM.

load value.
Fuel Trim code.
and re-test.
this TSB.

Page 4699
Trim code.
and re-test.
TSB.
Note:
Note:
D. Select "Engine"
E. Select "Data"
the scan tool.
Other Service Bulletins for Throttle Position Sensor: > 97-40-004 > Feb > 97 > Engine/Transmission Controls - Service
Manual Revisions
Manual Revisions
Number 97-40-004
Date 02-1997

DESCRIPTION:
are shown.
Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page
4704
2.3 to 3.4 K ohms
Note: when idling
connector No. 73
4.25 to 4.8 V

4705
4706
4707
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
4708
SENSOR INSPECTION
sensor.

4709
turned on.
USING VOLTMETER
Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-AT-013 > Jul > 09 > A/T - MIL ON/DTC's P0705/P0707/P0708/No Start In P/N
Group TRANSAXLE
Number 09-AT-013
Date JULY, 2009

P0707, P0708
DESCRIPTION:
range switch.
PARTS INFORMATION
Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-AT-013 > Jul > 09 > A/T - MIL ON/DTC's P0705/P0707/P0708/No Start In P/N > Page
4718
Service Procedure
c below.
4719
4720

4721
Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 05-40-016 > Oct > 05 > A/T - No Movement in 'DRIVE' or 'REVERSE'

'REVERSE'
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 05-40-016
Date: OCTOBER, 2005
Model: ALL
DESCRIPTION:
shown below:
REPAIR PROCEDURE:
NOTE:

Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 05-40-016 > Oct > 05 > A/T - No Movement in 'DRIVE' or 'REVERSE' > Page 4726

^ Vehicle
Go to Step 12.
NOTE:

Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 99-40-017 > Dec > 99 > A/T - Shift Lever Will Not Shift Out Of Park
Park
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 99-40-017
DESCRIPTION:
NOTE:
SERVICE PROCEDURE:
column).

Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 99-40-017 > Dec > 99 > A/T - Shift Lever Will Not Shift Out Of Park > Page 4734
module.
PARTS INFORMATION:
Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: > 09-AT-013 > Jul > 09 > A/T - MIL
ON/DTC's P0705/P0707/P0708/No Start In P/N
Group TRANSAXLE
Number 09-AT-013
Date JULY, 2009

P0707, P0708
DESCRIPTION:
range switch.
PARTS INFORMATION
ON/DTC's P0705/P0707/P0708/No Start In P/N > Page 4742
Service Procedure
c below.

Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: > tnt1720307-02 > Mar > 07 > A/T
Controls - Neutral Position Switch Adaptive Relearn

Controls - Neutral Position Switch Adaptive Relearn > Page 4750
Press "ENTER."


Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: > tnt1581105-02 > Nov > 05 > A/T - No
Movement In Drive/Reverse

Drive/Reverse
MODEL: ALL
DESCRIPTION:
shown below:
REPAIR PROCEDURE:
NOTE:
Movement In Drive/Reverse > Page 4756

(10-12 Nm, 100-120 kg.cm)
(12-13 Nm, 120-130 kg.cm)

^ Vehicle
inserted.
Go to Step 12.
inserted.
NOTE:
replace the TCM.

Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: > 05-40-016 > Oct > 05 > A/T - No
Movement in 'DRIVE' or 'REVERSE'

Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 05-40-016
Date: OCTOBER, 2005
Model: ALL
DESCRIPTION:
shown below:
REPAIR PROCEDURE:
NOTE:

Movement in 'DRIVE' or 'REVERSE' > Page 4763

^ Vehicle
Go to Step 12.
NOTE:

Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: > 99-40-017 > Dec > 99 > A/T - Shift
Lever Will Not Shift Out Of Park
Out Of Park
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 99-40-017
DESCRIPTION:
NOTE:
SERVICE PROCEDURE:
column).

Lever Will Not Shift Out Of Park > Page 4771
module.
PARTS INFORMATION:
Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: > tnt1720307-02 > Mar > 07 > A/T Controls
- Neutral Position Switch Adaptive Relearn

- Neutral Position Switch Adaptive Relearn > Page 4779
Press "ENTER."


Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: > tnt1581105-02 > Nov > 05 > A/T - No

Drive/Reverse
MODEL: ALL
DESCRIPTION:
shown below:
REPAIR PROCEDURE:
NOTE:

(10-12 Nm, 100-120 kg.cm)
(12-13 Nm, 120-130 kg.cm)

^ Vehicle
inserted.
Go to Step 12.
inserted.
NOTE:
replace the TCM.

Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins >
Customer Interest: > 03-40-022 > Dec > 03 > A/T - Fail Safe Mode/Erratic/Hard Shifting/DTC's Set
Number 03-40-022
Date 12-2003

P0717 & P0722
DESCRIPTION:

NOTE
REPAIR PROCEDURE:
Customer Interest: > 03-40-022 > Dec > 03 > A/T - Fail Safe Mode/Erratic/Hard Shifting/DTC's Set > Page 4799

PARTS INFORMATION
Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All
Technical Service Bulletins: > 03-40-022 > Dec > 03 > A/T - Fail Safe Mode/Erratic/Hard Shifting/DTC's Set
Shifting/DTC's Set
Number 03-40-022
Date 12-2003

P0717 & P0722
DESCRIPTION:

NOTE
REPAIR PROCEDURE:
Technical Service Bulletins: > 03-40-022 > Dec > 03 > A/T - Fail Safe Mode/Erratic/Hard Shifting/DTC's Set > Page 4806

Technical Service Bulletins: > 03-40-022 > Dec > 03 > A/T - Fail Safe Mode/Erratic/Hard Shifting/DTC's Set > Page 4807
PARTS INFORMATION
Other Service Bulletins for Vehicle Speed Sensor: > 97-60-007 > Nov > 97 > Deck Lid/Hatch - Will Not Stay Open
Spoiler: All Technical Service Bulletins Deck Lid/Hatch - Will Not Stay Open
Group: BODY
Number: 97-60-007
Model: ALL 1997 VEHICLES
Subject: SPOILER EQUIPPED VEHICLE: TORSION BARS, GAS STRUTS AND CHMSL
INFORMATION
DESCRIPTION:
1. If a vehicle has a Genuine Hyundai Rear Spoiler and the deck lid does not stay open:
A. The trunk lid torsion bar springs may be installed backwards. Remove the torsion bars and
reverse their location.
B. If the above does not resolve the condition, order the appropriate spoiler type torsion bars as
noted and install.
2. If a Tiburon has a Genuine Hyundai Rear Spoiler and the hatch does not stay open, then order
two of the spoiler type gas struts from the chart and install.
3. If a vehicle has a Genuine Hyundai Rear Spoiler with an integral brake light AND if the original
Center High Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL) unit has not been removed (that is, if there are two
functioning CHMSL units on the vehicle), then:
A. Remove and discard the original CHMSL.
B. Order the appropriate CHMSL cover kit from the chart and install the cover.
PARTS INFORMATION:
Other Service Bulletins for Vehicle Speed Sensor: > 97-60-005 > Aug > 97 > Spoiler Kit - Torsion Bar Installation
Spoiler: All Technical Service Bulletins Spoiler Kit - Torsion Bar Installation
Group: BODY
Number: 97-60-005
Date: AUGUST, 1997
Model: 1997 ACCENT
Subject: INSTALLATION OF ACCENT 4-DOOR SPOILER KIT TORSION BARS
DESCRIPTION:
Some torsion bars in the Accent 4-door Rear Spoiler Kit (part no. 08340-22210) were mis-labeled
at the manufacturing center. This error may cause the torsion bars to be incorrectly installed.
Please disregard the torsion bar labels and follow the steps below for proper installation.
INSTALLATION PROCEDURE:
1. Remove the two torsion bars from the Accent Rear Spoiler Kit.
2. Remove ONE torsion bar from the vehicle and compare to one removed from the Spoiler Kit.
Make sure the torsion bar removed from the vehicle lays flat against the one removed from the
Spoiler Kit.
3. If the two torsion bars match, install the torsion bar removed from the Spoiler Kit into the vacant
location on the vehicle.
Other Service Bulletins for Vehicle Speed Sensor: > 97-60-005 > Aug > 97 > Spoiler Kit - Torsion Bar Installation > Page
4817
If the torsion bars do not match, compare the torsion bar removed from the vehicle to the remaining
torsion bar in the Spoiler Kit. The torsion bar will match one or the other. Install the matching
torsion bar from the Spoiler Kit.
4. Remove the other torsion bar from the vehicle and install the remaining torsion bar from the
Spoiler Kit.
SPOILER KIT INSTALLATION QUALITY CHECK:
Perform the following quality check on Accent 4-door vehicles onto which Spoiler Kits were
previously installed:
A. Open rear deck lid.
B. Place deck lid in its fully open position.
C. The rear deck lid should remain in the fully open position by itself.
D. If the deck lid does not remain in the fully open position but closes on its own accord, remove
the torsion bars and reverse their location.
If the deck-lid stays in its fully open position without closing on its own accord, the torsion bars are
installed correctly and no other modification is necessary.
Other Service Bulletins for Vehicle Speed Sensor: > 97-60-005 > Aug > 97 > Spoiler Kit - Torsion Bar Installation > Page
4827
If the torsion bars do not match, compare the torsion bar removed from the vehicle to the remaining
torsion bar in the Spoiler Kit. The torsion bar will match one or the other. Install the matching
torsion bar from the Spoiler Kit.
4. Remove the other torsion bar from the vehicle and install the remaining torsion bar from the
Spoiler Kit.
SPOILER KIT INSTALLATION QUALITY CHECK:
Perform the following quality check on Accent 4-door vehicles onto which Spoiler Kits were
previously installed:
A. Open rear deck lid.
B. Place deck lid in its fully open position.
C. The rear deck lid should remain in the fully open position by itself.
D. If the deck lid does not remain in the fully open position but closes on its own accord, remove
the torsion bars and reverse their location.
If the deck-lid stays in its fully open position without closing on its own accord, the torsion bars are
installed correctly and no other modification is necessary.
Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations
Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations >
Page 4830
EC01, EC02, EM01, EM02, EM03
MI01 To MI05, MM02
C27
Page 4831
E38-1 - E38-2
I06
I07-1 To I07-3, I08-1 To I08-3
I07-1 To I07-3, I08-1 To I08-3

Page 4832
I07-1 To I07-3, I08-1 To I08-3
I07-1 To I07-3, I08-1 To I08-3
I07-1 To I07-3, I08-1 To I08-3

Page 4833
I07-1 To I07-3, I08-1 To I08-3
I15 - I16
Page 4834
G04
G05
Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions


Connector View
CONNECTOR VIEW
Numbering Order
NUMBERING ORDER

Electrical Diagram
Harness Layouts
Harness Layout

B ..........................................................................................................................................................
......................................................................... Black L .......................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
Blue Br .................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................... Brown G ...............................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
...... Green Gr .......................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................ Gray Lg ...................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
....... Light Green O ..............................................................................................................................
................................................................................................... Orange P .........................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
............................... Pink R ..................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................... Red W .............................
..............................................................................................................................................................
....................................... White Y ........................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................... Yellow Li ....................
..............................................................................................................................................................
......................................... Light Blue
CAUTION
CAUTION
may result.
lamp or ohmmeter.

box and the short.
Testing For Voltage
Testing For Voltage
CAUTION



Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4858
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor >
Concerns
Number 00-36-006
Date MARCH, 2000
DESCRIPTION:
^ Unstable idle
REPAIR INFORMATION:


PARTS INFORMATION

Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 97-40-031 > Sep > 97 > A/T - Driveability
Concerns
Number: 97-40-031
Group: TRANSAXLE

Model: ALL
during deceleration
^ Rough idle
Note:
SONATA
EXCEL, SCOUPE
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Throttle Position Sensor: >
Number 00-36-006
Date MARCH, 2000
DESCRIPTION:
^ Unstable idle
REPAIR INFORMATION:


PARTS INFORMATION

Number: 98-36-001
Date: APRIL, 1998
DESCRIPTION
^ Oxygen sensors
^ Air flow sensor
emissions.
the A/F ratio.
performance.
the code was set.
stored in the PCM.
Note:

PCM.

load value.
Fuel Trim code.
and re-test.
this TSB.

Trim code.
and re-test.
TSB.
Note:
Note:
D. Select "Engine"
E. Select "Data"
the scan tool.
97-40-031 > Sep > 97 > A/T - Driveability Concerns
Number: 97-40-031
Group: TRANSAXLE

Model: ALL
during deceleration
^ Rough idle
Note:
97-40-031 > Sep > 97 > A/T - Driveability Concerns > Page 4895
SONATA
EXCEL, SCOUPE
97-40-004 > Feb > 97 > Engine/Transmission Controls - Service Manual Revisions
Manual Revisions
Number 97-40-004
Date 02-1997

DESCRIPTION:
are shown.
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Throttle Position Sensor: > 98-36-001
Number: 98-36-001
Date: APRIL, 1998
DESCRIPTION
^ Oxygen sensors
^ Air flow sensor
emissions.
the A/F ratio.
performance.
the code was set.
stored in the PCM.
Note:

PCM.

load value.
Fuel Trim code.
and re-test.
this TSB.

Trim code.
and re-test.
TSB.
Note:
Note:
D. Select "Engine"
E. Select "Data"
the scan tool.
> Feb > 97 > Engine/Transmission Controls - Service Manual Revisions
Manual Revisions
Number 97-40-004
Date 02-1997

DESCRIPTION:
are shown.
2.3 to 3.4 K ohms
Note: when idling
connector No. 73
4.25 to 4.8 V

CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
SENSOR INSPECTION
sensor.

turned on.
USING VOLTMETER
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position
Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-AT-013 > Jul > 09 >
Group TRANSAXLE
Number 09-AT-013
Date JULY, 2009

P0707, P0708
DESCRIPTION:
range switch.
PARTS INFORMATION
A/T - MIL ON/DTC's P0705/P0707/P0708/No Start In P/N > Page 4928
Service Procedure
c below.

Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 05-40-016 > Oct > 05 >
A/T - No Movement in 'DRIVE' or 'REVERSE'

'REVERSE'
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 05-40-016
Date: OCTOBER, 2005
Model: ALL
DESCRIPTION:
shown below:
REPAIR PROCEDURE:
NOTE:

A/T - No Movement in 'DRIVE' or 'REVERSE' > Page 4936

^ Vehicle
Go to Step 12.
NOTE:

Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 99-40-017 > Dec > 99 >
Park
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 99-40-017
DESCRIPTION:
NOTE:
SERVICE PROCEDURE:
column).

module.
PARTS INFORMATION:
Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for
Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: > 09-AT-013 > Jul > 09 > A/T - MIL ON/DTC's P0705/P0707/P0708/No Start In P/N
Group TRANSAXLE
Number 09-AT-013
Date JULY, 2009

P0707, P0708
DESCRIPTION:
range switch.
PARTS INFORMATION
Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: > 09-AT-013 > Jul > 09 > A/T - MIL ON/DTC's P0705/P0707/P0708/No Start In P/N >
Page 4952
Service Procedure
c below.
Page 4953
Page 4954

Page 4955
Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: > tnt1720307-02 > Mar > 07 > A/T Controls - Neutral Position Switch Adaptive
Relearn

Relearn > Page 4960
Press "ENTER."

Relearn > Page 4961

Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: > tnt1581105-02 > Nov > 05 > A/T - No Movement In Drive/Reverse

Drive/Reverse
MODEL: ALL
DESCRIPTION:
shown below:
REPAIR PROCEDURE:
NOTE:
Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: > tnt1581105-02 > Nov > 05 > A/T - No Movement In Drive/Reverse > Page 4966

(10-12 Nm, 100-120 kg.cm)
(12-13 Nm, 120-130 kg.cm)

^ Vehicle
inserted.
Go to Step 12.
inserted.
NOTE:
replace the TCM.

Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: > 05-40-016 > Oct > 05 > A/T - No Movement in 'DRIVE' or 'REVERSE'

Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 05-40-016
Date: OCTOBER, 2005
Model: ALL
DESCRIPTION:
shown below:
REPAIR PROCEDURE:
NOTE:

Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: > 05-40-016 > Oct > 05 > A/T - No Movement in 'DRIVE' or 'REVERSE' > Page 4973

^ Vehicle
Go to Step 12.
NOTE:

Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: > 99-40-017 > Dec > 99 > A/T - Shift Lever Will Not Shift Out Of Park
Out Of Park
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 99-40-017
DESCRIPTION:
NOTE:
SERVICE PROCEDURE:
column).

Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: > 99-40-017 > Dec > 99 > A/T - Shift Lever Will Not Shift Out Of Park > Page 4981
module.
PARTS INFORMATION:
Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Transmission
Position Switch/Sensor: > tnt1720307-02 > Mar > 07 > A/T Controls - Neutral Position Switch Adaptive Relearn

Position Switch/Sensor: > tnt1720307-02 > Mar > 07 > A/T Controls - Neutral Position Switch Adaptive Relearn > Page
4989
Press "ENTER."

4990

Position Switch/Sensor: > tnt1581105-02 > Nov > 05 > A/T - No Movement In Drive/Reverse

Drive/Reverse
MODEL: ALL
DESCRIPTION:
shown below:
REPAIR PROCEDURE:
NOTE:
Position Switch/Sensor: > tnt1581105-02 > Nov > 05 > A/T - No Movement In Drive/Reverse > Page 4995

(10-12 Nm, 100-120 kg.cm)
(12-13 Nm, 120-130 kg.cm)

^ Vehicle
inserted.
Go to Step 12.
inserted.
NOTE:
replace the TCM.

Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4998
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Vehicle Speed Sensor: > 03-40-022 > Dec >
03 > A/T - Fail Safe Mode/Erratic/Hard Shifting/DTC's Set
Number 03-40-022
Date 12-2003

P0717 & P0722
DESCRIPTION:

NOTE
REPAIR PROCEDURE:
03 > A/T - Fail Safe Mode/Erratic/Hard Shifting/DTC's Set > Page 5009

PARTS INFORMATION
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Vehicle Speed Sensor: >
Shifting/DTC's Set
Number 03-40-022
Date 12-2003

P0717 & P0722
DESCRIPTION:

NOTE
REPAIR PROCEDURE:

PARTS INFORMATION
EC01, EC02, EM01, EM02, EM03
MI01 To MI05, MM02
C27
E38-1 - E38-2
I06
I07-1 To I07-3, I08-1 To I08-3
I07-1 To I07-3, I08-1 To I08-3

I07-1 To I07-3, I08-1 To I08-3
I07-1 To I07-3, I08-1 To I08-3
I07-1 To I07-3, I08-1 To I08-3

I07-1 To I07-3, I08-1 To I08-3
I15 - I16
G04
G05


Connector View
CONNECTOR VIEW
Numbering Order
NUMBERING ORDER

Electrical Diagram
Harness Layouts
Harness Layout

B ..........................................................................................................................................................
......................................................................... Black L .......................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
Blue Br .................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................... Brown G ...............................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
...... Green Gr .......................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................ Gray Lg ...................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
....... Light Green O ..............................................................................................................................
................................................................................................... Orange P .........................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
............................... Pink R ..................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................... Red W .............................
..............................................................................................................................................................
....................................... White Y ........................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................... Yellow Li ....................
..............................................................................................................................................................
......................................... Light Blue
CAUTION
CAUTION
may result.
lamp or ohmmeter.

box and the short.
Testing For Voltage
Testing For Voltage
CAUTION







CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Catalytic Converter > Component
Catalytic Converter: Specifications
Tightening Torque
Front exhaust pipe to catalytic converter 40 to 60 Nm
Catalytic converter to main muffler assembly 30 to 40 Nm

Catalytic Converter: Service Precautions
CAUTION: If large amounts of unburned gasoline flow into the converter, it may overheat and
create a fire hazard. To prevent this, observe the following precautions and be sure to explain them
to your customer.
1. Use only unleaded gasoline. 2. Avoid prolonged idling. Avoid running the engine at fast idle
speed for more than 10 minutes and at idle speed for more than 20 minutes. 3. Avoid spark jump
test. Spark jump only when absolutely necessary. Perform this test as rapidly as possible and,
while testing, never race the
engine.
4. Avoid prolonged engine compression measurement. Engine compression tests must be made as
rapidly as possible. 5. Do not run engine when fuel tank is nearly empty. This may cause the
engine to misfire and create an extra load on the converter. 6. Avoid coasting with ignition turned
off and prolonged braking. 7. Do not dispose of used catalyst along with parts contaminated with
gasoline or oil.
Catalytic Converter: Description and Operation
THREE-WAY CATALYTIC CONVERTER (TWC)
CATALYTIC CONVERTER INSPECTION
Inspect for damage, cracking or deterioration. Replace if faulty.
CAUTION: The catalytic converters require the use of unleaded gasoline only. Leaded gasoline will
destroy the effectiveness of the catalysts as an emission control device.
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic converters will not require maintenance. However,
it is important to keep the engine properly tuned. Engine misfiring may cause overheating of the
catalysts. This may cause heat damage to the converters or vehicle components. This situation can
also occur during diagnostic testing if any spark plug cables are removed and the engine is allowed
to idle for a prolonged period of time.
Catalytic Converter: Testing and Inspection
PROCEDURE
The catalytic converter may be installed at or near the exhaust manifold or in the exhaust system
along the vehicle under body. The body of the catalytic converter should be inspected for distortion
and other types of damage. Excessive heat can bulge or distort the converter. Since excessive
heat build up is not the fault of the converter, the fuel or ignition system should be checked
whenever a converter is damaged by overheating. Also inspect for missing or improperly installed
catalytic converter heat shields.
Catalytic Converter: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Remove the catalytic converter from the center muffler and the front exhaust pipe. 2. Remove
the rubber hanger and catalytic converter.
INSTALLATION
components.
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System >
EVAP Canister Purge Solenoid Valve <--> [Canister Purge Control Valve] > Component Information > Locations
EVAP Canister Purge Solenoid Valve <--> [Canister Purge Control Valve] > Component Information > Locations > Page
5065
EVAP Canister Purge Solenoid Valve <--> [Canister Purge Control Valve] > Component Information > Testing and
Inspection > With Trouble Code
EVAP Canister Purge Solenoid Valve: Testing and Inspection With Trouble Code
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
HARNESS INSPECTION
Inspection > With Trouble Code > Page 5068
DTC P0444, P0445 - EVAP Canister Purge Solenoid Valve
TROUBLESHOOTING HINT:
Open or short circuit is observed in purge solenoid valve(High) system when ignition switch is
turned on.
DTC P0441, P0442, P0446 - EVAP Canister Purge Solenoid Valve
TROUBLESHOOTING HINT:
Evaporative emission control system does not function normally because of mechanical trouble.
Inspection > With Trouble Code > Page 5069
EVAP Canister Purge Solenoid Valve: Testing and Inspection Without Trouble Code
NOTE: When disconnecting the vacuum hose, make an identification mark on it so that it can be
reconnected to its original position.
1. Disconnect the vacuum hose from the solenoid valve. 2. Detach the harness connector. 3.
Connect a vacuum pump to the nipple to which the red-striped vacuum hose was connected.
4. Apply vacuum and check when voltage is applied to the evaporative emission canister purge
solenoid valve and when the voltage is discontinued.
5. Measure the resistance between the terminals of the solenoid valve.

Evaporative emission canister purge solenoid valve Coil resistance: 26 ohms[at 20°C (68°F)]
Canister Close Valve <--> [Canister Purge Solenoid] > Component Information > Specifications
Canister Close Valve: Specifications Canister purge solenoid
Canister purge solenoid
Resistance 20 to 32 ohms
Evaporative Check Valve > Component Information > Description and Operation
Evaporative Check Valve: Description and Operation
The fuel filler cap is equipped with a vacuum relief valve to prevent the escape of fuel vapor into
the atmosphere.
Evaporative Check Valve > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 5076
Evaporative Check Valve: Testing and Inspection
Check the gasket of the fuel filler cap itself, For damage or deformation, replace the cap if
necessary.
Evaporative Emission Control Canister > Component Information > Testing and Inspection
Evaporative Emission Control Canister: Testing and Inspection
1. Look for loose connections, sharp bends or damage to the fuel vapor lines. 2. Look for distortion,
cracks or fuel leakage. 3. After removing the EVAP canister, inspect for cracks or damage.
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > System
Information > Description and Operation
Exhaust Gas Recirculation: Description and Operation
PURPOSE / OPERATION
The Exhaust Gas Recirculation system is designed to reintroduce exhaust gases into the
combustion cycle, lowering combustion temperatures and reducing the formation of Nitrogen
Oxides (NOx).
Information > System Diagnosis > EGR System Function Test
Exhaust Gas Recirculation: Testing and Inspection EGR System Function Test
1. Run engine until operating temperature is reached. 2. Disconnect exhaust gas recirculation
vacuum line from exhaust gas recirculation valve. 3. Ensure there is no vacuum from hose at idle,
then raise engine speed to 2500 RPM, vacuum should exist. 4. Stop engine, then connect hand
held vacuum pump to exhaust gas recirculation valve. 5. Apply vacuum and observe exhaust gas
recirculation diaphragm movement. The diaphragm should move freely up and down. 6. Reconnect
vacuum feed line. If exhaust gas recirculation valve does not operate as specified, check vacuum
lines for kinks or physical damage. 7. If vacuum lines are satisfactory, replace exhaust gas
recirculation valve.
Information > System Diagnosis > EGR System Function Test > Page 5085
Exhaust Gas Recirculation: Testing and Inspection Visual Inspection Procedures
PROCEDURE
Inspect system for proper installation of exhaust gas recirculation valve and control switches and
sensors. Check for proper connection of vacuum hoses, electrical connectors and mechanical
linkage. Also check vacuum hoses for obstructions.
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Fillpipe Restrictor > Component
Fillpipe Restrictor: Description and Operation
Fillpipe Restrictor
The fillpipe restrictor is used to prevent leaded fuel from being added to the fuel tank. The gasoline
pump for unleaded fuel has a smaller nozzle. The fillpipe restrictor will only allow the unleaded type
nozzle to be inserted into the fuel tank.
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Fillpipe Restrictor > Component
Information > Description and Operation > Page 5089
Fillpipe Restrictor: Testing and Inspection
Remove the fuel filler cap and check the fillpipe restrictor for tampering. On models with more that
one fuel tank, check each tank filler tube.
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Positive Crankcase Ventilation >
Positive Crankcase Ventilation Valve > Component Information > Specifications
Positive Crankcase Ventilation Valve: Specifications PCV Valve
PCV Valve
Positive Crankcase Ventilation Valve > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5094
Positive Crankcase Ventilation Valve: Testing and Inspection
1. Remove the positive crankcase ventilation valve.
2. Insert a thin stick into the positive crankcase ventilation valve from the threaded side to check
that the plunger moves. 3. If the plunger does not move, the positive crankcase ventilation valve is
clogged. Clean it or replace.
Positive Crankcase Ventilation Valve > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5095
Positive Crankcase Ventilation Valve: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect the ventilation hose from the positive crankcase ventilation (PCV) valve. Remove the
PCV valve from the rocker cover and reconnect
it to the ventilation hose.
2. Run the engine at idle and put a finger on the open end of the PCV valve and make sure that
intake manifold vacuum is felt.
NOTE: The plunger inside the PCV valve will move back and forth.
3. If vacuum is not felt, clean the PCV valve and ventilation hose in cleaning solvent or replace if
necessary.
INSTALLATION
Install the positive crankcase ventilation valve and tighten to specified torque.
Tightening torque PCV valve tightening torque: 8 - 12 Nm (80 - 120 kg.cm, 5.8 - 8.7 lb.ft)
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure > Diagnostic
Connector - Fuel Pump > Component Information > Description and Operation
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
fuel tank cap.

Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Release >
System Information > Service Precautions
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Release >
System Information > Service Precautions > Page 5107
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Idle Speed > System
Concerns
Number 00-36-006
Date MARCH, 2000
DESCRIPTION:
^ Unstable idle
REPAIR INFORMATION:


PARTS INFORMATION

Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 98-40-001
Date: JANUARY, 1998
Model: ALL
DESCRIPTION:
158-194°F).
# 97-40-031.
5. Note:
as follows:
number shown.
PARTS INFORMATION:

Number 00-36-006
Date MARCH, 2000
DESCRIPTION:
^ Unstable idle
REPAIR INFORMATION:


PARTS INFORMATION

Harsh 4-3 Downshift When Decelerating
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 98-40-001
Date: JANUARY, 1998
Model: ALL
DESCRIPTION:
158-194°F).
# 97-40-031.
5. Note:
as follows:
number shown.
Harsh 4-3 Downshift When Decelerating > Page 5132
PARTS INFORMATION:

Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 98-40-001
Date: JANUARY, 1998
Model: ALL
DESCRIPTION:
158-194°F).
# 97-40-031.
5. Note:
as follows:
number shown.
PARTS INFORMATION:
Number 00-36-006
Date MARCH, 2000
DESCRIPTION:
^ Unstable idle
REPAIR INFORMATION:
PARTS INFORMATION
Number 00-36-006
Date MARCH, 2000
Subject
DESCRIPTION:
^ Unstable idle
REPAIR INFORMATION:
PARTS INFORMATION
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 98-40-001
Date: JANUARY, 1998
Model: ALL
DESCRIPTION:
158-194°F).
# 97-40-031.
5. Note:
as follows:
number shown.
PARTS INFORMATION:

Base idle speed

NOTE:

Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air/Fuel Mixture > System
Number: 98-36-001
Date: APRIL, 1998
DESCRIPTION
^ Oxygen sensors
^ Air flow sensor
emissions.
the A/F ratio.

performance.
the code was set.
stored in the PCM.
Note:

PCM.

load value.
Fuel Trim code.
and re-test.
this TSB.

Trim code.
and re-test.
TSB.
Note:
Note:
D. Select "Engine"
E. Select "Data"
the scan tool.
system.
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal > Component
Accelerator Pedal: Specifications Accelerator pedal
Accelerator pedal
Bracket bolts 8 to 12 Nm
Accelerator Pedal: Testing and Inspection
1. Check the inner and outer cable for damage. 2. Check the cable for smooth movement. 3. Check
the accelerator arm for deformation. 4. Check the return spring for deterioration. 5. Check the
connection of the bushing to end metal fining. 6. Check the properly operating of the accelerator
switch.
Accelerator Pedal: Service and Repair
COMPONENTS
REMOVAL
1. Remove the bushing and inner cable of the accelerator arm side.
2. After disconnecting the accelerator switch connector, loosen the bolts of the accelerator arm
bracket and remove.
INSTALLATION
1. When installing the return spring and accelerator arm, apply multi-purpose grease around each
moving point of the accelerator arm.
Accelerator Bracket Sealant Points
2. Apply sealant to the bolt mounting hole, and tighten the accelerator arm bracket.
Tightening torque Accelerator arm bracket bolts: 8 - 12 Nm (80 - 120 kg.cm, 5.8 - 7.2 lb.ft)
Accelerator Cable, Pedal End Grease Point
3. Securely install the resin bushing of the accelerator cable on the end of the accelerator arm, 4.
Apply multipurpose grease around the cable end.
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position
Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor:
> 97-40-031 > Sep > 97 > A/T - Driveability Concerns
Number: 97-40-031
Group: TRANSAXLE

Model: ALL
during deceleration
^ Rough idle
Note:
> 97-40-031 > Sep > 97 > A/T - Driveability Concerns > Page 5163
SONATA
EXCEL, SCOUPE
Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Accelerator Pedal
Position Sensor: > 97-40-031 > Sep > 97 > A/T - Driveability Concerns
Number: 97-40-031
Group: TRANSAXLE

Model: ALL
during deceleration
^ Rough idle
Note:
Position Sensor: > 97-40-031 > Sep > 97 > A/T - Driveability Concerns > Page 5171
SONATA
EXCEL, SCOUPE
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Cleaner Housing >
Air cleaner body

REMOVAL
INSTALLATION

Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor >
Number: 98-36-001
Date: APRIL, 1998
DESCRIPTION
^ Oxygen sensors
^ Air flow sensor
emissions.
the A/F ratio.

performance.
the code was set.
stored in the PCM.
Note:

PCM.

load value.
Fuel Trim code.
and re-test.
this TSB.

Trim code.
and re-test.
TSB.
Note:
Note:
D. Select "Engine"
E. Select "Data"
the scan tool.
MAF meter
Type Hot film type
connector No. 41
at 3,000 rpm 1.3 to 2.0 V



Connector View
CONNECTOR VIEW
Numbering Order
NUMBERING ORDER

Electrical Diagram
Harness Layouts
Harness Layout

B ..........................................................................................................................................................
......................................................................... Black L .......................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
Blue Br .................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................... Brown G ...............................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
...... Green Gr .......................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................ Gray Lg ...................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
....... Light Green O ..............................................................................................................................
................................................................................................... Orange P .........................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
............................... Pink R ..................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................... Red W .............................
..............................................................................................................................................................
....................................... White Y ........................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................... Yellow Li ....................
..............................................................................................................................................................
......................................... Light Blue
CAUTION
CAUTION
may result.
lamp or ohmmeter.

box and the short.
Testing For Voltage
Testing For Voltage
CAUTION

CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
connector.
or ECM.
comparison.
USING VOLTMETER
to 198°F).
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Diagnostic Connector - Fuel
Pump > Component Information > Description and Operation
Pump > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 5209
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
fuel tank cap.

Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fillpipe Restrictor > Component
Fillpipe Restrictor: Description and Operation
Fillpipe Restrictor
The fillpipe restrictor is used to prevent leaded fuel from being added to the fuel tank. The gasoline
pump for unleaded fuel has a smaller nozzle. The fillpipe restrictor will only allow the unleaded type
nozzle to be inserted into the fuel tank.
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fillpipe Restrictor > Component
Information > Description and Operation > Page 5215
Fillpipe Restrictor: Testing and Inspection
Remove the fuel filler cap and check the fillpipe restrictor for tampering. On models with more that
one fuel tank, check each tank filler tube.
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 05-20-004 > Jul > 05 > Exhaust System - Excessive Sulfur Odors
Fuel: Customer Interest Exhaust System - Excessive Sulfur Odors
Number: 05-20-004
Date: JULY, 2005
Model: ALL MODELS
Subject SULFUR ODOR FROM EXHAUST
DESCRIPTION:
Some vehicles may experience a sulfur-like or "rotten egg" odor coming from the exhaust. The
amount of sulfur in the fuel sold in California is regulated; however, the sulfur content in gasoline
sold in other states can be significantly higher. Sulfur content can differ considerably between
gasoline brands and locations. Sulfur is a natural component of crude oil from which gasoline is
refined. The amount of sulfur in gasoline can be reduced through the refining process.
VEHICLES AFFECTED:
^ All Models
REPAIR PROCEDURE:
A sulfur odor coming from the exhaust does not necessarily indicate there is an issue with the
engine's running condition. A sulfur odor most likely is related to the fuel; however, if an excessive
sulfur odor is determined, perform the following steps:
1. MIL ON - Check for diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) and repair as necessary.
2. If no DTCs are found, recommend the customer to try an alternate gasoline source.
Replacement of the oxygen sensors, air/fuel ratio sensors or catalytic converters will not reduce the
odor and will not be considered warrantable.
Normal warranty procedures apply, only if the concern is found to be a defect in factory
workmanship or materials.
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fuel: > 10-FL-014 > Nov > 10 > Fuel System - Hyundai Fuel
System Cleaner
Fuel: All Technical Service Bulletins Fuel System - Hyundai Fuel System Cleaner
Group: FUEL SYSTEM
Number: 10-FL-014
Date: NOVEMBER 2010

Model: ALL MODELS
Subject HYUNDAI FUEL SYSTEM CLEANER PLUS RECOMMENDATION AND FUEL QUALITY
INFORMATION
DESCRIPTION:
Hyundai Fuel System Cleaner Plus (P/N 00232-19047) is now the approved and recommended
service product for complete fuel system cleaning during routine service and preventative
maintenance.
NOTE:
^ A 20 ounce bottle treats up to 20 gallons of gasoline.
^ For use in all gasoline engines (MPI or GDI systems).
^ Can be used as often as 3,000 miles or at every oil change.
^ Cleans fuel injectors, intake valves, and combustion chambers.
^ Protects fuel level sending units against damage from sulfur content in fuel.
^ Cleans and protects critical fuel system components from corrosion.

Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fuel: > 10-FL-014 > Nov > 10 > Fuel System - Hyundai Fuel
System Cleaner > Page 5229
^ Does not harm the emission system or leave behind combustion chamber deposits.
Regular use of Hyundai Fuel System Cleaner Plus with TECHRON(R) Technology can help
address engine carbon deposit related conditions. By removing these deposits, an engine may
experience restored engine performance and efficiency, smoother running idle, and cleaner tailpipe
emissions.
USAGE NOTES:
^ A single tank (up to 20 gallons) treated with a 20 ounce bottle is sufficient for cleaning in normal
cases. However; a second initial treatment on the next consecutive full tank may give additional
benefits for engines with heavier accumulated deposit formation.
^ The product can be used as often as every 3,000 miles to maintain optimum cleanliness and is
recommended to be used during every oil change as part of a preventative maintenance practice.
FUEL QUALITY INFORMATION:
Hyundai recommends the use of high-quality gasoline, including fuel advertised as Top Tier
Detergent Gasoline, as well as periodic use of an approved Fuel System Cleaner.
This is especially important for vehicles equipped with gasoline direct injection (GDI) engines with
advanced fuel delivery systems.
If use of poor quality gasoline is suspected, customer should be advised to refuel at a different
fueling station or switch to a different brand of fuel.
Poor quality gasoline may exhibit one or more of the following characteristics:
^ Abnormal color and odor
^ Undissolved water
^ Sediments and suspended foreign substance
^ Cloudy appearance and (after settling) showing signs of separation
NOTE:
Refer to TSB # 10-FL-013 for details related to fuel quality testing.
If use of gasoline with a low content of deposit control additives is suspected, then recommend to
the customer the exclusive use of high quality gasoline such as TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline.
These products help to avoid the build-up of engine deposits and are available in all octane grades.
For latest information and list of retailers of TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline, please go to the official
website (www.toptiergas.com).
The use of the fuel system cleaner is a Customer Pay Item during time of routine maintenance and
the cost is not reimbursable under warranty.
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fuel: > 10-FL-013 > Nov > 10 > Fuel System - Fuel Quality
Testing
Fuel: All Technical Service Bulletins Fuel System - Fuel Quality Testing
Group: FUEL SYSTEM
Number: 10-FL-013
Date: NOVEMBER 2010
Subject TESTING FUEL QUALITY TO DIAGNOSE ENGINE STARTABILITY / HESITATION /

DRIVEABILITY ISSUES
DESCRIPTION:
This bulletin outlines the basic components of the BG Fuel Test Kit and the procedure to test the
quality of the fuel during vehicle diagnosis.
Poor fuel quality may lead to cold engine startability issues, hesitation at idle or during acceleration,
and/or poor driveability. In addition, prolonged vehicle operation with poor quality fuel may result in
damage to the fuel system and formation of engine deposits.
The BG Fuel Test Kit can be used to determine the following aspects of the fuel:
^ Sediment / Water Contamination Inspection
^ Specific Gravity
^ Alcohol Content
^ ALL MODELS equipped with gasoline engines
PARTS INFORMATION:
Testing > Page 5234
The BG Fuel Test Kit (P/N J-48983) is the approved fuel quality testing tool to be used during
vehicle diagnosis. This kit is an essential tool that has been sent to all dealers and is part of the
new dealer kit.
Contents of the kit:
- Hydrometers (gasoline / diesel)
- Graduated cylinder (100ml)
- Graduated cylinder (alcohol test)
- Graduated cylinder small stopper
- Graduated cylinder holding fixtures
- Specific gravity vs. temperature reference chart. (shown below / right)

Testing > Page 5235
IMPORTANT:
The kit includes TWO (2) different hydrometers.
Do not use the diesel hydrometer with specific gravity range from 0.800 to 0.900.
Use only the gasoline hydrometer with specific gravity range from 0.700 to 0.800 for the correct
measurement of the fuel to be tested.
SERVICE PROCEDURE:
1. Prepare the tall graduated cylinder attached to the fixture base.
NOTE:
Be sure that the inside of the cylinder is clean and free of contaminants.
2. Obtain sample fuel from the incident vehicle and fill the graduated cylinder to the 100ml mark.
NOTE:
There are several different methods available to gather a small quantity of fuel for testing. Follow
the applicable Shop Manual procedures and precautions as required to perform any ONE of the
following, as feasible.
^ For older MPI fuel systems equipped with a fuel return line, divert the fuel return hose to capture
the fuel into a suitable container while running the engine at idle.
^ For MPI fuel systems that are returnless design, divert the fuel line from the fuel rail to capture
the fuel into a container. For additional fuel amount, briefly prime the fuel pump by cycling the
ignition key. (Do not perform this option for GDI engines.)
^ For GDI and MPI systems, lift the vehicle and disconnect the large fuel hose of the fuel filler neck
from the fuel tank inlet. Using a long socket extension, lightly push open the inlet check valve at the
inlet of the tank and capture the sample fuel.
^ For GDI and MPI systems, remove the main fuel pump and sender module from the fuel tank to
collect the fuel sample through the service access port, if possible. If equipped, removing the
remote fuel sender module may be easier for this task. Avoid fuel spillage.
Testing > Page 5236
3. Visually inspect the collected fuel sample for presence of sediment, debris, or water
contamination. (Example shown at right. Replace fuel if
contamination is found.)
4. Insert the thermometer into the graduated cylinder and attach the clip to the top rim.
5. Wait a few minutes to allow for the temperature to stabilize, then record the measured
temperature of the gasoline sample. Remove the thermometer
afterwards.
6. Insert the gasoline hydrometer with specific gravity range from 0.700 to 0.800 into the graduated
cylinder and wait until it stabilizes while floating in
the fuel.
7. Read the number at the liquid line on the side of the hydrometer.
Testing > Page 5237
8. Refer to the supplied reference chart to look up the measured temperature and the hydrometer
reading to find the corresponding specific gravity.
(Examples shown)
NOTE:
The fuel tanks of vehicles having contaminated fuel or fuel outside the NORMAL specific gravity
range should be drained and refilled.
9. Prepare the small graduated cylinder for fuel alcohol content testing.
NOTE:
Testing > Page 5238
10. With the stopper cap removed, add clean water up to the (A) water fill line.
11. Add fuel from the tall graduated cylinder to the (B) fuel fill line.
12. Insert the stopper cap at the top to seal it and vigorously shake the contents for at least 10
seconds or more.
13. Let the mixture settle for approximately 5~10 minutes.
NOTE:
At this point, any alcohol of the sample will combine with water and begin to separate from the fuel.
14. Read the line where it separates and find the corresponding (D) alcohol % level of the fuel
sample.
NOTE:
High alcohol content in the fuel can cause lean codes and other engine startability and driveability
conditions.
15. After completing the fuel tests, prepare the Fuel Test Kit for storage.
^ Rinse all pieces with window cleaner and water, then towel dry thoroughly.
^ Store the reference chart behind the protection foam.
^ Arrange all the components so that they are protected by the clamshell storage case.
When necessary, the use of the BG Fuel Test Kit as a part of the normal diagnostic troubleshooting
process may be covered under warranty.
However, if the root cause of the condition results from poor fuel quality, then some or all parts and
labor expenses may not be covered under warranty.
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fuel: > 08-FL-008 > Aug > 08 > Fuel System - E85 Fuel
Usage Recommendations
Fuel: All Technical Service Bulletins Fuel System - E85 Fuel Usage Recommendations
Group: FUEL SYSTEM
Number: 08-FL-008
Date: AUGUST, 2008
Model: ALL MODELS
Subject: USE OF E85 BLENDED ETHANOL FUEL
DESCRIPTION:
E85 fuel is an alternative fuel composed of up to 85 percent ethanol and 15 percent gasoline, and
is manufactured exclusively for use in Flexible Fuel Vehicles. E85 is not compatible with current
Hyundai models. Use of E85 in Hyundai vehicles may result in poor engine performance or a hard
or no start condition, and damage to the vehicle's engine and fuel system.
Hyundai recommends that customers do not use fuel with an ethanol content exceeding 10
percent. Damage resulting from the use of E85 is not covered under Hyundai warranties.
VEHICLES AFFECTED: ^
This TSB applies to all Hyundai models
SERVICE TIP:
Sample fuel from incident vehicles can be tested with the Fuel Tester Kit (J-48983). Measurements
such as the alcohol % concentration and specific gravity can be made to determine if the
grade/type of fuel is correct.
Vehicle repair expenses caused by usage of E85 blended fuel are not eligible for warranty
reimbursement. Repair order must explain this clearly for customer pay work.
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fuel: > 05-20-004 > Jul > 05 > Exhaust System - Excessive
Sulfur Odors
Fuel: All Technical Service Bulletins Exhaust System - Excessive Sulfur Odors
Number: 05-20-004
Date: JULY, 2005
Model: ALL MODELS
Subject SULFUR ODOR FROM EXHAUST
DESCRIPTION:
Some vehicles may experience a sulfur-like or "rotten egg" odor coming from the exhaust. The
amount of sulfur in the fuel sold in California is regulated; however, the sulfur content in gasoline
sold in other states can be significantly higher. Sulfur content can differ considerably between
gasoline brands and locations. Sulfur is a natural component of crude oil from which gasoline is
refined. The amount of sulfur in gasoline can be reduced through the refining process.
VEHICLES AFFECTED:
^ All Models
REPAIR PROCEDURE:
A sulfur odor coming from the exhaust does not necessarily indicate there is an issue with the
engine's running condition. A sulfur odor most likely is related to the fuel; however, if an excessive
sulfur odor is determined, perform the following steps:
1. MIL ON - Check for diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) and repair as necessary.
2. If no DTCs are found, recommend the customer to try an alternate gasoline source.
Replacement of the oxygen sensors, air/fuel ratio sensors or catalytic converters will not reduce the
odor and will not be considered warrantable.
Normal warranty procedures apply, only if the concern is found to be a defect in factory
workmanship or materials.
Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Fuel: > 10-FL-014 > Nov > 10 > Fuel System - Hyundai Fuel
System Cleaner
Fuel: All Technical Service Bulletins Fuel System - Hyundai Fuel System Cleaner
Group: FUEL SYSTEM
Number: 10-FL-014
Date: NOVEMBER 2010

Model: ALL MODELS
Subject HYUNDAI FUEL SYSTEM CLEANER PLUS RECOMMENDATION AND FUEL QUALITY
INFORMATION
DESCRIPTION:
Hyundai Fuel System Cleaner Plus (P/N 00232-19047) is now the approved and recommended
service product for complete fuel system cleaning during routine service and preventative
maintenance.
NOTE:
^ A 20 ounce bottle treats up to 20 gallons of gasoline.
^ For use in all gasoline engines (MPI or GDI systems).
^ Can be used as often as 3,000 miles or at every oil change.
^ Cleans fuel injectors, intake valves, and combustion chambers.
^ Protects fuel level sending units against damage from sulfur content in fuel.
^ Cleans and protects critical fuel system components from corrosion.

Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Fuel: > 10-FL-014 > Nov > 10 > Fuel System - Hyundai Fuel
System Cleaner > Page 5252
^ Does not harm the emission system or leave behind combustion chamber deposits.
Regular use of Hyundai Fuel System Cleaner Plus with TECHRON(R) Technology can help
address engine carbon deposit related conditions. By removing these deposits, an engine may
experience restored engine performance and efficiency, smoother running idle, and cleaner tailpipe
emissions.
USAGE NOTES:
^ A single tank (up to 20 gallons) treated with a 20 ounce bottle is sufficient for cleaning in normal
cases. However; a second initial treatment on the next consecutive full tank may give additional
benefits for engines with heavier accumulated deposit formation.
^ The product can be used as often as every 3,000 miles to maintain optimum cleanliness and is
recommended to be used during every oil change as part of a preventative maintenance practice.
FUEL QUALITY INFORMATION:
Hyundai recommends the use of high-quality gasoline, including fuel advertised as Top Tier
Detergent Gasoline, as well as periodic use of an approved Fuel System Cleaner.
This is especially important for vehicles equipped with gasoline direct injection (GDI) engines with
advanced fuel delivery systems.
If use of poor quality gasoline is suspected, customer should be advised to refuel at a different
fueling station or switch to a different brand of fuel.
Poor quality gasoline may exhibit one or more of the following characteristics:
^ Abnormal color and odor
^ Undissolved water
^ Sediments and suspended foreign substance
^ Cloudy appearance and (after settling) showing signs of separation
NOTE:
Refer to TSB # 10-FL-013 for details related to fuel quality testing.
If use of gasoline with a low content of deposit control additives is suspected, then recommend to
the customer the exclusive use of high quality gasoline such as TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline.
These products help to avoid the build-up of engine deposits and are available in all octane grades.
For latest information and list of retailers of TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline, please go to the official
website (www.toptiergas.com).
The use of the fuel system cleaner is a Customer Pay Item during time of routine maintenance and
the cost is not reimbursable under warranty.
Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Fuel: > 10-FL-013 > Nov > 10 > Fuel System - Fuel Quality
Testing
Fuel: All Technical Service Bulletins Fuel System - Fuel Quality Testing
Group: FUEL SYSTEM
Number: 10-FL-013
Date: NOVEMBER 2010
Subject TESTING FUEL QUALITY TO DIAGNOSE ENGINE STARTABILITY / HESITATION /

DRIVEABILITY ISSUES
DESCRIPTION:
This bulletin outlines the basic components of the BG Fuel Test Kit and the procedure to test the
quality of the fuel during vehicle diagnosis.
Poor fuel quality may lead to cold engine startability issues, hesitation at idle or during acceleration,
and/or poor driveability. In addition, prolonged vehicle operation with poor quality fuel may result in
damage to the fuel system and formation of engine deposits.
The BG Fuel Test Kit can be used to determine the following aspects of the fuel:
^ Sediment / Water Contamination Inspection
^ Specific Gravity
^ Alcohol Content
^ ALL MODELS equipped with gasoline engines
PARTS INFORMATION:
Testing > Page 5257
The BG Fuel Test Kit (P/N J-48983) is the approved fuel quality testing tool to be used during
vehicle diagnosis. This kit is an essential tool that has been sent to all dealers and is part of the
new dealer kit.
Contents of the kit:
- Hydrometers (gasoline / diesel)
- Graduated cylinder (100ml)
- Graduated cylinder (alcohol test)
- Graduated cylinder small stopper
- Graduated cylinder holding fixtures
- Specific gravity vs. temperature reference chart. (shown below / right)

Testing > Page 5258
IMPORTANT:
The kit includes TWO (2) different hydrometers.
Do not use the diesel hydrometer with specific gravity range from 0.800 to 0.900.
Use only the gasoline hydrometer with specific gravity range from 0.700 to 0.800 for the correct
measurement of the fuel to be tested.
SERVICE PROCEDURE:
1. Prepare the tall graduated cylinder attached to the fixture base.
NOTE:
2. Obtain sample fuel from the incident vehicle and fill the graduated cylinder to the 100ml mark.
NOTE:
There are several different methods available to gather a small quantity of fuel for testing. Follow
the applicable Shop Manual procedures and precautions as required to perform any ONE of the
following, as feasible.
^ For older MPI fuel systems equipped with a fuel return line, divert the fuel return hose to capture
the fuel into a suitable container while running the engine at idle.
^ For MPI fuel systems that are returnless design, divert the fuel line from the fuel rail to capture
the fuel into a container. For additional fuel amount, briefly prime the fuel pump by cycling the
ignition key. (Do not perform this option for GDI engines.)
^ For GDI and MPI systems, lift the vehicle and disconnect the large fuel hose of the fuel filler neck
from the fuel tank inlet. Using a long socket extension, lightly push open the inlet check valve at the
inlet of the tank and capture the sample fuel.
^ For GDI and MPI systems, remove the main fuel pump and sender module from the fuel tank to
collect the fuel sample through the service access port, if possible. If equipped, removing the
remote fuel sender module may be easier for this task. Avoid fuel spillage.
Testing > Page 5259
3. Visually inspect the collected fuel sample for presence of sediment, debris, or water
contamination. (Example shown at right. Replace fuel if
contamination is found.)
4. Insert the thermometer into the graduated cylinder and attach the clip to the top rim.
5. Wait a few minutes to allow for the temperature to stabilize, then record the measured
temperature of the gasoline sample. Remove the thermometer
afterwards.
6. Insert the gasoline hydrometer with specific gravity range from 0.700 to 0.800 into the graduated
cylinder and wait until it stabilizes while floating in
the fuel.
7. Read the number at the liquid line on the side of the hydrometer.
Testing > Page 5260
8. Refer to the supplied reference chart to look up the measured temperature and the hydrometer
reading to find the corresponding specific gravity.
(Examples shown)
NOTE:
The fuel tanks of vehicles having contaminated fuel or fuel outside the NORMAL specific gravity
range should be drained and refilled.
9. Prepare the small graduated cylinder for fuel alcohol content testing.
NOTE:
Testing > Page 5261
10. With the stopper cap removed, add clean water up to the (A) water fill line.
11. Add fuel from the tall graduated cylinder to the (B) fuel fill line.
12. Insert the stopper cap at the top to seal it and vigorously shake the contents for at least 10
seconds or more.
13. Let the mixture settle for approximately 5~10 minutes.
NOTE:
At this point, any alcohol of the sample will combine with water and begin to separate from the fuel.
14. Read the line where it separates and find the corresponding (D) alcohol % level of the fuel
sample.
NOTE:
High alcohol content in the fuel can cause lean codes and other engine startability and driveability
conditions.
15. After completing the fuel tests, prepare the Fuel Test Kit for storage.
^ Rinse all pieces with window cleaner and water, then towel dry thoroughly.
^ Store the reference chart behind the protection foam.
^ Arrange all the components so that they are protected by the clamshell storage case.
When necessary, the use of the BG Fuel Test Kit as a part of the normal diagnostic troubleshooting
process may be covered under warranty.
However, if the root cause of the condition results from poor fuel quality, then some or all parts and
labor expenses may not be covered under warranty.
Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Fuel: > 08-FL-008 > Aug > 08 > Fuel System - E85 Fuel Usage
Recommendations
Fuel: All Technical Service Bulletins Fuel System - E85 Fuel Usage Recommendations
Group: FUEL SYSTEM
Number: 08-FL-008
Date: AUGUST, 2008
Model: ALL MODELS
Subject: USE OF E85 BLENDED ETHANOL FUEL
DESCRIPTION:
E85 fuel is an alternative fuel composed of up to 85 percent ethanol and 15 percent gasoline, and
is manufactured exclusively for use in Flexible Fuel Vehicles. E85 is not compatible with current
Hyundai models. Use of E85 in Hyundai vehicles may result in poor engine performance or a hard
or no start condition, and damage to the vehicle's engine and fuel system.
Hyundai recommends that customers do not use fuel with an ethanol content exceeding 10
percent. Damage resulting from the use of E85 is not covered under Hyundai warranties.
VEHICLES AFFECTED: ^
This TSB applies to all Hyundai models
SERVICE TIP:
Sample fuel from incident vehicles can be tested with the Fuel Tester Kit (J-48983). Measurements
such as the alcohol % concentration and specific gravity can be made to determine if the
grade/type of fuel is correct.
Vehicle repair expenses caused by usage of E85 blended fuel are not eligible for warranty
reimbursement. Repair order must explain this clearly for customer pay work.
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Filter > Fuel Pressure
Release > System Information > Service Precautions
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Filter > Fuel Pressure
Release > System Information > Service Precautions > Page 5270
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component
Fuel Injector: Electrical Specifications
Injector Resistance 15.9 +/- 0.4 Ohms at 20 deg. C (68 deg. F)

Fuel Injector: Mechanical Specifications
Resistance 15.9 +/- 0.35 ohms at 68 deg F
Fuel injector rail 10 to 15 Nm

Fuel Injector: Description and Operation
FUEL INJECTOR
The injectors inject fuel according to signal coming from the ECM. The volume of fuel injected by
the injector is determined by the time during which the solenoid valve is energized.
Information > Testing and Inspection > On-Vehicle
Fuel Injector: Testing and Inspection On-Vehicle
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM

Information > Testing and Inspection > On-Vehicle > Page 5280
INSPECTION
Operation Sound Check
1. Using a stethoscope, check the injectors for a clicking sound at idle. Check that the sound is
produced at shorter intervals as the engine speed
increases.
NOTE: Ensure that the sound from an adjacent injector is not being transmitted along the delivery
pipe to an inoperative injector.
2. If a stethoscope is not available, check the injector operation with your finger. If no vibrations are
felt, check the wiring connector, injector, or
injection signal from ECM.
Resistance Measurement Between Terminals
3. Disconnect the connector at the injector. 4. Measure the resistance between terminals.
Standard value: 15.9 ± 0.35 [at 20°C (68°F)]
5. If the resistance is not within specification, replace the injector.

DTC P0201, P0202, P0203, P0204 - Fuel Injector
1. If the engine is hard to start when hot, check for fuel pressure and injector leaks. 2. If the injector
does not operate when the engine is cranked, then check the following:
- Faulty power supply circuit to the ECM and faulty ground circuit
- Faulty MFI control relay
- Faulty crankshaft position sensor and camshaft position sensor
3. If there is any cylinder whose idle state remains unchanged when the fuel injection of injectors is
cut one after another during idling, check for the
following items about such cylinder. -
Injector and harness
- Ignition plug and high tension cable
- Compression pressure
4. If the injection system is OK but the injector drive time is out of specification, check for the
following items.
- Poor combustion in the cylinder. (faulty ignition plug, ignition coil, compression pressure and etc.)
5. The MIL is on or the DTC is displayed on the SCAN TOOL under the following condition.
- When the injector itself is faulty.

Fuel Injector: Testing and Inspection Off-Vehicle
INSPECTION
1. Measure the resistance of the injectors between the terminals using an ohmmeter.
Resistance: 15.9±.35 [at 20°C (68°F)]
2. If the resistance is not with in specifications, replace the injectors.

Fuel Injector: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Release residual pressure from the fuel line to prevent fuel from spilling.
See: Fuel Filter/Fuel Pressure Release
CAUTION: Cover the hose connection with rags to prevent splashing of fuel that could be caused
by residual pressure in the fuel line.
2. Remove the delivery pipe with fuel injector and pressure regulator.
CAUTION: (1) Be careful not to drop any injectors when removing the delivery pipe. (2) Be aware
that fuel may flow out when removing the injector.
INSTALLATION
1. Install a new grommet and O-ring to the injector. 2. Apply a coating of solvent, spindle oil
gasoline to the O-ring of the injector.
3. While twisting the injector left and right, install it on to the delivery pipe. 4. Be sure the injector
turns smoothly.
NOTE: If it does not turn smoothly, the O-ring may be jammed; remove the injector, re-insert it into
the delivery pipe and re-check.
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Regulator >
Component Information > Specifications > Mechanical Specifications
Fuel Pressure Regulator: Mechanical Specifications
Operating pressure 300 kPa
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Regulator >
Component Information > Specifications > Mechanical Specifications > Page 5288
Fuel Pressure Regulator: Pressure, Vacuum and Temperature Specifications
Operating pressure 300 kPa
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pressure >
Diagnostic Connector - Fuel Pump > Component Information > Description and Operation
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
fuel tank cap.

Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay
> Component Information > Locations
> Component Information > Locations > Page 5300
MFI CONTROL RELAY
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM

Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Return Line > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection
Fuel Return Line: Testing and Inspection
1. Check the hoses and pipes for cracking, bending, deformation or restrictions. 2. Check the
canister for restrictions. 3. Check the fuel filter for restrictions and damage. If a problem is found,
repair or replace parts as necessary.
Fuel Return Line: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Remove the upper eye bolt while holding the fuel filter nut securely and remove the high
pressure fuel hose.
CAUTION: (1) Be sure to reduce the fuel pressure before disconnecting the fuel line and hose,
otherwise fuel will spill out. (2) Cover the hose connection with a shop towel to prevent splashing of
fuel that could be caused by residual pressure in the fuel line.
2. Remove the lower eye bolt while holding the fuel filter nut assembly.
3. Remove the fuel filter mounting bolts, then remove the fuel filter from the bracket. 4. Remove the
fuel return hose and line. 5. Remove the fuel vapor hose and line.
INSTALLATION
1. Install the fuel vapor hose and return hose.
- If the fuel line has stepped section, connect the fuel hose to the line securely, as shown in the
illustration.
- If the fuel line does not have a stepped section, connect the fuel hose to the line securely.
2. Install the fuel filter, and tighten the fuel filter bracket.
In-line Fuel Filter

3. Insert the main line on the filter and tighten the eye bolts while holding the fuel filter nuts. 4.
Install the clips and make sure that they do not interfere with other components.
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Supply Line > Component
Information > Diagrams
Fuel Supply Line: Testing and Inspection
1. Check the hoses and pipes for cracking, bending, deformation or restrictions. 2. Check the
canister for restrictions. 3. Check the fuel filter for restrictions and damage. If a problem is found,
repair or replace parts as necessary.
Fuel Supply Line: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Remove the upper eye bolt while holding the fuel filter nut securely and remove the high
pressure fuel hose.
CAUTION: (1) Be sure to reduce the fuel pressure before disconnecting the fuel line and hose,
otherwise fuel will spill out. (2) Cover the hose connection with a shop towel to prevent splashing of
fuel that could be caused by residual pressure in the fuel line.
2. Remove the lower eye bolt while holding the fuel filter nut assembly.
3. Remove the fuel filter mounting bolts, then remove the fuel filter from the bracket. 4. Remove the
fuel return hose and line. 5. Remove the fuel vapor hose and line.
INSTALLATION
1. Install the fuel vapor hose and return hose.
- If the fuel line has stepped section, connect the fuel hose to the line securely, as shown in the
illustration.
- If the fuel line does not have a stepped section, connect the fuel hose to the line securely.
2. Install the fuel filter, and tighten the fuel filter bracket.
In-line Fuel Filter

3. Insert the main line on the filter and tighten the eye bolts while holding the fuel filter nuts. 4.
Install the clips and make sure that they do not interfere with other components.
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Gauge Sender
> Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Fuel Sender - Resistance Specification
Fuel Gauge Sender: Technical Service Bulletins Fuel Sender - Resistance Specification
Number: 97-90-011
Date: JULY, 1997
Model: 1996-97 ACCENT
1996-97 ELANTRA
Subject: FUEL SENDER RESISTANCE SPECIFICATION (SHOP MANUAL CORRECTION)
DESCRIPTION:
The resistance levels for the fuel sending unit listed in 1996-97 Accent and Elantra Shop Manuals
Volume 2 are incorrect.
The correct fuel sender resistance specifications are listed below.
Please make the correction as indicated, and write the TSB number at the bottom of the page in
the appropriate Shop Manuals for future reference.
Model Year Affected Pages
Accent 1996 BE-35
Accent 1997 BE-35
Elantra 1996 BE-64
Elantra 1997 BE-64
Correct values for Accent fuel sender resistance specification:
Correct values for Elantra fuel sender resistance specification:

Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Gauge Sender
> Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5319
Fuel Gauge Sender: Testing and Inspection
FUEL SENDER INSPECTION
1. Remove the rear seat cushion. 2. Remove the fuel tank cover retaining screws. 3. Remove the
fuel sender assembly.
4. Using an ohmmeter, measure the resistance between terminals 3 and 4 at each float level. 5.
Check that resistance changes smoothly when the float moves from "E" to "F".
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator -
Electronic: > 98-40-001 > Jan > 98 > A/T - Harsh 4-3 Downshift When Decelerating
Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator - Electronic: Customer Interest A/T - Harsh 4-3 Downshift When
Decelerating
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 98-40-001
Date: JANUARY, 1998
Model: ALL
DESCRIPTION:
158-194°F).
# 97-40-031.
5. Note:
as follows:
number shown.
Electronic: > 98-40-001 > Jan > 98 > A/T - Harsh 4-3 Downshift When Decelerating > Page 5328
PARTS INFORMATION:

Electronic: > 97-40-031 > Sep > 97 > A/T - Driveability Concerns
Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator - Electronic: Customer Interest A/T - Driveability Concerns
Number: 97-40-031
Group: TRANSAXLE

Model: ALL
during deceleration
^ Rough idle
Note:
SONATA
EXCEL, SCOUPE
Actuator - Electronic: > 98-40-001 > Jan > 98 > A/T - Harsh 4-3 Downshift When Decelerating
Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator - Electronic: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Harsh 4-3 Downshift
When Decelerating
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 98-40-001
Date: JANUARY, 1998
Model: ALL
DESCRIPTION:
158-194°F).
# 97-40-031.
5. Note:
as follows:
number shown.
Actuator - Electronic: > 98-40-001 > Jan > 98 > A/T - Harsh 4-3 Downshift When Decelerating > Page 5341
PARTS INFORMATION:

Actuator - Electronic: > 97-40-031 > Sep > 97 > A/T - Driveability Concerns
Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator - Electronic: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Driveability Concerns
Number: 97-40-031
Group: TRANSAXLE

Model: ALL
during deceleration
^ Rough idle
Note:
SONATA
EXCEL, SCOUPE
Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator - Electronic: Specifications IAC Motor
IAC Motor
Resistance between terminals 1 and 2 10.5 to 14 ohms at 68 deg F
between terminals 2 and 3 10.0 to 12.5 ohms at 68 deg F
Frequency 100 Hz
Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator - Electronic: Description and Operation
IDLE SPEED CONTROL (ISC) ACTUATOR
The idle speed control actuator is the double coils type and has two coils. The two coils are driven
by separate driver stages in the ECM. Depending on the pulse duty factor the equilibrium of the
magnetic forces of the two coils will result in different angles of the motor. In parallel to the throttle
valve, a bypass hose line is arranged where the idle speed actuator is inserted in.
Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator - Electronic: Testing and Inspection
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM

ACTUATOR INSPECTION
1. Disconnect the connector at the idle speed control actuator. 2. Measure the resistance between
terminals.
Standard value : Terminal 1 and 2 .... 10.5 - 14 Ohms Terminal 2 and 3 .... 10 - 12.5 Ohms [at 20°C
(68°F)]
3. Connect the connector at the idle speed control actuator.
DTC P1510, P1513, P1552, P1553 - Idle Speed Control (ISC) Actuator
HINT: Open or short circuit is observed in idle air control system when ignition switch is turned on.
DTC P0506, P0507 - Idle Speed Control System
HINT: Mechanical problems are observed in the idle air control system.
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel
System) > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions


Connector View
CONNECTOR VIEW
Numbering Order
NUMBERING ORDER

Electrical Diagram
Harness Layouts
Harness Layout

B ..........................................................................................................................................................
......................................................................... Black L .......................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
Blue Br .................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................... Brown G ...............................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
...... Green Gr .......................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................ Gray Lg ...................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
....... Light Green O ..............................................................................................................................
................................................................................................... Orange P .........................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
............................... Pink R ..................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................... Red W .............................
..............................................................................................................................................................
....................................... White Y ........................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................... Yellow Li ....................
..............................................................................................................................................................
......................................... Light Blue
CAUTION
CAUTION
may result.
lamp or ohmmeter.

box and the short.
Testing For Voltage
Testing For Voltage
CAUTION

CIRCUIT DIAGRAM

Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel
Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Locations
Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 5376
MFI CONTROL RELAY
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM

Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram


Connector View
CONNECTOR VIEW
Numbering Order
NUMBERING ORDER

Electrical Diagram
Harness Layouts
Harness Layout

B ..........................................................................................................................................................
......................................................................... Black L .......................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
Blue Br .................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................... Brown G ...............................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
...... Green Gr .......................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................ Gray Lg ...................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
....... Light Green O ..............................................................................................................................
................................................................................................... Orange P .........................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
............................... Pink R ..................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................... Red W .............................
..............................................................................................................................................................
....................................... White Y ........................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................... Yellow Li ....................
..............................................................................................................................................................
......................................... Light Blue
CAUTION
CAUTION
may result.
lamp or ohmmeter.

box and the short.
Testing For Voltage
Testing For Voltage
CAUTION

Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5394
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM

Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5395
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel
Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins >
Customer Interest for Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: > 97-40-031 > Sep > 97 > A/T - Driveability Concerns
Number: 97-40-031
Group: TRANSAXLE

Model: ALL
during deceleration
^ Rough idle
Note:
Customer Interest for Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: > 97-40-031 > Sep > 97 > A/T - Driveability Concerns > Page
5405
5406
SONATA
5407
EXCEL, SCOUPE
Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All
Technical Service Bulletins for Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: > 97-40-031 > Sep > 97 > A/T - Driveability Concerns
Number: 97-40-031
Group: TRANSAXLE

Model: ALL
during deceleration
^ Rough idle
Note:
Page 5413
Page 5414
SONATA
Page 5415
EXCEL, SCOUPE
Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Air/Fuel
Number: 98-36-001
Date: APRIL, 1998
DESCRIPTION
^ Oxygen sensors
^ Air flow sensor
emissions.
the A/F ratio.
performance.
the code was set.
stored in the PCM.
Note:

PCM.

load value.
Fuel Trim code.
and re-test.
this TSB.

Trim code.
and re-test.
TSB.
Note:
Note:
D. Select "Engine"
E. Select "Data"
the scan tool.
Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5423
MAF meter
Type Hot film type
connector No. 41
at 3,000 rpm 1.3 to 2.0 V

Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5424
Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions


Connector View
CONNECTOR VIEW
Numbering Order
NUMBERING ORDER

Electrical Diagram
Harness Layouts
Harness Layout

B ..........................................................................................................................................................
......................................................................... Black L .......................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
Blue Br .................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................... Brown G ...............................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
...... Green Gr .......................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................ Gray Lg ...................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
....... Light Green O ..............................................................................................................................
................................................................................................... Orange P .........................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
............................... Pink R ..................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................... Red W .............................
..............................................................................................................................................................
....................................... White Y ........................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................... Yellow Li ....................
..............................................................................................................................................................
......................................... Light Blue
CAUTION
CAUTION
may result.
lamp or ohmmeter.

box and the short.
Testing For Voltage
Testing For Voltage
CAUTION

Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5438
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
connector.
or ECM.
comparison.
USING VOLTMETER
to 198°F).
Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer
Interest: > 00-36-006 > Mar > 00 > TPS - Driveability Concerns
Number 00-36-006
Date MARCH, 2000
DESCRIPTION:
^ Unstable idle
REPAIR INFORMATION:


Interest: > 00-36-006 > Mar > 00 > TPS - Driveability Concerns > Page 5450
PARTS INFORMATION

Interest: > 97-40-031 > Sep > 97 > A/T - Driveability Concerns
Number: 97-40-031
Group: TRANSAXLE

Model: ALL
during deceleration
^ Rough idle
Note:
Interest: > 97-40-031 > Sep > 97 > A/T - Driveability Concerns > Page 5455
SONATA
EXCEL, SCOUPE
Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical
Service Bulletins for Throttle Position Sensor: > 00-36-006 > Mar > 00 > TPS - Driveability Concerns
Number 00-36-006
Date MARCH, 2000
DESCRIPTION:
^ Unstable idle
REPAIR INFORMATION:


Service Bulletins for Throttle Position Sensor: > 00-36-006 > Mar > 00 > TPS - Driveability Concerns > Page 5463
PARTS INFORMATION

Service Bulletins for Throttle Position Sensor: > 98-36-001 > Apr > 98 > Air/Fuel Mixture - Trim Code Diagnosis
Number: 98-36-001
Date: APRIL, 1998
DESCRIPTION
^ Oxygen sensors
^ Air flow sensor
emissions.
the A/F ratio.
Service Bulletins for Throttle Position Sensor: > 98-36-001 > Apr > 98 > Air/Fuel Mixture - Trim Code Diagnosis > Page
5468
performance.
the code was set.
stored in the PCM.
Note:

5469
PCM.

load value.
Fuel Trim code.
and re-test.
this TSB.

5470
Trim code.
and re-test.
TSB.
Note:
Note:
D. Select "Engine"
E. Select "Data"
the scan tool.
Service Bulletins for Throttle Position Sensor: > 97-40-031 > Sep > 97 > A/T - Driveability Concerns
Number: 97-40-031
Group: TRANSAXLE

Model: ALL
during deceleration
^ Rough idle
Note:
Service Bulletins for Throttle Position Sensor: > 97-40-031 > Sep > 97 > A/T - Driveability Concerns > Page 5475
SONATA
EXCEL, SCOUPE
Service Bulletins for Throttle Position Sensor: > 97-40-004 > Feb > 97 > Engine/Transmission Controls - Service Manual
Revisions
Manual Revisions
Number 97-40-004
Date 02-1997

DESCRIPTION:
are shown.
Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other
Service Bulletins for Throttle Position Sensor: > 98-36-001 > Apr > 98 > Air/Fuel Mixture - Trim Code Diagnosis
Number: 98-36-001
Date: APRIL, 1998
DESCRIPTION
^ Oxygen sensors
^ Air flow sensor
emissions.
the A/F ratio.
5487
performance.
the code was set.
stored in the PCM.
Note:

5488
PCM.

load value.
Fuel Trim code.
and re-test.
this TSB.

5489
Trim code.
and re-test.
TSB.
Note:
Note:
D. Select "Engine"
E. Select "Data"
the scan tool.
Service Bulletins for Throttle Position Sensor: > 97-40-004 > Feb > 97 > Engine/Transmission Controls - Service Manual
Revisions
Manual Revisions
Number 97-40-004
Date 02-1997

DESCRIPTION:
are shown.
Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5494
2.3 to 3.4 K ohms
Note: when idling
connector No. 73
4.25 to 4.8 V

CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
SENSOR INSPECTION
sensor.

turned on.
USING VOLTMETER
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Body > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine/Cooling/Fuel System - New Parts
Throttle Body: Technical Service Bulletins Engine/Cooling/Fuel System - New Parts
Number: 02-20-003
Date: APRIL, 2002
DESCRIPTION:
effective dates.
EFFECTIVE DATE:
side.
NOTE:
NOTE:

Pipe Plug: P/N 21133-32000
2. Long block (P/N 21101-22X00)

Throttle Body: Specifications
Throttle body to surge tank 15 to 20 Nm

Throttle Body: Testing and Inspection
1. Check the throttle body for cracks. 2. Check for restriction of the vacuum port or passage. 3.
Check for interference when moving the accelerator cable.
CAUTION:
(1) Throttle valve set screw was adjusted in the production line with the air volume (0.516 ± 5%
g/sec) during idling. So please DO NOT
ADJUST IT voluntarily
(2) When the idle RPM is out of specification, check the relevant sensors and their input or output
value first. (3) The throttle body does not need to be cleaned because carbon in throttle body does
not affect the system operating at all.
Throttle Body: Service and Repair
COMPONENTS
REMOVAL
CAUTION:
The throttle valve must not be removed.
1. Remove the throttle position sensor.
NOTE: Except when necessary for replacement, the throttle position sensor must not be removed.
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor >
Concerns
Number 00-36-006
Date MARCH, 2000
DESCRIPTION:
^ Unstable idle
REPAIR INFORMATION:


PARTS INFORMATION

Concerns
Number: 97-40-031
Group: TRANSAXLE

Model: ALL
during deceleration
^ Rough idle
Note:
SONATA
EXCEL, SCOUPE
Number 00-36-006
Date MARCH, 2000
DESCRIPTION:
^ Unstable idle
REPAIR INFORMATION:


PARTS INFORMATION

Number: 98-36-001
Date: APRIL, 1998
DESCRIPTION
^ Oxygen sensors
^ Air flow sensor
emissions.
the A/F ratio.
performance.
the code was set.
stored in the PCM.
Note:

PCM.

load value.
Fuel Trim code.
and re-test.
this TSB.

Trim code.
and re-test.
TSB.
Note:
Note:
D. Select "Engine"
E. Select "Data"
the scan tool.
97-40-031 > Sep > 97 > A/T - Driveability Concerns
Number: 97-40-031
Group: TRANSAXLE

Model: ALL
during deceleration
^ Rough idle
Note:
SONATA
EXCEL, SCOUPE
97-40-004 > Feb > 97 > Engine/Transmission Controls - Service Manual Revisions
Manual Revisions
Number 97-40-004
Date 02-1997

DESCRIPTION:
are shown.
Number: 98-36-001
Date: APRIL, 1998
DESCRIPTION
^ Oxygen sensors
^ Air flow sensor
emissions.
the A/F ratio.
performance.
the code was set.
stored in the PCM.
Note:

PCM.

load value.
Fuel Trim code.
and re-test.
this TSB.

Trim code.
and re-test.
TSB.
Note:
Note:
D. Select "Engine"
E. Select "Data"
the scan tool.
> Feb > 97 > Engine/Transmission Controls - Service Manual Revisions
Manual Revisions
Number 97-40-004
Date 02-1997

DESCRIPTION:
are shown.
2.3 to 3.4 K ohms
Note: when idling
connector No. 73
4.25 to 4.8 V

CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
SENSOR INSPECTION
sensor.

turned on.
USING VOLTMETER
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Firing Order > Component Information >
Specifications
Coil Pak
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Timing > Number One Cylinder >

Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component

CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
USING VOLTMETER
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Crankshaft Position Sensor - Replacement Procedure
Procedure
Number: 99-36-010
Date: JULY, 1999
DESCRIPTION:
NOTE:
installed.
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Crankshaft Position Sensor - Replacement Procedure > Page 5587

at 3,000 rpm 2,800 to 3,200 Hz

at 3,000 rpm 2,800 to 3,200 Hz

CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
SENSOR INSPECTION
terminal 2 and 3.
wheel: 0.5 - 1.5 mm (0.020 - 0.059 in.)

voltage induced.
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Cable > Component Information >
Specifications
NO . 1 4.8 K ohms
NO. 2 10 K ohms
NO. 3 7.3 K ohms
NO. 4 12 K ohms
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Cable > Component Information >
replace the cable.
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information >
Specifications
Ignition Coil: Locations

Ignition Coil: Diagram Information and Instructions


Connector View
CONNECTOR VIEW
Numbering Order
NUMBERING ORDER

Electrical Diagram
Harness Layouts
Harness Layout

B ..........................................................................................................................................................
......................................................................... Black L .......................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
Blue Br .................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................... Brown G ...............................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
...... Green Gr .......................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................ Gray Lg ...................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
....... Light Green O ..............................................................................................................................
................................................................................................... Orange P .........................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
............................... Pink R ..................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................... Red W .............................
..............................................................................................................................................................
....................................... White Y ........................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................... Yellow Li ....................
..............................................................................................................................................................
......................................... Light Blue
Ignition Coil: Diagnostic Aids
CAUTION
CAUTION
may result.
lamp or ohmmeter.

box and the short.
Testing For Voltage
Testing For Voltage
CAUTION
Ignition Coil: Description and Operation
IGNITION COIL
When the ignition power transistor is turned ON by the signal from the ECM, It sends the signal to
the ignition coil, then primary current is shut off and a high voltage is induced in the secondary coil.
Ignition Coil: Testing and Inspection
CHECKING IGNITION COILS
1. Measurement of the primary coil resistance. Measure the resistance between connector
terminals 3 and 1 (the coils at the No.1 and No.4 cylinder
sides) of the ignition coil, and between terminals 3 and 2 (the coils at the No.2 and No.3 cylinder
sides).
Standard value : 0.5 ± 0.05 K Ohms
2. Measurement of the secondary coil resistance. Measure the resistance between the high-voltage
terminal for the No.1 and No.4 cylinders, and
between the high-voltage terminals for the No.2 and No.3 cylinders.
Standard value : 12.1 ± 1.8 K Ohms

CAUTION: Be sure, when measuring the resistance of the secondary coil, to disconnect the
connector of the ignition coil.
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM (SOHC/DOHC)

HARNESS INSPECTION PROCEDURE (SOHC)
Ignition Coil: Service and Repair
IGNITION COIL (SOHC)
COMPONENTS

1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Disconnect the lead wire and high-voltage cable. 3.
Remove the ignition coil mounting bolt and remove the ignition coil assembly. 4. Installation is the
reverse order of removal.
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information >


KNOCK SENSOR (KS)
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
SENSOR INSPECTION


Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System >
Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Specifications

Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5634
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
USING VOLTMETER
Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Crankshaft Position Sensor -
Replacement Procedure
Procedure
Number: 99-36-010
Date: JULY, 1999
DESCRIPTION:
NOTE:
installed.
Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Crankshaft Position Sensor -
Replacement Procedure > Page 5642

Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Specifications > Electrical Specifications
at 3,000 rpm 2,800 to 3,200 Hz

Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Specifications > Electrical Specifications > Page 5645
at 3,000 rpm 2,800 to 3,200 Hz

Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5646
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
SENSOR INSPECTION
terminal 2 and 3.
wheel: 0.5 - 1.5 mm (0.020 - 0.059 in.)

voltage induced.
Ignition Switch > Component Information > Locations
IGNITION LOCK
Knock Sensor > Component Information > Specifications > Electrical Specifications

Knock Sensor > Component Information > Specifications > Electrical Specifications > Page 5658

Knock Sensor > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5659
KNOCK SENSOR (KS)
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
SENSOR INSPECTION


Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Spark Plug > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Spark Plugs - Application/Service Interval
Number 02-36-017
Date 06-2002
Model All Models
DESCRIPTION:
Hyundai Vehicles.


Plug Gap 1.0 - 1.1 mm (0.039 - 0.043 in.)

NGK .....................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................. BKR5ES-11 Champion .........................................................
..................................................................................................................................... RC9YC4,
RC10YC4
may be damaged.

Standard value:
Unleaded : 1.0-1.1 mm (0.039-0.043 in.)

Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids -
Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component
Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Testing and Inspection
INSPECTION
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE SOLENOID
Standard resistance : 12-16 Ohms
3. Attach the positive (+) lead from the battery to terminal 1, and the negative (-) lead to terminal 2.
4. Check that an operation noise can be heard from the solenoid.
Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Shift Solenoid: > 03-40-007-1 > Mar > 04 > A/T - Erratic/Slipping Shifts/MIL
ON/DTC's Set
Technical Service Bulletin # 03-40-007-1 Date: 040301
A/T - Erratic/Slipping Shifts/MIL ON/DTC's Set
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 03-40-007-1
Date: MARCH 2004
Model: 1996-00 ELANTRA, 1997-01 TIBURON, 1996-04 ACCENT
Subject: ATA SOLENOID DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES - P0740, P0741, P0742, P0743,
P0745, P0747, P0748, P0750, P0752, P0753, P0755, P0757, P0758, P0760, P0765
DESCRIPTION:
This TSB supersedes TSB # 03-40-007 to revise repair information.
Incorrect operation of the transaxle solenoids for the 1996-00 Elantra, 1997-01 Tiburon and
1996-04 Accent may result in the following symptoms:
^ Erratic shift or slipping
^ Transaxle held in 3rd gear Fail-safe
^ Diagnostic Trouble Codes - P0740, P0741, P0742, P0743, P0745, P0747, P0748, P0750, P0752,
P0753, P0755, P0757, P0758, P0760, P0765 (see DTC Information shown in this bulletin)
^ MIL illuminated
NOTE:
Do NOT replace the transaxle for solenoid codes listed as "Open/short" in the "DTC Information"
section. Instead, follow the repair procedure.
Repair Procedure
1. Using a Hi-Scan Pro, check for codes in the "Automatic Transaxle and "Engine" menus. Record
the DTC and description.
cable.
NOTE:
NOTE:
A high resistance ground usually causes two or more DCCSV or PCSV DTC (P0742, P0743,
P0745, P0747, P0748 or P0765).
ON/DTC's Set > Page 5688
NOTE:
This procedure is necessary because the TCM grounds through the body ground.
5. Measure the voltage drop between the negative battery cable and the transaxle case:
the transaxle case (use VDC setting). If the voltage drop is as shown.
6. Disconnect the connectors at the solenoids and TCM. Check for bent pins or pins not fully
NOTE:
7. Refer to the DTC recorded in Step 1. To correct the DTC, perform the related repair shown.
SOLENOID ASSEMBLY REPLACEMENT:

8. Using a screwdriver, remove the clip and push the solenoid connector into the transaxle case.
(On earlier models, use two screwdrivers to push the tabs of the solenoid connector inward, then
push the connector into the transaxle case).
9. Remove the oil temperature sensor from the bracket. Remove the oil filter. Remove ten 10 mm
bolts and remove the valve body.
10. Remove the solenoids and carefully reinstall the new solenoids in the same location. Tighten
the bolts to 3-4 lb-ft (40-60 kg.cm).
11. Confirm the 0-ring is installed on the top center of the valve body and the valve body pipe is
installed on the top of the valve body.
12. Carefully align the manual valve on the valve body to the manual control shaft and reinstall the
valve body. Install the bolts and torque to 7-9 lb.ft (100-120 kg.cm).
13. Reinstall the temperature sensor to the bracket.
14. Push the solenoid connector through the hole in the case. Reinstall the clip on the solenoid
connector.
15. Reinstall the oil filter and tighten the bolts to 4-5 lb.ft (50-70 kg.cm).
16. Install a new pan gasket and reinstall the oil pan. Tighten the bolts to 7-9 lb.ft (100-120 kg.cm).
17. Add SPIII ATF (approximately 4-1/2 quarts for Accent, 5 quarts for Elantra/Tiburon) and check
the level with the engine idling in Neutral. Confirm the ATF is at the correct level when the ATF is at
normal operating temperature (70-100°C, 159-212°F).
cycles, including 1-2-3-4 upshifts and 4-3-2-1 downshifts). If the DTCs return, perform the repairs
shown.
PARTS INFORMATION
WARRANTY INFORMATION - (SOLENOID VALVE ASSEMBLY REPLACEMENT)
DTC INFORMATION:
For your reference, the algorithms the 1CM uses to set solenoid codes are shown.
NOTE:
Do NOT replace the transaxle for those codes listed as "Open/short". Refer to the tables for
additional information.
Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Shift Solenoid: > 00-40-009 > Aug > 00 > A/T - Shift Solenoid Incorrect
Operation/MIL ON
Shift Solenoid: Customer Interest A/T - Shift Solenoid Incorrect Operation/MIL ON
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 00-40-009
Date: AUGUST, 2000
Model: ALL
symptoms:
^ Erratic shift
^ MIL illuminated
NOTE:
REPAIR PROCEDURE:
NOTE:
Step 6:
cable.
NOTE:
NOTE:
All models:
NOTE:


NOTE:

SONATA:
NOTE:
Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Shift Solenoid: > 99-40-017 > Dec > 99 > A/T - Shift Lever Will Not Shift Out Of
Park
Shift Solenoid: Customer Interest A/T - Shift Lever Will Not Shift Out Of Park
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 99-40-017
DESCRIPTION:
NOTE:
SERVICE PROCEDURE:
column).

Park > Page 5703
Park > Page 5704
module.
PARTS INFORMATION:
Park > Page 5705
Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Shift Solenoid: > 99-40-002 > Mar > 99 > A/T - 2 to 3 Gear Upshift Flare
Shift Solenoid: Customer Interest A/T - 2 to 3 Gear Upshift Flare
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 99-40-002
Date MARCH, 1999

(below 60°C, 140°F).
REPAIR PROCEDURE:
adjust screw.
PARTS INFORMATION:
Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Shift Solenoid: > 99-40-002 > Mar > 99 > A/T - 2 to 3 Gear Upshift Flare > Page
5710
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Shift Solenoid: > 03-40-007-1 > Mar > 04 > A/T - Erratic/Slipping
Shifts/MIL ON/DTC's Set
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 03-40-007-1
Date: MARCH 2004
P0745, P0747, P0748, P0750, P0752, P0753, P0755, P0757, P0758, P0760, P0765
DESCRIPTION:
^ MIL illuminated
NOTE:
Repair Procedure
cable.
NOTE:
NOTE:
P0745, P0747, P0748 or P0765).
Shifts/MIL ON/DTC's Set > Page 5716
NOTE:
NOTE:

connector.
shown.
PARTS INFORMATION
DTC INFORMATION:
NOTE:
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Shift Solenoid: > 00-40-009 > Aug > 00 > A/T - Shift Solenoid Incorrect
Operation/MIL ON
Shift Solenoid: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Shift Solenoid Incorrect Operation/MIL ON
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 00-40-009
Date: AUGUST, 2000
Model: ALL
symptoms:
^ Erratic shift
^ MIL illuminated
NOTE:
REPAIR PROCEDURE:
NOTE:
Step 6:
cable.
NOTE:
NOTE:
All models:
NOTE:


NOTE:

SONATA:
NOTE:
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Shift Solenoid: > 99-40-017 > Dec > 99 > A/T - Shift Lever Will Not
Shift Out Of Park
Shift Solenoid: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Shift Lever Will Not Shift Out Of Park
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 99-40-017
DESCRIPTION:
NOTE:
SERVICE PROCEDURE:
column).

module.
PARTS INFORMATION:
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Shift Solenoid: > 99-40-002 > Mar > 99 > A/T - 2 to 3 Gear Upshift
Flare
Shift Solenoid: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T - 2 to 3 Gear Upshift Flare
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 99-40-002
Date MARCH, 1999

(below 60°C, 140°F).
REPAIR PROCEDURE:
adjust screw.
PARTS INFORMATION:
Flare > Page 5738
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules -
Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 05-40-016 > Oct > 05 > A/T - No Movement in 'DRIVE' or 'REVERSE'
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 05-40-016
Date: OCTOBER, 2005
Model: ALL
DESCRIPTION:
shown below:
REPAIR PROCEDURE:
NOTE:

Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 05-40-016 > Oct > 05 > A/T - No Movement in 'DRIVE' or 'REVERSE' > Page 5749

^ Vehicle
Go to Step 12.
NOTE:

Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 03-40-022 > Dec > 03 > A/T - Fail Safe Mode/Erratic/Hard Shifting/DTC's Set
Number 03-40-022
Date 12-2003

P0717 & P0722
DESCRIPTION:

NOTE
REPAIR PROCEDURE:
Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 03-40-022 > Dec > 03 > A/T - Fail Safe Mode/Erratic/Hard Shifting/DTC's Set >
Page 5757

Page 5758
PARTS INFORMATION
Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 02-40-010 > Mar > 02 > A/T - Harsh/Delayed Gear Engagement
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 02-40-010
Date: 03-2002

ENGAGEMENT
DESCRIPTION:
shown below:
REPAIR PROCEDURE:
shop manual.

^ Select F1 "GRPH".
NOTE
Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 02-40-010 > Mar > 02 > A/T - Harsh/Delayed Gear Engagement > Page 5763
NOTE


Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 00-40-009 > Aug > 00 > A/T - Shift Solenoid Incorrect Operation/MIL ON
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 00-40-009
Date: AUGUST, 2000
Model: ALL
symptoms:
^ Erratic shift
^ MIL illuminated
NOTE:
REPAIR PROCEDURE:
NOTE:
Step 6:
cable.
NOTE:
Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 00-40-009 > Aug > 00 > A/T - Shift Solenoid Incorrect Operation/MIL ON > Page
5769
NOTE:
All models:
NOTE:


5770
NOTE:

5771
SONATA:
NOTE:
Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 00-40-010 > Aug > 00 > A/T - MIL ON DTCs P0712/P0713 Set
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 00-40-010
Date: AUGUST, 2000
Model: ALL
^ MIL illuminated
symptoms:
^ MIL illuminated
Procedure.
REPAIR PROCEDURE:
^ No DTC-gotostep4
Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 00-40-010 > Aug > 00 > A/T - MIL ON DTCs P0712/P0713 Set > Page 5776
PARTS INFORMATION:
Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 00-40-011 > Aug > 00 > A/T - Harsh Shifts, DTCs P0717/P0722 Set
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 00-40-011
Date: AUGUST, 2000

^ Harsh 1-2 shift

TCM):
Note 1:
Note 2:
SERVICE PROCEDURE:
Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 00-40-011 > Aug > 00 > A/T - Harsh Shifts, DTCs P0717/P0722 Set > Page 5781
Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 00-36-006 > Mar > 00 > TPS - Driveability Concerns
Number 00-36-006
Date MARCH, 2000
DESCRIPTION:
^ Unstable idle
REPAIR INFORMATION:


Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 00-36-006 > Mar > 00 > TPS - Driveability Concerns > Page 5787
PARTS INFORMATION

Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 99-40-017 > Dec > 99 > A/T - Shift Lever Will Not Shift Out Of Park
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 99-40-017
DESCRIPTION:
NOTE:
SERVICE PROCEDURE:
column).

Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 99-40-017 > Dec > 99 > A/T - Shift Lever Will Not Shift Out Of Park > Page 5792
module.
PARTS INFORMATION:
Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 99-40-002 > Mar > 99 > A/T - 2 to 3 Gear Upshift Flare
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 99-40-002
Date MARCH, 1999

(below 60°C, 140°F).
REPAIR PROCEDURE:
adjust screw.
PARTS INFORMATION:
Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 99-40-002 > Mar > 99 > A/T - 2 to 3 Gear Upshift Flare > Page 5799
Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 98-40-013 > Oct > 98 > A/T - Poor 2nd to 1st Gear Low Speed Downshift
Number 98-40-013
Date 10-1998
DESCRIPTION
SERVICE PROCEDURE

Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 98-40-013 > Oct > 98 > A/T - Poor 2nd to 1st Gear Low Speed Downshift > Page
5804
PARTS INFORMATION
Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 97-40-027-1 > Dec > 97 > A/T - Poor Downshifts/Shift Flare
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 97-40-027-1
Model: 1997 TIBURON
IMPROVEMENT
DESCRIPTION:
PARTS INFORMATION:
Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 97-40-028 > Sep > 97 > A/T - Harsh Engagement Shock
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 97-40-028
Model: ALL
DESCRIPTION:
PARTS INFORMATION:
158-194°F).
Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 97-40-028 > Sep > 97 > A/T - Harsh Engagement Shock > Page 5813
Sonata 2.0L).
replace the TCM.
transaxle.
Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 97-40-022 > Aug > 97 > A/T - Reverse To Drive Engagement Shock
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 97-40-022
Date: AUGUST, 1997
Model: ALL
DESCRIPTION:
have this feature.
follows:
engagement shock.
SERVICE PROCEDURE:
Sonata: 96-40-003-1).
PARTS INFORMATION
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Control Module: > tnt1660906-03 > Sep > 06 > A/T, Engine Controls -
Procedure
MODEL: All
DESCRIPTION:
as shown below.
VEHICLES AFFECTED:
^ All

HI-SCAN PROCEDURE:
^ Select vehicle
press "ENTER"

NOTE:
upshifts.

NOTE:

Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Control Module: > tnt1630506-01 > May > 06 > A/T Controls -
Values

HI-SCAN PROCEDURE:
^ Select vehicle

NOTE:
upshifts.

NOTE:
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Control Module: > 06-40-005 > Mar > 06 > A/T Controls - Reset and
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 06-40-005
Date: MARCH, 2006
Model: ALL

VALUES
DESCRIPTION:

as shown below.
HI-SCAN PROCEDURE:
^ Select vehicle
NOTE:
completed as shown.
occur.
NOTE:

Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Control Module: > 05-40-016 > Oct > 05 > A/T - No Movement in
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 05-40-016
Date: OCTOBER, 2005
Model: ALL
DESCRIPTION:
shown below:
REPAIR PROCEDURE:
NOTE:


^ Vehicle
Go to Step 12.
NOTE:

Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Control Module: > 03-40-022 > Dec > 03 > A/T - Fail Safe
Set
Number 03-40-022
Date 12-2003

P0717 & P0722
DESCRIPTION:

NOTE
REPAIR PROCEDURE:

PARTS INFORMATION
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Control Module: > 03-40-005 > Apr > 03 > A/T - DTC's
P0731/P0732/P0733/P0734/P0735/P0736

P0731/P0732/P0733/P0734/P0735/P0736
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 03-40-005
Date: APRIL, 2003
Model: ALL

P0734, P0735, P0736
DESCRIPTION:
REPAIR PROCEDURE:
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Control Module: > 03-40-005 > Apr > 03 > A/T - DTC's
P0731/P0732/P0733/P0734/P0735/P0736 > Page 5855
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Control Module: > 03-40-003 > Feb > 03 > A/T - TCM Adaptive
Learning Procedure
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 03-40-003
Model: ALL
DESCRIPTION:
NOTE:
shown below.
NOTE:
Temp. Sensor".
NOTE:
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Control Module: > 02-40-010 > Mar > 02 > A/T - Harsh/Delayed Gear
Engagement
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 02-40-010
Date: 03-2002

ENGAGEMENT
DESCRIPTION:
shown below:
REPAIR PROCEDURE:
shop manual.

^ Select F1 "GRPH".
NOTE
Engagement > Page 5864
NOTE


Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Control Module: > 00-40-012 > Sep > 00 > A/T - Diagnostic Trouble
Codes & Scanned Data
Group TRANSAXLE
Number 00-40-012
Model ALL

DESCRIPTION:
NOTE:
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Control Module: > 00-40-012 > Sep > 00 > A/T - Diagnostic Trouble
Codes & Scanned Data > Page 5870

Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Control Module: > 00-40-009 > Aug > 00 > A/T - Shift Solenoid
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 00-40-009
Date: AUGUST, 2000
Model: ALL
symptoms:
^ Erratic shift
^ MIL illuminated
NOTE:
REPAIR PROCEDURE:
NOTE:
Step 6:
cable.
NOTE:
NOTE:
All models:
NOTE:


NOTE:

SONATA:
NOTE:
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Control Module: > 00-40-010 > Aug > 00 > A/T - MIL ON DTCs
P0712/P0713 Set
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 00-40-010
Date: AUGUST, 2000
Model: ALL
^ MIL illuminated
symptoms:
^ MIL illuminated
Procedure.
REPAIR PROCEDURE:
^ No DTC-gotostep4
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Control Module: > 00-40-010 > Aug > 00 > A/T - MIL ON DTCs
P0712/P0713 Set > Page 5882
PARTS INFORMATION:
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Control Module: > 00-40-011 > Aug > 00 > A/T - Harsh Shifts, DTCs
P0717/P0722 Set
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 00-40-011
Date: AUGUST, 2000

^ Harsh 1-2 shift

TCM):
Note 1:
Note 2:
SERVICE PROCEDURE:
P0717/P0722 Set > Page 5887
P0717/P0722 Set > Page 5888
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Control Module: > 00-00-001 > Jul > 00 > Scan Tool - Software
Update Procedure
Group: GENERAL
Number: 00-00-001
Date: JULY, 2000
Model: ALL
DESCRIPTION
PROCEDURE:
fixes.
SOL card.
Update Procedure > Page 5893
Note:
cards.
utility.
INFO card
COM2.
software cards.
COM2.
software.
NOTE:
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Control Module: > 00-36-006 > Mar > 00 > TPS - Driveability Concerns
Number 00-36-006
Date MARCH, 2000
DESCRIPTION:
^ Unstable idle
REPAIR INFORMATION:


Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Control Module: > 00-36-006 > Mar > 00 > TPS - Driveability Concerns
> Page 5903
PARTS INFORMATION

Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Control Module: > 99-40-017 > Dec > 99 > A/T - Shift Lever Will Not
Shift Out Of Park
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 99-40-017
DESCRIPTION:
NOTE:
SERVICE PROCEDURE:
column).

module.
PARTS INFORMATION:
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Control Module: > 99-40-004 > Apr > 99 > A/T - Servicing DTCs
P1613/P1614
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 99-40-004
Date: APRIL, 1999
DESCRIPTION:
SERVICE PROCEDURE:

Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Control Module: > 99-40-004 > Apr > 99 > A/T - Servicing DTCs
P1613/P1614 > Page 5915
PARTS INFORMATION
WARRANTY
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Control Module: > 99-40-002 > Mar > 99 > A/T - 2 to 3 Gear Upshift
Flare
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 99-40-002
Date MARCH, 1999

(below 60°C, 140°F).
REPAIR PROCEDURE:
adjust screw.
PARTS INFORMATION:
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Control Module: > 99-40-002 > Mar > 99 > A/T - 2 to 3 Gear Upshift
Flare > Page 5920
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Control Module: > 98-40-013 > Oct > 98 > A/T - Poor 2nd to 1st Gear
Low Speed Downshift
Number 98-40-013
Date 10-1998
DESCRIPTION
SERVICE PROCEDURE

Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Control Module: > 98-40-013 > Oct > 98 > A/T - Poor 2nd to 1st Gear
Low Speed Downshift > Page 5925
PARTS INFORMATION
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Control Module: > 97-40-027-1 > Dec > 97 > A/T - Poor
Downshifts/Shift Flare
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 97-40-027-1
Model: 1997 TIBURON
IMPROVEMENT
DESCRIPTION:
PARTS INFORMATION:
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Control Module: > 97-40-028 > Sep > 97 > A/T - Harsh Engagement
Shock
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 97-40-028
Model: ALL
DESCRIPTION:
PARTS INFORMATION:
158-194°F).
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Control Module: > 97-40-028 > Sep > 97 > A/T - Harsh Engagement
Shock > Page 5934
Sonata 2.0L).
replace the TCM.
transaxle.
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Control Module: > 97-40-030 > Sep > 97 > TCM - Adaptive Control
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 97-40-030
Model: ALL
DESCRIPTION:
compensate for:
SERVICE PROCEDURE:
is completed.)
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Control Module: > 97-40-022 > Aug > 97 > A/T - Reverse To Drive
Engagement Shock
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 97-40-022
Date: AUGUST, 1997
Model: ALL
DESCRIPTION:
have this feature.
follows:
engagement shock.
SERVICE PROCEDURE:
Sonata: 96-40-003-1).
PARTS INFORMATION
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Control Module: > 97-40-001-1 > Jul > 97 > A/T - Mutual Control
Introduction
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 97-40-001-1
Date: JULY, 1997
Model: ALL
production dates.
DESCRIPTION:
ANALYSIS:
2. TPS above 1.2 V

rpm for 10 minutes
1997 Sonata 2.0L & 3.0L July 1, 1996

Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Control Module: > 97-40-001-1 > Jul > 97 > A/T - Mutual Control
1997 Tiburon 1.8L & 2.0L July 1, 1996
PARTS INFORMATION:
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Control Module: > 97-40-021 > Jul > 97 > A/T - Cold Acceleration in
2ND Gear
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 97-40-021
Date: JULY, 1997
Model: ALL
DESCRIPTION:

Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Control Module: > tnt1660906-03 > Sep > 06 > A/T, Engine Controls -
Procedure
MODEL: All
DESCRIPTION:
as shown below.
VEHICLES AFFECTED:
^ All

HI-SCAN PROCEDURE:
^ Select vehicle
press "ENTER"

NOTE:
upshifts.

NOTE:

Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Control Module: > tnt1630506-01 > May > 06 > A/T Controls - PCM/TCM
Values

HI-SCAN PROCEDURE:
^ Select vehicle

NOTE:
upshifts.

NOTE:
Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Control Module: > 06-40-005 > Mar > 06 > A/T Controls - Reset and
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 06-40-005
Date: MARCH, 2006
Model: ALL

VALUES
DESCRIPTION:

as shown below.
HI-SCAN PROCEDURE:
^ Select vehicle
NOTE:
completed as shown.
occur.
NOTE:

Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Control Module: > 03-40-005 > Apr > 03 > A/T - DTC's
P0731/P0732/P0733/P0734/P0735/P0736

P0731/P0732/P0733/P0734/P0735/P0736
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 03-40-005
Date: APRIL, 2003
Model: ALL

P0734, P0735, P0736
DESCRIPTION:
REPAIR PROCEDURE:
Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Control Module: > 03-40-005 > Apr > 03 > A/T - DTC's
P0731/P0732/P0733/P0734/P0735/P0736 > Page 5975
Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Control Module: > 03-40-003 > Feb > 03 > A/T - TCM Adaptive Learning
Procedure
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 03-40-003
Model: ALL
DESCRIPTION:
NOTE:
shown below.
NOTE:
Temp. Sensor".
NOTE:
Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Control Module: > 00-40-012 > Sep > 00 > A/T - Diagnostic Trouble Codes
& Scanned Data
Group TRANSAXLE
Number 00-40-012
Model ALL

DESCRIPTION:
NOTE:
Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Control Module: > 00-40-012 > Sep > 00 > A/T - Diagnostic Trouble Codes
& Scanned Data > Page 5984

Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Control Module: > 00-00-001 > Jul > 00 > Scan Tool - Software Update
Procedure
Group: GENERAL
Number: 00-00-001
Date: JULY, 2000
Model: ALL
DESCRIPTION
PROCEDURE:
fixes.
SOL card.
Note:
cards.
utility.
INFO card
COM2.
software cards.
COM2.
software.
NOTE:
Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Control Module: > 99-40-004 > Apr > 99 > A/T - Servicing DTCs
P1613/P1614
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 99-40-004
Date: APRIL, 1999
DESCRIPTION:
SERVICE PROCEDURE:

Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Control Module: > 99-40-004 > Apr > 99 > A/T - Servicing DTCs
P1613/P1614 > Page 5999
PARTS INFORMATION
WARRANTY
Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Control Module: > 97-40-030 > Sep > 97 > TCM - Adaptive Control
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 97-40-030
Model: ALL
DESCRIPTION:
compensate for:
SERVICE PROCEDURE:
is completed.)
Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Control Module: > 97-40-001-1 > Jul > 97 > A/T - Mutual Control
Introduction
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 97-40-001-1
Date: JULY, 1997
Model: ALL
production dates.
DESCRIPTION:
ANALYSIS:
2. TPS above 1.2 V

rpm for 10 minutes
1997 Sonata 2.0L & 3.0L July 1, 1996

Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Control Module: > 97-40-001-1 > Jul > 97 > A/T - Mutual Control
1997 Tiburon 1.8L & 2.0L July 1, 1996
PARTS INFORMATION:
Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Control Module: > 97-40-021 > Jul > 97 > A/T - Cold Acceleration in 2ND
Gear
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 97-40-021
Date: JULY, 1997
Model: ALL
DESCRIPTION:

Service Bulletins > Page 6013
Rated Voltage 12 V
Rated Load min. 1A
At Solenoid Load.

Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches -
Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Engine/Transmission Controls - Service Manual Revisions

Manual Revisions
Number 97-40-004
Date 02-1997

DESCRIPTION:
are shown.
Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Throttle Position Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information
> Testing and Inspection
INSPECTION

Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-AT-013 > Jul > 09 > A/T - MIL ON/DTC's
Group TRANSAXLE
Number 09-AT-013
Date JULY, 2009

P0707, P0708
DESCRIPTION:
range switch.
PARTS INFORMATION
Service Procedure
c below.

Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 05-40-016 > Oct > 05 > A/T - No Movement in 'DRIVE' or
'REVERSE'

'REVERSE'
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 05-40-016
Date: OCTOBER, 2005
Model: ALL
DESCRIPTION:
shown below:
REPAIR PROCEDURE:
NOTE:

'REVERSE' > Page 6039

^ Vehicle
Go to Step 12.
NOTE:

Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 99-40-017 > Dec > 99 > A/T - Shift Lever Will Not Shift Out
Of Park
Park
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 99-40-017
DESCRIPTION:
NOTE:
SERVICE PROCEDURE:
column).

Of Park > Page 6047
Of Park > Page 6048
module.
PARTS INFORMATION:
Of Park > Page 6049
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: >
09-AT-013 > Jul > 09 > A/T - MIL ON/DTC's P0705/P0707/P0708/No Start In P/N
Group TRANSAXLE
Number 09-AT-013
Date JULY, 2009

P0707, P0708
DESCRIPTION:
range switch.
PARTS INFORMATION
09-AT-013 > Jul > 09 > A/T - MIL ON/DTC's P0705/P0707/P0708/No Start In P/N > Page 6055
Service Procedure
c below.

tnt1720307-02 > Mar > 07 > A/T Controls - Neutral Position Switch Adaptive Relearn

tnt1720307-02 > Mar > 07 > A/T Controls - Neutral Position Switch Adaptive Relearn > Page 6063
Press "ENTER."


tnt1581105-02 > Nov > 05 > A/T - No Movement In Drive/Reverse

Drive/Reverse
MODEL: ALL
DESCRIPTION:
shown below:
REPAIR PROCEDURE:
NOTE:
tnt1581105-02 > Nov > 05 > A/T - No Movement In Drive/Reverse > Page 6069

(10-12 Nm, 100-120 kg.cm)
(12-13 Nm, 120-130 kg.cm)

^ Vehicle
inserted.
Go to Step 12.
inserted.
NOTE:
replace the TCM.


Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 05-40-016
Date: OCTOBER, 2005
Model: ALL
DESCRIPTION:
shown below:
REPAIR PROCEDURE:
NOTE:


^ Vehicle
Go to Step 12.
NOTE:

Out Of Park
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 99-40-017
DESCRIPTION:
NOTE:
SERVICE PROCEDURE:
column).

module.
PARTS INFORMATION:
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: >
tnt1720307-02 > Mar > 07 > A/T Controls - Neutral Position Switch Adaptive Relearn

Press "ENTER."


tnt1581105-02 > Nov > 05 > A/T - No Movement In Drive/Reverse

Drive/Reverse
MODEL: ALL
DESCRIPTION:
shown below:
REPAIR PROCEDURE:
NOTE:

(10-12 Nm, 100-120 kg.cm)
(12-13 Nm, 120-130 kg.cm)

^ Vehicle
inserted.
Go to Step 12.
inserted.
NOTE:
replace the TCM.

Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 03-40-022 > Dec > 03 > A/T - Fail Safe Mode/Erratic/Hard Shifting/DTC's
Set
Set
Number 03-40-022
Date 12-2003

P0717 & P0722
DESCRIPTION:

NOTE
REPAIR PROCEDURE:
Set > Page 6112

Set > Page 6113
PARTS INFORMATION
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 00-40-011 > Aug > 00 > A/T - Harsh Shifts, DTCs P0717/P0722 Set
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 00-40-011
Date: AUGUST, 2000

^ Harsh 1-2 shift

TCM):
Note 1:
Note 2:
SERVICE PROCEDURE:
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 00-40-011 > Aug > 00 > A/T - Harsh Shifts, DTCs P0717/P0722 Set >
Page 6118
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 00-40-011 > Aug > 00 > A/T - Harsh Shifts, DTCs P0717/P0722 Set >
Page 6119
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 98-40-002 > Apr > 98 > A/T - Intermittent Delayed, Erratic, Harsh Shifting
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 98-40-002
Date: APRIL, 1998
Model: ALL
DESCRIPTION:
^ Harsh 1-2 shift
(TCM):
Note 1:
codes.
Note 2:
PG-B.

SERVICE PROCEDURE:

Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 98-40-002 > Apr > 98 > A/T - Intermittent Delayed, Erratic, Harsh Shifting
> Page 6124
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Transmission Speed Sensor: > 03-40-022 > Dec > 03 > A/T
- Fail Safe Mode/Erratic/Hard Shifting/DTC's Set
Shifting/DTC's Set
Number 03-40-022
Date 12-2003

P0717 & P0722
DESCRIPTION:

NOTE
REPAIR PROCEDURE:
- Fail Safe Mode/Erratic/Hard Shifting/DTC's Set > Page 6130

- Fail Safe Mode/Erratic/Hard Shifting/DTC's Set > Page 6131
PARTS INFORMATION
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Transmission Speed Sensor: > 00-40-011 > Aug > 00 > A/T
- Harsh Shifts, DTCs P0717/P0722 Set
P0717/P0722 Set
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 00-40-011
Date: AUGUST, 2000

^ Harsh 1-2 shift

TCM):
Note 1:
Note 2:
SERVICE PROCEDURE:
- Harsh Shifts, DTCs P0717/P0722 Set > Page 6136
- Harsh Shifts, DTCs P0717/P0722 Set > Page 6137
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Transmission Speed Sensor: > 98-40-002 > Apr > 98 > A/T
- Intermittent Delayed, Erratic, Harsh Shifting
Harsh Shifting
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 98-40-002
Date: APRIL, 1998
Model: ALL
DESCRIPTION:
^ Harsh 1-2 shift
(TCM):
Note 1:
codes.
Note 2:
PG-B.

SERVICE PROCEDURE:

Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Transmission Speed Sensor: > 98-40-002 > Apr > 98 > A/T
- Intermittent Delayed, Erratic, Harsh Shifting > Page 6142
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Transmission Speed Sensor: > 97-40-025-1 > Aug > 97 >
A/T - Driveability Concerns/DTC's Set/MIL ON
Set/MIL ON
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 97-40-025-1
Date: August, 1997
Model: ALL
DESCRIPTION:
^ Harsh 1-2 shift
Note 1:
*Fail-safe code
Note 2:
(DLC).
A/T - Driveability Concerns/DTC's Set/MIL ON > Page 6147
SERVICE PROCEDURE:
B) Test Procedure:
A/T - Driveability Concerns/DTC's Set/MIL ON > Page 6148
shielded wiring.

Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Transmission Speed Sensor: > 97-40-025-1 > Aug > 97 > A/T -
Driveability Concerns/DTC's Set/MIL ON
Set/MIL ON
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 97-40-025-1
Date: August, 1997
Model: ALL
DESCRIPTION:
^ Harsh 1-2 shift
Note 1:
*Fail-safe code
Note 2:
(DLC).
Driveability Concerns/DTC's Set/MIL ON > Page 6154
SERVICE PROCEDURE:
B) Test Procedure:
Driveability Concerns/DTC's Set/MIL ON > Page 6155
shielded wiring.

Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 04-40-016 > Sep > 04 > A/T - MIL ON/Shift Flare/Harsh

Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 04-40-016
ELANTRA
DESCRIPTION:
REPAIR PROCEDURE.
necessary.
sensor.
PARTS INFORMATION:
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 03-40-015 > Aug > 03 > A/T - 2nd - 3rd Gear Shift
Flare/Shudder
Flare/Shudder
Group TRANSAXLE
Number 03-40-015
Date AUGUST, 2003
Model ALL
DESCRIPTION:
1. CHECK ATF LEVEL:
70-100°C).


Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 02-40-007 > Feb > 02 > A/T - Torque Converter Clutch
Malfunctions

Malfunctions
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 02-40-007
Model: ALL
DESCRIPTION:
shown below:
REPAIR PROCEDURE:
shown.
the condition:
NOTE:
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 00-40-010 > Aug > 00 > A/T - MIL ON DTCs P0712/P0713
Set
Set
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 00-40-010
Date: AUGUST, 2000
Model: ALL
^ MIL illuminated
symptoms:
^ MIL illuminated
Procedure.
REPAIR PROCEDURE:
^ No DTC-gotostep4
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 00-40-010 > Aug > 00 > A/T - MIL ON DTCs P0712/P0713
Set > Page 6181
PARTS INFORMATION:
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 04-40-016 > Sep > 04 > A/T - MIL ON/Shift
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 04-40-016
ELANTRA
DESCRIPTION:
REPAIR PROCEDURE.
necessary.
sensor.
PARTS INFORMATION:
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 03-40-015 > Aug > 03 > A/T - 2nd - 3rd Gear
Shift Flare/Shudder
Shift Flare/Shudder
Group TRANSAXLE
Number 03-40-015
Date AUGUST, 2003
Model ALL
DESCRIPTION:
1. CHECK ATF LEVEL:
70-100°C).

Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 03-40-015 > Aug > 03 > A/T - 2nd - 3rd Gear
Shift Flare/Shudder > Page 6193

Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 02-40-007 > Feb > 02 > A/T - Torque
Clutch Malfunctions
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 02-40-007
Model: ALL
DESCRIPTION:
shown below:
REPAIR PROCEDURE:
shown.
the condition:
NOTE:
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 00-40-010 > Aug > 00 > A/T - MIL ON DTCs
P0712/P0713 Set
P0712/P0713 Set
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 00-40-010
Date: AUGUST, 2000
Model: ALL
^ MIL illuminated
symptoms:
^ MIL illuminated
Procedure.
REPAIR PROCEDURE:
^ No DTC-gotostep4
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 00-40-010 > Aug > 00 > A/T - MIL ON DTCs
P0712/P0713 Set > Page 6204
PARTS INFORMATION:
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch: >
Shifting/DTC's Set
Number 03-40-022
Date 12-2003

P0717 & P0722
DESCRIPTION:

NOTE
REPAIR PROCEDURE:

PARTS INFORMATION
P0717/P0722 Set
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 00-40-011
Date: AUGUST, 2000

^ Harsh 1-2 shift

TCM):
Note 1:
Note 2:
SERVICE PROCEDURE:
Harsh Shifting
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 98-40-002
Date: APRIL, 1998
Model: ALL
DESCRIPTION:
^ Harsh 1-2 shift
(TCM):
Note 1:
codes.
Note 2:
PG-B.

SERVICE PROCEDURE:

97-40-025-1 > Aug > 97 > A/T - Driveability Concerns/DTC's Set/MIL ON
Set/MIL ON
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 97-40-025-1
Date: August, 1997
Model: ALL
DESCRIPTION:
^ Harsh 1-2 shift
Note 1:
*Fail-safe code
Note 2:
(DLC).
SERVICE PROCEDURE:
B) Test Procedure:
shielded wiring.


PARTS INFORMATION
SERVICE PROCEDURE:
B) Test Procedure:
shielded wiring.

Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine Controls - ECU Reprogramming Procedure
PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - ECU
Reprogramming
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine Controls - ECU Reprogramming Procedure > Page 6257
it.
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection
INSPECTION
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer
Interest for Shift Solenoid: > 03-40-007-1 > Mar > 04 > A/T - Erratic/Slipping Shifts/MIL ON/DTC's Set
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 03-40-007-1
Date: MARCH 2004
P0745, P0747, P0748, P0750, P0752, P0753, P0755, P0757, P0758, P0760, P0765
DESCRIPTION:
^ MIL illuminated
NOTE:
Repair Procedure
cable.
NOTE:
NOTE:
P0745, P0747, P0748 or P0765).
Interest for Shift Solenoid: > 03-40-007-1 > Mar > 04 > A/T - Erratic/Slipping Shifts/MIL ON/DTC's Set > Page 6274
NOTE:
NOTE:

connector.
shown.
PARTS INFORMATION
DTC INFORMATION:
NOTE:
Interest for Shift Solenoid: > 00-40-009 > Aug > 00 > A/T - Shift Solenoid Incorrect Operation/MIL ON
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 00-40-009
Date: AUGUST, 2000
Model: ALL
symptoms:
^ Erratic shift
^ MIL illuminated
NOTE:
REPAIR PROCEDURE:
NOTE:
Step 6:
cable.
NOTE:
Interest for Shift Solenoid: > 00-40-009 > Aug > 00 > A/T - Shift Solenoid Incorrect Operation/MIL ON > Page 6282
NOTE:
All models:
NOTE:


NOTE:

SONATA:
NOTE:
Interest for Shift Solenoid: > 99-40-017 > Dec > 99 > A/T - Shift Lever Will Not Shift Out Of Park
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 99-40-017
DESCRIPTION:
NOTE:
SERVICE PROCEDURE:
column).

Interest for Shift Solenoid: > 99-40-017 > Dec > 99 > A/T - Shift Lever Will Not Shift Out Of Park > Page 6289
module.
PARTS INFORMATION:
Interest for Shift Solenoid: > 99-40-002 > Mar > 99 > A/T - 2 to 3 Gear Upshift Flare
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 99-40-002
Date MARCH, 1999

(below 60°C, 140°F).
REPAIR PROCEDURE:
adjust screw.
PARTS INFORMATION:
Interest for Shift Solenoid: > 99-40-002 > Mar > 99 > A/T - 2 to 3 Gear Upshift Flare > Page 6296
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical
Service Bulletins for Shift Solenoid: > 03-40-007-1 > Mar > 04 > A/T - Erratic/Slipping Shifts/MIL ON/DTC's Set
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 03-40-007-1
Date: MARCH 2004
P0745, P0747, P0748, P0750, P0752, P0753, P0755, P0757, P0758, P0760, P0765
DESCRIPTION:
^ MIL illuminated
NOTE:
Repair Procedure
cable.
NOTE:
NOTE:
P0745, P0747, P0748 or P0765).
Service Bulletins for Shift Solenoid: > 03-40-007-1 > Mar > 04 > A/T - Erratic/Slipping Shifts/MIL ON/DTC's Set > Page 6302
NOTE:
NOTE:

connector.
shown.
PARTS INFORMATION
DTC INFORMATION:
NOTE:
Service Bulletins for Shift Solenoid: > 00-40-009 > Aug > 00 > A/T - Shift Solenoid Incorrect Operation/MIL ON
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 00-40-009
Date: AUGUST, 2000
Model: ALL
symptoms:
^ Erratic shift
^ MIL illuminated
NOTE:
REPAIR PROCEDURE:
NOTE:
Step 6:
cable.
NOTE:
Service Bulletins for Shift Solenoid: > 00-40-009 > Aug > 00 > A/T - Shift Solenoid Incorrect Operation/MIL ON > Page 6310
NOTE:
All models:
NOTE:


NOTE:

SONATA:
NOTE:
Service Bulletins for Shift Solenoid: > 99-40-017 > Dec > 99 > A/T - Shift Lever Will Not Shift Out Of Park
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 99-40-017
DESCRIPTION:
NOTE:
SERVICE PROCEDURE:
column).

Service Bulletins for Shift Solenoid: > 99-40-017 > Dec > 99 > A/T - Shift Lever Will Not Shift Out Of Park > Page 6317
module.
PARTS INFORMATION:
Service Bulletins for Shift Solenoid: > 99-40-002 > Mar > 99 > A/T - 2 to 3 Gear Upshift Flare
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 99-40-002
Date MARCH, 1999

(below 60°C, 140°F).
REPAIR PROCEDURE:
adjust screw.
PARTS INFORMATION:
Service Bulletins for Shift Solenoid: > 99-40-002 > Mar > 99 > A/T - 2 to 3 Gear Upshift Flare > Page 6324
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids
- A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection
INSPECTION
- A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Shift Solenoid: >
03-40-007-1 > Mar > 04 > A/T - Erratic/Slipping Shifts/MIL ON/DTC's Set
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 03-40-007-1
Date: MARCH 2004
P0745, P0747, P0748, P0750, P0752, P0753, P0755, P0757, P0758, P0760, P0765
DESCRIPTION:
^ MIL illuminated
NOTE:
Repair Procedure
cable.
NOTE:
NOTE:
P0745, P0747, P0748 or P0765).
03-40-007-1 > Mar > 04 > A/T - Erratic/Slipping Shifts/MIL ON/DTC's Set > Page 6338
NOTE:
NOTE:

connector.
shown.
PARTS INFORMATION
DTC INFORMATION:
NOTE:
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 00-40-009
Date: AUGUST, 2000
Model: ALL
symptoms:
^ Erratic shift
^ MIL illuminated
NOTE:
REPAIR PROCEDURE:
NOTE:
Step 6:
cable.
NOTE:
NOTE:
All models:
NOTE:


NOTE:

SONATA:
NOTE:
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 99-40-017
DESCRIPTION:
NOTE:
SERVICE PROCEDURE:
column).

module.
PARTS INFORMATION:
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 99-40-002
Date MARCH, 1999

(below 60°C, 140°F).
REPAIR PROCEDURE:
adjust screw.
PARTS INFORMATION:
- A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Shift
Solenoid: > 03-40-007-1 > Mar > 04 > A/T - Erratic/Slipping Shifts/MIL ON/DTC's Set
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 03-40-007-1
Date: MARCH 2004
P0745, P0747, P0748, P0750, P0752, P0753, P0755, P0757, P0758, P0760, P0765
DESCRIPTION:
^ MIL illuminated
NOTE:
Repair Procedure
cable.
NOTE:
NOTE:
P0745, P0747, P0748 or P0765).
Solenoid: > 03-40-007-1 > Mar > 04 > A/T - Erratic/Slipping Shifts/MIL ON/DTC's Set > Page 6366
NOTE:
NOTE:

connector.
shown.
PARTS INFORMATION
DTC INFORMATION:
NOTE:
Solenoid: > 00-40-009 > Aug > 00 > A/T - Shift Solenoid Incorrect Operation/MIL ON
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 00-40-009
Date: AUGUST, 2000
Model: ALL
symptoms:
^ Erratic shift
^ MIL illuminated
NOTE:
REPAIR PROCEDURE:
NOTE:
Step 6:
cable.
NOTE:
Solenoid: > 00-40-009 > Aug > 00 > A/T - Shift Solenoid Incorrect Operation/MIL ON > Page 6374
NOTE:
All models:
NOTE:


NOTE:

SONATA:
NOTE:
Solenoid: > 99-40-017 > Dec > 99 > A/T - Shift Lever Will Not Shift Out Of Park
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 99-40-017
DESCRIPTION:
NOTE:
SERVICE PROCEDURE:
column).

Solenoid: > 99-40-017 > Dec > 99 > A/T - Shift Lever Will Not Shift Out Of Park > Page 6381
module.
PARTS INFORMATION:
Solenoid: > 99-40-002 > Mar > 99 > A/T - 2 to 3 Gear Upshift Flare
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 99-40-002
Date MARCH, 1999

(below 60°C, 140°F).
REPAIR PROCEDURE:
adjust screw.
PARTS INFORMATION:
Solenoid: > 99-40-002 > Mar > 99 > A/T - 2 to 3 Gear Upshift Flare > Page 6388
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Band Apply Servo, A/T >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Band Apply Servo: > 03-40-018 > Oct > 03 >
A/T - Harsh Shifts/DTC P1709/P0732/P0733/P0734
Band Apply Servo: Customer Interest A/T - Harsh Shifts/DTC P1709/P0732/P0733/P0734
Group TRANSAXLE
Number 03-40-018
Date OCTOBER 2003
Model 1995-2004 ACCENT, 1996-2000 ELANTRA, 1997-2002 TIBURON
Subject AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE P1709
DESCRIPTION:
Diagnostic Trouble Code P1709 (Kickdown servo switch open/short) may be caused by the
following conditions:
^ Open or short circuit in the kickdown servo switch

^ Binding or seizing of the kickdown servo in the servo bore
To service a vehicle with DTC P1709, follow the repair procedure shown below:
REPAIR PROCEDURE:
1. Remove the air cleaner.
2. Locate the connector to the kickdown servo switch located on the driver's side transaxle mount.
A/T - Harsh Shifts/DTC P1709/P0732/P0733/P0734 > Page 6397
3. Disconnect the connector to the kickdown servo switch.
4. Turn the ignition key to the "ON" position.
5. Using a DVOM, check the voltage between the vehicle harness connector and ground. If the
voltage is:
^ More than 10V, replace the kickdown servo switch
^ Less than 10V, check the harness for an open or short circuit.
KICKDOWN SWITCH REMOVAL:
6. Remove the snap-ring.
7. Grasp the kickdown servo switch with a pliers and remove the switch.
8. Reinstall the new switch and snap ring.
9. Reconnect the kickdown servo switch to the harness connector and reinstall the air cleaner.
10. Test drive the vehicle for two key-on to key-off driving cycles. If P1709 recurs, replace the
transaxle.
PARTS INFORMATION
A/T - Harsh Shifts/DTC P1709/P0732/P0733/P0734 > Page 6398
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Band Apply Servo: > 03-40-018 >
Oct > 03 > A/T - Harsh Shifts/DTC P1709/P0732/P0733/P0734
Band Apply Servo: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Harsh Shifts/DTC
P1709/P0732/P0733/P0734
Group TRANSAXLE
Number 03-40-018
Date OCTOBER 2003
Model 1995-2004 ACCENT, 1996-2000 ELANTRA, 1997-2002 TIBURON
Subject AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE P1709
DESCRIPTION:
Diagnostic Trouble Code P1709 (Kickdown servo switch open/short) may be caused by the
following conditions:
^ Open or short circuit in the kickdown servo switch
^ Binding or seizing of the kickdown servo in the servo bore
To service a vehicle with DTC P1709, follow the repair procedure shown below:
REPAIR PROCEDURE:
1. Remove the air cleaner.
2. Locate the connector to the kickdown servo switch located on the driver's side transaxle mount.
Oct > 03 > A/T - Harsh Shifts/DTC P1709/P0732/P0733/P0734 > Page 6404
3. Disconnect the connector to the kickdown servo switch.
4. Turn the ignition key to the "ON" position.
5. Using a DVOM, check the voltage between the vehicle harness connector and ground. If the
voltage is:
^ More than 10V, replace the kickdown servo switch
^ Less than 10V, check the harness for an open or short circuit.
KICKDOWN SWITCH REMOVAL:
6. Remove the snap-ring.
7. Grasp the kickdown servo switch with a pliers and remove the switch.
8. Reinstall the new switch and snap ring.
9. Reconnect the kickdown servo switch to the harness connector and reinstall the air cleaner.
10. Test drive the vehicle for two key-on to key-off driving cycles. If P1709 recurs, replace the
transaxle.
PARTS INFORMATION
Oct > 03 > A/T - Harsh Shifts/DTC P1709/P0732/P0733/P0734 > Page 6405
Band Apply Servo: Adjustments
adjust screw. 2. Loosen the lock nut. 3. Loosen and tighten the adjusting screw two times by torque
of 5 Nm (43.2 inch lbs.).
4. Tighten the adjusting screw by torque 5 Nm (43.2 inch lbs.) and then, loosen the adjusting screw
3 to 3-1/3 turns. 5. Tighten the lock nut to the specified torque.
Lock nut: 15-22 Nm (11-16 ft. lbs).
NOTE: Before assembling, apply sealant (DC780 or equivalent) to center portion of the adjusting
screw.
Band Apply Servo: Service and Repair
DISASSEMBLY
1. Refer to illustration for disassembly.
ASSEMBLY
1. Install the rod and nut to the kickdown servo piston. 2. Install two new D-rings (one large and
one small) around the circumference of the piston, and then apply a coating of Automatic
Transmission
Fluid (ATF) to the D-rings.
3. Install the kickdown servo piston in the sleeve. 4. Install a new O-ring around the circumference
of the sleeve, and apply a coating of ATF to the O-ring.
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Case, A/T > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - Seal & Case Identification
Case: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Seal & Case Identification
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 96-40-019
Model: 1992-1996 ELANTRA 1992-1996 2.0L SONATA
Subject: AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE SEAL AND CASE IDENTIFICATION
DESCRIPTION:
Beginning with February 7, 1995 production, the current design differential oil seal has been
installed in automatic transaxles to provide better serviceability. Stoppers added to the transaxle
case and the torque converter housing ensure proper seal installation.
The current oil seal must only be installed in transaxle cases that contain stoppers in the machined
bores of the case. The current oil seal is not interchangeable with the previous oil seal. If the
previous oil seal is installed in the current transaxle case, the oil seal will protrude from the case
and prevent the drive shafts from engaging in the transaxle. If the current oil seal is installed in the
previous transaxle case, an oil leak may occur.
EFFECTIVE POINT:
Date: February 7, 1995 Transaxle Serial No.: DSEAD269237

Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Case, A/T > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - Seal & Case Identification > Page 6413
PARTS INFORMATION:

Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Clutch, A/T >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - End Clutch Retainer/Plate Modifications
Clutch: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - End Clutch Retainer/Plate Modifications
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 97-40-032
Date: OCTOBER, 1997

Model: ALL
Subject END CLUTCH RETAINER AND CLUTCH PLATE MODIFICATION
DESCRIPTION: The thickness of the automatic transaxle end clutch plates has been increased to
improve the durability of the end clutch. The end clutch retainer and transaxle case were modified
as shown to accommodate the change in clutch plate thickness.
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - End Clutch Retainer/Plate Modifications > Page 6418
PARTS INFORMATION:
INTERCHANGEABILITY:
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - End Clutch Retainer/Plate Modifications > Page 6419
Clutch: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Damper Clutch Operation
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 96-40-017
Model: ALL w/AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE
Subject: AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE DAMPER CLUTCH OPERATION
DESCRIPTION:
On vehicles equipped with automatic transaxles, a customer may complain of feeling what seems
to be a sudden and seemingly inappropriate downshift when traveling at a constant speed under
light load (level terrain). The customer feels the Damper Clutch disengage, which is a normal
operating characteristic and no repairs are necessary.
OPERATION:
The Damper Clutch will engage ("Lock-Up") only when all of the following conditions are met:
^ Transaxle is in 2nd, 3rd or 4th gear.
^ Automatic transaxle fluid (ATF) temperature is greater than 158° F (70° C).
^ Relationship between the torque converter turbine rpm and throttle opening are within a specified
range.
At a constant speed cruise under light load (level terrain), the ATF temperature can drop below
158° F (70° C) causing the damper clutch to disengage. This disengagement causes the engine
speed to increase 200-300 rpm and may be described as a "downshift" sensation. Typically, the
ATF will heat up rapidly and the damper clutch will re-engage. Re-engagement is very smooth and
normally not felt. If the vehicle maintains the constant speed cruise under light load it is likely that
this condition will repeat. Damper clutch disengagement is a normal operating characteristic and no
repairs are required.
VERIFICATION:
Damper clutch disengagement can be diagnosed and verified by temporarily disconnecting the
ATF temperature sensor. With the temperature sensor unplugged, the TCU thinks the ATF is
staying below 158° F (70° C) and will not command the damper clutch to engage. If this eliminates
the described "downshift" sensation, reconnect the temperature sensor and explain the system's
operation to the customer.
Clutch: Specifications
Clutch/ A4AF2 Model Front Clutch Snap Ring Clearance 0.4 - 0.6 mm
Rear Clutch Snap Ring Clearance 0.3 - 0.5 mm
End Clutch Snap Ring Clearance 0.4 - 0.65 mm
Low Reverse Brake End Play 0.675 - 0.987 mm
Clutch/ A4BF1 Model Front Clutch Snap Ring Clearance 0.7 - 0.9 mm
Rear Clutch Snap Ring Clearance 0.4 - 0.6 mm
End Clutch Snap Ring Clearance 2.0L 0.6 - 0.85 mm
1.6L, 1.8L 0.4 - 0.65 mm
Low Reverse Brake End Play 0.975 - 1.287 mm

Component Information > Diagrams > Front Clutch Assembly
Component Information > Diagrams > Front Clutch Assembly > Page 6423
Component Information > Diagrams > Front Clutch Assembly > Page 6424
Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Clutch Assembly
Clutch: Service and Repair Front Clutch Assembly
DISASSEMBLY
1. Remove the snap ring from the clutch retainer. 2. Take out the three clutch reaction plates and
two clutch discs. If the clutch reaction plates and the clutch discs are to be reused, be sure not to
change the installation order or direction.

Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Clutch Assembly > Page 6427
3. With the return spring compressed, using the special tool (09453-24000) or equivalent, and a
spring compressor, remove the snap ring, then the
spring retainer and the return spring.
4. Remove the piston from the retainer. 5. Remove the D-section rings from the inner and outer
circumferences of the piston.
INSPECTION
1. Check to see if the sliding surface of the disc, plate are worn or burnt, if necessary, replace
them.
NOTE: If the lining of the disc is peeling off, replace all discs.
2. Check that the check ball is free by shaking the piston.
ASSEMBLY
1. Install the D-section ring in the groove on the outside surface of the piston with its round side
out. Install another D-section ring to the front clutch
retainer.
2. Apply Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) to the outside surface of the D-section rings. Then
push the piston into front clutch retainer by hand. 3. Install the return spring and spring retainer.
4. Compress the return spring with special tool (09453-24000) or equivalent, and install the snap
ring.
5. Install the three clutch reaction plates and two clutch discs. Prior to installation, apply ATF to
them.
CAUTION:
a. When new clutch discs are used, they should be immersed in ATF a minimum of two hours prior
to installation. b. As you know, the color of current clutch disc turns to black when burnt. When the
new clutch disc is immersed in ATF for two hours, its
color also turns to black, which makes it difficult to identify it the clutch disc is normal or has been
burnt. Therefore, care should be taken not to confuse or misuse the burnt clutch disc of current
type and new type clutch discs immersed in ATF.
c. The burnt clutch disc of new type should be identified by looking at the height difference of
protruded section and base section.
6. After installing the snap ring, check to see if there is a 0.4-0.6 mm (0.0157-0.0236 inch)
clearance between the snap ring and the clutch reaction
plate. To check clearance, hold the entire circumference of the clutch reaction plate down with 50 N
(11 lbs.) force. If clearance is out of specification, adjust the clearance by selecting the proper snap
ring.
Clutch: Service and Repair Rear Clutch Assembly

DISASSEMBLY
1. Remove the snap ring and thrust race. 2. Remove the input shaft from the rear clutch retainer. 3.
Remove the snap ring from the clutch retainer. 4. Remove the clutch reaction plate, three clutch
plates, two clutch discs and clutch pressure plate from the retainer.
5. Compress the return spring by using the spring compressor. 6. Using a screwdriver, remove the
wave spring. 7. Remove the return spring and piston. 8. Remove the two D-section rings from the
piston.
ASSEMBLY
1. Install the D-section rings in the grooves in the outside and inside surfaces of the piston. 2. After
applying Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) to the outside surface of the D-section rings, push the
piston into the rear clutch retainer by
hand.
3. Install the return spring on the piston. 4. Compress the return spring with the snap ring, by
pushing down with a screwdriver and setting the snap ring in its groove.
5. Install clutch pressure plate, two clutch discs, clutch plate and clutch reaction plate into the rear
clutch retainer. When the reaction plate, clutch
plate and clutch disc are removed, reinstall them by reversing the order of disassembly. Prior to
installing, apply ATF to the plates and discs.
CAUTION:
a. When new clutch discs are used, immerse them in ATF for a minimum of two hours prior to
installation.
b. The four splines of disc are deleted to discriminate the rear clutch disc from front clutch disc. c. If
the lining of the disc is peeling off, replace all discs. d. As you know, the color of current clutch disc
turns to black when burnt. When the new clutch disc is immersed in ATF for two hours, its
color also turns to disc is normal or has been burnt. Therefore, care should be taken not to confuse
or misuse the burnt clutch disc of current type and new type clutch discs immersed in ATF.
e. The burnt clutch disc of new type should be identified by looking at the height difference of
protruded section and base section.
6. Install the snap ring. Check to see that the clearance between the snap ring and clutch reaction
plate is 0.3-0.5 mm (0.0118-0.0197 inch). To check
clearance, hold the entire circumference of the clutch reaction plate down with 50 N (11 lbs.) force.
If the clearance is out of specification, adjust by selecting the proper snap ring. Snap rings are the
same as those used for the front clutch.
7. Insert the input shaft into the clutch retainer.
8. Install the thrust race, and snap ring. 9. Install the three seal rings to the grooves in the input
shaft.
Clutch: Service and Repair End Clutch Assembly
DISASSEMBLY
1. Remove the snap ring, clutch reaction plate, clutch disc, and the clutch plate. If the disc and
plate are reused, note the installation order and
direction when they are disassembled.

2. Remove the snap ring with snap-ring pliers, and then remove the washer and return spring.
3. Remove the piston. If it is difficult to remove, face the piston side downward, and with the
retainer on a base, blow air in through the oil passage
on the rear surface.
4. Remove the seal ring from the retainer. 5. Remove the two D-section rings and oil seal from the
piston.
ASSEMBLY
1. Install the D-section rings and oil seal in the piston inner and outer grooves. 2. After applying a
coating of automatic transaxle fluid to the D-section rings outer circumference, manually press the
piston into the end clutch
retainer.
3. Install the return spring and washer.
4. After fitting a new snap ring into the guide of the special tool (09453-33000) or equivalent, install
the retainer. Push the snap ring as far down on
the guide as possible. Attach the installer and press until the snap ring enters the groove. Do not
press more than necessary. The places indicated by arrows in the illustration (center projections)
are not to be supported.
5. Install the clutch plate, clutch disc and reaction plate to the end clutch retainer. If the reaction
plate, clutch plate and clutch disc are reused, install
them in the same order they were disassembled. Apply a coating of automatic transaxle fluid.
CAUTION: When a new clutch disc is used, soak it in automatic transaxle fluid for two hours before
using it.
6. Install the snap ring. Check that the clearance between the snap ring and the clutch reaction
plate is 0.4-0.65 mm (0.016- 0.026 inch). To check
the clearance, hold the circumference of the clutch reaction plate down with 50 N (11 lbs.) force. If
clearance is out of specifications, adjust the clearance by selecting the proper snap ring.
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Control Module, A/T >
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 05-40-016
Date: OCTOBER, 2005
Model: ALL
DESCRIPTION:
shown below:
REPAIR PROCEDURE:
NOTE:


^ Vehicle
Go to Step 12.
NOTE:

Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 03-40-022 > Dec > 03 > A/T - Fail Safe
Number 03-40-022
Date 12-2003

P0717 & P0722
DESCRIPTION:

NOTE
REPAIR PROCEDURE:

PARTS INFORMATION
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 02-40-010 > Mar > 02 > A/T - Harsh/Delayed
Gear Engagement
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 02-40-010
Date: 03-2002

ENGAGEMENT
DESCRIPTION:
shown below:
REPAIR PROCEDURE:
shop manual.

^ Select F1 "GRPH".
NOTE
Gear Engagement > Page 6457
NOTE

Gear Engagement > Page 6458

Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 00-40-009
Date: AUGUST, 2000
Model: ALL
symptoms:
^ Erratic shift
^ MIL illuminated
NOTE:
REPAIR PROCEDURE:
NOTE:
Step 6:
cable.
NOTE:
NOTE:
All models:
NOTE:


NOTE:

SONATA:
NOTE:
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 00-40-010 > Aug > 00 > A/T - MIL ON DTCs
P0712/P0713 Set
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 00-40-010
Date: AUGUST, 2000
Model: ALL
^ MIL illuminated
symptoms:
^ MIL illuminated
Procedure.
REPAIR PROCEDURE:
^ No DTC-gotostep4
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 00-40-010 > Aug > 00 > A/T - MIL ON DTCs
P0712/P0713 Set > Page 6470
PARTS INFORMATION:
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 00-40-011 > Aug > 00 > A/T - Harsh Shifts,
DTCs P0717/P0722 Set
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 00-40-011
Date: AUGUST, 2000

^ Harsh 1-2 shift

TCM):
Note 1:
Note 2:
SERVICE PROCEDURE:
DTCs P0717/P0722 Set > Page 6475
DTCs P0717/P0722 Set > Page 6476
Concerns
Number 00-36-006
Date MARCH, 2000
DESCRIPTION:
^ Unstable idle
REPAIR INFORMATION:


PARTS INFORMATION

Not Shift Out Of Park
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 99-40-017
DESCRIPTION:
NOTE:
SERVICE PROCEDURE:
column).

module.
PARTS INFORMATION:
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 99-40-002 > Mar > 99 > A/T - 2 to 3 Gear
Upshift Flare
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 99-40-002
Date MARCH, 1999

(below 60°C, 140°F).
REPAIR PROCEDURE:
adjust screw.
PARTS INFORMATION:
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 99-40-002 > Mar > 99 > A/T - 2 to 3 Gear
Upshift Flare > Page 6493
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 98-40-013 > Oct > 98 > A/T - Poor 2nd to 1st
Gear Low Speed Downshift
Number 98-40-013
Date 10-1998
DESCRIPTION
SERVICE PROCEDURE

Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 98-40-013 > Oct > 98 > A/T - Poor 2nd to 1st
Gear Low Speed Downshift > Page 6498
PARTS INFORMATION
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 97-40-027-1 > Dec > 97 > A/T - Poor
Downshifts/Shift Flare
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 97-40-027-1
Model: 1997 TIBURON
IMPROVEMENT
DESCRIPTION:
PARTS INFORMATION:
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 97-40-028 > Sep > 97 > A/T - Harsh
Engagement Shock
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 97-40-028
Model: ALL
DESCRIPTION:
PARTS INFORMATION:
158-194°F).
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 97-40-028 > Sep > 97 > A/T - Harsh
Engagement Shock > Page 6507
Sonata 2.0L).
replace the TCM.
transaxle.
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 97-40-022 > Aug > 97 > A/T - Reverse To
Drive Engagement Shock
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 97-40-022
Date: AUGUST, 1997
Model: ALL
DESCRIPTION:
have this feature.
follows:
engagement shock.
SERVICE PROCEDURE:
Sonata: 96-40-003-1).
PARTS INFORMATION
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Control Module: > tnt1660906-03
> Sep > 06 > A/T, Engine Controls - ECM/TCM Reset/Relearn Procedure
Procedure
MODEL: All
DESCRIPTION:
as shown below.
VEHICLES AFFECTED:
^ All

HI-SCAN PROCEDURE:
^ Select vehicle
press "ENTER"

> Sep > 06 > A/T, Engine Controls - ECM/TCM Reset/Relearn Procedure > Page 6517
NOTE:
upshifts.

> Sep > 06 > A/T, Engine Controls - ECM/TCM Reset/Relearn Procedure > Page 6518
NOTE:

> May > 06 > A/T Controls - PCM/TCM Reset/Relearn Adaptive Values
Values

HI-SCAN PROCEDURE:
^ Select vehicle

> May > 06 > A/T Controls - PCM/TCM Reset/Relearn Adaptive Values > Page 6523
NOTE:
upshifts.
> May > 06 > A/T Controls - PCM/TCM Reset/Relearn Adaptive Values > Page 6524

NOTE:
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Control Module: > 06-40-005 >
Mar > 06 > A/T Controls - Reset and Relearn Adaptive Values
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 06-40-005
Date: MARCH, 2006
Model: ALL

VALUES
DESCRIPTION:

as shown below.
Mar > 06 > A/T Controls - Reset and Relearn Adaptive Values > Page 6529
HI-SCAN PROCEDURE:
^ Select vehicle
NOTE:
Mar > 06 > A/T Controls - Reset and Relearn Adaptive Values > Page 6530
completed as shown.
occur.
NOTE:

Oct > 05 > A/T - No Movement in 'DRIVE' or 'REVERSE'
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 05-40-016
Date: OCTOBER, 2005
Model: ALL
DESCRIPTION:
shown below:
REPAIR PROCEDURE:
NOTE:

Oct > 05 > A/T - No Movement in 'DRIVE' or 'REVERSE' > Page 6535

^ Vehicle
Go to Step 12.
NOTE:

Dec > 03 > A/T - Fail Safe Mode/Erratic/Hard Shifting/DTC's Set
Set
Number 03-40-022
Date 12-2003

P0717 & P0722
DESCRIPTION:

NOTE
REPAIR PROCEDURE:
Dec > 03 > A/T - Fail Safe Mode/Erratic/Hard Shifting/DTC's Set > Page 6543

Dec > 03 > A/T - Fail Safe Mode/Erratic/Hard Shifting/DTC's Set > Page 6544
PARTS INFORMATION
Apr > 03 > A/T - DTC's P0731/P0732/P0733/P0734/P0735/P0736

P0731/P0732/P0733/P0734/P0735/P0736
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 03-40-005
Date: APRIL, 2003
Model: ALL

P0734, P0735, P0736
DESCRIPTION:
REPAIR PROCEDURE:
Apr > 03 > A/T - DTC's P0731/P0732/P0733/P0734/P0735/P0736 > Page 6549

Feb > 03 > A/T - TCM Adaptive Learning Procedure
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 03-40-003
Model: ALL
DESCRIPTION:
NOTE:
shown below.
NOTE:
Temp. Sensor".
NOTE:
Mar > 02 > A/T - Harsh/Delayed Gear Engagement
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 02-40-010
Date: 03-2002

ENGAGEMENT
DESCRIPTION:
shown below:
REPAIR PROCEDURE:
shop manual.

^ Select F1 "GRPH".
NOTE
Mar > 02 > A/T - Harsh/Delayed Gear Engagement > Page 6558
NOTE

Mar > 02 > A/T - Harsh/Delayed Gear Engagement > Page 6559

Sep > 00 > A/T - Diagnostic Trouble Codes & Scanned Data
Group TRANSAXLE
Number 00-40-012
Model ALL
DESCRIPTION:
NOTE:
Sep > 00 > A/T - Diagnostic Trouble Codes & Scanned Data > Page 6564

Aug > 00 > A/T - Shift Solenoid Incorrect Operation/MIL ON
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 00-40-009
Date: AUGUST, 2000
Model: ALL
symptoms:
^ Erratic shift
^ MIL illuminated
NOTE:
REPAIR PROCEDURE:
NOTE:
Step 6:
cable.
NOTE:
Aug > 00 > A/T - Shift Solenoid Incorrect Operation/MIL ON > Page 6569
NOTE:
All models:
NOTE:


NOTE:

SONATA:
NOTE:
Aug > 00 > A/T - MIL ON DTCs P0712/P0713 Set
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 00-40-010
Date: AUGUST, 2000
Model: ALL
^ MIL illuminated
symptoms:
^ MIL illuminated
Procedure.
REPAIR PROCEDURE:
^ No DTC-gotostep4
Aug > 00 > A/T - MIL ON DTCs P0712/P0713 Set > Page 6576
PARTS INFORMATION:
Aug > 00 > A/T - Harsh Shifts, DTCs P0717/P0722 Set
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 00-40-011
Date: AUGUST, 2000

^ Harsh 1-2 shift

TCM):
Note 1:
Note 2:
SERVICE PROCEDURE:
Aug > 00 > A/T - Harsh Shifts, DTCs P0717/P0722 Set > Page 6581
Aug > 00 > A/T - Harsh Shifts, DTCs P0717/P0722 Set > Page 6582
Jul > 00 > Scan Tool - Software Update Procedure
Group: GENERAL
Number: 00-00-001
Date: JULY, 2000
Model: ALL
DESCRIPTION
PROCEDURE:
fixes.
SOL card.
Jul > 00 > Scan Tool - Software Update Procedure > Page 6587
Note:
cards.
utility.
INFO card
COM2.
software cards.
COM2.
software.
NOTE:
Mar > 00 > TPS - Driveability Concerns
Number 00-36-006
Date MARCH, 2000
DESCRIPTION:
^ Unstable idle
REPAIR INFORMATION:


Mar > 00 > TPS - Driveability Concerns > Page 6597
PARTS INFORMATION

Dec > 99 > A/T - Shift Lever Will Not Shift Out Of Park
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 99-40-017
DESCRIPTION:
NOTE:
SERVICE PROCEDURE:
column).

module.
PARTS INFORMATION:
Apr > 99 > A/T - Servicing DTCs P1613/P1614
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 99-40-004
Date: APRIL, 1999
DESCRIPTION:
SERVICE PROCEDURE:

Apr > 99 > A/T - Servicing DTCs P1613/P1614 > Page 6609
PARTS INFORMATION
WARRANTY
Mar > 99 > A/T - 2 to 3 Gear Upshift Flare
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 99-40-002
Date MARCH, 1999

(below 60°C, 140°F).
REPAIR PROCEDURE:
adjust screw.
PARTS INFORMATION:
Mar > 99 > A/T - 2 to 3 Gear Upshift Flare > Page 6614
Oct > 98 > A/T - Poor 2nd to 1st Gear Low Speed Downshift
Number 98-40-013
Date 10-1998
DESCRIPTION
SERVICE PROCEDURE

Oct > 98 > A/T - Poor 2nd to 1st Gear Low Speed Downshift > Page 6619
PARTS INFORMATION
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Control Module: > 97-40-027-1 >
Dec > 97 > A/T - Poor Downshifts/Shift Flare
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 97-40-027-1
Model: 1997 TIBURON
IMPROVEMENT
DESCRIPTION:
PARTS INFORMATION:
Sep > 97 > A/T - Harsh Engagement Shock
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 97-40-028
Model: ALL
DESCRIPTION:
PARTS INFORMATION:
158-194°F).
Sep > 97 > A/T - Harsh Engagement Shock > Page 6628
Sonata 2.0L).
replace the TCM.
transaxle.
Sep > 97 > TCM - Adaptive Control
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 97-40-030
Model: ALL
DESCRIPTION:
compensate for:
SERVICE PROCEDURE:
is completed.)
Aug > 97 > A/T - Reverse To Drive Engagement Shock
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 97-40-022
Date: AUGUST, 1997
Model: ALL
DESCRIPTION:
have this feature.
follows:
engagement shock.
SERVICE PROCEDURE:
Sonata: 96-40-003-1).
PARTS INFORMATION
Jul > 97 > A/T - Mutual Control Introduction
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 97-40-001-1
Date: JULY, 1997
Model: ALL
production dates.
DESCRIPTION:
ANALYSIS:
2. TPS above 1.2 V

rpm for 10 minutes
1997 Sonata 2.0L & 3.0L July 1, 1996

Jul > 97 > A/T - Mutual Control Introduction > Page 6641
1997 Tiburon 1.8L & 2.0L July 1, 1996
PARTS INFORMATION:
Jul > 97 > A/T - Cold Acceleration in 2ND Gear
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 97-40-021
Date: JULY, 1997
Model: ALL
DESCRIPTION:

Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Control Module: > tnt1660906-03 >
Sep > 06 > A/T, Engine Controls - ECM/TCM Reset/Relearn Procedure
Procedure
MODEL: All
DESCRIPTION:
as shown below.
VEHICLES AFFECTED:
^ All

HI-SCAN PROCEDURE:
^ Select vehicle
press "ENTER"

Sep > 06 > A/T, Engine Controls - ECM/TCM Reset/Relearn Procedure > Page 6651
NOTE:
upshifts.

Sep > 06 > A/T, Engine Controls - ECM/TCM Reset/Relearn Procedure > Page 6652
NOTE:

May > 06 > A/T Controls - PCM/TCM Reset/Relearn Adaptive Values
Values

HI-SCAN PROCEDURE:
^ Select vehicle

May > 06 > A/T Controls - PCM/TCM Reset/Relearn Adaptive Values > Page 6657
NOTE:
upshifts.
May > 06 > A/T Controls - PCM/TCM Reset/Relearn Adaptive Values > Page 6658

NOTE:
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Control Module: > 06-40-005 > Mar >
06 > A/T Controls - Reset and Relearn Adaptive Values
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 06-40-005
Date: MARCH, 2006
Model: ALL

VALUES
DESCRIPTION:

as shown below.
06 > A/T Controls - Reset and Relearn Adaptive Values > Page 6663
HI-SCAN PROCEDURE:
^ Select vehicle
NOTE:
06 > A/T Controls - Reset and Relearn Adaptive Values > Page 6664
completed as shown.
occur.
NOTE:

Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Control Module: > 03-40-005 > Apr >
03 > A/T - DTC's P0731/P0732/P0733/P0734/P0735/P0736

P0731/P0732/P0733/P0734/P0735/P0736
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 03-40-005
Date: APRIL, 2003
Model: ALL

P0734, P0735, P0736
DESCRIPTION:
REPAIR PROCEDURE:
03 > A/T - DTC's P0731/P0732/P0733/P0734/P0735/P0736 > Page 6669

Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Control Module: > 03-40-003 > Feb >
03 > A/T - TCM Adaptive Learning Procedure
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 03-40-003
Model: ALL
DESCRIPTION:
NOTE:
shown below.
NOTE:
Temp. Sensor".
NOTE:
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Control Module: > 00-40-012 > Sep >
00 > A/T - Diagnostic Trouble Codes & Scanned Data
Group TRANSAXLE
Number 00-40-012
Model ALL
DESCRIPTION:
NOTE:
00 > A/T - Diagnostic Trouble Codes & Scanned Data > Page 6678

Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Control Module: > 00-00-001 > Jul >
00 > Scan Tool - Software Update Procedure
Group: GENERAL
Number: 00-00-001
Date: JULY, 2000
Model: ALL
DESCRIPTION
PROCEDURE:
fixes.
SOL card.
00 > Scan Tool - Software Update Procedure > Page 6683
Note:
cards.
utility.
INFO card
COM2.
software cards.
COM2.
software.
NOTE:
99 > A/T - Servicing DTCs P1613/P1614
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 99-40-004
Date: APRIL, 1999
DESCRIPTION:
SERVICE PROCEDURE:

99 > A/T - Servicing DTCs P1613/P1614 > Page 6693
PARTS INFORMATION
WARRANTY
97 > TCM - Adaptive Control
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 97-40-030
Model: ALL
DESCRIPTION:
compensate for:
SERVICE PROCEDURE:
is completed.)
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Control Module: > 97-40-001-1 > Jul >
97 > A/T - Mutual Control Introduction
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 97-40-001-1
Date: JULY, 1997
Model: ALL
production dates.
DESCRIPTION:
ANALYSIS:
2. TPS above 1.2 V

rpm for 10 minutes
1997 Sonata 2.0L & 3.0L July 1, 1996

Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Control Module: > 97-40-001-1 > Jul >
97 > A/T - Mutual Control Introduction > Page 6702
1997 Tiburon 1.8L & 2.0L July 1, 1996
PARTS INFORMATION:
97 > A/T - Cold Acceleration in 2ND Gear
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 97-40-021
Date: JULY, 1997
Model: ALL
DESCRIPTION:

Rated Voltage 12 V
Rated Load min. 1A
At Solenoid Load.

Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Data Link Connector,
A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Data Link Connector, A/T: > 98-40-001
> Jan > 98 > A/T - Harsh 4-3 Downshift When Decelerating
Data Link Connector, A/T: Customer Interest A/T - Harsh 4-3 Downshift When Decelerating
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 98-40-001
Date: JANUARY, 1998
Model: ALL
DESCRIPTION:
158-194°F).
# 97-40-031.
5. Note:
as follows:
number shown.
A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Data Link Connector, A/T: > 98-40-001
> Jan > 98 > A/T - Harsh 4-3 Downshift When Decelerating > Page 6716
PARTS INFORMATION:

A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Data Link Connector, A/T: >
98-40-001 > Jan > 98 > A/T - Harsh 4-3 Downshift When Decelerating
Data Link Connector, A/T: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Harsh 4-3 Downshift When
Decelerating
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 98-40-001
Date: JANUARY, 1998
Model: ALL
DESCRIPTION:
158-194°F).
# 97-40-031.
5. Note:
as follows:
number shown.
A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Data Link Connector, A/T: >
98-40-001 > Jan > 98 > A/T - Harsh 4-3 Downshift When Decelerating > Page 6722
PARTS INFORMATION:

Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Differential, Automatic
Transaxle > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T Controls - DTC Diagnostic Information
Differential: Technical Service Bulletins A/T Controls - DTC Diagnostic Information
Automatic Transaxle Diagnosis
Only the Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTC) listed indicate a possible internal transaxle concern. All
other DTC are due to electrical or component concerns. Refer to TSBs:
^ Bottom pan transaxle: 04-40-020 or 03-40-021, 'Automatic Transaxle DTC List"
^ Side pan transaxle: 04-40-019 or 03-40-020, "Automatic Transaxle DTC List"
Please call the Hyundai Technical Assistance Line if you need additional information.
Transaxle > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6727
Differential: Specifications
Differential Drive Gear Bolt 130 - 140 Nm
Bearing Retainer 43 - 55 Nm
Bearing Cap 60 - 80 Nm
Cover 10 mm Diameter Bolt 43 - 55 Nm
8 mm Diameter Bolt 20 - 27 Nm
Case End Play 0 - 0.15 mm
Side Gear and Pinion Backlash 0.025 - 0.150 mm

Differential: Service and Repair
DISASSEMBLY
1. Remove the drive gear retaining bolts and drive gear from the differential case.
2. Remove the bearing with the special tool (09433-21000) or equivalent.
3. Drive out the lock pin with a punch inserted in hole "A". 4. Remove the pinion shaft, pinion gears
and washers. 5. Remove the side gears and spacers. Do not mix the gears and spacers between
the left and right sides.
ASSEMBLY
1. With the spacers installed on the back of the differential side gears, install the gears into the
differential case. If reusing parts, install them in their
original positions noted during disassembly. If using new differential side gears, install medium
thickness spacers 1.0 mm (O.O39 inch).
2. Install the washers on the back of the pinion gears. Install gears into the differential case, then
insert the pinion shaft.
3. Measure the backlash between the side gear and the pinion gear. Backlash should be
0.025-0.150 mm (0.0010-0.0059 inch) and the right and left
hand gear pairs should have equal backlash. If the backlash is out of specification, disassemble
and reassemble using different spacers for the correct backlash. Standard value: 0.025-0.150 mm
(0.0010-0.0059 inch).
4. Install the pinion shaft lock pin in the direction specified in the illustration. After installation, check
that the projection is less than 3 mm (0.118
inch).
CAUTION: The lock pin must not be reused.
5. Press the bearings onto both ends of differential case. Press on the inner race when installing
the bearings. Do not apply load to outer race. 6. Install the differential drive gear onto the case.
7. Apply Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) to the bolts and tighten the bolts to the specified
torque in sequence.
Tightening torque: 130-140 Nm (94-101 ft. lbs.).

Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Automatic Transmission
Dipstick - Dipstick Tube > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - Reman, Filler Tube/Dipstick
Installation
Automatic Transmission Dipstick - Dipstick Tube: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Reman, Filler
Tube/Dipstick Installation
Number: 00-40-001
Group: AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE
Date: JANUARY, 2000
Subject: AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE OIL FILLER TUBE AND OIL LEVEL GAUGE
Model: ALL
DESCRIPTION:
In early 2OOO, Hyundai's automatic transaxle remanufacturer will no longer install an oil filler tube
and oil level gauge (dipstick) on remanufactured automatic transaxles, and will install a plug in
place of the oil filler tube. The remanufacturer will place an O-ring for the oil filler tube inside an
envelope and attach the envelope to the manual control lever.
SERVICE PROCEDURE:
1. Remove the dipstick and oil filler tube from the removed transaxle.
2. Open the large plastic envelope and remove the O-ring from the package.
3. Clean the oil filler tube and install the O-ring on the oil filler tube.
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Automatic Transmission
Dipstick - Dipstick Tube > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - Reman, Filler Tube/Dipstick
Installation > Page 6735
4. Reinstall the oil filler tube and dipstick on the new transaxle.
PARTS INFORMATION:
Model Part Part Number
All O-Ring 42115-37000

Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Drain Plug, A/T >
Drain Plug: Specifications
Drain Plug 35 - 45 Nm
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component
'REVERSE'
Fluid - A/T: Customer Interest A/T - No Movement in 'DRIVE' or 'REVERSE'
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 05-40-016
Date: OCTOBER, 2005
Model: ALL
DESCRIPTION:
shown below:
REPAIR PROCEDURE:
NOTE:


^ Vehicle
Go to Step 12.
NOTE:

Flare/Shudder
Fluid - A/T: Customer Interest A/T - 2nd - 3rd Gear Shift Flare/Shudder
Group TRANSAXLE
Number 03-40-015
Date AUGUST, 2003
Model ALL
DESCRIPTION:
1. CHECK ATF LEVEL:
70-100°C).


Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 02-40-010 > Mar > 02 > A/T - Harsh/Delayed Gear
Engagement
Fluid - A/T: Customer Interest A/T - Harsh/Delayed Gear Engagement
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 02-40-010
Date: 03-2002

ENGAGEMENT
DESCRIPTION:
shown below:
REPAIR PROCEDURE:
shop manual.

^ Select F1 "GRPH".
NOTE
NOTE


Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fluid - A/T: > 10-AT-002 > Feb > 10 > A/T -
Specified ATF And Additive Usage
Number 10-AT-002
Date FEBRUARY, 2010
Model ALL
DESCRIPTION:

NOTE:

Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fluid - A/T: > 09-AT-006 > Mar > 09 > A/T -
Specified ATF and Additive Usage Information
Number 09-AT-006
Date: MARCH, 2009
Model ALL
DESCRIPTION:
Motor Company."
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fluid - A/T: > 06-40-016 > Nov > 06 > A/T -
Automatic Transaxle Fluid Level
Group: TRANSMISSION
Number: 06-40-016
Model: ALL
DESCRIPTION:
the ATF is cold
PROCEDURE:
"75C" range.
NOTE:
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fluid - A/T: > 06-40-016 > Nov > 06 > A/T -
Automatic Transaxle Fluid Level > Page 6775
NOTE:
NOTE:
NOTE:
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fluid - A/T: > 05-40-016 > Oct > 05 > A/T - No
Fluid - A/T: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T - No Movement in 'DRIVE' or 'REVERSE'
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 05-40-016
Date: OCTOBER, 2005
Model: ALL
DESCRIPTION:
shown below:
REPAIR PROCEDURE:
NOTE:


^ Vehicle
Go to Step 12.
NOTE:

Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fluid - A/T: > tnt1361003-002 > Oct > 03 >
A/T - 2-3 Shift Flare or Shift Shudder
APPLIES TO: ALL
SERVICE TIP:
1. CHECK ATF LEVEL:
70-100° C).
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fluid - A/T: > tnt1361003-002 > Oct > 03 >
A/T - 2-3 Shift Flare or Shift Shudder > Page 6788
longer occurs.
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fluid - A/T: > 03-40-015 > Aug > 03 > A/T -
2nd - 3rd Gear Shift Flare/Shudder
Fluid - A/T: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T - 2nd - 3rd Gear Shift Flare/Shudder
Group TRANSAXLE
Number 03-40-015
Date AUGUST, 2003
Model ALL
DESCRIPTION:
1. CHECK ATF LEVEL:
70-100°C).

Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fluid - A/T: > 03-40-015 > Aug > 03 > A/T -
2nd - 3rd Gear Shift Flare/Shudder > Page 6793

Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fluid - A/T: > 02-40-010 > Mar > 02 > A/T -
Harsh/Delayed Gear Engagement
Fluid - A/T: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Harsh/Delayed Gear Engagement
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 02-40-010
Date: 03-2002

ENGAGEMENT
DESCRIPTION:
shown below:
REPAIR PROCEDURE:
shop manual.

^ Select F1 "GRPH".
NOTE
NOTE


Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fluid - A/T: > 9740018 > May > 97 > A/T -
Fluid Precautions/Recommendations
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 97-40-018
Date: MAY, 1997
Model: ALL

DESCRIPTION:
Dexron or Mercon.
transaxle.
diagnosis.
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fluid - A/T: > 9740018 > May > 97 > A/T -
Fluid Precautions/Recommendations > Page 6804
Note:

Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Fluid - A/T: > 10-AT-002 > Feb > 10 > A/T -
Specified ATF And Additive Usage
Number 10-AT-002
Date FEBRUARY, 2010
Model ALL
DESCRIPTION:

NOTE:

Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Fluid - A/T: > 09-AT-006 > Mar > 09 > A/T -
Specified ATF and Additive Usage Information
Number 09-AT-006
Date: MARCH, 2009
Model ALL
DESCRIPTION:
Motor Company."
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Fluid - A/T: > 06-40-016 > Nov > 06 > A/T -
Automatic Transaxle Fluid Level
Group: TRANSMISSION
Number: 06-40-016
Model: ALL
DESCRIPTION:
the ATF is cold
PROCEDURE:
"75C" range.
NOTE:
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Fluid - A/T: > 06-40-016 > Nov > 06 > A/T -
Automatic Transaxle Fluid Level > Page 6818
NOTE:
NOTE:
NOTE:
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Fluid - A/T: > tnt1361003-002 > Oct > 03 > A/T -
2-3 Shift Flare or Shift Shudder
APPLIES TO: ALL
SERVICE TIP:
1. CHECK ATF LEVEL:
70-100° C).
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Fluid - A/T: > tnt1361003-002 > Oct > 03 > A/T -
2-3 Shift Flare or Shift Shudder > Page 6823
longer occurs.
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Fluid - A/T: > 9740018 > May > 97 > A/T - Fluid
Precautions/Recommendations
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 97-40-018
Date: MAY, 1997
Model: ALL

DESCRIPTION:
Dexron or Mercon.
transaxle.
diagnosis.
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Fluid - A/T: > 9740018 > May > 97 > A/T - Fluid
Precautions/Recommendations > Page 6828
Note:

Fluid - A/T: Capacity Specifications
Transmission Fluid
2.0L DOHC ..........................................................................................................................................

........................................................................ 6.4 Qt 3.0L V6 ............................................................
............................................................................................................................................................
7.9 Qt
Fluid - A/T: Fluid Type Specifications
Transmission Fluid
.............................................................................................................................................................
Genuine Diamond ATF SP-II M
Fluid - A/T: Testing and Inspection
FLUID LEVEL INSPECTION
1. Drive the vehicle until the fluid temperature reaches normal operating the usual temperature
[80-90°C (176-194°F)]. 2. Place the vehicle on a level floor. 3. Move the selector lever sequentially
to every position. This will fill the torque converter and hydraulic system with fluid, then place lever
in the
"N" (Neutral) position.
4. Before removing the dipstick, wipe all contaminant from area around the dipstick. Then take out
the dipstick and check the condition of the fluid.
The transaxle should be overhauled under the following conditions. -
If there is a "burning" odor.
- If the fluid color has become noticeably blacker.
- If there is a noticeably excessive amount of metal particles in the fluid.
5. Check to see if the fluid level is in the "HOT" range on dipstick. If fluid level is low, add automatic
transaxle fluid until the level reaches the
"HOT" range. Transaxle fluid: GENUINE HYUNDAI ATF SP-II, DIAMOND ATF SP-II OR AUTRAN
MMSP-II.
NOTE: Low fluid level can cause a variety of abnormal conditions because it allows the pump to
take in air along with fluid. Air trapped in the hydraulic system forms bubbles which are
compressable. Therefore, pressures will be erratic, causing delayed shifting, slipping clutch and
brakes, etc. Improper filling can also raise fluid level too high. When the transaxle has too much
fluid, gears churn up foam and cause the same conditions which occur with low fluid level, resulting
in accelerated deterioration of automatic transaxle fluid. In either case, air bubbles can cause
overheating, and fluid oxidation, which can interfere with normal valve, clutch, and servo operation.
Foaming can also result in fluid escaping from the transaxle vent where it may be mistaken for a
leak.
6. Be sure to examine the fluid on the dipstick closely.

Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Pan, A/T >
Fluid Pan: Specifications
Transmission Pan Bolts 10 - 12 Nm

Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Pressure
Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine/Transmission Controls - Service
Manual Revisions

Manual Revisions
Number 97-40-004
Date 02-1997

DESCRIPTION:
are shown.
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Pump, A/T >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - Installation Precautions
Fluid Pump: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Installation Precautions
Number: 05-40-012
Date: AUGUST, 2005
Model: ALL
Subject: AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE INSTALLATION PROCEDURE TO PREVENT DAMAGE TO

OIL PUMP
DESCRIPTION:
New and remanufactured transaxles are shipped with a retaining strap to hold the torque converter
in place. Do not remove the strap until the transaxle is mounted on the transaxle jack and ready for
installation. If the strap is removed prior to this step, the torque converter may move out of position
in the housing.
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - Installation Precautions > Page 6844
If the torque converter has moved from the fully inserted position, carefully push inward and rotate
the torque converter until the converter is recessed approximately 9/16 - 5/8" (14-16 mm) into the
transaxle case.
If this procedure is not followed, the oil pump may be damaged during installation of the transaxle
(refer to example photo showing oil pump damage).
Fluid Pump: Specifications
Oil Pump Gear Side Clearance 0.02 - 0.048 mm
Assembly Mounting Bolt 19 - 23 Nm

Component Information > Service and Repair > Oil Seal Replacement
Fluid Pump: Service and Repair Oil Seal Replacement
1. Pry off the pump housing oil seal using a screwdriver.
2. Using special tool (09452-21200) or equivalent, install the oil seal to the pump housing. Apply a
thin coat of automatic transaxle fluid to the lip of
the oil seal before installation.

Component Information > Service and Repair > Oil Seal Replacement > Page 6849
Fluid Pump: Service and Repair Overhaul
DISASSEMBLY
1. Place the oil pump body on the torque converter.
2. Remove the two seal rings and O-ring.
3. Remove five bolts and remove reaction shaft support from housing. 4. Remove the oil pump
body from the torque converter.
5. Make reassembly alignment marks on drive and driven gear. 6. Remove oil pump drive and
driven gears from pump housing. 7. Remove the steel ball from housing.
8. Remove the snap ring and the oil seal from the oil pump drive gear.
INSPECTION
1. Measure the side clearance of the oil pump gear. If the clearance exceeds the standard value, or
if an inspection of the surface area (of the oil pump
housing) that contacts the oil pump gear reveals indications of interference, replace the entire oil
pump assembly. Standard value: 0.02-0.048 mm (0.0008-0.0019 inch).
2. Check the surface of the reaction shaft support that contacts the oil pump gear. If there are
indications of interference, replace the entire oil pump
assembly.
3. Check oil pump drive gear rotation.
ASSEMBLY
1. Install the oil seal to the oil pump drive gear.

2. Install the snap ring. 3. After immersing the drive and driven gears in automatic transaxle fluid,
install them into pump housing. When reusing gears, install with mating
marks properly aligned.
4. Fit a new O-ring into the groove at the inner circumference of the drive gear.
5. Install the steel ball in the hole as shown in the illustration.
6. Install the two seal rings, coated with automatic transaxle fluid, to the reaction shaft support. 7.
Make sure that oil pump gear turns freely. 8. Install a new O-ring in the groove provided in the
circumference of the pump housing and apply petroleum jelly to the circumference of the
O-ring.
9. Loosely install the reaction shaft support on the pump housing. Tighten the five bolts finger tight.
10. With the reaction shaft support properly positioned on the pump housing, using special tools
(09452-21401, 09452-21301) or equivalents, tighten
the five bolts to 10-12 Nm (84-108 inch lbs.).

Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Input Shaft, A/T >
Input Shaft End Play 0.3 - 1.0 mm

Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Planetary Gears, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams
Component Information > Service and Repair > Annulus Gear and Output Flange
Planetary Gears: Service and Repair Annulus Gear and Output Flange
REMOVAL
1. Remove the snap ring from the rear of the output flange of the annulus gear and output flange.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.

Component Information > Service and Repair > Annulus Gear and Output Flange > Page 6860
Planetary Gears: Service and Repair Planetary Gear Set
DISASSEMBLY
1. Remove three bolts.
2. Remove the overrunning clutch outer race assembly. Remove the overrunning clutch end plate.
3. Remove the shaft of only one short pinion. 4. Remove the spacer bushing and two front thrust
washers. 5. Remove the pinion. Do not drop the 17 roller bearings in the pinion.
6. Remove the thrust bearing.
7. Push the overrunning clutch out of the outer race by hand.
ASSEMBLY
1. Install the thrust bearing in the carrier. Be sure that it fits correctly in the carrier.
2. Apply a generous amount of petroleum jelly to the inside of the short pinion to hold the 17 rollers
bearings in place.
3. Line up the holes in the rear thrust washer and front thrust washer with the shaft of the carrier. 4.
Install the short pinion, spacer bushing and two front thrust washers and align the holes. Use care
not to allow the rollers to move out of position.
5. Insert the pinion shaft. Be sure that the flattened end of the pinion shaft fits properly into the hole
in the rear thrust plate when the pinion shaft is
inserted.
6. Install the end plate in the outer race.
7. Press the overrunning clutch into the outer race. Be sure that the arrow on the outside
circumference of the cage is pointing upward as shown in the
illustration when the overrunning clutch is installed.
8. Apply petroleum jelly to the overrunning clutch end plate to retain it inside the overrunning clutch.
Install the end plate in the clutch.
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Pressure Regulating
Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection
INSPECTION
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Relays and Modules -
A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 05-40-016 > Oct >
05 > A/T - No Movement in 'DRIVE' or 'REVERSE'
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 05-40-016
Date: OCTOBER, 2005
Model: ALL
DESCRIPTION:
shown below:
REPAIR PROCEDURE:
NOTE:


^ Vehicle
Go to Step 12.
NOTE:

A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 03-40-022 > Dec
> 03 > A/T - Fail Safe Mode/Erratic/Hard Shifting/DTC's Set
Number 03-40-022
Date 12-2003

P0717 & P0722
DESCRIPTION:

NOTE
REPAIR PROCEDURE:
> 03 > A/T - Fail Safe Mode/Erratic/Hard Shifting/DTC's Set > Page 6883

> 03 > A/T - Fail Safe Mode/Erratic/Hard Shifting/DTC's Set > Page 6884
PARTS INFORMATION
A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 02-40-010 > Mar
> 02 > A/T - Harsh/Delayed Gear Engagement
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 02-40-010
Date: 03-2002

ENGAGEMENT
DESCRIPTION:
shown below:
REPAIR PROCEDURE:
shop manual.

^ Select F1 "GRPH".
NOTE
> 02 > A/T - Harsh/Delayed Gear Engagement > Page 6889
NOTE

> 02 > A/T - Harsh/Delayed Gear Engagement > Page 6890

A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 00-40-009 > Aug
> 00 > A/T - Shift Solenoid Incorrect Operation/MIL ON
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 00-40-009
Date: AUGUST, 2000
Model: ALL
symptoms:
^ Erratic shift
^ MIL illuminated
NOTE:
REPAIR PROCEDURE:
NOTE:
Step 6:
cable.
NOTE:
> 00 > A/T - Shift Solenoid Incorrect Operation/MIL ON > Page 6895
NOTE:
All models:
NOTE:


NOTE:

SONATA:
NOTE:
> 00 > A/T - MIL ON DTCs P0712/P0713 Set
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 00-40-010
Date: AUGUST, 2000
Model: ALL
^ MIL illuminated
symptoms:
^ MIL illuminated
Procedure.
REPAIR PROCEDURE:
^ No DTC-gotostep4
> 00 > A/T - MIL ON DTCs P0712/P0713 Set > Page 6902
PARTS INFORMATION:
> 00 > A/T - Harsh Shifts, DTCs P0717/P0722 Set
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 00-40-011
Date: AUGUST, 2000

^ Harsh 1-2 shift

TCM):
Note 1:
Note 2:
SERVICE PROCEDURE:
> 00 > A/T - Harsh Shifts, DTCs P0717/P0722 Set > Page 6907
> 00 > A/T - Harsh Shifts, DTCs P0717/P0722 Set > Page 6908
> 00 > TPS - Driveability Concerns
Number 00-36-006
Date MARCH, 2000
DESCRIPTION:
^ Unstable idle
REPAIR INFORMATION:


> 00 > TPS - Driveability Concerns > Page 6913
PARTS INFORMATION

> 99 > A/T - Shift Lever Will Not Shift Out Of Park
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 99-40-017
DESCRIPTION:
NOTE:
SERVICE PROCEDURE:
column).

> 99 > A/T - Shift Lever Will Not Shift Out Of Park > Page 6918
module.
PARTS INFORMATION:
> 99 > A/T - 2 to 3 Gear Upshift Flare
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 99-40-002
Date MARCH, 1999

(below 60°C, 140°F).
REPAIR PROCEDURE:
adjust screw.
PARTS INFORMATION:
> 99 > A/T - 2 to 3 Gear Upshift Flare > Page 6925
98 > A/T - Poor 2nd to 1st Gear Low Speed Downshift
Number 98-40-013
Date 10-1998
DESCRIPTION
SERVICE PROCEDURE

98 > A/T - Poor 2nd to 1st Gear Low Speed Downshift > Page 6930
PARTS INFORMATION
A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 97-40-027-1 >
Dec > 97 > A/T - Poor Downshifts/Shift Flare
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 97-40-027-1
Model: 1997 TIBURON
IMPROVEMENT
DESCRIPTION:
PARTS INFORMATION:
A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 97-40-028 > Sep
> 97 > A/T - Harsh Engagement Shock
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 97-40-028
Model: ALL
DESCRIPTION:
PARTS INFORMATION:
158-194°F).
A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 97-40-028 > Sep
> 97 > A/T - Harsh Engagement Shock > Page 6939
Sonata 2.0L).
replace the TCM.
transaxle.
> 97 > A/T - Reverse To Drive Engagement Shock
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 97-40-022
Date: AUGUST, 1997
Model: ALL
DESCRIPTION:
have this feature.
follows:
engagement shock.
SERVICE PROCEDURE:
Sonata: 96-40-003-1).
PARTS INFORMATION
A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for
Control Module: > tnt1660906-03 > Sep > 06 > A/T, Engine Controls - ECM/TCM Reset/Relearn Procedure
Procedure
MODEL: All
DESCRIPTION:
as shown below.
VEHICLES AFFECTED:
^ All

HI-SCAN PROCEDURE:
^ Select vehicle
press "ENTER"

Control Module: > tnt1660906-03 > Sep > 06 > A/T, Engine Controls - ECM/TCM Reset/Relearn Procedure > Page 6949
NOTE:
upshifts.

Control Module: > tnt1660906-03 > Sep > 06 > A/T, Engine Controls - ECM/TCM Reset/Relearn Procedure > Page 6950
NOTE:

Control Module: > tnt1630506-01 > May > 06 > A/T Controls - PCM/TCM Reset/Relearn Adaptive Values
Values

HI-SCAN PROCEDURE:
^ Select vehicle

Control Module: > tnt1630506-01 > May > 06 > A/T Controls - PCM/TCM Reset/Relearn Adaptive Values > Page 6955
NOTE:
upshifts.
Control Module: > tnt1630506-01 > May > 06 > A/T Controls - PCM/TCM Reset/Relearn Adaptive Values > Page 6956

NOTE:
Control Module: > 06-40-005 > Mar > 06 > A/T Controls - Reset and Relearn Adaptive Values
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 06-40-005
Date: MARCH, 2006
Model: ALL

VALUES
DESCRIPTION:

as shown below.
Control Module: > 06-40-005 > Mar > 06 > A/T Controls - Reset and Relearn Adaptive Values > Page 6961
HI-SCAN PROCEDURE:
^ Select vehicle
NOTE:
Control Module: > 06-40-005 > Mar > 06 > A/T Controls - Reset and Relearn Adaptive Values > Page 6962
completed as shown.
occur.
NOTE:

Control Module: > 05-40-016 > Oct > 05 > A/T - No Movement in 'DRIVE' or 'REVERSE'
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 05-40-016
Date: OCTOBER, 2005
Model: ALL
DESCRIPTION:
shown below:
REPAIR PROCEDURE:
NOTE:

Control Module: > 05-40-016 > Oct > 05 > A/T - No Movement in 'DRIVE' or 'REVERSE' > Page 6967

^ Vehicle
Go to Step 12.
NOTE:

Control Module: > 03-40-022 > Dec > 03 > A/T - Fail Safe Mode/Erratic/Hard Shifting/DTC's Set
Set
Number 03-40-022
Date 12-2003

P0717 & P0722
DESCRIPTION:

NOTE
REPAIR PROCEDURE:
Control Module: > 03-40-022 > Dec > 03 > A/T - Fail Safe Mode/Erratic/Hard Shifting/DTC's Set > Page 6975

Control Module: > 03-40-022 > Dec > 03 > A/T - Fail Safe Mode/Erratic/Hard Shifting/DTC's Set > Page 6976
PARTS INFORMATION
Control Module: > 03-40-005 > Apr > 03 > A/T - DTC's P0731/P0732/P0733/P0734/P0735/P0736

P0731/P0732/P0733/P0734/P0735/P0736
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 03-40-005
Date: APRIL, 2003
Model: ALL

P0734, P0735, P0736
DESCRIPTION:
REPAIR PROCEDURE:
Control Module: > 03-40-005 > Apr > 03 > A/T - DTC's P0731/P0732/P0733/P0734/P0735/P0736 > Page 6981

Control Module: > 03-40-003 > Feb > 03 > A/T - TCM Adaptive Learning Procedure
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 03-40-003
Model: ALL
DESCRIPTION:
NOTE:
shown below.
NOTE:
Temp. Sensor".
NOTE:
Control Module: > 02-40-010 > Mar > 02 > A/T - Harsh/Delayed Gear Engagement
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 02-40-010
Date: 03-2002

ENGAGEMENT
DESCRIPTION:
shown below:
REPAIR PROCEDURE:
shop manual.

^ Select F1 "GRPH".
NOTE
Control Module: > 02-40-010 > Mar > 02 > A/T - Harsh/Delayed Gear Engagement > Page 6990
NOTE

Control Module: > 02-40-010 > Mar > 02 > A/T - Harsh/Delayed Gear Engagement > Page 6991

Control Module: > 00-40-012 > Sep > 00 > A/T - Diagnostic Trouble Codes & Scanned Data
Group TRANSAXLE
Number 00-40-012
Model ALL
DESCRIPTION:
NOTE:
Control Module: > 00-40-012 > Sep > 00 > A/T - Diagnostic Trouble Codes & Scanned Data > Page 6996

Control Module: > 00-40-009 > Aug > 00 > A/T - Shift Solenoid Incorrect Operation/MIL ON
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 00-40-009
Date: AUGUST, 2000
Model: ALL
symptoms:
^ Erratic shift
^ MIL illuminated
NOTE:
REPAIR PROCEDURE:
NOTE:
Step 6:
cable.
NOTE:
Control Module: > 00-40-009 > Aug > 00 > A/T - Shift Solenoid Incorrect Operation/MIL ON > Page 7001
NOTE:
All models:
NOTE:


NOTE:

SONATA:
NOTE:
Control Module: > 00-40-010 > Aug > 00 > A/T - MIL ON DTCs P0712/P0713 Set
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 00-40-010
Date: AUGUST, 2000
Model: ALL
^ MIL illuminated
symptoms:
^ MIL illuminated
Procedure.
REPAIR PROCEDURE:
^ No DTC-gotostep4
Control Module: > 00-40-010 > Aug > 00 > A/T - MIL ON DTCs P0712/P0713 Set > Page 7008
PARTS INFORMATION:
Control Module: > 00-40-011 > Aug > 00 > A/T - Harsh Shifts, DTCs P0717/P0722 Set
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 00-40-011
Date: AUGUST, 2000

^ Harsh 1-2 shift

TCM):
Note 1:
Note 2:
SERVICE PROCEDURE:
Control Module: > 00-40-011 > Aug > 00 > A/T - Harsh Shifts, DTCs P0717/P0722 Set > Page 7013
Control Module: > 00-40-011 > Aug > 00 > A/T - Harsh Shifts, DTCs P0717/P0722 Set > Page 7014
Control Module: > 00-00-001 > Jul > 00 > Scan Tool - Software Update Procedure
Group: GENERAL
Number: 00-00-001
Date: JULY, 2000
Model: ALL
DESCRIPTION
PROCEDURE:
fixes.
SOL card.
Control Module: > 00-00-001 > Jul > 00 > Scan Tool - Software Update Procedure > Page 7019
Note:
cards.
utility.
INFO card
COM2.
software cards.
COM2.
software.
NOTE:
Control Module: > 00-36-006 > Mar > 00 > TPS - Driveability Concerns
Number 00-36-006
Date MARCH, 2000
DESCRIPTION:
^ Unstable idle
REPAIR INFORMATION:


Control Module: > 00-36-006 > Mar > 00 > TPS - Driveability Concerns > Page 7029
PARTS INFORMATION

Control Module: > 99-40-017 > Dec > 99 > A/T - Shift Lever Will Not Shift Out Of Park
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 99-40-017
DESCRIPTION:
NOTE:
SERVICE PROCEDURE:
column).

Control Module: > 99-40-017 > Dec > 99 > A/T - Shift Lever Will Not Shift Out Of Park > Page 7034
module.
PARTS INFORMATION:
Control Module: > 99-40-004 > Apr > 99 > A/T - Servicing DTCs P1613/P1614
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 99-40-004
Date: APRIL, 1999
DESCRIPTION:
SERVICE PROCEDURE:

Control Module: > 99-40-004 > Apr > 99 > A/T - Servicing DTCs P1613/P1614 > Page 7041
PARTS INFORMATION
WARRANTY
Control Module: > 99-40-002 > Mar > 99 > A/T - 2 to 3 Gear Upshift Flare
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 99-40-002
Date MARCH, 1999

(below 60°C, 140°F).
REPAIR PROCEDURE:
adjust screw.
PARTS INFORMATION:
Control Module: > 99-40-002 > Mar > 99 > A/T - 2 to 3 Gear Upshift Flare > Page 7046
Control Module: > 98-40-013 > Oct > 98 > A/T - Poor 2nd to 1st Gear Low Speed Downshift
Number 98-40-013
Date 10-1998
DESCRIPTION
SERVICE PROCEDURE

Control Module: > 98-40-013 > Oct > 98 > A/T - Poor 2nd to 1st Gear Low Speed Downshift > Page 7051
PARTS INFORMATION
Control Module: > 97-40-027-1 > Dec > 97 > A/T - Poor Downshifts/Shift Flare
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 97-40-027-1
Model: 1997 TIBURON
IMPROVEMENT
DESCRIPTION:
PARTS INFORMATION:
Control Module: > 97-40-028 > Sep > 97 > A/T - Harsh Engagement Shock
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 97-40-028
Model: ALL
DESCRIPTION:
PARTS INFORMATION:
158-194°F).
Control Module: > 97-40-028 > Sep > 97 > A/T - Harsh Engagement Shock > Page 7060
Sonata 2.0L).
replace the TCM.
transaxle.
Control Module: > 97-40-030 > Sep > 97 > TCM - Adaptive Control
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 97-40-030
Model: ALL
DESCRIPTION:
compensate for:
SERVICE PROCEDURE:
is completed.)
Control Module: > 97-40-022 > Aug > 97 > A/T - Reverse To Drive Engagement Shock
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 97-40-022
Date: AUGUST, 1997
Model: ALL
DESCRIPTION:
have this feature.
follows:
engagement shock.
SERVICE PROCEDURE:
Sonata: 96-40-003-1).
PARTS INFORMATION
Control Module: > 97-40-001-1 > Jul > 97 > A/T - Mutual Control Introduction
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 97-40-001-1
Date: JULY, 1997
Model: ALL
production dates.
DESCRIPTION:
ANALYSIS:
2. TPS above 1.2 V

rpm for 10 minutes
1997 Sonata 2.0L & 3.0L July 1, 1996

Control Module: > 97-40-001-1 > Jul > 97 > A/T - Mutual Control Introduction > Page 7073
1997 Tiburon 1.8L & 2.0L July 1, 1996
PARTS INFORMATION:
Control Module: > 97-40-021 > Jul > 97 > A/T - Cold Acceleration in 2ND Gear
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 97-40-021
Date: JULY, 1997
Model: ALL
DESCRIPTION:

A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Control
Module: > tnt1660906-03 > Sep > 06 > A/T, Engine Controls - ECM/TCM Reset/Relearn Procedure
Procedure
MODEL: All
DESCRIPTION:
as shown below.
VEHICLES AFFECTED:
^ All

HI-SCAN PROCEDURE:
^ Select vehicle
press "ENTER"

Module: > tnt1660906-03 > Sep > 06 > A/T, Engine Controls - ECM/TCM Reset/Relearn Procedure > Page 7083
NOTE:
upshifts.

Module: > tnt1660906-03 > Sep > 06 > A/T, Engine Controls - ECM/TCM Reset/Relearn Procedure > Page 7084
NOTE:

Module: > tnt1630506-01 > May > 06 > A/T Controls - PCM/TCM Reset/Relearn Adaptive Values
Values

HI-SCAN PROCEDURE:
^ Select vehicle

Module: > tnt1630506-01 > May > 06 > A/T Controls - PCM/TCM Reset/Relearn Adaptive Values > Page 7089
NOTE:
upshifts.
Module: > tnt1630506-01 > May > 06 > A/T Controls - PCM/TCM Reset/Relearn Adaptive Values > Page 7090

NOTE:
Module: > 06-40-005 > Mar > 06 > A/T Controls - Reset and Relearn Adaptive Values
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 06-40-005
Date: MARCH, 2006
Model: ALL

VALUES
DESCRIPTION:

as shown below.
Module: > 06-40-005 > Mar > 06 > A/T Controls - Reset and Relearn Adaptive Values > Page 7095
HI-SCAN PROCEDURE:
^ Select vehicle
NOTE:
Module: > 06-40-005 > Mar > 06 > A/T Controls - Reset and Relearn Adaptive Values > Page 7096
completed as shown.
occur.
NOTE:

Module: > 03-40-005 > Apr > 03 > A/T - DTC's P0731/P0732/P0733/P0734/P0735/P0736

P0731/P0732/P0733/P0734/P0735/P0736
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 03-40-005
Date: APRIL, 2003
Model: ALL

P0734, P0735, P0736
DESCRIPTION:
REPAIR PROCEDURE:
Module: > 03-40-005 > Apr > 03 > A/T - DTC's P0731/P0732/P0733/P0734/P0735/P0736 > Page 7101

Module: > 03-40-003 > Feb > 03 > A/T - TCM Adaptive Learning Procedure
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 03-40-003
Model: ALL
DESCRIPTION:
NOTE:
shown below.
NOTE:
Temp. Sensor".
NOTE:
Module: > 00-40-012 > Sep > 00 > A/T - Diagnostic Trouble Codes & Scanned Data
Group TRANSAXLE
Number 00-40-012
Model ALL
DESCRIPTION:
NOTE:
Module: > 00-40-012 > Sep > 00 > A/T - Diagnostic Trouble Codes & Scanned Data > Page 7110

Module: > 00-00-001 > Jul > 00 > Scan Tool - Software Update Procedure
Group: GENERAL
Number: 00-00-001
Date: JULY, 2000
Model: ALL
DESCRIPTION
PROCEDURE:
fixes.
SOL card.
Module: > 00-00-001 > Jul > 00 > Scan Tool - Software Update Procedure > Page 7115
Note:
cards.
utility.
INFO card
COM2.
software cards.
COM2.
software.
NOTE:
Module: > 99-40-004 > Apr > 99 > A/T - Servicing DTCs P1613/P1614
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 99-40-004
Date: APRIL, 1999
DESCRIPTION:
SERVICE PROCEDURE:

Module: > 99-40-004 > Apr > 99 > A/T - Servicing DTCs P1613/P1614 > Page 7125
PARTS INFORMATION
WARRANTY
Module: > 97-40-030 > Sep > 97 > TCM - Adaptive Control
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 97-40-030
Model: ALL
DESCRIPTION:
compensate for:
SERVICE PROCEDURE:
is completed.)
Module: > 97-40-001-1 > Jul > 97 > A/T - Mutual Control Introduction
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 97-40-001-1
Date: JULY, 1997
Model: ALL
production dates.
DESCRIPTION:
ANALYSIS:
2. TPS above 1.2 V

rpm for 10 minutes
1997 Sonata 2.0L & 3.0L July 1, 1996

Module: > 97-40-001-1 > Jul > 97 > A/T - Mutual Control Introduction > Page 7134
1997 Tiburon 1.8L & 2.0L July 1, 1996
PARTS INFORMATION:
Module: > 97-40-021 > Jul > 97 > A/T - Cold Acceleration in 2ND Gear
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 97-40-021
Date: JULY, 1997
Model: ALL
DESCRIPTION:

A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7139
Rated Voltage 12 V
Rated Load min. 1A
At Solenoid Load.

Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, A/T
> System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - Fluid Leak From The Bell Housing Area
Seals and Gaskets: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Fluid Leak From The Bell Housing Area
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE OIL LEAK BEHIND TORQUE CONVERTER
MODEL: ALL
DESCRIPTION:
Some transaxles may experience an oil leak in the bellhousing behind the torque converter. If this
occurs the oil leak will be observed at the drain hole on the lower surface of the transaxle.
REPAIR DIAGNOSIS:
If you are servicing a vehicle with an oil leak in the bellhousing area behind the torque converter
refer to the table to determine the proper repair procedure:
REPAIR PROCEDURE:
1. Remove the transaxle.
2. Remove the torque converter.
3. Use a suitable tool to remove the oil seal.

> System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - Fluid Leak From The Bell Housing Area > Page 7144
4. Apply a thin coat of ATF to the lip of the oil seal before installation. Use the special tool
(09452-21200) to install the oil seal to the oil pump
housing.
Seals and Gaskets: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Reman, Filler Tube/Dipstick Installation
Number: 00-40-001
Date: JANUARY, 2000
Subject: AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE OIL FILLER TUBE AND OIL LEVEL GAUGE
Model: ALL
DESCRIPTION:
In early 2OOO, Hyundai's automatic transaxle remanufacturer will no longer install an oil filler tube
and oil level gauge (dipstick) on remanufactured automatic transaxles, and will install a plug in
place of the oil filler tube. The remanufacturer will place an O-ring for the oil filler tube inside an
envelope and attach the envelope to the manual control lever.
SERVICE PROCEDURE:
1. Remove the dipstick and oil filler tube from the removed transaxle.
2. Open the large plastic envelope and remove the O-ring from the package.
3. Clean the oil filler tube and install the O-ring on the oil filler tube.
4. Reinstall the oil filler tube and dipstick on the new transaxle.
PARTS INFORMATION:
Model Part Part Number
All O-Ring 42115-37000

Seals and Gaskets: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Seal & Case Identification
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 96-40-019
Model: 1992-1996 ELANTRA 1992-1996 2.0L SONATA
Subject: AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE SEAL AND CASE IDENTIFICATION
DESCRIPTION:
Beginning with February 7, 1995 production, the current design differential oil seal has been
installed in automatic transaxles to provide better serviceability. Stoppers added to the transaxle
case and the torque converter housing ensure proper seal installation.
The current oil seal must only be installed in transaxle cases that contain stoppers in the machined
bores of the case. The current oil seal is not interchangeable with the previous oil seal. If the
previous oil seal is installed in the current transaxle case, the oil seal will protrude from the case
and prevent the drive shafts from engaging in the transaxle. If the current oil seal is installed in the
previous transaxle case, an oil leak may occur.
EFFECTIVE POINT:
Date: February 7, 1995 Transaxle Serial No.: DSEAD269237

PARTS INFORMATION:

> System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7149
Seals and Gaskets: Service and Repair
REPLACEMENT
1. Disconnect the drive shaft from the transaxle.

2. Using a flat-tip (-) screwdriver, remove the oil seal.
3. Using special tool (09431-21200) or equivalent, tap the drive shaft oil seal into the transaxle. 4.
Apply a coating of the transaxle fluid to the lip of the oil seal.
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches -
A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine/Transmission

Manual Revisions
Number 97-40-004
Date 02-1997

DESCRIPTION:
are shown.
A/T > Throttle Position Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection
INSPECTION

A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer
Interest: > 09-AT-013 > Jul > 09 > A/T - MIL ON/DTC's P0705/P0707/P0708/No Start In P/N
Group TRANSAXLE
Number 09-AT-013
Date JULY, 2009

P0707, P0708
DESCRIPTION:
range switch.
PARTS INFORMATION
Interest: > 09-AT-013 > Jul > 09 > A/T - MIL ON/DTC's P0705/P0707/P0708/No Start In P/N > Page 7166
Service Procedure
c below.

Interest: > 05-40-016 > Oct > 05 > A/T - No Movement in 'DRIVE' or 'REVERSE'

'REVERSE'
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 05-40-016
Date: OCTOBER, 2005
Model: ALL
DESCRIPTION:
shown below:
REPAIR PROCEDURE:
NOTE:

Interest: > 05-40-016 > Oct > 05 > A/T - No Movement in 'DRIVE' or 'REVERSE' > Page 7174

^ Vehicle
Go to Step 12.
NOTE:

Interest: > 99-40-017 > Dec > 99 > A/T - Shift Lever Will Not Shift Out Of Park
Park
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 99-40-017
DESCRIPTION:
NOTE:
SERVICE PROCEDURE:
column).

Interest: > 99-40-017 > Dec > 99 > A/T - Shift Lever Will Not Shift Out Of Park > Page 7182
module.
PARTS INFORMATION:
A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical
Service Bulletins for Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: > 09-AT-013 > Jul > 09 > A/T - MIL ON/DTC's
Group TRANSAXLE
Number 09-AT-013
Date JULY, 2009

P0707, P0708
DESCRIPTION:
range switch.
PARTS INFORMATION
Service Procedure
c below.

Service Bulletins for Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: > tnt1720307-02 > Mar > 07 > A/T Controls - Neutral Position
Switch Adaptive Relearn

Switch Adaptive Relearn > Page 7198
Press "ENTER."

Switch Adaptive Relearn > Page 7199

Service Bulletins for Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: > tnt1581105-02 > Nov > 05 > A/T - No Movement In
Drive/Reverse

Drive/Reverse
MODEL: ALL
DESCRIPTION:
shown below:
REPAIR PROCEDURE:
NOTE:

(10-12 Nm, 100-120 kg.cm)
(12-13 Nm, 120-130 kg.cm)

^ Vehicle
inserted.
Go to Step 12.
inserted.
NOTE:
replace the TCM.

Service Bulletins for Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: > 05-40-016 > Oct > 05 > A/T - No Movement in 'DRIVE' or
'REVERSE'

Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 05-40-016
Date: OCTOBER, 2005
Model: ALL
DESCRIPTION:
shown below:
REPAIR PROCEDURE:
NOTE:


^ Vehicle
Go to Step 12.
NOTE:

Service Bulletins for Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: > 99-40-017 > Dec > 99 > A/T - Shift Lever Will Not Shift Out Of
Park
Out Of Park
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 99-40-017
DESCRIPTION:
NOTE:
SERVICE PROCEDURE:
column).

Park > Page 7219
Park > Page 7220
module.
PARTS INFORMATION:
Park > Page 7221
A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service
Bulletins for Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: > tnt1720307-02 > Mar > 07 > A/T Controls - Neutral Position Switch
Adaptive Relearn

Adaptive Relearn > Page 7227
Press "ENTER."

Adaptive Relearn > Page 7228

Bulletins for Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: > tnt1581105-02 > Nov > 05 > A/T - No Movement In Drive/Reverse

Drive/Reverse
MODEL: ALL
DESCRIPTION:
shown below:
REPAIR PROCEDURE:
NOTE:
Bulletins for Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: > tnt1581105-02 > Nov > 05 > A/T - No Movement In Drive/Reverse >
Page 7233

(10-12 Nm, 100-120 kg.cm)
(12-13 Nm, 120-130 kg.cm)

Page 7234
^ Vehicle
inserted.
Go to Step 12.
inserted.
Page 7235
NOTE:
replace the TCM.

A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7236
A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: >
Set
Number 03-40-022
Date 12-2003

P0717 & P0722
DESCRIPTION:

NOTE
REPAIR PROCEDURE:

PARTS INFORMATION
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 00-40-011
Date: AUGUST, 2000

^ Harsh 1-2 shift

TCM):
Note 1:
Note 2:
SERVICE PROCEDURE:
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 98-40-002
Date: APRIL, 1998
Model: ALL
DESCRIPTION:
^ Harsh 1-2 shift
(TCM):
Note 1:
codes.
Note 2:
PG-B.

SERVICE PROCEDURE:

A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service
Bulletins for Transmission Speed Sensor: > 03-40-022 > Dec > 03 > A/T - Fail Safe Mode/Erratic/Hard Shifting/DTC's Set
Shifting/DTC's Set
Number 03-40-022
Date 12-2003

P0717 & P0722
DESCRIPTION:

NOTE
REPAIR PROCEDURE:
Bulletins for Transmission Speed Sensor: > 03-40-022 > Dec > 03 > A/T - Fail Safe Mode/Erratic/Hard Shifting/DTC's Set >
Page 7265

Bulletins for Transmission Speed Sensor: > 03-40-022 > Dec > 03 > A/T - Fail Safe Mode/Erratic/Hard Shifting/DTC's Set >
Page 7266
PARTS INFORMATION
Bulletins for Transmission Speed Sensor: > 00-40-011 > Aug > 00 > A/T - Harsh Shifts, DTCs P0717/P0722 Set
P0717/P0722 Set
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 00-40-011
Date: AUGUST, 2000

^ Harsh 1-2 shift

TCM):
Note 1:
Note 2:
SERVICE PROCEDURE:
Bulletins for Transmission Speed Sensor: > 00-40-011 > Aug > 00 > A/T - Harsh Shifts, DTCs P0717/P0722 Set > Page
7271
Bulletins for Transmission Speed Sensor: > 00-40-011 > Aug > 00 > A/T - Harsh Shifts, DTCs P0717/P0722 Set > Page
7272
Bulletins for Transmission Speed Sensor: > 98-40-002 > Apr > 98 > A/T - Intermittent Delayed, Erratic, Harsh Shifting
Harsh Shifting
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 98-40-002
Date: APRIL, 1998
Model: ALL
DESCRIPTION:
^ Harsh 1-2 shift
(TCM):
Note 1:
codes.
Note 2:
PG-B.

SERVICE PROCEDURE:

Bulletins for Transmission Speed Sensor: > 98-40-002 > Apr > 98 > A/T - Intermittent Delayed, Erratic, Harsh Shifting >
Page 7277
Bulletins for Transmission Speed Sensor: > 97-40-025-1 > Aug > 97 > A/T - Driveability Concerns/DTC's Set/MIL ON
Set/MIL ON
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 97-40-025-1
Date: August, 1997
Model: ALL
DESCRIPTION:
^ Harsh 1-2 shift
Note 1:
*Fail-safe code
Note 2:
(DLC).
Bulletins for Transmission Speed Sensor: > 97-40-025-1 > Aug > 97 > A/T - Driveability Concerns/DTC's Set/MIL ON >
Page 7282
SERVICE PROCEDURE:
B) Test Procedure:
Bulletins for Transmission Speed Sensor: > 97-40-025-1 > Aug > 97 > A/T - Driveability Concerns/DTC's Set/MIL ON >
Page 7283
shielded wiring.

A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins
for Transmission Speed Sensor: > 97-40-025-1 > Aug > 97 > A/T - Driveability Concerns/DTC's Set/MIL ON
Set/MIL ON
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 97-40-025-1
Date: August, 1997
Model: ALL
DESCRIPTION:
^ Harsh 1-2 shift
Note 1:
*Fail-safe code
Note 2:
(DLC).
for Transmission Speed Sensor: > 97-40-025-1 > Aug > 97 > A/T - Driveability Concerns/DTC's Set/MIL ON > Page 7289
SERVICE PROCEDURE:
B) Test Procedure:
for Transmission Speed Sensor: > 97-40-025-1 > Aug > 97 > A/T - Driveability Concerns/DTC's Set/MIL ON > Page 7290
shielded wiring.

A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer
Interest for Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch: > 04-40-016 > Sep > 04 > A/T - MIL ON/Shift Flare/Harsh

Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 04-40-016
ELANTRA
DESCRIPTION:
REPAIR PROCEDURE.
necessary.
sensor.
PARTS INFORMATION:
Interest for Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch: > 03-40-015 > Aug > 03 > A/T - 2nd - 3rd Gear Shift Flare/Shudder
Flare/Shudder
Group TRANSAXLE
Number 03-40-015
Date AUGUST, 2003
Model ALL
DESCRIPTION:
1. CHECK ATF LEVEL:
70-100°C).

Interest for Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch: > 03-40-015 > Aug > 03 > A/T - 2nd - 3rd Gear Shift Flare/Shudder >
Page 7305

Interest for Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch: > 02-40-007 > Feb > 02 > A/T - Torque Converter Clutch
Malfunctions

Malfunctions
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 02-40-007
Model: ALL
DESCRIPTION:
shown below:
REPAIR PROCEDURE:
shown.
the condition:
NOTE:
Interest for Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch: > 00-40-010 > Aug > 00 > A/T - MIL ON DTCs P0712/P0713 Set
Set
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 00-40-010
Date: AUGUST, 2000
Model: ALL
^ MIL illuminated
symptoms:
^ MIL illuminated
Procedure.
REPAIR PROCEDURE:
^ No DTC-gotostep4
Interest for Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch: > 00-40-010 > Aug > 00 > A/T - MIL ON DTCs P0712/P0713 Set >
Page 7316
PARTS INFORMATION:
A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical
Service Bulletins for Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch: > 04-40-016 > Sep > 04 > A/T - MIL ON/Shift Flare/Harsh
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 04-40-016
ELANTRA
DESCRIPTION:
REPAIR PROCEDURE.
necessary.
sensor.
PARTS INFORMATION:
Service Bulletins for Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch: > 03-40-015 > Aug > 03 > A/T - 2nd - 3rd Gear Shift
Flare/Shudder
Shift Flare/Shudder
Group TRANSAXLE
Number 03-40-015
Date AUGUST, 2003
Model ALL
DESCRIPTION:
1. CHECK ATF LEVEL:
70-100°C).

Service Bulletins for Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch: > 03-40-015 > Aug > 03 > A/T - 2nd - 3rd Gear Shift

Service Bulletins for Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch: > 02-40-007 > Feb > 02 > A/T - Torque Converter Clutch
Malfunctions
Clutch Malfunctions
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 02-40-007
Model: ALL
DESCRIPTION:
shown below:
REPAIR PROCEDURE:
shown.
the condition:
NOTE:
Service Bulletins for Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch: > 00-40-010 > Aug > 00 > A/T - MIL ON DTCs
P0712/P0713 Set
P0712/P0713 Set
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 00-40-010
Date: AUGUST, 2000
Model: ALL
^ MIL illuminated
symptoms:
^ MIL illuminated
Procedure.
REPAIR PROCEDURE:
^ No DTC-gotostep4
Service Bulletins for Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch: > 00-40-010 > Aug > 00 > A/T - MIL ON DTCs
P0712/P0713 Set > Page 7339
PARTS INFORMATION:
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T >
Shift Interlock: Component Locations
M03
M14, M16 Stop Lamp Switch
M17, M18, M19, M20, M21, M22, M23, M24-1, M24-2, M24-3, M60
M25 - M28
M46 Key Interlock Solenoid

MR04
Shift Interlock: Ground Locations
G04
G05
G06
Shift Interlock: Diagram Information and Instructions


Connector View
CONNECTOR VIEW
Numbering Order
NUMBERING ORDER

Electrical Diagram
Harness Layouts
Harness Layout

B ..........................................................................................................................................................
......................................................................... Black L .......................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
Blue Br .................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................... Brown G ...............................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
...... Green Gr .......................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................ Gray Lg ...................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
....... Light Green O ..............................................................................................................................
................................................................................................... Orange P .........................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
............................... Pink R ..................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................... Red W .............................
..............................................................................................................................................................
....................................... White Y ........................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................... Yellow Li ....................
..............................................................................................................................................................
......................................... Light Blue
Shift Interlock: Diagnostic Aids
CAUTION
CAUTION
may result.
lamp or ohmmeter.

box and the short.
Testing For Voltage
Testing For Voltage
CAUTION
Shift Interlock: Connector Views







Shift And Key Lock System
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Shift Solenoid: > 03-40-007-1 > Mar > 04 >
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 03-40-007-1
Date: MARCH 2004
P0745, P0747, P0748, P0750, P0752, P0753, P0755, P0757, P0758, P0760, P0765
DESCRIPTION:
^ MIL illuminated
NOTE:
Repair Procedure
cable.
NOTE:
NOTE:
P0745, P0747, P0748 or P0765).
A/T - Erratic/Slipping Shifts/MIL ON/DTC's Set > Page 7378
NOTE:
NOTE:

connector.
shown.
PARTS INFORMATION
DTC INFORMATION:
NOTE:
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Shift Solenoid: > 00-40-009 > Aug > 00 > A/T
- Shift Solenoid Incorrect Operation/MIL ON
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 00-40-009
Date: AUGUST, 2000
Model: ALL
symptoms:
^ Erratic shift
^ MIL illuminated
NOTE:
REPAIR PROCEDURE:
NOTE:
Step 6:
cable.
NOTE:
- Shift Solenoid Incorrect Operation/MIL ON > Page 7386
NOTE:
All models:
NOTE:


NOTE:

SONATA:
NOTE:
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Shift Solenoid: > 99-40-017 > Dec > 99 > A/T
- Shift Lever Will Not Shift Out Of Park
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 99-40-017
DESCRIPTION:
NOTE:
SERVICE PROCEDURE:
column).

- Shift Lever Will Not Shift Out Of Park > Page 7393
module.
PARTS INFORMATION:
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Shift Solenoid: > 99-40-002 > Mar > 99 > A/T
- 2 to 3 Gear Upshift Flare
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 99-40-002
Date MARCH, 1999

(below 60°C, 140°F).
REPAIR PROCEDURE:
adjust screw.
PARTS INFORMATION:
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Shift Solenoid: > 99-40-002 > Mar > 99 > A/T
- 2 to 3 Gear Upshift Flare > Page 7400
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Shift Solenoid: > 03-40-007-1 >
Mar > 04 > A/T - Erratic/Slipping Shifts/MIL ON/DTC's Set
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 03-40-007-1
Date: MARCH 2004
P0745, P0747, P0748, P0750, P0752, P0753, P0755, P0757, P0758, P0760, P0765
DESCRIPTION:
^ MIL illuminated
NOTE:
Repair Procedure
cable.
NOTE:
NOTE:
P0745, P0747, P0748 or P0765).
Mar > 04 > A/T - Erratic/Slipping Shifts/MIL ON/DTC's Set > Page 7406
NOTE:
NOTE:

connector.
shown.
PARTS INFORMATION
DTC INFORMATION:
NOTE:
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Shift Solenoid: > 00-40-009 > Aug
> 00 > A/T - Shift Solenoid Incorrect Operation/MIL ON
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 00-40-009
Date: AUGUST, 2000
Model: ALL
symptoms:
^ Erratic shift
^ MIL illuminated
NOTE:
REPAIR PROCEDURE:
NOTE:
Step 6:
cable.
NOTE:
NOTE:
All models:
NOTE:


NOTE:

SONATA:
NOTE:
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Shift Solenoid: > 99-40-017 > Dec
> 99 > A/T - Shift Lever Will Not Shift Out Of Park
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 99-40-017
DESCRIPTION:
NOTE:
SERVICE PROCEDURE:
column).

module.
PARTS INFORMATION:
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Shift Solenoid: > 99-40-002 > Mar
> 99 > A/T - 2 to 3 Gear Upshift Flare
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 99-40-002
Date MARCH, 1999

(below 60°C, 140°F).
REPAIR PROCEDURE:
adjust screw.
PARTS INFORMATION:
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Shift Solenoid: > 99-40-002 > Mar
> 99 > A/T - 2 to 3 Gear Upshift Flare > Page 7428
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shifter A/T > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Shifter A/T: > 99-40-017 > Dec > 99 > A/T - Shift Lever
Will Not Shift Out Of Park
Shifter A/T: Customer Interest A/T - Shift Lever Will Not Shift Out Of Park
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 99-40-017
DESCRIPTION:
NOTE:
SERVICE PROCEDURE:
column).

Will Not Shift Out Of Park > Page 7437
module.
PARTS INFORMATION:
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Shifter A/T: > 99-40-017 > Dec > 99 > A/T -
Shift Lever Will Not Shift Out Of Park
Shifter A/T: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Shift Lever Will Not Shift Out Of Park
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 99-40-017
DESCRIPTION:
NOTE:
SERVICE PROCEDURE:
column).

Shift Lever Will Not Shift Out Of Park > Page 7445
module.
PARTS INFORMATION:
Shifter A/T: Testing and Inspection
OPERATION CHECK
1. Shift the selector lever to each range and check to see that the lever moves smoothly and is
controlled. Check to see that the position indicator is
correct.
2. Check to be sure that the selector lever can be shifted to each position (by button operation as
shown in the illustration). 3. Start the engine and check to see if the vehicle moves forward when
the selector lever is shifted from "N" to "D", and moves backward when
shifted to "R".
4. When the shift lever malfunctions, adjust the control cable and the selector lever sleeve. Check
for worn shift lever assembly sliding parts.
Shifter A/T: Service and Repair
DISASSEMBLY
1. Refer to illustration for disassembly.
INSPECTION
1. Check the detent place for wear. 2. Check the bushing for wear or damage. 3. Check the spring
for damage or deterioration. 4. Check the pin at the end of rod assembly for wear.
ASSEMBLY
1. Apply a coating of the specified grease to the sliding part of the bushing.
Specified grease: Chassis grease SAE J310, NLGI No. 2 or equivalent.

2. Apply the specified grease at the places shown in the figure.
Specified grease: Multipurpose grease SAE J310, NLGI No. 2 or equivalent.

Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, A/T > Shift
Cable, A/T > Component Information > Specifications
Shift Cable: Specifications
Shift Cable Control Cable to Body 5 - 7 Nm

Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, A/T > Shift
Cable, A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 7456
Shift Cable: Adjustments
1. Eliminate slack from the control cable with the adjusting flange nut and check that the select
lever operates smoothly. 2. Driving the car, check that the transaxle is set in the proper range when
the select lever is shifted to each position.
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Speedometer Gear, A/T
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Speedometer Gear, A/T
Speedometer Gear, A/T: Service and Repair
DISASSEMBLY
1. Refer to components illustration for disassembly.
ASSEMBLY
1. Install a new O-ring into the outer groove of the sleeve, and apply a coating of Automatic
Transmission Fluid (ATF) to the outer circumference of
the O-ring.
CAUTION: Insert carefully the speedometer driven gear into the transaxle housing not to
disassemble the speedometer driven gear shaft.
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Throttle Position
Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection
INSPECTION

Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - Fluid Leak From The Bell Housing Area
Torque Converter: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Fluid Leak From The Bell Housing Area
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE OIL LEAK BEHIND TORQUE CONVERTER
MODEL: ALL
DESCRIPTION:
Some transaxles may experience an oil leak in the bellhousing behind the torque converter. If this
occurs the oil leak will be observed at the drain hole on the lower surface of the transaxle.
REPAIR DIAGNOSIS:
If you are servicing a vehicle with an oil leak in the bellhousing area behind the torque converter
refer to the table to determine the proper repair procedure:
REPAIR PROCEDURE:
1. Remove the transaxle.
2. Remove the torque converter.
3. Use a suitable tool to remove the oil seal.

Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - Fluid Leak From The Bell Housing Area > Page 7468
4. Apply a thin coat of ATF to the lip of the oil seal before installation. Use the special tool
(09452-21200) to install the oil seal to the oil pump
housing.
Torque Converter: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Installation Precautions
Number: 05-40-012
Date: AUGUST, 2005
Model: ALL
Subject: AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE INSTALLATION PROCEDURE TO PREVENT DAMAGE TO

OIL PUMP
DESCRIPTION:
New and remanufactured transaxles are shipped with a retaining strap to hold the torque converter
in place. Do not remove the strap until the transaxle is mounted on the transaxle jack and ready for
installation. If the strap is removed prior to this step, the torque converter may move out of position
in the housing.
If the torque converter has moved from the fully inserted position, carefully push inward and rotate
the torque converter until the converter is recessed approximately 9/16 - 5/8" (14-16 mm) into the
transaxle case.
If this procedure is not followed, the oil pump may be damaged during installation of the transaxle
(refer to example photo showing oil pump damage).
Torque Converter: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Torque Converter Inspection
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 04-40-021
Model: ALL MODELS ALL YEARS
Subject AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE TORQUE CONVERTER INSPECTION
DESCRIPTION
Prior to installation, please inspect all transaxle torque converter mounting holes according to the
Repair Procedure shown below.
REPAIR PROCEDURE
1. Loosen the l4mm bolt securing the shipping strap to the transaxle. Remove the bolt that secures
the shipping strap to the torque converter. Check if the bolt is a "Star" bolt, (M10 x 1.25 x 11 mm,
P/N 42121-21720):
^ IF NOT, discard the bolt
^ IF SO, retain the bolt
2. Use a light to inspect all the mounting bolt holes and threads for:
^ An interference mark at the bottom of the hole indicating the existing bolt or a previous bolt has
bottomed out and damaged the torque converter.
^ Stripped threads caused by a bolt with incorrect threads.

A mark indicating the existing bolt or a previous bolt has bottomed out:
Damage caused by a bolt with incorrect threads:
If the inspection shows:
^ No damage to either the mounting bolt hole or bolt threads - install the transaxle using '~Star
bolts to install the torque converter to the engine drive plate.
^ Damage to either the mounting bolt hole or bolt threads:
^ Install the shipping strap and use a "Star" bolt to secure the torque converter.
^ Write "Bolt holes damaged" on the Core Return Checklist.
^ Return the transaxle to the remanufacturer following the normal procedure.

Torque Converter: Technical Service Bulletins Torque Converter - Bolt Precautions
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 97-40-014
Date: MAY, 1997
Model: ALL
Subject: AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE TORQUE CONVERTER BOLTS
DESCRIPTION: The bolts used to attached the torque converter to the engine drive plate have a
star pattern on the head for identification (except for Scoupes produced after 8/1/92). DO NOT use
any other type bolt on the torque converter. Aftermarket bolts may be longer than 10 mm, which will
damage the torque converter. Also, aftermarket bolts may have insufficient strength for this
application.
Before installing a remanufactured transaxle, read the warning tag on the torque converter bolts.
The tag will advise that the correct bolts are either: 1.
Supplied with the remanufactured transaxle, or
2. To be removed from the old transaxle and reused on the installed transaxle. In this case, strap
bolts are used to secure the torque converter to the transaxle case during shipment. Be sure to
discard these strap bolts.
Note:
Scoupes produced after 8/1/92 do not use a bolt with a star pattern. These transaxles are shipped
with the bolts installed in the torque converter.
PARTS INFORMATION:
Note:
Refer to the appropriate parts catalog for part number and production date for each model.
Torque Converter: Specifications
Torque Converter Torque Converter to Drive Plate 46 - 53 Nm

Torque Converter: Application and ID
GENERAL INFORMATION
Type: With damper clutch Engine Stall Speed: 2500 +/- 200 rpm Stall To Torque Ratio: 1.9
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler,
A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 02-40-007 > Feb > 02 > A/T - Torque
Transmission Cooler: Customer Interest A/T - Torque Converter Clutch Malfunctions
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 02-40-007
Model: ALL

DESCRIPTION:
shown below:
REPAIR PROCEDURE:
shown.
the condition:
NOTE:
A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Transmission Cooler: >
07-40-011 > Aug > 07 > A/T - Cooler Flushing Procedure
Transmission Cooler: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Cooler Flushing Procedure
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 07-40-011
Date: AUGUST, 2007
Model: ALL
Subject: AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE OIL COOLER FLUSHING
This bulletin revises TSB 98-40-004 to update use of alternate oil cooler flushers
DESCRIPTION
Whenever an automatic transaxle is replaced or overhauled, the oil cooler must be flushed to
remove contaminants such as metal particles and clutch material. Improper flushing may result in
severe damage to the replacement transaxle.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
WARNING:
^ Wear safety glasses and rubber gloves when flushing the oil cooler.
^ Use aerosol oil cooler flush only with adequate ventilation.
^ Avoid contact with eyes and skin.
^ Do not breathe vapors or spray mist.

1. Mark the hoses with tape or tags so they can be reconnected correctly. Disconnect the oil cooler
inlet and outlet hoses from the oil cooler tubes.
07-40-011 > Aug > 07 > A/T - Cooler Flushing Procedure > Page 7491
2. Insert the nozzle of the aerosol can to either hose and secure it with a hose clamp. Position the
other hose so that it discharges into a waste container.
3. Remove the protective cap. Hold the can upright and press firmly on the button to release the
solution. Flush for 15-20 seconds until clear liquid comes from the outlet hose.
4. Insert the aerosol flush to the other hose and flush in the other direction until clear liquid comes
from the outlet hose. For best results, use the entire contents of the aerosol can.
NOTE:
Clear liquid must flow freely in both directions through the oil cooler. If not, the oil cooler is clogged
with debris and must be replaced.
5. When the flush has been expelled, turn the can upside down and blow any remaining liquid out
of the cooler.
6. Reconnect the cooler hoses to the transaxle and secure with clamps.
7. Add ATF. Start the vehicle and check for leaks.
8. Check the automatic transaxle fluid (ATF) level with the engine idling in "N". Add ATF to bring
the ATF level to the top of the "FULL" mark.
NOTE:
Dispose of the waste solution in conformance with local, state and Federal regulations.
PARTS INFORMATION
02-40-007 > Feb > 02 > A/T - Torque Converter Clutch Malfunctions
Transmission Cooler: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Torque Converter Clutch Malfunctions
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 02-40-007
Model: ALL

DESCRIPTION:
shown below:
REPAIR PROCEDURE:
shown.
the condition:
NOTE:
98-40-005 > Aug > 98 > Remanufactured A/T- Program/Cooler Flushing
Remanufactured A/T- Program/Cooler Flushing
GROUP: TRANSAXLE
NUMBER: 98-40-005
DATE: AUGUST, 1998
Model: ALL
Subject REMANUFACTURED AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE (ATM) PROGRAM
THIS TSB HAS BEEN REVISED TO DESCRIBE A NEW FLUSHING PROCEDURE FOR THE
ATM OIL COOLER.
DESCRIPTION:
The Remanufactured Automatic Transaxle Program has been updated. Warranty policy allows for
in-dealership repairs/replacements of the following components:
^ Axle seal (leaks)
^ End clutch assembly
^ Front pump seal, 0-ring and gaskets
^ Kickdown servo
^ Oil pan (leaks)
^ Oil temperature sensor
^ Pulse generator
^ TCM and/or wiring
^ Solenoids
However, if an internal ATM mechanical condition is diagnosed, remove and replace the ATM with
a remanufactured unit. No internal disassembly of the ATM should be performed. ATM internal
overhauls require DPSM prior approval/authorization.
Note:
Second and subsequent remanufactured ATM replacements on the same VIN will require
Regional/Technical Assistance Line approval/authorization prior to performance of repair, and
DPSM approval/authorization for claim payment.
TRAINING:
Automatic Transaxle Troubleshooting and Certification Course (# 451300) provides detailed

instructions on how to properly diagnose, and when to repair or replace, an ATM. Regional
approval is necessary when installing remanufactured units if your dealership does not currently
employ a technician who has attended this course.
AFFECTED MODELS:
This program applies to all models except 1986 Excels.
SPECIAL SERVICE TOOLS:

Your dealership must have on hand the following Special Service Tools/supplies:
- Hyundai Transmission Cooler Flush (aerosol), P/N 00235-18100
- Hyundai Automatic Transaxle Tester (Kent-Moore # J39853)
- HDS
98-40-005 > Aug > 98 > Remanufactured A/T- Program/Cooler Flushing > Page 7503
- HDS Scan Tool (Kent-Moore # J41490)
- HDS Trans-Tech Module
Diagnosis Procedure
1. Service Advisor opens a Repair Order (RO) documenting the customer's detailed complaint. A
road test by a Technician or Service Advisor may be necessary to verify the customer's description.
2. The Service Advisor carefully completes the top section of the ATM Diagnosis Worksheet.
3. The Worksheet (P/N NP150-07006) and shop copy of the RO are dispatched to the Technician.
(The remaining copies of the RO can be broken out and distributed according to established
dealership procedures).
4. Technician follows Diagnostic Flow Chart on the back of the Worksheet to help complete the
diagnosis of the ATM and to make a repair/replace decision.
5. If it is determined that a remanufactured unit must be ordered/installed, the technician must

obtain the Service Manager's approval and signature on the Worksheet.
6. If a remanufactured unit is necessary, the technician sends both the Worksheet and RO to the
Parts Department.
7. Parts Department orders remanufactured ATM from the facing PDC and retains RO and
Worksheet, filed by RO number.
8. Parts Department receives remanufactured ATM, shipped prepaid in a reusable box, and
provides ATM to Technician.
Note:
Retain reusable box and use to return removed ATM and torque converter to the remanufacturing
center.
A complete package of forms is included with each remanufactured ATM unit as shown.
- Core Return Checklist - Pre-addressed shipping label to remanufacturing center
- Bill of Lading - Installation tips
9. Parts Department completes all required fields of information on the Core Return Checklist.
Failure to do so will result in debit.
10. Technician completely drains all fluids, removes the ATM and torque converter from the
vehicle.
Note:
Do not disassemble any part of the ATM.
11. Flush the transaxle oil cooler and hoses using Hyundai Transmission Cooler Flush (part no.
00235-18100). Follow instructions in TSB # 98-40-004.
12. Install the remanufactured ATM according to the appropriate Shop Manual. Fill the ATM fluid to
the specified level using Genuine Hyundai ATF+ Type 7176 or SP-II.
13. Secure the removed torque converter to the removed ATM core using the torque converter
retaining strap and bolts removed from the remanufactured ATM unit.
14. Install all plugs removed from the remanufactured ATM unit onto the removed ATM unit before
packaging to prevent residual fluid from leaking.
15. Place the top copy of the ATM Diagnosis Worksheet and the top copy of the Core Return
Checklist into the plastic bag provided with the remanufactured ATM unit and close the envelope
securely. Enclose all needed forms and ensure they are completed and fully filled out.
Note:
Failure to properly complete and/or return the designated ATM Core Return Checklist and ATM
Diagnosis Worksheet will result in a $50.00 reduction of the core credit and/or charge back of your
warranty claim.
16. Place the removed ATM into the shipping container provided with the remanufactured ATM
(make sure that the ATM is placed in the proper direction); secure lid with retaining straps.
17. Using the address label provided with the remanufactured ATM unit, ship the removed ATM
with the Core Return Checklist.
Note:
Freight charges are paid by HMA for returning the removed ATM to the remanufacturing center, if
the enclosed bill of lading is used and ATM is shipped via HMA approved carriers. DO NOT
SUBMIT A WARRANTY CLAIM FOR THESE CHARGES.
18. The bottom copy of the Core Return Checklist is retained in the dealership's Parts Department,
filed by the repair order number indicated in the top right hand corner of the checklist.
19. The canary copy of the ATM Diagnosis Worksheet must be attached/retained with the shop
copy of the RO in the Dealership's VIN service files. Dealership must record the removed and
remanufactured ATM serial numbers on the shop copy of the RO.
20. Remanufacturing center receives the removed ATM, Core Return Checklist and ATM Diagnosis
Worksheet.
21. Remanufacturing center checks documents and sends forms to HMA.
22. Dealer is reimbursed for core ATM.

Note 1:
Second and subsequent ATM reman replacements on the same VIN will require
Regional/Technical Assistance Line approval/authorization prior to performance of the repair and
DPSM approval/authorization for claim payment
Note 2:
HMA may deny/chargeback all or portions of ATM claims and/or core credits on remanufactured
units if:
- Cooler not properly flushed, causing remanufactured ATM to fail
- Remanufactured ATM damaged due to:
- Improper handling
- Improper installation/removal
- Improper Packaging
- No trouble found/incorrect diagnosis
- Comeback repair/incorrect diagnosis
- Incomplete or missing Core Return Checklist and/or ATM Diagnosis Worksheet
Note 3:
Dealers must contact their facing PDC regarding lost packaging and paperwork.
Note 4:
Dealer Parts Department accepts full responsibility for insuring that transaxles sold over the
counter:
- Have an ATM Diagnosis Worksheet that is completely and accurately filled out
- That the ATM cooler is flushed to HMA specifications using Hyundai Transmission Cooler Flush
(part no. 00235-18100)
- Genuine Hyundai Transmission fluid (ATF+ Type 7176 or SP-II) is used to refill the ATM
NOTE:
*The ATM oil cooler and hoses must be flushed prior to installation of the replacement
remanufactured ATM. If a thorough flushing is not performed, the remanufactured ATM can be
contaminated by debris left in the cooler and hoses, resulting in shop comebacks and possible
claim chargeback.
**Diagnostic before and after readings/measurements must be recorded on the ATM Diagnosis
Worksheet whenever the ATM Tester, Scan Tool, or HDS is used. The Worksheet (canary copy)
must be retained with the shop copy of the RO. In addition, if the HDS is used, a printout of the
readings must also be retained with the shop copy of the RO.
A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Transmission Cooler: >
07-40-011 > Aug > 07 > A/T - Cooler Flushing Procedure
Transmission Cooler: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Cooler Flushing Procedure
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 07-40-011
Date: AUGUST, 2007
Model: ALL
Subject: AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE OIL COOLER FLUSHING
This bulletin revises TSB 98-40-004 to update use of alternate oil cooler flushers
DESCRIPTION
Whenever an automatic transaxle is replaced or overhauled, the oil cooler must be flushed to
remove contaminants such as metal particles and clutch material. Improper flushing may result in
severe damage to the replacement transaxle.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
WARNING:
^ Wear safety glasses and rubber gloves when flushing the oil cooler.
^ Use aerosol oil cooler flush only with adequate ventilation.
^ Avoid contact with eyes and skin.
^ Do not breathe vapors or spray mist.

1. Mark the hoses with tape or tags so they can be reconnected correctly. Disconnect the oil cooler
inlet and outlet hoses from the oil cooler tubes.
2. Insert the nozzle of the aerosol can to either hose and secure it with a hose clamp. Position the
other hose so that it discharges into a waste container.
3. Remove the protective cap. Hold the can upright and press firmly on the button to release the
solution. Flush for 15-20 seconds until clear liquid comes from the outlet hose.
4. Insert the aerosol flush to the other hose and flush in the other direction until clear liquid comes
from the outlet hose. For best results, use the entire contents of the aerosol can.
NOTE:
Clear liquid must flow freely in both directions through the oil cooler. If not, the oil cooler is clogged
with debris and must be replaced.
5. When the flush has been expelled, turn the can upside down and blow any remaining liquid out
of the cooler.
6. Reconnect the cooler hoses to the transaxle and secure with clamps.
7. Add ATF. Start the vehicle and check for leaks.
8. Check the automatic transaxle fluid (ATF) level with the engine idling in "N". Add ATF to bring
the ATF level to the top of the "FULL" mark.
NOTE:
Dispose of the waste solution in conformance with local, state and Federal regulations.
PARTS INFORMATION
98-40-005 > Aug > 98 > Remanufactured A/T- Program/Cooler Flushing
Remanufactured A/T- Program/Cooler Flushing
GROUP: TRANSAXLE
NUMBER: 98-40-005
DATE: AUGUST, 1998
Model: ALL
Subject REMANUFACTURED AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE (ATM) PROGRAM
THIS TSB HAS BEEN REVISED TO DESCRIBE A NEW FLUSHING PROCEDURE FOR THE
ATM OIL COOLER.
DESCRIPTION:
The Remanufactured Automatic Transaxle Program has been updated. Warranty policy allows for
in-dealership repairs/replacements of the following components:
^ Axle seal (leaks)
^ End clutch assembly
^ Front pump seal, 0-ring and gaskets
^ Kickdown servo
^ Oil pan (leaks)
^ Oil temperature sensor
^ Pulse generator
^ TCM and/or wiring
^ Solenoids
However, if an internal ATM mechanical condition is diagnosed, remove and replace the ATM with
a remanufactured unit. No internal disassembly of the ATM should be performed. ATM internal
overhauls require DPSM prior approval/authorization.
Note:
Second and subsequent remanufactured ATM replacements on the same VIN will require
Regional/Technical Assistance Line approval/authorization prior to performance of repair, and
DPSM approval/authorization for claim payment.
TRAINING:
Automatic Transaxle Troubleshooting and Certification Course (# 451300) provides detailed

instructions on how to properly diagnose, and when to repair or replace, an ATM. Regional
approval is necessary when installing remanufactured units if your dealership does not currently
employ a technician who has attended this course.
AFFECTED MODELS:
This program applies to all models except 1986 Excels.
SPECIAL SERVICE TOOLS:

Your dealership must have on hand the following Special Service Tools/supplies:
- Hyundai Transmission Cooler Flush (aerosol), P/N 00235-18100
- Hyundai Automatic Transaxle Tester (Kent-Moore # J39853)
- HDS
- HDS Scan Tool (Kent-Moore # J41490)
- HDS Trans-Tech Module
Diagnosis Procedure
1. Service Advisor opens a Repair Order (RO) documenting the customer's detailed complaint. A
road test by a Technician or Service Advisor may be necessary to verify the customer's description.
2. The Service Advisor carefully completes the top section of the ATM Diagnosis Worksheet.
3. The Worksheet (P/N NP150-07006) and shop copy of the RO are dispatched to the Technician.
(The remaining copies of the RO can be broken out and distributed according to established
dealership procedures).
4. Technician follows Diagnostic Flow Chart on the back of the Worksheet to help complete the
diagnosis of the ATM and to make a repair/replace decision.
5. If it is determined that a remanufactured unit must be ordered/installed, the technician must

obtain the Service Manager's approval and signature on the Worksheet.
6. If a remanufactured unit is necessary, the technician sends both the Worksheet and RO to the
Parts Department.
7. Parts Department orders remanufactured ATM from the facing PDC and retains RO and
Worksheet, filed by RO number.
8. Parts Department receives remanufactured ATM, shipped prepaid in a reusable box, and
provides ATM to Technician.
Note:
Retain reusable box and use to return removed ATM and torque converter to the remanufacturing
center.
A complete package of forms is included with each remanufactured ATM unit as shown.
- Core Return Checklist - Pre-addressed shipping label to remanufacturing center
- Bill of Lading - Installation tips
9. Parts Department completes all required fields of information on the Core Return Checklist.
Failure to do so will result in debit.
10. Technician completely drains all fluids, removes the ATM and torque converter from the
vehicle.
Note:
Do not disassemble any part of the ATM.
11. Flush the transaxle oil cooler and hoses using Hyundai Transmission Cooler Flush (part no.
00235-18100). Follow instructions in TSB # 98-40-004.
12. Install the remanufactured ATM according to the appropriate Shop Manual. Fill the ATM fluid to
the specified level using Genuine Hyundai ATF+ Type 7176 or SP-II.
13. Secure the removed torque converter to the removed ATM core using the torque converter
retaining strap and bolts removed from the remanufactured ATM unit.
14. Install all plugs removed from the remanufactured ATM unit onto the removed ATM unit before
packaging to prevent residual fluid from leaking.
15. Place the top copy of the ATM Diagnosis Worksheet and the top copy of the Core Return
Checklist into the plastic bag provided with the remanufactured ATM unit and close the envelope
securely. Enclose all needed forms and ensure they are completed and fully filled out.
Note:
Failure to properly complete and/or return the designated ATM Core Return Checklist and ATM
Diagnosis Worksheet will result in a $50.00 reduction of the core credit and/or charge back of your
warranty claim.
16. Place the removed ATM into the shipping container provided with the remanufactured ATM
(make sure that the ATM is placed in the proper direction); secure lid with retaining straps.
17. Using the address label provided with the remanufactured ATM unit, ship the removed ATM
with the Core Return Checklist.
Note:
Freight charges are paid by HMA for returning the removed ATM to the remanufacturing center, if
the enclosed bill of lading is used and ATM is shipped via HMA approved carriers. DO NOT
SUBMIT A WARRANTY CLAIM FOR THESE CHARGES.
18. The bottom copy of the Core Return Checklist is retained in the dealership's Parts Department,
filed by the repair order number indicated in the top right hand corner of the checklist.
19. The canary copy of the ATM Diagnosis Worksheet must be attached/retained with the shop
copy of the RO in the Dealership's VIN service files. Dealership must record the removed and
remanufactured ATM serial numbers on the shop copy of the RO.
20. Remanufacturing center receives the removed ATM, Core Return Checklist and ATM Diagnosis
Worksheet.
21. Remanufacturing center checks documents and sends forms to HMA.
22. Dealer is reimbursed for core ATM.

Note 1:
Second and subsequent ATM reman replacements on the same VIN will require
Regional/Technical Assistance Line approval/authorization prior to performance of the repair and
DPSM approval/authorization for claim payment
Note 2:
HMA may deny/chargeback all or portions of ATM claims and/or core credits on remanufactured
units if:
- Cooler not properly flushed, causing remanufactured ATM to fail
- Remanufactured ATM damaged due to:
- Improper handling
- Improper installation/removal
- Improper Packaging
- No trouble found/incorrect diagnosis
- Comeback repair/incorrect diagnosis
- Incomplete or missing Core Return Checklist and/or ATM Diagnosis Worksheet
Note 3:
Dealers must contact their facing PDC regarding lost packaging and paperwork.
Note 4:
Dealer Parts Department accepts full responsibility for insuring that transaxles sold over the
counter:
- Have an ATM Diagnosis Worksheet that is completely and accurately filled out
- That the ATM cooler is flushed to HMA specifications using Hyundai Transmission Cooler Flush
(part no. 00235-18100)
- Genuine Hyundai Transmission fluid (ATF+ Type 7176 or SP-II) is used to refill the ATM
NOTE:
*The ATM oil cooler and hoses must be flushed prior to installation of the replacement
remanufactured ATM. If a thorough flushing is not performed, the remanufactured ATM can be
contaminated by debris left in the cooler and hoses, resulting in shop comebacks and possible
claim chargeback.
**Diagnostic before and after readings/measurements must be recorded on the ATM Diagnosis
Worksheet whenever the ATM Tester, Scan Tool, or HDS is used. The Worksheet (canary copy)
must be retained with the shop copy of the RO. In addition, if the HDS is used, a printout of the
readings must also be retained with the shop copy of the RO.
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mount, A/T
> Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Transmission Mount: > 02-40-010 > Mar >
02 > A/T - Harsh/Delayed Gear Engagement
Transmission Mount: Customer Interest A/T - Harsh/Delayed Gear Engagement
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 02-40-010
Date: 03-2002

ENGAGEMENT
DESCRIPTION:
shown below:
REPAIR PROCEDURE:
shop manual.

^ Select F1 "GRPH".
NOTE
02 > A/T - Harsh/Delayed Gear Engagement > Page 7530
NOTE

02 > A/T - Harsh/Delayed Gear Engagement > Page 7531

> Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Transmission Mount: >
Transmission Mount: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Harsh/Delayed Gear Engagement
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 02-40-010
Date: 03-2002

ENGAGEMENT
DESCRIPTION:
shown below:
REPAIR PROCEDURE:
shop manual.

^ Select F1 "GRPH".
NOTE
NOTE


Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Position
Group TRANSAXLE
Number 09-AT-013
Date JULY, 2009

P0707, P0708
DESCRIPTION:
range switch.
PARTS INFORMATION
Service Procedure
c below.

A/T - No Movement in 'DRIVE' or 'REVERSE'

'REVERSE'
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 05-40-016
Date: OCTOBER, 2005
Model: ALL
DESCRIPTION:
shown below:
REPAIR PROCEDURE:
NOTE:


^ Vehicle
Go to Step 12.
NOTE:

Park
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 99-40-017
DESCRIPTION:
NOTE:
SERVICE PROCEDURE:
column).

module.
PARTS INFORMATION:
Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: > 09-AT-013 > Jul > 09 > A/T - MIL ON/DTC's P0705/P0707/P0708/No Start In P/N
Group TRANSAXLE
Number 09-AT-013
Date JULY, 2009

P0707, P0708
DESCRIPTION:
range switch.
PARTS INFORMATION
Page 7571
Service Procedure
c below.
Page 7572
Page 7573

Page 7574
Relearn

Relearn > Page 7579
Press "ENTER."

Relearn > Page 7580

Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: > tnt1581105-02 > Nov > 05 > A/T - No Movement In Drive/Reverse

Drive/Reverse
MODEL: ALL
DESCRIPTION:
shown below:
REPAIR PROCEDURE:
NOTE:

(10-12 Nm, 100-120 kg.cm)
(12-13 Nm, 120-130 kg.cm)

^ Vehicle
inserted.
Go to Step 12.
inserted.
NOTE:
replace the TCM.

Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: > 05-40-016 > Oct > 05 > A/T - No Movement in 'DRIVE' or 'REVERSE'

Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 05-40-016
Date: OCTOBER, 2005
Model: ALL
DESCRIPTION:
shown below:
REPAIR PROCEDURE:
NOTE:


^ Vehicle
Go to Step 12.
NOTE:

Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: > 99-40-017 > Dec > 99 > A/T - Shift Lever Will Not Shift Out Of Park
Out Of Park
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 99-40-017
DESCRIPTION:
NOTE:
SERVICE PROCEDURE:
column).

module.
PARTS INFORMATION:
Position Switch/Sensor: > tnt1720307-02 > Mar > 07 > A/T Controls - Neutral Position Switch Adaptive Relearn

7608
Press "ENTER."

7609

Position Switch/Sensor: > tnt1581105-02 > Nov > 05 > A/T - No Movement In Drive/Reverse

Drive/Reverse
MODEL: ALL
DESCRIPTION:
shown below:
REPAIR PROCEDURE:
NOTE:

(10-12 Nm, 100-120 kg.cm)
(12-13 Nm, 120-130 kg.cm)

^ Vehicle
inserted.
Go to Step 12.
inserted.
NOTE:
replace the TCM.

Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed
Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 03-40-022 > Dec > 03 > A/T -
Fail Safe Mode/Erratic/Hard Shifting/DTC's Set
Set
Number 03-40-022
Date 12-2003

P0717 & P0722
DESCRIPTION:

NOTE
REPAIR PROCEDURE:
Fail Safe Mode/Erratic/Hard Shifting/DTC's Set > Page 7628

Fail Safe Mode/Erratic/Hard Shifting/DTC's Set > Page 7629
PARTS INFORMATION
Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 00-40-011 > Aug > 00 > A/T -
Harsh Shifts, DTCs P0717/P0722 Set
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 00-40-011
Date: AUGUST, 2000

^ Harsh 1-2 shift

TCM):
Note 1:
Note 2:
SERVICE PROCEDURE:
Harsh Shifts, DTCs P0717/P0722 Set > Page 7634
Harsh Shifts, DTCs P0717/P0722 Set > Page 7635
Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 98-40-002 > Apr > 98 > A/T -
Intermittent Delayed, Erratic, Harsh Shifting
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 98-40-002
Date: APRIL, 1998
Model: ALL
DESCRIPTION:
^ Harsh 1-2 shift
(TCM):
Note 1:
codes.
Note 2:
PG-B.

SERVICE PROCEDURE:

Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 98-40-002 > Apr > 98 > A/T -
Intermittent Delayed, Erratic, Harsh Shifting > Page 7640
Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 03-40-022 > Dec >
03 > A/T - Fail Safe Mode/Erratic/Hard Shifting/DTC's Set
Shifting/DTC's Set
Number 03-40-022
Date 12-2003

P0717 & P0722
DESCRIPTION:

NOTE
REPAIR PROCEDURE:

PARTS INFORMATION
Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 00-40-011 > Aug >
00 > A/T - Harsh Shifts, DTCs P0717/P0722 Set
P0717/P0722 Set
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 00-40-011
Date: AUGUST, 2000

^ Harsh 1-2 shift

TCM):
Note 1:
Note 2:
SERVICE PROCEDURE:
00 > A/T - Harsh Shifts, DTCs P0717/P0722 Set > Page 7652
00 > A/T - Harsh Shifts, DTCs P0717/P0722 Set > Page 7653
Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 98-40-002 > Apr >
98 > A/T - Intermittent Delayed, Erratic, Harsh Shifting
Harsh Shifting
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 98-40-002
Date: APRIL, 1998
Model: ALL
DESCRIPTION:
^ Harsh 1-2 shift
(TCM):
Note 1:
codes.
Note 2:
PG-B.

SERVICE PROCEDURE:

Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 98-40-002 > Apr >
98 > A/T - Intermittent Delayed, Erratic, Harsh Shifting > Page 7658
Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 97-40-025-1 > Aug
> 97 > A/T - Driveability Concerns/DTC's Set/MIL ON
Set/MIL ON
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 97-40-025-1
Date: August, 1997
Model: ALL
DESCRIPTION:
^ Harsh 1-2 shift
Note 1:
*Fail-safe code
Note 2:
(DLC).
> 97 > A/T - Driveability Concerns/DTC's Set/MIL ON > Page 7663
SERVICE PROCEDURE:
B) Test Procedure:
> 97 > A/T - Driveability Concerns/DTC's Set/MIL ON > Page 7664
shielded wiring.

Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Transmission Speed
Sensor: > 99-40-017 > Dec > 99 > A/T - Shift Lever Will Not Shift Out Of Park
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 99-40-017
DESCRIPTION:
NOTE:
SERVICE PROCEDURE:
column).

module.
PARTS INFORMATION:
module.
PARTS INFORMATION:
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission
Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for
Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch: > 04-40-016 > Sep > 04 > A/T - MIL ON/Shift Flare/Harsh Engagement/DTC's
Set

Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 04-40-016
ELANTRA
DESCRIPTION:
REPAIR PROCEDURE.
necessary.
Set > Page 7689
sensor.
Set > Page 7690
PARTS INFORMATION:
Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch: > 03-40-015 > Aug > 03 > A/T - 2nd - 3rd Gear Shift Flare/Shudder
Flare/Shudder
Group TRANSAXLE
Number 03-40-015
Date AUGUST, 2003
Model ALL
DESCRIPTION:
1. CHECK ATF LEVEL:
70-100°C).

Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch: > 03-40-015 > Aug > 03 > A/T - 2nd - 3rd Gear Shift Flare/Shudder > Page 7695

Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch: > 02-40-007 > Feb > 02 > A/T - Torque Converter Clutch Malfunctions

Malfunctions
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 02-40-007
Model: ALL
DESCRIPTION:
shown below:
REPAIR PROCEDURE:
Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch: > 02-40-007 > Feb > 02 > A/T - Torque Converter Clutch Malfunctions > Page
7700
shown.
Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch: > 02-40-007 > Feb > 02 > A/T - Torque Converter Clutch Malfunctions > Page
7701
the condition:
NOTE:
Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch: > 00-40-010 > Aug > 00 > A/T - MIL ON DTCs P0712/P0713 Set
Set
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 00-40-010
Date: AUGUST, 2000
Model: ALL
^ MIL illuminated
symptoms:
^ MIL illuminated
Procedure.
REPAIR PROCEDURE:
^ No DTC-gotostep4
Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch: > 00-40-010 > Aug > 00 > A/T - MIL ON DTCs P0712/P0713 Set > Page 7706
PARTS INFORMATION:
Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins
for Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch: > 04-40-016 > Sep > 04 > A/T - MIL ON/Shift Flare/Harsh
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 04-40-016
ELANTRA
DESCRIPTION:
REPAIR PROCEDURE.
necessary.
sensor.
PARTS INFORMATION:
for Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch: > 03-40-015 > Aug > 03 > A/T - 2nd - 3rd Gear Shift Flare/Shudder
Shift Flare/Shudder
Group TRANSAXLE
Number 03-40-015
Date AUGUST, 2003
Model ALL
DESCRIPTION:
1. CHECK ATF LEVEL:
70-100°C).

for Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch: > 03-40-015 > Aug > 03 > A/T - 2nd - 3rd Gear Shift Flare/Shudder > Page
7718

for Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch: > 02-40-007 > Feb > 02 > A/T - Torque Converter Clutch Malfunctions
Clutch Malfunctions
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 02-40-007
Model: ALL
DESCRIPTION:
shown below:
REPAIR PROCEDURE:
for Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch: > 02-40-007 > Feb > 02 > A/T - Torque Converter Clutch Malfunctions >
Page 7723
shown.
for Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch: > 02-40-007 > Feb > 02 > A/T - Torque Converter Clutch Malfunctions >
Page 7724
the condition:
NOTE:
for Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch: > 00-40-010 > Aug > 00 > A/T - MIL ON DTCs P0712/P0713 Set
P0712/P0713 Set
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 00-40-010
Date: AUGUST, 2000
Model: ALL
^ MIL illuminated
symptoms:
^ MIL illuminated
Procedure.
REPAIR PROCEDURE:
^ No DTC-gotostep4
for Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch: > 00-40-010 > Aug > 00 > A/T - MIL ON DTCs P0712/P0713 Set > Page
7729
PARTS INFORMATION:
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T >
Valve Body: Specifications
Valve Body Bolt 4 - 6 Nm
Assembly Mounting Bolt 10 - 12 Nm
Manual Control Lever Lock Nut 17 - 21 Nm
Manual Control Shaft Set Screw 8 - 10 Nm

Component Information > Service and Repair > Disassembly
Valve Body: Service and Repair Disassembly
1. Remove the four solenoid valves and the oil temperature sensor bracket.
Component Information > Service and Repair > Disassembly > Page 7736
2. Remove the manual valve.
3. Remove the valve stopper and clamp.
4. Remove the bolts (15), and then remove the lower valve body.
5. Remove the separating plate.
6. Remove the relief spring, two steel balls and oil filter from the intermediate plate.
7. Remove the bolts (7), and then remove the intermediate plate and the upper separation plate.
8. Remove the block.
9. Remove the upper separating plate.
10. Remove, from the upper valve body, the three steel balls, the teflon ball, two stopper plates and
the N-D plate. 11. Remove, from the upper valve body, the seven bolts; then remove the front end
cover and the adjustment screw.
CAUTION: When removing the bolts, be sure to firmly press the front end cover (as shown in the
illustration) so as to prevent the spring from causing the adjustment screw to pop out.
12. Remove the pressure control spring and the pressure control valve.
13. Remove the torque converter control spring and the torque converter control valve.
14. Remove the regulator spring and the regulator valve.
15. Remove the shift-control spring and shift-control plug A.
16. Remove rear clutch exhaust valves A and B as well as the rear clutch exhaust spring.
17. Remove the 2-3/4-3 shift spring and the shift valve.
18. Remove, from the rear side of the upper valve body, the N-D control sleeve and the N-D control
valve.
19. Remove the four bolts, and then remove the rear end cover.
20. Remove the 1-2 shift spring and the 1-2 shift valve.
21. Remove shift-control plug B.

22. Remove the shift-control valve.
23. Using a magnet, extract the pin from the lower valve body, and then remove the stopper.
24. Remove the end clutch valve plug, end clutch spring, and end clutch valve.
25. Remove the three bolts from the lower valve body, and then remove the end cover, adjustment
screw, and reducing spring.
26. Remove the reducing valve.

27. Remove the N-R control/accumulator valve and the N-R control/accumulator spring.
28. Remove the damper clutch control sleeve, damper clutch control valve, and the damper clutch
control spring.
Valve Body: Service and Repair Assembly

VALVE INSTALLATION POSITIONS
Upper Valve Body

Lower Valve Body
ASSEMBLY
1. Install in the lower valve body, the damper clutch control spring, damper clutch control valve, and
the damper clutch control sleeve.
2. Install the N-R control/accumulator spring and the N-R control/ accumulator valve.
3. Install the reducing valve.
4. Install the reducing spring, adjustment screw, and end cover. Tighten the bolts to the specified
torque.
Tightening torque: 4-6 Nm (36-48 inch lbs.).
5. Install the end clutch valve, end clutch spring, and end clutch plug.
6. Install the stopper and secure it with the pin.
7. Install the shift-control valve to the upper valve body.

8. Install the shift-control plug B.
9. Install the 1-2 shift valve and 1-2 shift spring.
10. Install the rear end cover.
11. Install the N-D control valve and the N-D control sleeve.
12. Install the 2-3/4-3 shift valve and the 2-3/4-3 shift spring.
13. Install the rear clutch exhaust spring and rear clutch exhaust valves A and B.
14. Install the shift-control plug A and shift control spring.
15. Install the regulator valve and regulator spring.
16. Install the torque converter control valve and torque converter control spring.
17. Install the pressure control valve and pressure control spring.
18. Install the adjustment screw and front end cover. Tighten the bolts to the specified torque.
19. Install, in the upper valve body, the three steel balls, the teflon ball, two stopper plate and N-D
plate.
20. Install the upper separating plate.
21. Install the block.
22. Install special tool (09456-21000) or equivalent. Then, securing the upper separating plate and
the intermediate plate with the eight installation
bolts, remove the special tool.

23. Install to the intermediate plate, the oil filter, the two steel balls, and the spring.
24. Install special tool (09456-21000) or equivalent to the intermediate plate.
25. Install the separating plate.
26. After securing the lower valve body using the 15 installation bolts, remove the special tool.
27. Install the valve stopper and clamp.

28. Install the manual valve.
29. Secure the four solenoid valves using the installation bolts.
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Wiring Harness, A/T >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Wiring Harness: > 05-40-016 > Oct > 05 > A/T
- No Movement in 'DRIVE' or 'REVERSE'
Wiring Harness: Customer Interest A/T - No Movement in 'DRIVE' or 'REVERSE'
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 05-40-016
Date: OCTOBER, 2005
Model: ALL
DESCRIPTION:
shown below:
REPAIR PROCEDURE:
NOTE:

- No Movement in 'DRIVE' or 'REVERSE' > Page 7759

^ Vehicle
Go to Step 12.
NOTE:

Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 05-40-016 >
Oct > 05 > A/T - No Movement in 'DRIVE' or 'REVERSE'
Wiring Harness: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T - No Movement in 'DRIVE' or 'REVERSE'
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 05-40-016
Date: OCTOBER, 2005
Model: ALL
DESCRIPTION:
shown below:
REPAIR PROCEDURE:
NOTE:


^ Vehicle
Go to Step 12.
NOTE:

Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Disc, M/T > Component Information >
Application and ID
Clutch Disc: Application and ID
GENERAL INFORMATION
Type: Single Dry With Diaphragm Clutch Facing Diameter (Outside x Inside): 200 mm x 130 mm
(7.9 inch x 5.1 inch)
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Hydraulic System > Clutch Fluid >
Clutch Fluid: Specifications
Specified Fluid SAE J1703 DOT 3 Brake Fluid

Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Hydraulic System > Clutch Fluid >
Clutch Fluid: Service and Repair
NOTE: Whenever the clutch tube, the clutch hose and/or the clutch master cylinder have been
removed, or if the clutch pedal is spongy, bleed the system.
CAUTION: Use the specified fluid, SAE J1703 (DOT 3). Avoid mixing different brands of fluids.
1. Loosen the bleeder screw at the clutch release cylinder. 2. Push the clutch pedal down slowly
until all air is expelled. 3. Hold the clutch pedal down until the bleeder is retightened. 4. Refill the
clutch master cylinder with the specified fluid.
CAUTION: The rapidly-repeated operation of the clutch pedal in B-C range may cause the release
cylinders position to be forced out from the release cylinder body during the air bleeding, repress
the clutch pedal after it returns to the "A" point completely.
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Hydraulic System > Clutch Master
Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 96400121 > Aug > 96 > M/T -
Clutch Drag
Clutch Master Cylinder: Customer Interest M/T - Clutch Drag
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 96-40-012-1
Date: AUGUST, 1996
Model: ACCENT
Subject ACCENT CLUTCH DRAG
This TSB supersedes TSB 9640-012 and includes a new repair procedure.
DESCRIPTION:
Some Accent vehicles that were produced between October, 1994 and November 6, 1995 may
experience clutch drag. This condition may be caused by a restriction in the hydraulic line from
grease used during assembly of the clutch master cylinder. Effective with November 6, 1995
production, the assembly procedure has been changed to correct this condition.
Note:
^ There is no need to replace the clutch master cylinder to correct the above condition.
^ This condition may also occur during long term storage.
SERVICE PROCEDURES:
1. Disconnect the clutch fluid tube at the clutch release cylinder.
2. Drain the master cylinder fluid through this connection while pumping the clutch pedal slowly.
3. Remove the master cylinder.
4. On a workbench, disassemble the master cylinder. Remove the piston and spring from the body.
5. Remove the spring, spring seat, and black valve from the piston assembly. Carefully wash the
piston and valve in brake fluid or brake cleaner. Using caution, blow dry with air.
6. Assemble the valve, spring seat and the spring onto the piston assembly. Reassemble the
master cylinder by coating the piston seals with brake fluid and inserting the piston in the cylinder.
Insert the piston retaining screw and tighten.
Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 96400121 > Aug > 96 > M/T -
Clutch Drag > Page 7789
7. Re-Install the master cylinder assembly.
8. Add clutch fluid in the clutch master cylinder and repeat step 2 for additional cleaning.
9. Reconnect the clutch tube to the clutch release cylinder.
10. Fill the clutch master cylinder with specified clutch fluid, SAE J1703 (DOT 3), and air bleed the
hydraulic system using the procedure outlined in the shop manual.
AFFECTED VEHICLES:
Accent vehicles produced between October, 1994 to November 6, 1995.
EFFECTIVE VIN: KMHVD14N1TU116916
Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Clutch Master
Cylinder: > 04-40-017 > Oct > 04 > M/T - Clutch Master Cylinder/Tube Updated
Clutch Master Cylinder: All Technical Service Bulletins M/T - Clutch Master Cylinder/Tube Updated
Group: CLUTCH
Number: 04-40-017
Date: OCTOBER, 2004
Model: ACCENT
Subject CHANGE OF CLUTCH MASTER ASSEMBLY
DESCRIPTION:
A new style clutch master cylinder has been applied in production beginning on September 16,
2003. This bulletin provides information about the previous and new style components.
Cylinder: > 04-40-017 > Oct > 04 > M/T - Clutch Master Cylinder/Tube Updated > Page 7795
PARTS INFORMATION:
Normal warranty policies and procedures apply.
INTERCHANGABILITY:
Cylinder: > 98-40-009 > Sep > 98 > Clutch Master Cylinder Service Parts
Clutch Master Cylinder: All Technical Service Bulletins Clutch Master Cylinder Service Parts
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 98-40-009
Model: 95-98 ACCENT
Subject CLUTCH MASTER CYLINDER
SERVICE PARTS
DESCRIPTION:
Beginning with the October 14, 1997 production, Accent models are equipped with a "G" type
clutch master cylinder. The "G" type clutch master cylinder is interchangeable with the previous "N"
type clutch master cylinder. This TSB provides interchangeability information.
PARTS INFORMATION:
Cylinder: > 96400121 > Aug > 96 > M/T - Clutch Drag
Clutch Master Cylinder: All Technical Service Bulletins M/T - Clutch Drag
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 96-40-012-1
Date: AUGUST, 1996
Model: ACCENT
Subject ACCENT CLUTCH DRAG
This TSB supersedes TSB 9640-012 and includes a new repair procedure.
DESCRIPTION:
Some Accent vehicles that were produced between October, 1994 and November 6, 1995 may
experience clutch drag. This condition may be caused by a restriction in the hydraulic line from
grease used during assembly of the clutch master cylinder. Effective with November 6, 1995
production, the assembly procedure has been changed to correct this condition.
Note:
^ There is no need to replace the clutch master cylinder to correct the above condition.
^ This condition may also occur during long term storage.
SERVICE PROCEDURES:
1. Disconnect the clutch fluid tube at the clutch release cylinder.
2. Drain the master cylinder fluid through this connection while pumping the clutch pedal slowly.
3. Remove the master cylinder.
4. On a workbench, disassemble the master cylinder. Remove the piston and spring from the body.
5. Remove the spring, spring seat, and black valve from the piston assembly. Carefully wash the
piston and valve in brake fluid or brake cleaner. Using caution, blow dry with air.
6. Assemble the valve, spring seat and the spring onto the piston assembly. Reassemble the
master cylinder by coating the piston seals with brake fluid and inserting the piston in the cylinder.
Insert the piston retaining screw and tighten.
Cylinder: > 96400121 > Aug > 96 > M/T - Clutch Drag > Page 7804
7. Re-Install the master cylinder assembly.
8. Add clutch fluid in the clutch master cylinder and repeat step 2 for additional cleaning.
9. Reconnect the clutch tube to the clutch release cylinder.
10. Fill the clutch master cylinder with specified clutch fluid, SAE J1703 (DOT 3), and air bleed the
hydraulic system using the procedure outlined in the shop manual.
AFFECTED VEHICLES:
Accent vehicles produced between October, 1994 to November 6, 1995.
EFFECTIVE VIN: KMHVD14N1TU116916
Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Clutch Master Cylinder: >
04-40-017 > Oct > 04 > M/T - Clutch Master Cylinder/Tube Updated
Clutch Master Cylinder: All Technical Service Bulletins M/T - Clutch Master Cylinder/Tube Updated
Group: CLUTCH
Number: 04-40-017
Date: OCTOBER, 2004
Model: ACCENT
DESCRIPTION:
04-40-017 > Oct > 04 > M/T - Clutch Master Cylinder/Tube Updated > Page 7810
PARTS INFORMATION:
INTERCHANGABILITY:
98-40-009 > Sep > 98 > Clutch Master Cylinder Service Parts
Clutch Master Cylinder: All Technical Service Bulletins Clutch Master Cylinder Service Parts
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 98-40-009
Model: 95-98 ACCENT
Subject CLUTCH MASTER CYLINDER
SERVICE PARTS
DESCRIPTION:
Beginning with the October 14, 1997 production, Accent models are equipped with a "G" type
clutch master cylinder. The "G" type clutch master cylinder is interchangeable with the previous "N"
type clutch master cylinder. This TSB provides interchangeability information.
PARTS INFORMATION:
Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7815
Clutch Master Cylinder: Service and Repair

DISASSEMBLY
1. Remove the reservoir band, reservoir tank and reservoir cap. 2. Remove the piston stop ring. 3.
Pull out the push rod and piston assembly.
NOTE: Do not damage the master cylinder body and piston assembly.
INSPECTION
1. Check the inside of cylinder body for rust, pitting or scoring. 2. Check the piston cup for wear or
distortion. 3. Check the piston for rust, pitting or scoring. 4. Check the clutch tube line for clogged.
5. Measure the master cylinder inside diameter with a cylinder gauge and the piston outside
diameter with a micrometer.
NOTE: Measure the inside diameter of the master cylinder at three places (bottom, middle, and
top), in perpendicular directions.
6. If the master cylinder-to-piston clearance exceeds the limit, replace the master cylinder and/or
piston assembly.
Limit: 0.15 mm (0.006 inch)
ASSEMBLY
1. Apply the specified fluid, BRAKE FLUID DOT 3, to the inner surface of the cylinder body and to
the entire periphery of the piston assembly.
2. Install the piston assembly. 3. Install the piston stop ring. 4. Install the push rod assembly.
5. Install the reservoir band, reservoir tank, and reservoir cap.

Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Hydraulic System > Clutch Slave
Cylinder > Component Information > Diagrams
Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Replacement
Clutch Slave Cylinder: Service and Repair Replacement
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect the clutch tube. 2. Remove the clutch release cylinder mounting bolt.
INSPECTION
1. Check the clutch release cylinder for fluid leakage. 2. Check the clutch release cylinder boots for
damage.
INSTALLATION
1. Coat the push rod surface with the specified grease, MOLYWHITE TA No. 2.
Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Replacement > Page 7823
2. Install the clutch release cylinder and the clutch tube.

Clutch Slave Cylinder: Service and Repair Overhaul
DISASSEMBLY
1. Remove the clutch hose, valve plate, spring, push rod and boot. 2. Remove any dirt from the
piston bore opening of the release cylinder.
3. Remove the piston from the release cylinder using compressed air.
CAUTION:
- Cover with rags to prevent the piston from popping out and causing injury.
- Apply compressed air slowly to prevent the fluid from splashing in your eyes or on your skin.
INSPECTION
1. Check the release cylinder bore for rust and damage. 2. Check the clutch release cylinder for
fluid leakage. 3. Check the clutch release cylinder for boots for damage.
4. Measure the release cylinder bore at three locations (bottom, middle and top) with a cylinder
gauge and replace the release cylinder assembly if the
bore to piston clearance exceeds the limit of 0.15 mm (0.006 inch).
ASSEMBLY
1. Apply the specified brake fluid, Brake fluid DOT 3, to the release cylinder bore and the outer
surface of the piston and piston cup, and push the
piston cup assembly into the cylinder.
2. Install the clutch hose, valve plate, spring, push rod and boot.
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Hydraulic System > Hydraulic Hose,
Clutch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > M/T - Clutch Master Cylinder/Tube Updated
Hydraulic Hose: Technical Service Bulletins M/T - Clutch Master Cylinder/Tube Updated
Group: CLUTCH
Number: 04-40-017
Date: OCTOBER, 2004

Model: ACCENT
DESCRIPTION:
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Hydraulic System > Hydraulic Hose,
Clutch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > M/T - Clutch Master Cylinder/Tube Updated > Page 7830
PARTS INFORMATION:
INTERCHANGABILITY:
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Pedal Assembly > Component
Clutch Pedal Assembly: Testing and Inspection
INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT
1. Measure the clutch pedal clevis pin play (measured at the face of the pedal pad.)
Standard Value (A): 1-3 mm (0.04-0.11 inch).
2. If the clutch pedal clevis pin free-pray is not within the standard value range, adjust as follows:
a. Turn and adjust the bolt, then secure by tightening the lock nut.
NOTE: After the adjustment, tighten the bolt until it reaches the pedal stopper, and then tighten the
lock nut.
b. Turn the push rod to agree with the standard value and then secure the push rod with the lock
nut.
CAUTION: When adjusting the clutch pedal clevis pin play, be careful not to push the push rod
toward the master cylinder.
3. After completing the adjustments, check that the clutch pedal free play (measured at the face of
the pedal pad) and the distance between the clutch
pedal (the face of the pedal pad) and the floor board when the clutch is disengaged, are within the
standard value ranges. Standard Value:
(B): 6-13 mm (0.2-0.52 inch). (C): 90 mm (2.8 inch).
4. If the clutch pedal free play and the distance between the clutch pedal and the floor board when
the clutch is disengaged do not meet with the
standard values, it may be the result of either air in the hydraulic system or a faulty master cylinder
of clutch. Bleed the air, or disassemble and inspect the master cylinder of clutch.
Clutch Pedal Assembly: Adjustments
INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT
1. Measure the clutch pedal clevis pin play (measured at the face of the pedal pad.)
Standard Value (A): 1-3 mm (0.04-0.11 inch).
2. If the clutch pedal clevis pin free-pray is not within the standard value range, adjust as follows:
a. Turn and adjust the bolt, then secure by tightening the lock nut.
NOTE: After the adjustment, tighten the bolt until it reaches the pedal stopper, and then tighten the
lock nut.
b. Turn the push rod to agree with the standard value and then secure the push rod with the lock
nut.
CAUTION: When adjusting the clutch pedal clevis pin play, be careful not to push the push rod
toward the master cylinder.
3. After completing the adjustments, check that the clutch pedal free play (measured at the face of
the pedal pad) and the distance between the clutch
pedal (the face of the pedal pad) and the floor board when the clutch is disengaged, are within the
standard value ranges. Standard Value:
(B): 6-13 mm (0.2-0.52 inch). (C): 90 mm (2.8 inch).
4. If the clutch pedal free play and the distance between the clutch pedal and the floor board when
the clutch is disengaged do not meet with the
standard values, it may be the result of either air in the hydraulic system or a faulty master cylinder
of clutch. Bleed the air, or disassemble and inspect the master cylinder of clutch.
Clutch Pedal Assembly: Service and Repair

REMOVAL
1. Remove the cotter pin, washer and clevis pin. 2. Remove the clutch pedal mounting bolt.
INSPECTION
1. Check the pedal shaft and bushing for wear. 2. Check the clutch pedal for bending or twisting. 3.
Check the return spring for damage or deterioration. 4. Check the pedal pad for damage or wear.
Ignition Lock Switch Inspection
INSTALLATION
1. Installation is reverse of removal.
2. Apply multipurpose grease to the bushings.
3. Apply the multipurpose grease to the clevis pin and washer. 4. Install the push rod to the clutch
pedal. 5. Adjust the clutch pedal clevis pin play.
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Pressure Plate > Component Information >
Specifications
Pressure Plate: Specifications
Clutch Cover Assembly
Type Diaphragm Spring Strap
Setting Load 3.300 N
Diaphragm Spring End Height Difference 0.5 mm
Clutch Cover Assembly 15 - 22 Nm

Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Seals and Gaskets, Differential >
System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Seals and Gaskets: > 06-40-012 > Jul > 06 >
Drivetrain - Oil Leaks From Differential Seals
Seals and Gaskets: Customer Interest Drivetrain - Oil Leaks From Differential Seals
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 06-40-012
Date: JULY, 2006
Model: ALL
Subject: OIL LEAK FROM DIFFERENTIAL OIL SEALS
DESCRIPTION:
An oil leak from the differential oil seals or other sources may collect on the underside of the
automatic transaxle near the joint between the torque converter housing and case housing. The oil
residue may give the appearance of an oil leak at the joint.
NOTE:
Follow the repair procedure below before making a repair decision.
REPAIR PROCEDURE:
1. Use a shop rag and solvent to remove the oil residue from the bottom of the transaxle.
2. Using a shop light, carefully check for oil leakage from the differential oil seals and other
locations on the transaxle.
3. If the source of the oil leak is not conclusive, add a tracer dye to the automatic transaxle fluid
and allow the engine to run at idle in Park for 10-20 minutes. Use a black light to check for oil
leakage from the differential oil seals and other locations on the transaxle. The dye and black light
are available from parts stores or SPX:
^ SPX Universal black light, # J-28428-100A or equivalent
^ SPX Tracer dye, # J28431-6 or equivalent
4. Refer to the appropriate shop manual and repair the oil leak. Test drive the vehicle and confirm
no oil leaks occur.
System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Seals and Gaskets: > 06-40-012 > Jul > 06 >
Drivetrain - Oil Leaks From Differential Seals > Page 7850
PARTS INFORMATION
System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seals and Gaskets: > 06-40-012 > Jul
> 06 > Drivetrain - Oil Leaks From Differential Seals
Seals and Gaskets: All Technical Service Bulletins Drivetrain - Oil Leaks From Differential Seals
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 06-40-012
Date: JULY, 2006
Model: ALL
DESCRIPTION:
NOTE:
REPAIR PROCEDURE:
no oil leaks occur.
System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seals and Gaskets: > 06-40-012 > Jul
> 06 > Drivetrain - Oil Leaks From Differential Seals > Page 7856
PARTS INFORMATION
System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seals and Gaskets: > Page 7857
Seals and Gaskets: By Symptom
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 06-40-012
Date: JULY, 2006
Model: ALL
DESCRIPTION:
NOTE:
REPAIR PROCEDURE:
no oil leaks occur.
PARTS INFORMATION
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 06-40-012
Date: JULY, 2006
Model: ALL
DESCRIPTION:
NOTE:
REPAIR PROCEDURE:
no oil leaks occur.
PARTS INFORMATION
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly >
Constant Velocity Joint > Component Information > Application and ID
Constant Velocity Joint: Application and ID
GENERAL INFORMATION
Joint Type
Outer: Birfield Joint (B.J.) Inner: Tripod Joint (T.J.)
Maximum Permissible Joint Angle
B.J.: 45° or more T.J.: 22.5° or more

Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Bearing >
Wheel Bearing: Specifications Wheel Bearing Lubricant
Wheel Bearing Lubricant
SAE J310a Multi-purpose grease NLGI-2 or equivalent

Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview
Wheel Bearing: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview
WHEEL BEARING END PLAY INSPECTION
1. Inspect the play of the bearings while the vehicle is jacked up and resting on floor jack. 2. If there
is any play, remove the hub cap and then release the parking brake. 3. Remove the caliper
assembly and the brake disc.
4. Check the bearing's end play by doing the following. Place a dial gauge against the hub surface,
then move the hub in the axial direction and check
whether or not there is end play. The service limit is 0 to 0.022 mm (0 to 0.00086 inch) or less.
5. If the end play exceeds the limit, the rear wheel bearing nut should be tightened to the specified
torque and then check the end play again. 6. Replace the rear hub bearing unit if an adjustment
cannot be made within the limit.
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7871
Component Information > Service and Repair > Front
Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Front
BEARING REPLACEMENT
1. Install the special tools as illustrated. 2. Remove the hub from the knuckle by turning the special
tool.
CAUTION:
a. Be sure to use the special tool. b. If the hub and knuckle are disassembled by striking with a
hammer, the bearing will be damaged.
3. Secure the knuckle in a vise. 4. Remove the brake disc from the hub.
5. Remove the outer bearing inner race from the hub using special tools (09532-11000,
09532-11301, 09517-21100) or equivalents. 6. Remove the oil seal and inner bearing inner race
from the knuckle.
7. Drive out the bearing outer races from the knuckle using the special tools.
CAUTION: If either the outer or inner race needs replacement, they must be replaced as a set.
8. Apply the specified multipurpose grease to the outside surface of the bearing outer race.

Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 7874
9. Install the bearing outer race into the knuckle with Special Tools (09500-21000, 09517-21000,
09517-21200) or equivalents.
10. Install the disc to the hub, and torque to specification.
Disc to hub: 50-60 Nm (37-44 ft. lbs.).
11. Apply the specified multipurpose grease to the bearings and inside surface of the hub.
12. Place the outside bearing inner race into the knuckle.
13. Drive the oil seal (hub side) into the knuckle with the special tools. 14. Apply the specified
multipurpose grease to the lip of the oil seal and to the surfaces of the oil seal which contact the
hub.
15. Place the inner bearing into the knuckle.
16. Tighten the hub to the knuckle to 230 Nm (167 ft. lbs.) with the Special Tool (09517-21500) or
equivalent. 17. Rotate the hub to seat the bearing.
18. Measure the hub bearing starting torque.
Hub bearing starting torque [limit]: 1.3 Nm (11 inch lbs.) or less.
19. If the starting torque is O Nm (O inch lbs.), measure the hub bearing axial play.
20. If the hub axial play exceeds the limit of 0.11 mm (0.0043 inch) or less while the nut is tightened
to 235 Nm (167 ft. lbs.), the bearing, hub and
knuckle have not been installed correctly. Repeat the disassembly and assembly procedure.
21. Remove the special tool. 22. Apply the specified multipurpose grease to the bearing and to the
inside of the knuckle.
Recommended Grease: SAE J310a, multipurpose grease, NLGI No. 2 or equivalent.
23. Drive the oil seal (drive shaft side) into the knuckle until it contacts the bearing outer race using
special tools. 24. Apply the specified multipurpose grease to the lip of the oil seal. 25. Install the
parts to the torque specifications. 26. Lower the vehicle to the ground and tighten the knuckle to the
lower arm ball joint connecting bolt.
Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Rear
DISASSEMBLY
1. Jack up the rear of the vehicle and support it on jack stands. 2. Remove the wheel and tire. 3.
Remove the brake drum.
4. Remove the rear hub assembly.
NOTE: The rear hub unit bearing should not be dismantled.
5. After removing the hub assembly,check the oil seal for crack or damage, then also check the
hub bearing unit to see if there is any wear or damage,
and check the rotor for chipped teeth.
ASSEMBLY
1. After tightening the wheel bearing nut, crimp the nut to meet the concave portion of the spindle.
2. Install the hub cap.
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Hub > Axle Nut >
Axle Nut: Specifications
Front Axle Nut Torque 200 - 260 Nm
Rear Wheel Bearing Nut Torque 180 - 220 Nm

Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Flex Plate > Component Information > Specifications
Flex Plate: Specifications
Drive Plate A/T Bolt 130 - 140 Nm

Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Flex Plate > Component Information > Specifications > Page
7884
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Flex Plate > Component Information > Specifications > Page
7885
Flex Plate: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
NOTE: Refer to illustration during removal and installation procedures.
1. Remove the transaxle. 2. Remove the drive plate.
INSTALLATION
Installation is the reverse of removal, noting the following:
Tighten the drive plate bolts to 130-140 Nm (1300-1400 kg.cm, 94-101 ft. lbs.)
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Flywheel > Component Information > Specifications
Flywheel: Specifications
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Flywheel > Component Information > Specifications > Page
7889
7890
Flywheel: Testing and Inspection
1. Check the clutch disc contacting surface of the flywheel for damage and wear. Replace the
flywheel if excessively damaged or worn. 2. Check the clutch disc contacting surface of the
flywheel for runout.
Standard Value:
Flywheel run-out: 0.1 mm (0.004 inch)
3. Check the ring gear for damage, crack and wear, and replace if necessary.
7891
Flywheel: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
NOTE: Refer to illustration during removal and installation procedures.
1. Remove the transaxle and clutch. 2. Remove the flywheel.
INSTALLATION
Installation is the reverse of removal, noting the following:
Tighten the flywheel bolts to 130-140 Nm (1300-1400 kg.cm, 96-101 ft. lbs.)
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Differential, Manual
Transaxle > Component Information > Specifications
Differential: Specifications

Differential Rear Bearing End Play M5BF1 Model Only 0.20 T - 0.25 T mm
Gear Backlash In Differential M5BF1 Model Only 0.025 - 0.150 mm
Rear Bearing End Play M5AF3 Model Only 0.05 L - 0.17 L mm
Gear Backlash In Differential M5AF3 Model Only 0.025 - 0.150 mm
Drive Gear Bolt 130 - 140 Nm
Bearing Retainer Bolt 15 - 22 Nm

Transaxle > Component Information > Specifications > Page 7896
Differential: Service and Repair
DISASSEMBLY
1. Clamp the differential case in a vise. 2. Remove the differential drive gear retaining bolts and
remove the differential drive gear from the case.
3. Remove the ball bearing using special tool (09432-21000) or equivalent.

CAUTION: Do not reuse the bearing removed from the shaft.
4. Drive out the lock pin from the hole A using a punch. 5. Drive out the pinion shaft. 6. Remove the
pinion gears, washers, side gears and spacers.
ASSEMBLY
1. Install the spacer on the back of the side gear and then install the gear in the differential case.
CAUTION: When installing a new side gear, use a spacer of medium thickness [0.93-1.00 mm
(0.0366-0.0394 inch)].
2. Set the washer on the back of each pinion and insert the two pinions to specified position while
engaging them with the side gears by turning them. 3. Inset the pinion shaft.
4. Measure the backlash between the side gears and pinions.
5. If the backlash is out of specification, disassemble and install the correct spacer, reassemble
and remeasure.
CAUTION: Adjust the backlash of both side gears to the same specification.
6. Align the pinion shaft lock pin hole with the case lock pin hole and insert the lock pin.
CAUTION: -
Do not reuse the lock pin.
- The lock pin head must be sunk below the flange surface of the differential case.
7. Install the ball bearings on both sides of the differential case using special tool (09455-21100) or
equivalent.
CAUTION: When press-fitting the bearing, press on the inner race only.
8. Apply specified sealant to the entire threads of the bolts. Tighten to specifications using the
illustration.
Specified sealant: BM stud locking No. 2471 or equivalent.

Differential drive gear tightening torque: 130-140 Nm (94-101 ft. lbs.).
CAUTION: If a bolt is reused, remove the old sealant from the threads.
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - M/T > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > M/T - Gear Lubricant Applications/Interchangeability
Fluid - M/T: Technical Service Bulletins M/T - Gear Lubricant Applications/Interchangeability
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 05-40-007-1
Date: JULY, 2005
Model: ALL
Subject MANUAL TRANSAXLE GEAR LUBRICANT
This TSB supersedes TSB # 05-40-007 to update part number information.
DESCRIPTION:
A new 75W/85 manual transaxle gear lubricant has been adopted in production. The purpose of
this bulletin is to provide the following information: ^
Vehicle model, transaxle type and production release date information
^ Previous and new gear lubricant part number information
^ Gear lubricant interchangeability information
The TABLE provides the application information for the new 75W/85, gear lubricant.
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > M/T - Gear Lubricant Applications/Interchangeability > Page 7905
PARTS INFORMATION:
Fluid - M/T: Capacity Specifications
Transmission Fluid ..............................................................................................................................

......................................................................... 2.3 Qt
Fluid - M/T: Fluid Type Specifications
API classification .................................................................................................................................

.......................................................................... GL-4 Viscosity ..........................................................
................................................................................................................................................. SAE
75W-85
Fluid - M/T: Testing and Inspection
GEAR OIL LEVEL INSPECTION
NOTE: Inspect each component for evidence of leakage. Check the gear oil and the level by
removing the filler plug. If the oil is contaminated, it is necessary to replace it with new oil.
1. Remove oil filler plug and check oil level with finger. 2. Oil level must be up to fill hole. If it is
below hole, add oil until it runs out, then reinstall plug. 3. Replace the oil when the transaxle gear
oil is noticeably dirty, or if it is not of a suitable viscosity.
Fluid - M/T: Service and Repair
NOTE: Use HP Gear Oil SAE 75W/85W (API-GL 4)
1. With the vehicle parked on a level surface, remove the drain plug and drain the transaxle oil. 2.
Replace the gasket with a new one and install the drain plug.
Drain plug tightening torque: 30-35 Nm (22-25 ft. lbs.).
3. Add new oil through the filler plug, filling to a level 5-9mm (0.2-0.4 inch) below the plug opening.
Transaxle oil total capacity: 2.15 liters (2.27 US qts.). Filler plug tightening torque: 30-35 Nm (22-25
ft. lbs.).
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Gear, M/T > Synchronizer
Hub, M/T > Component Information > Diagrams
Hub, M/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7915
Synchronizer Hub: Service and Repair
FIFTH SPEED SYNCHRONIZER ASSEMBLY
DISASSEMBLY
1. Refer to the components illustration for disassembly.
INSPECTION
Synchronizer Sleeve And Hub
1. Install the synchronizer sleeve on the hub and check that they slide smoothly. 2. Check that the
sleeve is free from damage at its inside front and rear ends. 3. Check for wear of the hub front end
(surface in contact with the fifth speed gear).
Synchronizer Key And Spring
deformation and breakage.
ASSEMBLY
Hub, M/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7916
1. Assemble the synchronizer hub, sleeve and key noting their direction.
2. The synchronizer sleeve has teeth missing at six portions. Assemble the hub to the sleeve so
that the center tooth between the two missing teeth
will touch the synchronizer key.
3. Install the synchronizer spring so that its protrusion may be engaged in the groove of the
synchronizer key.
CAUTION: When installing the synchronizer springs, make sure that the front and rear ones are not
faced in same direction.
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Input Shaft, M/T >

Input Shaft Rear Bearing End Play M5BF1 Model Only 0 - 0.05 L mm
Front Bearing End Play M5AF3 Model Only 0.01 T - 0.12 L mm
Rear Bearing End Play M5AF3 Model Only 0.01 T - 0.09 L mm
Lock Nut 140 - 160 Nm

Input Shaft: Service and Repair
DISASSEMBLY
1. Remove the snap ring using special tool (09432-21201) or equivalent.

2. Remove the front bearing using special tool (09432-21300) or equivalent.
3. Remove the inner ring, spacer, fourth gear, needle bearing, bearing sleeve, synchronizer rings,
third and fourth gear synchronizer hub and sleeve
and third gear all together using special tool (09432-33200) or equivalent.
INSPECTION
Input Shaft
1. Check the outer surface of the input shaft where the needle bearing is mounted for damage or
Needle Bearing
Synchronizer Ring
1. Check the clutch gear teeth for damage. 2. Check the internal surface for damage, wear or
broken grooves.
Gears
1. Check the bevel gear and clutch gear teeth for damage or wear. 2. Check the gear cone for
ASSEMBLY
1. Install the synchronizer hub and sleeve so that they are positioned as shown in the figure.
touch synchronizer key.
3. Install the synchronizer spring so that the stepped portions will rest on the synchronizer keys.
direction.
4. Install the 3rd-4th gear synchronizer assembly on the input shaft using special tool
CAUTION: a. When installing the synchronizer assembly, make sure that the three synchronizer
keys are seated correctly in their respective grooves of the
synchronizer ring.
b. After installing the synchronizer assembly, check that 3rd gear rotates smoothly.
5. Install the bearing sleeve using special tool (09432-33300) or equivalent.
6. Install the needle bearing and the 4th gear on the input shaft. 7. Install the spacer and sleeve on
the input shaft, performing these steps.
a. Install the ball bearing using special tool (09432-33300) or equivalent. b. Install the snap ring.
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Output Shaft, M/T >
Output Shaft: Specifications
Output Shaft
Lock Nut ..............................................................................................................................................

........................................................ 140 - 160 Nm
M5BF1 Transaxle
Output Shaft Rear Bearing End Play

............................................................................................................................................. 0.10 T -
0.15 T mm
M5AF3 Transaxle
Output Shaft Rear Bearing End Play

............................................................................................................................................. 0.05 T -
0.10 T mm

Output Shaft: Service and Repair
DISASSEMBLY
1. Remove the taper roller bearing, fourth output gear, spacer, third output gear, second speed
gear assembly with second gear sleeve and needle
roller bearing, first speed gear assembly with needle roller bearing and spacer and steel ball, using
special tool (09432-33200) or equivalent.
2. Remove the rear taper roller bearing using special tool (09432-21400) or equivalent.

INSPECTION
Output Shaft
1. Check the outer surface of the output shaft where the needle bearing is mounted for damage or
Needle Bearing
Synchronizer Ring
1. Check the clutch gear teeth for damage. 2. Check the internal surface for damage,wear or
broken grooves.

Gears
1. Check the helical gear and clutch gear teeth for damage or wear. 2. Check the gear cone for
ASSEMBLY
1. Install the first speed gear assembly with needle bearing.

2. Combine the first-second gear synchronizer hub and sleeve.
touch the synchronizer key.
4. Install the synchronizer spring so that its protrusion may be engaged in the groove of the
synchronizer keys.
direction.
5. Install the first-second speed gear synchronizer assembly over the output shaft using special tool
CAUTION: -
When installing the synchronizer assembly, make sure that the three synchronizer keys are seated
correctly in their respective groove on the synchronizer ring.
- After installation of the synchronizer assembly, check that first gear rotates smoothly.
6. Install the second speed gear with needle roller bearing and bearing sleeve using special tool
7. Install the third speed gear and spacer.
8. Install the fourth speed gear.
9. Install the bearing using special tool (09432-22000) or equivalent.
10. Install the rear side taper roller bearing using special tool (09432- 22000) or equivalent.
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, M/T >
System Information > Service and Repair
Seals and Gaskets: Service and Repair
REPLACEMENT
1. Disconnect the drive shaft from the transaxle.
2. Using a flat-tip screwdriver, remove the oil seal.
3. Using special tool (09431-21200) or equivalent, tap the drive shaft oil seal into the transaxle. 4.
Apply a coating of gear oil to the lip of the oil seal.
Transaxle gear oil: Hypoid gear oil, SAE 75W/85W conforming to API GL-4 or higher.
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Fork, M/T >
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Shifter M/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Replacement
Shifter M/T: Service and Repair Replacement
REMOVAL
1. Remove the console assembly. 2. Remove the cotter pins and clips (shift lever side). 3. Remove
the shift lever assembly.
4. Remove the retainer and the bolts.

Information > Service and Repair > Replacement > Page 7946
5. Remove the cotter pins and clips (transaxle side). 6. Remove the shift cable and select cable.
INSPECTION
1. Check the select cable for proper operation and damage. 2. Check the shift cable for proper
operation and damage. 3. Check the boot for damage. 4. Check each bushing for wear, abrasion,
sticking, restricted movement or damage. 5. Check for a weak or damaged spring.
INSTALLATION
1. Install the shift lever assembly. 2. Installation of shift lever and select cable.
a. Move the transaxle select lever and shift lever to the neutral position.
b. When connecting the select cable to lever (B), adjust the select cable's length so that lever (B) is
at the neutral position. c. The flange side of the resin bushing at the select cable end should be at
the lever (B) end surface. d. he flange side of the resin bushing at the shift cable end should be at
the shift lever's cotter pin hole.
e. After connecting the shift cable, check that the dimensions (A) and (B) shown in the illustration
are equal. f.
If the dimensions (A) and (B) are not equal, adjust the regulator of shift cable.
g. Move the shift lever to each position and verify that the shifting is smooth.
3. Install the retainer and bolts.

Shifter M/T: Service and Repair Overhaul
DISASSEMBLY
1. Refer to the illustration for disassembly.
INSPECTION
1. Check the bushing for wear or damage. 2. Check the return spring for damage or deterioration.
ASSEMBLY
1. Apply multipurpose grease to the sliding part of the bushings as shown in the illustration. 2.
Assembly is reverse of the disassembly.
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, M/T > Shift
Cable, M/T > Component Information > Service and Repair
Shift Cable: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Remove the console assembly. 2. Remove the cotter pins and clips (shift lever side). 3. Remove
the shift lever assembly.
4. Remove the retainer and the bolts.
5. Remove the cotter pins and clips (transaxle side).

Cable, M/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 7953
6. Remove the shift cable and select cable.
INSPECTION
1. Check the select cable for proper operation and damage. 2. Check the shift cable for proper
operation and damage. 3. Check the boot for damage. 4. Check each bushing for wear, abrasion,
sticking, restricted movement or damage. 5. Check for a weak or damaged spring.
INSTALLATION
1. Install the shift lever assembly. 2. Installation of shift lever and select cable.
a. Move the transaxle select lever and shift lever to the neutral position.
b. When connecting the select cable to lever (B), adjust the select cable's length so that lever (B) is
at the neutral position. c. The flange side of the resin bushing at the select cable end should be at
the lever (B) end surface. d. he flange side of the resin bushing at the shift cable end should be at
the shift lever's cotter pin hole.
e. After connecting the shift cable, check that the dimensions (A) and (B) shown in the illustration
are equal. f.
If the dimensions (A) and (B) are not equal, adjust the regulator of shift cable.
g. Move the shift lever to each position and verify that the shifting is smooth.
3. Install the retainer and bolts.

Rail, M/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > M/T - Control Shaft Assembly Procedure
Shift Rail: Technical Service Bulletins M/T - Control Shaft Assembly Procedure
Number 98-40-011
Date 10-1998
Subject CONTROL SHAFT ASSEMBLY PROCEDURE MANUAL TRANSAXLE
DESCRIPTION
The purpose of this bulletin is to provide you an assembly procedure for the control shaft on all
Accent M5AF3 Manual Transaxle.
The photo shows the individual control shaft components required for the assembly. They are
placed in appropriate order for assembly.
PROCEDURE
1. Insert the rubber boot onto the control shaft.
2. Insert the control shaft with the boot into the clutch housing hole.
NOTE
Insert the control shaft partially into the clutch housing to allow room for the remaining components
to be installed.
Rail, M/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > M/T - Control Shaft Assembly Procedure > Page 7958
3. Insert the neutral return spring (B) onto the control shaft.
NOTE
Larger diameter of the neutral return spring (B) should be toward the side wall of the clutch housing
as shown above.
4. Slide the control finger inside the interlock plate, and then slide the assembly onto the control
shaft.
NOTE
The lug on the control finger should point in the same direction as the control shaft lever.
5. Insert the reverse plate followed by the stopper plate aligned as shown in the two photos.
6. Install the neutral return spring (A) as shown in the photo.
7. Push the control shaft assembly into the clutch housing support hole.
8. Push the lock pin through the control finger and control shaft.
9. Complete the transaxle assembly following the steps outlined in the Shop Manual.
Shift Rail: Technical Service Bulletins M/T - Shift Rail Mounting Design Change
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 97-40-016
Date: MAY, 1997

Model: 1997 ACCENT
Subject: SHIFT RAIL MOUNTING DESIGN CHANGE
DESCRIPTION:
The manual transaxle shift rail mounting system has been changed in the 1997 Accent. Bushings
have been added on the first-second and the third-fourth shift rail support system to improve the
shift feel.
PARTS INFORMATION:
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Speedometer Gear, M/T >
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Speedometer Gear, M/T >
Speedometer Gear, M/T: Service and Repair
DISASSEMBLY
1. Refer to the illustration for disassembly.
ASSEMBLY
1. Apply gear oil sparingly to the speedometer driven gear shaft and insert the shaft.
CAUTION: Insert carefully the speedometer driven gear into the clutch housing not to disassemble
the speedometer driven gear shaft.
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays
and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: >
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 05-40-016
Date: OCTOBER, 2005
Model: ALL
DESCRIPTION:
shown below:
REPAIR PROCEDURE:
NOTE:


^ Vehicle
Go to Step 12.
NOTE:

Number 03-40-022
Date 12-2003

P0717 & P0722
DESCRIPTION:

NOTE
REPAIR PROCEDURE:

PARTS INFORMATION
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 02-40-010
Date: 03-2002

ENGAGEMENT
DESCRIPTION:
shown below:
REPAIR PROCEDURE:
shop manual.

^ Select F1 "GRPH".
NOTE
NOTE


Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 00-40-009
Date: AUGUST, 2000
Model: ALL
symptoms:
^ Erratic shift
^ MIL illuminated
NOTE:
REPAIR PROCEDURE:
NOTE:
Step 6:
cable.
NOTE:
NOTE:
All models:
NOTE:


NOTE:

SONATA:
NOTE:
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 00-40-010
Date: AUGUST, 2000
Model: ALL
^ MIL illuminated
symptoms:
^ MIL illuminated
Procedure.
REPAIR PROCEDURE:
^ No DTC-gotostep4
PARTS INFORMATION:
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 00-40-011
Date: AUGUST, 2000

^ Harsh 1-2 shift

TCM):
Note 1:
Note 2:
SERVICE PROCEDURE:
Number 00-36-006
Date MARCH, 2000
DESCRIPTION:
^ Unstable idle
REPAIR INFORMATION:


PARTS INFORMATION

Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 99-40-017
DESCRIPTION:
NOTE:
SERVICE PROCEDURE:
column).

module.
PARTS INFORMATION:
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 99-40-002
Date MARCH, 1999

(below 60°C, 140°F).
REPAIR PROCEDURE:
adjust screw.
PARTS INFORMATION:
98-40-013 > Oct > 98 > A/T - Poor 2nd to 1st Gear Low Speed Downshift
Number 98-40-013
Date 10-1998
DESCRIPTION
SERVICE PROCEDURE

98-40-013 > Oct > 98 > A/T - Poor 2nd to 1st Gear Low Speed Downshift > Page 8031
PARTS INFORMATION
97-40-027-1 > Dec > 97 > A/T - Poor Downshifts/Shift Flare
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 97-40-027-1
Model: 1997 TIBURON
IMPROVEMENT
DESCRIPTION:
PARTS INFORMATION:
97-40-028 > Sep > 97 > A/T - Harsh Engagement Shock
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 97-40-028
Model: ALL
DESCRIPTION:
PARTS INFORMATION:
158-194°F).
97-40-028 > Sep > 97 > A/T - Harsh Engagement Shock > Page 8040
Sonata 2.0L).
replace the TCM.
transaxle.
97-40-022 > Aug > 97 > A/T - Reverse To Drive Engagement Shock
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 97-40-022
Date: AUGUST, 1997
Model: ALL
DESCRIPTION:
have this feature.
follows:
engagement shock.
SERVICE PROCEDURE:
Sonata: 96-40-003-1).
PARTS INFORMATION
and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service
Procedure
MODEL: All
DESCRIPTION:
as shown below.
VEHICLES AFFECTED:
^ All

HI-SCAN PROCEDURE:
^ Select vehicle
press "ENTER"

Page 8050
NOTE:
upshifts.

Page 8051
NOTE:

Values

HI-SCAN PROCEDURE:
^ Select vehicle

Page 8056
NOTE:
upshifts.
Page 8057

NOTE:
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 06-40-005
Date: MARCH, 2006
Model: ALL

VALUES
DESCRIPTION:

as shown below.
HI-SCAN PROCEDURE:
^ Select vehicle
NOTE:
completed as shown.
occur.
NOTE:

Bulletins for Control Module: > 05-40-016 > Oct > 05 > A/T - No Movement in 'DRIVE' or 'REVERSE'
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 05-40-016
Date: OCTOBER, 2005
Model: ALL
DESCRIPTION:
shown below:
REPAIR PROCEDURE:
NOTE:


^ Vehicle
Go to Step 12.
NOTE:

Bulletins for Control Module: > 03-40-022 > Dec > 03 > A/T - Fail Safe Mode/Erratic/Hard Shifting/DTC's Set
Set
Number 03-40-022
Date 12-2003

P0717 & P0722
DESCRIPTION:

NOTE
REPAIR PROCEDURE:

PARTS INFORMATION

P0731/P0732/P0733/P0734/P0735/P0736
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 03-40-005
Date: APRIL, 2003
Model: ALL

P0734, P0735, P0736
DESCRIPTION:
REPAIR PROCEDURE:

Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 03-40-003
Model: ALL
DESCRIPTION:
NOTE:
shown below.
NOTE:
Temp. Sensor".
NOTE:
Bulletins for Control Module: > 02-40-010 > Mar > 02 > A/T - Harsh/Delayed Gear Engagement
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 02-40-010
Date: 03-2002

ENGAGEMENT
DESCRIPTION:
shown below:
REPAIR PROCEDURE:
shop manual.

^ Select F1 "GRPH".
NOTE
NOTE


Group TRANSAXLE
Number 00-40-012
Model ALL
DESCRIPTION:
NOTE:

Bulletins for Control Module: > 00-40-009 > Aug > 00 > A/T - Shift Solenoid Incorrect Operation/MIL ON
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 00-40-009
Date: AUGUST, 2000
Model: ALL
symptoms:
^ Erratic shift
^ MIL illuminated
NOTE:
REPAIR PROCEDURE:
NOTE:
Step 6:
cable.
NOTE:
NOTE:
All models:
NOTE:


NOTE:

SONATA:
NOTE:
Bulletins for Control Module: > 00-40-010 > Aug > 00 > A/T - MIL ON DTCs P0712/P0713 Set
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 00-40-010
Date: AUGUST, 2000
Model: ALL
^ MIL illuminated
symptoms:
^ MIL illuminated
Procedure.
REPAIR PROCEDURE:
^ No DTC-gotostep4
Bulletins for Control Module: > 00-40-010 > Aug > 00 > A/T - MIL ON DTCs P0712/P0713 Set > Page 8109
PARTS INFORMATION:
Bulletins for Control Module: > 00-40-011 > Aug > 00 > A/T - Harsh Shifts, DTCs P0717/P0722 Set
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 00-40-011
Date: AUGUST, 2000

^ Harsh 1-2 shift

TCM):
Note 1:
Note 2:
SERVICE PROCEDURE:
Group: GENERAL
Number: 00-00-001
Date: JULY, 2000
Model: ALL
DESCRIPTION
PROCEDURE:
fixes.
SOL card.
Note:
cards.
utility.
INFO card
COM2.
software cards.
COM2.
software.
NOTE:
Bulletins for Control Module: > 00-36-006 > Mar > 00 > TPS - Driveability Concerns
Number 00-36-006
Date MARCH, 2000
DESCRIPTION:
^ Unstable idle
REPAIR INFORMATION:


Bulletins for Control Module: > 00-36-006 > Mar > 00 > TPS - Driveability Concerns > Page 8130
PARTS INFORMATION

Bulletins for Control Module: > 99-40-017 > Dec > 99 > A/T - Shift Lever Will Not Shift Out Of Park
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 99-40-017
DESCRIPTION:
NOTE:
SERVICE PROCEDURE:
column).

module.
PARTS INFORMATION:
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 99-40-004
Date: APRIL, 1999
DESCRIPTION:
SERVICE PROCEDURE:

PARTS INFORMATION
WARRANTY
Bulletins for Control Module: > 99-40-002 > Mar > 99 > A/T - 2 to 3 Gear Upshift Flare
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 99-40-002
Date MARCH, 1999

(below 60°C, 140°F).
REPAIR PROCEDURE:
adjust screw.
PARTS INFORMATION:
Bulletins for Control Module: > 99-40-002 > Mar > 99 > A/T - 2 to 3 Gear Upshift Flare > Page 8147
Bulletins for Control Module: > 98-40-013 > Oct > 98 > A/T - Poor 2nd to 1st Gear Low Speed Downshift
Number 98-40-013
Date 10-1998
DESCRIPTION
SERVICE PROCEDURE

Bulletins for Control Module: > 98-40-013 > Oct > 98 > A/T - Poor 2nd to 1st Gear Low Speed Downshift > Page 8152
PARTS INFORMATION
Bulletins for Control Module: > 97-40-027-1 > Dec > 97 > A/T - Poor Downshifts/Shift Flare
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 97-40-027-1
Model: 1997 TIBURON
IMPROVEMENT
DESCRIPTION:
PARTS INFORMATION:
Bulletins for Control Module: > 97-40-028 > Sep > 97 > A/T - Harsh Engagement Shock
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 97-40-028
Model: ALL
DESCRIPTION:
PARTS INFORMATION:
158-194°F).
Bulletins for Control Module: > 97-40-028 > Sep > 97 > A/T - Harsh Engagement Shock > Page 8161
Sonata 2.0L).
replace the TCM.
transaxle.
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 97-40-030
Model: ALL
DESCRIPTION:
compensate for:
SERVICE PROCEDURE:
is completed.)
Bulletins for Control Module: > 97-40-022 > Aug > 97 > A/T - Reverse To Drive Engagement Shock
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 97-40-022
Date: AUGUST, 1997
Model: ALL
DESCRIPTION:
have this feature.
follows:
engagement shock.
SERVICE PROCEDURE:
Sonata: 96-40-003-1).
PARTS INFORMATION
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 97-40-001-1
Date: JULY, 1997
Model: ALL
production dates.
DESCRIPTION:
ANALYSIS:
2. TPS above 1.2 V

rpm for 10 minutes
1997 Sonata 2.0L & 3.0L July 1, 1996

1997 Tiburon 1.8L & 2.0L July 1, 1996
PARTS INFORMATION:
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 97-40-021
Date: JULY, 1997
Model: ALL
DESCRIPTION:

and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service
Procedure
MODEL: All
DESCRIPTION:
as shown below.
VEHICLES AFFECTED:
^ All

HI-SCAN PROCEDURE:
^ Select vehicle
press "ENTER"

Page 8184
NOTE:
upshifts.

Page 8185
NOTE:

Values

HI-SCAN PROCEDURE:
^ Select vehicle

Page 8190
NOTE:
upshifts.
Page 8191

NOTE:
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 06-40-005
Date: MARCH, 2006
Model: ALL

VALUES
DESCRIPTION:

as shown below.
HI-SCAN PROCEDURE:
^ Select vehicle
NOTE:
completed as shown.
occur.
NOTE:


P0731/P0732/P0733/P0734/P0735/P0736
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 03-40-005
Date: APRIL, 2003
Model: ALL

P0734, P0735, P0736
DESCRIPTION:
REPAIR PROCEDURE:

Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 03-40-003
Model: ALL
DESCRIPTION:
NOTE:
shown below.
NOTE:
Temp. Sensor".
NOTE:
Group TRANSAXLE
Number 00-40-012
Model ALL
DESCRIPTION:
NOTE:

Group: GENERAL
Number: 00-00-001
Date: JULY, 2000
Model: ALL
DESCRIPTION
PROCEDURE:
fixes.
SOL card.
Note:
cards.
utility.
INFO card
COM2.
software cards.
COM2.
software.
NOTE:
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 99-40-004
Date: APRIL, 1999
DESCRIPTION:
SERVICE PROCEDURE:

PARTS INFORMATION
WARRANTY
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 97-40-030
Model: ALL
DESCRIPTION:
compensate for:
SERVICE PROCEDURE:
is completed.)
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 97-40-001-1
Date: JULY, 1997
Model: ALL
production dates.
DESCRIPTION:
ANALYSIS:
2. TPS above 1.2 V

rpm for 10 minutes
1997 Sonata 2.0L & 3.0L July 1, 1996

1997 Tiburon 1.8L & 2.0L July 1, 1996
PARTS INFORMATION:
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 97-40-021
Date: JULY, 1997
Model: ALL
DESCRIPTION:

and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 8240
Rated Voltage 12 V
Rated Load min. 1A
At Solenoid Load.

Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins >
Engine/Transmission Controls - Service Manual Revisions

Manual Revisions
Number 97-40-004
Date 02-1997

DESCRIPTION:
are shown.
Sensors and Switches - A/T > Throttle Position Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection
INSPECTION

Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-AT-013 > Jul > 09 > A/T - MIL ON/DTC's P0705/P0707/P0708/No Start In P/N
Group TRANSAXLE
Number 09-AT-013
Date JULY, 2009

P0707, P0708
DESCRIPTION:
range switch.
PARTS INFORMATION
8258
Service Procedure
c below.
8259
8260

8261
Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 05-40-016 > Oct > 05 > A/T - No Movement in 'DRIVE' or 'REVERSE'

'REVERSE'
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 05-40-016
Date: OCTOBER, 2005
Model: ALL
DESCRIPTION:
shown below:
REPAIR PROCEDURE:
NOTE:


^ Vehicle
Go to Step 12.
NOTE:

Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 99-40-017 > Dec > 99 > A/T - Shift Lever Will Not Shift Out Of Park
Park
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 99-40-017
DESCRIPTION:
NOTE:
SERVICE PROCEDURE:
column).

module.
PARTS INFORMATION:
ON/DTC's P0705/P0707/P0708/No Start In P/N
Group TRANSAXLE
Number 09-AT-013
Date JULY, 2009

P0707, P0708
DESCRIPTION:
range switch.
PARTS INFORMATION
Service Procedure
c below.

Controls - Neutral Position Switch Adaptive Relearn

Press "ENTER."



Drive/Reverse
MODEL: ALL
DESCRIPTION:
shown below:
REPAIR PROCEDURE:
NOTE:

(10-12 Nm, 100-120 kg.cm)
(12-13 Nm, 120-130 kg.cm)

^ Vehicle
inserted.
Go to Step 12.
inserted.
NOTE:
replace the TCM.


Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 05-40-016
Date: OCTOBER, 2005
Model: ALL
DESCRIPTION:
shown below:
REPAIR PROCEDURE:
NOTE:


^ Vehicle
Go to Step 12.
NOTE:

Lever Will Not Shift Out Of Park
Out Of Park
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 99-40-017
DESCRIPTION:
NOTE:
SERVICE PROCEDURE:
column).

module.
PARTS INFORMATION:
- Neutral Position Switch Adaptive Relearn

Press "ENTER."



Drive/Reverse
MODEL: ALL
DESCRIPTION:
shown below:
REPAIR PROCEDURE:
NOTE:

(10-12 Nm, 100-120 kg.cm)
(12-13 Nm, 120-130 kg.cm)

^ Vehicle
inserted.
Go to Step 12.
inserted.
NOTE:
replace the TCM.

Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins >
Customer Interest: > 03-40-022 > Dec > 03 > A/T - Fail Safe Mode/Erratic/Hard Shifting/DTC's Set
Set
Number 03-40-022
Date 12-2003

P0717 & P0722
DESCRIPTION:

NOTE
REPAIR PROCEDURE:

PARTS INFORMATION
Customer Interest: > 00-40-011 > Aug > 00 > A/T - Harsh Shifts, DTCs P0717/P0722 Set
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 00-40-011
Date: AUGUST, 2000

^ Harsh 1-2 shift

TCM):
Note 1:
Note 2:
SERVICE PROCEDURE:
Customer Interest: > 00-40-011 > Aug > 00 > A/T - Harsh Shifts, DTCs P0717/P0722 Set > Page 8345
Customer Interest: > 00-40-011 > Aug > 00 > A/T - Harsh Shifts, DTCs P0717/P0722 Set > Page 8346
Customer Interest: > 98-40-002 > Apr > 98 > A/T - Intermittent Delayed, Erratic, Harsh Shifting
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 98-40-002
Date: APRIL, 1998
Model: ALL
DESCRIPTION:
^ Harsh 1-2 shift
(TCM):
Note 1:
codes.
Note 2:
PG-B.

SERVICE PROCEDURE:

Customer Interest: > 98-40-002 > Apr > 98 > A/T - Intermittent Delayed, Erratic, Harsh Shifting > Page 8351
All Technical Service Bulletins for Transmission Speed Sensor: > 03-40-022 > Dec > 03 > A/T - Fail Safe Mode/Erratic/Hard
Shifting/DTC's Set
Shifting/DTC's Set
Number 03-40-022
Date 12-2003

P0717 & P0722
DESCRIPTION:

NOTE
REPAIR PROCEDURE:

PARTS INFORMATION
All Technical Service Bulletins for Transmission Speed Sensor: > 00-40-011 > Aug > 00 > A/T - Harsh Shifts, DTCs
P0717/P0722 Set
P0717/P0722 Set
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 00-40-011
Date: AUGUST, 2000

^ Harsh 1-2 shift

TCM):
Note 1:
Note 2:
SERVICE PROCEDURE:
P0717/P0722 Set > Page 8363
P0717/P0722 Set > Page 8364
All Technical Service Bulletins for Transmission Speed Sensor: > 98-40-002 > Apr > 98 > A/T - Intermittent Delayed, Erratic,
Harsh Shifting
Harsh Shifting
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 98-40-002
Date: APRIL, 1998
Model: ALL
DESCRIPTION:
^ Harsh 1-2 shift
(TCM):
Note 1:
codes.
Note 2:
PG-B.

SERVICE PROCEDURE:

All Technical Service Bulletins for Transmission Speed Sensor: > 98-40-002 > Apr > 98 > A/T - Intermittent Delayed, Erratic,
Harsh Shifting > Page 8369
All Technical Service Bulletins for Transmission Speed Sensor: > 97-40-025-1 > Aug > 97 > A/T - Driveability
Concerns/DTC's Set/MIL ON
Set/MIL ON
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 97-40-025-1
Date: August, 1997
Model: ALL
DESCRIPTION:
^ Harsh 1-2 shift
Note 1:
*Fail-safe code
Note 2:
(DLC).
Concerns/DTC's Set/MIL ON > Page 8374
SERVICE PROCEDURE:
B) Test Procedure:
Concerns/DTC's Set/MIL ON > Page 8375
shielded wiring.

All Other Service Bulletins for Transmission Speed Sensor: > 97-40-025-1 > Aug > 97 > A/T - Driveability Concerns/DTC's
Set/MIL ON
Set/MIL ON
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 97-40-025-1
Date: August, 1997
Model: ALL
DESCRIPTION:
^ Harsh 1-2 shift
Note 1:
*Fail-safe code
Note 2:
(DLC).
Set/MIL ON > Page 8381
SERVICE PROCEDURE:
B) Test Procedure:
Set/MIL ON > Page 8382
shielded wiring.

Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Customer Interest for Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch: > 04-40-016 > Sep > 04 > A/T - MIL ON/Shift

Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 04-40-016
ELANTRA
DESCRIPTION:
REPAIR PROCEDURE.
necessary.
sensor.
PARTS INFORMATION:
Bulletins > Customer Interest for Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch: > 03-40-015 > Aug > 03 > A/T - 2nd - 3rd Gear
Shift Flare/Shudder
Flare/Shudder
Group TRANSAXLE
Number 03-40-015
Date AUGUST, 2003
Model ALL
DESCRIPTION:
1. CHECK ATF LEVEL:
70-100°C).

Bulletins > Customer Interest for Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch: > 03-40-015 > Aug > 03 > A/T - 2nd - 3rd Gear
Shift Flare/Shudder > Page 8397

Bulletins > Customer Interest for Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch: > 02-40-007 > Feb > 02 > A/T - Torque

Malfunctions
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 02-40-007
Model: ALL
DESCRIPTION:
shown below:
REPAIR PROCEDURE:
shown.
the condition:
NOTE:
Bulletins > Customer Interest for Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch: > 00-40-010 > Aug > 00 > A/T - MIL ON DTCs
P0712/P0713 Set
Set
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 00-40-010
Date: AUGUST, 2000
Model: ALL
^ MIL illuminated
symptoms:
^ MIL illuminated
Procedure.
REPAIR PROCEDURE:
^ No DTC-gotostep4
Bulletins > Customer Interest for Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch: > 00-40-010 > Aug > 00 > A/T - MIL ON DTCs
P0712/P0713 Set > Page 8408
PARTS INFORMATION:
Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch: > 04-40-016 > Sep > 04 > A/T -
MIL ON/Shift Flare/Harsh Engagement/DTC's Set
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 04-40-016
ELANTRA
DESCRIPTION:
REPAIR PROCEDURE.
necessary.
MIL ON/Shift Flare/Harsh Engagement/DTC's Set > Page 8414
sensor.
MIL ON/Shift Flare/Harsh Engagement/DTC's Set > Page 8415
PARTS INFORMATION:
Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch: > 03-40-015 > Aug > 03 > A/T -
2nd - 3rd Gear Shift Flare/Shudder
Shift Flare/Shudder
Group TRANSAXLE
Number 03-40-015
Date AUGUST, 2003
Model ALL
DESCRIPTION:
1. CHECK ATF LEVEL:
70-100°C).

2nd - 3rd Gear Shift Flare/Shudder > Page 8420

Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch: > 02-40-007 > Feb > 02 > A/T -
Torque Converter Clutch Malfunctions
Clutch Malfunctions
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 02-40-007
Model: ALL
DESCRIPTION:
shown below:
REPAIR PROCEDURE:
Torque Converter Clutch Malfunctions > Page 8425
shown.
Torque Converter Clutch Malfunctions > Page 8426
the condition:
NOTE:
MIL ON DTCs P0712/P0713 Set
P0712/P0713 Set
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 00-40-010
Date: AUGUST, 2000
Model: ALL
^ MIL illuminated
symptoms:
^ MIL illuminated
Procedure.
REPAIR PROCEDURE:
^ No DTC-gotostep4
MIL ON DTCs P0712/P0713 Set > Page 8431
PARTS INFORMATION:
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids -
Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component
INSPECTION
ON/DTC's Set
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 03-40-007-1
Date: MARCH 2004
P0745, P0747, P0748, P0750, P0752, P0753, P0755, P0757, P0758, P0760, P0765
DESCRIPTION:
^ MIL illuminated
NOTE:
Repair Procedure
cable.
NOTE:
NOTE:
P0745, P0747, P0748 or P0765).
NOTE:
NOTE:

connector.
shown.
PARTS INFORMATION
DTC INFORMATION:
NOTE:
Operation/MIL ON
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 00-40-009
Date: AUGUST, 2000
Model: ALL
symptoms:
^ Erratic shift
^ MIL illuminated
NOTE:
REPAIR PROCEDURE:
NOTE:
Step 6:
cable.
NOTE:
NOTE:
All models:
NOTE:


NOTE:

SONATA:
NOTE:
Park
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 99-40-017
DESCRIPTION:
NOTE:
SERVICE PROCEDURE:
column).

Park > Page 8461
Park > Page 8462
module.
PARTS INFORMATION:
Park > Page 8463
Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Shift Solenoid: > 99-40-002 > Mar > 99 > A/T - 2 to 3 Gear Upshift Flare
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 99-40-002
Date MARCH, 1999

(below 60°C, 140°F).
REPAIR PROCEDURE:
adjust screw.
PARTS INFORMATION:
Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Shift Solenoid: > 99-40-002 > Mar > 99 > A/T - 2 to 3 Gear Upshift Flare > Page
8468
Shifts/MIL ON/DTC's Set
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 03-40-007-1
Date: MARCH 2004
P0745, P0747, P0748, P0750, P0752, P0753, P0755, P0757, P0758, P0760, P0765
DESCRIPTION:
^ MIL illuminated
NOTE:
Repair Procedure
cable.
NOTE:
NOTE:
P0745, P0747, P0748 or P0765).
NOTE:
NOTE:

connector.
shown.
PARTS INFORMATION
DTC INFORMATION:
NOTE:
Operation/MIL ON
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 00-40-009
Date: AUGUST, 2000
Model: ALL
symptoms:
^ Erratic shift
^ MIL illuminated
NOTE:
REPAIR PROCEDURE:
NOTE:
Step 6:
cable.
NOTE:
NOTE:
All models:
NOTE:


NOTE:

SONATA:
NOTE:
Shift Out Of Park
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 99-40-017
DESCRIPTION:
NOTE:
SERVICE PROCEDURE:
column).

module.
PARTS INFORMATION:
Flare
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 99-40-002
Date MARCH, 1999

(below 60°C, 140°F).
REPAIR PROCEDURE:
adjust screw.
PARTS INFORMATION:
Flare > Page 8496
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules -
Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 05-40-016 > Oct > 05 > A/T - No Movement in 'DRIVE' or 'REVERSE'
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 05-40-016
Date: OCTOBER, 2005
Model: ALL
DESCRIPTION:
shown below:
REPAIR PROCEDURE:
NOTE:


^ Vehicle
Go to Step 12.
NOTE:

Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 03-40-022 > Dec > 03 > A/T - Fail Safe Mode/Erratic/Hard Shifting/DTC's Set
Number 03-40-022
Date 12-2003

P0717 & P0722
DESCRIPTION:

NOTE
REPAIR PROCEDURE:
Page 8515

Page 8516
PARTS INFORMATION
Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 02-40-010 > Mar > 02 > A/T - Harsh/Delayed Gear Engagement
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 02-40-010
Date: 03-2002

ENGAGEMENT
DESCRIPTION:
shown below:
REPAIR PROCEDURE:
shop manual.

^ Select F1 "GRPH".
NOTE
NOTE


Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 00-40-009 > Aug > 00 > A/T - Shift Solenoid Incorrect Operation/MIL ON
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 00-40-009
Date: AUGUST, 2000
Model: ALL
symptoms:
^ Erratic shift
^ MIL illuminated
NOTE:
REPAIR PROCEDURE:
NOTE:
Step 6:
cable.
NOTE:
8527
NOTE:
All models:
NOTE:


8528
NOTE:

8529
SONATA:
NOTE:
Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 00-40-010 > Aug > 00 > A/T - MIL ON DTCs P0712/P0713 Set
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 00-40-010
Date: AUGUST, 2000
Model: ALL
^ MIL illuminated
symptoms:
^ MIL illuminated
Procedure.
REPAIR PROCEDURE:
^ No DTC-gotostep4
Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 00-40-010 > Aug > 00 > A/T - MIL ON DTCs P0712/P0713 Set > Page 8534
PARTS INFORMATION:
Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 00-40-011 > Aug > 00 > A/T - Harsh Shifts, DTCs P0717/P0722 Set
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 00-40-011
Date: AUGUST, 2000

^ Harsh 1-2 shift

TCM):
Note 1:
Note 2:
SERVICE PROCEDURE:
Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 00-36-006 > Mar > 00 > TPS - Driveability Concerns
Number 00-36-006
Date MARCH, 2000
DESCRIPTION:
^ Unstable idle
REPAIR INFORMATION:


Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 00-36-006 > Mar > 00 > TPS - Driveability Concerns > Page 8545
PARTS INFORMATION

Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 99-40-017 > Dec > 99 > A/T - Shift Lever Will Not Shift Out Of Park
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 99-40-017
DESCRIPTION:
NOTE:
SERVICE PROCEDURE:
column).

module.
PARTS INFORMATION:
Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 99-40-002 > Mar > 99 > A/T - 2 to 3 Gear Upshift Flare
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 99-40-002
Date MARCH, 1999

(below 60°C, 140°F).
REPAIR PROCEDURE:
adjust screw.
PARTS INFORMATION:
Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 99-40-002 > Mar > 99 > A/T - 2 to 3 Gear Upshift Flare > Page 8557
Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 98-40-013 > Oct > 98 > A/T - Poor 2nd to 1st Gear Low Speed Downshift
Number 98-40-013
Date 10-1998
DESCRIPTION
SERVICE PROCEDURE

Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 98-40-013 > Oct > 98 > A/T - Poor 2nd to 1st Gear Low Speed Downshift > Page
8562
PARTS INFORMATION
Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 97-40-027-1 > Dec > 97 > A/T - Poor Downshifts/Shift Flare
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 97-40-027-1
Model: 1997 TIBURON
IMPROVEMENT
DESCRIPTION:
PARTS INFORMATION:
Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 97-40-028 > Sep > 97 > A/T - Harsh Engagement Shock
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 97-40-028
Model: ALL
DESCRIPTION:
PARTS INFORMATION:
158-194°F).
Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 97-40-028 > Sep > 97 > A/T - Harsh Engagement Shock > Page 8571
Sonata 2.0L).
replace the TCM.
transaxle.
Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 97-40-022 > Aug > 97 > A/T - Reverse To Drive Engagement Shock
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 97-40-022
Date: AUGUST, 1997
Model: ALL
DESCRIPTION:
have this feature.
follows:
engagement shock.
SERVICE PROCEDURE:
Sonata: 96-40-003-1).
PARTS INFORMATION
Procedure
MODEL: All
DESCRIPTION:
as shown below.
VEHICLES AFFECTED:
^ All

HI-SCAN PROCEDURE:
^ Select vehicle
press "ENTER"

NOTE:
upshifts.

NOTE:

Values

HI-SCAN PROCEDURE:
^ Select vehicle

NOTE:
upshifts.

NOTE:
Group: TRANSAXLE
Number: 06-40-005
Date: MARCH, 2006
Model: ALL

VALUES
DESCRIPTION:

as shown below.
HI-SCAN PROCEDURE:
^ Select vehicle
NOTE:
H

Hyundai Accent GL Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1495cc 1.5L SOHC MFI (1997) )

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

You might also like

Hyundai Accent GL Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1495cc 1.5L SOHC MFI (1997) )

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Hyundai Accent GL Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1495cc 1.5L SOHC MFI (1997) )

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Factory Workshop Manual

Engine and year

L4-1495cc 1.5L SOHC MFI (1997)

Please navigate through the PDF using the options

This manual was submitted by

Power Mirror Control Module: Testing and Inspection

ABS Main Relay: Diagrams

ABS relay box connector (M79, harness side)

Operating voltage range ......................................................................................................................

M71 ABS Control Module

ABS Control Module: Diagrams

1. Remove the right luggage side trim.

Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay: Locations

Blower Motor Relay: Locations

Blower Motor Relay: Testing and Inspection

BLOWER FAN RELAY

If continuity is not as specified, replace the relay.

Compressor Clutch Relay: Testing and Inspection

RELAYS AIR CONDITIONING RELAY AND CONDENSER FAN RELAY

AIR CONDITIONING RELAY-check for continuity

If continuity is not as specified, replace the relay

Condenser Fan Motor Relay: Locations

Condenser Fan Motor Relay: Testing and Inspection

RELAYS AIR CONDITIONING RELAY AND CONDENSER FAN RELAY

CONDENSER FAN RELAY-check for voltage

If continuity is not as specified, replace the relay

System Relay: Locations

Headlamp Relay: Locations

Headlamp Relay: Testing and Inspection

2. Check for continuity between the terminals.

Horn Relay: Locations

Tail Lamp Relay: Locations

Engine Compartment Relay/fuse Box

Relay Box: Application and ID Engine Compartment Relay/Fuse Box

Engine Compartment Relay And Fuse Box - Layout

Engine Compartment Relay And Fuse Box - Circuit

Relay Box: Testing and Inspection

RELAY BOX (ENGINE COMPARTMENT)

Date: AUGUST, 2000

Subject: AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE SOLENOID DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES

^ Transaxle held in 3rd gear Fail-Safe

^ Diagnostic Trouble Codes (see list in "DTC Information")

5. Measure voltage drop:

^ Start the engine and turn on the headlights.

More than 0.1 volts: Replace the negative battery cable

Less than 0.1 volts: Go to Step 6

Clean connector pins with a contact cleaner listed below, or equivalent:

^ NAPA Electronic Cleaner, P/N 765-1843

^ MOPAR MP-50 Electrical Contact Cleaner, P/N 04549626

^ Permatex Electrical Contact Cleaner, P/N 24379 or equivalent.

^ More than 1 ohm: Repair the harness

^ Less than 1 ohm: Go to Step 9.

9. Refer to the DTC recorded in Step 1. If the DTC was:

^ DTC P0740 or 49: Replace the transaxle.

TCM DTC - 1999-01 SONATA, 2001 ELANTRA, XG & SANTA FE

2000-01 ACCENT, 1999-00 ELANTRA (produced after 6/1/99):

TCM DTC - 1996-99 ELANTRA/TIBURON (PRIOR TO 6/1/99), & 1996-99 ACCENT:

Engine Control Module: Customer Interest TPS - Driveability Concerns